res A BS
F eee
Vers

y S
Nee

H

JOURNAL & PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

New Series, Vol. I.

1905.

SIRWILEAMJONES|

pa

—SSS— LABRARY
NEW YORK
MDCCXLVI=-MDCCXCINV BOTANICAL
——> oe GARDEN.

CALCUTTA :
PRINTED AT’ THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS, AND’ PUBLISHED BY THE
ASIATIC SOCIETY, 57, PARK STRDRT.
1906,

INDEXES

TO THE

SOCIETY’S JOURNAL AND PROCEEDINGS.

Vol. I, 1905.

FIRST INDEX FOR PHILOLOGY, HISTORY AND
ANTIQUITIES ; SECOND INDEX FOR
NATURAL SCIENCES WITH
ANTHROPOLOGY.

DIRECTIONS FOR BINDING.

The pages of the Journal should be bound first: they are
numbered consecutively at the top in the usual place from 1 te
274. The pages of the Proceedings should follow: they are
paged consecutively at the bottom from 1 to 56. Those who wish
may bind the list of members and the accounts thereafter. The
index, the pagination of which is immaterial, will come last. The
lists of books added to the Library are not intended for binding.

Plates i. and 11. to follow page 82.

Plate iii. to face page 120.

Plate iv. to face page 121.

Plate v. to face page 124.

Plate vi. to face page 200.

Plates vil., viii. and 1x. to follow page 258.
Plate ix. (map) to face page 230.

Plate xi. to follow page 260;

or all to be placed at the end of the volume.

ERRATA IN DIRECTIONS FOR BINDING.

Journal and Proceedings, Asiatic Society of Bengal, New Series, Vol. I,
1905.
Line 14, for page 258 read page 238.

>» 1S gy Wt ID gg IDEN) 2,

DATES OF PUBLICATION.

Journal, pp. 1-26 Proceedings, pp. 1-2 21st June 1905.
; 93 27-32 si ve 3-30 18th July ;
FP ms 33-98 3 » 31-34 12th August 5
én 99-136 : » 90-388 30th ys i
; ,, 137-158 A » 939-40 llth September ,,
an » 159-172 3 » 41-44 4th October ey
’ ” 173-176 2 ” 45-48 MS 2 ”
MA » 177-216 99 » 49-50 27th 30 90
‘ » 217-244 5 » 51-52 10th Jannary 1906.

245-274 ‘5 » 538-56 28th February i

ite
Bi Ohad

LIBRARY

NEW YORK
LIST OF PAPERS BOTANICAL
GARDEN,
IN THE JOURNAL.
Page.

ANNANDALE, Netson, D.Sc., C.M.Z.S.

Additions to the Collection of Oriental Snakes in the Indian
Museum.—Part If. Specimens from the Andamans and

Nicobars as Foy 173
Additions to the Collection BE Oriental lomatces in the Indian
Museum.—Part ITI. 4 oe Soden ONS}

Contributions to Oriental Herpetology II-IlT. Notes on the
Oriental Lizards in the Indian Museum, with a List of the
Species recorded from British India and Ceylon. —Parts I-IT. 81 ee

The Hydra of the Calcutta Tanks

Notes on an Indian Worm of the Genus Cheetogaster “A 7
Notes on the Species, External Characters and Habits of the
Dugong 000 ase 505 tle coo ae)
BEvVERIDGE, H., I.C.S.
The Emperor Babar Hee ip ABD PRA on bd 157i
The Nafaisu-l-Maasir ise eo 3 eo BS

Bourn, R., I.C.S.
Formation of New Castes ive Bohs a sai 256

Borer, Matcorm.

Harwigs of the Indian Museum, with Descriptions of New Species 27

CHAKRAVARTI, MonmonHAN, M.A., M.R.A.S.

Pavanaditam or Wind-Messenger, by Dhoyika, a court-poet of
Laksanasena, king of peneal, with an Appendix on the Sena
kings ee ot 308 eee a 41

DAHLMANN, FatHeEr, S.J.

Archzologisch Onderzoek op Java en Madura, I Beschrijving van
de ruine bij de Tesa Toempang, genaamd Tjandi Dijago.

Batavia, 1904 ... oc S00 94,
Das, Jamini Monan.
Note on the Kantabndiyas of Cuttack ... 200 noo, AS)
Das, Sagat CHANDRA, Rat Bananour, C.I.H.
The Monasteries of Tibet Se 106
A short history of the House of Phagdu, which ruled over Tibet
on the decline of Sakya till 1432, A.D. eee 2
Tibet, a dependency of Mongolia (1643. -1716 A.D. id ons N52
Tibet under her Last Kings ‘(1434-1642 A.D.) Apt ie al6D

Gage, Caprain A. T., I.M.5S.
Hedyotis sisaparensis, a hitherto undeacribed Indian species .,. 244

Page.
Gorpon, Rey. WH. M.

Notes concerning the People of Mungeli Tahsil, Bilaspore District 181

Grizrson, G. A., C.1.E.
Vidyapati Thakur ate ae ra Son 2 earls)

Hint, H.G., B.A.

The Colouring Principle of the flowers of Nyctanthes Arbor- tristis 102
The Composition of the oil from Bir Bahoti or the ‘“‘ Rains Insect ”’
(Torombidinom grandissimum) te a be 74

Laskar, GANGA Mowan, M.A.

Four new Copper-Plate Charters of the Somavamsi Kings of KoSala
(and Kataka ?) at be s Le 1

Linstow, DR. von.
Ascaris halicoris, Baird He He say eecos

Monony, E., 1I1.C.8.
Some remarks on the Geology of the Gangetic Plain ... .. 2380

Numismatic SUPPLEMENTS, V.-VI. ... ce 000 121, 261

SASTREE, YOoGHSA CHANDRA.
A note on Halayudha, the author of Brahmanasarbasva ae BS

SHASTRI, HARAPRASAD, M.A.

An Examination of the Nyaya-sutras oe te nop | AEN)
History of Nyaya-sastra from Japanese Sources ae este. ao le
Some Notes on the dates of Subandhu and Din-naga... ae 253

SILBERRAD, C, A., B.A., B.Sc., I.C.S.

Note on a Decomposition Product of a Peculiar Variety of Bundel-
khand Gneiss ... ce bee ei ee eeelos

VEDANTATIRTHA, VANAMALI.

Optimism in Ancient Nyaya 300 i eee (Dt
VIDYABHUSANA, SATISCHANDRA, M.A.

An Analysis of the Lankavatara Sitra ... 159
Anuruddha Thera—a learned Pali author of Southern India i in the

12th Century A.D. 500 he 00 a oY)
Dignaga and his Pramana-samucchaya _... ee, ila
Sarvajha-mitra—A Tantrika Buddhist author of Kagmira in the

8th Century A.D. 000 ae ve i S56

VREDENBURG, BW.
Occurrence of the genus Apus in Balichistén oe As 33

Wricut, NELSON.
See Numismatic Supplement.

INDEX

for Philology, History and Antiquities.

A

Abaling, pr. n., 152.

Abhidhammatthasamgaha, 99.

Abhisamaya, 160.

Abhyagata, 38.

Abul Faz], 137, 1388.

Abii Sa‘id Sultan, 137.

Adam’s Bridge, 43.

Adbhuta Sagara MS., 46.

Adisira, Raja, 36.

Afagq Begam, a wife of Babar, 137.

Ahmad I, 273.

Ahmad KhwAjagi Kasani, 137.

Ahmad Shah Bahadur, 130.

Ain-i-Akbarz, 45.

Aita, pr. n., 38.

Ajapala, King, 4.

Akalankadeva,
218.

Akbar, Some rare coins of, 125.

Akbarnama, 47.

Akshapdda, Logic of, 249.

Akshapdda Sutra, 177.

Akshi, a capital of Farghana, 137

Alambana pratyaya dhyana Sastra,
221.

‘Alamgir II, Some rare coins of, 126.

Altyn Bishik, 137.

Amdo, province, 113.

Amitabha, Image of, 110.

Anai, pr. n., 36.

Ananda Bhatta, author, 46.

Anangapala Deva, 261.

Ancient Nydya, Optimism in, 251.

Anhikapaddhati, 40.

Anuruddha Sataka, poem, 99.

Anuruddha Thera, a learned Pali
author, 99.

Arabinda, pr. n., 37.

Arama, town, 3.

Archzologisch Onderzoek-op Java en
Madura, 94.

Ardhavainasika or half-nihilist, 249.

Arsaling, pr. n., 152.

Aryadeva, philosopher, 178.

Asanga, author, 254.

Astaséhasrikd Prajnaparamita, 159.

Atand-daulah, poet, 236.

Atiga, Remains of, 108.

Anrangazeb, Some rare coins of, 126.

AvalokiteSvara, Image of, 111,

Azam Shab, 129.

Buddhist logician,

B

Babar, the Emperor, 137.
, Memoirs of, 137.

Babarnamé, Some MSS. of the, 138.

Badah, pr. n., 38,

Bahadur, 273.

Bahuripa, 37.

Bakarganj, Inscription of, 46.

Baliditya, Raja, 254.

Bangala, pr. n., 37.

Berezine, publisher of Mubayyam,
138.

Beri, King of, 152, 153.

Beveridge, H. A few interesting
things about the Emperor Babar,
137.

Bhadanta, 221, 222.

Bhadrapalita, minister, 221.

Bhatta Mahodadhi, 8.

Bhatta Narayana, 35.

Bhimaratha, King, 2.

Bhimavarman, 48.

Brahma Sandegah, 42.

Bhujagapura, town, 43.

Bibliotheca Lindesiana, 188.

Bithu Bandya, pr. n., 36.

Bleazby, G., Mr, 121, 128.

Bodhiruci, author, 159,

Bodhisattvas, Images of, 110.

Bon, religion, 152

Boro-Bodur, a Buddhist Sanctuary in
Java, 95.

Brahma Ksatra, an appellation, 50.

Brdéhmana Sarbasva, author of, 35.

Brandes, Dr., Dir.-Genl. of Arch.
Survey, Dutch Hast Indies, 94.

Buddha, Image of, 110.

Buddhist Logicians, Names of, 218.

» Sects, Highteen, of Tibet,
106.

Bukka family, of Vijayanagar, 251.

Bushing, border state, 154.

Byang, province, 167.

C

Cataka Sandesa, 42.

Chagpoiri, ® monastic institution,
116.

Chag-tse-tugu, place, 202.

Chahada Deva, 262.

Chakar, Khan of, 152,

ul

Cham-chen-choijecakya Yeges, 112.
Chandragupta, Inscriptions of, 253.
Chandragupta II, King, 48.
ChandraprakdSa, Raja, 253.
Changa-King, appellation, 204.
Charters, Tabular abstract of the
eleven, 25-26.
Chatta, family, 35, 36, 37.
Chatta, Sakuni, pr. n., 36.
Cha-zang-kang, place, 204.
Chethang, Monastery of, 114.
Choi Khor-ling, college, 115.
Choi Slukha, place, 202.
Choi-tog Gya-tsho, 165.
Chola, nation, 43. [King, 101.
Chola I, Rajrajendra Kulottinga,
Cholka, province of Tibet, 154.
Chomonkhar, village, 203.
Choraganga, pr. n., 50, 51.
Chungar, 155.
Chyam-chen
temple, 113.
Chyam Khang, temple, 110.
Chyan-chub Gyal-tshan, 204.
Chyafgkha, province of Tibet, 202.
Chyang-shon, 208.
Chyang-tag Chyan, Head of the
State Church, 205.
Chyang-tse, college of religion, 109.
Chyan-na, Governor, 205.
Chyan-na Rinpoche, hierarch, 202.
Chyarog-dong-chan (evil spirit), 113.
Chyazavg Jong, place, 204.
Chyipa Khamang, college, 113.
Chyog Nampar Gyalwa, 115.
Coins, 121
Conjeeverum, town, 101.
Copperplate Charters, Four new, of
the Somavansi Kings of KoSala, 1.

D

Dachan, town, 112.

Dag Lah-zig, family, 202.

Dag-nid-chenpo, hierarch, 204.

Dahala, country, 4.

Dahlmann, Father, S.J—Archezolo-
gisch Onderzoek op Java en Ma-
dura, 94.

Dakhbid, town, 137.

Daksina Koala, country, 2, 44.

Dalai Yontan Gyatsho, 166.

Dana Sagara, MS., 46.

Dansa-thil, hierarch, 202.

an town, 165.
Dapuing, The monastery of, 114.
Dapting, “ premier,” 165, 114.
ap > College of, 115.

Dapuing Shalugo, president, 115.

Tilpaiku=incarnate Lama,
115.

Shal-reh Lhakhang,

”

Index for Philology, History and Antiquities.

Darbag, town, 114.
Darbag-thang, Monastery of, 114.
Dar Figh, appellation, 2386.
Darma Rinchen, Gyal-tshab, 110.
Dar-ui-Mulk Hazrat, 263.
Dagabhimisvara, 159.
DaSanariya, river, 7.
Dawar Bakhsh, Coins of, 127.
Dayan Khan, Ruler of Tibet, 154.
Dayaree KeSava, pr. n, 36.
Deba Kyid-Shoi, 167.
Debala, pr. n., 37.
Deladeli, village, 8.
Deopara, Inscription of, 46.
De geg Lhakhang, 110.
Desrid Sonam Choiphel, 153.
De-Yan, college, 115.
Dhanajfjaya, pr. n., 39.
Dhiaradatta, ranaka, 7.
Dharani, 160.
Dharmakirti, philosopher, 217, 218.
Dharma Raja, = Upholder of religion,
153, 206.
Dharmottara, Buddhist Logician, 218.
Dhoyika, poet, 41.
Dhoyi Kaviraja, poet, 45.
Dhruvasarman, 48.
Dhyani Buddhas, 96.
Dinnaga and his Pramana Samuccaya,
217.
a Buddhist Logician, 217.
a Date of, 178, 226-227, 254.

ms Different appellations of,
222.

» Life of, 218.

BP Some notes on the date of,
253

A Supernatural powers of, 220.
Di-gun, province, 205.
Dikhting Di-gun, hierarch, 202.
Dingsai, Sankara, pr. n., 36.
Disri Kuntob-pa, pr. n., 203.
Divakara Garagari, 36.

Dog Leg-se, 116.
Dogon Phagpa, 116.
Dohdah, place, 165.
Doh-Soh, pr. n., 177.
Dokari MAasacataka, 36.

., Pippalai, 36.

Dok-poiri, hill, 109.
Dom-ton-pa, 107, 108.
Dondib-dorje, 165.

Do Nin je Padma Karpo, 107.
Don-yo-dorje, King, 152, 163.
Dorje of Yarlang, 203.
Dorjepal, pr. n., 202.

Dorje, Tag, Monastery of, 155.
Douka Gura, 36.

Dozon Ang, 137.

Dsong of Holkha, 165.

Index for Philology, History and Antiquities.

Dubchoi Tsang-Khang, chapel, 110.

Dig-pa, sect, 165.

Dukhang ee congregation hall,
116.

- pose: -ma, congregation hall,
113.
Dukhang, Images in the, 113.
Dukhang-Karpo, 111.
-Uma, 109.
Dak- -pa, sect, 106.
Dul-dsin, 110.
Duthukthn, Khan of, 152.

E

Eagle’s Head, monastery.
Khyamgo-Chan, 107.

Kastern Ghats, 3.

Edicts of Asoka, 43.

Edward Terry, 266.

Elliot MSS., Catalogue of the, 138.

Hquivalences, Table of, 268.

Erskine, 137.

See

Fr

Farghana, province, 137.

Fateh Khan, Gold coins of, 121.
Fazer, James, 129.

Firoz Shaz Zafar, Gold coins of, 121.
Fleet, Mr., 1, 2, 3.

Fryer, Mr., 268.

G

Gajpati, Raja, 237.
Gahdan, Monastery of, 153, 108.
a hierarch, 153.

Gahdan-tse, Palace of, 204,

Gah-wa Nor-shon, pr. n., 114.

Ganapati, 262.

Gandavytha, 159.

Gangié Mohan Laskar—Four new
Copper-plate Charters of the
senna! Kings of Kosala (and
Kataka), 1

Gangesa Upidhydya,
217.

Ganii, pr. n., 36.

Garagari, Divakara, pr. n., 36,

Garhva, Inscription of, 48.

Garura, pr. n., 37.

Gautama Patitunda, 36.

Gautama Sutra, 177,

Gedun-Dab, 115,

Gedin Gyatsho, 115, 165.

Gedun Gyatsho, the Dalai
166.

Gedun Phun Phun-tshong Lozang
Tanzing, minister, 110.

Gegan-Khan, 152.

philosopher,

Lama,

ill

Gelug-pa, institution, 166.

Gephel Rivo-che, hill, 114.

Geses Tag-kar-pa, 116.

Ghazi-ud-din Khan, 181.

Gibbs, Mr., 121.

Gita Govinda, poem, 45.

Gobardhanacarya, pr. n., 37.

Gochhashandi, wife of Dhanaijaya,
39.

Go-chye-khang, temple, 114.

Godavari, river, 44.

Gogochn, pr. n., 203.

Gokar Tartars, 153.

Gompa Shagrin, abbott, 202.

Gomtson, 202.

Gongkar, place, 205.

3 fort, 206.
Gon-Khang, chapel, 109.
A Imayes in the, 113,

Gon-po De-mar, (genius), Image of
113.

Gopee Bandya, pr. n., 36.

Gosvami Radhamohan, pr. n., 245.

Grierson, G. A., Dr., on Vidyapati
Vhikur, 228.

| Gujarat Fabric, Coins of, 266.

Sultanat. On some genealogi-
cal coins of, 271.

Gulbadan Begam, 287.

Memoirs of, 137.
Guuabhadrat amidian, 159,
Gira, Douka, pr. n., 36.
Gushi Khan, 152.
Gyal Khar tse, province, 167.
Gyal Shonpal, pr. n., 203.
Gyal-tshab Darma Rinchen, 110.
Gyal-tshan Kyab, Governor, 203.
Gyal-tshan-zang, pr n., 205.
Gya-Tva-tshang, college, 113.
Gyal-wa-iii-pa, 115.
Gya-mo-shong, village, 205.
Gya-thang, place, 202.
Gyavo, nickname, 203.

H

Halayang, place, 202.
Haldynudha, author, 35, 37,
Halsi, Plates of, 48.
Hansu ditam, 42.
Hansa Sandesga, 42.
Hara Bandya, 36.
Hara Narayana, 36.
Haraprasad Sastri: An examination
of the Nyaya
Sotras, 245.
History of
Nyaya Sutras
from Japanese
Sources, 177.

1v Index for Philology, History and Antiquities.

Haraprasad Sastri; Some notes on
the dates of
Subandhu and
Dinnaga, 258.
Haribhadra Siri, a Jain writer, 248.
Harsa, 7.
Hashya, Ganguli, 36.
Hazrat Imam Azam, 2386.
Hayagriba, Tantrik image of, 114. —
Hemanta Sena, King, 46, 50, 51. .
Herbert, Sir Thomas, 267.
Hetudvara, 221. 5
Hegos-chos-grub, 159.
Hienth Sang, the Great, 177.
Hinayanist, Buddhist doctrine, 249.
Hodna, place, 166.
Hodsalphug, the cavern of light,
BU
Hodgson, Mr., 159.
Hoh-ben-shin-ron, 177.
Holkha Dsong, fort, 169.
Hor Jam, a Tartar Commissioner of
China, 202.
Hor Tibetans, a nomadic tribe, 202.
Hogod, Khan of, 152.
HoSo-tshe, province, 152.
Hphags pa-lan-kar-gsegs-pa-theg-pa-
chen-pohi-mdo—Tibetan version
of Lankavatara Sutra, 159.
Hnug-yig-ling, fortress, 2U6.
Hung Thaijé, 155.
Hwang-sze=yellow temple, 112.
Hwenthsang, Chinese _ traveller,
159.

I

Tjahi rupees, Inscription on, 123.
Ysana, 37.

Islam Shah Siri, 131.

Iévara Krsna, 219.

J

Jahandar Shah, Coins of, 264.
Jahangir and Nir Jahan, Some rare
coins of, 125.
Jalajadda, place, 7.
Jalhana, 37, 45.
Jami, poet, 236.
Jam-yang Choije, 114.
Jamyang Gahlo, 115.
5p Sakya, appellation, 204.
Janamejaya, king, 2
Jangsa thul, country, 153.
Je-Deleg-Nima, 116.
Jenghis Khan, 152.
Jetsundampa, 153.
Jina, identified with Dinnaga, 221.

Jinendrabodhi, Buddhist Jlegician,
218.

Johnson, Richmond, 138.

Jovo Tagpa Ria, 203.

Junagarh, Inscription of, 48.

Jungar, Mongolian Chief, 108.
K

Kahagyur, scriptures, 110.

a Lhakhang, 116.
Kahdam-pa, sect, 108.
Kakusthavarman, king, 48.
Kalinga, country, 3.

5 people, 3, 44.
Kalibganagari, town, 44.
Kalyange Gyatsho, 7th Dalai Lama,
116.
Kalzang Lhakhang, 116.
Kamadeva, 7.
Kamalasila , Buddhist Logician, 218.
Kami, poet, "236.
Kanada, the atomic philosopher, 252.
Kanakanagari, Gandharva town, 42.
Kaici, town, 43.
Kiiicipura, town, 100, 43.
Kang-yeng, province, 202.
Kanjilala, family of Kulins, 37.
Kanu, pr. n., 37.
Kardo, place, 202.
Karingampath Nambudri, poet, 42.
Karjong, fortress, 206.
Karma-pa, sect, 154.
‘5 hierarch, 165.
Kasan, province, 137.
Kashmandi, 49.
Kasili, place, 10.
Kataka, country, 2
Kaveri, river, 43.
Kavydlankdra Sutra Vrtti, 253.
Kayya, King of Lata, 158.
Kayyavihara, Monastery of, 158.
Kazan, place, 138.
Kearney, Mr., 138.
Kerala, country, 42.
Keralaputra, country, 43.
Keralas, people, 48.
KeSava Dayaree, pr. n., 36.
» Mahinta, pr. n., 36.
35 Sena, pr. n., 35.
Khalkha, country, 152.
Kham, province, 113, 152, 202, 205.
K hanpo Ringyal, 202.
Khandbadam, 137.
Khanda Kapila, Image of, 111.
Khandoma, sainted fairies, 111.
Khan Tangriyir, appellation, 137.
Khartag Gonsar, Monastery of, 205.
Khizr Khwajah Khan, pr. n., 237,
Khojand, province, 137.

Index for Philology, History and Antiquities, Y

Khojas, History of, 187.
Khokand, Khanate of, 137.
Khon, family, 116.
Khortog-cha, place, 202.
Kheblai Khan, Chinese
116.
Khuday4n Saltan, appellation, 137.
Khyang-thang-gang, 167.
Khynungo-chan, Monastery of,
108.
King, White, Dr., 131.
Kira-ditam, 42.
Kirti-lata, 228.
Kokonor, country, 152.
Kongpo, province, 106, 155.
Konting Gushri, title of honour, 205.
Ko$ala, country, 2
a chour new Copper-plate
Charters of the Somavansi kings
Of:
KoSalendra, title, 2, 3.
Kosam, Inscription of, 48.
Kramaditya, 255.
Krsna Sarvabhauma, author, 42.
Ksanika, 160.
Ksitivamgavalt Caritam, 45.
Ku Chyog-ling, college, 115.
Kumara Gupta, pr. n., 254.
i 1, king, 48.
Kumérila, wine. 254,
Kulmuc Mongols, 152, 153.
Kundalala, family of Kulins, 37.
Kunda Visvesvara, pr. n., 36.
Kindi-ling, college, 154.
Kun-zang, 165.
Kusari, Yaba, pr. n., 36.
Knshi Khan, Statue of, 110.
Kushri, appellation, 153.
Kutihala, pr. n., 37.
Kwa-tin Kan Sri, title of honour,
206.
Kwei-ke, pr. n., 177.
Kya-ya-dag-chu, family, 203.
Kyen-Hiin, Chinese prime minister,
206.
Kyen Tai
China, 206.
Kyid-shoi, place, 166.
Kyi-shoi, place, 167.

Emperor,

107,

L

Labb-u-tawartkh, 236.

Laksmanasena, King of Bengal, 41.

Lalitavistaru, 159.

Lamas, Red Cap and Yellow Cap, 152,

Lama-khang, 110.

Langchen ri, hill, 114.

Langdarma, King of Tibet, 116, 152,
166.

Di-Wang, Emperor of |

Lanka-dvipa, island, 43.

Lankdvatara Sutra, 159.

5 ,» An analysis of
the, 159.

Lata or Central and Southern
Guzerat, 158.

Lavada, district, 10.

Leo-half rupee, found at Ahmadabad,
124.

Lhabzang, 154

Lhaje Phagmodu, hierarch, 203.

Lhakhong Labrangpa, abbott, 2038.

Lha-tho-ri, King of Tibet, 227.

Lha-zig, family, 204, 205.

Lhobrag, province, 106.

Shong-de, province, 202.
Lindesiana Bibliotheca, 138.
Li-Wang, Emperor of China, 206.
Lluttaruma, village, 10.

Lodoi Choi Kyong, 110.
Lokapalas, Images of four, 109.
Lokayala, sect, 159.

Lopon Tagzang , pr. n., 204,
Lo-tsa-wa Ge Long, author, 159.
Lozang Gyatsho, 115.
Lozang-Jinpa, 154.

Lozang-ling, college, 115.

Liing Shoi, place, 166.

M

Ma-chen Pomra, mountain God, 111.
Madana, pr n., 36.
Madanapada, Inscription of, 46
Madanpala Deva. 261.
Maddhila, place, 7.
Madhavacarya, philosopher, 251.
Madhava Kavindra, poet, 41.
Madhumathana, Vinali, engraver,
12.
Madhusudana Rayee, pr. n., 36.
Madjapahit, Kingdom of, 97.
Mahabhavagupta I, 1, 2.
A i. 1, 2.

Mahé- ‘Dianaga, pr n. 177.
Mahamati, pr. n , 160.
Mahanadi, river, 2, 44.
Maha-Sandhivigrahin, 7, 8.
Maha-Sivagupta, king, 1, 2, 44.
Mahavamsa, 99.
Mahayanist, Buddhist doctrine, 249.
Mahendra, mountain, 44.
MaheSvara, pr. n., 37,
Mahinta KeSava, pr. n., 36.
Mahmud I, 273.
Maitreya, Image of, 110.

philosopher, 178.
Makaranda, pr. n., 37.
‘Makhdim A‘azam, saint, 137,
Malabarwala, R. F., Mr., 133.

vi Index for Philology, History and Antiquities.

Malaya, hill-range, 43.
Malyavanta, hill-range, 43.
Mandelso, Albert, 267. 4
Mani Lhakhang=prayer-wheel tem-
ple, 106.
Manju Sri Bhairava, 109.
Manju Sri Mala Tantra, 107.
Man-pa-tva-tshang = medical college,
116.
Mamsabhaksana, 160.
Maqdum Azam, pr. n., 236.
Martanda, pr. n., 36.
MAascataka, Dokari, pr. n., 36.
Masyakarni, saint, 43.
Maulana, Jami, poet, 236.
Meghaditam, Imitations of, 41.
Memoirs of Babar, 137.
» Gulbadan Begam, 137.
Meru, Monastery of, 116.
Methog Than of Gyal, 165.
Milaras-pa, Golden image of, 108.
Mimdémsé Sarvasva, 40.
Mindolling, Monastery of, 155.
Mir ‘Abdu-1-latif, pr. n., 236.
Mirok, pr. n., 177, 249.
Mir Yahya, author, 236.
Mirza ‘Alaud-daulah, Qazvini, author,
236.
Mi-Wang, Nehn-Dong pa, ruler, 165,
167.
Mok Shok, pr. n, 177.
Monasteries of Tibet, 106-116.
Monkhar, place, 202.
Mon-lam Chen po, 108, 165, 115.
Monmohan Chakravarti:—on Pavana-
ditam, a Sanskrit poem by Dhoyi-
ka, a court-poet of Laksmanasena,
king of Bengal, 41.
Mubayyan, poem, i38.
Muchak, pr. n. 177.
Mughal Emperors, gold and silver
coins of, 121.
Muhammad I, 273.
+3 II, 278.
ce bin Tughlag, gold coins of,
121.

Muhammad-i-Bakhtyar, 45, 50.

Mubammad Sarban, Darvesh* 138.

Mujahiduddin, 130.

Mukhaiti, family of Kulins, 37.

Muktapida Lalitaditya, king of Kaé-
mira, 158.

Murasima, town, 3.

Muzaffar I and II, 273.

N

Na-chu-tug, Lhakhang, 116.
Nadir Shah, 129.-

Nafaisu-l-Maasir, a note on, 236.
Nagadatta, pundit, 218.
Nagah-rikor-sum, province, 206.
Nagarjuna, philosopher, 178.
Nagnas, sect, 163.
Nag-pa Namgyal-ling, college, 115.
Nag-pa Tva-tshang, (Tantrik col-
_ lege), 116.
Nag-wang Choitag, hierarch, 105.
Nag-wang Lozang Gyatsho, 5th Dalai
_ Lama, 116.
Nag-wang Tashi, Tibetan ruler, 206.
Nag-wang, Yee Gyatsho, 116.
Nai-choikhang, 111.
Nairmanika, 160.
Naiyaikas, sect, 163.
Nalanda, monastery at, 157.
Naéma-rupa-pariccheda, 99.
Nambudri, Karingampath, poet, 42.
Nam-Gyal, chorten, 110.
Namgyal-ling, Govt. house, 202,
Namgyal Jong, city, 205.
Namkha Zangpo, governor, 114,
Nam-me-chenpo, lama, 204.
Namna Karpo, god, 114.
Namo, place, 202.
Nangso Don-yod, chief, 165.
Nanya, king, 49.
Narasiypha, 7.
Narayana, poet, 42.
Narayana Hara, pr. n., 36.
Naropa, Indian saint, 111.
Nasirud-din Yahya, Amir, 236.
Nava dhamma, 159.
Na-wa Rong, people, 166.
Nayari Tailabati, pr. n., 36.
Nedong, Palace of, 204, 202.
Nedongtse, city, 204.
Nehu Dong, province, 167.
Nehu-Dong tse, town, 168.
Wehu-Dsong, Fort of, 114.

3 province, 114.
Nehu-pa, governor, 112.
Nemi dutam, 42.
Nethang, place, 116.
Ngah-ri, border state (Ladak), 154.

! Ningma. monasteries, 155.

Ning-ma, sect, 106.
Nif-ma, Buddhists, 108. [137.
Niyaz Muhammad Khokhandi, author,
Nom-tsho, a lake in Tibet, 202.
Norpuiling, college, 113.
Nrsinha, commentator, 42.
Ntaradi, village, 10.
Nur Muhammad, 138.
Nyagrong, province, 113.
Nyang, province, 106.
Nyaya, Aucient and Modern, 217.

"3 modern, Buddhistic origin

of, 217.

Index for Philology, History and Antiquities.

Nyayabindu, logic, 217.
Nyaya Sutra, of Gotama, 217.
Nydya Sticinibandha, 245.
Nydayadvara Sastra, 221.
Nydyasarbasva, 40.
Nyaya Sastra, Bibliography of, 177.
Nyaya Sitras, An examination of,
245.
a3 Pee Honeitlo rays (Olt. feOnm
Japanese sources, 177.
Nydyasutroddhara, 245.
Nydya Vaigsesika, 251.
Nyaya Vartika, 246.

O

@leuth Mongols, Khan of, 152.
Onga, river, 3.

Ongatata, district, 3.

Optimism, in ancient Nyaya, 251.
Orad Mongolia, country, 152.

P

Padankadutam poem, 42.
Padma-Karpo, 166, 206.
Padma Sambhava, Saint, 154.
Pakardsin-pa, 116,
Pagsam jon Zang, a Tibetan work,
156.
Paldam Lhama, goddess, 113.
Paldan-senge, 115.
Paljor Lhindub, minister, 116.
Pallava, dynasty 101.
Pallayas, Kingdom of the, 10).
Panataram, a Buddhist Sanctuary in
Java, 95.
Paiicapsara, tank, 43.
Panchen Lozang Choigyan, of Tashi-
lhunpo, 116.
Panchen, Rinpoche, 153, 167. [116.
Pan-chen Sonam Tagpa, hierarch,
Pandavas, people, 3.
Pandita, pr. n., 38.
Panditasarbasva, 40.
Pandya-deéa, country, 43.
Paramatthavinicchaya, 99.
Paragara Simali, pr. n., 36,
Parisuddhi, by Udayana, 177,
Parkhaug, printing honse, 111,
PaSupatasg, sect, 163, 159.
Pagupatipaddhati, 40.
Paitna, native state of, 2.
Pavanaditam, a Sanskrit poem, 41.
Phabong-Kha, 116. [ 205.
Phag-du, a town in Central Tibet,
; honse of, A short history of.
202,
7 dy nasty, Reign of the, 207.

Vil

Phagmadu, province of Central Tibet,
202.

Phag-pa, 116.

Phalpo-che, 107.

Phodang Marpo, palace, 154.

| Phola, Jing Wang, 111.

Phuntshog, Namgyal, 167.
Pippali, Dokari, pr. n., 36.
Pitamundi, Safikara, pr. n., 36.
Poi-chen, or Greater Tibet, 106.
Ponchen = Chief Governor, 203.

| Ponchen, Anglen of Sakya, 203.

Ponchen Gyal-tshang, the Sakya re-
gent, 203.

Pon Sonam, Choiphel, 154.

Potala, Lion, Throne of, 154.

PradyumneSvara Siva Temple of, 40.

Prajiiapti hetu Sangraha, 222.

Pramana-cintamani, 217.

Pramana-Samuccaya, of Dingnaga, 217.

0 5 Compilation of,
219.

Praménavartika-kdrika, commentary,
218.

Pramdna-vinigscaya, 218.
Prambanam, a Brahmanical sane-
tuary in Java, Description of, 95.

Puiija, 1.

Pura Gupta Raja, 255.
Purusapartksa, 228.

Putitunda, Gautama, pr. n., 36.

Q

Qultugq, appellation, 137.
Qutabaldin Ahmad IT, 273.

R

Rab Byampa Geleg Lhindth, 166.

Rab-Chyampa, 152.

Rab-Deng, Monastery of, 107.

Raffles, Sir Thomas Stamford,
Governor-General of Java, 94.

Raghava, King, 49.

Rajaratnakari, 99.

Rajtarangini, 158.

Rajavali, 99.

Rajput coins, fonnd in Garhwal Dis-
trict, 261.

Ralpachan, King of Tibet, 116, 159.

Rama Gopiala, court-poet, 42.

Ramana, country, 100.

Ramanuja, Vaisnava, preacher, 101.

Ramagankara, commentator. 42,

RameSvara, God and place, 43.

Ramlajivana, Maharajidhiraj, 42.

Ranaka Dharndatta, 7, 8.

Rana Sanga, pr. n., 138.

Vill

Rapson, H.I., 263.
Red Cap Church, 166, 167.
Rangacaryya, poet, 42.
Ratan Né&rayana, Pondit of Delhi,

127
Ratna Gyalpo, ruler of Tibet, 154.
Ravanadhyesana, 160.
Rayee Madhusiadana, pr. n., 36.
Reva, river, 44.
Rinchenpuig, a small town, 166.
Rinchen Shun-pa, pr. u., 112.
Rinchen Tagyal, 204.
Rinchen Tashi, the Governor of Sakya

monastery, 203.
Rin Dorje, Wang (king), 206.
Rinpting, town, 165.

aa Deva Garwa, 163.
“a Norzang, Governor, 165.

Rinpting-pa, 165, 166.
Ritsi Wang Gyalpo, pr. n., 208.
Roberts, M. B., Major, 261.
Rodgers, C. I., Mr., 128.
Ronki, a logical treatise, 177.
Ronshiki, a logical treatise, 177.
Ron Shin, a logical treatise, 177.
Rosdkara, pr. n., 37.
Row, Sir Thomas, 266.
Rudradaman, pr. n., 48.
Rupa Gosvami, author, 42.
Rynju, pr. n., 177.

Ss

Sadajiro Sugiura, 246, 254.

Saddargana Samuccaya, 254.

Saddharmdlankara, 99.

Saddharmapundarika, 159.

Sadukti-Karnamrta, 45.

Saizida Afag, wife of Babar, 137.

Sahti, 97.

Sakuni Catta, pr. n., 36.

Sakya sect, 106.

Sakya Gyal-tshan, 204,

Sakya Rinchen, 206.

Samadhirdja Sutra, 159.

Samamphenillava, 7.

SaAmanta Sena, king, 46, 50.

Samarkand, city, 137.

Samdub-tse, fort, 153, 165, 166.

Samksepa-Satkarajaya, 251.

Sambara, Image of, 110.

Sam-ye, place, 114.

Sandhivigrahin, 8.

Sangkhar, Monastery of, 112.

Sang-fiag Khar, Monastery of, 167.

Sangphu Nehu thang, monastery,
116.

Sangye Gyatsho, 154.

Sankara, Dihsii, pr. n., 36.

Index for Philology, History and Antiquities.

Sankara, Pitamundi, pr. n., 36.

Sankara Svami, philosopher, 177.

a philosopher, 252.
Samkhyas, sect, 159, 163.
Santabhadra, Buddhist logician, 218.
Sanula, district, 7.

Saradapitha, in Kasmira, 252.

Sarat Chandra Das :—A short history
of the hoase of
Phagdu, which
ruled over Ti-
bet on the de-
cline of Sakya
till 1432 A.D,
202.

Tibet a depen-
dency of Mon-
golia, 152.

Tibet under her
last kings, 165.

bE 2 +B)

” 99 9)

- x » The monas-
teries of Tibet,
106.

Sarma-Khang, 110.

Sarts, people, 137.

Sartse Tva-tshang, college, 109.

Sarvadharma Samuccaya, 160.

Sarvadargana Sangraha, 159.

Sarvajiia Mitra, a Tantrika Buddhist

author of Kasmira,
156.

- Story of, 156, 157.
Sarvasinyatavada, Doctrine of, 249.
Sarvalaksana-dhydna Sastra, 221.
Sarvastivada, Doctrine of, 249,

Satis Chandra Vidyabhisan :—On
Anuruddha
Thera, a learn-
ed Pali author
of Southern
India, in the
12th century.
AD, 99.

An analysis of
the Lankavata-
ra Sutra, 159.

Dinnaga and his
Pramana-
Samuccaya,
217.

Sarvajia Mitra,
a Tantrik
Buddhist
author of
Kasmira in
the 8th cen-
tury A.D., 156.

Savara, the Bhasyakara of Mimansa,

179.

39 tribe, 44.

Index for Philology, History and Antiquities. 1x

Sedmi-Midtin =the seven early monk
scholars, 116.

Seish, pr. n., 177.

Sena, dynasty of Bengal, 45.

Senge-Tag, hill, 107.

Sera, The monastery of, 112, 165.

Sera Theg-chen-ling, monastery, 112.

Sera-tse, hermitage, 112

Serdan-Teang Khang, chapel, 110.

Serthi, the hierarchical throne, 111.

Sgrolma, Tibetan goddess Tara, 156.

Shah ‘Alam II, 130.

Shah Jahan and Aurangzeb, Two rare
coins of, 128.

$hah Shuja, a new type of coins of,
265.

Shakya Gyal-tshan, Head of the
Church, 204.

Shams-1-Tabrizi, pr. n., 236.

Shamsuddin Altamash, 262.

Shaw, author of the History of the
Khojas, 137.

Shigatse, town, 153.

Shokmok, pr n., 177.

Shon-nu Gyal-tshan, Governor, 202.

Shon-nu Yontan, Governor, 203.

Shwamar, or Red Cap School of
Tibet, 152.

Siksananda, 159.

Simali ParadSara, pr. n., 36.

Simhadatta, minister, 11.

Simhavakta, city, 218.

Sira, pr. n., 37.

Sisa, pr. n., 38.

Situ Akyid, 202.

Situ Chyan-tshan, pr. n., 203.

Sita Ladoi Gyal-tsan, pr. n., 208,

Siva Gupta, King, 2.

Styasarbasva, 40.

Skanda Gupta, Raja, 254, 255.

Somesyara Deva, 262

Somakula, lunar race, 2. °

SomavamSi Dynasty, The names of
the four successive Kings of the, 2.

SomayamSi Kings, Four new copper-
plate charters of the, 1.

Sonam Choiphel, 153.

Sonam Gyal-tshan, Grand Lama, 203,
204.

Sonam Gyatsho, Dalai Lama, 115,
116, 206.

Sonam Namgyal, 167.

Soraganga, 51.

BSragdhara-Stotra, 156.

BSragdhara-Stotra tika, 156.

Sridhanya Kataka, ancient monnas-
tery of Sonthern India, 114.

Sridharadisa, compiler, 45, 49,

Sriperumatar, town, 101.

Sritindra, Queen, 46, 50.

Srong-tsan Gampo, King of Tibet,
116.

Subandhu, Some notes on the date
of, 253.

Subhagasandeguh, poem, 42.

Subhasita Muktavalz, 45.

Sucha, pr. n., 37. 0

Snhma, country, 44, 45.

Suka Sandesah, 42

Sultan Abu Said, pr. n., 187.

Sultan Muzaffar III, 269.

Sultans of Delhi, Gold coins of, 121.

Surya Sena, Kayastha, 11.

Suvarnaprabhadsa Sutra, 159.

Stonskor Sabs-drung, hierarch, 153.

Sze-Chuan, province, 206.

T

Tabakat-t-Nasiri, 50.
Tagkar fort, 206.
Tagling, city, 202.
Be monastery of, 166, 167.
Tag-pa Gyal-tshan, King of Tibet,
205, 206.
Tagpa-Phozer, pr. n., 203.
Tagrin, pr. n., 205.
Tahi Situ Chyan Chub Gyal-tshan,
165
Tailabati, Nayari, pr. n., 36.
Tai-Sita, title of honour, 203, 206.
Taisri Tagpa-hodpa, Governor, 203.
Taka Kusa, pr. n, 254.
Ta Kansri, holy order, 153.
Talai Khan, ruler of ‘Tibet, 154.
Talai Lama, 11%.
Talakajja, village, 7.
Talitnagara, 41.
Taming, dynasty, LI 2, 206.
Ta-Ming, Emperor, 205.
Tamralipti, port town, 45.
Tamraparni, river, 43.
Tangriyar Khan, 137.
Tan-gyeling, college of, 154.
Tan Kyong Wangpo, Karma, 167.
Tanzin Wangyal, ruler of Tibet, 154.
Tapa, monastery boys, 106.
Taras, mystic powers, 96.
Tarikh-i-Shahrukhi, title, 137.
Tarkikas, sect, 163.
Tarpandighi, inscription of, 46.
Tashi Badur, Khan of Kokonor, 110.
Tashi Dokha, place, 114.
Tashi-dong, place, 202.
Tashi-gomang, college, 115.
Tashilhunpo, city, 153.
Taghizil, monastery of, 153.
Tathagata, temple of the, 110.
Tathagataguhyaka, 159.

xe Index for Philology, History and Antiquities.

Tathagatanityanityatva, 160.
Tatparya tika, by Vacaspati, 177.
Taylor, Geo. P., 124, 127, 128, 135.
Tela, river, 3.
Telatatta, district, 3.
Tengri Nor, lake in Tibet, 202.
Tempora, village, 208.
Tenzing, Choigyal, 153.
Thakur, Vidyapati, a poet, 228.
Thanawala, Framji, J., 126.
Thangpo-Chin-ling-me, place, 202.
Thegchan Choigyal, 116.
Thig 6g Gyalmo, lake, 152.
T’hikhang =a Government house, 202.
T’hi-Lodoi Gyatsho, 154.
T’hin las Gyatsho, 154.
Thi-pa = President, 112,
T’hipon = a provincial governor,
202.
Thisrong-den-tsan, king, 109.
Thoisam-ling, college, 118, 115.
Thomas, Mr., 121
Thugan Themur, the Tartar Emperor,
204,
Thugwan Thaumer, Chinese Emperor,
206.
Thumed Mongolia, 152.
Thumer Bukhoi, Mongol prince, 203.
Thurston, Mr., 133.
Tibet, a dependency of Mongolia,
: 152.
», the monasteries of, 106.
» under her last kings, 165.
Tjandi Toempong, a Buddhist Sanc-
tuary in Hastern Java, 95.
Toral Behu, 152.
Transoxiana, province, 138.
Tri-Kalinga, countries, 3.
Trikalingadhipati, appellation, 3.
Tsang, province, 106, 203, 204.
Tsang-Khang, Chapel, 115, 109.
Tsang-Gyadthang-gang, 167.
T'sem Hodzer ma, reformer, 111.
Tse-thang, monastery of, 204.
Tse-thang, town, 206
Tshad-mahi-mdo-kun-las-b tus-pa
219.
Tshad-ma-kun-btas, 219.
Tshal, province, 205.
Tshan-ha Wang, title of honour, 205.
Tshe-Chog-ling, College of, 154
Tshemo-ling, College of, 154.
Tshe- Wang Dorje, 166.
Tshebim = pot of longevity, 111.
Tshong-dui-tag-kha, place, 202.
Tshong-du-tag-khan, 202.
Tson-dui Pal, pr. n., 208.
Tsong-khapa, Buddhist reformer,
108, 114, 154.
» statue of, 110.

|
|

|

Turki-divan, poem, 138.
Turki Memoirs, 188.

U

U, province, 106, 203, 204, 205.
Uccavanaga, 7.

Udayana, Parisuddhi of, 177.
Uddhava ditam, 41, 42,
Uddhava Sandegam, 42.
Udyotakara, author, 221.

5; Vartika of, 177.
Umapatidhara, court pandita, 40.
Upayakausalya, 178.
Uragapura, town, 43.

Utan HoSo, place, 153.

Utsava, pr. n., 37.

Uttarumila, monastery of, 100.
Uttarola, monastery of, 100.
Utthitasani, 7.

Uzbeg, people, 137.

V

Vacaspati migra, pr. n., 245.
Vacaspati, Tatparya tika of, 177.
Vaisesikas, sect, 163.
VaiSravana, the god of riches, 114.
Vaitarani, river, 3.
Vajra Bhairava, image of, 110, 116.
Vajra Mukuta, King, 157, 158.
Vajrapani, image of, 111.
Vajra Varahi, goddess, 114.
Valentya, F., 129.
Vallala Caritam, 46.
Vamana, pr. n., 37.

3 author, 253.
Vanamali, Vedadntatirtha, on Opti-

mism in Ancient Nyaya, 251.

Vardhana, King, 49.
Vasavadattd, 253.
Vasu, 7.
Vasnbandhu, pr. n., 227, 254, 177.
Vasudeva, poet, 42.
Vastubandha, pr. n., 253.
Vatsayana, Bhasya of, 177.

a the Bhasyakara, 178, 179.
Vent Samhara, 35.
Venkatesa Vedantacdryya, poet, 42.
Vidyapati Thakur, poet, 228.
Vijaybandhu I, King of Ceylon, 100,
Vijaya Kataka, town, 4.
Vijayapura, capital, 42.
Vijaysena, pr. n., 40, 50.
Vijfiani Madhava, 7.
Vikrama, poet, 42.
Vindhya, range of hills, 44.
Vinita deva, Buddhist logician, 218.
Vinitapura, town, 2.
Vipras, sect, 163.

Index for Philology, History and Antiquities. x1

Vira, King, 49.

Visélamalavatt-nama-Praména-Sam-
uccaya-tiké, commentary, 218.

Visnuvardhana, King, inscription
of, 97.

Visuddhimagga, commentary, on 99.

Visvarupasena-deva, pr. n., 46, 50.

Visvanatha Cakravarti, commenta-
tor, 42.

ViSvesvara, Ghosala, pr. n., 36.

VisveSvara Kunda, pr. n., 36.

Viadimir Petrovitch Nalivkine,
author, 137.

Vost, Captain, 122.

Vyavasth@darpanam, 35.

W

Wang-Jing-né, King of Tibet, 206.
Wenhi, Chinese Professor, 159.
White King, L., Dr., 122.
Wind-messenger, or Pavanadutam,
a poem, 41.
Wright, H. N,,
129, 133, 273.

121, 124, 127-128,

Y

Yaba Kusari, pr. n., 36.
Yahzan, province, 205.
Yambu, (Nepal), 154.

Yangas, 179.

Yang-pachan, temple, 110, 111.

Yar-Muhammad, pr. n., 137.

Yarltng, city, 202.

Yasodevi, Queen, 46.

Yayati, King, 2

Yayatideva, 7.

Yayatinagara, town, 2.

Yayatinagari, town, 44.

Yellow Cap Lamas, 153.

Yellow Church, 106, 153.

Yogesa. Candra Sastri:—a note on
Halayudha, the author of Brahma-
nasarbasva, 3d.

Yogins, 179.

Yontan Gyatsho, Dalai Lama, 116.

of Tsangthon, 115.

Yul- Tua, title of a work on political
ethics, 204.

Yinglo, “Emperor, 12,

Ying Ming, 206.

Z

Zain Khawafy, historian, 138.

Zainuddin Khwafi, pr. n., 237.

Zangri- Phodang-gang, place, 202.

Zim-Khang, 110.

Zimgaria, 155.

Zodiacal Half-rupee, found at Ahmad-
abad, 124.

Ziankhang, 115.

eee ay st
coe A

INDEX

for Natural Sciences with Anthropology.

* dn asterisk denotes a new form.

A

Ablabes baliodirus, 210.
*,, gilgiticus,sp nov., 210.
» nicobarensis, 175.
» vrappi, 210,
Ablepharus brandtii, 150.
a grayanus, 150.
Acanthodactyius cantoris, 149.
micropholis, 149.
Acanthosaura armata, 85, 92.
crucigera, 85, 92.
kakhiensis, 92, 93.
lamnidentata, 85, 92.
major, 92.
minor, 92.
tricar inata, 92.
Acontias burtonii, 150.
layardu, 150.
monodactylus, 150.
“r sarasinorum, 150.
Agama agrorensis, 93.
caucasica, 93.
dayana, 93.
himalayana, 93.
» solepis, 93.
; virata, 88, 93.
megalony2, 88, 93.
» melanura, 88, 93.
» nupta, 89, 93.
rubrigularis, 93.
Agama, sp., 89.
5 tuberculata, 93.
Agamidez, 85, 92-93.
Agamura cruralis, 91.
» persica, 91.
Agraharis, The, of Sasaram (Proc.),34
Agricultural Practices, 183.
Alchemical Equipment in the ele-
venth century, (Proc.), 50.
Allodahlia scabriuscula, 28.
Alsophylaz pipiens, 82, 90.
tuberculatue, 90.
Amblycephalus monticola, 176.
Amulets as agents in the prevention
of disease in Bengal (Proc.), 50.
Andamans, Snakes of the, 175.
Anechura ancylura, 28.
x metallica, 29.
Anechura, ap., 29.

23
bed

| Anguide, 90, 93.

Ani, (concubines of the redcapped
Lamas), 107.

Animals in the Inscriptions of Piya-
dasi (Proc.), 55.

Anisolabis annulipes, 28.

Apachys fez, 27.

Aphaniotis fusca, 89.

Apterygida bipartita, 29.

Apus, Occurrence of, in Baluchistan,

Artesian well at Lucknow, 233.

Art, Indian, in Java, 95.

Arya Samaj, 256.

Ascaris halicoris, 258.

Ashariya, (a snake), 194, 195.

Avilliah, 241.

B

Baer tree, 188.

Barahsenis (shopkeepers), 256.

Bhotias, Note on the, of Almora and
British Garhwal (Proe.), 50.

Bir Bahoti. See Trombidium.

Birth Practices, 187.

Blow-gun, Exhibition illustrating use
of, in S. India and Malaya (Proc.),
55.

Branding of Infants, 196.

Bucella carniola, 74.

Buddhism in Java, 96, 97.

Bundelkhand gneiss, Decomposition
product of, 168-171.

Bungarus ceruleus, 176.

np sindanus, 213.

Bunia, 256,

Butea frondosa, 102,

C

Cabrita jerdonii, 149.

», leschenaultii, 149.
Calamaria leucocephala, 209.
Callodactylus aureus, 91.
Calotes andamanensis, 93.

», ceylonensis, 93.

» elliotii, 93.

», emma, 92.

ee Be

X1V

Calotes gigas, 87.
grandisquamis, 93.
» gerdonti, 87, 92.
gubatus, 89, 92.
», liocephalus, 93.
liolepis, 93.
» maria, 87, 92.
microlepis, 86.
mystaceus, 87, 93.
nigrilabis, 93.
ophiomachus, 938.
rourit, 88, 93.
versicolor, 87.
yunnanensis, sp. nov., 87-88.
Canal, Anupshahr branch, 234.
main upper Ganges, 234,
Sarda, 234.
Castes, Formation of new, 256.
Cattle, Respect paid to dead, 181,
Ceramodactylus affinis, 90.
Ceratophorus aspera, 92.
stoddartii, 92.
tennentit, 92.
Cerberus rhynchops, 176.
*Chetogaster bengalensis, 8p.
117-120. Plate III.

Chalcides ocellatus, 148, 150.

pentaductylus, 150,
Chalcideseps thwattesit, 150.
Chanir, (a wrestler), 256.
Charasia blanfordiana, 98.

» dorsalis, 93.

sy ornata, 93.
Chausenis, 256, 257.
Chelisoches glaucopterus, 28.
(2?) Chelisoches melanocephalus, 28.
Chelisoches morio, 28.
Chelisochella superba, 28.
Chrysopelea ornata, 176.
Chrysydrus gr anulatus, 175.
Qiva, in Java, 96.
Coluber melanurus, 173, 175.

5, oaycephalus, 175.

ss porphyraceus, 175.

> vadiatus, 210.
Colubride, 1738, 209.
Cophotis ceylanica, 92.
Customs and Religion of the Uraons

or Oraons (Proc.), 43.

Cuttack, Kantabudiyas of, 215.

»

33

nov.,

D

Dalai Lama, Hierarchy of the (Proc.),
2.

Dapuing, Monastery of, 114.

Deformity, Belief regarding, 186.

Dendrophis pictus, 174, 175.

Deserting Houses, 189.

Dhabhda, (stomach complaint), 197.

Index for Natural Sciences with Anthropology.

Dibamide, 150.

Dibamus nove-guinex, 150.

*Diplatys gladiator, sp. nov., 27, 29-80,
55 ridleyi, 27.

*Dipsadoides decipiens, sp. nov., 2138.
Dipsadomorphus ceylonensis, 174, 176.
36 cynodon, 2138.

hexagonatus, 175.
Dipsas fusca, 174, 176,
*Distira andamanica, sp. noy., 174-
176.
», lapemidoides, 175.
Doab, central, Members of endoga-
mous groups of, 206.
Domi (spectacled cobra), 194.
Douné, (Indian wormwood), 188.
Draco blanfordii, 92.
»» aussumierr, 92.
» maculatus, 92.
» norvillit, 92.
» ©quinquefasciatus, 89.
teniopterus, 92.
Dryocalamus tristrigatus, 210.
Dugong, Habits of, 241.
5 Notes on the species of, 238.
. Round worm of, 258.
3p Superstitions regarding, 241.
Dumbness, Granaries causing, 181.
Dyeing, materials from Nyctanthes
arbortristis, 102.

E

Earthquakes in India, (Proc.), 55.
Earwigs of the Indian Museum, 27.
Echinosoma sumatranum, 27.
Kelipse, Effects of an, 185.
Enhydris curtus, 175.
Entertaining, Customs concerning,
184.

Eremias brevirostris, 51, 149.

3, fasciata, 149.

» guttulata, 149.

> velow, 149.
Eublepharide, 84, 92.
Hublepharis hardwickii, 85, 92.

Fe macularis, 92.

Eumeces blythianus, 160.

» schneidert, 150.

» scutatus, 148, 150.

,, taentolatus, 148, 150.
Huprepes halianus, 151.

a longicaudatus, 143.

», -monticola, 143, 144.

K

Fairies, Beliefs in Bilaspur regarding,
188.

Fevers, Prevalence of, in the Dinaj-
pur District (Proc ),2

Index for Natural Sciences with Anthropology. XV

Fields, Wedding of, 181.
Fisherman’s Net, The, 193.
Fordonia leucobalia, 176.
Forcipula decolyi, 27

as quadrispinosa, 27.

6 trispinosa, 27.
*Forficula acer, sp, n., 29, 30-31.

a beelzebub, 29.
*Forficula celer, sp. n., 29, 3l.

ay tomis, 29.
friendships, sworn, Customs regard-

ing, in Bilaspur, 187-188.

G

Gah-dan, Monastery of, 108.
Galimwar (blanket or
gown), 237.
Gangajal as a term in friendship,
188.
Gangetic Plain,
Geology of, 230.
Garhwal District, Hoard of Rajput
coins found in the, 261.
Gecko monarchus, 92.
Geckonidz, 81, 90-92.
Gecko stentor, 92.
» verticillatus, 92.
Gehyra mutilata, 91.
Geology, Some remarks on, of the
Gangetic Plain, 230-35.
Gilgit, Festivals, customs, and folk-
lore of (Proc.), 37.
Glauconia blanfordii, 209.
Glauconide, 209.
Gueiss, Decomposition of, 168.
God, Pacifying the, 191. Plate II,
fig. 3, 91.
Gonatodes andersonii, 88.
2 gracilis, 83, 91.
Pe indicus, 91.
a5 Jerdonii, 91.
“, kandianus, 83, 91.
6 littoralis, 91.

dressing

Remarks on the

oF marmoratus, 91.
> mysoriensis, 91,
%5 ornatus, 91.

os sisparensis, 91,

PP wynadensis, 91.
Gonyocephalus belli, 92.

fs grandis, 92.
Pp humii, 87, 92.
. subcristatus, 87, 92.

Gouha (cobra without spectacles on
the head), 194
Gouriyas (snake-charmers), 1938, 194.
Grain, Measoring of, 181,
Granaries causing dumbness, 181,
Gymnodactylus albofasciatus, 91.
ry brevipes, 90.

*@ymnodactylus
nove, 82, 83, 91.
Gymnodactylus consobrinus, 82.

consobrinotides, sp.

% deccanensis, 90.

3 fasciolatus, 82, 91.

a fee, 84, 91.

5 fedtschenkos, 90.

frenatus, 91.

3 jeyporensis, 90,

* kachensis, 90.

* khasiensis, 91, 151.

5 lawderanus, 90.

of) marmoratus, 82.

: microtis, 81.

ie nebulosus, 90.

i oldhami, 82, 91.

ns peguensis, 91.

ee pulchellus, 82, 83, 91.

rubidus, 91,

A scaber, 90.

* stoliczkx, 82, 90.

3 triedrus, 91.

3 varvegatus 82, 91,
H

Halicore australis, 238.
* dugong, 238. Plate V. 1.
Hariyali (snake-charmers’ festival),
195.
Harsinghar (Nyctanthes arbortristis),
102

Hathajori (hands joined), 195.
*Hedyotis sisaparensis, 244,
Hemidactylus bowringi, 91.

a brookit, 81, 91.

i coctz?, 81.

*5 depressus, 91.

. flaviviridis, 81, 91.

a frenatus, 84 91.

mF garnotii, 91.

i giganteus, 91.

i gleadovii, 81.

nA gracilis, GL.

- karenorum, 84, 91.

An leschenaultii, 91.

7 maculatus, 91.

- wersicus, 91.

re platyurus, 84, 91.

_ reticulatus, 91.

5 subtriedroides, 91.

i subtriedrus, 84, 91.

s triedrus, 84, Plate II,
fir. 2, 91.

i twricicus, 91.

Herpetology, Contributions to Orien-
tal, 81-938, 139-151.
Holi Festival, 186-187.
Hoplodactylus anamallensis, 92.
ij duvaucelit, 92,

xvi

Hydra diecia, 72.
» fusca, 72.
,, of Caleutta tanks, 72.
*,, orientalis,.sp, nov., p. 72, 73.
», vulgaris, 72.
Hydrus platurus, 176.

I

India, Earth Hating and the Earth-
eating habit, in, (Proc.), 55.

India, Southern, Fauna of a Desert
Tract in, (Proc.), 55

Infants, Massage and Branding of,
196.

Inscriptions of Piyadasi,
in the, (Proc.), 55.

Animals

J

*Japalura andersoniana, sp. nov. 85-
86, Plate II, fig. 4, 92.
Japalura planidorsata, 92.
Pe wvarieguta, 92
Java, Archeology of, 94.
Four new Barnacles from the
neighbourhood of, (Proc.), 47.

33

K

Kadalpudra (‘Sea pig”), 241.

Kalima, 237.

Kanawar folklore, Contributions to,
(Proc.), 34.

ene of Cuttack, 215.

Customs of, 215.

es Khadir ” (Geological), 230, 231, 232.

Ko-thimgyab-pa, (a kind of punish-
ment), 15+.

Kris hilt, Exhibitions of specimens
and drawings of, (Proc.), 36.

Kunkar (nodular limestone), 230, 231,
232.

L

Labidura bengalensis, 27.
lividipes, 28.

i riparia, 28,
Labidurodes robustus, 28.
Lacerta viridis, 140.
Lacertide, 139, 149.
Lachesis cantoris, 176.
gramineus, 176.

» | purpur eomaculatus, 176.

Lamp Light, A aes form of,

39

Saluting at, 184.

23

Index for Natural Sciences with Anthropology.

Lepidodactylus aurantiacus, 91.
= ceylonenis, 84, 91.
lugubris, 91.
Liolepis belli, 89, 93.
Lippoing (plastering with cow-dung),.
185.

Lizards, List of Indian, 90, 139.
Lucknow, Artesian well at, 233.
Lycodon aulicus, 173, 175.
Lygosoma albopwnctatum, 150.

a anguinum, 148, 150.

> atrocostatum, 147.
¥ beddomii, 146, 150.
= bilineatum, 150.
Aa cacharense, sp. nov. 1465,
149.

calamus, 150.

35 chinense, 147.

45 comottit, 147, 150.
39 cyanellum, 150,

95 doriz, 146, 149.

99 dussumieri, 149.

< var. concolor, var. noy., 145.
ae fallaz, 150.

9 fex, 151.

os formosum, 146, 150.

i guentheri, 150.

= himalayanum, 146, 149,
55 indicum, 144, 149.

3 jerdomanum, 147.

* kakhienense, 149.

5 ladacense, 150.

0 laterimaculatum, 150.
3 lineatum, 150.

a lineolatum, 147, 150.
S macrotis, 150.

‘ macrotympanum, 150.
». maculatum, 143, 144, 149,

3 melanostictum, 149.
= mitanense, sp. nov., 144,
149.
0 olivaceum, 149.
% 9 var, grisewm,
145.
a pulchellum, 145, 149.
“4 punctatolineatum, 150.
5 sikkimense, 146, 149.
ie singaporense, 147.
% subceruleum, 149.
i taprobanense, 150.

. tragbulense, 146, 149.
zebratum, 151.
Lyriocephalus scutatus, 92.

M

*Mabuia anakular, nom. nove, 143,149
» beddomii, 149.
» dibronii, 149.
» dissimilis, 143, 149.

Index for Natural Sciences with Anthropology.

_*Mabuia doriz, 149.
» monticola, 143, 149.
» - multifasciata, 141, 148, 149.
» movemcarinata, 149.
», quadricarinata, 149.
» rugifera, 141, 149.
> septemteniata, 149.
» tytleri, 142, 149,
vertebralis, 149.

Maer opisthodon himalayanus, 210.

Mahapraséd as a term in friendship,
188.

Malayan Peninsnla, Materials for the
Flora of (Abstract), Proc., 40, 47,
52.

Mango Seeds, Sowing, 181.

Marriage practice, 196.

Massage of Infants, 196,

Matrimonial Beliefs and Practices,
185.

Meeting, Customs concerning, 184.

Maungeli Tahsil, People of, 181.

Murari, (Name of a snake) 195.

Mushroom, Belief regarding a, 192.

N

Naia bungarus, 176.
» tripudians, 176.

Nephrurus asper, 81.

Nicobars, Snakes of the, 175,

Night, Terrors of the, 192.

North-West Frontier Province, Cus-
toms in the Trans-border Terri-
tories of the (Proc ), 33.

Nyamdo pin (Tibetan relationship),
107.

Nyctanthes arbor-tristis, Colouring
principle of flowers of, 102-105.

O

Oligodon sublineatus, 175.
a trilineatus, 173.
* woodmasoni, 1738, 175.
ee blanfordii, 150.
tr idactylus, 150.
Ophi fee beddomi, 149.
» elegans, 141, 149,
» jerdonii, 149.
» microlepis, 149.
» schleuteri, 141.
Oplisaurus apus, 90, 93.
gracilis, 90, 98.
Opisthocosmia oannes, 29.
*Opisthocosmia, sp. nov., 29.
*Opisthocosmia vivaw. sp. nov., 29, 30.
Oraons, Religion and customs of the,
(Proc.), 43.
Otocryptis beddomit, 92,
‘5 bivittata, 92.

XVil
P

Panchayat, The, 185.

Patal, (the nether region), 194.
Phelsuma andamanense, 92.
Phrynocephalus caudivolvulus, 93.

9p euptilopus, 93.

5 luteoguttatus, 93.
ve maculatus, 93.

+ olivierit, 93.

55 ornatus, 93.

i theobaldi, 93.

Phul asa term in friendship, 188.
Phyllodactylus burmanicus, 88-84,
Plate I, fig. if 91.

50 europxus, 84.
ki stamensis, 83, Plate 1,
figs. 1b, 2a.

Piyadasi, Animals in the Inscriptions
of (Proc.), 55.

Platurus colubrinus, 176.

Polydontophis bistrigatus, 175.
sagittarius, 175.

Pora (a festival), 193.

Porpoise, freshwater, 235,

‘*- Possession,” A case of, 189,

Pregnancy, Cause of prolonged, 181.

Pret (a spirit), 188

Pretins (spirits), 189.

Pristurus rupestris, 91.

Prymnomiodon, 174. —

Ptychozoon homalocephalum, 92.

Ptyctolemus gularis, 85, 92,

Ptyodactylus homolepis, 91.

Pygidicrana eximia, 27.

Python reticulatus, 175.

Q
Quarrels, Settling, 192.

R

Ra-deng, Monastery of, 107.
Rain, Binding the, 183.
“Rains Insect.””? See Trombidiwm.
Raja Kans, 256,
Rajputs of Narwar, 262.
Raut {milk-man), 189.
Records, Methods of keeping, 183.
Religion and customs of the Uraons,
or Oraons {Proc.), 43.
Ristella bedomii, 150.
» guentheri, 150.
» rurkiv, 160.
» travancorica, 150.

Ss)

Sal-Ammoniae (Proc.), 50.
Salea anamallayana, 92.
» horsfieldii, 86, 92,

XVili

Sasaram, The Agraharis of (Proc.),
34.
Scapteira acutirostris, 149.
a aporosceles, 141, 149.
i» scripta, 141, 149.
Scincide, 141, 149-150.
Scincus arenarius, 148.
» mitranus, 148, 150.
Scorpion stings, Immunity from, 192.
Sepophis punctatus, 150.
Sera, Monastery of, 112.
Shaitan, 190, 191.
Siam, Lower, Note on a Rock Shrine
in, (Proc.), 43.
Simotes woodmasoni, 178.
Sinkip Island, Lizards of, 84, 89.
Sitana ponticeriana, 92.
Siva, see Qiva.
Small-pox, Superstitions regarding,
198.
Snake-charmers, 193.
Snake-lore, 193.
Snakes, Oriental, 173, 208.
Sowing, Customs regarding, 181.
Spindle, Superstitions regarding the,
185.
Spongiphora sphing, 28.
Stenodactylus lumsdenii, 90.
orientalis, 99.
Stilts, Festival of, 193.
Stone Heaps, 197.
Stone Implements, 200.
Styes, Beliefs regarding cause and
cure of, 184.

a
Tachydromus haughtonianus, 139, 140.
55 septentrionalis, 139,149.
ap seclineatus, 140, 149.

3 smaragdinus, 140.

tachydromoides, 139, 140.

Tapa (monastery- -boys), 106.

Tattooing, 186.

Teratolepis fasciata, 91.

Teratoscincus scincus, 90.

*Theconyz, gen. nov., 151,

Tibet, Monasteries of, 106.

Tjandi Toempong, Temple of, 94.

Toothache, Beliefs regarding cause

and cure of, 186.

Transmigration, Ideas regarding, 197.

Trombidium grandissimum, Compo-
sition of oil from, 74.

Index for Natural Sciences with Anthropology.

Trombidium, Exhibition of
specimens of (Proc.), 52.
Tropidonotus himalayanus, 210.
‘. khasiensis, 210.
‘ nicobarensis, 174, 175.
ag nicobaricus, 174.
2 nicobariensis, 174.
m piscator, 174, 175.
55 stolatus, 175.
soiree, 210.
Tr Sma onhorin berdmorii, 150.
yunnanensis, 150.
Typhlopide, 178, 208.
Typhlops acutus, 209.
» andamanensis, 173, 175.
» braminus, 178, 175.
* kapaladua, sp. nov.,
209.
3 mulleri, 208.
, oatesii, 178, 176.

living

208-

U

Uraons, Religion and customs of the
(Proc.), 43.
Uromasti« asmussii, 93.
Pe hardwickii, 938.
5 microlepis, 151.

Vv

Varanide, 90, 93.
Varanus bengalensis, 93.
» dumerilli, 90, 93.
» flavescens, 98.
» griseus, 98, 151.
», macrolepis, 90.
» nebulosus, 93,
salvator, 93.
Vermin from the clouds, 184.

W
Weighing Beams of the “ bismer”
type, Exhibition of (Proc ), 52.
Witches, Beliefs at Bilaspur regard-
ing, 188, 189.
Worm, Indian, of the genus Cheto-
gaster, 117.

Z

Zamenis nucosus, 175.

OX EOE OO

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL

New Series.
Vol. 1.—1905.

<= fe~—

Four new Copper-Plate Charters of the Somavamsi Kings of Kosala
(and Kataka ?) —By Ganca Mowan Laskar, M.A,

These four charters, each consisting of three copper-plates,
were sent a few months ago from the Patna State in the Central
Provinces to the Asiatic Society of Bengal, and the task of deci-
phering them was entrusted tome. They form an addition to the
series of six charters of the Somavamsi Kings edited or re-edited
by Mr. Fleet in the Hpigraphia Indica (Volume III, pages 323 to
359). Four of the published charters were granted by Maha-
Bhayagupta I, one by Maha-Sivagupta and the last by Maha-

Bhayagupta IJ. Of the four new charters one belongs to the first
and the remaining three to the second of these kings. Thus we
now possess five land-grant charters of Mahaé-Bhavagupta I, four
of his son Maha-Sivagupta and one of the latter’s son Maha-Bhava-
gupta Il. <A copper-plate charter granted by Puiija, a feudatory
chief under Maha-Bhavagupta II, in the 13th year of the latter’s
reign, has been edited by Dr. Kielhorn in Hpi. Indica, Volume IV.
(page 254, &e.). Bus C

The language and forms of expressions of the new charters
are much the same with those employed in the old ones. The
characters in which they are inscribed are the same. They do not
bring out any new important facts about the history or the identifica-
tion of the grantors, except the names of the villages granted and.

‘ afew other minor details scarcely worthy of notice. The his-
torical and paleographical remarks made by Mr. Fleet on the
old ‘records apply equally to the new ones. Yet a few words may
not be unnecessary to serve as an introduction to the account of the
newly-discovered copper-plates given in the following pages.

Mr. Fleet calls his charters as A, B, C, D, Hand F; the new
ones may be named G, H, I and J respectively. These ten
charters, together with the one granted by Puhja, are the
only records that we possess of this dynasty. They disclose

2 - Charters of the Somavamsi Kings. [January, 1905.

to us the names of four successive kings, viz., (1) Sivagupta,
(2) Maha-Bhavagupta I al/as Janamejaya, (3) Maha-Siva-
gupta alias Yayati, and (4) Maha-Bhayvagupta IT alias Bhima-
ratha. Hach of the first three was the father of his successor.
They call themselves as members of the Somakula (lunar race)
and as the ‘lords of the three Kalingas. They grant lands
in the different districts of the Kogala country. In the orants
B, C and D, issued in the thirty-first year of his reign, Maha-
Bhavacupta i is referred to by the title Kogalendra (lord of Koégala).
Charter J is said to have been written by a clerk of the office of the
‘minister for peace and war® of the Kosala country. These facts
prove beyond doubt that these kings ruled over the Kogala country,
or at least a part of it. About five of the copper-plate charters were
found in the Native State of Patna in the Central Provinces, and
the remaining five in the neighbourhood of Kataka (or Cuttuk).
The charters of Maha-Sivagupta and his son are issued from
Vinitapura and Yayatinagara, towns or a town on the Mahanadi
river. The village granted by the charter EH is said to be situated
in Daksina-Tosala* which may bea mistake for Daksina-
Kosala or Southern Kogala. These facts show that-it was Dak-
shina-Kogala (or southern Kosala), identifiable with the south-
eastern parts of the Central Provinces, which was included i in
the kingdom of these kings. ;

Mr. Fleet thinks that these kings ruled over- Orissa also and
had their capital at Katak (Cuttack), and that both Vinitapura and
-Yayatinagara, the issuing places of the charters of Maha-Sivagupta
and his son, were identical with it. His view is based upon the
word ‘ Vijaya-kataka,’ which is applied to the issuing places of
Maha-Bhayagupta I’s charters. He considers it to be a proper
name denoting the modern town Cuttuk. The collocation of words
in which the term occurs would suggest another meaning. The ex-

pressions qralaearatfaasian fasaazatq and ereravaratfad-

* The word Tosali as the name of some country in or near Orissa is as
-old at least as the third century B.C. The two separate edicts of Asoka
found in the version of Dhauli in Orissa are addressed to the officials at
-Tosali.-. The expressions “Ubhaya Tosalyam” (i.e., in both divisions of
Tosali) and “ Daksina Tosalyam Franea (doubtful) visaye ” (7.e., in the Franga
visaya or district in Southern Tosali) occur in an old copper-plate grant found
-in some Native State in Orissa. It is written in the old Gupta characters
-and cannot be of a date later than the 5th Century A.D. It is clear from the
-above that Tosali was a country very near to, if not comprised in, the posses-
sions of the SomavamSi kings under notice.. So we cannot be free from doubt
_when we take Daksina Tosala as a mistake for Daksina Kosala (Southern
Kosala). Only two small fragments of the plate mentioned above were found.
‘The inscription was very sadly damaged. The name of any king could
‘not be found. The few words that could be satisfactorily deciphered convinced
me that it was certainly a land-grant charter. A seal was received with the
above fragments. It was circular in shape and had a diameter of two-and-a-
half inches. One face of it contained in its upper half a female figure, seated
-on a lotus, with two elephants (one on each side) having their trunks up-
“lifted over her head. This emblem is similar to that found on the seals of
-the: Somavamfi kings under notice. There was a line of writing below the
emblem, but it was too much damaged to be diciphered.

Vol. I, No.-1.]. Charters of the Somavamsi Kings. 3
LW. S.]

fasrqqcatq would, as they stand, mean ‘from the glorious
camips of victory pitched at Murasima and Arama, respectively,’
or “from the camps of victory of the glorious -king (
who was residing at Mirasima and Arama, respectively.” Mr.
M. M. Chakvavarti, who assigns the charters to the 12th century
rather than to the 11th as done by Mr. Fleet, objects to Mr. Fleet’s
interpretation of the term and considers that these kings could
not rule in Orissa, for at that date kings of the Goi evigs
dynasty were masters of that province.

The title. Tri-Kalingadhipati (lord of the three Kaliigas)- need
by these kings requires a little consideration. The word Tri-
Kalinga is a vague term to us. But it seems to be sure that it
included the whole of Kalinga with at least a few districts in the
neighbourhood. Now Kalinga was a strip of country between the
sea-coast and the Eastern Ghats. It extended to about Vizaga-
patam in the south. Its northern limit is said in the Mahabharata
to be the river Vaitarani (mod. Byterni), which river and the
Kalinga people the Pandavas are described to have reached at the
same time on their southward progress from Bengal in the course
of pilgrimage. - According to this account, Kalitga would include
a considerable portion of Orissa. But the limits of countries fluetu-
ated from time to time and there is no certainty that the same’
river was the northern boundary of Kalinga also at the time-of
the inscriptions under notice. Be that as it may, we find in these
inscriptions some points which would indicate that Kosala was
included in the countries known as Tri-Kalinga (or the three
Kalagas). The grantors of these charters have the title Tri-
Kalingadhipati attached to their names, but not the title Kogalendra,
(lord of Koégala), although they were undoubtedly the masters of.
the Kosala country. Indeed, by the latter title Maha-Bhavagupta I
is referred to in charters B,C and D. But this title is not used’
along with their names nor is it joined to the title Tri-Kalinga-
dhipati, which is almost invariably prefixed to their names.
This seems to show that the title Tri-Kalingadhipati was thought)
sufficient by these kings to imply their possession of Kosala also.
It is therefore probable that Kosala, (¢.e., Southern Kosala) was.
included in Tri-Kalinga (three Kalingas). Thus we see that they:
possessed at least a part of Tri-Kalinga and therefore the title)
Tri-Kalingadhipati was not altogether an honorific one as thought:
by Mr. M. M. Chakrayarti. I do not mean to say, however, that
the whole of Tri-Kalinga was under their rule. That these kings)
held sway over whatis now called the Patna State is certain. Two)
of the visayas or districts are called Telatatta and Ongatata (see
Table), These names imply that they were on the banks of the»
Tela (Mod. Tel) and the Onga (Mod. Ong) river. These rivers
flow across the Patna State into the Mahanadi and are found on the
maps. Hence the Patna State or a considerable part of it formed
part of their kingdom.

Sf Mr. Fleet’s identification of Vinitapura and Yayatinagara
with the town of Katak (Cuttuk) be correct, we may notice this;
fact. The issuing places of Maha-Bhavagupta Ps charters .are,

A Charters of the Somavamst Kings. [January, 1905.

described as faery wea! The charters granted in the 8th and 9th
years of his son Maha-Sivagupta (Yayati) are issued from Vinita-
pura ; while the charters granted in the 24th and the 28th years
of the latter's reign and the one granted by his son are issued
from Yayatinagara. Taking Mr. Fleet’s view to be correct, we
may say that Maha-Sivagupta, who was otherwise called Yayati,
changed the name of his capital and called it after his own name
as Yayatinagara (‘city of Yayati’), and his son also continued the
new name.

No grants of Sivagupta, the first king, has come down to us.
He is not called Trikalingadhipati, nor is the word Maha (the
Great) prefixed to his name. This shows that the powers and
possessions of this dynasty were increased by Maha-Bhavagupta I.
His son Maha-Sivagupta is said in one of the eulogistic verses
to have defeated Ajapala (a king probably) in battle and to have
captured thirty-two big elephants. From the third plate of
Charter H, which is the worst executed of the charters, it ap-
pears that he defeated the Cedzs and devastated their country
(Dahala).

I have made a tabular abstract of the whole series of ten
charters. This will facilitate their comparative study and will
save the trouble of going through the records themselves. The
abstract is appended with this paper.

Some Details common to the new Charters (G, H, I, and J).

As already stated, they were found somewhere in the Native
State of Patna attached to the Sambalpur district in the Central
Provinces, Hach charter consists of three plates strung together
by a thick ring, the ends of which are joined in a circu-
lar seal. The seal bears in relief a seated female figure with
two elephants with uplifted trunks. Other details of the seals
cannot be well distinguished owing to the rust that has accum-
culated upon them. The inscriptions are on both sides
of the middle plate and on the inner sides of the first and the
third plate. In J, the inscription extends to the outer side of
the third plate. The characters employed are Nagari of the north-
ern type and belong to that particular variety of it to which the
name of Kutila has come to be applied. The engraving is usually
deep and legible; the letters do not usually show through on the
opposite sides of the plates. The language employed in these re-
cords is Sanskrit; and except for the benedictive, imprecatory and
eulogistic verses, they are generally in prose throughout. A point
of orthography common to all these records is the use of v for 6.

G.—Péina Copper-Plate Grant of the 6th year of Maha-Bhava-

gupta’s reign.

_ The plates, the ring and the seal together weigh 2 seers and
123 chhataks (i.e., a little more than 53 lbs.). Hach of the plates
measures about 73’ by 5”. The ring is about half an inch in

Vol. I, No. 1.) Charters of the Somavamsi Kings. 5
[N. 8.]

thickness and 4’ in diameter. The seal is13” indiameter. In relief
on a countersunk surface it shows a seated female figure, perhaps
of the goddess Laksmi, with two elephants. The plates are al-
most smooth ;only the middle one and a side of another have their

ends raised into rims to protect the writing. The inscription,

which is deep, is in a state of perfect preservation. Although the
engraving is deep, the letters do not show through on the reverse
- sides of the plates as the latter are substantial. The characters
are ‘Kutila.’ They include forms of decimal figures for 6, 13 and
© in lines 42, 43 and 46 respectively.

The avagraha does not occur in this record. Final forms oc-
eur of ¢ in Katakat (line 1), vaset (line 24), dadyat (line 26),
Samvat (line 42); and of” in addin and sarvvan (line 7), in etan
and parthivendran (line 37). The language is Sanskrit, and except
for the benedictive and imprecatory verses from lines 20 to 40,
the whole record is in prose. The rules of Sandhi are neglected
in several places. There are several spelling mistakes which must
have been due to the Kayastha (or clerk), e.g., Are , eafasr , the
use of @ for w and several others. The average size of the letters is
about ¢ of an inch. Vis used for b throughout. FR is used for
[ in pravargeayanti in line 27.

This charter is the second of the two (A and G) issued in the
6th year of Maha-Bhavagupta’s reign. In lines 16 and 17, the
village granted is said to have been made revenue-free ( Macrae ) ;
yet in the concluding two lines a nominal revenue of five silver
coins a year seems to be fixed as the king’s share. The charter is
moreover called in line 45 to be a revenue-charter (Kara-Sasanam).
Charter A also conveys lands subject to a similar yearly payment.
In lines 19 and 20, we find the expression “ prativarsa-datavya-
vupyakastapalakaradanam viniscitya.

Abstract of the Contents of G.

From the victorious camp located at Murasima [or from the
victorious (city of) Kataka ]—

[U. 1-4] The most devout worshipper of (the god) Mahegvara,
the Paramabhattaraka, the Maharajadhiraja, the ornament of the
Somakula, the lord of the three Kalingas, the Paramesvara, the
glorious Maha-Bhavagupta-rajadeva, who meditates on the feet of
the Paramabhattaraka, the Maharajadhiraja, the Paramesvara, the

lorious

[I 4-5] Sivaguptadeva, [“‘being in residence at Murasima,”
(thisis to be put here if the interpretation of the description of the place
of issue given above in the Ist line of the Abstract be objected to) ],
being in good health and having done worship to the Brahmans of
the Pasitala village in the Pota district (visaya),

[ll. 5-8] issues this command to the cultivators and other in-
habitants of the villageas well as to all the dependents of the king who
may be living from time to time in that district, such as the Sama-
hattrs, &c.

6 Charters of the Somavamsi Kings. [January, 1905.

[1l. 8-18] ‘‘ Be it known to you that for the increase of the reli-
giousmeritand glory of our (lea arate: ) godly parents as well-asof
our own selves, this village,—with everything included within its four
boundaries, with its hidden treasures and deposits, with the freedom
from all lets and hindrances, with the power to receive all extra cesses,
with its ditches and deserts, with the exemption from the entrance
into it by regular and irregular troops—is granted by us with lba-
tions of water, after being made revenue-free—to be- enjoys as
long as the moon, the stars, the sun and the earth endure, - 2

[ll. 11-14] to Bhattaputras (Sri) Kesava-and (S’ri) Apya sons
of Bhatté Daddi, belonging to the Kausika gotra, with the pravaras
Audala, Devarata and Visvamitra, students of the Kanva sakha,
immigrants from Kommapira and inhabitants of Loisrga.

ru. 17-18] Knowing this you should live in happiness, nendee
ing unto them (the donees) the taxes, gold and other shares of their
enjoyments.

[L1. 18-40.] In these lines are contained the mnsindlaite 6 future
kings for the preservation of the grant and the usual imprecatory and
benedictive verses (for which see the translation of J.). [Ll]. 40-46].
This charter was written by Kayastha Koighosa, son of Ballabha-
ghosa and a writer attached to the office of the Mahasandhivi-
grahin Malladatta, son of Dharadatta, on the thirteenth trthz of
the bright fortnight of the month of K4artika in the sixth year of the
victorious reign of Paramabhattaraka, Maharajadhiraja, the
Paramesvara, the glorious Janamejayadeva. Or (dated) in figures,
Samvat 6, Kartika sudi 13. This revenue-charter is granted after
the fixing of the yenly revenue as five silver coins.

lake —Patna Copper: -Plate Grant of the 8th year of ( Yaya) Maha-
Sivagupta’s reign.

The weight of the plates, the ring and the seal together is 3
seers and 6 chhataks (or about 7/bs). Hach of the plates measures
8” by 53." The ring is 43” in diameter. The usual device on
the seal is visible. The interiors of the letters show marks of the
working of the engraver’s tools. The engraving is deep; but it
has been done with extreme haste and carelessness, so that many
letters and sometimes whole words have been omitted through
mistake. The record is full of spelling mistakes and other gross
inaccuracies. The material is very soft; so that the edges of the
engraved lines have been pressed up considerably above the sur-
face of the plates. For these reasons it has not been possible to
read the record completely and in certain parts, especially towards
the end, the meaning has remained obscure. The characters include
decimal figures for 8 and 13 in lines 39 and 40 respectively. The.

avagraha occurs in EE in line 13.

AGetract i yas ty

i is issued from Vinitapura. The place of issue 1s mentioned
in the words (Vinitapurat Katakat), which incline one to Mr. Fleet's

Vol. I, No.1.) Charters of the Somavamst Kings. Fi

N.g
eee ike about the identification of Vinitpura with Cuttak; for the
word ‘Katakat’ looks as if it were in apposition with Vinitapura,
The words may, under this view, be translated as “from WaT pe
which is Kataka.”

This inscription purpor ts to convey lands on the northern part
of the DaSanariya river (or the river, of the Dasarna country),
belonging to the village Talakajja in Sanula (or Sanrla) Visaya
(distr ‘ict) i in the Kogala country—to a Brahmana, named Kamadeva.
grandson of Harsa and son of Narasimha, an immigrant from
Maddhila and a resident of Jalajadda in Kosala, having the prava-
ras Gotrapa, Kasyapa, Vatsa and Naidhruva, and a student of the
Madhyandina Sakha@ of the Vajasaneya- (Samhita).

Lines 15-36 contain the usual injunction to future kings with
the benedictive and imprecatory verses about the merits of the pre-
servation and the demerits of the confiscation of granted lands.

Lines 36-41 tell us that it was written by Uccayanaga (or
Utsavanaga ? ), the Utthitasant (? ), son of Samamphenallava Ce)
by the command of the ranaka Dharadatta, the Maha-Sandhivigra-
hin, in the eid year of the MHD ‘lous zed of Yayatideva, and

“Lites 40: ve contain a versé ‘setting forth the transitoriness of
life and its pleasures and enjoining the preservation of the good
works of others. The next lines are very obscure. ‘They speak of
a powerful Kosala king of the Somavamsa (referring probably to

Maha-Sivagupta himself) who defeated probably the Cedis (atqrat
may be a mistake for Sara ). The last two words of the record
speak of the devastation of some place, probably Dahala or the
Cedi country (“setar fasrargarc “made Dahana or Dahala

uninhabited”). The same king probably was the author of the
devastation. :

I.—Patna Copper-Plate Grant of the 24th year of Yayaté- Maha-
Steagupta’ 8 reign.

Each of the plates measures 87” by 63”. The ring is 53” in
diameter. The diameter of the seal is 2 gui) . It contains the usual
female figure. The weight of the lenis the ring and the seal
together is 4 seers and 5 chataks (ox nearly 9th). The characters
ineludes decimal figures for 24 and 5 in line 62. The wirama occurs
in @rerg (1, 12), ware and q@aerq in line 13, and in aqareta in line
24. It is mistakenly omitted in ware and *¥T# in lines 56 and 57
respectively. Final forms occur of » in yarete (1. 18) cara, ATT
(1. 19) and attra (20); and of m (#) with a virama below
in yeatfcaq in the last line. The avagraha occurs wrongly in
frarssarag in line 19 and correctly in gwuaytisfueRz in line 38.
The average size of the letters is 2 of an inch. As for the ortho-
graphy, we may notice the use of * (@) for anusvara in agtaenta

8 Charters of the Somavamsi Kings. [January, 1905.

in line 61 and the use of » (#) for anusvara in Wee in line 9. V is
_used for 6 as usual in these records.

The wordings of the present record are almost identical with
those of J. Both the donor and the donee are the same persons
with those in charter J. Both these charters were issued from the
same place Yayatinagara. The only difference lies in (1) the
names of the villages granted, (2) the names of the writers and
engravers and (3) in the dates. The present charter does not con-
tain the verse in praise of the Sandhivigrahin (who is however a
different person here) which is found in J toward the close.

This charter purports to convey the (lines 25-26) village of
Deladeli in the Telatatta v/saya in the Kosala country to Bhatta-
Mahodadhi.

(Ll. 59-64].—“ This charter was written by the Kayastha
Tathagata, a writer belonging to the office of the Mahasandhi-
vigrahin, the Ranaka Dharadatta, on the fifth tthd of the bright —
fortnight of the month of Agadha in the twenty-fourth year of the
prosperous and victorious reign of..........the glorious Yayatideva.”
Tt was engraved by Vzjnant Vasuka.

For the translation of this record, reference is made to the
translation of J, with which it is identical in almost all parts.

J—Patna Copper -Plate Grant of the 28th year of Yayati- Maha

Sivagupta’s reign.

Each plate measures 93” by 7." The ring is slighty above 3’
in thickness and is 42’’ in diameter. The diameter of the seal is
21.” Tt contains the usual female figure, etc. The weight of the
the whole is 4 seers and 5 chataks (or about 9 lbs), The
inscription extends to a portion of the outer side of the third
plate. The average size of the letters is about #”. The engraving
is good and fairly ‘deep ; but the plates being substantial the letters
do not show through on the reverse sides, except very slightly on
the outer side of the first plate. Final forms occur of n (@%) in

alata (line 14), yarere, qT, —Tera (line 22), aclegre (line 24),
Zara (line 63) and-sgrq (line 64) and of (#) m in wentfcaa (line 75),
in which last instance the wirama is put below it.

The final form of ¢ (@) is found in the following ligatures :—
agi (line 12), | (in line 18), = (in line 24), @ in (line 73). The
virama occurs in ¥TREte (112); while in several cases it has been
omitted through mistake: e.g., in aTeta (line 52), AIG, ATT
(line 13) and fea (line 14). The avagraha occurs incorrectly in
‘ferrssitara and correctly in csaserfiufad (line 73). As regards
the orthography, we may notice that are is written for ar@, and

fagen for feeeu1 The use of v for b is aSualt

As this record is the longest of the four charters under notice,
I give its full translation, to which reference is made for the mean-
ing of the rest, ;

£©

Vol. I, No. 1.] Charters of the Somavams Kings.
[NV. 8.]
Funt TRANSLATION OF J.

(L. 13] Om Hail! From that glorious town of Yayatinagara,—

| L. 1-4|—where the enjoyment of love is being continually
intensified and still more intensified by the close embraces (of
lovers), by which fatigue is removed, in which hissing sound often
appears and in which hairs often stand on their ends, although
such enjoyment suffers interruptions as the ardent young couple
show their skill in the various processes of conjugal enjoyment
with their eyes dilated (with excitement) and with their minds
subdued and fascinated by amorous thoughts ;

(Ll. 4-7. ]—where, even in the midst of quarrels arising from
jealousy, lovers, beaten by lotuses from the ears of women who
have cast the beauty of the celestial damsels into shade by the
ereatness of their endless and peculiar charms, have all their men-
tal anguishes roused to action by the entrance of the sharp arrows
of Cupid, with their hairs standing on the ends (lit. sprouting up)
on account of the sprinkling of the drops of sweat (from the persons
of the objects of their love) ;

| Ll. 7-11.]—where, at the tops of houses beautifully white-
washed, the places of assignation of unchaste women and their

earl ornaments were whitened by the clusters of rays issuing from
the club-like tusks of very lofty elephants—the rays which rendered
the autumn moon useless in the matter of dispelling darkness ;

[Lines 11-13] (and) where the fatigue of the women enjoying
conjugal caresses with ardent attachment is removed by the breezes
surcharged with the particles of water sent up by the breaking and

- swelling of the high waves of the Mahanadi.

[Lines 13-16| There was on the earth a beautiful king named
Janamejaya, who had a pure and mild appearance and a lotus-like
face, who had subjugated by the force of his arms all his enemies,
and whose spotless fame, well known throughout the three worlds,
covered the eight quarters like a canopy.

[Lines 16-18] From him sprang King Yayati, whose glory was
sung in all the three worlds, who defeated his enemies with con-
tempt as it were, and whose sword had its sharp edge made rugged
with the pearls coming out of the foreheads of the elephants rent
asunder by it ;

(Ll. 18-21.] whose sword rent asunder with its point the
foreheads of a large number of elephants, from which heaps of pearls
came out and adorned the bosom of the damsel of the earth in every
battle ; the dusts of whose lotus-like feet, as pure as the rays of the
gems in the head-dresses of kings constantly bowing down at his
doors, assumed, through equality, the lustre of these (7.e. the gems) ;

{Ll. 21-24.) who, having defeated Ajapala in battle, aston-
ished the heavenly damsels by capturing alive, with a smiling
face, thirty-two big elephants, named KAmadeva, etc., whose riders
had been killed,—elephants who had _ sharp and huge tusks
and whose temples were discharging ichor and therefore abounded
with flocks of greedy bees getting intoxicated (by dr: aughts of the
fragrant fluid).

2

“10 Charters of the Somavamsi Kings. (January, 1905_

[Ll. 26-29.]| The most devout worshipper of (the god) Mahe-
Svara, the Paramabhattaraka, the Maharajadhiraja, the Parame-
Syara, the ornament of the Somakula, the lord of the three Kalingas,
the glorious Maha-Sivagupta-raja-deva, who meditates on the feet of

[| Ll. 24-27] the most devout worshipper of (the god) Mahesvara,
the Paramabhattaraka, the Maharajadhiraja, the Paramesgvara, the
ornament of the Somakula, the lord of the three Rea, the
glorious Maha-Bhavaguptar ajadeva,

[ Ll. 29-33] being in good health and having done worship to the
Brahmans of the lishach at the village of Lluttaruma of Telatatta
Visaya or district in Sannavati, issues a command to all the de-
pendants of the king such as the samahatrs (@atee),* the sanni-

dhatrs (afqute), the Niyuktadhikarikas (fraatwatica), the Danda-
pasikas (ewwyttma), the Prsunas (faa), the Vetrikas (#4), the
Avarodhajanas (@atrysta), the Ranakas (<Twa), the Rajaballabhas
(<istaqa) &c. Gin the following words) :—

[Lines 35-45]. ‘“ Beit known to you that for the enhance-
ment of the religious merit and glory of ourselves and our parents,
this village, extending to its four boundaries—with its hidden trea-
sures and deposits, with the right to fines for the ten offences, with
the freedom from all lets and hindrances, with the right to mango-
trees and honey-combs, with its ditches and barren lands, with
its lands and waters, with the privilege that it shall not be entered
into by the regular and irregular troops—is, by a copper-plate
charter, granted by us as revenue-free, with libations of water,
to be enjoyed as long as the moon, the stars, the sun and the earth
exist,

[Lines 37-40] to Bhatta Mahodadhi, son of Siddhesvara and
grand-son of Paramesvara, an inhabitant of Ntaradi in the Lavada
district (visaya), an immigrant from Kasili in the Srayasti
Mandala, a member of the Kaustka gotra, with the pravaras Deyarata,
Audala and Visvamitra and a student of the Gautama Sakha.

[Lines 43-44. Being aware of this, you should dwell in hap-

piness rendering unto him the rents and ‘other shares of enjoyment
due to him.”

* garee—(Lit. those who collected). Prob. purveyors or collectors
of revenue.

afauta—Those whose duty was to keep near. Prob. Usherers.

faaantyatica —Those in charge of the Appointment Department.

queuifire— Those whose duty was to punish the wrone-doers.

fawaa—spies.

@faaq—Lit. an efficer who held a cane. Prob. Chamberlain.

qWaciysra— Officers employed at the harem.

ayweay— Probably a title of high distinction.
‘<TeTa@qu—Favourites of the king.

Vol. I, No 1.] Charters of the Somavamst Kings. 11

[N. 8.]

This my grant should be preserved like their own grants by
future kings also, from a regard for religious laws and my own
earnest request.

L.46. Thus it is said in religious books :—

{ines 48-49]. Land has been given by many kings com-
smencing with Sagara ; whoever at any time possesses the earth,
. to him at that time the reward accrues.

[Lines 49-50]. . The giver of land enjoys happiness in heaven
for 60,000 years ; while both the confiscator and the pam who
‘acquiesces in so doing go to hell.

[Lines 51-52]. “Gold-is the first offspring of fire ; the earth is
the daughter of Visnu ; and the cows are born of the sun. He who
gives gold and cows and lands, by him, by that act, are given all
the three worlds. |

[Lines 52-54]. Fathers (in the world of the dead) clap their
hands upon their arms, and grand-fathers leap from joy, saying,
“ A giver of land has been born in our family; he shall become
our deliverer.”’

[Lines 54-55]. Both the giver and the receiver of land are
doers of méritorious works and will cer tainly go to heaven.

[Lines 55-56]. A confiseator of (¢ “ifted ) lands is not purified
even by the excavation of a thousand oe tanks, by the performance
of a hundred of vajapeya sacrifices and by the gift of a crore o*
cows.

[Lines 56-57]. He whosteals a piece of gold or a cow or even
half-a-finger’s breadth of land is consigned to hell till the destruc-
tion of the world.

[Lines 57-59]. That ignorant fool who confiscates or causes
the confiscation of lands is, being tightly bound in the fetters of
Varuna, reborn of lower animals.

[Lines 59-60]. He who confiscates lands given by himself or
others becomes a worm in the ordure and stinks there with his
ancestors.

{Lines 61-62]. The sun, Varuna, Visnu, Br ahma, Soma, the
god of fire and the great god Salapani welcome the giver of ‘land
(as he goes to heaven).

[Lines 62-63]. Ramabhadra again and again requests all the
future kings, saying, ‘“ This bridge of religion is common to all
men ; it is to be observed by you in all times.”

| Lines 64-66]. Thinking that wealth as well as human. life
are as unstable as a drop of water on the leaf of a lotus and under-
standing all that has been said above, men should not destroy the
good works of others.

[Lines 66-69]. He who surpassed the preceptors of, the kings
of the gods and of the demons (i.e., Vrhaspati and Sukracarya) in
wisdom and pride, who bore with perfect ease the heavy burden of
the state affairs imposed by the king and who had both policy and
prowess as his dear and constant friends,—that fortunate person
of the name of (Sri) Singhadatta (Simhadatta) was the holder of
the post of “ the minister of peace and war.” (afefaqeqe)

(Lines 69-71]. This charter, written by Kayastha Siiryasena

~ 82 Charters of the Somavamsi Kings. | January, 1905.

belonging to the office of (or a servant of) the ‘minister of peace
and war’ of the Kosala country, is to last as long as the moon,
the sun and the stars endure.

[Lines 71-74]. On the fifth tthc in the bright fortnight of the
month of Bhadrapada in the 28th year of the victorious reign of ~
the most devout worshipper of (the god) Mahegvara, the Maha;
rajadhiraja, the Paramesvara, the ornament of the Somakula —
(lunar race), the lord of the three Kalingas, the glorious Yayati-
deva. Or, in figures, Samvat 28, Sudi 5.

[Lines 74-75]. Engraved by Vinal: (Vijnani) Madhumathana.

[Transcriptions of all the following ckarters ate from the original plates. |
G.

First PLate.

[1] @ afel qufeaamafaasiaat faszacatq uz[-]
aul -|
[2] greaaziueitsmagesifaaguesieayta 42[-|
Hal -|
[3] Sax yeaugnaariifscmalaqafanne atage
faq|-|
[4] fa uagqumaenagasaes: ° gaat * utatfaral-]
ufaasarl-|
[5] feamtara sraai? aysy amfatiatag’s fase |
wifeaaty -|
[6] qawreanatant: aHee wiqure TeuitMR we wel-|
(7| foaa® Sfaaractusraisaguiela seats cismetaa(- |
[8] faa: eatatafa fateaaeg waai autTettrzal | ata:
[9] afafa: stufafa: aaararfaafa: aarafeacacieaal-|
(10) fea: arraua: aaa] ‘jax: ufafafagueueyaasd(:-| :

N.B.—The letters and signs enclosed within brackets [ ] are supplied by
me.

1 Read fq. 2 This mark of punctuation is unnecessary.
3 Read Rey. 4 Yhis mark of punctuation is unnecessary.
5 Read HTGUTa . 8 Read WY. 7 Read Re. 8 Read yy.

Vol. I, No.1.] Charters of the Somavamst Kings. 13
aa

[U1] fara: Hfaraitareat waza feafaasal-]

[12] cra aamrergtfaai atanfucfafatarai ats[-]

(13) yaaa vecasi[-|

Seconp Piare (a).
[14] qarasnterae| | ugeieteawal| afsaurerqe;(- |
[15] aaniasanaafafaanastuatae: aeaatatl- |
[16] fasts ‘quantstest “Srrmaiatactal-|
(171 @ ufaufea scare agfaautaiaacfecartel-|
[18] agquaafgate: gaa ufaawafata 1 urfates aal-]
[19] fatidfa’daaahiat wdiiseacatura |
[20] efafttatquiaattar auratal|] aaa |

Here follow the usual verses, being thirteen in all. Twelve of these
occur in Plate A (see Hpi. Ind, III, p. 343), and for the remaining one, see

transcription of Plate J, lines 56-57, gaw &e. The last of these verses end

in the words ala a: fr@a: |

Tump Prarn. [11 36-46.]
[40] ata factor afa qeaugnranaraimaifacsaqeay, - |
[41] <atemanatey fara arareqt® we i? arft[-|
[42| anrafaaraaaiemi waiga: aeaq' ¢ aifan gfe
[43] 23 fafeafas mrad agiafyfanfestaacastarce(-|
[44] waasfareneatsatam ayuataga | ofaal-|
[45] Bart wet acagqewsfa fase] aemieatad
[46] ea aa ayy

1 Read Gt. % Read @, % Read wg. * Read g, © Read g.

6 Read ar. 7 Read fx, % Read GaqaQzt. 9% This mark of punctua-
tion is unnecessary, 19 Read 4aq.

14

[1]
[2]
[8]
[4]

[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
(9]
[10]
[At]

(12)
[18]

_ Charters of the Somavamst Kings. | January, 1905.
nes

First Pate.

\@ afe | stfafrapugq aeatquelalanse‘eazay[-|
FLAS UIA LITT AS Haqaaae4yyy| Sr |q aTae |
ULAASSHT ULAUZILRAS UHL ALA Tal - |
aq afaaa aafagituria stag teaa ATea:
qual?
at alan | aqafarata asia
qvectmaclaaiaaagia aq asta”
qa: ATSUTAIS A feuata:
fafagnieuerauae | atsuaaaaqara ya |sal-]
aa Paetaayfera| errata) aratatata[ajara
RATATAT | Slataeaara | eV a[-]
ifdega [afeaurr] qoacaamacatafataaa-

aretaat| -|
ay AratastaATsaUIM shes aTATAAAT(-|
atin ofauet“a gaara austaaraactecal-|

* This record is quite full of mistakes and omissions. The short wu is
almost throughout expressed by the long one. In the footnotes only the
most salient mistakes are corrected.

i We have both the plain symbol as well as the letter for @.

2 Read qt. % Read gy for q. 4 Read. 5 Read =|

6 Read @ 7 Ready, §& short nu for long i.

9 Read fa. 19 Read short u for long a. 1!! Read short u for long i.
12 Read wy. 18 Omit the visarga. 14 This sign of punctuation is

unnecessary. ls “qq”? These two letters are doubtful, and may also be
read Wt, wax. |6 Read @t | 17 Should probably be corrected to F
18 Omit the sign for long 4. Probably the next word should be 47qw¥.
19 Should be q7HAaAgarTaaq- | 2 Read fy. al Read g.
#2 Read fe.

Vol. I, No.1.] Charters of the Somavamsi Kings. 15
[N. S.]

Szeconp Puate (a).
[14] what <egt:! vafg: aaa ufaaeatafa | urfa-
frsral |
[15] ufafidArteanaciat utrtteaemeqcuaecta te]
[16] argqursttat | awiatal warmed

Here occur the same thirteen verses as are found on Plates G and are
referred to after |, 2U of the transcripts of G. Lines 16-35 are as full of spel-
ling mistakes as the rest of this charter (H).

Seconp Prats (6). [1l. 28-40. ]
[85] WrAATe| -|
[86] axuqnugieaaesifaasuete caaRatfal-|
[37] safaafagifuafattaantataagy faaazcsy arel-]
[38] qed wafers yaust saica'ag aaq’ <
[39] ama afe (2 fafeafad atemad aetatefan teeta
[40] awettaenevaaaa | viatatattatssaataa

THIRD PLATE.

(41) Heimasaaa | safaal | fasrat areaa!! ataqa-
aifa | azat

[42] “taasuasatisifad acaanfady wlagalefaai

(48) sfastam: ataat safatuafasien xfa: | ate au: a-|

[44] wqaretg: eutaast faanteda | a ater

[45] weanatafes fafaa atafacamegn | wATS

[46] ufatuaguer anetfemzfaq agra

1 Read t%: 2 Omit the r-strokens. 4% Omit the r-strokens.

* Read q,- 5 Read yay. © Read ala. 7 Read egy. 3 Read daq |

9 Read ay 19 This is doubtful, probably fq is to be read. If so, the
correct form here would be wtaaate- | U Probably wary fererfar
Area is correct ; the word fawrat means an artist,

16
[47]
[48]
[49]
[50]

Charters of the Shinennd Kings. ([January, 1905.
aif aame cla: | HaMMtcacatna
q: | aqraga faafeasfas | aguusataerat
qeulaasuaa HVAC sSelafarat
GaAlx |

N.B.—The transcription of the third plate of H is full of doubtful points
here and there : in some places, they are altogether obscure. This plate, or
rather the whole record, was very hastily and carelessly inscribed.

IL.
CuHartTer I.

Prats I.

[1] @ tafe Gafegquaaat: eduasaet

[2] datas fafaatrizcamtsine avaat: | fateeet

(3) fa watfamauencifaaqtiqadcay val, |fraal-|

[4] & qe: aa Gye | CTaTHafaitaed| -]

[5] afenmergeatatiatdwtassaty vata:

[6] aanasetisat | stad sfaenheamencitentil- |
[7] aaa) wheqenaaeuaaaifgatatat(-]

[8] Fee | CMaNENReAAaatgi feat fase

(9) girerertonttaamesstes: aaaet [1] ware
[10] cacti fame gaat awd esarazamatay|- |
[11] aauteteeyae | CAwMeaqga GUE aART~Sl-]
[12] aiacatguniq | afeaatafaaegaat sate:
[13] faa wage 1 aerq Staafaancg 1 “Ttaaayfel-]
[14] aguautfacennetenseutafiaa team: | cs

Mipeeie letters aud siais enolosea eee [ are supplied

i Tee %. 2% Metre: Sardilavikridita. 3 Read efge, 4 Metre:

Upajati of Indravajra and Upendravajré. § Omit the sign of long 4.
8 Metre; Vasantatilaka.

a = No. 1.] Charters of the Somavamsi Kings. 17
-

(15)
[16]

[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]

[21]

[22]
[23]

[24]

[25]

[26 ]
[27]
[28]
[29]
[30]
[81]

qua yfauitaa wagta: Marea AaaAAaT-|
ql | et artcateqaraqgqagamay aeeaTEg-|

Puate II (a).

we | qaeHleaaa sanaamtaaifaesitatatrategen(-|
faal-]

atta: | *agtetafaarnqauanceqes feaaqaet
fagare[-]

aT (Mavs TAeafea ary | fratsagtal- ]
arsit a[-]

froaaufaae wtaa: « ‘afineattar aefaz[-].

waret|-]

Sire | WRAATS ALIA ZIAAS ATA FATTAI - |
wm -]

Hae Maqafasatsafagiuifamtaerwaqasaeg| - |
USA WMlaLAAIS AL ULHUZITAA SUA] - |
wat aagafasasatagiatastasifuag|-|
AUIeSs: FUT | RATeY aatazfaay
StSTTTa Taare aferata TaN |
wafer: anieeatanetaratuaten eueuitan ag - |
ugtra’ Fearattaaa aster aTtTTTT - |
aMety aatarsaiataattat: aaraiaata fal-]
feaneg uaat waraifaca ora: afafe: atatata:
eames: aaaiafaatra: wamfearreaate|-]

| Metre: Vasantatilaka. 2 Metre: Sragdhara, % Read H#Ts,.

4 Read Seeley asin J, 6 Read @faqar |
oo
vw

18 Charters of the Somavamsi Kings. [January, 1905
Prare II (0).

[82] a) wats: aera: aaaTAT: aTeE[-]

[33] =: ufatafaguguguam: a farnat ata Zaxtal-]

[34] ‘Sreafenfaanacre Maamersfar safaal-]

[35] we atfeatfafanara atasifaeal Facfeareaa

[36] utaaxays fadaegata ugataetcua Z[-]

[37] SRUITER SURAT ATE Ca aA ATA TT |

[88] ur aratfurermag waauisfiset ae atal-|

[39] anatae vfautfea aay aafaaua-|

[40] waactecenfesaaquaatgate: ga[-] mm(-]

[41] a aeafata [\] anfatre aufafrefafcanedtar ua

[42] <atemegutarg qefofearqaraatat [i] varate aa[-]

[43] ware

N.B.—Hoere occur the usual verses, for which see lines 47-66 of the text
of J below.

Prats II.

[59] wxaateat yeRUg EMA STU fUTaITAa|- |

[60] x ataqafaan fafagrfuatestaaarfazanes-|

[61] agafermagcufaeaet seTesare fa-

[62] wt wget gapatty aq’ ee arate afe 4 fafeal-]
, faz a-]

[63] ad awatufaneuaastecaaarda asiantatane-

(64) are aaiadtfa fantat agaateatcay |

N-B.—The letters and signs enclosed within brackets [ ] are supplied by me.
1 For Zaura SSS read sata ee. There is a sign above ¥,
which may stand for thee- sign. * Read qqfaufa Waqut| % Read eaqq

4 Read fagrfa. © Read AUT U

ol. I, No. 1.] Charters of the Somavamsi Kings. Ss

LN. S.]
Als
First Pate.
[1] @! cefa dafiasgqzraaat: waa Saat

[2]

[3]
[4]
[5]

[6]

[17]

ait aa fafaainizcasiternal’] aaat:[| ] fafeatfa
wat [-]

faHTayTTctawag AqAaegaratyaga: Wez(-|

a atal |] qewraad | Tartataa*aeqafeateatl_-| -

wears aaseate satra: acta -]

wiser aad Ufsqermenertenfaarara(:]

a wail
Seaaae araM faaataeae: baa -]
eenqas gi fart fasreal awe’ aa -|
ataamegales: eat [ |] aaricadaaw
fame qarat AeA BParaeaaatay|-]
AMINA TA: | HElASla Fat FA_eAT| -|
aaerqeiacatgenrg (| | waatataaegatat sat[-]

| mat[-]

e: faad wate: | aaq Maatfarnerg | Patasayl-]
farsa ffatrarastearautaferaa feat: |
tim agg uta uifsarag festarataredt aaa[-]
ame: “faetfaartiatqaiaqgqnaarmayaTe|-|
Varemgure: [| jawrealtlaad sas artaantfae| Jar.)

| fafatesal-

1 Represented by asymbol. # Metre: We atamfed.
aw
3 Metre: 7 . 44 Read gy. 5 Read
2 wre | wat iga W. > Read yfauriaea |
6 Read eqfez. 7 Upajati of Indravajr4 and Upendravajra.
& Read @ for qq 9% Read gia} 19 Metre: Sardilavikridita.
ll Read aft. 12 Metre: Sardilavikridita. 18 Read aij '* Read ¢q,

Charters of the Somavamss Kings. [January, 1905.
P Seconp Prater (a).
feurafararfa: | 'aqugmfafeatenserqarel-]
Se eC CCG utara watryeers | wal-]
glteanaaifunfactear| lgateraan|: i PRICE CERI
aal-|
amt antes ey: | *ataaPataarngaazegea|-|

fecruateta fagueagqgara ‘farraacea areal -]
zarte[-|

aay frat sammiaattt ataquayfraaeacaa & [-]

gitiaqueta wetrareateaageta: | AAT |

BAL WLAUIEN ASU faeMTAaTSTAHaL |

fasaatasfuufasrtae agra eaytetg|-|

WQMIILAA 1S ALITA SLHAT Ie aTaAT| -|

vaae aaqafasafsatagtuafastastaagal -|

UAeT FIs | TYTat aaagawataqaTA

ma afeuattaaraqarays aareeatqeretag [-]

wifaattin <wuifa ato faractaaaeral -|

RUA Tatgisataatfat: Sasa]

fa fafeaneg uaa waretfires ora: afafe: atyl-]

fate: aemrqere: waparatiaateta: earateRzte(-]

vate: ) wadtanee: aeraua: aaa [ - |
Szconp Prats (6).

wae: vfeffisegusuae: ata] -]

Hata axa “Sreafagrasyaers MaAT-)

1 Metre: Sardulvikriditam. % Metre vasantatilaka. 3 Read wt.
4 Read faq| 5 Read farat. °% This mark of punctuation is unneces-
sary. 7Read@, 8 fay. 9 This mark of punctuation is unnecessary.

10 Instead of qa} read qf |

Vol. I, No. 1] Charters of the Somavaméi Kings. 21°
[. 8.] :

(38) erent stafenes afaifstaatata stastfa[-]

[39] atcstteas ways fasyzegat|-|

[40] a ugmtaeteat seauqearalaray-|

[41] anaafafreaarstutara ‘aarfastce(-]

[42] = yerautsfset avammiaractae sfantte-|

[43] a saque aafaancfracatmra faa -]

[44] watgiai ad ufaanafafa aifaty-]

[45] = uufafréfafcaaediat whaleatewzal-]

[46] charg eefafearquradiar | aaidtal waar agiy

[47] aljen eat cisfr anafeiie | ge ae Fer
ufawg a[-|

[48] wae we 9 Al BeWeMET a: WeeTfa UIfsaT: |@eT[-|

[49] aq waaAtaseyt UeeaTqaINa | Cafe’auaTerta a-]

(=)
[50] Watefa fae: | ara wgaa a cade aeHTAL-]
(51) Sqn sue waa Batt waaay aagalt es aa: a:

THIRD PLATE (a).

(52) atea aq aety eat [| | ea eaea water ata
seat -]

(53) cafe foaat aeaaia faster” | afaerat Fe sta:
[54] a aera ufssfa [|] Matsa: ofawetfa ae aft
vara]

1 Read— wary | * Read aTanTaaar- | 8 Metre: Anushtubh.

4 May be corrected to Sateey as Fleet has done. But I think yea
also may be retained meaning “‘longlasting,” especially as all the versions
shew this form.

5 Metre: Anushtubh, 8 Read gfgay| 7 Metre: Indravajra.

3 Read wat: Metre Anushtubh. 19 Omit one perpendicular.

U Metre : Anushtubh.

[66]

(67]
[68]

*

Charters of the Somavamsi Kings. [J anuary, 1905.
fa [i] wat at qaaatat fad aaattaat [0] agtatat
uzea

aavagat a [| | wat atfen|etaa ufaem a aufa |
‘emaR TART

qe age 1 |] weAcKAtfa aaetea age |
OTA

ea afacaata gq wifeat [i] eat eafa’ aq
aagteaataa: | @-]
qet atau: WIN faatts @ Testa [)] “@eataTeaiar
st gta amet a fasta afayar® fueful:] ae
aaa y Uan[-] -
feat’ gaat fam ae atatsatet: “ [| | sam-]
fag unaafraeia afee [1] Catatat [sal]
aaa -|
qeulat ales ae utaatat wats: » aataara wif]
a wfsaaty wat wat arad caus: | “sfa wAe-
qnafagaiat faangfarm agesiifzag [|] aaa-
fae-]
qeay ger afe ue: yrattat faator [1]
| “rarraral-|
ariaqutauqersttuarn fat aaa fuaasautza|-]
qa aaaeaiva ||] aerdizafanacaata “Fai-
warel-]

1 Metre: Anushtubh. 2% Metre: Anushtubh. 3 Read qau.
4 Read & 5 Read y. 8 This sloka has six feet : metre Was.
1 Read -fgar. 8 Metre;: Anushtubh. 9 Read gy. 19 Read a

1l Metre: Anushtubh. 12 Read wat /8 Read -aq §- |
~)

14 Read We

15
Metre: Salini. 16 Metre: Pushpitagra. 17 Metre Sardilavikridita.

18 Read @ for anusvéra .

Vol. I, No.1. Charters of the Somavamsi Kings. 23°
[N. S.]

[69] aaa Staraentafamene: atfageasa [ 1 |
atantaetatanel wala

Tuirp Pate (6).
0] aay edad fated wad wre oaqetaat-|
[71] <a | WeaAIsae eRUgRAASUMyaraTTa|-|
[72] ae ataqufasafaatagifanta stagaifaeae gl-]
[73] semafarausaszifiatad aaqet® wens
|] ferns fast vet wae fa wag R= RTE
[75] ofey fary “fart arauratqatfeay’ 1

1 Probably awelastataateaura is the correct expression, meaning
“belonging to the office of the minister of peace and war of the Kosala
country.”

@ata—The sign of wis not very distinct; it looks more like the
sign of a ‘full stop. The word must, however, be either Aya or YATA.
Tt is derived most probably from root Wd. It is equivalent in meaning to
yfaqe in line 42 of A, line 47 of B, line 40 of G. The three letters may also
be read as Yam, & mistake for aaa, a servant.

8 Read daqge| Read—aiwa

45, F aa H have fas al, which is probably the correct form, This
was probably an official title. I has faata.

bRead aTWq |

Vol. I, No. 1.] Charters of the Sumavamsi Kings. * 25
LN. 8.]
A TapuLar ABSTRACT OF THE ELEVEN CHARTERS.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 lL 12 13 14 15 16
| Dare.
The dis-
: trict or Place from
The place A «| Country Country - ar
No, | Place of Guede of from which| Villages Nitya in in which | Grantee’s | Grantee’s jin which whieh the Writ Ree b ‘ R
Se ira, ge ana res the charter] granted. sree La (7) is name _ | Residence.| (10) is Peseta rer wee PET ANCL MARES:
Ons Month ete. | is issued. Mewes nod situated. situated, grant Bre
b b
$3 situated.
ha
£
oe
I| Patna. |Maha-Bha-| 6] Asadha, | Victorious |Vakavedda| Ongatata, (1) Dama- | Leisrnga. Pampaisa- The Malladha- ony In A and
A vagupta I sndi 8, camp at ka. rasi. Ka@yusthau | radatta. G, the
alias Jana- Murasima. (2) Nara- | Ksanda- O06 Odiya | Koighosa, grants are
mejaya, paganda’s| ksetra. Srnga. son of made sub-
gon. ; , : Vallabh- ject to the
(8) Vasu- | Lipatunga. ont Konka- ghosa, payment
deva. ledda (who be- of a small
(4) Konda-| Pampa- Kalinga, | longed to revenue.
deva, sarasi. the office
the son of
Matladhar-
datta.)
an 3 y 6 | Kartika, 5 Pasitala. Pota. | [*Kosala.]/(1) KeSava| Loisrnga. cD Komma- | K@yastha |Molladatta, Do.
G sudi 13, and pira. Koighosa son of
(2) Apya. (son of Dhara-
Vallabha- datta,
ghosa.)
TIl| Chandwar i 31 | MargaSira,| Victorious|(1) Randa | Pova.* Kosala, |SAdhadrana,| Torvvund.| Kosala,| Ttakari. | Kayastha |Malladatta,] Madhava | In B,C, D,
(near sudi 13, | camp at and (the Ma- Mahiika (the son of | the other
Katak), Arima. | (2) Alan- hattama), son of | Ranaka), | Vasu. |name Ja-
dala. L Priyanka- bamejaya
raditya. isnot men-
tioned.
Hy OPES . » %) Arkigrima, (Gee ” ” ” ” » ” ” ” Do.
tak, shanda),
y Katak. ; m i. > Bu(eaet) Sandana, 5 y rf ” » » ” ” Do.
enda.
— «
iW Patna, |Maha-Siva-| 8 " Victorious | Talakujja.| Sanrla. . Kémadeya.| Jolajadda, » |Médhdhila| Uccha- |Dharadatta) Vijnani | This is the
upta, alias, camp yaniga(the| (the Madhava, |. obscurest
Yayati. (Katak), utthita- | Ranaka). sonof |of the
Vinitapura sant), son Vasu. charters.
of Samam-'
phenallava,
by com-
mand of
Dhara-
datta,

wee NS | ee ee | ee ee eee ee ae

ce

“Though the name of the country isnot given, I suppose it must be Kosala, For Poyain B should be read Pota. The letter looks like ¢ rather than v.

26 Charters of the Somavamsi Kings. [Janvary, 1905.
A Tasutar Agstract of THE Hunyen Cuarters—Continued.
A le ee 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Date. |
|
; Place from
: of & The dis- . H 3 ; which the : Mahasan-
No. ies Gite IE a Bice of ee trict or | Country. gee & Hees Country.| grantee is| Writer. abivire: Engraver. | REMARKS.
=| Months, | Witieaye ar ie
| Bf aa grant. :
ae
| mE :
5 |
| 8
|
VII| Katak. fi 9 | Jyaistha, | Vinitapural Chanda- | Marada, |Dakshina-) Sankha- | (Sri) Sila-) Odra, |(S1i) balla. Cchic- | Vijiiani ncn
m0} sudi 13, (grama). Tosala. pani. |bhanjapati. grama in chatesva. | Madhava.
[Prob. a Madhya- |
mistake for deSa.
Kosala,
Fleet].
Vill] Patna, |Maha-Siva-| 24 | Asddha, | Yaydtina-| Heldheli | Velatatta.| Kosala. |Mahodadhi|Ntaradi in Kasili in | Tathagata,|Dharadatta ood
I gupta, alias’ sudi 5. gara, for Dela- Lavada- Sravasti- ja Kayasthal (the
Yay Ati. deli], (vishaya), mandala, | (writer) of] Ranaka),
the office of|
the Maha-
sandhivyi-
grahin.
1X » ” 28 » Llutta- 0 % 3 m . Kiyastha | Singha- The AY
J ruma. in Sanna- Stryasena |datta (M.S.| Vijfiani
vati. (of the of the Madhu-
office ofthe} Kosala). | mathana,
Mahasan-
dhivigra-
hin.
X}Prob. nenr,|Maha-Bha-| 3 | Margasira, n Gandasimi-| Sakhanga- p Raccho, Singoi | Kosala.} Kasilli- | Mangala- | Singha- The 00
FF) Katak. |vagupta IT, sudi 3. nilli dyanha. the ranaka,| (grama) in bhatta- datta. datta. Vijfiani,
alias Bhi- (grama). Deyibhoga grama in Madhu-
maratha. (visaya). Sravasti- malla,
mandal,

XJ) Kudopali | Ditto’s ; Residence| Loisara. | Gidanda aa (Bhatta- rat 05 Hastipada.| Purnna- af Written x
(village), feudatory | , 5 of Pnija (MandaTa), putra) Na- datta, son in a very
Bargarh | chief, a 1895 at Va (2) rayana, son of Kirana, cursive
(tahsil), lord of 15/3 = Mandapati. of Janir- the Sires- hand. The

Sambalpur) villages, oH Maha-Bha- dana, thin of second
(district), | named }6 a vagupta IT Lenapura. name,
Panja, son| 4 = was resid- Bhima-
of Boda. | 2 3, ing at Ya- ratha, of
a¢g yati-na- Maha-Bha-
R= Nec yagupta IT
aa) is not men-
tioned.
t

bo
~J

Vol. 1, No. 2.) Harwigs of the Indian Musewm.
[N. 8.]

2. Harwigs of the. Indian Musewm, with Descriptions of New
Spectes.—By Matcoum Burr, B.A., F.L.S., F.G.8., F.Z.8., FES.
Communicated by N. ANNANDALE.

Genus APACHYS Servitte.

Apachys fee Borm. Sikhim. Nos. 5301-02/14, 1802/6, 2552-
3-4-5-6-8-9/5. All nymphs. Previously recorded from Silhet and
Burma.

Genus DIPLATYS Servite.

Diplatys ridleyi Kirb. Upper Assam, No. 1332/9, 9.
This species has been recorded from Sumatra, but the specimen in
question does not appear to be distinct.

Diplatys gladiator, n. Caleutta. 16, No. 7336/14, and a larva,
taken also at Calcutta, by Mr. Nelson Annandale. Owing to the
distribution of the colours, I feel certain that this larva belongs to
this species. It has the very long segmented cerci that are
characteristic of the larve of this genus.

Genus PYGIDICRANA Servitte.

Pygidicrana eximia Dohrn. No. 5310/14, & ; Berhampur
No. 5962/12, 9.

Genus ECHINOSOMA Servite.

Echinosoma suwmatranum (Haan). Khasi Hills, Sibsaugor
No. 5324/14. (S. HE. Peal.) One 9. Also a fragment which
I refer with doubt to this species, labelled Calcutta, and another
fragment from Sikhim, No. 2560/5. The species is abundant in
Java, Sumatra, etc.

Genus FORCIPULA Bottvar.

Forcipula trispinosa (Dohrn). Sikhim, Nos. 8858/13, &.
5308/14 9, 5315/14, &.

Forcipula quadrispinosa (Dohrn). Sikhim, Nos. 5319-26-29/14.
All females. Both these species are previously known from India
and Burmah.

Forcipula decolyi Borm. Sibsaugor, (8S. EH, Peal), 1¢, No.
5317/14, Previously recorded from Madras.

Genus LABIDURA Leacu. “

Labidura bengulensis (Dohrn.) Berhampur, No, 5960-1-3-4-
5/12. 2 @ 8,3 9 9. Hardware, (J Wood-Mason), 1 é, No.
5320/14. Calcutta, 1 ¢ & 1 9, (Mus. Collr.) Also a larva, Ber-
hampur, No. 5969/12.

28 Earwigs of the Indian Museum. [ February, 1905

Labidura riparia (Pall.) var. inermis Brunner. Bérhampur,
Nos. 5967-8/12. 1 6,19. Calcutta, 18 o¢ 3,42 9 9, 25 larve.

Labidura riparia (Pallas.) Type form. Bangalore, (Cameron).
No. 5314/14, 1¢. Berhampur, No. 5966/12,2¢9. Seistan Bound-
ary Commission, 16. Dehra Dun, No. 6337/8, larva.

Labidura lividipes (Dufour.), Ranchi, No. 8426/12. Calcutta,
Nos. 5577/12, 5528/12, 22 9, & 8200/11, broken.

Genus LABIDURODES Bormays.

Laburodes robustus Borm. Tavoy, No. 170/5. This specimen
is not mature, but it agrees well with de Borman’s description of
the type from New Guinea.

Genus ANISOLABIS Freser.

Anisolabis annulipes Lucas. Calcutta, 20 3.

Genus SPONGIPHORA Servyitte.
Spongiphora sphing Burr, Calcutta, 1.

Genus CHELISOCHELLA Verru@rr,

Chelisochella superba (Dohrn,) Johore, (J. Wood-Mason.), No,
5305/14. 1¢.

Genus CHELISOCHES Scupper.

Chelisoches morio (Fabr.)? New(?) Hebrides, No. 5306/14.
coll. Distant), 12. Johore, No. 5304/14, (J. Wood-Mason.), 12.
Abundant throughout the Oriental Region.

Chelisoches glaucopterus Bormans. Upper Assam, No. 1330/9,
1é. Recorded from Burmah.

(?) Chelisoches melanocephalus (Dohrn.) Upper Assam, No.
1334/9, 1g. Recorded from India.

Genus ALLODAHLIA VERUGFF.

Allodahlia scabriuscula (Haan.). Sikhim, Nos, 5303/14, 9015/7,
299; Sikkim, Mung Phu, No. 6225/8, 18. Sibsaugor, Nos.
5322/14, 5318/14,2 8 o,(S. H. Peal). Dunsiri Valley, No. 5321/14,
1¢ (Godwin-Austen). Upper Assam, Nos. 1327-28-29-31/9, 2¢ &,
29 2 No. 5311/14. 1¢.

Genus ANECHURA Supper.

Anechura ancylura (Dohrn.) Naga Hills, (Capt. Butcher.)
No. 5309/14. @.

r

Vol. 1,No.2.] Harwigs of the Indian Museum. 29
[N. 8.]

Anethura sp. Shillong. No. 5312/14. (Godwin-Austen). 19.
Anechura metallica (Dohrn.) Khasia Hills, (J. Wood-Mason),
No. 5316/14.3. Kurseong (purchased), 1¢.

Genus OPISTHOCOSMIA Doury.

Opisthocosmia oannes Burr. Khasia Hills. No. 5323/14, 1¢.
Slightly different in colour from the type, (described from Assam ; )
the elytra and wings are bright bronzy castaneous instead of dark
red.

Opisthocosmia sp.n. Sikhim. No, 5325/14. 9°.

Opisthocosmia vivax nu. Dikrang Valley, Nanangs, No, 5313/14,
(Godwin-Austen. )

Genus FORFICULA Liny.

Forficula sp.n. Rang, Sikhim. No. 5775/5. °.

Forficula tomis Koll, Oiwake. 1885.3. Recorded from
Siberia and Japan.

Forficula sp.n. Sikhim, No, 53235/14, 9.

Forficula beelzebub Burr. Dardjiling. No.5745/5.9. Pre-
viously recorded from Dardjiling.

Forficula sp. n. Gilgit Exp. No. 3824/6, @.

Forficula celern. Khasia Hills. No, 5327-8/14. 3 @.

Forficula acer n. Sikhim, Mung Phu, No, 6724/8.

Genus APTERYGIDA WESTWOOD.

Apterygida bipartita Kirb. Nos. 5330-5361/14, 41, ¢ 3,619 9;
Bangalore (Cameron), Nos. 5364-5-6-7/14, 60 3,122 9. Some
very dark in colour ; also several fragments.

Descriptions oF New SPECIES.
DIPLATYS GLADIATOR sp.n.

Caput fuscum, postice pallescens, oculis atris ; occiput postice
carinulis 4instructum, suturis valde distinctis ; frons inter oculos in-
distincte bi-impressa: antenne typicee, pallid : pronotum rotunda-
tum, zque longum ac latum, pallidum ; scutellum magnum, palli-
dum, triangulare : elytra brevia lata nigra ; ale rudimentariz, haud
prominentes; pedes pallidi; abdomen gracile, leve, tuberculis
lateralibus parum distinctis, testaceo-rufum ; sezmentum penulti-
mum breve, propter magnitudinem segmenti ultimi ceteris valde
latius; segmentum ultimum dorsale quadratum, postice paullo
dilatatum, rufum, leve, prope marginem posticum medio impvres-
sum, margine postico recto, prope angulos postico oblique truncato :
forcipis bracchia valde depressa, basi subcontigua, margine interno

30 Harwigs of the Indian Museum. [February, 19065.

in dentem acutum magnum dilatata, dehinc mermia, incurva,
attenuata, aream ovalem includentia. ¢&.

So
Long.corporis...... 8°75 mm.
ph LOFCIPASHenease 5:

INDIA :—Catcutta.

A very distinct species, characterised by the rudimentary
wings, black elytra, which are broad but short, round pronotum,
and the form of the last abdominal segment and forceps.

There is a larva with long segmented cerci which, on account
of the distribution of colours, I attribute also to this species. It

also comes from Calcutta.

OPISTHOCOSMIA VIVAX sp. n.

Statura majore, castanea: caput magnum, tumidum sulcis
Y-formantibus, profunde impressis: pronotum oblongum, antice
rectum, postice paulo angustius, subrotundatum ; prozona tumida,
metazona plana, rugulosa: elytra ampla, granulosa; ale promi-
nentes, leves: prosternum latum, postice angustatum, margine
antico recto, paulo reflexo: abdomen medio dilatatum, leve; seg
mentis omnibus margine postico pilis brevibus spissis horizontalibus
instructis ; segmentum ultimum dorsale angustum, declive, margine
postico recto, integro; medio impresso, utrinque subtuberculato: —
pygidium prominens, validum, coins 2 acutis terminatum : forcipis
bracchia remota, gracilia, subsinuata, apicem versus incurya,
margine interno per totam longitudinem denticulata. 9.

2
Long” corporis...... 18 mm.
Fy OREN OFS 3 ooace 9:5.

INDIA: Drxrane Vauttey, Nananes. No. 5313/14. (Godwin-
Austen).
_ This is a very distinct species, characterised by the occipital
sutures, the form of the pygidium, and the dilated abdomen.

The basal part of the abdomen is badly broken, but the speci-
men is apparently a female, though the well developed characters
would appear to be more suitable toa male. It is possibly a male.

FORFICULA ACER sp. n.

Nigra ; caput globosum, rufum, suturis obsoletis, leve ; anten-
ne...?. (segmenta 7 restant), nigre: pronotum prozona vix
eevata, deplanatum, medio sutura longitudinali instructum, latum,
tfpite vix angustius, margine antico recto, postico lateribusque
paullo rotundatis, lateribus ipsis paullo reflexis: elytra et ale
edvia, rufo-nigra, lata; abdomen segmentis 1-3 fere levibus, nigris

Vol. 1, No. 2.| Harwigs of the Indian Museum. 31
ENE Se

‘upbereulis lateralibus distinctis; segmentis ceteris fusco-rufis,
punctulatis; segmentum ultimum dorsale transversum, margine
llostico incrassato, utrinque tuberculo magno nigro instructum : pygi-
alum magnum longum, angustum parrallelum, apice truncatum :
corcipis bracchia rufa valida basi subcontigua, depressa ac deplanata,
valde elongata: pars depressa margine interno laminato-crenulata,
dente acuto ac forti terminata; dehine bracchia attenuata, depla-
nata, Sensim incurva, inermia. <.

3
Long. corporis......8°5 mm.
ee | DV SRUC HO eese cen!

» force. part. depresse...2°5.
,» tota forcipis....8°5.

INDIA: Sixuim, Mung Phu. No. 2724/8. @.

This specimen is of the “ macrolabia form” of forceps ; it is
characterised by the long parallel pygidum.

FORFICULA CELER sp. n.

Caput leve, globosum, rufo-nigrum: antenne 11-segmentaz,
rufe, apice pallescentes: pronotum magnum, latum, capite vix
angustius, margine antico recto, postico rotundato, granulosum ;
elytra ampla, lata, fulva; ale longe, fulvee: pedes fusco-rufi:
abdomen punctulatum, tuberculis lateralibus distinctis ; segmentum
ultimum dorsale 3 transversum, utrinque obtuse bituberculatum ;
? angustius, tuberculis obsoletis: pygidium haud perspicuum:
forcipis bracchia 3 basi contigua, deplanata, margine imerno lami-
noto-dilatata, usque ad dimidiam’ partem longitudinis, dehinc
subito attenuata, sensim incurva, apice haud attingentia, 9 conti-
gua, recta, nermia. 9°.

i 2
Long. corporis...... 9 mm. 8 mm.
Pe LORCT She ane. Aietautawes bee 20:

INDIA: Kaasta Hits. Nos. 5327-8/14.

reivdebweieti udic € VG ESRD) Bi SAU BOY SE EAE

“ada. 9

cpa ee
epee

Vol. I, No. 3.] The genus Apus in Baluchistan. 33
ENS]

3. Occurrence of the genus Apus in Baliichistan.—By KE. VREvDEN-
BURG, (Greological Survey of India.

The following I was not
is an extract from aware, till a few
my diary: ‘“ Ko- days ago, that
hian, 18th Febru- the matter was
aay LOO. At of any interest
Thalonk there whatever, and
are some strange only drew _ the
phyllopods.” The sketch in order
above extract to- to be able to
gether with a identify what ap-
rough sketch of peared to me ‘a
the animal, is all Wey 3s CmaOns
that I have crustacean, not
written in my thinking that I
diary regarding could, thereby,
these creatures, add any informa-
but I am able to tion regarding’
supplement this its distribution.
short notice from The circumstance
memory, did not recur to

my mind until a few days ago, when, on showing my sketch to
Major Alcock and to Mr. Annandale at the Indian Museum, they
recognised it as representing the fresh-water phyllopod crustacean
Apus, and informed me that the genus has never yet been found
within the limits of the Indian Empire. Although, in the absence
of an actual specimen, it is not possible to determine the exact
species, yet the occurrence of the genus within a region where it
had not yet been known to exist appears sufficiently interesting
to be worth bringing to the notice of the Society.

Thalonk is situated in Latitude 28° 24’ N. and Longitude 64°
43’ at the foot of an abrupt limestone range forming the northern
border of the Kharan desert which constitutes a portion of the
semi-independent State of Kharan in Western Baltchistan. I
passed this locality while marching to Kohian, a camping place
situated about three miles further east, and did not have any
opportunity of again visiting it. Except for a few wells and
springs this region is almost waterless. On the occasion of my
visit in the winter of 1900-1901, there had been, however, quite
an unusual amount of rainfall, Heavy showers fell on all the
hill-ranges at the end of December and beginning of January.
Considerable tracts in the desert were flooded, and pools of water
rermained in many places for weeks and perhaps months. At
Thalonk I came across what appeared to me a pool of this kind,
occupying a shallow depression in the desert plain. It had
dwindled to scarcely more than a yard in diameter, and, to me 1t
seemed to be of a transitory nature. Perennial pools, fed by un-
derground springs, do occur in certain parts of the desert, and I

dA The genus Apus in Baluchistan. [ March, 1905.

cannot say for certain that this one was not of that kind, but
from its appearance, this seemed unlikely. On approaching the
pool I found it swarming with the crustacea of which I here give
a sketch. There must have been dozens of them, all of about the
same size. I placed one of them in a bottle of water, but it prob-
ably got injured while removing it from the pool for it died al-
most immediately. I tried to preserve it in spirit, but the bottle.
was accidentally broken and the specimen lost, so that the only guide
remaining to identify it is the rough sketch that I drew the same
day that I observed these creatures.

The sketch is drawn approximately of natural size. It is
quite diagrammatic, but sufficiently detailed to enable clear identi-
fication of the object represented. The diagram shows distinctly
the principal features of Apws, the shield with the main details
of its ornamentation, the anterior pair of eyes, the anterior legs,
transformed into long antenniform filaments, the expanded branch-
ial legs protruding on either side of the carapace, the greatly seg-
mented abdomen and the caudal appendages. The portion of the
body extending beyond the shield is proportionately longer than
in the specimens and figures that have been shown to me by
Major Alcock and Mr. Annandale. Its relative dimension is pos-
sibly shghtly exaggerated in my sketch. There is no doubt, how-
ever, that it really was longer than in the examples that I have
since seen figured or preserved in spirit, for I was particularly
struck, at the time, by its shape and size. My sketch shows one
pair of eyes in the anterior part of the shield. There exists, in
Apus, a third unpaired eye placed slightly further back than the
line joining the paired eyes, but it is very small and easily escapes
detection if one does not know of its existence. The caudal
appendages are much shorter in my sketch than in the figures and
specimens which I have seen in Calcutta. Perhaps they had got
broken in my specimen.

The presence of so large a number of crustacea in the situa-
tion where I observed them, appears very puzzling. If the pool
was the remnant of a larger pond temporarily filled by rain-water,
one can understand that they should have gradually become
crowded into a small space as the water receded, but their deve-
lopment must have been very rapid, for if the pool is not one of
the perennial ones alluded to, it could scarcely have existed for
more than two months previous. If the pool is perennial and
normally of the small size it possessed when I saw it, its crowded .
population is still difficult to account for.}

As noticed at a previous meeting by Mr. Annandale, it is prob--
able that the reputed absence from this country of many vwell-
known fresh-water invertebrates is due to our scant knowledge of |
its fresh-water fauna.

1 Mr. Annandale has drawn my attention to the account of the genus in
Bird’s Natural History of the British Hntomostraca, according to which ,
Apus can reach a length of one inch after three weeks development from the .
egg. It has also been noticed in Europe that this crustacean appears sporadi-_
cally and suddenly in an unaccountable manner.

‘Vol. I, No. 3.] A note on Haldyudha. 3D
pNe S.]

4. A note on Haldyudha, the author of Brahmanasarbasva.—By
Yoorsa CHANDRA S/ASTREE. S

Part I.

Brahmanasarbasya is a well-known book which deals with
the explanation of certain Mantras of the Yajurveda. Its author was
Halayudha—a Brahmana of considerable merit and talent. He
was a great scholar of Vaidika and Loukika Sanskrit. He wrote
several books in Sanskrit dealing with the different branches of
learning. There are different conjectures as to his identity besides
what is given by himself in his Brahmanasarbasva.

Pundita Lalamohana Vidyanidhi, the author of Sambandha-
nirnaya, says that Halayudha, the Prime Minister of Lakshmana
Sena, was the Halayudha of the Chatta family, who was honoured by
Ballala Sena. He also says that this Lakshmana Sena equalized
the rank among the Kulins of the Rarhi class, and was the son of
Kegaba Sena, and hence the great-grandson of Ballala Sena. !

The late Pundita Muktarama Vidyabigisa, who edited Veni-
samhara, a well-known dvama by Bhatta Narayana, at the expense
of the late Babu Prosanna Kumar Tagore of Calcutta, says in
its preface that Halayudha, the Prime Minister of Lakshmana
Sena was sixteenth in descent from Bhatta Narayana and was
an ancestor of the Tagorefamily. He wrote many books on Smritis
(Hindu Law and Usage) which are still extant. Dr. Rajendra
Lala Mitra and Raja Sourindra Mohana Tagore, the nephew of
Babu Prosanna Kumara Tagore, mentioned above, are of the same
mind with Vidyabagisa, only differing from him in respect of the
degree of descent.?

The late Babu Syama Charana Sarakara, the author of Vya-
basthadarpanam, a well-known digest of Hindu case law, writes in
its preface, most probably following Muktarama Vidyabagisa, that

1 Vide qeqraferpuay by Lala Mohana Vidydnidhi. First edition, pages 162,
163, 207, 208, 209,

“UPALAMZUMAMI SLIT: YAR TATA ATH, aa |fa-
naga faa case aeaAaaatteat | a
tat waty ata caate |

A Qo
aa earaat sifu aqudayg cafe afaaz
autfa w
fa vqarratagraiatiae aa-
AMA Sea SHAaIeAR AA |

2 Vide Sena Rajas of Bengal, by Dr. R. L. Mittra, and English translation
of Veni Samhara by Babo Sourindra Mohana Tagore (now Raja).

36 A note on Haléyudha. { March, 1905.

“this great Pundita (Halayudha) was the spiritual guide of
Laksmana Sena, a renowned monarch, who gave his name to an
era of which upwards of seven hundred years have expired. Hala-
yudha was a decendant in the fifteenth degree of Bhatta Narayana,
author of Venisamhara (a celebrated drama) and one of the five
Vedantists, who were brought from Kanouj by Raja Adigura and
whose descendants are almost all the Rarhi and Barendra Brah-
manas of Bengal.”
Now, three questions arise here for decision :—

(1) If Halayudha, the author of Brahmanasarbasva, did
really belong to the Chatta family as stated by Lala
Mohana Vidyanidhi, or the Bandya family as stated
by Muktarama Vidyabagisa and his followers.

(2) If he was the prime minister of Lakshmana Sena, the
son of Kegaba Sena and great-grandson of Ballala
Sena.

(3) Who was he in fact ?

At a certain date in his reign Ballala Sena, the King of
Bengal, madea gift of a golden cow. Some Brahmanas of the Rarhi
class after causing that cow to be cut into pieces, accepted the gift
of gold. Their names areas follows: Samkara Pitamundi, Diva-
kara Garagari, Douka Gura, Dokari Pippali, Martanda, Anai,
Ganai, Hara and Gopee Bandya, Dokari Mashachataka, Madhu
Sudana Rayee, Yaba Kusari, Narayana Hara, Kesava Dayaree,
Kesgava Mahinta, Sakuni Chatta, Nayari Tailabati, Visvesvara
Kunda, Bithu Bandya, Madana and Visvesvara Ghoshala, Hasya
Ganguli, Goutama Putitunda, Parasara Simah, and Samkara
Dingsai.

According to the injunction of the social law and royal com-
mand, the above-named Brahmanas, who accepted| the forbidden
gift, the goldsmith, who cut the golden cow into pieces, and the
Vanika, who bought or sold those pieces of gold, were all
degraded.*

! Preface of wawreyw by the late SyAmacharana Sarakara, pages 28, 24.

aa quaat aa et fama wife: |
al a qUHayaseen Gat qs! |
feat afeaqat tat qatat afaanteag |
fam: ufaqeietian aauateeqtat |
UPFE: Ulaqwl wa aststu a featae: |
aseisaatat w etafesa faust |
aerariieatar a auttsgeaat |
aaifag aurfay eretatat a agar |

Vol. I, No. 3.] A note on Haldyudha. 37
[N. 8. ]

Ballala Sena having observed this evil practice of the Rarhi
class of Brahmanas, selected some principal Kulins from
amongst those who abstained from accepting the gift and invited
them to his capital, When the Brahmanas reached his place
Ballala, after careful examination, declared them to be spotless
Kulins and honoured them. The names of those spotless Kulins
are as follows: Bahurupa, Sucha, Arabinda, Haléyudha and Bangala
of the Chatta family, Gobardhanacharya of the Putitunda family,
Sira of the Ghoshala family, Roshakara of the Kundalala family,
Jalhana, Mahesvara, Debala, Vamana, Isana and Makaranda of the
Bandya family, Utsabaand Garura of the Mukhaiti family, Kanu
and Kutuhala of the Kanjilala family.'! It is probable that Ballala
honoured the above-named Kulins of the Rarhi class about the same

time that he established the aristocracy (@t@#t=q) among the
Barendra Brahmanas.

aret etafsatar a Uat a AEs |

quifaag stat a estataraaisfa @ |

afentfefayatat eraifeaa FU: |

agugtaatar a aaaetaarea |

qt fasactsat aqatfacdaa: |

atest atauaal wzafaaeuay |

MES Bey ata yfaatandaa: |

faafa uae: wa: wEet fefeeatfaa: |

Bat Fal_alsa West aIHSs: |

qui aaa us mMeaatefa |

aay utsaa 3a ea aS aaa Z|

faafg: SIeRIe 3 seat Ta Wa Ua: |

fa qa |

( axe% afafaaq )

‘ABET Bat Atal Befaat Saray: |

AUFM™ Taras yea AZTUA: |

ufamtagarare factataraaara: |

MAat a fMUMtATAT Feta taTATAaT |

ABSUMAGMTal ASAT FeTUt: |

Zaut qaasa Surat ART |

varenast eat qadustateat |

38 A note on Haldyudka. [| March, 1905.

Some time after this Ballala died and his son Lakshmana Sena
became the King of Bengal. During his reign he found that those
19 Kulins, who were declared by Ballala Sena to be spotless, were
quarrelling with one another in respect of their rank. None of
them thought himself inferior to another, but everyone considered.
himself superior to another. This put a stop, as it were, to thei
matrimonial connection.

Lakshmana Sena,-the son of Ballala Sena and inheritor of
his throne, having marked this disorder of the Society, which
originated from malice, equalized the rank of those 19 Kulins who
were previously honoured by Ballala and who were quarrelling
with one another for rank, 7.e., he declared them to be of the same
status. In the time of this equalization Utsaba and Garura were
both left ont but were replaced by their children—Aita, Abhyagata,
Pundita and Badali. There were in all two equalizations among
21 Kulins. In the first, Aita, Bahurupa, Sira, Gobordhana, Sisa,
Makaranda and Jalhana, these seven Kulins were counted ; andin the
second, Arabinda Haléyudha, Sucha, Bangdla, Debala, Mahesvara,
Is4na, Roshaikara, Badal, Vamana, Pundita, Abhyagata, Kanu
and Kutuhala, these 14 Kulins were reckoned.! Ballala did not
make any rule in respect of secondary aristocrats (at? R@T4).
They became apostate during the time of Lakshmana Sena, and
consequently were expelled by him from the Kulin class.

In the beginning of this note I have stated that Halayudha
wrote Brahmanasarbasva—an explanatory treatise of certain
mantras of the Yajurveda. In its beginning he has identified himself
in the following words: “In the lineage (a4) of Vatsya there was

ATARLE MAA ABRA GAZA |
safanfeaeqrar: waat atHeAat: |
Ua da USHA: BUTT IMIG 7 |
Tis vyfaan yar sfaneuTIsqar: |
afe aaafafasanaqgazaiara |

Hlszat ware: fat masa gat: |
Ti fUMAALSY ASA: BAI sa |
afa yuRaAlacag |

aifaeyl EAA Qutaistazaey |
HSATMIUIa Vatatefaataay |
ufieatseaasa At FCSTAT |
aaa aya Ta agaist Tytaat:
fa farlaaatacag |
fasnyeaaatg |

_

Vol. I, No. 3.] A note on Haldyudha. 39°

ENS.

a pre-eminent sacrificer called Dhananjaya having a wife by
name Gochhashandi. Halayudha was the son of Gochhashandi by
Dhananjaya. In the prime of his age he (Halayudha) was a Court
pundita of Lakshmana Sena, in middle age he became Lord
Chancellor and in old age he was the Prime Minister of the same
King.”!

From Halayudha’s own version we know that he never
belonged to either S’andilya or Kasyapa lineage (aT) as stated
by Muktarama and Lalamohan respectively; but he belonged to
the lmeage of Vatsya and his father’s name was Dhanajaya.
Halayudha who was honoured by Ballala was born in the Chatta
family, and hence he belonged to the lhneage of Kasyapa and he was
one of the equalized Kulins; and Halayudha, who was born in the
family of Batta Narayana, the ancestor of Bandya and hence
Tagore family, belonged to the lineage of Sandilya. His father’s
name was Ramarupa, and he cannot be found in the list of
the equalized Kulins. For these reasons, we can safely say that:
Halayudha, the author of Brahmanasarbasva, and Prime Minister
of Lakshmana Sena, son of Ballala Sena, is a quite different person
from Halayudha, the ancestor of the Tagore family, and from
Halayudha of the Chatta family who was honoured by Ballala Sena.

Iam unable also to admit the statement made by Vidya-
nidhi, when he says that Lakshmana Sena or Lakshmana

‘aa aquaqaqaifea aera fastaa-
aA wage: aaafaqiai ux satfaa: |
afea sata ataaefa = faaaigaantata:
wai fuaamfarateareea: Wiad 4
tara Saaueuatasseet qafa: |
vatafea WAY aM asqat feat |
aga awl vadaetiaa Sat faaaraad satay: |
geil faa fafudtfazwctafuteaad fafa 1:
ae wHUAsagaaa: Blayagiad-
oc aaa: UAT ASIST |
aay ertiacientacane: STAG:
ead famneMeuNys ea ay alaa
ae alates gated auaateraT:
Faia aqueazqzafadatfuae zat |

SATUAARTAMAAE |

AQ A note on Haléyudha. | March, 1905.

Narayana Sena, the son of Kesaba Sena, equalized the rank of the
19 Kulins honoured by his great-grandfather—Ballala Sena, and
that Halayudha was his prime minister, inasmuch as we find in Hala-
yudha’s own version that he was a Court pundit of Lakshmana
Sena in the very prime of his age, while he became Laksh-
mana’s Lord Chancellor in his middle age and in old age, the
Prime Minister of the same King. It is stated also by Vidyamidhi
that Halayudha was honoured by Ballala Sena. How then could
Halayudha be in the prime of his age during the time of
Lakshmana Sena, the great-grandson of Ballala? Moreover,
it is quite impossible for the same 17 Kulins, who were
honoured by Ballala, to live up to the time of Lakshmana, his
great-grandson, without a single of them being dead. It is really
wonderful to observe that Vidyanidhi did not hesitate even to
make Umapatidhara a Court punditaof Lakshmana the ereat-
grandson of Ballala. This Umapati was a Court pundita of
Vijoy Sena, the father of Ballala Sena. He composed the verses
inscribed on a stone slab attached to the temple of Prodyumnes-
vara Siva established by Vijoy Sena. Vidyanidhi may try to
support his view regarding Umapati by citing the instance of
Joyhari Chandra, a grandson of Maharaja Krishna Chandra, who
(Joyhari) was present in his time and is still present in the time
of Maharaja Kshitisa Chandra, the 7th in descent from Krishna
Chandra. But it is quite illogical to say that as Joyhari Chandra
is living, so Umapati lived, inasmuch as Joyhari’s case is merely
an exceptional one and cannot be made a general rule.

Under these circumstances we must hold that Haléyudha, the
author of Brahmanasarbasva, never belonged to either Kasyapa
(Chatta) or Sandilya (Bandya) lineage; but that he was of the
lineage of Vatsya, being the Prime Minister of Lakshmana Sena,
the son and not great-grandson of Ballala Sena,

This Halayudha wrote several other books besides Brahmana-
sarbasva, namely, Punditasarbasva, Nyayasarbasva, S/ivasarbasva,
Mimansasarbasva, etc. Huis elder brother Pasupati wrote a treatise
on Sraddha and other ceremonials, known as Pasupatipaddhati.
His younger brother wrote Anhikapaddhati, a treatise on the
daily duties of Brahmanas. These books are still in existence
but not very widely known.

Vol, I, No. 3.] Pavana-dutam, or Wind-Messenger. A},
[ENEDS |

5). Pavana-ditam, or Wind-Messenger, by Dhoytka, a court-poet of
Laksmanasena, king of Bengal, with an Appendix on the Sena
kings.—By Monmowan Cuaxkravarti, M.A., M.R.A.S.

This poem was first brought to public notice by our Philo-
: logical Secretary Mahamahopadhyaya.
mEUTOcUCtION. Pandit Haraprasad Castri in “ Ness ‘of
Sanskrit MSS.,” Second Series, vol. I, part I], pp. 221-2, (No. 225).
A brief abstract of its contents was read by him in the Proceed-
ings of this Society for July 1898, which was reproduced with
some variations in his Preface to the above ‘“ Notices,” pp. xxxvii-
viii. He described the MS. as “ a discovery of some importance,”
and rightly, for before this, no poem of Dhoyika was known, and
even up to now this MS. is the only copy known. Its owner Pandit
Raghuram Tarkaratna of Visnupur, District Bankura, has, at the
instance of its present subdivisional officer Babu Atal Behari Bose,
kindly lent me the MS., and has thus enabled me to edit the
text.
The MS., on yellowish country paper, consists of 12 leaves.
(or rather 23 pages), 1383” x32”. It was.
Tho MS. apparently part of a large MS., forthe leaves.
are numbered on the left side from 151 to 162. The text, five or
six lines to a page, is 103” 113”, and has besides marginal
notes. The characters are modern Bengali; the handwriting neat
and generally legible. The colophon states that the MS. was copied
by one Ramagati in Gaka 1752 Karttika sita, or A.D. 1830,
October-November, bright half (of the lunar month), Ramagati is
father of the present owner. In the text are various omissions
and mistakes, some of which have been corrected in the margin
apparently by the copyist himself. The marginal notes are few,
and give no help in difficult or deficient passages. I have therefore
giyen the text exactly as it stands in the MS., the conjectural
emendations being noted in small brackets, and the omissions in
larger brackets with asterisks. Several passages, however, still
remain doubtful.
The poem has 104 stanzas, all in the metre Mandakranta. It
was composed in imitation of Kalidasa’s lyric
oem, Megha-dutam, cloud-messenger, (better
known in the south as Megha-sandegah). The metre is the same;
the story is an evident adaptation from the latter; and in several
stanzas reminiscences and even actual words of the Meghaduta
verses can be traced.

Contents.

: Such imitations of Kalidasa’s poem are
Imitations of not infrequent in later Sanskrit literature,
Moghadutam, as the following list will show :—

1. Wddhava-ditam, (vy. 141), by Madhava Kavindra
Bhattacaryya of Talitanagara (Printed in J. Vidya--
sagara’s Kavya-samgraha, Calcutta).

A2

Sg OoEt

14.

15.

16.

Pavana-ditam or Wind-Messenger. [ March, 1905.

Uddhava-dutam or U.-sandegam, (vv. 131), by Rupa
Gosvami, the disciple of Caitanya (printed in K.
samgraha).

Kira-dutam, (vv. 238 ?), by Ramagopala, the court poet

of a king of Varga (MS. No. 67, “ Notices” 2nd series,
Vol. I).

Cataka-sandegah, (vv. 141), by a Brahmin of Kerala
(J.R.A.S., 1884, p. 451).

Nemi-dutam, (vv. 126), by ‘Wileemma, a “Jena poem
(Kavya-mala, Vol. Il, Bombay).

Padanka-datam, (vv. 146), by Mahamahopadhyaya
Krsna Sarvabhauma in Gaka 1645 under the patronage
of Maharajadhiraj] Ramajivana (Printed in Kavya-
samgraha).

[Commentaries by Radhamohan and Ramahari. |

Pavana-ditam, the present poem.

Bhramara-sandecgah, (vv. 192), by Vasudeva of Kerala
(J.R.A.S., 1884, p. 452).

Cuka-sandegah, (vv. 163), by jLaksmidasa of Kerala
(Printed in J.R.A.S., 1884, pp. 404— —431).

Cuka- sandegah, by Karingampalli Nambudri (Oppert’s
List of MSS. 2721, 6426).

| Commentary by Eralpatu, king of Calicut. ]

Cuka-sandegah, by Rangacaryya (Rice’s Mysore List
of MSS., 244).

Subhaga-sandegah, (vv. 130), by Narayana of Kerala
(J.R.A.S. 1884, p. 449).

Hamsa-ditam, (vv. 40), by Kavindracaryya Sarasvati
(Burnell’s Catalogue of Tanjore Palace Library, p.
163a).

Hamsa-dutam, (vv. 142), by TPE Gosvami (Printed
in Kavya- satugraha).

[Commentaries by Nrsimha, Ramacankara and
Vicvanatha Cakravartti. |

_Hamsa- -sandecah, (vv. 110), by Venkateca Vedantacaryya

(J.R.A.S., 1884, p. 450).
[Commentary by Appayya Diksita. |
Hamsa-sandegah, (vv. 110), by an unknown poet, writing
appareotly | in rivalry of Venkateca, No. 15, (J.R.
A.S. 1884, pp. 450-1).

The story of the poem is very simple. On the coment is

a Gandharva town named Kanaka-nagart

Story. (v. 1). There Kuvalayavati, a. fair Gan-
dharva girl, saw King Laksmana who. had come on world-conquest.
She fell in love with him (v. 2). But unable to express to him her
feelings she passed several days in grief. Deeply distracted, she
at length begged the southerly breeze (v. 3) to convey to the king
of Gauda her message of love (v. 5). She then describes the
countries and the people, the wind would have to pass ever
(vv. 8-35), until it would come to Vijayapura the capital of the

Vol. I, No. 3.|] Pavana-ditam or W ind-Messenyer. 43

ENE SS
king. The capital and the king are then described (vy. 36-60),
Then the love message and the pangs of her sufferings the wind is
asked to communicate to the king (vv. 61-100). The last four
stanzas are personal or benedictive.

Interesting geographical details are furnished in the descrip-

Geographical tion of the wind’s journey (vv. 8-36). The
Details. breeze starts from the Malaya (v. 8), the
hill-range forming the eastern boundary of Travancore. GOross-
ing the valleys at the Hea the Cae it will go to Panda-dega,

7 ‘ with its capital Uraga-pura or Bhujaqa-

- Pandya-dega. pura (v. 10) on the ene if the Geer Estee
(v. 8). Panda-dega or the country of the Pandyas is comprised
in the modern Districts of Tinnevelly and Madura with S. Travan-
core; Tinnevelly itself stands on the left bank of the river Tamra-
parni. The Pandyas are known from very early times, being men-
tioned in the rock Kdicts of: Asoka, the Varttikas of Katyayana,
and alsoin Mahabharata and Ramayana. The capital Uragapura
is mentioned in Raghuvamg¢a, vi. 59-60; while the Tamraparni with
the pearl fishery at its mouth in the Gulf of Mannar is still more
famous. The Greek and Roman name for Ceylon, Taprobane, is
believed to be derived from this river’s name.

‘The wind will then pass by the Bridge of Rama which looks
like an arm of the earth extended to the Lanka-dvipa (v. 10);
and here lies the god Ramecvara (v.11). This refers, of course,
to the Adam’s Bridge and the well-known temple of Ramecvara,
described to be one of the twelve Jyotirlingas.

The wind next proceeds to K@iicipura, the ornament of the
South (v. 12), the capital of the Cola ladies

Colas. (v. 14). Kazict or Conjeeveram is one of the
oldest cities of India, being mentioned in Patanjali’s Mahabhasya ;
while the Colas have been named in the rock Edicts of Asoka, and
the Varttikas of Katyayana. At the time the poet wrote, the Colas
were the most powerful in the South, having been raised to that
eminence by Kulottunga Cola I (A. D. 1070-1118.)

Following (westward) the course of the Kaverz (v. 115), the

s wind will come to the land of the Keralas (v.

Keralas. 16). The river Kavert, which fertilises the
Cola country, flows past the great temple of Criraigam. The
Kerala land is identifiable. with the west coast from N. Travancore
to Gokarna in N. Mysore. Kerala was known to Patanjali, and
is apparently the same as Kerala-putra of Asoka’s rock Edicts.

Having thus gone through the southern half of Deccan, the

alvavat: .. wind will next see the Malyavanta moun-
i aa ia tain (vy. 18),°and Pancapsara the tank of
Masyakarni Rsi (vy. 19). Both these names are well known from
Ramayana.! Malyavanta* is apparently the central portion of the

1 Ramayana 3. 11.11-12; Razhuvamea, 13: 38, Pde sf?
4 For Mdlyavanta, see Ramayana 4. 28,1. The difference between
poetical talent and poetical genius can be well seen by comparing the

44, Pavana-dutam or Wind-Messenger. [ March, 1905.

Eastern Ghats between the rivers Pennar and Krsna; and the
Pafcapsara tank is to be located somewhere between the Krsna
and the Godavari.

Then the wind avoiding the passes round about the Godavari

5h S will turn to the capital of Kalingas, (v. 21) ;
Kalinga-nagari. om which it will go to the sea-coast (yv. 22).
It is clear that the Kalinga capital was near the sea but not on the
coast. In the 12th century this capital was at Kalinga-nagara,
which has been reasonably identified with modern Mukhalingam! in
Parla-Kimidi Tributary State, District Gaijam. This town stands
on the river Vameadhara, 18° 37’lat. 84.° 3’ long., about 22 miles
by map from Kalingapattam, the port at the mouth of this river,

From the sea-coast the wind will blow over the Vindhya-

Vindhya Moun. padah, frequented by elephants (v. 23), to

tains. the Reva with its groves peopled by Savaris

and its plains by more civilised races. The hill ranges to the north

of the Mahendra Mountain were considered to be a part of the

Vindhya; and this hilly region was then occupied by the Savara

tribes. The wind thus cuts direct north and reaches the source of
the river Reva or Narmmada in the Amarakantaka hill.

The wind is then asked to go to Yaydati-nagari to see the
amorous frolics of Kerali girls (v. 26). This
town has not yet been identified, but it is
mentioned in a copperplate inscription of Maha-civa-gupta.?
There it is said to be on the bank of the Mahdnadi, which may,
after all, be a common name referring to some large river. Any-
how it was in the country of Daksina-Kosala, identifiable with the
eastern part of Central Provinces. Curiously enough the people
are called Keralas,

From Yayati-nagar7, the wind will blow on to the Suhma-deca

on the Ganges (v. 27). Here the Brahman ladies wear tender
palm leaves as ear-ornaments (v. 27) ; and here the god Murari
resides (y. 28). On the bank of the Ganges is (an image of) Civa
and Parvati combimed (v. 30). Further up comes the separation
of the Bhagirathi and the Jamuna rivers (v. 33); and
Place is reached the capital Vijayapwra on the bank of the Gan-
finally 36).

Yayati-nagari.

description of Malyavanta in v. 18 of Pavanaditam with Raghu 13, 26 and
Uttara-ramacarita, 1. 33.

wafgiateaa: grad aifaiaceaca fers |

ae Wa aw eater 9 aferiary od fred u ceaT |
died Ter age-qcivateanat ara afer |
wrefew: rata fret qragraare: i we aia

1 Ep, Ind. IV, pp. 188-9,
_ &-Ep. Ind, Vol. IIT, p. 336,

Vol. I, No. 3.| = Pavana-dutan or Wind-Messenger. 45
[NERS =| :

Suhma is the old name of a Division of Bengal comprising
northern Midnapore, District Hughly west
of the Sarasvati river and the eastern part
of District Burdwan. Tamralipti was its port,! and Vijayapura its
capital. Vijayapura is apparently to be identified with Niadiah
(Nadia or Nayadviv), which was the capital of Lakhaniya at the
time of the inroad of Muhammad-i-Bakht-yar.? Is this name con-
netted in any way with Vijayasena, grandfather of Lakgmana-
sena !

The poet Dhoyika (or Dhoyi Kavyiraja as per colophon) can

The time of the have his time ascertained only approxi-
poet. mately. Being mentioned in Gita-govinda,
verse 4, he must be a contemporary of or slightly older than Jaya-
deva. But Jayadeva’s time has not yet been definitely ascertained.
Dhoyika’s verse is quoted in Jalhana’s Subhasita-muktavalz, com-
piled in the second half of the 13th century* and in Cridharadasa’s
Sadukti-karnamrta compiled in A.D. 1205-64 So he must be
earlier than 1205. He cannot be much earlier, for in the present
poem he makes Laksmana of the Sena dynasty its hero.

The ehronology of the Sena dynasty in Bengal is involved in
much confusion. It is therefore discussed at length in an Appen-
dix. I have therein come to the conclusion that Laksmanasena
ruled from A.D. 1170-1 to about 1200. He must have ruled
for some time, before he could be mentioned as having gone out
on world-conquest (v. 2). Consequently the composition of the
poem may be reasonably inferred to have taken place in the fourth
quarter of the 12th century.

The text with an index of ¢loka-beginnings and of proper
names, chiefly geographical, is appended.

Suhma.,

APPENDIX.
The Sena Dynasty of Bengal.

The chronology of this dynasty was, up to a recent period,
largely based on traditions given in the
HED ETE DBE ac Kula-pafijileas of ghataks Ganieiiokers)
and in such works as Ksitiga-vamedvalé-caritam and Ain-i-Akbari,
Recent researches are, however, clearing the ground. As the
author of Pavana-dutam, Dhoyika, was the court poet of Laksma-
nasena, it has become necessary to ascertain the approximate time
of this king, and thus indirectly of the whole dynasty.

| Dagakumara-carite 6th wecahasa “ Suhmesu Damalipt-chvayasya.”

4 Raverty’s translation, p. 654.

3 Notices of Bombay Sanskrit Mss., 1897, p. XX VI (Goi-dhoi Kavirdja).
4 . L. Mittra’s Notices of Sanskrit Mss. Vol. III, pp. 185, 145.

46 Pavana-dutam or Wind-Messenger. {| March, 1905.

Documents for From the following documents the succes-

determining their sion of the Sena kings has been well estab-
Succession. lished :—

(a) The Vallala-caritam of Ananda Bhatta (Biblotheca In-
dica edition) p. 61; Adhyaya 12, glokas 50-3 ;

(b) The MSS. of Dana-sagara and Adbhuta-sagara attributed
_ to Ballalasena (their introductory verses) ;

(c) The stone inscription of Vijayasena at Deopara (Hp. Ind.
I, pp. 307-8).

(d) The copperplate inscriptions.
(i) Tarpanadighi, of Laksmanasenadeva (J.A.S.B.,

XIV Eps):
(ii) Bakargaij, of Vievaripasenadeva (J.A.S.B., VI,
p- 43).
(i411) Madanapada; of Vicvartipasenadeva (J. A.S.B.,
EXVEtp. o>)

These show that the dynasty was founded by Samantasena ;

THe Sueddssion then his son Hemantasena who married

Yasodevi; then his son Vijayasena; then

his son Vallalasena; then his son Laksmanasena who married
Cri-tandra (?) ; and lastly his son Vigvariipasena.

The succession thus proved disposes of the assumption of
Dr. R. L. Mittra that two Laksmanasenas existed in the Sena
dynasty. It also sets aside the traditionary list in the Ain-1-
Akbari®,

The next question is about the times of the Sena kings. The
Fiyae determination of these times largely de-
ENOHE CEECHIG IOS pends upon the ascertainment of Lie
sena’s rule. For the beginning of Laksmanasena’s rule various
dates have been given A.D. 1106, 1119-20,5 1170,§ and 1172.7
On account of conflicting data, the solution of the problem is
not free from doubts.

The first historical fact to be noted is an era, known as

Laksmansena Era Laksmansena’s samvat, abbreviated to @e
: * ge. This erais still used in Mithila, and

_ 1 Of the Dédna-sagara, extracts from three MSS. are available (R. L.
Mittra, Notices of Sanskrit MSS. I, p. 151; Hggelling, India office MSS.
Catalogue, p. 545; and ‘“‘ Notices,” 2nd Series by Haraprasad Qatri, Vol. F,
p. 170). Of the Adbhuta- -sagara extract from one MS. is known, Report on
Sanskrit MSS., Dr. R. G. Bhandarkar, 1897, pp. 88—85,

2 J.A.S.B., XLVII, pp. 398, 402.

8 Jarrett’s Transl. Vol. II, p. 146.

4 J.A.8.B. XLVII, p. 398; Valléla-caritam, Adh. O77, cl. 4, ces va.
5 Epig. Ind. Vol. I, p. 306; J.A.8.B., LXIX, p. 62.

6 J.A.8.B.,:LXV, p. 31. :

1 Report « on Sanskrit MSS in 1 Bombay, 1897, Dp. LXXXVUT.

oo

Vol. I, No. 3.) Puvana-ditam or Wind-Messenger. Az

LN. 8.]
according to some modern calculations it began in A.D. 1106. But
calculating from six of the earliest dates (five in MSS. and one in
inscription), Prof. Kielhorn arrived at the conclusion that the
era really began in A.D. 1119-20. According to him the La? Sa°
was an ordinary southern (K@rttikad’) year with the amanta
scheme of lunar fortnight; and the first day of the era was
Kavrttika sudi one of the expired caka year 1041=7th October.
A.D. 1119.1 I think this is a right conclusion, particularly as
it is supported by a statement in the Akbarnama? and other
evidences.

The era is generally taken to begin from the first year of

The era takento lLaksmanasena’s reign which, according to

begin from his first an anecdote in the Tabakat-i 1- Naga, 3 bee an
year. with his birth. But this view is open to

Objections. serious objections. Firstly, it involves the
assumption of a rule of more than eighty years—a fact unprecedented
in Indian history and I suppose in the recorded history of the world
too, even if the rule began from his birth. Moreover, in the Adbhuta-
sagara Ballalasena is described to have raised his son to the throne
before his own death.* If so, Laksmanasena must have been of
‘same age at the time of accession; and his reign for more than
eighty years becomes still less credible. Secondly, in the MSS.,
the Dana-sagara is said to have been composed by Vallalasena in
Caka year Cuag¢?-nava-daga (1091); while the Adhbuta-sagara is
said to have been begun by Ballalasena in the Caka year Kha-
nava-kh-end-vabde (1090). These show that Ballalasena was
reigning in Gaka 1090 and 1091 (A.D. 1168-69 and 1169-70),
which is incompatible with the assumption of Laksmanasena’s
rule beginning in A.D. 1119-20. The MS. of Adbhuta-sagara dis-
tinctly says that though begun by Ballalasena, it was completed
by his son Laksmanasena, whom he (Ballala) raised to the throne
before hisdeath. If this be true, Laksmanasena could not, possibly,
have been king before A.D. 1168-69. Thirdly, it is curious to
find that not a single date in the Laksmanasena era has yet been
found earlier than 51, zZ.e., earlier than A.D, 1170-1.°

The wording of ‘The two known inscriptions of this era

the two inscri :
tions in this era. P- are peculiarly worded, and run as follows :—

(1) Crimal-Laksmansenasy-dtita-rajye sam 51 Bhadra-dine 29.1

| Ind. Ant., XIX (1890), p. 6.; Ep. Ind. I, p. 306, note 6.

2 © Hor example, in Bengal, the era dates from the beginning of the rule
of Lachman Sen, from which date till now 465 years have elapsed ;” Akbar-
nama, Beveridge’s transl, vol. Il, pp. 21-2. 465 La, Sa.=1506 Caka=1641 V.
Sarnvat.

. 3 Major Raverty’s Translation, p. 555.
4 Notices of Bombay MSS., 1897, pp. LXXXV- VI.
5 Catalogue of India Office MSS., p. 545; and Bom, MSS.,‘ 1897,
p. LXXXVI.
6 Jour. Bom, Br. R.A.S., XVI, p. 358.
1 Jour. Bom. Br. R.AS., XVI, p. 358.

48 Pavana-ditam or Wind-Messenger. | March, 1905.

(2) Crimal-Laksmanasena-devapadam-atita-rajye sam 74 Vaiga-
kha-vadi 12 Gurau:!

Literally, these would mean—“ years 51 or 74 expired of
Laksmanasena’s reign,” 7.e., his regnal years. But may not the
years really refer to that of a general era which fell in that king’s
reign? Several such instances are known in Indian epigra-
phy, e.g.—

(1) In the Junagarh inscription of Rudradaman—
. 4—“* Rudradamno varshe dvi-saptatitame 70 2.”

(2) In the Garhva inscription of Candragupta II—
1. 1O—* Ciz-Candragupta-rajya samvvatsare 80 8.°”
(3) Bilsar inscription of Dhruvacarman—

1. 6—* Cr7-Kumaraguptasy-abhivarddhamana-vijaya-
rajya-samvatsare shan-navate.’”*

(4) Garhva inscription of Kumaragupta [—
1, 2—* Cri-Kumaragupta-rajya-sainvatsare 90 8.”
(5) Kosam inscription of Bhimavarman—

l. I—* Maharajasya Cri-Bhimavarmanah samvat 100
3\0) 9), ©

(6) Halsi plates of Kakusthavarman—
1, 4—* Sva-vaijayike acititame samvatsare,”’ 7

In (1) the year is referred to Vaka era and in (2) to (5)
_the years to Gupta era ; they are not considered to be regnal years.
More facts are needed to arrive at a reliable conclusion. On
: the existing data the safest theory at present
sie eee ees is to take the first year of eae ee the
year. first year of the dynastic founder, and to
believe that on the accession of Laksmanasena, the era was.
either formally adopted or made so widely prevalent that the era
came to be known as Laksmanasena’s. This theory meets the
objections above raised on the ground of length of years or the
dates of compilation of the Dana-sa@gara and the Adbhuta-sagara.
It also helps to explain the following additional facts :—
In the Deopara inscription, v. 20, Vijayasena is described to
have assailed the lord of Gauda, to have put down the prince of
Kamartipa and defeated the Kalinga. In the succeeding verse, 21,

Ind. Ant. X, p. 346.

Ep. Ind., VIII., p. 41 and note 6.

Fleet’s Gupta Inécriptions, p. 37.
” ” > p. 43.

” ” 2)

I
2
3
4
5 5
Gas ok 3 “ p. 267.
1 Jnd. Ant. VI, p. 23.

Vol. J, No. 3.) Pavana-ditam or Wind-Messenger. AQ

[N. 8. ]
are named Nanya, Raghava, Vardhana and Vira, as (kings) who
were kept in prison.t- Presumably these names include the
names of the defeated kings. Who was the defeated king of
Kalinga? Is he Raghava? Such was undoubtedly the name of
a Kalinga king who ruled between A.D. 1156-11712 The early
years of Raghava (A.D. 1156-60) would fit in with the last years
of Vijayasena, if the above view be adopted.

According to Tabakat-i-Nasiri,* the news of the victories of
Muhammad-i-Bakht-yar and of his conquest of Bihar reached the
ears of Rae Lakhmaniah, when he had been on the throne for a
period of eighty years; and the following year he invaded the
Rae’s capital Nudiah and sacked it. Now, a rule of eighty years
and more is not in itself credible, as I have already pointed out.
But if the year be taken as Samvat 80 of the era during the reign
of Laksmanasena, as Professor Kielhorn pointed out,* the incredi-
bility disappears. This would make the inroad and the sack of
Nidiah fall in Samvat 81 or A.D. 1199-1200. This date very
nearly agrees with the date arrived at from Mussulman histories
by Dr. Blochmann, as A.H. 594 or A.D, 1198.5
No doubt Major Raverty held the date of inroad as A.H.
990 or A.D. 1194,6 because Muhammad-i-Bakht-yar who died in
A.H. 602 is said to have reigned 12 years. But this does not
necessarily mean 12 years after his sacking of Nuidiah; it may
as likely refer to the time of his first charge, when holding
the fief of Kashmandi (or Bhugwat and Bhiuli).7 On the other
hand, Dihli was occupied in A.H. 589, and Dr. Blochmann shewed
that after this occupation various events occurred with respect to
Muhammad-i-Bakht-yar which would have taken several years.
*“Tt would, indeed, be a close computation if we allowed but five
years for the above events, 7.e., if we fixed the conquest of Ben-
gal as having taken place in 594 H., or A.D, 1198.8

Laksmanasena’s reign came to an end shortly after Muham-
mad-i-Bakht-yar’s inroad.? From the introduction to Sadikti-
karnamyta, it does not appear that Gridharadasa was Mahamanda-
lika under Laksmanasena, though he says his father had served
him.!° Hvyidently therefore this king did not live at the time of
composing that work in A.D. 1205-6. 1200 A.D. might accord-
ingly be taken as the approximate termination of Laksmanasena’s
rule.

1 Bp. Ind. I, p. 309, lines 19-20.

4 J. As. Soc. Beng., LXXII, p. 113.

3 Transl. pp 554, 555, 557.

4 Ind. Ant., XIX, p. 7.

6 J.A.8.B., XLV, p. 276.

6 Tab. Nas transl., note 4 below p. 559, note 8 below p. 573.
1 % pp. 549-550.

8 J.A.8.B., XLV, p. 276.

9 Transl., p. 558.

10 R. L. Mittra, Notices of Sanskrit MSS,, III, p. 141,

50 Pavana-ditum or Wind-Messenger. | March, 1905.

Chronology of To summarise, the chronology of the
the Sena Kings. Sena kings would then stand as follows :—

Samantasena, founder (A.D. 1119-20)
|

His son
Hemantasena = Yasodevi

His son.
Vijayasena, contemporary of Raghava (also of Coraganga)l
(1140—1158-60 ?)
|

His son
Ballalasena (1158-60 —1170)
I

: His son
‘Laksmanasena (1170-1200 Cirea) = (Qri-tandra (?)

Sain 51, 74, 80, 81.
TInroad of Muhammad-i-Bakht-yar (A.D.1199 Circa)
|

His son
Vicvarupasena.

It is noted in the Tabakat-i-Nasiri: “His {Lakhmaniah’s]
descendants, up to this time, are rulers in the country of Bang.’
By “up to this time, ” I suppose, is meant either the years in
which the author was in Bengal, A.H., 641-2 (A.D. 1244-5) or the
year in which it was finished A.H. 658 (A.D. 1260).

Some discussion took place in the time of Dr. Rajendralal
Mittra as to the caste of the Sena kings.
In the Deopara inscription of Vijayasena,
Samantasena is described as “ Brahma-Ksatriy-anam kula-giro-
dama.”® The same term Brahma-Ksatra is used in the Valldla-
caritam for these kings.*

What does Brahma-Ksatra mean? Prof. Kielhorn translated
the above passage ‘“‘ head-garland of the clans of Brahmanas and
Ksatriyas.2” In Cuka-sandega v. 34, Kerala land is described as
“ Brahma-ksatram janapadam ;” and in note 11, the word is taken
to mean “ Brahman-kinged.®” Were the Sena kings then Brah-

manised Ksattriyas ? In the inscriptions they are said to be of
lunar race.

Did the founder come from the south? In the Deopara in-

: ie scription it is said that in the lunar race

Their origin. arose Daksinatya rulers, Virasena and the

rest (v. 4); that in that Sena family was born Samantasena

(v. 5) who singly killed the robbers of Karnata (v. 8), and who in

his old age frequented the hermitages on the banks of the Ganges.

Their caste.

1 Valléla-caritam, Adh. 12, v. 52, p. 61.

2 Transl., p. 558.

3 Hp. Ind., I, p. 306.

Adhyaya 12, v. 54, p. 61; cf. v. 45.

Ep. Ind., I., p. 312.

J.R.A.S., 1884, p. 409; for note 11, pp. 433-4.

es

an

Wor 1. No.3. | Pavana-ditam or Wind-Messenger. SE
[N. S. }

(v. 9); and that from him was born Hemantasena (v. 10). With
this may be compared Dhoyika’s selection of the southerly breeze,
and his high eulogy of the Cola-land as the ornament of the south.
Is it likely that Samantasena is connected with Coraganga of
Kalinga’? Coraganga conquered and apparently killed the Mandara
kine on the bank of the Ganges (Mandara seems identifiable with
Suhma ), after he had conquered Utkala! ; and Utkala must have been
conquered by him several years before aka 1040 (A D. 1118-9),
an inscription of which year describes him as “ sakal-Otkala-sam-
rajya-padavi-viradjmanath.”* Is it therefore possible to infer that
Coraganga, after killing the king of Suhma, put Samantasena in
charge as feudatory ?

1 J.A.S.B., 1895, p. 139, note 1; Do. 1896, p. 241; cf. also J.A.S.B. 1903.
p. 110.

2 Ind. Ant, XVIII, p. 169.

52 Pavana-ditam or Wind-Messenyer.

{ March, 1905.

INDEX OF PROPER NAMHES.

[The numeral figures refer to the nwmber of verses. ]

Uraga-pura, a town,—8, cf. 10.

Kanaka-nagara, Gandharva town—l.

Kavi-narapati,—103 (cf. colophon).

Kavi-Ksmabhrtam Cakravartt?, (title)
—101.

Ka@iez, town—12, 15.

Kalinga-nagara, town—21.

Kéveri, river—15.

Kuvalayavat?, the heroine,— 2, 62.

Kerali, nation—16, 26.

Ganga, river—16, 27, 32, 39, 102, cf.
335.

Godavarika, residents of river Goda-
vari—21.

Gauda-decga, country—6,

Gauda-raja—96.

Gauda-Ksauni king of Gawda—5.

Gaud-endra king of Gauda—101.

Candan-adri, Malaya hill range—J,

Cola, nation—14.

Tapana-tanayd, river Jamuna—33,

Tamraparni, river—8.

Daksinatya, tract—17, 63.

Deva-rajya, country—28.

Dhoytka, poet—101.

Dhoyt-Kaviraja, poet (with title)—
colophon.

Pancapsara, tank—19.
Panda-dega, country—8.
Bhdgtrathi, river—33.
Bhujaga-pura, town—10.

Malaya, a hill range—
Malaya-kataka—63.
Malaya-ksmadhara, —5, cf. 1.
Malayaja-rajah—71.
Malaya-pavana—3, 895.
Malaya-maruta—9, 92.
Malaya-opatyaka—62, 88.
Masyakarni, saint,—19.
Malyavanta, hill range—18.
Yayati-nagarz, town—26.
Ramegvara, god and place—11.
Revé, river Narmmada—25.
Lanka@-dvipa, Ceylon Island—10.
Laksmana, the king and hero—2.
Lopamudra, wife of Agastya Rsi—44.
Vindhya, a range of hills—23, 24.
Vijayapura, capital—36.

Gavari, tribe—25.

Grt-khand-ddri, hill—8, 62.
Sena-anvaya, the Sena dynasty—28.
Suhma, country—27.

Sva-rnadi, river Ganges—30.

Wol. IF No. 3. Pavana-ditam or Wind-Mesenger. 03
Nes

qaa-Fa:() |
SA AA? |

afta sinafensquiget weatst
TAA RARATL ata cent faata: |
Radanaqafaereae gifsafg-

UA WIVAATCTMAT FT: FUT WwW | 2
afeqat gaTaaat AA TATA

Hal Ft AZ FARA IT BLA |

gzl eq yatfans aq ait fugrs

qa AT: FAHUGa: Bfadataaa i |
aememiaty aafast aafuggqart
Wea Atataetaq AAT WALA |
Taq SUMAN Vas

Tita HAAYIT ATAIA FAT | 3 |
au: Tat anata efaaew TAT
agMa(a) ai wat aaatsaae Becta |
awed afa wy Hat aoatatsfaata:
grat frat vata fama aa aafedy yy (Fol. 1)
Fa(anjrai farefauet waa Bat-
ata: me wat afeat WaCUTSyAa: |
amaaufaranaapgaad ATa
Meat afa gq Haasan
aaa FAAAAaT a Gal wreaats:
astaaafaaananga TMSea: |

Pavana-ditam or Wind-Messenyer. { March, 1905.

ava (Sawai HIT suasi(sl )aasiasar:
yiguiateaata wy agua VEIT: | € |
ealaey ufasfasaaatea(aeai

qm afaenaaataaraaatta |

aaa a fauaaMatayst Yaqr
WAMATSGRGUG)s aarat frafa 9 p
sewa: ufeacafang wafers

aaae fata analawd Wiesea: |

ae Sd qequafaaieat aaUt-

aN? quaqnaataeteyaar || < |
aaitard qugasntragin tat (Fol. 2°)
aera 5 * afranattaiaatage |
gfe a: saaage: dasa

yaaa aware uated | € |
AisINe YanaMealfaat MAaRST

Sq sat aafufmcm: wEaeTASls |

uifa @ecafaaa(a)arttaararagat-
gE uiea aa at areea: UlAAT | Yeo |
pugtal(ac’)faa(@)ssaTasrauiat-
a(s)aUs: wus Page as CATS |
aaa ae fatafaaa qeatatartat
eaiam aaata fad: eoaretuse |e I
alala(a)ecAcaTTety Tat START

Te: TISgeny feat qua efaaew: |

aq aa vefea xaterne ataetat

gag iu) faufae (fe )auqaitad uqata || wz
Brea (at ?)fa(i)attaefaafaa wraataetat

Or
OC

Vol. I, No. 3.| Pavana-dutam or Wind-Messenger.
[N. S.]

aq: mug fancfauieuse BRI |
warvaisiqgae (Fol, 2”) weagataracta
agqidimagefa gaat afaes: TR | 2 I
aa Ha: afarqcaasasy Ta

qos) ae yaa ufaat ataatafeaatien: (1* )
H Al ASAARC AAT (A) AAA AATA
Tey anaaya: fafa a aaa Ve 1
fear fa(at)siafaa(a)aaaigmetatfaragsii

at aaelagqae Gas fagqasHrt |

ara aacty wT ae fagfeatsta

em fraian(a)arat(s yas seat Tats | QU
al asa gataquar awa Realat

afeera quaTas: yifweala eutat |

(WM) seiseeaaataasrastaea faait-
valfarscaMatsAaat LAST | I

agi watafea gq at: etafa atfuerat
ata(:*) atst afe facua eifaaraream: |
difaau: wayfiataaeity Tet

qarata cae azui fagin qeeate: 191
fa(Pol. 3°)ra(va)raa gafrens: gad areaet
quaaa(a)tarafag ge: anu vfya: |
asraity ofaaan ? aware: TRUITT:
SAU: CAAA: SAIITAAUTATT | USI
Wawa BTaaafawaM: TeAE-

S: uggs sfa eagtcart aaa: |

aaraita faeqaaniquagifaarat
qavatqnagfeustaqeasatar |) te |

Pavana-dutam or Wind-Messenger. [{March, 1905.

MSM ARGRIS WCAC ARA:

aun uta uta aq vias ofa |
WintageIUTaqaaes aaa -
fafaseafaanfuat wea: wafeay || R° I
ward fear satafa(fa)s(a)araatemtaractarg
alfaswaiqat qet ata at aay |
wilara eRtaae(s)at as arargqatar-
agmata ex yfegag Afaaaraas tt RX I

Gu Ga )etfanuaataartanataace

Ne aa wa(Lol. 3) eAAqUAATs qare: |
Maat saagua aq fagisari

Qt Blt ATT TARATAWT SETA |) BR 1
qaalsieenaaalatafagraata-
(areata a)aszeat fafattaaratan(eq |
qd amlqafaaqiaatatadtat
Higgafecelaastaal(at aaah | 82 |

eqn fee faraagaaged

faeutasuutafa a4 ataaat(s«)fa a |
aaa tafe afeut 5 a rae WS
ut (Te )sfafraygaragat faster Re 4
awalgrefaamactfamata aay

Tea agqgnwlHAawT aaa |

aad safaryfa esata
ataageaty Cacia FATA! | Ry II

aia ag araueat Heatat <asq

aye: Slat aafa aavtareqat at Tara: |
meifa(fayenqnata: Tiga aaaqet: (ez)

Vol. I, No. 3.] Pavana-dutam or Wind-Messenger.
[N. S.]

at aa foaannctemnyater | Re |
ag aifagaufiae: dtaaratad(FPol, 4*jat-
qTeaaata wnat fami gas |
aaa slueayeal afazarya tai

asia aqufmanatntad aa atfa p 29 I
ated Sarqazafaa Zactsaifufaat

2a: a(anateata aHaafaarat qeifE |
Tat MARAT a)AAq-aNT TEzat
TAMFt vAfaquar Feasra FLUAt: | RS
TeSys sarfartag al(apyacare:
WeaBAITAAT WRIRISA(A)T |
qariatgaae (1) qaqzataataciar:

Ort
~I

HUBAMMLICA MUSA ThA | RE |
TATE] LIHAYR Gai(a AAS

aal 2a aa fafcqarafavarses |

aie aferataeat qecaTa rai

aizeiat mafa a(d)xe(@)atasathrata: |) 8° We
aqaay (Fol. 4’) faferafcagiatt Saaz:
Raaatataufarataaa: Saqaay: |
saciat fafeaafetiamzatsratat

am sulgaeanat afaaai fautfa y 2r 1
Ty BTMIHAR aif seat
aagenay ufeaca pears |

yalae aafa aadt Safa rata

ay ao etag faagar at fafa y 8e t
atanistarafanad («azarae
FfaRna: manne: wT aa: |

byt

(o)

Pavana-ditam or Wind-Messenger. [| March, 1905.

uTmizmieagaadat as faatfa Sat

Sq qalaay aaatgtadt afHas: || 32 0
aaaat Tatagtest efdataaani

atatatad femafeat fate (ata)anatg |

ai aT?) fatarfarmfarasgat aaet(at) He
Hla: aeat wate yaaa fH gaeaeat 7 | Re I
Rsaiat vata caaraa Ttaragatat
Fai(faea car qaaltagadaatta |
agatalay a TaUTEtRag HAA

arg ats (Fol. 5°) aeuefaatanttagqae | 84 |
aque faragefaagat cart
gql aragrataraey tratsheaaay: |
IFAT Bq as wluKaATA
aaa aufe faattageaaiearta | ad |
AAA AIte IAMS BAT:

ater yafaaae: afaatreaa |

Salta nuaty ce: yifaqsaTig-
MUI FVUTIRGFAT Taal FARA | So |
fanrmiat cawata(afa)fasqraraate
Weiter ayRaLat MAT UTFTY |
qaaataaataaaqaramayat

nied ufcaaaaatatasttaaat || RS |
agra(q )ayatafaas aif at ca

silat Matsaatanagiaat Ta Wee
MA AIST TUARAS WEATTTF e(X1) aT (eat)
tanta qatereerarmtaiaan 1 RE i

ANT HUTT ufufeane. aR ya -

Vol. I, No.3.] Pavana-ditam or Wind-Messenyer.
ENS Ss

tz ay (Fol. 5°) wafuafafactaqat aaa |
Ta Glatyaqngeaageys
alias yatafa aa Gadwaafa | ee |
e Ae ~ Ne
ud Et qeastiagefaaq faid
nN
aa @ eeataa fase fafrearete: |
SA ADAF WHAT ITAA AT ASI
Urea afucaaciaaieaaa |) et 9
asigia aayfcaar FEARFATAT
stat afageatteat qeatui aaqe:(Sr) |
alsa: yatataet aadtem xfs:
wate qeafard Fad 7a Tat | Be |
argaitat a(a Pata fafas aqurartgatat
aaa Sranfaar Weaatattai |
: aN NS
THI MMAR A Ta eg MUTA THT
®) x ~ No in
ara tifafane weaaty Te 1 82 |
TaeaMIATHAASTtaetafay (Fol. 6°) are
Ss wye8 ES
WSestarssacaaaa(fy *)faxas |
aturqaequg faa Mafra:
MNase sufa faue(ge) wa came | 8a |
qatgat qeHaHay wate surat
afd Te TAHA eas wee |
Ratafiaisaag Aud Gaye:
aa afd aaaeaayate aistT 1 3y |
aid aalefaratay: UAATATAAT at
fancerm: anfe eee mIafsag as |
ale wemfais faaqasiaarAata
Beyer Aaa Suat Aaah | es A

Or

to)

Pavana-dutam or Wind-Messenyer. [March, 1905.

Ba Tai quaahe: Wiqaaraasi

q3i alfa FaaUqa: AT aa fama” |
gals) Heragquaaaqea tame

afeq aareeta agui fram szaTt | 89
aaa aafaag(Fol. 6a aa aga
agua tfaraquiametafaatar: |

saya: auafag waaay

aug fafeqqadt Sante Sat: 1 Vs |
greet ferufeaat( a * prennqyaui
alataia: (a * WAAR Ta ae |
ag TSl Fa(q)TAaAEctea_as-
wieqMagueacaa: Hfaqgi aatfa i se
quiyatuaaeactaeaiat fara

wae nagasatdatasfa are |

at as GWARAE alae IaH IAT

fag: vanfeufa afauiqa Waq RET IY II
aq @uiufafafaaa Fa atafaaai

queda vataqua FaalaTas |

sata ufanqangqgquemagaity- [Br I
faq araifeq qufaut: wwaa faz(Fol. 7)rat |
qr: Saleen gaaata sea: RETAIN

wy eulguagfed <(fe\gqrrs eer(ar) |
aa stafyanaat Ta AWWA

aieaint sfauget sfmat waugy y vey
uae safes an: anaaifaag

WH AAT NATH AWATWAG |
aqatunt fafe(e)feaget afy ferrites

Vol. I, No.
LN. 8. ]

3.| Pavana-ditam or Wind- Messenger.

fageur faaxfa quanaaifaane | ue |
faragiates faefaat afeaifa a feaata-
aaful afearataafaareqataraata |
TMs fasreafaricata haatat

aay cisiatay eat cigat wat i ue |
aq alaraaifentad wissen

eau afyaaadt waenifeaitr: |

ay farm fasatel(aieaar aatai

wat Hel fRLugeaustaa afautar(a) 14a
Te laaacaH aU TA AYA
qiaimaufafuaeastaga(aat |

Hal TUNA gUM{eatayas:

Gat ay: WaHsaatemctaaafa || ve |

61

guald yataa(a)a(sjataaaaraat (Fol. 7°) fa:

aisa Saan)aqey ala saalgETeat |
fama Tia: Gaua(ea Shute: wera:
Wieeifr: ante anetfaas fafeat a: us y
qeqi(aIn rar fawaafeataaat Fadia
misime gfacfafeatatata sq |
Hiemamefearal aust
aaaaeaagS cea fafa | ys |
Aisles TATITATS YA We
TARSUTIAVSAAY IAL TATA |
wMEaatyla RA RUTHIE LTAT-

aanrat sefeanataifeatai faare(a:) | ve
afaqaiat afacta a Peace fai

<Im Wat Wasa eefarareal( aq P )aqearsy |

62

Pavana-diitain or Wind-Messenger. {| March, 1905.

aeut A aA uaa aat fatgeraeala:

RITA Aafa sua aaa’ faata: | ee |
qraa: ata wat ate aq fate

aq Nafaqaage: wifaai(s) amv: |

saay yafafuctafsya: wept:

fate mer syxaat fa ga yifsay | a tl
sema(Fol, 8 aafa fuat aisha aaeasta-
WAAR FIAT ATA BATFATAT |

za cat Haat (aaa wana ai
aifagg aeata faut fasaa a Tar: |) 2
faat 2a afa aque cifamara faaiaa
VAST AVARSMU SAAT AMT |

zt ata(ax) fafaafeuretaefa aaa
qwataist aufe uedt dactuaae | ¢3 |
faaqu yf aqwat ataatafararat

aaun UA faquatqaqataarat |

sant fate gaged dtaeg-
sigatseufaanaang aaaty frare: | <8
afee(q) wet aaataua at (ya) fe tte
DIRHAM AHA ATA * ? eT aA a * re |
a4 Tag teal fa ? )afraermaaTaEt

al way afaety a farqraaraafa ney tl
afsorg faaty fafeat ger Beat

Hal aa Haag fala RAAT |

- aagafaceaframtanie(4) aeait

ata HIaSS Fas: Vt walafaagy<é | (Fol. 8°)

MRAM) RM RIT ALS aud TeMara-

Vol. I, No. 3.] 9 Pavana-ditarn or Wind-Messenger. 63.

LN. 8.]

Fal<eal GUI ISU: VBIaAtAA |

frat: vanty car wiaarygaet
amgetafaaned fufuast weE 1 €9 |

ad agqeaquataasaeaa a

atas faraeaelanaqmaa sti |

fag aistgaaty (qs: «) vata agar

mega: F VY Twas als | S|

wit ae eaaty aga FentaT

ale: Alal a gaulaatawat eaatfa |

watfeat seafafearmgaurarar-

usbearety waza fala faarat fan)fa igen
PIGA CARGAGaeT: WAAIGAT
qyagiacaneiaaatataatt | [al(aa) Mat
Baa) a(a aaa (faa: araai(arael 2)

Aa wal Taafa ya: ar wufyteafa | oe |
waa dears eqara

aut aa aaa a * jest Stetjaraawars |

an frei qgafataa(amateaqet (vor t
gata aq fatae facwar(lol. 9*)gat featur:
au: Hlelfatuaag(a)at weaaitaay:

qe aaafatiawsafaag |

sade aaaty aat gfeaca(e) feats
q=wlanguaafsata G7 TAIT: || OR |

uv eu ufufa qed aoe ASR CC

zt wit faufa cad fara aaa |.

aq 2a fa uaa arar(a)aei wate-

gistem vata afaat facia araariar || 98 |

64

Pavana-datam or Wind-Messenger. { March, 1908.

Set aa Tages WATA(T) WATT

Paq TRMTyIHT vlafararats:(S) |
Fadl Weey(ae ay qriagweaTata-
wal are: fafas a ay afeath aetfa 1 98 |)
Wes aaafa a agHaegaita

afena wiBwaae: wraapraisty |

alt ae a BY agaat(aarat yatat

aal Way aq aatafaa: qlasey || OY |
Wrada wiftaay fatyeaitaarat

gra @a(a) azate gawtafanieata |
fa(fayarit at atnae fargyIa aret
aaiata sata et At aUlal TAF | o¢ |
waa ()quatya eat e(Fol. 9’)f arat
TAU HAGRA ASAawalaa |

iqizat: wafafutea: Hae at aerat

ad Timmangefa aafawathe: (fa) 1 99 I
frame) at aah vat efeaesatzi

BRP (AS ARIFAATAATGATAL |
ayaa warfrad qopat cfaaret

Taal RH LI RAMA: Bly ABT | OF |}
aneta: wife aearfavatt feat

ama: gaafatae faaaaea( ? ast

zai as feafag wars faaraarant
auatateetacfad urazatfaeqatfe | oe |
yiareur sfaqseaty ae: aatai
aaaraaTAaes aTAaraty Fa |

Teattaaiar) fceatrai(at-) aa faeni(eryeaai=

Vol. I, No, 3.] Pavana-ditam or Wind-Messenger. 65
[N. S.]

a(3) Star uate aad sita(fajarsaara | Se 4
TT CAAAUTHA (a1) SISTA AT-

Sernit aacataa(etaat aifaasti |
Vara: aayfeat Baar ai Tea:
Tiaaaeutaaqgeausl fara | sr 1

ala: aR B)itst GAs: ayfa AARI-
zlasert a(y)aa (Fol. 10*)sextawarar(at)eaaat!
wi waa(S) WoTTTa TATA et

aa Tat RUT qua rare ear ae
wats: ufaafa wat cia aaarat

AY WMaira araataaufaetacreat: |

TA UsaFAaafacsmMHaaaTTat

sat UMBCs FF ATAVUS! HUTT | SR |
Tata) sales aA gR STARA
IMlaquad Geut Sa Waa: |

ASIA Tafccast qrasazat

faztaa: auafy a aqaataaata | <8 1
Tae wayfcacrqereitaaa

Ala TA BUHAIS IS AATTGM: |
agers weata waa

agg ATayaAa TaaTTTTIfS | SY |
aealTALUTaRt Ala FATA

masa afenutantusran(an as wee
fay ete facufvant ax at fafa

gaa waa faycraqatarata4 Se |

at acme faaraat Baatean(a)at
yaraindg yafaquat aaa pain fate |

Pavana-dutam or Wind-Messenger. [March, 1905;

— asrarai feafa aear gaa (Fol. 10°) fafarr
aa aaTgutag Balsa AAR | SO |
Balas faeces (TF * )\RITTATU-
zwle A 7 BY aVatyaararaata |
faq eureufe Hea Hata

aga aafa cast santa <etfa y ss I
dittaa faa(a)afa wae Tadaw(s)aTgr(eut)
as waits fe fafana wearaaatst |
misratata(d)fa(daae(fr Squ uate araaret
faa art caufaee eee aaThs | Se |
aat (*:) auwaaty srqieasawar-
wigaeyatHEa: Haat + asta |
WA RUTSIMFARYA ASWIAHF Arai
WHat w sa yar Vaart fasatsfy |) ce |
amet safe fanat AzaTesaTT
fasta Hamas raauaita |
2a wired faceafaa arfeatt wata4:
ae wqutaat fasacmara: | cd ti
aa WeNGa: Near
cAI HlAIATA |
al aaa atacta ye aaa fara
aq aa a fayaaaty viet <fea(Efe) avai | eR w
al aaatufasanta (Fol. 11°) fa(fa)gat aaty at
para Guat ugar faadtt avatar |
asim f vafacaazantsmaatet
woyayanataanniaat at watery €3 tl
AT LARLSAYA SHATATFAST-

ue it s4 3.| Pavana-ditam or Wind-Messenger. OY
IM >
ae aq: wayfeat waa wreafa |
Sari fear sehen fuses
WMI: FITAGAT ALAIGATE: || €8 |
Tea Gataaaaafet gaa:
Wwe wagui aeaitwasia at
qmeh a(aMAEM: TAA UAT
miata §* )fa vafaace: fe qrereat a ew
aq: aa wat faatlegie ate faty-
emai cefa uaa afeer aise |
au steqaateanar SisacHtyarat

saa fe vafats qudiaat aifunta ye 1
Wig Walefy a Weal ewasaed

am 29 aafa saaratae: wg atta: |

cai ufarawaia aes TAIT

age LalAqas AUT TEM | €9 |

aay qRtaaga aaaiai wa

HAM GHAAAU Mae 7A ai | [ at
aaettar gua 7 aai (Fol. 11’) aeti@)at Tet
aya (ae) a wy afuat aafaear asta cst
au mMelufaafat Macttfansr

zeus faurafaat quna(ataqe |

aq GMTaGat eta: GAs:

Taya Bi aq weMAt: Ha AarTasfy | ce tl
aemisa vata fafea afacragat 4

fat waeata facfua wy fre: |

yee and aa (ware Ce ATCA

aga A WE AM: AIHA] EAT | pee

Pivana-ditam or Wind=Messenger. [March, 1905.

cfiad atanfaat wae Bae

at miSaresua afaarzat anand |

saan: TRAcaag tasarnaTat

alga aeqataa ( dat *) AMAASTTATS | Gor ti

Mela: anantareatha FeTtta-

ai(atjat asmfearagfa ferritwt faafa: |

aa ae: aefa afsatataa wyatt 4

ufasaiufaacaatie a(a)araesty 1 2 e8 I

aamaaeta fates) fafa wet

mass aaafa ug: alae WRT: |

Taal AMM Haat Re-

wrasTtag afaraaty atat fasta: | 2°80
(Fol, 12°)

aifisen acta facai wiaaatfaaret

qmmaeun atafacaaatent fafsrars |

Rt quanvafca: grfy NatuaT

Awe yvaanaat aqais fearfa pres |)

xfa stiutaiafacsfactad qaqa Gate i * I
FT AMMACaea THY AH: | Blea: | Siefe: yeh

SACU AMA TAY TA: |} © |

TIES! Tey Bataes wa yaaa s *) fa

Ue Aal a aNaaeataifyaaa |

Raat suantaafaat alain faa

fad wis Aa aaauaamufataa to 1
SAAS Dy |) eo |) WREST 2OwR I}

WREST | OUR Il
(Fol. 12")

Vol. I, No. 3.5
[N. S.]

Pavana-ditam or Wind-Messenger.

AN INDEX OF CLOKA—BEGINNINGS.

ay aai yuaane: =...
Saray GteaaTaT
waraayezta Gee:
wawal aKa...

afe sinafesqaut ...

aiel ata qaatazat
ames aiaitas feafaa
Wlaigia: RAT aaq...

Eqreqd qataaag:

RHI TIT ALT...
aifasen aefa facai
Raaist fazmaxat

aisziat vata wat...

ALSIATA FATTTAT
ASMA FaTarTt
HiSAM AAZHIS TT
Ragnar

aime agfa fanart...

Basifa vaacfaat ..

89

Aes

aRatfaga ufae:
asIy avatafaas
TF WARIMARE
Masta anaafa fy: ...

aaa la ysaya
watsta: Maxis AAMT ...

faa 23a afa auue ...

aqaay fafeaafea ...
aa aepietafafaaat
aaa TaRATE
aqalawg FAAaAaT

qT UsAAquaaa

at wtatafea za at:
TAIAA GTAZAT .
afeatt afaety a aq
ateqal Fawaadt
afea Garaqazrtaat ...
atanigtace fraaq ...
GU TU BAAATAT ...
aemlgmimeant ...

amet aafaagqet ...

69

29
Re
aR

KES

99

Sé

&R

BAN
LS
3 °

79

efarme RARAAAL
24 aimaafaataa
au: aistfatuaraat

ad eu ufafa qua
yd ageaguataa

ma aaqletarafau:
atiae euAfy Az

Ug qatety aw azar...
aiatata faacfa wa...

wataa safes aa:
YaAtsul wmaufeaat

Tiarary ofaqeety ...
yiaterai feaufemat ...

aegqlersiaaqia qafasi...

semana fear:

is A_+ lam
Rais ect qiqalid
yagi yataanat

aataa: ufanta aat ...

argatat anta fata

Hal ata: afezqeat ...

afar faata fatuar
qalyat AcRaaat

ered
ya

©

M
Fataatgufe ast
ateenta aaafaaa
TAA RMCATA ATT
a asa vafaquat

% ~
TiaRits yaufaat
aia: HwIatfsrays: ...
Wat: RAISAAHY BA...

aaa eta fafzat

AC
LAW HIFLHAASI

wad feat auf farmaey

aay Baar:
ciaqeq sary faa

5 BS
MAMTA TH LATMT
aati Ad aaayeat

stata waaay

agemeetta suatea:
qa BWeardanqaa
faa afafs aaa...
fame ofa wewat: ...
area faxrefsaat

aa meiuiaatady ...

aaiatyaaeart

Wreadia wfiaAT
Wasi AAAta A aS

Pavana-ditatw or Wind-Messenger. [March, 1905-

39
eu
uc

go
WR

Vol. I, No. 3.] Pavana-dutam or

LN. 8.]

silwaets: ufsacafa ...
siamisaata faut...

ag: wal waa faaar ...
aeuisat aafa fafea:
aaa WUyAAA ..

wave vatagtesi
al aumietaaaaar

a aaaufasanta
atatag aqtaagw

Cc

aR

Wind- Messenger.

qayta faraqefa
aq aatq sfateaue

fara gatas: ...

farsygial cauafate:

faramiatea facfuat...

quay fave faa
ainisifannact

feat atginfaazaal ...

galaa ufenafaa:

Pe > OO

72 The Hydra of the Calcutta Tanks. [ March, 1905.

6. The Hydra of the Calcutta Tanks—By Netson ANNANDALE,
B.A., Deputy Superintendent of the Indian Musewn.

Description.—Body and tentacles very elongate, the latter not
clubbed; body cylindrical throughout ; six (sometimes five) tentacles
in well-grown, five in young, individuals ; ovaries one or two, testes
numerous. Testes and ovaries do not occur together on the same
individual. Coloration—Tentacles and base milky white; distal
portion of the body either pale or dark olive-green, deep chestnut,
orange-brown, pale brown, cream-colour or dirty white; never
bright green.

When I exhibited specimens of the Calcutta Polyp to the
Society I was inclined to regard it at most as a variety of Hydra
viridis, using the specific name in a more extended sense than
its author Linneus adopted, to include H. fusca. A careful
study of the descriptions of the European forms and an examina-
tion of a larger number of Indian specimens has since led me to doubt
whether I was correct ; in coming to a decision I am indebted to a
note received from my friend Dr. J. H. Ashworth, of the University
of Edinburgh, who has not, however, seen the Indian form. On the
whole this form appears to be related to Pallas’ H. vulgaris ; but
the question of specific characters, in animals so simple and so
variable in appearance from moment to moment, is a very difficult
one. From typical specimens of H. vulgaris! it differs im several
important details.

When the animal is clinging to an inclined or vertical surface
the expanded tentacles are arched, their proximal portion project-
ing in a straight line from the disk, while the distal extremity
either falls downwards or extends upwards. Every phase of
colour may be found in the same tank, but the darker speci-
men are more common over deeper water. Specimens kept in a
bright light fade so as to become of an almost pure and uniform
white, whatever their original coloration may have been.

The Polyp is usually found on the under surface of the
floating leaves of water-plants. It is by no means uncommon
but may be a little hard to find. Sexual reproduction takes
place at any rate from December to March, but probably

1 T have just seen Downing’s recently published summary of what is
known regarding the species of Hydra, in his paper on “‘ The Spermatogenesis of
Hydra. (Zool. Jahrb., Anat.,1905.) He recognizes, on what appear to be suffi-
cient grounds, the following four, with one variety of the first :—(1) H. viridis,
Linn.; (2) H. grisea, Linn. (with H. vulgaris, Pall.,as a synonym); (8) H.
fusca, Linn.; and (4) H. diwcia, Downing. If sexual characters are to be
taken into account, as has been done in constituting H. diwcia—and the only
objection is that a specimen which it is desirable to identify may not be breed-
ing—then the Indian Hydra should be regarded as a distinct species, though
it may only be protandrous or the converse. Under the circumstances it
will be convenient to give it, at any rate provisionally, specific rank, calling it
4H. orientalis. The description above is a sufficient diagnosis. June 6th, 1905.

Vik I, No.3. | The Hydra of the Calcutta Tanks. (es

ceases at the commencement of the hot weather.) Budding oc-
curs simultaneously. I have not seen more than two buds on one
adult at the same time, and one is commoner; nor have I seen an
attached bud budding. The food consists chiefly of small Crustacea
and worms. Large Daphniids on coming in contact with the ne-
matocysts are temporarily paralysed but break loose through their
own weight and recover movement after a few minutes. Adult
Polyps show little inclination to leave a situation in which they
have settled, and buds rarely move far from their parents ; conse-
quently, large numbers of individuals may often be found within a
small radius in the tanks, though there may be none on the sur-
rounding plants. Im an aquarium they desert the water-plants
and take up a position on the side of the glass farthest from the
light. If starved they become extremely pale and attenuated
within a day or two, their colour disappearing very much more
rapidly than it does when they are well fed but kept in a bright
light. They do not seem to be able to endure a change of tem-
perature such as that brought about by the sun shining directly
on the surface of the water in a large glass jar.

So far as I am aware, the genus Hydra has not previously
been recorded from British India, but a species (H. fusca ?)? is re-
ported from Tonkin. The late Professor J. Wood-Mason, as
Major Alcock informs me, collected many specimens in Calcutta.
I have myself seen a species (probably the same as the Calcutta one)
in an aquarium in the Experimental Gardens at Penang.

1 Since the beginning of the hot weather my captive specimens have disap-
peared, and I have not been able to find any free in the tanks. April 12th
1905. This remark still holds good. July 21st, 1905.

2 Richard, Mem. Soc. zool. France, vii, p. 287. What may be the same:
species is recorded from Turkestan (Daday, Zool. Jahrb. Syst., 1904. p. 480).

eee Owen kr ee Sc Ss ES OE OTOEOOTOEOOTOEOOTOEOOTOEOOOTOEONEOOeOEOOOSO

NJ
te

Composition of the owl from Bir Bahoti. | March, 1905.

- 7. The Composition of the oil from Bir Bahoti or the “ Rains
Insect,” (Trombidium grandissimum).—By E. G. Hit, B.A., F.C.S.

The animal known to natives as bir bahoti and which is de-
scribed as the “rains insect,” the “red velvet sect,” the “ lady
cow, in the Cyclopedia of India, and as Bucella carniola in
Platts’ dictionary, is a red mite about half an inch long and from
a quarter to three-eighths of an inch in its widest part. It is
covered with a scarlet, velvety down, and appears on the ground at
the beginning of the rainy season. It is only to be found for a few
weeks in the year, but it has a great reputation among Mahome-
dans as an aphrodisiac, so itis collected and kept for sale in the
bazaar. The insects from which the author extracted the oil for
his experiments were purchased from a dealer in Allahabad city.
They had been kept for several months, but had not putrified at
all. On pressure they exuded a deep red oil. It is this oil which
is used medically as an external application. The Cyclopedia
quoted above states that the oil is used as a counter-irritant, but
it appears to have no such properties, and its efficacy as a medicine
is probably purely imaginary and due to its colour.

About a pound of the insects were extracted with ether in a
Soxhlet’s apparatus. The extraction was carried on till the ether
came over colourless, and the various fractions were then mixed
together and the ether evaporated. The oil was slightly wet and it
was dried over a little calcium chloride. Thus obtained it was
almost as deep in colour as bromine. It had a specific gravity
of ‘907 at 15°C. On being kept at that temperature for a day or
two, it set to a semi-solid mass which melted at 18?-19°. The oil
had a very peculiar odour somewhat resembling that of Malwa oil
of opium. It began to boil with decomposition at 240°. The first
portions of the distillate were liquid, but subsequently at a higher
temperature solid products also passed over. These were all
colourless. Acrolein was obviously one of the products.

With strong sulphuric acid the oil gave a vivid blue colour
which turned to green. With nitric acid all colour was destroyed.
Cold potassium hydrate, chlorine water, hydrochloric acid and
ferric chloride had no action on the oil.

The oil readily dissolved in ether, but alcohol left a small por-
tion undissolved. This was of the same red colour as the original
oil: it was more soluble in hot alcohol, but was thrown out of
solution as the alcohol cooled.

With nitrous acid the oil gave a buttery elaidin in a few hours.

On distillation in steam partial hydrolysis took place, and the
distillate had a pungent odour which seemed to be that of
butyric acid. This acid was recognized by neutralizing the
distillate with potassium hydrate and evaporating to dryness on
the water bath. The salt thus obtained was treated with alcohol
and a few drops.of sulphuric acid, and warmed, when the distinctive

Vol. I, No. 3.] Composition of the ott from Bir Bahoti.

LN. 8.]

a1

Ot

odour of ethyl butyrate was obtained. The distillate with steam
also contained a small quantity of a solid acid.

The following values were obtained for the oil by the usual
methods. It determining the saponification value aniline blue was
used as an indicator and gave fairly good results, the very deep
colour of the oil making very accurate observations extremely

difficult :—

Sp. Gr. at 15° 906-907)

Acid value ce 62°3

Saponification valme. 194:7 +Mean of three
Ester value 132°4 | determinations.
Unsaponifiable 3°7 per cent. )

Reichert-Meiss] value 0°55

Hehner value soo

Todine value soa BS)

The unsaponifiable matter above was extracted with ethyl
ether from a solution of the soda soap. It contained a good deal
of colouring matter.

Preliminary evamination.—As a preliminary examination part
of the extracted oil was saponified with potassium hydrate and
the fatty acids liberated. These were then fractionally precipitated
with an alcoholic solution of magnesium acetate. The various frac-
tions were decomposed with hydrochloric acid, and the melting
points of the free acids thus obtained were all between 48° and 66°.
The above indicated the probable presence of a mixture of the
elycerides of the more commonly occurring fatty acids, but re-
crystallization of the six fractions of the free acids obtained from
the magnesium soap gave a comparatively large amount of an acid
melting at about 52°, which seemed to indicate the possibility that
there was a large amount of myristic acid in the oil.

Unsaponifiable matter—A quantity of the oil was carefully
saponified with alcoholic potash, and the soap dried on clean sand.
This was then extracted with ethyl ether in a Soxhlet apparatus.
The extract contained soap, so it was dried on sand and extracted
a second time. The insoluble portion was added to the soap left
from the first extraction. The ether extract seemed to contain some
unsaponified oil, so it was saponified a second time and again ex-
tracted with ether. On evaporation of the extract the solid product
was apparently free from soap or oil. This was fractionally erys-
tallized from alcohol in two fractions which had melting points of
106° and 95°. These fractions were separately acetylized by boil-
ing with acetic anhydride under an inverted condenser, and the ace-
tates precipitated by pouring into boiling water. The acetaes were
carefully washed and crystallized from alcohol when their melting
points were 98° and 68° respectively. The acetates were decom-
posed with potassium hydrate and the alcohols taken up in ether.
The extracts were evaporated to dryness and crystallized from
alcohol and had melting points of 110° and 104” respectively.

Neither of the products thus obtained crystallized in the

76 Composition of the oil from Bir Bahoti. [|March, 1905.

characteristic manner of cholesterol. The crystals were thin
plates, but their shape was quite irregular. Tested for cholesterol
by the colour reactions the results were as follows :—

A solution of a very small quantity in acetic anhydride gave
an intense blue colour on the addition of strong sulphuric acid
drop by drop, and the same result was obtained by Burchard’s
modification of the above test in which the cholesterol is first
dissolved in 2 c.c. of chloroform, and then treated with 20 drops
of acetic anhydride and one drop of sulphuric acid. Salkowski’s
modification of Hager’s reaction gave the colour which is charac-
teristic of cholesterol. A minute quantity was dissolved in 2 c.c.
of chloroform and an equal volume of concentrated sulphuric
added to it and the mixture shaken. On separating, the chloro-
formic layer was coloured red, and on standing changed to purple
on the following day when the lower layer had a decided green
fluoresence. It should be stated that the unsaponifiable matter
used in the above tests was quite free from colour.

These reactions and the melting point of the alcohols obtained
indicate the presence of cholesterol, and possibly of a fatty alcohol
of high molecular weight. The amount of unsaponifiable matter
available was too small for further investigation.

The Fatty acids—The soap freed from unsaponifiable matter
was treated with dilute hydrochloric acid, and heated to liberate
the fatty acids. These were thoroughly washed and dried in a
steam-oven. They were still tinted red, but not enough so to
render impossible the use of phenol-phthalein as an indicator.

For the mixed fatty acids the following values were obtained :—

Saponification value nae soo) LUD
(Hence mean mol. wt. a mag | ZtSv4))
Iodine value sae OOO
Melting point Ain ae ol 3 2e

It is stated by Lewkowitsch that when the mixed fatty acids
are triturated with alcohol specific gravity ‘911, the unsaturated
acids are almost completely dissolved. Accordingly the mixed
acids obtained as above were treated in that way in the cold and
filtered. The filtrate was reserved for treatment by Varrentrap’s
method. The residue of saturated acids was washed with alcohol
sp. gr. ‘911 and fractionally crystallized from absolute alcohol.
Three fractions were thus obtained, andeach of these was recrys-
tallized three times from hot alcohol. The melting points were
then 54°, 53°, and 53°. 5. After a fourth crystallization the melt-
ing points were 54°. 7, 53°. 4 and 53°. 6, respectively. They were
thus very nearly pure, but not quite, and the presence of myristic
acid with a small quantity of palmitic or stearic acids was
indicated. The three fractions were mixed and put on one
side. q

The filtrate from the alcohol sp. gr. ‘911 were evaporated down
to dryness and saponified with an alcoholic solution of potassium
hydrate. The soap was exactly neutralized with acetic acid and

Vol. I, No. 3.] Composition of the orl from Bir Bahott. 77

[ENA S.,]
poured in a thin stream into a boiling solution of lead acetate
(7 per cent.) with constant agitation. The operation was conducted
in a flask according to Tortelli and Ruggeri’s modification of Var-
rentrap’s method. The solution was cooled and the supernatant
liquid poured off and the lead salt washed with lukewarm water
and then dried with filter paper. The lead salts in the flask were
then warmed with ether on the water bath, and shaken, until they
had completely disintegrated. The flask was kept at a tempera-
ture of 10° for 24 hours,and then the liquid was filtered. The
filtrate was decomposed with dilute hydrochloric acid, washed, and
the ether evaporated off in a stream of dry carbonic acid. The
unsaturated acids obtained in this way gave an iodine value of 84,
They were almost colourless, having a faint yellow tint, and remained
liquid at the temperature of the laboratory, which was about
17° Centigrade. Compared with the acids left after trituration
with alcohol ‘911, the amount was not large.

The lead salts, insoluble in ether, were also decomposed with
hydrochloric acid and washed and dried. The acids were then
added to the mixed fractions from trituration with alcohol men-
tioned above. This mixture then contained all the saturated
fatty acids.

These mixed saturated acids were then treated according to a
suggestion of Partheil and Ferié. The solubilites in alcohol of the
lithium salts of oleic lauric, myristic, palmitic and stearic acids
differ sufficiently for it to be theoretically possible to separate
them. In the following, Partheil and Ferie’s directions were
followed, but the alcohol used was the “absolute alcohol” of the
laboratory and was subsequently found to have a sp. gr. of *809.

The acids (8 grams) were saponified with 120 c. ¢. of half
normal alcoholic potash, and the soap dissolved in 800 c.c, of 50
per cent. alcohol. A ten per cent. solution of lithium acetate in 50
per cent. alcohol was added, and the mixture warmed on the water
bath to 60°. Nearly the whole of the precipitate formed at first
passed into solution, and on cooling, a quantity of minute crystals
separated out. These were filtered off, washed with 50 per cent.
alcohol,and the filtrate which should have contained lithium oleate,
together with the lithium salts of the less saturated acids, was put
on one side,

The lithium salts precipitated on cooling the solution in 50
per cent, alcohol were dissolved in hot absolute alcohol A large
amount was required, but the whole of the precipitate was brought
into solution, The solution was then allowed to stand in the cold
for 24 hours, at the end of which time there had settled down a
precipitate which should have been the lithium salts of palmitic
and stearic acids. There was only a small quantity of this preci-
pitate, but it was filtered off, the free acid liberated in the usual
manner, well washed and crystallized from alcohol. The acid thus
obtained had a melting point of 54°.5 to 55°, and was probably a
mixture of stearic and myristic acids in equal proportions. Accord-
ing to Reintz such a mixture melts at 54°.5, and as will be shown

78 Composition of the oil from Bir Bahot?. | March, 1905.

later there were clear indications of the presence of stearic acid in
the oil.

The filtrate from the solution in absolute alcohol should have
contained only lithium myristate. The alcohol was evaporated off
and the salt decomposed with hydrochloric acid and washed. It
melted at 53°.7, and after recrystallization at 53°.8. _Myristic acid
melts at 53°.8.

Combustion of *1077 gram gave—

H,0 -1162 gram, z.e., 11-98 per cent. hydrogen.
CO, °2777 gram, ¢.e., 70°3 per cent carbon.

Myristic acid, C,,H,.0,, gives 11°8 per cent. hydrogen and
70°5 per cent. carbon.

This acid was obviously pure myristic acid.

The filtrate from the solution in 50 per cent. alcohol was eva-
porated down and decomposed with hydrochloric acid. The free
acids thus obtained were liquid at the temperature of the labora-
tory, showing that all the liquid acids had not been removed by the
trituration with alcohol sp. gr. 911. The amount was too small for
further examination.

In the above work there is uncertainty as to the presence of
stearic acid, and owing to the method adopted for the separation
of the fatty acids it appeared desirable to make a separation
ab initio by means of the lead salts and redetermine the iodine
value for the unsaturated acids. Accordingly a fresh lot of the
mixed fatty acids was saponified. The soap was converted into
the lead salts and these treated according to the method of Tor-
telli and Ruggeri. The solid and liquid acids were thus separated.
The liquid acids on standing for a few days at 18° had deposited a
few small needle-like crystals which melted or dissolved in the
liquid acid on slightly warming it. These are mentioned below.

The solid fatty acids were converted into their lithium salts
as before, and the 50 per cent. alcoholic solution was heated to 60°,
cooled and filtered. he filtrate gave liquid acids on hydrolysis.
These were added to the liquid acids obtained from the lead _ salts.
The salts on the filter were digested with absolute alcohol and
filtered hot ina hot water funnel. This step was rendered neces-
sary by the fact that the dissolved myristic acid began to crystallize
out as soon as the temperature fell more than a few degrees. The
precipitate left after filtering the hot solution gave on hydrolysis a
small quantity of acids which was dissolved in boiling alcohol.
The crystals were pressed in filter paper. This was repeated four
times, and after each crystallization the melting point of the erys-
tals was taken. > These were 49°.5, 51°.5, 53°.5, 627.6. The re-
maining acid was fractionally crystallized in two fractions, and the
melting point of each fraction was found to be 64°.5. Since.
this is above the melting point of pure palmitic acid it may be
taken as certain that stearic acid in small quantity is present in’
the oil. ie

The filtrate from the hot alcohol solution was cooled. -There

Vol. I, No. 3.] Composition of the oil from Bir Bahotv. 79
[ee S: |

was a copious deposit of lithium myristate. This was filtered off and
the freed acids were crystallized in three fractions which had melting
points of 53°°7, 53°°8 and 55°°8 respectively. The acid was thus pure
myristic acid. The filtrate from this lithium myristate was
evaporated down and the acid liberated in the usual manner. It
was myristic acid with the melting point 53°.4, and after crystal-
lizing from alcohol, 53°°7. The unsaturated fatty acids obtained in
the second series of operations had deposited a few white crystals
after standing for two days at a temperature of 20°. As it was
possible that they might still contain a small amount of solid acids
they were again converted into the lead salts and treated with
ether as above described. The acid thus prepared again deposited
crystals in two days at 18°, but the iodine value was 94°.5,so it
was probable that the solid acid was an unsaturated acid.

For the investigation of this solid acid the crystals were
filtered off, and freed as far as possible from all liquid acids by
gently pressing them between filter paper. The acid was dis-
tinctly solid and was quite white. The amount was only 0:1390
gram which had the iodine value of 67. The iodine value of the
liquid filtered off was again taken to see whether it had undergone
any alteration. It was found to be 67 when taken at the same
time as that of the crystals, and when taken four days later after
exposure to air was found to be less still. Since the original value
was 95,it seems likely that the unsaturated acids consisted mainly
of oleic acid, and possibly of a lower acid of the same series. The
change in the iodine value would be due to oxidation or decompo-
sition. These changes seem similar to those experienced by Sen-
kowski (Zezt. f. Physiolog. Chem. 1898, 434).

The acids isolated were present as glycerides as is shown by
the saponification value of the oil. Glycerol was, however, isolated
in the usual way by saponifying the oil, removing the fatty acids
and neutralizing the remaining solution. This was then evaporated
to dryness and extracted with alcohol. The extract after removal
of the alcohol was a rather dark liquid readily miscible with water.
It gave all the reactions of glycerol.

Conclusion.—The above experiments point to the conclusion that
the oil is principally composed of myristodiolein, and that there are
also present small quantities of stearin, cholesterol and colouring
matter. The butyric acid may be the result of decomposition.
There is possibly also present an alcohol of high molecular weight
belonging to the fatty series of carbon compounds.

In the above it will be seen that the author’s results regarding
the separation of stearic and myristic acid do not agree with those
of Partheil and Ferié. The latter state that when a mixture
of stearate, palmitate and myristate of lithium are heated with
absolute alcohol so as to dissolve the salts, only the stearate and
palmitate separate out on cooling, while the myristate remains in
solution. Lewkowitsch, indeed, suggests a method of separation
of the acids based on their work, but he qualifies his remarks by
the statement that Partheil and Ferié worked on such small

80 Composition of the oil from Bir Bahoti. [ March, 1905,

quantities that their results need confirmation. What is probably
the case is that owing to the greater solubility of the lithium salt
such a separation is possible when the amount of myristic acid is.
not in yery large proportion to the stearic and palmitic acids, but
that when it is large the method needs modification. The author
proposes to investigate this question.

Vol. I, No. 3.] Contributions to Oriental Herpetology. 81
[V. S.]

8. ConrrisuTions To OrientaL Herperonocy Il.—Notes on
the Oriental Lizards in the Indian Museum, with a List of the
Species recorded from British India and Ceylon. Part 1—By NELSON
Annanpatp, B.A., Deputy Superintendent of the Indian Musewm.
(With 2 plates.)

The collection of lizards in the Indian Museum is mainly Indian
and Burmese, including examples of the great majority of the in-
digenous species ; but interesting material from neighbouring coun-
tries, specially Persia, Hastern Turkestan, Yunnan, Siam and
Malaya, is also included. Of forms from more distant regions only
a comparatively small number are represented, one of the most note-
worthy being the rare and peculiar Australian Ball-tailed Gecko,
Nephrurus asper,! of which a good specimen was obtained in exchange
with the Queensland Museum some years ago, under a wrong
identification. The Skinks and Lacertide of Palestine, however,
are well represented by the collection of the late Dr. J. Anderson,
Regarding the majority of our Oriental specimens, an exami-
nation adds little to the systematic and geographical knowledge to
be found in Mr. Boulenger’s works. Of a few, however, this is not
the case; for there are still parts of India—the country between
northern Assam and southern Tenasserim is one of them—of which
eyen the systematist has not yet exhausted the vertebrate zoology,
and from which the Museum possesses specimens not examined
critically until within the last few months.

In the light chiefly of Mr. Boulenger’s volume in the “ Fauna
of India” and subsequent papers, it is no longer possible to main-
tain many of the older Indian naturalists’ identifications, whether
published or in manuscript, and he has recently pointed out that the
names of two of the commonest of our Indian lizards cannot stand
—that Hemidactylus coctei, D. & B., the common house-lizard of
Calcutta, must be known as Hf. flaviviridis, Ripp, while H.
gleadovit, Murray (which is even more abundant in some parts
of India) is identical with H. brookii, Gray. I must express my
personal obligations to Mr. Boulenger for examining certain
Geckos about the correct identifications of which I was doubtful,
notably the specimens on which the form Gymmodactylus consob-
vinoides is founded.

GECKONIDA.

ATLSOPHYLAX PIPIENS ( Pall.)

Gymnodactylus microtis, Blanford, J.A.S.B. XLIV (2), 1875, p.
193; and 2nd. Yark. Miss., Rept., p. 15, pl. ui, fig. 1.
Alsophylax pipiens, Boulenger, Cat. Liz. Brit. Mus. i, p. 19.

Dr. Blanford does not record this species from Ladak, though
it appears to be common in Hastern Turkestan; but there is a

! Its locality is given as Queensland.

82 Contributions to Oriental Herpetology. [March, 1905.

specimen in the Museum (from Stoliczka’s Yarkand collection)s
which bears a label corresponding to the locality “ Kharbu,
Ladak” in the register. By some error this individual is entered
as Gymnodactylus stoliczkee—a species so distinct from A. pipiens
that it is hardly probable that any confusion can have been made
between them. It is possible, however, that some accidental
exchange of labels may have taken place, and the latter species
must be recorded as belonging doubtfully to the fauna of British
India. It is desirable, if it does occur in Ladak, that further
specimens should be obtained. They are easily recognizable on
account of the extremely small size of the ear-opening.
Distribution.—Turkestan ; Transcaspia.

GYMNODACTYLUS OLDHAMI, Theob.

G. oldhami, Theobald, Cat. Rept. Brit. Ind., p. 81. Boulenger,
Faun. Ind., Rept., p. 38.

The Indian Museum possesses the type and three other speci-
mens of this Gecko. Except the type, they are from Lower Burma
(‘“Tavoy,” “ Mintao,” and “'Tenasserim Hxpedition”’) ; while the
type is recorded as from $. Canara. This locality is more than
doubtful. It was merely suggested to Theobald (loc. cit.) by
Beddome, who did not take the species himself in South India.

Boulenger’s “keys” in the “Fauna of India” and the
“Catalogue” hold good for G. oldhamz, G. fasciolatus and G.
vartegatus, the types of all of which are in the Indian Museum
but have lately been examined by him.

GYMNODACTYLUS MARMORATUS, Gray.
G. marmoratus, Boulenger, Cat. Liz. Brit. Mus. i, p. 44.

The Museum has lately received specimens of this species:
from the Malay Peninsula in exchange with the Selangor State
Museum. It is to be hoped that it will be sought for in Lower
Burma.

GYMNODACTYLUS CONSOBRINOIDES, noy.

The description is based on two male specimens, both probably
immature, obtained in Tavoy a number of years ago by one of the
Museum collectors.

Diagnosis.—A form closely allied to G. pulchellus and the
Bornean species G. consobrinus. There is no trace of a
preanal groove; probably the adult male has an almost
straight series of preanal and femoral pores, uninterrupted
in the middle line and numbering about 26; in the young male
these are represented by depressions in a row of enlarged
scales. The dorsal tubercles are smaller than in G. pulchellus
and less distinctly keeled; the ventrals are larger; the ventral
region is not marked off by a line of enlarged tubercles; the

Vol. I, No. 3.] Contributions to Oriental Herpetology. 83
[N. S.]

plates on the ventral surface of the tail are not separated from
the scales of the sides, as they arein G. pulchellus, by heterogene-
ously shaped, shehtly enlarged scales. The head is very slightly
depressed in the frontal region. In the types the colours have
faded ; the dorsal surface is dirty grey-brown, with nine darker
cross-bars, edged with dirty white, on the body, and ten or.
eleven on the tail; on the body they are considerably narrower
than the interspaces, but on the tail they become gradually
broader from before backwards; the enlarged dorsal tubercles
are pale; the lower surface is dirty pale brown.

Measurements (Immature male).

Total length He seq IL) saga,
Body se se ES onan
Tail are act whee GDH) ak
Head Bik seit AOTEAG, se
Breadth of neal ne bet Oi s
Fore-limb ... ee Rares! 45 eae
itelerrvole liatol ee Be aso DAS

I have not been able to compare the specimens with examples
of G. consobrinus ; but Mr. Boulenger regards them as representing
a species intermediate in some respects between G. pulchellus and
G. consobrinus. On the whole, the points in which they differ
from the former seem to tend rather in the direction of the latter’ S
Bue acteristic peculiarities.

GONATODES ANDERSONII, Annand. (Plate IJ, fig. 3).
G. andersonii, Annandale, J.A.S.B. (2) suppl., 1904, p. 21.

Since the description of this form was written two additional
specimens, both from Narcondam, have been presented to the
Museum by Mr. C. G. Rogers. They agree well with the types
and differ in the same respects as they do from G. kandianus and
G gracilis. On the whole they show that the Andaman (or
Narcondam ?) form is undergoing what is probably a parallel
evolution to that which has produced G. gracilis.

PHYLLODACTYLUS BURMANICUS, Annand. (Plate, I, fig. 1).
P. burmanicus, Annandale, Ann. Mag. N. H. (7) XV, 1905, p. 28.

Since I described this species another specimen, from the
same locality and collection, has been found inthe Museum. It
is also a male. The proportions of the head differ somewhat from
those of the type, so that these cannot any longer be considered as
specific characters. The number of lamelle under the fourth toe
is smaller than in P. siamensis, being 8 or 9 in the specimens
examined (see figs, Lb, 2a, Pl. T).

84. Contributions to Oriental Herpetology. |March, 1905.

The possession by the males of this species and of P.
siamensis, Blgr., of preanal pores marks the two forms off as
constituting a very distinct section of the genus Phyllodactylus,
if not aseparate genus. I take this opportunity to figure certain
structural details, as P. ewropeus is the only other species of which
I have examined specimens. P. stamensis and P. burmanicus are the
only forms known from the Indian Region.

HMIDACTYLUS TRIEDRUS (Daud.) (Plate II, fig. 2).

H. subtriedrus, Stoliczka, J.A.S.B., XU (2), 1872, p. 93.

H. triedrus, Boulenger, Cat. Liz. 1, p. 133, and Faun. Ind.,
Rept., p. 89. Annandale, Ann. Mag. N. H. (7) XV, p. 30.

There is a fair series of this Gecko in the Indian Museum,
but unfortunately most of the specimens are without localities.
One labelled “near Ellore” and named, apparently by Stoliczka,
Hemidactylus subtriedrus, agrees closely with Jerdon’s description
of that species, which, however, is not definitive. It agrees with
Boulenger’s definition of H. subtriedrus in haying ten labials, a
head more depressed than that of typical specimens of H. triedrus
and rather smaller ventral scales ; but it differs in having only seven
infradigital lamelle under the thumb, nine under the middle finger,
and nine under the middle toe. It may, therefore, be regarded as
intermediate between the two forms. The fact that it is from
the Ellore district suggests the possibilty that other specimens
of an intermediate character occur and that H. subtriedrus is not
specifically distinct. Possibly it is one of the two specimens
referred to by Stoliczka in the reference quoted; but it is not the
one figured. Its donor’s name was originally omitted in the
Museum register, but “ Dr. Stoliczka” has been written in in pen-
cil at a later date.

HEMIDACTYLUS KARENORUM (Theob.)
A specimen from Cachar, Assam (Wood-Mason). Previously
known from Pegu.
LEPIDODACTYLUS CEYLONENSIS, Bler.
Specimens from ‘“ Hills between Burma and Siam” and from
Tavoy (Museum collector).
List or Geckos From Srinxrp ISLAND.

The following species were taken on Sinkip Island, which les
some little distance off the east coast of Sumatra, by the late
~ Prot. J. Wood-Mason’s collector :—

1. Gymnodactylus fee, Bler. (3 specimens).
2. Hemidactylus frenatus, Gray (numerous specimens).
3. Hemidactylus platyurus (Schneid.) (numerous specimens).

Vol. I, No. 3.] Contributions to Oriental Herpetology. 85
ENG Sel
EUBLEPHARID Ai.

EUBLEPHARIS HARDWICKI, Gray

I find it hard to ascertain the exact range of this somewhat
rare species. The Museum has specimens from the following
localities :—Quetta; Khorda, Orissa; Ganjam; the Sunderbans,
near Calcutta. Very few of the Indian lizards are found both in
Baluchistan and Lower Bengal,

AGAMID Ai.

PYCTOLHMUS GULARIS, Pirs.

A male from Goalpara, Assam (H. L. Houghton).

The male differs from the female only in the development of
the gular pouch, which commences in a vertical line with the cen-
tre of the eye and terminates behind at the anterior border of the
shoulder girdle. It can be folded into the surface of the throat
so as to be yery inconspicuous, but is evidently capable of great
distention ; thethree pairs of gular folds which characterize the
female are well marked on its sides. Its general colour is black,
but these folds and the lower border are dirty white: the speci-
men, however, is much faded.

ACANTHOSAURA LAMNIDENTATA, Bler,

A lamnidentata, Boulenger, Faun. Ind. Rept., p. 126; and Ann.
Mus. Geneva (2) xiii, p. 317.

Coloration is no guide in the identification of this species.
Specimens of A. lamnidentata, A. armata and A. crucigera, may all
be coloured ! (at any rate if faded) exactly alike, as the series in the
Museum shows. This series bears out Boulenger’s contention,
that the relative length of the superciliary spine affords a constant
distinction between A. lamnidentata and A. cructgera, though the
two forms are otherwise practically identical. In A. armata the
spine is considerably longer than in either.

The Museum possesses characteristic specimens of A. armata
from “ Burma” (Major Berdmore) and from Mergui (Anderson).
The latter is the one recorded in the Fauna of Mergui, 1, p. 343.

JAPALURA ANDERSONIANA, noy. (Plate II, fie. 4).

This species is founded on two male specimens collected
by Col. Godwin-Austen in the Duffla Hills (Assam-Bhutan
Frontier). The late Dr. J. Anderson recognised it as new, but
neither gave it a name nor described it.

Diagnosis.—Body rather slender, strongly compressed ; hind-
limb long, reaching to the tip of the snout or beyond, Snout

1 But compare my note in Faseic. Malay.—Zool. 1, p. 154.

86 Contributions to Oriental Herpetology. [March, 1905.

slightly longer than the diameter of the orbit, obtuse; rostral
and superciliary ridge prominent, continuous; the latter suc-
ceeded behind, after an interval, by a large conical tubercle,
round which several others of smaller size are grouped. There
are two other prominent tubercles between the top of the head
and the tympanic region on each side. A curved line of smaller
tubercles outlines the inner margin of the supercilary region and a
flat or slightly depressed sub-circular area is similarly marked off
on the snout. All the scales are keeled; those on the sides are
small, with five oblique rows of larger and more prominent scales
running downwards and forwards from the base of the dorsal crest
to or beyond a longitudinal line of similar scales; between every
two of these rows there is another, which is sraicth shorter and
does not reach as much as half way down the body. The dorsal
surface of the limbs is covered with rather large heterogeneous
scales, the larger of which show a tendency to be arranged in
V-shaped series ; the scales on the belly and ventral surface of the
limbs are larger than those on the sides; the tail is covered with
small, imbricate, leaf-shaped scales, which are not enlarged below.
The nuchal crest is well developed (in the male), consisting of a fold
of skin covered with three or four parallel horizontal rows of flat,
smooth scales, the uppermost of which are larger than those below
them and form a feebly serrated ridge; the dorsal crest is much
lower, consisting of a single row of similar scales. There is no
eular pouch and no distinct gular fold.

Coloration—Dorsal surface dirty brown, rather dark, brighter
on the head, feebly marbled on the sides, pale on Ae ventral
surface ; pale, dark-edged lines ne from the eyes.

Measurements 3.

Total length of tail dpjures) Spo. JEIUS) saotsenn.

Head ; eect ee Ole
Waders head a Speier 8) ei
Body ue ese Be OOM
Fore-limb ae ip See seo) See
Hind limb oe a ce wea

This species can be distinguished easily from J. planidorsata
by its compressed body and long hind limbs.
Rene SALEA HORSFIELDIL, Gray
Specimens from Moulmein (Stoliczka) and from “ Hills near
Harmatti, Duffla Expedition ” (Godwin- Austen).
CALOTES MICROLEPIS, Blor.

Of this species, previously known from the hills of northern
Tenasserim, the Museum possesses a specimen from Manipur

(R. D. Oldham.) .

Vol. I, No. 3.] | Contributions to Oriental Herpetology. 87
[WV. 8.]

CALOTES VERSICOLOR (Daud).

C. gigas, Blyth, J.A.S.B. XII, 1853, p. 648.

C. gigas (under C. mystaceus), Boulenger, Faun. Ind., Rept.
p- 188. C. versicolor ¢d., op. cit., p. 135.

I have examined several hundred specimens of this common
lizard. They came from nearly all parts of India and Ceylon,
from Malaya and Pitsanuloke in Siam. With these I have
compared Blyth’s types of C. gigas (which are in the Indian
Museum), with the result that I find the two forms to belong
clearly to the same species. There isno oblique fold in front of
the shoulder in Blyth’s specimens, and therefore they cannot be
associated with C. mystaceus, as Boulenger, who had had no oppor-
tunity of examining them, thought probable.

The types of C. gigas, which are adult males, differ from
the majority of specimens only in having the secondary sexual
characters more fully developed ; the scales (especially those on the
throat) are heavily keeled and inclined to be lanceolate in outline,
the crest is very high, the cheeks are greatly swollen, the size
above the average. The large series examined shows that in
Lower Bengal (and probably in Assam, Burma and Malaya), the
males of C. versicolor rarely 1f ever reach an extreme degree of
development in these respects; but no exact line can be drawn.
We have specimens from Sind, from South and North-West India
and from Ceylon which agree almost exactly with Blyth’s, while
amuch larger number are intermediate in character. Dr. Blanford’s
examples from Baluchistan (Hastern Persia uu, p. 313) belong
to this intermediate phase; but specimens from Calcutta have
the male characters even less marked. The extreme phase
(gigas) probably bears much the same relation to versicolor as
Gonyocephalus humiz (Blyth) does to G. subcristatus (Stol).

CALOTES YUNNANENSIS. nov.

C. maria (part.), Anderson, Anat. Zool. Res. Yunnan He., p 806.

Among’ the lizards collected by Dr. Anderson in Yunnan I find a
Calotes which does not agree with any published description. It is
registered in the Museum books as 0. marda and is the only speci-
men from Yunnan now in the collection which at all resembles this
species. It differs, however, in certain respects from the des-
criptions and from specimens from Assam, and I think that (in the
present state of systematic nomenclature) it is worthy of a specific
name. Anderson states that the specimens of C. maria which he took
in Yunnan were compared with the types of the species; but what
has become of the rest of them I have been unable to discover. As
regards several important points the new form is intermediate
between UO. mariaand OC. jerdonii ; butit has a distinct though rather
short and shallow oblique fold in front of the shoulder covered with
granular scales. Were it not that the presence or absence of such
a fold is a very constant character in other members of the genus,

88 Contributions to Oriental Herpetology. {March, 1905.

the specimen would practically break down the distinction between
the two species, or would have to be regarded as an aberrant
example of C. maria.

Diagnosis.—Upper head scales moderate, smooth, imbricate,
slightly enlarged on the superciliary area; two parallel rows of
enlarged, erect scales on the temple, the posterior few of each
series ending in short spines; the lower series is separated from
the tympanum (in the type) by three rows of small scales. Tym-
panum nearly half the diameter of the orbit. Gular pouch not
developed; gular scales strongly keeled, larger than ventrals,
equalling dorsals. A rather short and shallow oblique fold in
front of shoulder; dorso-nuchal crest well developed anteriorly,
the longest spines (just behind the head) measuring between half and
two-thirds the diameter of the orbit. Fifty-six scales round the
centre of the body; dorsal and lateral scales feebly keeled, directed
upwards and backwards; ventrals much smaller than dorsals,
strongly keeled. ‘The adpressed hind limb reaches the anterior
border of the orbit; third and fourth fingers nearly equal. Tail
round, slender, very long. Colour green (faded in the type), with
pale (red ?) markings on the sides and on the knees and elbows.

Measurements &.

Total Length cee cee) 405) Mina,
Head ae os ate DcehaS ae
Width of head ne Melb eee
Body 5 ae a OO
Tail ue, ae sco | BOD. oy
Fore-limb ... an See Oo ae
Hind limb ... ae OS

CaLores RouxII, D & B.

C. rouxii, Boulenger, Faun. Ind., Rept., p. 142.
Several specimens from Travancore (Beddome).

AGAMA MEGALONYX (Gthr. )

A. megalonyx, Boulenger, Cat. Liz.; i. p. 347.
Two specimens from the Perso-Baluch frontier (Dr. Turnbull
and Col. Wahab).

AGAMA LIRATA (Blanf.)

A. lirata, Boulenger, Faun. Ind., Rept., p. 150.

Four specimens from Sind (Murray ?) agree very closely
with the type, which is in the Indian Museum. Probably this
species does not reach the full dimensions of A. melanura ; its tail is
more slender and proportionately longer.

Vol. I, No. 5.] Contributions to Oriental Herpetology. 89
ENED S|

AGAMA. sp.

There are two specimens of a large Agama in the collection
which represent a species allied in some respects to A. nupta,
De Fil. As thew origin is uncertain I prefer to leave them
unnamed. The numbers on their museum labels have been ori-
ginally entered in the register without particulars, but “Dr. W. T.
Blantford. Persian collection ?” has been written in at a later date
in pencil and the collector’s labels attached to them resemble those
of the Persian Collection.

They differ from specimens of A. nupta (of which I have
examined a large series) chiefly in the character of their dorsal
lepidosis. There is along the vertebral line a narrow band of enlarged
scales which widens slightly from before backwards. These scales
are not homogeneous or arranged in any order, but differ largely
inter se both in size and in development; they are strongly mucro-
nate and their bases do not overlap; some of them have almost
the character of retroverted spines. Similar scales are scattered on
the sides of the posterior part of the body, and there are others,
which havea rather larger base, on the postero-lateral surface of the
thighs. The majority of the dorgo-lateral scales are extremely
minute, but the antero-lateral scales of the thighs are large, imbri-
cating, leaf-shaped, homogeneous and strongly keeled. The other
characters are those of A. nwpta.

Agama nupta, De Fil.

A. nupta, Boulenger, Faun. Ind. Rept., p. 151. Alcock and
Finn, J.A.S.B. Ixy (2), 1896, p. 555.

The verticillation of the tail, at any rate in old specimens, may
be practically absent. The coloration is frequently an almost
uniform brownish-black. The Museum processes a characteristic
but imperfect specimen from Chitral (Dr. Gi. M. Giles)

LIOLEPIS BELLII (Gray)

L. bellii, Boulenger, Fascic. Malay. Zool. 1, p. 155. An-
nandale and Robinson, ibid. (note). Annandale, P. Z. S., 1900, p.
857, and Ann: Mag. N. H. (7) XV, 1905, p. 32.

We have several immature specimens from Burma which
exhibit the characteristic “juvenile livery” so well marked in
examples from the Malay Peninsula.

List or AGAMIDH TAKEN ON Sinkip Istanp By Woop-Mason’s
CoLLEcror.

Draco quinquefasciatus (Gray) (numerous specimens).
Aphaniotis fusca (Ptrs.) (one specimen).
Calotes jubatus (D. & B.) (one specimen),

wre

90 Contributions to Oriental Herpetology. (March, 1905.

ANGUIDAI,
OPHISAURUS APUS (Pall.)

The known range of this species is from Dalmatia to Afehanis-
tan, from near the Indian border of which we have a specimen;
but it probably occurs also in adjacent parts of India. There
are several specimens in the Indian Museum which have come
from the Alipore Zoological Gardens, unfortunately without any
definite history ; but the. probability is that they are from North-
Western India.

OPHISAURUS GRACILIS (Gray)

Of O. gracilis the Museum possesses a large series, which exhi-
bits great variation as regards colour. Judging from a collection
recently made by Major Alcock, this species is common near
Darjeeling. Major Alcock tells me that it is extremely sugars
and generally “shams dead” when handled.

VARANIDAL.
VARANUS DUMERILI (Miull.)

The only specimen we possess is immature, being the type of
Blanford’s Varanus macrolepis. It is very desirable that further
examples should be obtained, as the other Iudian species of the family
are represented by large series.

LIZARDS OF INDIA, BURMA AND CEYLON.

GECKONIDA.
1. Teratoscincus scincus* (Schleg.) ... (Alcock and Finn, J.A S.B., 1896.)
Baluchistan.

2. Ceramodactylus affinis, Murray* ... (cid, ibid.) Baluchistan.

3. Stenodactylus orientalis, § Blanf. .... Sind.

4, Stenodactylus lwmsdenii, Bler. ... Baluchistan.
_5. Alsophylax pipiens * (Pall. )? Ladak ? (Antea.)

6. tuberculatus, § (Blanf. ye Sind, Baluchistan.
fia Gymnodactylas fedtschenkoi, Panjab Salt Range.
Strauch.
- 8. Gymnodactylus scaber (Riipp). ... Sind.

9. » brevipes, § Blanf. .... Baluchistan.
10. 9 kachensis, § Stol. ... Katch; Baluchistan ; Sind.
aisle es stoliczkee, Steind. ... Upper Indus Valley.

12. lawderanus,§ Stol.... Aimorah and Kumaun.

13. nebulosus, Bedd. ... S. India and Ceylon.

14. Gymnodactylus jeyporensis, Bedd ... Jeypore.

15. ne deccanensis, Gthr.... Bombay Presidency.

TT

1 A-* denotes an addition to the Indian fauna since 1890 ; a § that'a type

or co-type is in the Indian Museum. The names of species ‘not aioe
in this collection are printed in italics.

Vol. I, No. 3.] Contributions to Ortental Herpetology. 91

[N. S.]

16. Gymnodactylus albofasciatus, Bler. ...
17. Gymnodactylus oldhami, § Theob. ...

18. es triedrus, Gthr.

19. us frenatus, Gthr. 900
20. sf . khasiensis § Jerd.
21. rubidus, § (Blyth.)...

22, Gymnodactylus peguensis,* Blgr.

23. Gymnodactylus pulchellus (Gray). ...

24. 2 consobrinoides,*§
Annand.

25. ss variegatus § (Blyth).

26. p fee, * Blgr.

27. & fasciolatus$ (Blyth. d

28. Agamura cruralis, § Blanf.

29. x persica * (A. Dum.) 605

30. Pristuras rupestris. § Blanf.
31. Gonatodes indicus (Gray )

32. 6 wynadensis (Bedd.) 300

33. Gonatodes sisparensis (Theob.) ~ «.

34. Gonatodes ornatus (Bedd.) 000

35. ni marmoratus (Bed4d.)

36. ‘ mysoriensis (Jerd.)

34. 5 kandianus (Kelaart.)

38. a andersonii, * § Annand. ...

39. A gracilis (Bedd.)

40. 45 jerdonii (Theob.)

41, littoralis (Jerd.) 66

42. Phyllodactylus burmanicus,*§ _...
Annand.

43. Callodactylus aureus, Bedd.
44, Ptyodactylus homolepis, § Blanf.
45. Hemidactylus reticulatus, Bedd.

46. 3 gracilis, § Blanf.
Al, 5 frenatus, D. & B.
48. Pe brookii, Gray.

Ag, 6 turcicus ( Linn.)
50. : persicus, § Anders.
51. % maculatus, D. & B.
52. triedrus (Daud.)

53. Hemidactylus substriedrus, eal
54. Hemidactylus subtriedroides,*§ :

coe

Annand.
5a. ens depressus, Gray.
56. 5 leschenaultii, D. & B..
57. ~ flaviviridis, Riipp. ai
58. » © giganteus, 'g bol muses
59. bowringii (Gray) :
60. a karenorum (Theob.)
61. y, garnotii, D. & B. ;
62. platyuras (Schneid. ‘ec son

63. Teratolepis fasciata,§ Blyth.
64. Gehyra mutilata (Wierm.)
65. Lepidodactylus ceylonengis, Bley.’

see

66. . aurantiacus (Bedd.)
47. 4 lugubris (D. & B.) ...

S. Canara.
Lower Burma.
Ceylon.

»
Assam; Upper Burma.
Andamans.
(Boulenger, Ann. Mus. Genova (2)
xili.) Pegu.
Bengal ( (2); and Lower Burma.

Tavoy. (Antea.)

Lower Burma.

(Boulenger, op. cit.), Pegu.

Western Himalayas.

Baluchistan.

(Alcock and Finn, op. cit.)
Baluchistan.

Sind; Central India (?)

Nilgiris, S, India.

Wynaad ,, 35
Nilgiris,, ,,
Malabar.
Malabar District.
Mysore.

Ceylon; S. India, and Preparis I.

(Annandale, J.A.8.B, (2) suppl.
1904) Andamans.

Ceylon and 8S. India.

3) EP) bb)

Malabar District.

(Annandale, Ann. Mag. N.H., 1905),
Tavoy.

N. Arcot.

Sind and Baluchistan.

S. India.

Central Provinces.

S. and E. India; Burma; Ceylon.

(=H. gleadovii, Murray.) All
India and Ceylon.

Sind.

Deccan and §. India.

Central and S. India; Ceylon,

S. India.

(Annandale, op. cit.), Upper Burma,

Ceylon.

All India, Burma (?) and ‘Ceylon.

(=H. coctei, D. & B.), All India.

Malabar district.

EH. India and Burma.

Pegu ; Cachar.

Sikhim and Burma.

H. India ; Burma and Ceylon.

Deccan and Sind. ;

N.H. India; Burma and Ceylon.

Burma and Ceylon.

S. India.

Burma and Ceylon; Andamans
and Nicobars. oa

92

Contributions to Oriental Herpetology.

[ March, 1905.

68. Hoplodactylus duvaucelii (D. & B.) ... Bengal (?)

69. Hoplodactylus anamallensis (Gthr. ) Anamallays, 8. India.

70. Gecko verticillatus, Laur. .. N.H. India; Burma.

71. ,, stentor (Cant.) ... .. Chittagong, Burma; Andamans
and Nicobars,.

72. ,, monarchus (D. & B.) ..» Ceylon.

73. Ptychozoon homalocephalum (Crev.) Lower Burma; Andamans(?) and
Nicobars.

74. Phelsuma andamanense § (Blyth.) Andamans,

EUBLEPHARIDA.
75. Hublepharis hardwickii, (Gray.) Peninsular India ; Baluchistan.
76. 90 macularius, § Blyth, .. Punjab and Sind; Chitral.
AGAMIDA.

77. Draco maculatus (Gray.) ... Assam and Burma.

78. ,, blanfordii, Blgr. ... Tenasserim.

79. 5, +norvalli, *§ Alc. ... ... (Alcock, (2) J.A.8.B. LXIY.)
Upper Assam.

80. ,, dussumieri, D. & B. .»» Malabar Coast.

81. ,, teeniopterus, Gthr. -. Tenasserim.

82, Sitana ponticeriana, Cuv. ... India and Ceylon (not in Hima-
layas).

83. Otocryptis bivittata, Wiegm. Ceylon.

84. Otocryptis beddomii, Bler. . §. India.

85, Ptyctolemus gularis, Ptrs. .. Agsam.

86. Cophotis ceylanica, Ptrs. -- Ceylon.

87. Ceratophorus stoddartii, Gray. «. Ceylon (mountains only.)

88. 7s tennentii, Gthr. Ceylon.

89. 3 aspera, Gthr. Ceylon.

90. Lyriocephalus scutatus (Linn.) Kandy district, Ceylon.

. Calotes maria, Gray

. Genyocephalus subcristatus (Blyth.)
. humii (Stol.)

. Gonyocephalus bellii(D. & B.)
" grandis (Gray.) mee
Acanthosaura armta (Gray) ox
66 crucigera, Blgr. 900
Fa lamnidentata, Blgr. ...
Acanthosaura minor (Gray.)
kakhiensis (Anders. de
. Acanthosaura major (Jerd.)

tricarinata § (Blyth. Sy

J apalura andersoniana, *§ Annand.
90 variegata, Gray

5 planidorsata, Jerd. vee
Salea horsfieldii, Gray

» anamallayana (Bedd.) eee
Calotes microlepis, Bigr.

3 eristatellus ( Kuhl.) sone

3 jubatus (D. & B.)
i versicolor (Daud.)
[C. gigas, Blyth

» . jerdonii, Gthr. ...
% emma, Gray

eco ooo

Andamans and Nicobars.

= G. subcristatus (aged individuals), Annandale, J.4.S.B. (2),

1904, suppl. |
Bengal.
Pegu.
Burma.
Tenasserim.
Lower Burma.
Sikhim and Assam.
(=Calotes feze, Bler.) Burma.
W. Himalayas.
Sikhim.
(Antea), N.H. Assam.
Sikhim, Assam and Bengal.
Assam; Sikhim.
S. India ; Ceylon (?) ; Burma; N. Ev
Assam.
Animalay and Patni Hills, S. India
Lower Burma; Manipur.
Tenasserim.
Nicobars.
All India, Burma and Ceylon.

= :C. ‘Yersicolor (Daud. J

Assam.

be)
Burma and Assam.

Vol. I, No. 3.] Contributions to Oriental Herpetology.

us.
114.

115.

116.
17.
118,

119.
120.
121.
122.
123.

124.
125.
126.
127.
128.
129.
130.
131.
132.
133.
134.
135.
136.
137.

138.

139.

140.
141.
142,
143,

144,
145.
146.
147.

[W. 8.]
Calotes mystaceus, D. & B.

Calotes grandisquamis, Gthr.
Calotes nemoricola, Jerd.
Calotes ceylonensis (F. Miller )
Calotes liolepis, Blgr. :
Calotes andamanensis,* Bler.

Calotes ophiomachus (Merr.)

‘3 nigrilabis, Ptrs.
Colotes liocephalus, Gthr.
Calotes rouxii, D. & B. ...

SS. Gthr.
[Calotes fez,
Charasia dorsalis (Gray)
blanfordiana, Stol.

- ornata (Blyth)
Agama isolepis, Blgr. ...

3 rubrigularis § (Blanf.)
megalonyx * (Gthr.)
i tuberculata, Gray
dayana (Stol.) ...
himalayana (Steind.)
agrorensis § (Stol.)
melanura (Blyth)

”

bed

i nupta, De Fil.
caucasica (Hichw. )
Phrynocephalus olivierii., D. & B.
theobaldi, Blyth

Ey

ornatus, Blgr.

Finn

maculatus, Anders.
> euptilopus, *§ Alc. &

Dory

lirata§ (Blanf.) ... 905

ooo

caudivolvulus (Pall.)

luteoguttatus, ae

Liolepis bellii (Gray)
Uromastix hardwickii, Gray
A asmussii* (Strauch)

93

S. India, Ceylon, Andamans and
Nicobars.

Malabar.

Nilgiris; Malabar.

Ceylon.

(Boulenger, Ann. Mag. N.H., 1891)
Andamans.

Ceylon; S. India; Nicobars.

Ceylon.

Bombay Presidency ; Travancore.
S. India.

Bler. = Acanthosaura kakhiensis Coe mi

S. India (hills).

Central India.

Central and North-Hastern India.
N.W. India.

Sind.

Baluchistan (Antea).

Kashmir and W. Himalayas.
Foot of W. Himalayas.

Upper Indus Valley.

N. W. India (high altitudes).
Sind ; Panjab; W. Himalayas.
Sind ; Baluchistan.

Ae 5 3 Chitral.
Baluchistan.
Baluchistan.
Upper Indus Valley.
Ladak.

N. Baluchistan.

2)
9 99

[Alcock and Finn.
op. cit. |

”

S. India ; Burma.

N. W. India.

Baluchistan [Alcock and Finn,
op. cit. |,

ANGUIDA,

148, Ophisaurus gracilis (Gray)

149,

apus * (Pall,) ?

”

N.E. India; Sikhim ;
Upper Burma.
N.W. India ? (Antea.)

Assam

VARANZ,

. Varanus griseus (Daud.)

flavescens (Gray)

9 nebulosus (Gray)

Bs dumerilii ,{ Mull.)

3 salvator (Laur.) ;

5 bengalensis {Daud.) y

oo

N.W. India (deserts).
N. India; Burma.

Peninsular India and Ceylon;
Burma ?

Central Provinces(?); Bengal;
Burma.

Tenasserim.

N. HE. India; Ceylon; Burma

Andamans and Nicobars.

(To be continued.)

94 Archeeologisch Onderzoek op Java en Madura. [March, 1905.

9. Archeologisch Onderzoek op Java enMadura. I Beschrijving
van de ruine bij de Tesa Toempang, genaamd Tjandi Djago.
Batavia, 1904.—By Fatuer Danimann, S.J. Communicated by
the Philological Secretary.

A magnificent volume of Archeological research has lately
been presented to the Asiatic Society by the Batavian Society of
Letters and Arts. It is the first outcome of the researches con-
ducted by the newly established archeological survey in the
Dutch Hast Indies, and it treats of one of those highly interesting
relics of true Indian Art, so profusely scattered over the whole
ground of Middle and Hastern Java. Although I cannot claim any
title to introduce to you this admirable work—yet the favourable
opportunity I enjoyed of visiting Java on my way back from
China and of personally examining some of its most distinguished
monuments, may perhaps excuse my saying a few words about the
results embodied in this volume. I am all the more anxious to
do this for the Asiatic Society in that it was a distinguished
English statesman and administrator in the Far Hast, who gave
us the first accurate and scientific knowledge of the monumental
antiquities of Hindoo civilization in Java. I refer to Sir Thomas
Stamford Raffles, Governor General of Java and its dependencies.
This distinguished member of the Asiatic Society, inspired by that
high enthusiam for Indian research which led to so many dis-
coveries, revealed to us for the first time a new world of Indian
art in his masterly History of Java. I say ‘masterly :” for when
we remember that until his time nothing had been done to clear
the way for the study of the relics of Hindoo Religion and Art
once predominant in Java, everyone must be surprised at the
vast and minute learning with which Raffles introduced into the
descriptive and figurative details of research. His History of
Java gave the first impulse to closer investigation of the grand
monuments. But although since his time some remarkable works
have been published by distinguished members of the Batavian
Society, 1t was long before a methodical inquiry, covering the
whole ground of ancient Hindoo relics, could be inaugurated—
perhaps according to a German proverb, “ Gut Ding hat Weile,”
‘“a good thing needs time.” And indeed it is a good thing, in fact
an excellent thing, which finally has been brought forth by the
Archeological Survey of the Dutch Hast Indies under the leader-
ship of its talented Director General, Dr. Brandes.

The volume presents to us a complete archzological picture
of a Buddhist Sanctuary in Hastern Java, now-a-days called Tyjandi
Toempong. The monument described is neither one of the earliest
nor one of the finest works produced by the Hindoo artists in Java.
For the monuments erected in the Hastern Kingdoms of Hindoo
Princes show, in style and workmanship, a remarkable decline
from what we admire in the artistic beauty developed at a much
earlier period in Central Java. If we look for the monuments
of the classical period, we must turn our eyes to Boro-Bodur and

Vol. I, No. 3.] Archeologisch Onderzoek op Java en Madura. 95

ENE S.1
to Prambanam. We might have perhaps expected that the system-
atic research now inaugurated would begin with those master-
pieces of art. The survey has taken a contrary course, beginning
with Eastern Java, where art was in its decline and leading in-
vestigation from the latest relics of true Indian art to the earliest
and at the same time the most glorious representatives of Indian
workmanship.

I say “true Indian art.” For when you go through the
splendid photo-series illustrating this volume, you will immedi-
ately be impressed by the truly Indian character of the ornament.
This is not only the case with the decorative ornament in general.
The true Indian character shines forth above all in the sculpture
cycles decorating the terraces of the monument. It was one of the
characteristic features of the Hindoo artists in Java, that they
decorated the walls not only with detached sculptures and statues,
but with a continuous line of scenes representing a whole cycle of
legends. They reached their highest perfection i in the sculpture
cycles of central Java. At the Brahmanical sanctuary of Pram-
banam the legend of the Ramayana is worked out in a splendid
set of reliefs. But in the Buddhist sanctuary of Boro Bodur we
have the whole legend of the life of Buddha as told in the
Lalitavistara, put before our eyes within the frame of more than
sixty reliefs. Another series of sculptures represents in continu-
ous line more than thirty Jatakas, that is to say, more than all the
Buddhist monuments of India proper and of Afghanistan toge-
ther contain. Besides there is another sculpture cycle of more
than sixty highly-refined reliefs, of which the meaning has not yet
been discovered. We meet with the same characteristic feature
in the monument described in the present volume.

The Sanctuary is mounted on a threefold terrace, one terrace
rising above the other. The walls of every terrace have their
peculiar cycle of legends. In the first terrace we meet with a set
of legends evidently taken from the fables of the Pancatantra ; the
reliefs of the second terrace represent scenes of the Rama legend ;
those of the third terrace give the Arjunavivaha and especially
Arvjuna’s fight with Civa; finally the walls of the Sanctuary itself
are decorated with scenes of the Krishna legend. So we see
here united within the architectural limits of a small sanctuary
a good number of favourite topics of Hindoo epic poetry.

Now as regards artistic workmanship the sculpture-cycles of
Tjandi Toempang are, as I have already pointed out, far inferior
to those found in Central Java. For comparison’s sake I have laid
before you a few of my own photos, representing scenes of the
sculpture cycles either of Boro-Bodur or of Prambanam. Nay,
the artistic value of our Tjandi must be held even much inferior
to the reliefs of Panataran, lying in the same region of Hastern
Java.

But it is not the artistic value, which gives to the sculpture-
cycles here represented their importance. This is to be sought
for in quite another line of comparison.

96 Archzologisch Onderzoek op Java en Madura. ' [March 1905. ~

The artists of the classical period of Hindoo art in Java
closely followed the original Sanserit texts when representing their
legendary objects. The legends, as told either in the original
Ramayana and Mahabharata or in the original Lalitavistara,
were the models put before the eyes of the workmen of Central Jaya.
In Eastern Java, onthe contrary, it is no longer Hindoo epic poetry
as contained in the original epic, but Hindoo poetry remodelled in
the old Javanese Kavi translation. The scenes of the first terrace,
although closely resembling some legends of the Pancatantra, follow
the old Javanese Tantra, which itself is based on the original Pan-
catantra or on the Hitopadega. The cycle of the second terrace
follows the Rama legend as told in the old Javanese Ramayana.
Andso with the legend of Arjuna in the third terrace and with the
Krishna legend on the walls of the Sanctuary. It is therefore asa
Javanese reflex of Hindoo poetry, thatis to say, as a typical old
Javanese development of Hindoo thought and Hindoo life,—an
outcome of that continuous Hindoo influence, spread over the
country for so many centuries—that the monument before us
should be viewed and a place assigned to it in the history of Indian
art in Java. In these sculptures we must look therefore for the
true representative of all those literary and artistic characteristics
which Hindoo civilisation finally developed on Javanese ground
and which, combined together, make out the proper and original -
type of old Javanese civilisation.

But there is yet another remarkable point to be noted in our
monument; a point which is of considerable importance with
regard to the religious and artistic development of Hindoo belief
not only in Java but over the whole sphere of India.

Look at the decorative element of our sanctuary. You will
find nothing in it indicative of a work of Buddhist devotion.
The sculpture-cycles, in which Viva plays such a remarkable part,
might lead you to say that Tjandi Toempang is a monument of
Civa worship.

But this is not the case. Although the ornament is all
Brahmanical and as regards the sculpture cycles rather Civaite,
the monument itself was consecrated to the worship of the five
Dhyani-Buddhas and of three Taras or mystic powers. This
becomes evidently manifest in the splendid statues representing
separately the Dhyani-Buddhas and their Taras. And if there
could be a doubt about the character of these statues, the old
Nagari inscriptions, giving to every statue its proper signification
would dispel it.

How is this fact, that is to say the close connexion of Civaite
art and Buddhistic worship, to be explained.

The foundation of the Sanctuary, according to an inscription
found at Tjandi Toempong is to be assigned to the first half of the
thirteenth century. Hindoo society in Eastern Java was at that
time absolutely Yivaite; it had been Civaite ever since the
seventh and eight century and remained Civaite in spite of the
Buddhistic influence spreading over the country. Buddhism

Vol. I, No. 3.] Archxologisch Onderzoek op Java en Madura. 97
[N. 8.]

became in the ninth century so strong that it could give rise to
monuments of such splendour as we see in Boro-Bodur and in its
neigbourhoo’. it is as if a mighty wave of Buddhist influence
had suddenly come over Hindoo civilisation, established in Java
on a thoroughly Brahmanical ground, either Qivaite or Vishnuite.
Later on this Buddhist wave lost its strength amidst Qivaite and
Vishnuite worship, rooted deeper and spreading farther its branches
amongst the Hindooised population.

But in the beginning of the thirteenth century a second wave
of Buddhist influence reached Java on its eastern shore. This
second wave came evidently from the south of India and gained
some temporary ascendancy in the mighty kingdom of Madja-
pahit. That there must have been such an influence coming from
the south, long ago, was pointed out by Burnell in his South-Indian
Inscriptions. He found evidence of it in the close resemblance of
the Nagari type of inscriptions we find in connexion with the
statues to the Nagari type of South India. He was only wrong
about the epoch, saying that according to the resemblance of types
this influence must have been exerted in the eleventh century. The
writing of the inscriptions closely resembles the Nagari character
of the first half of the thirteenth century, which is quite in ac-
cordance with the age of the monument, as attested by the inscrip-
tion of King Vishnuvardhana. The monument described is there-
fore a new proof of the fact that Buddhism was yet existing
in the south of India at the beginning of the thirteenth century,
as in fact it existed in the north of India. But at the same time it
is evident that Buddhism as developed in the Mahayana, had
entered into a close religious and artistic alliance with Viva worship.
With regard to this the Sanscrit inscription found in Kasia in the
North-Western Provinces and recently interpreted by Prof.
Kielhorn of Giéttingen gives a striking parallel.

The inscription in the two first lines celebrates Civa; in the
third line Tara, the Buddhagakti is mentioned disertis verbis.
In the fourth and fifth line Buddha is celebrated as Tathagata and
Munindra. So we find in the north of India the same connexion of
Civa on the one side, of Buddha and its Gahti on the other side
that we meet with in the eastern part of Java.

The few words I desired to say have become many. But
they are, I hope, not quite out of place, since they tried to
show how much light the religious and artistic development of
Hindooism in Java may yet throw on the whole history of Indian
religion and art. Further research may perhaps lead to the dis-
covery of a page of the history of Indian art, lost in India proper
and preserved in the Hindooised island far away.

~—_—

Vol. I, No. 4.] Anuruddha Thera. 99
[N. 8.]

10. Anuruddha Thera—a learned Pali author of Southern India
in the 12th Century A.D.—By Pror. Satis CHanpRA ViDYABHOSANA,
M.A.

With the rise of Buddhism the Pali language rose to pro-
minence in the 6th Century B.C. From that time to the close of
the lst Century B.C., that is, for nearly five hundred years, the
Buddhist books including the well known Tripitakas, which were
rehearsed in the three famous Buddhist councils, were used to be
written principally in the Pali language. But since the rise of
the Mahayana school of Buddhism under the auspices of the
fourth Buddhist Council that was held in Kasmira about the
beginning of the Christian era, Sanskrit has been chosen as the
principal medium of Buddhistic communications and the Bud-
dhistic books have generally been written in the Sanskrit
language.

Thousands of Indian books written in the Sanskrit language
have recently been recovered from or traced in Nepal, Tibet,
China, Japan, etc. But very few Indian books written in the Pali
language have been obtained from those places. Are we then to
suppose that with the rise of the Mahayana school about the Ist
Century A.D., the use of the Pali language in the sacred scrip-
tures was altogether stopped in India P I daresay the answer is
no, for, even in the 5th Century A.D., when the Mahayana school
attained its highest development, India produced several eminent
Pali writers of whom Buddhaghosa! stands as the foremost. In
the Ceylonese records? we find indications that even up to the year
1462 A.D. Ceylon used to derive some of its Pali literature from
India and Buddhist monks were in large numbers sent to Ceylon
by the Southern Indian kings of the Chola and other dynasties.
It is not within the scope of this paper to enumerate all the Pali
writers that flourished in India between the Ist Century A.D.
and 15th Century A.D. In the present paper I shall give a brief
account of only one of the many Pali writers that adorned India
during that long period. The name of this writer was Anurud-
dha Thera.

Anuruddha was the author of three works in the Pali lan-
guage, viz., Abhidhammatthasamgaha, Paramatthavinicchaya and
Nama-riipa-pariccheda. Besides, he was the author of a did-
actic Buddhistic poem in classical Sanskrit which is generally
known under the name of Anuruddha-sataka.°

| Vide Mahavamsa, chapter XX XVII.

%* Mahavamesa, Rajavali, Rajaratnakari, Saddharmialankara, commentary
on the Visuddhimagga, etc.

3 In the Saddhammasamgaha, chap. IX, verses 14, 15, London Pali Text
Society’s edition (Vide J.P.T.S., 1890), two Pali works of Anuruddha have

100 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, { April, 1905.

In the Saddhammasamgaha and Paramatthavinicchaya it is
stated that Anuruddha was born in Kaficipura on the Kaveri
where he spent the early part of his life as a Buddhist priest. He
gradually rose to the position of Sanghanayaka or High-priest.
Subsequently he went to Tinnevelly and Tanjore and resided there
for some time for the propagation of Buddhism. Afterwards he
went over to Ceylon and was admitted into the priesthood of the
Uttaramila monastery. He is mentioned in the Sataka as an
upasthavira, but in the Saddhammasamgaha and other books he is
described as a thera.

The Uttaramila or Uttarola monastery! originated in Ceylon
at the latter half of the 11th Century A.D. Anuruddha who
belonged to that monastery? must therefore have lived after the
11th Century A.D.

In the Mahavamsa it is stated that Vijayabahu I, who was
King of Ceylon from 1065 A.D.—1120 A.D., sent messengers
with gifts to the Ramaiifia country unto his friend the King of

been mentioned, viz., Abhidhammatthasamgaha and Paramatthavinicchaya
Thus we read there :—

Bjqrust Bia afyqeat az |
URia Hat at yeHatafawag || 28 1
waqaugiaaia Gta cag £zq |
YAQUA SI AUIAWMITT | VY |

( aamdae, ufvepe ¢ ) |

Elsewhere we find the mention of two other works of Anuruddha,
viz., Namaripapariccheda and Sataka. The Abhidhammatthasamgaha has
been published by the Pali Text Society of London, and the Sataka by the
Buddhist Text Society of Calcutta.

1 Mahavamsa, chap. LVII, verse 20.

° sateal featatfza aqearet-
fies afazet Gate: |
EF PUNTA SIT-

Larpatremfarigag: tek 1 ( wqREMaT) |

3 Mahavamsa, chap, LX, verse 5.

‘Vol. I, No. 4.] Anuruddha Thera. 101
ENS.

Anuruddha to bring from there some learned Buddhist monks and
elders of the church. I have reasons to believe that the Ramajfiia!
country was identical with the kingdom of the Pallavas that lay in
the Coromandel coast, and “the King of Anuruddha” was the
Pallaya King in whose territory Anuruddha was born and from whose
territory learned monks including Anuruddha himself were taken
over to Ceylon. Anuruddha must on this supposition have gone
to Ceylon early in the 12th Century A.D. when Vijayabahu I was
King of the island.

Kajcipura in which Anuruddha was born is identified with
modern Conjeeveram, 43 miles south-west of Madras. It was the
capital of the ancient kingdom of Dravida and was the residence
of the kings of the Pallava dynasty till that dynasty was over-
thrown by the Cholas at the close of the 11th Century AD.
Rajarajendra Kulottunga Chola I, who reigned from 1064—1113
A.D., is said to have completely crushed the power of the Pallava
kings and to have destroyed the city of Kaftci. He, however, sub-
sequently rebuilt and greatly improved that city but selected
Tanjore as the permanent place of residence of the Chola kings.
Anuruddha, we have seen, lived both in Kaiici and Tanjore.

It may be noted here that the Pallava Kings who reigned in
Kanci were staunch Buddhists and belonged to the Sthavira school.
It has already been stated that they were overthrown by the
Cholas inthe 1Ith Century A.D. From that time downwards they
remained as vassals under the Chola kings. The last mention of
the Pallavas as a dynasty occurs, as far as it is known at present,
about the year 1223 A.D. In 1310 A.D. the Cholas being con-
quered by the Mahomedans Kajfici passed into the hands of the
conquerors. Harly in the 12th century A.D. Ramanuyja, the cele-
brated Vaisnava preacher, flourished in Sriperumatur, 18 miles east-
north-east of Kaiicipura, and converted the kings of the Chalukya,
Chola and other dynasties into his religion. The Buddhists were
henceforth persecuted by the Vaisnavas of the Ramanuja school
as wel] as by the Mahomedan conquerors. Still Buddhism
lingered for some time in Kaficipura or Conjeeveram and finally
disappeared from it at the close of the 15th Century A.D. Anurud-
dha Thera, who flourished in Kaficipura early in the 12th Century
A.D., was by no means the last Buddhist Pali scholar of that city.

} In Burmese books we find, however, that Anaurata or Anuruddha was
the 42nd (or 44th) King of Pagan and Ramafiia or Ramagniais the country
round Thaton. Vide Bigandet’s Legend of Gaudama, Vol. IT, pp. 145-146
(3rd edition). Rev. T. Foulkes observes :—‘‘ Sir Hmersgon Tennent guesses
that this Kingdom of Aramana [Ramafifia] may be apart of the Indo-Chinese
Peninsula probably between Arracan and Siam; and Turnour had already,
without giving any authority, fixed it in Arracan; but the passages in the
Rajaratnakari, the Rajavali and the Mahadvamsa, in which it is mentioned,
clearly locate it on the Coromandel coast; and, as it is not Pandya nor Chola,
the only part of that coast which remains is that which lies between Chola
and Kalinga, namely, the old dominions of the Pallavas.” ‘he Indian Anti-
quary, Vo\. XVII (1888), page 126.

102 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. |[April, 1905.

11. The Colouring Principle of the flowers of Nyctanthes Arbor-
trist’s—By HE. G. Hitt, B.A.

The Nyctanthes Arbor-tristis, known in Urdu as “ Harsinghar,”
is a large shrub of the order Oleacesze. The flowers are sessile in
bracteate fascicles, they are pedunculate and are arranged in short
terminal trichotomous cymes; the corolla: tube is orange, and the
limb white. The flowers open at night and fall to the ground the
following day. ‘They are then collected for use in dyeing. The
plant grows most abundantly in the sub- Himalayan districts.

For use in dyeing, the flowers are steeped or boiled in water
and the solution strained off. It is a beautiful rich golden-yellow,
and dyes cotton fabrics without a mordant. The effect is tran-
sitory, the colour fading slowly. When used with alum or lime-
juice the colour is brighter and less transitory, but the chief use
of the dye is in combination with turmeric and safflower. It is
seldom used with indigo. It is sometimes employed for colouring
fancy leather-work. With safflower, turmeric, red ochre, myroba-
lans and sulphate of iron it gives a fast maroon-brown, and with
Butea frondosa and indigo and acidulated water, a fast grape

een.

No reference has been found to this flower in the chemical
literature at my disposal, but in 1902, A. P. Sirkar made in my
laboratory, a preliminary investigation into the colouring principle,
which he considered existed in the flowers as a glucoside. He was
unable to obtain this in a pure state, owing to its sparing
solubility in most solvents, but he suggested C,;H.,O, for
the colouring matter, although on boiling this with dilute hydro-
chloric acid, he obtained a substance with a brighter colourand a
higher percentage of carbon. He also considered that there were
two methoxy groups present in the compound and at least one
carbonyl group.

The most noticeable feature of the colouring matter was the
high percentage of hydrogen which was invariably obtained on
combustion.

The method of work was as follows :—

Aqueous extract.—The flowers were extracted in cold water
and the extract carefully filtered. The infusion was light -yellow
in dilute, and dark-brown in concentrated solutions. It had a great
attraction for flies. The infusion gave an acid reaction with litmus,
and a yellow precipitate with basic lead acetate which became yellow
onaddition of ammonia. With copper sulphate it gave a pale-yellow
precipitate, which became green with ammonia. Stannous chloride
gave a turbidity which disappeared on adding acetic acid. Ferric
chloride gave a greenish-black colour which darkened on adding
ammonia. Fehling’s solution was reduced, as were also gold chloride
and ammoniacal silver nitrate. It gave no reaction with gelatin.
When a few drops of the infusion were carefully added to a few
cubic centimetres of concentrated sulphuric acid, an intense blue

Vol. I, No. 4.] Colouring Principle of Nyctanthes Arbor-tristis. 103
EN.S.]

colour was produced at the junction of the two liquids. This soon
darkened and disappeared.

When the infusion was allowed to stand for a few days alone,
a reddish-brown deposit settled. If a little hydrochloric acid was
added to the infusion, a reddish flocculent precipitate settled after
about twelve hours. A similar precipitate was obtained by
heating the infusion with basic lead acetate, decomposing the
washed yellow precipitate with sulphuretted hydrogen, and warm-
ing the yellow solution obtained on filtering. The amount ob-
tained was always very small, but attempts to get more from the
solution by heating on the water-bath with dilute hydrochloric acid
resulted in the deposition of a black amorphous substance. When
dried, it was very light and. friable, and varied in colour from a
very dark-brown to a jet black. On evaporating the solution after
removal of this black substance, it was found to contain a sweet
substance, which reduced Fehling’s solution on boiling.

About two grains of the red colouring matter were collected,
and washed with water. On boiling with alcohol a large quantity
dissolved, and the residue appeared to consist of mineral matter,
The alcoholic solution on evaporation gave a dark-red lustrous
deposit. This was entirely soluble in alcohol. Thus obtained, the
substance melted between 250° and 260°, dissolved in alcohol, ethyl
acetate, and ether, but it could be made to crystallize from none
of these. It also dissolved readily in alkalis and alkaline carbon-
ates, and in a solution of borax. It was sparingly soluble in
chloroform and carbon bisulphide, insoluble in benzene and cold
ea very slightly soluble in hot water, and soluble in acetic
acid.

Alcoholic extract.—Owing to the apparent high solubility of the
colonring matter in alcohol, some of the flowers were extracted in a
Soxhlet apparatus with alcohol (sp. gr. ‘810) till they were colour-
less, and the hot alcohol was then allowed to cool. On cooling,
bunches of needle-like crystals had settled all over the flask.
These were pale-yellow, but after several recrystallizations became
white. They had a sweet taste, reduced a solution of ammonia-
cal silver nitrate, but did not rotate polarized light.

Analysis gave :—
Carbon =389'62
Hydrogen. = 7:96
Mannitol ne C=39'57
18 (Oh requires 4 4 _ 7.0

The crystals melted at 166°;
Mannitol melts at 168°.

When the filtrate from the mannitol was slightly evaporated
and cooled, no further precipitation occurred, but a small quantity
of wax separated. The residue contained crude colouring matter
with some resinous products. To obtain the colouring principle,

104 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. { April, 1905.

the alcoholic solution was heated with dilute hydrochloric acid,
when a bright scarlet product was obtained. This was filtered
off and washed with alcohol.

The yield was very small, but thus prepared, the colouring
principle was only very slightly soluble inall solvents. If dissolved
in large excess of alcohol and allowed to evaporate the colouring
principle deposited a microscopic powder which seemed to be
crystalline when viewed under an oilimmersion (-;).

Preparation of the colouring principle.-—Since the above method
was obviously not adapted to the preparation on a large scale, the
colouring matter obtained by hydrolysis of the aqueous extract was
dissolved as far as possible in alcohol and the solution heated with
hydrochloric acid, when, as arule, the bright red colouring principle
was deposited. It was only possible to work with small quantities at
a time, and in some cases black tarry products resulted at once with
no red deposit at all. Moreover in some cases it appeared that
the hydrolysis of the aqueous solution resulted at once in precipi-
tation of most of the colouring principle,in which case the
precipitate from the acidified water solution would not dissolve to any
extent in alcohol, and the colouring principle could not be extracted
by this method. The extraction was thus attended with great
difficulty, and it was foundthat the best method was to keep
solutions dilute, not to add too much acid, and not to boil The
flocculent precipitate from the aqueous extract was then moderately
soluble in alcohol, and on warming the alcoholic solution with
hydrochloric acid a red precipitate settled down which could be
easily filtered off. This red precipitate was washed with alcohol
and water, and the purified product collected.

For a long time this could not be obtained pure, but it was
eventually found to crystallize from pyridine and toluene. In the
former of these it was very soluble, in the latter moderately so.

The crystals were apparently of two kinds—one yellow and
one red, but on gently warming the yellow crystals they became
red.

The melting point of the crystals was 225°—230°. They were
tested for methoxy groups by Ziesel’s method; none were present.

Two combustions of an incompletely purified sample (it
yielded a trace of ash on combustion) gave :—

C=69:10 nal C=68'91
Bless WRB | H= 7:34
an CAE O)) requires } ose
=68°4
Ci9H2,0; oy) {ho 7s

Several other combustions of other samples had been made
in the course of the work. Results varied from 68°60 to
70°36 for carbon, and 7°34 to 8°3 for hydrogen. The author thus

Vol. I, No. 4.] Colouriny Principle of Nyctanthes Arbor-tristis. 105
EVES:

does not attach importance to the formule mentioned above.
It is certain, however, that Sirkar’s results are useless.

Properties of the colouring matter.—The red crystals were
practically insoluble in water, very slightly soluble in ether, benzene,
alcohol, ligroin, moderately soluble in toluene, and readily in
pyridine. With strong sulphuric acid they gave an intense blue
compound which rapidly became yellow through apparent
absorption of atmospheric moisture.

The author hopes to complete the investigation on some
future occasion.

OW ae OO

106 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [ April, 1905.

12. The Monasteries of Tibet.*—By Rai Sarat CHanpra Das
Bahadur, C.1.E.

INTRODUCTION.

Tibet is the land of monasteries. Her history chiefly compri-
ses records of the establishment of monasteries and temples and
their endowments by the State, chiefs and nobles of the country,
commencing from the middle of the 7th Century A.D., to the
18th Century.

There are eighteen different Buddhist sects, out of which four
are widely distributed all over higher Asia including Tibet, Mongo-
lia and Western China. Of these four sects three, viz., Sakya,
Dtk-pa and Ning-ma have the red-cap, which they use during
religious services only, to distinguish them from the remaining
15 sects. The fourth which is the reformed sect and therefore the
purest of all, has become dominant since the middle of the 17th
Century. Its monks use the yellow-cap. The Dalai Lama is the
head of this Church.

In the official register at Lhasa, in 1882, the total number of
monasteries belonging to the Yellow-cap Church was 1026 with
491,242 monks. _Out ofthis number, 281 monasteries belonged to
the provinces of U and Tsang which constitute Tibet proper, 150 to
the provinces of Nyang, Lhobrag and Kong-po; 27 to Upper
Kham; 154 to Lower Kham and 414 to Ulterior Tibet which is
called Poi-Chen or greater Tibet. In this list village-monasteries
and Mani-lhakhang (prayer-wheel temples) have not been entered.

The number of monasteries belonging to the three red-cap
sects, is a little more than the total of the Yellow-cap Church insti-
tutions. This would bring the total of the monasteries of all the
18 sects to over 2,500 and that of the monks to about 760,000.

In Tibet every third boy in a family, as a rule, is sent to the
monastery, in consequence of which the male population of the coun-
try may be roughly estimated at 24 to 3 millions.

The Yellow-cap Church Lamas take the vow of celebacy, which
circumstances precludes them from keeping female company. But
many among them while residing abroad seldom conform them-
selves to monastic discipline.

The miserable pittance which the monks of even the State-
supported monasteries get for their subsistence, hardly exceeds
three Tanka, 7.e.,1 3 Re. a month. Owing to this, about one-fifth
of the monks in a monastery generally turn into traders. Many
among them become mendicant priests and roam over the country in
quest of the necessaries of life. These are called Tapa or monas-
tery-boys. The agricultural population often regard them with
dread for their irregular habits of life and clamouring for alms.

There are few convents in Tibet and the number of nuns
(Tstinmo) in them is very small. While the largest monastery
contains 10,000 monks, the largest convent can hardly count 100

* Compiled from Pagsam Jon zai and other Tibetan historical works.

Vol. I, No. 4.] The Monasteries of Tibet. 107
[N. 8.]

nuns for its inmates. The nuns of Tibet have the reputation of
being pure as only the most religiously disposed among the fair
sex betake themselves to monastic life. The red-cap Lamas gener-
ally keep concubines called Anz who often dress as nuns.

Marriage being the exclusive privilege of the eldest brother in
a landholder’s family, the younger brothers seldom care to share
the bed of the house-wife with him which the custom of the coun-
try allows. They generally keep concubines. It is true that
thereis marriage among the rich cultivators and herdsmen, but the
majority of the common people make family in wedlock either
singly or jointly. Thus, side by side with polyandry, concubinage
has become a popular institution in Tibet. Out of 100, 99 people
keep concubines. This explains the question as to what becomes of
the majority of the female population who remain unmarried. The
Tibetan male is generally less jealous than the Tibetan female
which circumstance has given rise to the formation of that much
despised relationship called Nyamdo-pin, 1.e., brotherhood in wed-
lock versus brotherhood in matrimony which is polyandry pure and
simple.

RA-DENG.
x "AIC"
a

The monastery of Radeng was founded by Dom-ton-pa ! in the
year 1056 A.D. Many predictions were on record in some of the
sacred books such as Mafjucri Mila Tantra,? Phalpo-che, Do iif-
je Padma Karpo,? etc., as to the rise and progress of a great school
and monastery in the centre of Tibet. Conformably to them,
Dom-ton-pa founded Ra-deng in one of the finest spots of U,* rich
in various kinds of alpine vegetation. The valley of Ra-deng is clad
in thick forests of firs, cedars, cypresses, and junipers. It abounds
in numerous brooks and fountains, which yield very good water.
Nine mountains, the culminating cliffs of which have various
slopes, form the back-ground of this famed old monastery. Many
kinds of medicinal plants grow on these hills.

At this charming place which was possessed of many auspi-
cious signs essential to the site of a sacred Buddhist institution,
Dom-ton-pa built the monastery of Khyungo-chan, or “ Hagle’s
head,” in the vicinity of the hill of Senge-tag ® (lion’s rock). The
valleys which open to the east and west of Ra-deng have spacious
plateaus rich with verdure. On account of the tall and horn-
like shape of the trees growing in this place, the monastery of

aber S51] : ARATAAA'S "5 |
“SRRCE MRT age) ACA SRY

108 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {Apyril, 1905.

Khyungo-chan ! was called Ra-deng from (rwa, ‘a horn,’ and sgreng,
‘standing erect.’) The large silver tomb which contains Atiga’s?
remains is the most remarkable of all the sacred objects of Ra-deng.
The central chapel of the monastery contains a complete set of the
images of the Tantrik pantheon, in which Buddha is observing the
triple vows, Maitreya watching the course of the world, and the
four gods of medicine (Manlha) * looking to the four quarters as in
life. Outside the cupola of the great Chorten was constructed the
mansion of the chief Tantrik deity of Guhya Samaja (the mystic
commune) with a number of mystical gods, all in relief. When
the erection of the monastery with the images was completed,
Dom-ton-pa is said to have propitiated the god of the Tushita
heaven toenable him to have his monastery consecrated by his
spiritual father. Accordingly, Atiga, who was then seated on the
right of Maitreya, the coming Buddha, showered flowers toward
Ra-deng from Tushita. Dom-ton-pa presided over the monastery
for eight years.

At Ra-deng there is a golden image of Milaras-pa, the famous
Buddhist saint._ It is said that the Jungar Mongolian Chief, who
persecuted the Nin-ma' Buddhists in 1716, on his way to Lhasa
visited Ra-deng, and was much astonished when he was told that
the hair on the head of the saints’ image was not artificial. In
the library of Ra-deng there were many rare ancient Sanskrit
works kept sealed by the Government of Lhasa. Ra-deng was
the chief seat of the first and the earliest Buddhist hierarchy of
Tibet and belonged to the Kahdam-pa School.

The Monastery of GaH-DAN.
aaIA'aI x EREIS a AA aC

Tsong-khapa the great Buddhist reformer of Tibet, in fulfilment
of a certain prophecy of Buddha, in the year 1408 A.D., established
the grand annual prayer congregation of Lhasa, called the Mon-lam$
chen-po. After making offerings to the gods he prayed for the
welfare of all living beings. In the autumn of the same year he
examined the auspicious signs regarding the suitability of a plot

1 e as
BEATS
2 —
AS | The name by which Dipamkara Qrijfiana the high-

priest of Vikrama Gila Vihéra of Magadha is known all over Tibet. He was
Dom-ton-pa’s spiritual teacher and died at Ne-thang near Lhasa only three
years before the foundation of the monastery.

as 2

RR] Bey Byawrayey

Vol. I. No. 4.] The Monasteries of Tibet. 109
[ENE Ss. |

of land situated on the hill of Dok-poiri! with a view to erect on it a
great monastery. In the rocks of that hill he observed many religi-
ous symbols such as the sacred mystic syllables ‘Om mani-padme
him, om vajra pani hum,” etc., and seeing that there was some scar-
city of water, he touched with his hand the water of a little foun-
tain that trickled down. On further examination the fountain
proved to be the source of a streamlet. In the midst of the rocks
of Dok-poiri he found several fossil conch-shells one of which
having its whorls from right* to left was believed to have been
used by the Buddha himself. Krom a rock-cayern in the neigh-
bourhood he unearthed a mask believed to have been used by the
Lamas during King Thisrong-deu tsan’s® time. It had the miracu-
lous power of dispelling all the evil spirits of the place. On this
auspicious place Tsong-khapa laid the foundation of the world-re-
nowned monastery of Gahdan. Within the remaining months of
the year the Dukhang-Uma* (central congregational hall), seven
cells for the residence of monks, and a building for the high-priest’s
residence, were finished. Assoon as the monastery approached com-
pletion, presents of gold, silver, precious stones, and other articles
from the pious flowed to it from different quarters. The number of
monks increased every year. Tsong-khapa furnished the monastery
with numerous religious books, objects andsymbols. In the64th year
of his age he erected the T'sang-kkang*® the principal chapel in the
monastery. This was followed by the Gon-khang,® the chapel of
the hideous looking gods of mysticism. Then were constructed the
Khyamra or courtyard, and overhanging it all round, porticos
resting on 70 pillars. The Tsang-khang or chapel of worship was
provided with a large image of the Buddha, three superb mansions
of the gods of the Tushita heaven made of precious stones, with
Bhairava, Maiju (ri, the deities presiding over the destinies of all
living beings of the world and with the huge images of the four
Lokapila. He also enriched the library with many rare books of
Buddhism. At Gahdan there are now only two colleges for reli-
gious instruction to 3,300 monks, viz:—

(1) Car-tse Tva-tshang,’ where metaphysics are taught.
(2) Chyang-tse,2 where esoteric Buddhism and mysticism
are taught.

a SESTIRSPRTARS |

aQ935] ARRESTS

REE] |S SRR]
Wea eateen SEE pmo

aw

110 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (April, 1905.

Later on, during the ministry of Tsong-khapa’s illustrious suc-
cessors, the monastery became converted into a grand university
both for secular and religious education.

In the temples erected by Gyal-tshab! Darma Rinchen and
Dul-dsin the most remarkable object is the Nam-gyal? Chorten,?
which contains the remains and personal properties of the great
reformer. A satin tent hangs over the altar containing the urn.
During the ministry of Gedun Phun-tshog Lozang Tanzing,* Tashi
Badur the great Khan of Kokonar covered the silver tomb of
Tsong-khapa with thin plates of gold. (The gold used there is
said to have been one year’s revenue derived from Kham). On
the right and left of this central tomb-chorten there are the tombs
of the disciples and the illustrious successors of the founder. In
some of them are placed their respective statues.

In the chapel, called Serdan-Tsangkhang > (golden pure hall)
at the centre of the great temple called Yang-pachan, there are the
images of Buddha, Maitreya, and Amitabha. In the Gonkhang
the life size statues of Kushi Khan ® and his generals are placed in
martial attitude. Besides these, stand several mythological war-
riors all in divers frightful attitudes. In the chapel called Dub-
choi? Tsang-khang the remarkable thing is the image of Gamvara
the chief of the Tantrzk deities, with the Saktz (female energy) in
his clasp.

In the Lama-khang a statue of Tsong-khapa, his works in
original, painted tapestries, a set of Kahgyur scriptures written in
gold, etc., are among the remarkable articles. This was Tsong-
khapa’s study in his oldage. There are also several Chortens and an
image of Vajra Bhairava, the fearful defender of Buddhism. In
the Sarma-khang, erected by Lodoi Choikyong,* there are the
images of the Buddhas and Bodhisattvas made of gold, sandal-wood,
medicinal minerals besides numerous chortens, tapestries, pictures,
etc. Inthe De Veg ® Lhakhang, 7.e., the temple of the Tathagata
there are eight silver chortens consecrated to the eight Buddhas.
The most prominent of the images of the temple called Chyam-
khang is that of Maitreya, the future Buddha, which is said to
have come flying from Magadha. Beside it, stand in row the im-
ages of several Bodhisattvas. In the Zim-khang! the private

© eT SS] © RATES

stg] * SAPQRT RASHBT AAR AWA AES
TaeaysseRe] * A GayseEs srg
TSAI * ETAISTSSATAICA |
"SRSLY * Bsr,

Vol. I, No. 4.] The Monasteries of Tibet. 111

NES. |
residence of Tsong-khapa, which contains the chair of the great re-
former, is to be seen the curious image of the hero Khanda Kapala
with a halo of variegated colours round his head. In the ascetical
cell called Hodsalphug' (the cavern of light) where Tsong-khapaused
to perform ascetical meditation the images of the terrific Vajrapani
and his retinue attract the attention of the pilgrims. In the interior of
the hall of priestly assembly called Dukhang-Karpo, * the Serthi ®
(the golden chair, 7.e., the hierarchical throne) and the statue of
Tsong-khapa impress the faithful pilgrim with awe and reverence.
Phola Jing Wang provided this temple with a gilt dome built after
the Chinese style and deposited in it a set of 108 volumes of the
Kahgyur scriptures written in gold. In the Nai-choikhang* a
tooth of the saintly reformer, called Tsem-Hodzer-ma > (the lustrous
tooth) and the image of the thousand armed Avalokitegvara whose
eleven heads look with eyes of mercy on all living beings of the
world, are remarkable.

In the college of Chyang-tse, there is an elephant illustrative
of one of Buddha’s former births with a number of devout followers,
all made of horn. There are also some representations of sainted
fairies called Khandoma,® and a set of Vanérik bone ornaments
including strings of beads, earrings, chains, amulets, etc., all made
of human bones. All these are said to have once been used by the
Indian saint Naropa. Naropa’s mitre-shaped crown and his Tshe-
bum (pot of longevity) containing consecrated water which never
dries, are looked upon by devout pilgrims as wonderful objects of
veneration. In the Gonkhang of this college there are terrific
representations of the Lord of Death and his frightful companions,
messengers, and guards. In the Parkhang (printing house) are tobe
seen Tsong-khapa’s voluminous works—all engraved on wooden
blocks which are piled up in different rooms from which impres-
sions can be had on daphne paper, at any time, at asmall cost. In
the temple of Yangpa-chan’ there are the scenes of Buddha’s triumph
over Mara (the evil one) and his legions. In the outer passage of cir-
cumambulation called Chyi-kor ®pilevrims are shewn many self-exis-
tent (Rang-Jing)® sacred letters, figures, and fountain heads, finger-
marks and footprints on rocks,and outside of this passage there
is a lofty seat consecrated to the mountain god of Ma-chen
Pomra, who is said to have patronised Tsong-khapa in his arduous
works. The successors of Tsong-khapa, who are appointed by

ASABE] AS RORTAE] © ARATE
BAT SST AISA | * BAS SN | |
* BIRAYART S| © AQEATETS§

| * REC

112 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1905.

election from among the most learned and pious Lamas of ordinary

birth, occupy the hierarchical throne called Sertht. They are, there-

fore, called Gahdan Thi-pa,! 2.e., President or Chairman of Gahdan.

Men of learning generally resort to Gahdan. Its monks, for the

excellent education they get in the university, always rise to dis- -
tinction in the public service both secular and religious. All

sections and classes of men are represented at Gahdan.

The monastery of Sangkhar which contains 200 monks at
Dachan,? north of Lhasa, was founded by Tsong-khapa under the
auspices of a rich noble named Rinchen Shun-pa of Tag-kar. It
is under the supervision of the Gahdan Thi-pa.

The Monastery of SERA.
SN, = a) Bias e
a

The monastery of Sera (literally, wild rose) was founded by
Cham-chen-choije Cakya Yeces® in 1418, the year of Tsong-khapa’s
death.

The Governor Nehu-pa who patronised Tsong-khapa and his
disc:ples, frequently used to invite them to Sera-tse,* a retired
hermitage on the top of the hill overhanging Sera. On these occa-
sions Choije devotedly served the reformer, in consequence of which
Tsong-khapa predicted a great future for a monastery which
Choije would found in that neighbourhood. A saintly Lama while
sitting in meditation, cast his eyes on a spot lower down the
hermitage which was filled with wild rose plants in blossom.
He predicted that some day there would be a monastery there.
Emperor Yunglo of the Taming dynasty, had sent an invitation to
Tsong-khapato visit Peking ; but the great reformer, finding Chovje’s
time fully occupied with the more important work of religious
reformation, sent Cakya Yeces as his representative. Ytnglo did
honour to the Yellow-cap Church by showing every consideration to
this disciple of the reformer on his arrival at Peking where Choije’s
first act was to bring about the recovery of the Emperor from a seri-
ous illness by the efficacy of his religious services. The temple
of Maitreya, then recently built by the Hmperor, was placed in his
charge and he was given the name of Chyam-chen Chodje. Un-
der the Imperial auspices Choije founded the monastery of
Hwang-sze (Yellow-temple) in one of the imperial gardens of
Peking situated a few-miles to its north. For diffusing the reform-
ed creed of Tsong-khapa in China he had taken with him several
of Tsong-khapa’s works and a_ set of block-print Kahgyur

eet Pee ase

Vol. I, No. 4] The Monasteries of Trbet. . 113

scriptures. After converting the Lamas of Peking tothe reformed
Yellow-cap Church he returned to Tibet. On the way he paid his
reverence to Tsong-khapa making rich presents to him. Subse-
quently, he founded the monastery of Sera Theg-chen-ling, which
now contains 5,500 monks and exercises much influence in the
secular and religious administration of the country.

He established a university in it with four Tva-tshang or col-
leges. Of these Gya-7'va-tshang belonged to the upper division
of Sera and the remaining three, 7.e., Thoisam, Norpuiling, Chyipa
Khamany Tva-tshang, and Nag-pa Tna-tshang belonged to Sera Méh,
(smad) 7.e., lower division of Sera. In the middle of the eighteenth
Century two of the colleges were established. It still continues to
be a favourite resort of learned men of Tibet and Mongolia. The
monks of Sera belong to respectable families of Tibet proper,
Amdo, Kham, Nyagrong, Mongolia and Western China.

There are in the Dukhang (grand hall of congregation) the
images of—

1. Buddha vanquishing Mara the evil one and a host of

demons.

2. The sixteen Sthavira (Neh-tan Chu-rtg!) brought from

China.
3. Several life-lke images constructed by the famous artist
Nehu Chang-wa,

In the Gonkhang (the temple assigned to the Tuntrik deities
there are—

1. The image of the six-armed Bhairava, constructed by Leg-
gyan of Shwau.
2. Gon-po Choigyal with four arms.
- 3. The goddess Paldam Lhama (Kali) on horseback, her legs
being tied by a chain, probably as a punishment for
her wicked conduct.

In the front wall there are painted representations of the in-

vasion of U by the Tsang army and their defeat by the Tartars
in 1643, the scenes of war, and the images of fearful spirits, such
as Gon-po De-mar, the genius (Chyarog-dong-chan, he with a raven’s
head), etc. On the western wall are painted the likenesses of the
successive high priests of Sera, etc.

In the western corner of the upper congregation hall (Duk-
hang Gong-ma), are the images of Amitabha Buddha, the eleven-
headed Avalokitegvara and the four-armed Gon-po, Maitreya made
of silver, the Bodhisattva (Cakya) as a citizen, andthe eight
spiritual sons of Buddha and also the Kah-gyur and Tangyur
collections, all written in gold and silver.

In the temple of Chyam-chen Shal-reh Lhakhang, the image
of Atica with a Uhintamani wishing-gem in his hand is conspicuous.

» BRATARA ASS |

114. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (April, 1905.

In the Go-chye-khang there are the images of Buddha and a
silver Chorten. In the further niché of the Dukhang there is a
golden image of the coming Buddha, In the front hall of the
Dukhang there are the Dharma Pala. The most remarkable
object in the passage of circumambulation round the monastery is
a small OChaitya (said to be one of the 84,000 chaitya constructed
by Emperor Agoka) which was brought from Magadha. There is
also a Tantrik image of Hayagriba with the goddess Vajra Varahi
in his clasp,

The Monastery of Dapone.
ALIA AA ARAN SCAT STATI SF MAT SATAN TNA |

Dapiing the great monastery of lower U, now the premier
monastery of Tibet, was founded by Jam-yang Choije! in the year
Fire-monkey, i.e. 1415 A.D. with 5,000 monks. His father Gah-wa
Nor-shon, on account of his wealth, was believed to have been an
incarnation of Vaicravana the god of riches. Jam-yang was
born at Sam-yé, and admitted into the sacred order at Tse-
thang (Chethang). He received his first lessons in sacred litera-
ture from the abbots of Sangphu. At Gahdan, Tsongkhapa and
his principal disciples ordained him with the final vows of the
order of Bhiksu. At Tashi Dokha, Tsong-khapa advised Jam-yang
and his friend Namkha Zangpo, the Governor of Nehu-Dsong, to
found a monastery after the model of the ancient monastery of
Cri-dhanya Kataka of Southern India. One night, while Jam-yang
was asleep in the fort of Nehu-Dsong he saw in adream the god
Nam-fa Karpo telling him that if he founded a monastery at Dar=
bag thang, situated in front of the hill called Gephel Rivo-che, he
could get 5,000 monks to reside and study init. Accordingly, he
visited Dar-bag and Rivo-che, There he saw several fountains and
small lakes called ‘‘ the lakes of fortune.”” On another occasion,
while seated on the margin of a lake situated on the top of Lang-
chen ri, Tsong-khapa mentioned to him that that was “the lake of
learning.” Another night he dreamt that several men were
assembled on a river’s edge in order to crossit. Jam-yang at
once swam to the opposite bank and threw a bridge across to
enable others to follow him. After several such curious dreams
he determined to found the monastery of Dapting. Tsong-khapa
supplied him with the necessary plan after the model of Cri-
dhanya Kataka, and his friend the Governor of Nehu Dsong, fur-
nished him with funds ; and through the joint exertions of Jam-
yang and his patron, Dapting was founded. On account of the
Governor’s help the rich nobles of Tibet gave endowments of
lands to it and sent their boys for religious education there.

~~

| QESTRSCATHSE |

Vol. I, No. 4.] The Monasteries of Tibet. 115
[ENE 1S!

Their example was followed by the merchants and other land-
holders, in consequence of which it soon became a favourite insti-
tution of the aristocracy of Tibet. Jam-yang established eight col-
leges for teaching the different branches of sacred and secular learn-
ing. In course of time the monastery became the principal seat
of learning, and learned and wise men flocked to it from the different
parts of the country. In discipline, moral culture and purity of
life, the monks of Dapiing excelled the monks of all other similar
institutions in Tibet. It soon claimed a university with seven
colleges for the study of the different branches of sacred litera-
ture including metaphysics, logic, medicine, and one for that of
profane literature for the benefit of thelay people. After Tsong-
khapa’s death, Jam-yang presided over the Monlam-chenpo of Lhasa
and raised it to prominence. From this circumstance the power of
Daptng over the Monlam-chenpo became paramount and con-
tinues so to this day.. The president of the Monlam-chenpo
called the Dapting Sha'-ngo, exercises supreme authority in the
spiritual affairs of the country during the months of January and
February, when the Talai Lama himself submits to the resolutions
passed by the congregated clergy on the occasion. The chair of
Daputng was filled by many able and distinguished sages, among
whom Paldan-senge, one of the disciples of Tsong-khapa, Jam-
yang Gahlo, and Yontan Gyatsho of Tsang-thon, were the most
learned. On the rise of Daptng with its great university the
glory of Gahdan was overshadowed. The fame of the Gahdan
Thipa as the profoundest scholar of the Yellow-cap Church was
surpassed by that of the high priest of Daping. Under the presi-
dency of Gedun-Gyatsho who was called Daptng Télpaiku (incar-
nate Lama of Dapiing), the monastery with its university claimed
precedence even overGahdan. Gedun-Gyatsho in whom the spirit of
Gediin-dib had appeared was called Gyal-wa ni-pa (2nd Gyalwa).
He was, therefore, the first incarnate hierarch of the Yellowcap
Church, from whose time the monastery enjoyed the proud name
of Chyog nampar Gyal-wa—victorious in all the quarters, which
expression is preserved to this day in the silver currency of Tibet.
Daping contained the following T'va-tshany or colleges :—

1, Tashi-gomang. 4. Nag-pa Nameyal-ling.
2. Lozang-ling. 5. Ku chyog-ling.
3. Thoisam-ling. 6. Choikhor-ling.

7. De-yan.

Of these only four are now in existence. Thoisam-ling, Ku-
chyog-ling and Choikhor-ling were abolished during the presidencies
of Sonam Gya-tsho and Lozang Gyatsho. There are at present
7,700 monks in the monastery, most of whom are recruited from
noble families in Kham, Mongolia, Gyarong, Nag-rong, Amdo, U
and Tsang. In the Zimkhang, Jam-yang Chovwje’s residence, situ-
ated behind the grand cloister, is the image of Jam-yang Sting-chon
(speaking Muifiju Cri). In the central Tsang-khang (chapel) are
the golden images of the Buddhas of the past, present and future

116 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (April, 1905.

in sitting posture and surrounded by their respective eight disci-
ples. Inthe temple of Na-chu-tug Lhakhang there are the sixteen
sthavira (sages) brought from China by the illustrious Phag-pa
during the reign of the Emperor Khublai Khan. In the new chapel
consecrated to Champa there are—the huge image of the coming
Buddha, representing him as a youth of twelve, and a silver trident
used by Jam-yang himself. In the Kalzang Lhakhang there are one
thousand Buddhas, all made of copper gilt with gold, In the
Kahgyur Lhakhang,7e., the library of sacred books, there are
Kahgyur collections all written in gold. In the cloister of the
Nag-pa Tva-tshang (Tantrik College), there are many articles very
sacred to the Buddhists. On the right of the image of Vajra
Bhairava is the statue of Tsong-khapa and on its left is the image
of the Lord of Death with his horrid tram, The principal temple
is three-storeyed. The principal hall of congregation called the
Dukhang Chenpo on the ground floor contains 240 wooden pillars,
distributed over an area of 34,560 sq. ft. to accommodate 7,700
monks when they assemble to perform religious service.

The third hierarch was Pan-chen Sonam Tag-pa; the 4th,
Sonam Gyatsho, the Dalai Lama; 5th, Yontan Gyatsho, Dalai
Lama; 6th, Panchen Lozang Choigyan of Tashilhunpo; 7th,
Nag-wange Lozang Gyatsho, the 5th Dalai Lama; 8th, Nag-
wang Yece Gyatsho (Pakardsin-pa); 9th, Kalyang Gyatsho (7th
Dalai Lama) in the year 1726.

The Monastery of Meru was one of the four sanctuaries
founded at the four cardinal points of Lhasa by King Ralpachan
in the 9th Century A.D. It was abolished by King Langdarma,
but was afterwards restored to its former condition and formed
the metropolitan monastery.

CHAGPOIRI is a monastic institution with classes for the study
of medicine. It is called the Man-pa T'va-tshang or the Medical
College. It does not contain more than one hundred pupils.

Phabong-kha was anciently King Srong-tsan Gampo’s favourite
resort, where he used to propitiate his tutelary deities. The seven
early monk-scholars called Sedmi-midun also had their residence
there. During the persecution of Buddhism by King Langdarma
there existed no monastic establishment at Phabongkha. Geges
Tag-kar-pa revived the institution, During the hierarchy of
Sakya, Dogon Phagpa repaired the monastery and gave rich
endowments. for its maintenance, but during the dispute between
Sakya and Phagmodté it again dwindled into insignificance till
it was repaired by Thegchan Choigyal and revived by Je-Deleg-
Nima. But again, when internal discords convulsed Tibet, it
declined and remained in a neglected condition till the year Harth-
sheep of the tenth cycle when Minister Paljor Lhindub of the
family of Khon rescued it from ruin. Since then it has been
flourishing.

Sangphu Nehu thang, situated on a hill beyond Nethang, was
founded by Dog Leg-ge in the same year when Sakya was
established.

Vol. I, No. 4.] Notes on an Indian Worm. 117
[N. 8.]

13. Notes on an Indian Worm of the Genus Cheetogaster—By
Netson Annanpate, B.A., D.Sc., Deputy Superintendent of the Indian
Museum. (With one plate. )

The fresh-water worms of the genus Chetogaster are held by
some authorities to constitute a separate family; but Beddard,' whom
I have followedin drawing up my account of Uh. bengalensis, regards
them as belonging to the Naidomorpha, a rather obscure group of
Oligochztes which appears to be well represented in the Calcutta
tanks. Hitherto the genus, well known in Hurope and record-
ed from America, does not appear to have been reported from
within the limits of Asia. The Calcutta species is not un-
common and I have taken specimens of what may be a second in
the Botanical Gardens at Sibpur. This merely proves, as I have
already pointed out to the Society, that a vast field lies open to any
naturalist who would devote himself to the study of Indian pond
life. Iam much indebted to my friends Mr. F. F. Laidlaw, of
Owen’s College, Manchester, and Dr. J. H. Ashworth, of the
University of Edinburgh, both for the generic identification of
the worm in the first instance and for references to literature later.
My thanks are also due to Major A. Alcock for his unfailing
sympathy and assistance in the work undertaken.

Description of Cheetogaster bengalensis, sp. nov.

Prostomium forming a large, sub-circular sucker: another
smaller sucker at the posterior extremity of the body. Csophagus
longer than pharynx, with two well-marked dilatations, the poste-
rior of which shows indications of a second constriction in its
posterior third when empty. The anterior dilatation is covered
with large, flat, polygonal cells of a faint yellowish colour.
There is a sense-organ (otocyst?) in the brain: the remainder
of the nervous system normal for the genus, the somewhat
discrete nature of the ventral ganglia, their number in the first
few segments and the separation of the two ventral nerve
chords in the same region being characteristic, The first pair
of nephridia is larger than the others posterior to it. Sete
arrangedon each side of the ventral surface in bundles of from
15 to 17. Body colourless and almost transparent. Length vary-
ing greatly with state of contraction, at least 10 mm. when the
body is fully expanded. There is a very distinct flattened area on
the ventral surface between the two bundles of sete. Outward
appearance somewhat resembling that of an Aolosoma.

Possibly this worm should be regarded as the type of a new
genus; butit seems more convenient to regard it for the present
as a Cheetoguster.

! A Monograph of the Order Oligochexta, p. 804. Oxford, 1895.

118 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (April, 1905.

Bionomics oF Chetogaster bengalensis.

The Chetogaster of the Calcutta tanks is usually found clinging
by means of a posterior sucker to the external surface of the body
or the edge of the shell of a water-snail. When disturbed it with-
draws itself entirely within the latter. It does not confine itself
to any one species of snail, but generally chooses a Limnzus,
Limnophysa or some similar species, apparently because these
genera are common in its habitat, do not possess an operculum
and have a wide aperture to their shells. In one instance I saw,
in an aquarium in which snails were somewhat scanty, a solitary
worm attempting to establish itself on a Planorbis; but the connec-
tion was only temporary, not lasting for more than a few minutes.
The mouth of the shell in this genus, though there is no oper-
culum, is evidently too constricted to be suitable for the worm,
which is generally gregarious. As shown by the figure (plate ITI,
fig. 1), a considerable number of individuals may establish them-
selves on a single snail. Occasionally Ch. bengalensis quits its
host altogether and either wanders away in search of another or
drops to the bottom. This happens whenever the water becomes
foul or reaches too high a temperature (in an aquarium when the
sun, falling directly on the surface, heats the water), or when too
many individuals are settled ona single host after rapid asexual
multiplication. Before fixing themselves on a fresh snail they
frequently crawl over the external surface of the shell.

Progression is mainly effected by a series of contractions and
elongations of the body, aided by the two suckers. The posterior
of these having been fixed to any surface, the body is stretched
forward to its greatest extent. The anterior sucker is then applied,
the posterior one set free, and the body contracted. As a rule, the
ventral surface is not lifted, but something analogous to the “loop-
ine” of a leech or a Geometrid caterpillar, but not so marked, takes
place very occasionally. When sinking through the water, as it
does when its hold is released, the worm can change its direction
slightly by moving the posterior part of the body from side to side ;
it cannot swim or raise itself upwards without support. The sete
appear to play a very small part in ordinary progression, except
as aids in adhesion. Hach bundle is capable of an independent
rotatory motion somewhat resembling a rapid turn of the wrist.
This movement is very useful when the worm is insinuating itself
into a crevice, as it thrusts the body forward rapidly. All the sete
are frequently moved at once, although each bundle can be turned
separately. The anterior bundles have a different function, as we
shall see.

Although this species! lives in close connection with water-
snails, it is not, strictly speaking, parasitic upon them; for it captures

1 The European species also live on water-snails, but some of them at any
rate are said to be internal parasites. Dr. J. H. Ashworth has sent me a
specimen of an English species in which the food probably consists of
diatoms and the like.

Vol. I, No. 4.] Notes on an Indian Worm. 119
[N. S.]

living prey and only uses its host, so to speak, as a beast of burden
and a stalking horse. Carried along clinging to it by the posterior
sucker, the body is extended outwards as far as possible and
waived rapidly in all directions, the ‘‘ head” being invariably free
of the snail’s shell. As soon as it comes in contact with the body
of a small crustacean, the anterior sucker takes a firm hold. Its
ventral surface is covered with small prominences, which are
not grandular but mere projections of the epidermis. These
probably give an additional grip, the limbs of the struggling prey
becoming entangled amongst them. The anterior sete do not
project free from the ventral surface as in the posterior bundles,
but are contained in a pocket or introvert in such a way that
they le below the mouth inside a lower lip or lobe which forms
the wall of the posterior part of the prostomial sucker. As long
as the body is elongated they are placed almost parallel to one
another in a vertical line, leaving the aperture free; but as soon as
the body is contracted, a rapid twist of their bases takes place and
they spread out in a fan-like formation, so that the tips of the
inner setee of each bundle are practically in contact with those of
the other side. (There is no difference in structure or arrangement
between these sete and those posterior to them, but the latter are
considerably shorter). By the movement described the prey is seized
by the setee and conveyed into the mouth, which opens directly into
a large pharynx with greatly thickened walls, a small lumen, and
numerous muscle-bands radiating from it to the body-wall. A
function of this organ seems to be to crush the prey to death;
but a similar pharynx is found in species in which the food
probably does not need crushing. A narrow slightly coiled
passage leads into the first dilatation of the cesophagus. The
cells on the surface of the latter probably have some
digestive function (‘‘liver cells”) and the interior of the crusta-
cea swallowed become disintegrated very largely in this chamber.
Even at the moment of the passage of food into the second daila-
tation, the constriction between the two remains distinct. The
feeble constriction in the posterior dilatation is a mere fold of the
walls of the structure, allowing a certain enlargement to take place.
The intestine which leads from the cesophagus to the anus is rather
broad: this is rendered necessary by the bulky nature of the
indigestible parts of the food, for the shells of small Copepods and
Ostracods pass through the body of the worm practically unaltered,
even the appendages remaining attached to the trunk in many cases.

Regarding sexual reproduction I have practically no infor-
mation. During the period between December and April, through-
out which I have had living specimens under observation, it does
not take place and the sexual organs are imperfectly developed.
Reproduction by fission is, however, active at this season. I find it
a little difficult to say what is the normal number of segments pre-
sent in the species, but it appears to be twenty or twenty-one.
More than this number are, however, produced by budding from
the penultimate segment, and at firstit is impossible to distinguish

120 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, —[April, 1905.

between them and the original ones. When several have been
produced, the most anterior can be distinguished from the others
by a dilatation of the alimentary canal which ultimately becomes
the pharynx of a new individual. The prostomium never takes
its place as a regular segment in the series, but grows out as a
lobe on the dorsal surface. The mouth of the young worm is in

continuity with what will be the new anus of the parent and the
shells of the food pass to the exterior of the old anus, at the extrem-
ity of the young individual, until the separation has been com-
pletely affected. This does not occur until at least 16 new seg-
ments (in addition to the old extremity) have been formed. The
clitellum (10th and 11th segments) is already conspicuous, being
devoid of sete. In adult individuals, however, the glandular struc-
ture of its integument extends partially over another segment
on either side.

O
EXPLANATION OF PLATE III.

Fig. Chetogaster bengalensis on a Water-Snail, X 2.

, 2. Anterior extremity of an adult individual from below,

showing nerve cords, etc. (Much enlarged).
p-—prostomium, /.—lower lip, s,—anterior sete, ”.—
nerve chords, g.—ganglia.

» 3. Diagram showing arrangement of the sete in a similar
bundle from the right side. Hach dot represents a seta
in cross-section.

, 4. A bundle of setz from the left side of one of the posterior
segments, seen from behind. (Much enlarged).

(Text figure.)

Fig. 1. Young Chetogaster bengalensis just separated by fission
from its parent. (Somewhat diagrammatic as reyards
the nephridia).

p.—prostomium, ph.—pharynx, l.ph.—lumen of _ pha-
rynx, ©.—cesophagus, c.—clitellum, m.—nephridia,
p.s.—posterior sucker.

—_—
e

Vol. I, No. 4.] Numismatic Supplement. 121
[N. 8.]

14. NUMISMATIC SUPPLEMENT V.
(With Plates IV & V.)

Note.—The numeration of these articles is continued jrom p. 116 of
the Journal for 1904. (Hatra number. )

III.
SunTans or Deut.

31. Muhammad bin Tughlag, Pl. IV. 1.

A new variety of Muhammad bin Tughlagq’s lighter gold
coins has recently been obtained at Agra by Mr. G. Bleazby who
has sent it to me for publication. An almost similar coin of the
same mint was described by me in the Journal of the Royal Asiatic
Society 1900, p. 775. The date of the present coin, however, is dif-
ferent, and Daulatabad is given the title of %4= instead of Sediylo.
The coin is in very fine condition. In my paper above mentioned
I suggested that the words in front of the mint name were

Hoot Gr 229 and not pile! qo 43 as read by Mr. Thomas or

Sor Yj} 435 as preferred by Mr. Gibbs. I have, however, since had
reason to modify this opinion, as I find that on the gold coins
of Firoz Shah Zafar and Fateh Khan the form of the two first
letters of the words pled is identical with that of the same letters
in aie Yi on the margin of this coin. I have therefore adopted
Mr. Gibb’s reading.

N

Weight, 143 grains.

Size, 7

Mint, Hazrat Daulatabad.
Date, 730 A.H.

Obverse. Reverse.
Kalima in circle. | 7} (69 G8
Margin. Keay “all coal}

cist elle My BaF (69 ASI 102 ga) os ogsue al}
vir> slot edgs Fynam
H. N. Weicur.

IV.
Muauant Emperors.
32. Jalal-ud-din Akbar.

(1) Metal, Gold. Pl. IV. 2.
Weight, 168 grains.
Mint, Hajipir.

Date, 983 A.H.

122 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. |April, 1905.

This unique mohur was acquired from a Hindu priest
shortly after the last Magh Mela at Allahabad, to which it is said
to have been brought by a pilgrim from Bengal. No coins from
the Hajipir Mint were previously known. The place is situated
in the Muzaffarptr District, Bengal, and lies on the east bank of
the Little Gundak, a short distance above its confluence with the
Ganges opposite Patna. Hajiptr figures conspicuously in the
history of the struggles between Akbar and his rebellious Afghan
governors of Bengal, having been twice besieged and captured by
the Imperial troops in 1572 and again in 1574 A. D. This mohur
was struck in 1575, when apparently order was again restored. It
is in fine condition and of the type of the mohur illustrated as
Figure 65, Plate III. of the British Museum catalogue of Coins of
the Mughal Emperors.

Gi) Metal, Gold. Pl. IV. 3.
Weight, 167 grains.
Mint, Jaunptr.

Date, 988 A.H.

This is, | believe, the only square mohur of Akbar known
from the Jaunpir Mint. His square rupees from the same mint
are extremely rare. The date on this mohur appears in the right-
hand lower corner of the obverse—a comparatively rare occurrence.

(111) Metal, Silver. PI. IV. 4.
Weight, (looped. )
Mint, Jaunpitr-Chaitaur.

Date, 976 A.H.

This strange combination of names has long been a puzzle to
me, which I have not yet succeeded in solving. There seems no
doubt about the reading, and the coiniscertainly genuine. It is of
the usual type of Akbar’s broad rupees from the Jaunpur Mint
(No. 96, Plate TV of the B.M. Catalogue), but with this difference
that, while the name Jaunpiir appears in the usual place in the
lower margin of the reverse, the word Chaitaur occurs in the upper
margin on the same side of the coin. Hitherto only copper coins
of Akbar were known from the Chaitaur Mint and none with two
mint names. Silver coins of Sher Shah are known from the
Jahanpanah-Ujjain Mint. This coin was acquired in Lahore
some years ago.

(iv) Metal, Silver. Pl. IV. 5.
Weight, 44 grains.
Mint, Lahore.
Date, 987 A.H.

The inscription on one side of this coin reads ast aU} “ Akbar
is God” and not the usual aut a5} “ God is great.” A four-anna
piece with a similar legend was published by Dr. L. White King
and Captain Vost in 1896 in the paper already referred to, but
although it bore the same year, it was from the Ahmadabad Mint.

Vol. I, No. 4.] Numismatic Supplement. 123
BEN. 5:

It has been stated by some writers, among them the late Mr. C. J.
Rodgers, that in the thirtieth year of his reign, when Akbar found-
eda new religion, he changed the legends on his coins, his object appa-
rently being that he should be looked upon and worshipped as God ;
and coins of the kind described above have been quoted as strength-
ening the assertion regarding the object he had inview. But, so far
at least as these pieces are concerned, is it not more reasonable to
suppose that the transposition of the words was due to a mistake
in the dies which was almost immediately rectified, for if Akbar
really intended to assume divine honours and to proclaim himself as
God, surely these coins instead of being of the greatest degree of
rarity, would be abundant even now, and the inscription would also
have been found on coins of the higher denominations instead of
being confined to four-anna bits ?

(v) Metal, Silver, PI. IV. 6.
Weight, 177 grains.
Mint, Lahore.

Date, 997 A.H.

The rupee is apparently unique, or at any rate extremely rare,
by reason of the mint name appearing in the upper margin of the
reyerse. On this side, the name and titles of the king are given in
a square with loops at the four scorners. The Kalima, with the
usual accompaniment, appears on the obverse in a quadrilateral
area with three curves in each side.

(vi) Metal, Silver.
Weight, 176 grains.
Mint, Urdt Zafar Qarin.
Date, Alif=1000 A.H.

This rupee, which is precisely similar to the mohur portrayed
as Figure 79, Plate III, of the B.M. Catalogue, is probably unique.
It is the only round rupee of Akbar discovered so far from the camp
mint and of the year (1000) alif. 1t was acquired in Amritsar some
years ago.

(vii) Metal, Silver.
Weight, 175 grains.
Mint, Ahmadnagar.
Date, 4-\ahi.

This rare coin is of rude fabric, and, in this respect, much re-
sembles the rupees of Akbar from the Bairat Mint. The legend on
the reverse is—

ce!) 93744 slo
ye) Oem! Ie
id
The obverse has the inscription usual on I]ahi rupees.
Geo. B. Bueazey.

124 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal { April, 1905.

33. A Zodiacul Half-rupee. Pl. V. 1.

A few days ago I came across in the Ahmadabad bazar a
zodiacal Leo half-rupee [ Legend, normal: Date, Hijri year wanting,
regnal year 13; Mint, Ahmadabad]. If this be, as it seems to me
to be, a genuine specimen, it furnishes evidence, hitherto wanting, of
the existence of zodiacal coins of that denomination. Imitation half-
rupees, indeed, bearing representations of the signs of the Zodiac,
are well known (See Br. Mus. Catal. Nos. 386-401), and these them-
selves, gud imitations, may fairly be taken as proof more or less
substantial of the currency of the original coins they counterfeit.
Had there been no genuine half-rupees, it is hard to see why the so-
called “imitations” should ever have been fabricated.

Beside the recently-discovered half-rupee, three full rupees of
Leo type lie before me on the table at which I am now writing.
Two of the three were evidently struck from one and the same die,
but the third not less evidently from a die slightly different. On
the two, for instance, the word 493) is written as )»4) with no
superscribed dot over the “ze” (Pl. V. 2), but on the third as
yx) with no subscribed dots under the “ye” (Pl. V. 3). Also on
the duplicates after the word sls of Jahangir Shah comes a small
curved flourish distinctly to the left of the “ha ” ; but on the third
we have a longer sprawl, not to the left at all, but directly above
the “ha.” The two are evidently indentical with the coin
No. 385 figured on Plate XI of the Br. Mus. Catal., and there styled
an “imitation rupee.” If these be imitations, then the third (of the
y9) type) is certainly genuine, and it is with this third specimen
that the half-rupee agrees in every particular.

But, indeed, on what ground the Br. Mus. rupee No. 385 is
adjudged to be an imitation I fail toapprehend. A complete state-
ment of the differentiz that serve to discriminate between a genuine
Zodiacal muhr or rupee and the beautifully-executed ‘‘ imitations,”
a statement more detailed, and thus more practically helpful, than
the paragraph on pp. LXXXITI, f. of the Br. Mus. Catal., would,

I feel sure, be very acceptable to the collectors of the coins of
this fascinating series.

Gro. P. Tayior.

Ahmadabad.

Note.—1 take the opportunity to figure yet a third variety in
which the word 593} 1s written without any dots (Pl. V. 4.) All
three types appear to be equally genuine. I note also that on the
two specimens of the “Cancer” rupee in my cabinet, the reverse
legend of which is similar to that on the “ Leo” rupee above
mentioned, the word j943 also appears without dots.

H. N. WriGaHr.

Vol. I, No. 4. ] Numismatic Supplement. 125
[N. 8.]

34. Some rare Mughal Coins.

In the hope that the following coins from my collection may
be of some interest to numismatists, I beg to offer some short de-
seriptive remarks regarding them :—

(i) Akbar. PI. V.5.

Weight, 306 grains.
Size, 88."
Mint, Sironj.

Obverse. In double circle with dots between.
€- ‘ypu
uxyls
wy?
Reverse. =e (PA
ne ¥lo

Date, Mahi 38.
Month, Mibr (7th Persian month).

This isa new Mughal Mint. The coin was obtainedin Bom-
bay two years ago.
(11) Jah@ngir and Nur Jahan. Pi. V. 6.

fi.
Weight, 176 grains.
Size, | 380.”

Date, 1035-21
Mint, Lahore
Obverse. eb 3
al te
Llp Ale
& ew Ff
ye Se,
Reverse. $959
——_____
3) Whe » »

sees

[12] re mye Y
The legends on both obverse, and reverse of this rupee read
downwards—omitting the regnal year 21 and Hijri year (10)35,
—form the following couplet :—
Zi Nam-i-Shah Jahangir ta buwad sikka-i-bar nur.
Vazidah Nir Jahan Begum ru-i-Lahor.

126 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1905.

(May the coin by the name of King Jahangir, remain with light ;
And may the face of Lahore be made by Nir Jahan Begam
bright).
v.e., may this coin which is struck at Lahore remain for ever
shining with lustre, both from King Jahangir, and his
(Queen Consort) Begam Nutr Jahan.

This rare rupee was obtained by me at Ahmadabad on my
short visit to that city. on 29th of January last. Rupees of
Jahangir and Nar Jahan from the Lahore mint with legends form-
ing a couplet are known. This is a new couplet altogether* :—

(iii) Aurangzeb. PI. V. 7.

A.
Werght, 103 grains.
Size, Tf
Mint Burhanpir.
Obverse. >
[ ae md
[ S| Coyle
Reverse. pxplays
9 Kiss

: A new mint of of Aurangzeb in copper, I got it at? Burhan-
pur some two years ago.

(iv) Alamgir II. Pl. V. 8.

AY.
Weight, 105 grains.
Size, -65.”

Date, 1171—4?
Mint, Machhlipatan.

Obverse. Sy lwo
Ptvt Cpt
Reverse. ie
SP

__ This is anew mint of A’lamgir II. in copper. The name of the
Emperor is not engraved on the coin, but the year helps us in
assigning it to him.

Fras J. THANAWALA.
Bombay.

*Note.—The reading of the interestin in of Jahangi
ng of g coin of Jahangir
suggested by Mr. Thanawala, appears capable of improvement.

Vol. I, No. 4.] Numismatic Supplement. 127
[N. S.]

Owing to the coin being somewhat worn, it is difficult to say with
certainty what the couplet is. The following is given as an
alternative suggestion.

Obverse. yp 79 ROH GU pa Sila ole eS 5
Reverse. 92Y Ban eg) Whe yo $59 59

The words on the reverse read by Mr. Thanawala as why and

93 ave, think, unmistakeably &% and 5. Similarly, I do not think
that the penultimate line of the obverse can be read as » @&. The
second letter is much more like a 8 than a 6S, and it is followed by
what is clearly a % The rhythm of Mr. Thanawala’s couplet.
also appears to be defective. Dr. Taylor of Ahmadabad, who has
also seen the coin, has suggested that the last three words on the
obverse read > ») &!. He would make the % at the end of the
penultimate line the last letter of the word %l& in the second line.
It is true the % of %l& is not visible elsewhere on the coin but
the coin is very much worn to the left of b& where one would expect
to find the letter %. Also there is no “ alzf” on the coin, and as
far as I can see no room for any.

H. N. Wricar.
35. Dawar Bakhsh. P|. IV. 7.

The coins of this grandson of Jahangir who occupied the
throne of Dehli for three months as a stop-gap for Shahjahan are
so scarce that it is worth while chronicling any finds. A rupee
of Lahore mintage has been described and figured in the Cata-
logue of the British Museum (Moghul Emperors, No. 527). A
second was contained in the collection of the late Pandit Ratan
Narain of Delhi, and the coin described below, which was obtained
by me at Meerut in March last, is, I believe, the only other known.
All three are identical in legend. No gold coins of Dawar Bakhsh
have apparently come to light yet, but doubtless some were struck.

AR
Weight 172 grains.
Size, ‘85.

Mint, Lahore.
Date, 1037 A.H. Ahd.

Obverse. Reverse.
als} slash
Sy adh ¥ ec)
o- o> | Py pale
BU} Joey iba}
ye OS} Sw 9)!

rs)

128 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. { April, 1905.

- The coin, but for three shroff marks on one side and four on

the other, is in very good condition.
H. N. Weriear,

36. Two rare coins of Shahjahan and Aurangzeb.

Among 246 silver coins recently acquired as treasure-trove in
the district of Bhandara C.P., and sent to me for examination,
two are of sufficient rarity to warrant special notice. One isa
coin of Shahjahan of Katak mint but of a new type; the second
of Aurangzeb, struck at the Town of Allahabad. This latter is, I
believe, one of two known, the other having been presented to me
some years ago by my friend Dr. G. P. Taylor of Ahmadabad. It
has not, however, been previously described.

(i) Shahgahan. PI. IV. 8.

LR

Weight, 173 grains.

Size, ‘9.

Mint, Katak (Cuttack).

Date, 3rd regnal year. Month Aban.

Obverse. Reverse.
au yt ay ¥ 3s
o oso v. Blosly whe
aU) J yy oe
; iL wt Le dosv0
elas eS
ussS eye ero wee

(i) Aurangzeb. PI. IV. 9.

Weight, 174 grains.

Size, ‘9.

Mint, Town of Allahabad.

Date, 1072. A.H. 4th regnal year.

Obverse. Reverse.
Usual couplet but ob &) Kab
Ie vice you eyed
date to left of Cepilo witewe Cwglo
lower line. te Kine

H, N. WriaGat.

Vol. I, No. 4.] Numismatic Supplement. 129
iM. S.J

37. Note on Kam Bakhsh and Bahadur Shah.

T notice on p. 241 of the Journal, Vol. LX XII, Part I, for 1904,
a statement by Mr. H. N. Wright that “Kam Bakhsh was made
Governor of the Stbahs of Bijapur and Haidarabad by his
brother, Shah ‘Alam Bahadur” [shouid be 8.‘A., Bahadur SAa/].
IT do not think that such an error,! coming from a leading numis-
matist, should be allowed to pass without a protest. The mere
fact that Kam Bakhsh issued coin in his own name suffices to
show that he claimed sovereignty.

Kam Bakhsh never held his authority from Bahadur Shah; he
was either an independent sovereign, as his father mtended, or a
rival who had usurped part of Bahadur Shah’s kingdom. By his
alleged will ‘Alamgir attempted to make a partition of the
country between his three surviving sons; and it was in pursuance
of this design, no doubt, that on the 14th Zu,l Qa‘dah 1118 H.
(17th February, 1707 N.S.), he nominated Kam Bakhsh to be
Governor of Bijapur and Haidarabad. Kam Bakhsh started from
the court at Ahmadnagar at once to take up his appointment.
‘Alamgir died on the 2nd March, 1707 (N.S.)

The exact words used in the will, as translated by James Frazer
“Nadir Shah,” p. 36, are: “Whoever of my fortunate children
“shall chance to rule the empire, let him not molest Mahommed
“Kam Bakhsh, should he rest content with the Two New Subahs.”
The text from which James Frazer translated was, apparently,
that now in the Bodleian Library, see Sachau and Hthe’s ‘“ Cata-
logue of Persian MSS.” No. 1923 (Frazer MSS. No. 118) fol. 18a.

After doubting for a long time, I have at last come to look on
this will as authentic. Khafi Khan, II, 549, says it was made
over to Hamid-ud-din Khan, a confidential servant in the Emperor’s
entourage; Kamwar Khan states that ‘Alamgir kept it, after
signature, under his pillow. Immediately after ‘Alamgir’s
death, its provisions were appealed to by Bahadur Shah when
writing early in June, 1707 to his brother A‘zam Shah, then
advancing on Agrah to contest the succession; and a copy had
reached Strat as early as the 18th October, 1707, as may be seen
from F. Valentyn, Oude en Nieun ost Indie,” LV, 274. The pro-
babilities are in favour of the document having been executed ;

| The statement quoted above was based on the following extract from
the Muntakhabu-i-lubab (Text Vol. II. p. 605) as translated by Professor
Dowson (Elliot’s History of India, Vol. VII, p. 405).

“A kind and admonitory letter was addressed by the Nmperor (Shah
"’Jam I) to his brother Prince Muhammad Kam Bakhsh to the following
effect: ‘Our father entrusted you with the government of the Saba of
Bijapur; we now relinquish to you the government of the two sibas of
Bijapir and Haidarabad, with all their subjects and belongings, upon the
condition, according to the old rule of the Dakhin, that the coins shall be
struck and the khufba read in our name, The tribute which has hitherto
been paid by the Governors of these two provinces we remit.’

H, N. Wrieur,

150 Journal of the Asratic Socvety of Bengal. | April, 1905.

and in any case, the dates show that Kam Bakhsh was appointed
to, and started to take possession of, Bijapur before his father’s
death.

WILLIAM IRVINE.

38. Ahmad Shah Bahadur. Anew Mughal mint. Mujgahidabad.

This coin was obtained by me in Cawnpore two years ago. I
have been unable to identify the locality of Mujahidabad. Abmad
Shah at his accession took the title of Mujahid-ud-din (Elliot,
Wale Sp) 1125):

The mint is entered in Mr. Burn’s list of Mughal Mints
(J.A.S.B., Pt. I, No. 2, of 1904) but the coin has been nowhere
described.

Je WARNS 10)

Weight, 165 grains.

Size, °85.

Mint, Mujahidabad.

Date, 1163, A.H, 3rd regnal year.

Obverse. Reverse.
Within dotted circle. Within dotted circle.
sl gla oes! jLo
/ Die et eed
“ne mines 5430
JE aldol 7 paleia os
jee OS xe mye
shfoalswe
H. N. Wrieut.

39. A find of coins at Manbham.

A large and interesting find, containing 540 coins, from Shah-
jahan I to Shah Alam II was recently made at Ghorati in the
Manbhtm district. | The find was especially rich in the Bengal and
Benares mintages of the later Mughals, Muhammad Shah, Ahmad
Shah, “Alamgir II and Shah ’Alam II as the following figures
will shew :—

Muhammad Shah Ahmad Shah ’Alamgir Shah ’Alam IT,

Azimabad ee 10 31 5= 85
Jahangirnagar 1 si 7 d= 13
Katak peeee & oy ase = i
Muhammadabad

ee ; 26 83, 128 31=213
Murshidabad 17 20 31 l= 69
Miangir fc use i 2= 2

383

Vol. I, No. 4. ] Numismatic Supplement. 131
ENS S|

Of the Muhammadabad Benares Mint there were coins of the
16th regnal year, and of each regnal year from the 18th to the 30th
of Muhammad Shah, a complete series of the coins of Ahmad
Shah and ’Alamgir II, and coins of the first five years of Shah
"Alam II. The latter coins and those of “Alamgir II shew a
ereat variety of types and mint marks, The find also contained a
complete series of the rupees of Azamabad for the reigns of
Ahmac Shah and Alamgir II, except in respect of the 4th year
of the former sovereign ; and it appears from them that the mint-
mark identified with the Azimabad Mint in later times was first
placed on the coins in 1163 A.H.—the 3rd year of Ahmad Shah.
Rupees of Katak of Muhammad Shah, of Jahangirnagar of
Muhammad Shah, and ’Alamgir IJ, and of Mingir of Shah "Alam
I have not, as far as I know, been previously found.

The find further contained a rupee of ’Alamgir II of Calcutta
mintage, arupee of Shah Alam II of Allahabad, with a date which, it
seems tome, must be read as 1172 A.H.,7.e., two years before he
ascended the throne of Dehli; and a rupee of Shah Jahan III of
Azimabad, dated 1174 A.H.

The Mungir rupee of Shah ’Alam II calls for special notice. In
Dr. White King and Captain Vost’s paper “Some Novelties in
Moghul Coins,” published in the Numismatic Chronicle, Vol. XVI,
a dam of Akbar was described and figured, on which the mint

name Manghir ile was read, though no ‘ye’ is visible in the
illustration of the coin. This place was identified with Monghyr
in Bengal. The latter, however, is always in Persian characters

spelt ,a&,-, and this is the spelling found on the coin of Shah
’Alam II in the Manbhim find. It seems certain, therefore, that
the mint town of the copper coin of Akbar above mentioned cannot
have been Monghyr in Bengal. It is more probable that it was
“Manghar,” a fort built by [slam Shah Suri, 76 miles north of
Amritsar (see Thomas’s Chronicles, page 414). This would ac-
count for the Siri type of the reverse.

The Allahabad rupee of Shah ’Alam II, dated 1172 A.H., is
puzzling. Itis, I understand, not the first found, but I have myself
seen no other. In Elliot and Dawson’s History of India, Vol.
VIII, page 172, it is stated that in the 5th year of ’Alamgir’s
reign, which would correspond to 1172-73 A.H., Shah ‘Alam left
Dehli after fighting a battle with Ghazi-ud-din Khan and proceed-
ed eastward. He was joined by the Governor of Allahabad, and
proceeded to invade Bengal, with a view to ‘establishing his
claim to the viceroyalty of the eastern Stbahs” (Br. Mus. Cat.,
page 12). After his defeat at Buxar and the signing of the
Treaty of Allahabad in 1765 A.D. (1178-79 A.H.) the latter
place became the headquarters of Shah ’Alam for some years.

(1) Muhammad Shah. Pl. TV. 11.
a
Weight, 179 grains,

132 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1905.

Size, °9.
Mint, Katak.
Date, 1154—24th regnal year.

Obverse. Sylyo Bw ojle sldals ¥l& sesvo 41 or
Reverse, SAS Cyd Cpryslo arene Cul Pye dine

(ii) ’Alamgir Shah II. Pl. IV. 12.

AR.

Werght, 179 grains.

Size ‘9

Mint, Jahangirnagar.

Date 117—6th regnal year.

Obverse. Sylyvo Aw (cjls slabs belle tv

Reverse. 6) p&ila Syd (upile ciiewo Cugla 4 dive

(iii) "Alamgir Shah IT. Pl. IV. 13.

A.
Weight, 179 grains.
Size, 1”.
Mint, Calcutta.
Date, 1172—5th regnal yeav.
Obverse. i 1 VF Silyo 8x0 csilé Blas ps8 pis
Reverse. S&S od Cyag lo wos Cwgla 0 dive
Mint mark:

On obverse—“ Sun,”

On reverse—“ Cinquefoil” (traces of).

(iv) Shahjahan III, Pl. IV. 14.

fi.

Weight, 179 grains.
ISUZey Oe

Mint, Azimabad.
Date, 1174—Ahd.

Obverse. 1 VIE Sylyo MSw cjlé sldols whe sla
Reverse. Cyogslo aiewo wale da} dew shiasbs Gypé

(v) Shah’Alam IT. Pl, IV. 15.

Aa.

Weight, 180 grains.

Suze, 95.

Mint, Mangir (Monghyr).
Date, 1176—4th regnal year.

Vol. I, No. 4.] Numismatic Supplement. 138
[W. 8.]

Obv. Rev.
&) ds Bile S650 [yd gs wahevo ¥
aldsl alle sb 985 cite 5) 3) aS pple IF Ades
tIVv4 ce
Sra

(vi) Shah’Alam II. Pl. IV. 16.

AR.

Weight, 179 grains.
Size, °9.

Mint, Allahabad.
Date, 1172 (?)-—Ahd.

Obverse. (tvP Sy'x0 Sun cals BBsl alle sls
Reverse. slat} ad Gysilo dare Cpe on} dw

H. N. WaiaGat.

40. Two double rupees of Surat Mint.

Mr. R. F. Malabarwala, of Bombay, has sent me for publication
a double rupee of the Strat Mint struck in the name of Alam-
gir Il. The Hijra date is unfortunately wanting, but the
regnal year on the reverse fixes it as 1176 or 1177. Belowisa
description of the coin. As far as I know, the only other double
rupee known is the one in the cabinet of Dr, G. P. Taylor of
Ahmadabad, which he has kindly permitted me to describe in this
note.

Rupees of the type of the Siirat rupee of the Moghul Emperors
were coined by the Bombay Mint. Mr. Thurston in his History
of the Hast India Company’s Coinage says (page 43): ‘The
Nawab’s rupees, however, were soon found to contain 10, 12 or
even 15 per cent. of alloy, in consequence of which the Bombay
rupees were melted down and recoined at Sirat. The coinage
of silver in the Bombay Mint was suspended for twenty years, and
the Siratis alone were seen in circulation. At length in 1800
(1214 A.H.) the Company ordered the then Strat rupee to be
struck at Bombay.” As both the present rupees were issued before
1780 A.D. (1194 A.H.) it cannot be definitely stated whether they

were struck by the Mughal Emperors whose names they bear or
issued from the Bombay Mint.

Cen Comes Ue bi V9:
Weight, 349 grains.
Size, 1'0
Mint, Strat.

134. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (April, 1905.

Date, [1172] 5th regnal year.
M.M.,¢ in the Cw of Cxyl=

Obe. os alle Rev. Lpzile
<< rOKvey.
BS all ¢ oe
a Laglg & dine
yao See
Sy
>) y~

Gi) (R.F.M.) PL IV. 10.

fi.

Weight, 350 grains.

Size 1:0.

Mint, Strat.

Date, [1176] 4th regnal year.

M.M., seven petalled flower in the Cw of Cute

Obv. pills sla va Rev. cazite
lc wat mes
Coad J abe
dye aS ore
Cs yg

H. N. WeiGat.

41. “ Mumbai-Stirat” ( “99 gto ) or “ Mahisiir ( )5” cs¢? )
which ?

Grave doubt should, it seems to me, be entertained re-
garding the existence of the so-called “ Mumbai-Surat”’ Mint.
And for the following five reasons :—

1. The only coin attributed to this mint is the quarter-rupee
registered as No. 80 on page 280 of the British Museum “ Cata-
logue of Indian Coins, Moghul Emperors. ”

2. Neither element of this compound-name, “ Mumbai-Sirat, ”
can be regarded as an adjectival epithet subordinate to the other
element. We have here co-ordination pure and simple, produced
by the mere juxtaposition of the names of two distinct mint
towns. In the long list of the Mughal Mints in India I can recall
no other instance of a name built up in this agglutinative fashion.

3. If the legend given in the British Museum Catalogue is
true to the original, then amongst contemporary coins this quarter-
rupee is exceptional in recoding the name of its mint s¢mpliciter,
without the prefixed term “ darb, "Wy

4, The crescent symbol here present, when found on other
coins of this period, is held to be a mint-mark distinctive of the

Vol. I, No. 4.] Numismatic Supplement. 135
NETS A

French Compagnie des Indes. Now, in the 45th regnal year of

See A.H. 1218
Shah Alam II A.D. 1803-4
rupee, France was still a belligerent power, harbouring hostlle de-
signs against British India, It is thus well-nigh incredible that
any coin struck in that year by the English at either Bombay
on Surat, cities remote from the sphere of French influence, should
bear this acknowledged symbol of French ascendency.

5. Anautotype representation of the quarter-rupee is included
in Plate XXXI of the British Museum Catalogue ; but the mint-
name as there shown—at least in my copy—does not admit of
decipherment as Mumbai-Strat.

Rejecting for the above reasons the British Museum version,
I venture to submit the following as the true rendering of the
legend that is contained, so far as the plan admits, on the reverse
of this coin :—

the year of the issue of this quarter

ead
nla 18 UY dhw
re
Do” s°

Tf this reading be correct, the quarter-rupee was struck at the
Mahistr (Mysore) Mint. At Mysore the French held a dominant
position till the fall of Seringapatam in 1799, and doubtless the
crescent on this coin of 1803-4 stands as a survival from that
earlier period of power.

A comparison of this quarter-rupee (No. 80) with the Pondi-
cherry and Machhlipatan rupees (Nos. 128 and 143) reveals the
fact that all three are of the same (French) type, bearing not only
the crescent symbol, but an identical obverse impression. In all
the arrangement of the words of the legend is precisely the same,
and the row of diamond-shaped clusters, each of four dots, is a dis-
tinctive feature of the field.

The Lahor Museum Catalogue registers a full rupee of Mahisir,
dated the 47th year of Shah ‘Alam II, but unfortunately the
description given of this rupee is imperfect. It would be interest-
ing to examine the coin anew, and see whether in type and make
it is allied to the “ Mumbai-Sirat”” quarter-rupee.

Query :—In the L. M. Catal. Rodgers’s brief note reads :—
“Year vie (for tv) and mint yyw «44. Maythis vir

(P?=v....) stand for the regnal year “4a” prece-
ded by a rudely formed or misshapen crescent ?*

Guo. P. Taytor,
Ahmadabad.

* T have ascertained from Lahor that the reverse of this coin bears the
crescent symbol to the left of ye,.—H. N, W.

»

pedir

fe,
i

s
ag

zd

TH ase
5 odd datas
ri De ads

rr
2a.

he

9 Iho:
acccete
iB

Et

ra) SR
at

OL PAV vee

£
shu

4

es]
ota
LZ
zi

ABT ae

=

os)
Es)
Bs

LID Iu hata

INDEX SLIP.
ZOOLOGY.

AwnnanpaLe, N.—Contributions to Oriental Herpetology IIT.
Notes on the Oriental Lizards in the Indian Museum, with a
list of the species recorded from British India and Ceylon.
Journal and Proc. As. Soc. Bengal, Vol. I, No. 5, 1905, pp.
139-151.

LacEerTIDE—
Mabua anakular, Annandale, N. nom., nov. pp.
143-144,
Lggosoma Mitanense, Annandale, N. pp. 144.
x Dussumiertt, var. Concolor, var. nov.,

Annandale, N. p. 145.

e Cacharense, Annandale, N. sp. nov.
pp. 145.

i

ey 0) joqoet nee
8 diiw siiesy MW alin

VOU! Loot

ec VOTE

VO .q8.

Vol. I, No. 5.] The Emperor Babar. 137
ENTS ||

15. The Emperor Babar—By H. Beveripes, 1.C.S. (retired.)

As everything relating to Babar is interesting, I shall here
set down a few things about him which are not mentioned in
Erskine and Abul Fazl. The most important is a tradition which
is still current in Babar’s native country of Farghana, and which is
recorded in the “History of the Khanate of Khokand (z.e.,
Farghana) by Vladimir Petrovitch Nalivkine, a translation of
which by Aug. Dozon was published at Paris in 1889. The author,
after stating in his preface that the Memoirs of Babar are nearly
unknown in Farghana or by the Sarts, and that Babar himself has
a bad reputation in that country, says, at p. 63, that when
Babar hurriedly evacuated Samarkand in 918 A.H. (1512 A.D.),
aiter his defeat by the Uzbegs, Saizida Afaq, one of his wives, who
was accompanying him in his flight, was seized by the pangs of
child-birth in the desert which extends from Khojand to Kand-
badam (east of Khojand and north of Isfava) and gave birth to a
son. Babar dared not tarry, and so the infant was wrapped up
and left under some bushes. As a token of whose child he was,
and as a reward to the finder, Babar fastened round the babe his
girdle which contained things of price. The child was found by
natives of the country, and in allusion to the valuables which
were beside him they gave him the name of Altyn Bishik
or, “The golden cradle.” Afterwards he received three other
names vz., Qultug (the armpit?), Khan Tangriyar (the
friend of God), and Khudayan Sultan. It was by the last of
these names that he was generally known in after life. Altyn
Bishik grew up and spent most of his life at Akshi, one of the
capitals of Farghana. He was a disciple of the famous saint
Makhdim A‘azam who wasa native of Kasan, and whose real name
was Ahmad Khwajagi Kasani. Several saints of the name of
‘Makhdam A‘azam are mentioned in Shaw’s histor y of the Khojas,
A.S.B.J. Supp. for 1897, but the one referred to in the tradition
before us is the Makhdim A‘azam who was a friend of Babar and
who died in 949 A.H. (1542 A.D. He lived chiefly at Samarkand,
and is buried near there, at Dakhbid. Shortly before his death
he came to Akhsiand saw his disciple Altyn Bishik and his son who
also had the name of Tangriyar and was then 5 or 6 years old. Altyn
Bishik died in 952 A.H. (1545 A.D.), and his grandson Yar Muham-
mad went off to India, to his relations, the descendants of Babar.

The same tradition is told, with some differences, by Niyaz
Muhammad Khokandi in his Persian work the Tarikh-t-Shahrukhi,
Pantusov, Kazan, 1885. With regard to the above tradition, which
is probe ably genuine, it may be noted that an Afaq Beeam, a
grand-daughter of Sultan Aba Sa‘id and consequently a cousin
of Babar, is mentioned in Gulbadan Begam’s Memoirs, transla-
tion, p. 204. It is doubtful, however, if she can be the same as
Saizida Afaq. Ina Persian MSS. in the Shaw Collection in the
Indian Institute, Oxford, there is a reference to Babar’s friend-
ship with Makhdtim A‘azam, for it is stated there that Babar,

138 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal (May, 1905.

after his victory over Rana Sanga, sent Darvesh Muhammad
Sarban to the saint with presents, and a quatrain expressive
of his respect for dervishes. Perhaps it was on this occasion
that Babar sent to Transoxiana the long religious poem called
the Mubayyan, one-half of which has been published by Berezine
at Kazan, and of which Sprenger saw a copy at Lucknow. Babar
wrote it in A.H. 928 (A.D. 1521), for the instruction of Humayin.
At Rampur in Rohilkand there is in the Nawab’s Library a small
book of Turki verses which, according to a note by Shah Jahan,
are in Babar’s handwriting. It seems desirable that they should
be edited and published. It is probably the Turki-divan men-
tioned by Haidar Mirza and Abul Fazl.

Some MSS. or THE BABARNAMA.

There is a good manuscript of ‘Abdu-r-rahim’s translation of
the Memoirs in the Pott collection in the Hton College Library. It
is No. 175, p. 22, of Professor Margoliouth’s Catalogue of the
Pott MSS., but is wrongly entered there as a History of Far-
ghana. The MS. was writtenin Agra and bears the date of 7
Jamadaral-awwal, 1051, (4th August, 1641). The MS. formerly
belonged to Mr. Richard Johnson, and was bought in Lucknow for
ten rupees. In the Bibliotheca Lindesiana, now in the John
Rylands’ Library, Deansgate, Manchester, thereis a thick octavo
volume containing ‘Abdu-r-rahim’s translation of the Memoirs.
It is a well-written copy (Nast‘aliq), but has neither date nor
colophon. Probably it belongs to the 17th century. At the end
of the account of the translations of the year 908 there is a curious
deviation from other manuscripts. Instead of ending abruptly, as
in the Shirazi Bombay Lithographs, p. 75, or in Erskine, p. 122,
with the words “‘ Should a man live a hundred, nay, a thousand
years, yet at last he must die,” it goes on to say that Babar’s friends
came up and arranged that he should leave the place, and that his
ladies (KAatundn-i-haram) should be taken care of. It looks as if
Babar or some copyist had attempted to round off the description.
As is well known, some of the Turki copies have a much longer
narrative in this place. The Bibliotheca Lindesiana also possesses
a small fragment of the Turki Memoirs. There is no date or:
colophon, but the MS. looks older than 1780, the date assigned
by Mr. Kearney, and it has at theend the words dastkhat Nir
Muhammad ablah (? ignorant ?) wa Abul Fazl. Possibly this.
means that the MS. was written or signed by the Nar Muham-
mad who was Abul Fazl’s sister’s son. There are also one or two-
other words which I could not read, but which perhaps give a
regnal year.

It is much to be wished that the history of Babar by Zain
Khawafy entered in Sprenger’s Catalogue of the Elliot MSS.
J.A.S.B., Vol. XXIII, p. 241, referred to in a note at p. 123 of the
Asiatic Quarterly Review for July 1900, could be found. It was
described as a very old copy and as the property of a friend of
Sayyad Jan of Cawnpore. Perhaps it still exists at Cawnpore.

"UBUE) TOIT
HUSVULOL pure snunww{ oY} “FINH UIstog “PUB[sT usoryeg
WLOAF OULOD s2.1j80.1100.19 svUaLA JO SuouTtoeds sumehner wa |e * Te

uasig Ang ‘ayy pva. ‘wiaspig Soup sayy of ‘OT se iCrG ap a8
‘grejnoovadns g sey ppaw ‘saepnooerdns sey of “eg “ “LPT «
‘Teseuoquory paw ‘Tesvusyuoayz wof “TE “all “EFT ‘a0Rg

“SO6T
‘Lew ‘Gg ON “7 ‘JOA ‘shurpaaoorg pun youinor ‘soded s,oyspuvuuy “1

‘VGNHOINUOO LY VIVIAN

2

es

7h

ne 2
aan
ee.

Vol. I, No. 5.] Contributions to Oriental Herpetology IIT. 139
[N. 8.]

16. ConrripuTions To ORTENTAL Herprtoitoay IIT.—Notes on the Ori-
ental Lizards in the Indian Museum, with a List of the Species
recorded from British India and Ceylon. Part 2.—By Newson
ANNANDALE, B.A. (Oxon.), D.Sc. (Hdin.), Deputy Superinten-
dent of the Indian Museum.

The present is a continuation of my former paper with the
same title, and deals with the remaining families of Oriental
Lizards, viz., the Lacertide, Scincide and Dibamide. As before,
I append a revised list of the species in the families dealt with
which have been, or are here, recorded from British India and
Ceylon, with their distribution within these limits. To the epithet
“ Oriental’ I have given a liberal interpretation, including under
the category of Oriental Lizards all those forms which occur on
the mainland of Asia or in the western section of the Malay
Archipelago, but excluding those only known from New Guinea or
Australia.

Dibamus is represented by two specimens, a male and a female,
from the Nicobars. They do not call for any comment. As re-
gards the Lacertide and Scincide, however, the series is a fine
one, naturally richest in Indian and Burmese forms—we are
rather poor in examples from Ceylon—but including a very consi-
derable number of specimens from Palestine (collected and pre-
sented by the late Dr. J. Anderson, F.R.S.), from Persia ! (mostly
obtained by Dr. W. T. Blanford, F.R.S.) and from Hastern Turk-
estan* (with a few exceptions, from the late Dr. F. Stoliczka).
There are a few specimens also from Malaya, one or two from
Singkip Island off Sumatra and several from Borneo; the last
obtained from the Sarawak Museum, while those from Malaya
and Singkip were either collected by one of the Museum collectors
under the auspices of the late Professor J. Wood-Mason or were
donated by the late Dr. Stoliczka. Otherwise the exotic (7.e.,
extra-Indian) part of the collection is of little importance; it
consists of a considerable number of miscellaneous specimens from
Australia and the two Americas and a few from Hurope and

Africa.
LACERTID A.

TACHYDROMUS SEPTENTRIONALIS, Gthr.

T. haughtonianus, Jerd., P.A.S.B., 1870, p. 72; Siol.,
J.A.S.B., (2), 1872, p. 88.

T. tachydromoides ( part.), Blyr., Cat. Liz, ii1., p. 5, and Fawn.
Ind., Rept., p. 169.

T. septentrionalis, id., P.Z.S. 1899, p. 161.

1 See Blanford, astern Persia, Vol. ii., Reptiles.
% Id., Scientifie Results of the Second Yarkand Mission, Reptiles.

140 Journal of the Asiatic Sosiety of Bengal. [May, 1905.

The synonomy of the Indian species of Tachydromus, like that
of many other genera, has been rendered obscure by imperfect
descriptions. At least three closely related forms must be recog-
nized as occurring within or near the borders of British India.
They are (1) T. sewxlineatus, Gray, recorded from Assam, Burma,
Siam, the Western Himalayas, the Siamese Malay States, S.
China, Sumatra, Java, Borneo, etc.; (2) UT. septentrionalis, Gthr.,
known from S.-W. China and here recorded from Assam, and (3)
T. tachydromoides (Schleg.), formerly believed to occur in Assam
but probably confined, so far as our knowledge goes, to China,
Korea and Japan. A very distinct species, J’. smaragdinus, Bler.,
from the Loo Choo Islands is represented in the Museum by a
specimen given by the late Dr. J. Anderson.

T. tachydromoides was apparently included in the Indian
fauna by Boulenger because he regarded it as synonymous with
T. haughtonianus, which was described later. He also regarded
T. septentrionalis, Gthr., at the time when he wrote his volume in
the “ Fauna,” as identical with Schlegel’s species; but more
recently he has pointed out that Giinther’s species is really distinct,
though very closely allied to the other. An examination of Jer-
don’s type in the Indian Museum shows that it is merely a speci-
men of 1. septentrionalis, and, therefore, as Boulenger’s more
recent views seem to be correct, the name 7’. tachydromoides must
be crossed out from the list of the Indian Lizards and T. septen-
trionalis inserted in its place.

Apparently the only specimen of 7’. haughtonianus recorded
was the type, which I have examined. It is distinguished from
specimens of 1’. tachydromoides by the absence of granules.
between the supraoculars and superciliaries and of a shield
between the supraocular and the loreal. From 1. sealineatus
it differs in having five rows of dorsal scales and a distinctly
more elongated head. There is only one femoral pore on each
side, but no small scales separate the outer rows of lateral plates.
The specimen has four pairs of chin shields developed quite
symmetrically—-a condition I find also in two young specimens of
1’. sealineatus, out of twenty-seven, young and adults, of this
species examined. The coloration and proportions (except as.
regards the head) are practically identical with those of
T. sexlinestus.

LaAceRTA viripis (Laur.)
L. viridis var. major, Blgr., Cat. Liz., iii, p. 17.

The Museum possesses three specimens from Mount Hermon
(J. Anderson) of Boulenger’s variety major. As there is in the
British Museum a specimen of the variety (Gray’s species)
stiigata from the same locality and collection, the two varieties.
must occur together. The only specimens of strigata in the
Indian Museum come from Persia (W. TY. Blanford) and are:
immature.

Vol. I, No. 5.] Contributions to Oriental Herpetology IIL. 141
LN. S.]

OPHIOPS SCHLEUTERI, Boett.
O. schleuteri, Blgr., Cat. Liz., iii, p. 77.
O. elegans (part), Werner, Zool. Jahrbr. Syst. xix, 1904, p. 334.

Among a large number of specimens of Ophiops elegans from
Palestine and Asia Minor ( J. Anderson ) six individuals from
Mount Hermon have the more numerous body scales and other
peeuliarities of O. schleuteri, Boett., answering very closely to the
descriptions of this form, which was at one time believed to be
peculiar to Cyprus. The differences between O. elegans and
Q. schleuteri are very small but seem to be constant; they can
generally be perceived, by mere inspection, without actually
counting the scales. Boulenger suggests that Boettiger’s
species may be only a variety, but it seems best to consider it for
the present as a distinct species occurring side by side with
O. elegans, which, however, has a very much wider range, extend-
ing from Turkey to North-West India.

The remaining Lacertids in the collection call for no special
mention. Only two species, Scapteira scripta, Strauch, (of which
we have two Indian examples) and 8. aporosceles,! Alc. & Finn.,
both from Baluchistan, have been added to the Indian fauna since

1890.
SCINCID A.
Masvla RUGIFERA (Stol.)
M. rugifera, Blgr., Faun. Ind., Rept. p. 199.

A specimen from Perak (Mus. colltr.) has seven longitudinal
whitish bands on the dorsal and lateral surfaces. The three
innermost commence 1mmediately behind the head, the next two on
either side at the posterior marg:n of the orbit. At the posterior
extremity of the body they become indistinct, disappearing on the
tail. We have also a specimen, in which the colour has faded,
from the Nicobars (Stoliezka).

Masvra MULTIFASCIATA, (Kuhl)

M. multifasciata, Blgr., Faun. Ind., Rept., p. 191; S. Flower,
P. Z. S. 1899, p. 646.

The Museum possessess a large series of this common Indo-
Malayan skink. The following table shows the number of
specimens with tri- and quinquecarinate dorsal scales respectively

! Alcock and Finn, J.A.S,B., 1896 (2), p. 559.

142 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1905.

from different localities Six specimens from Penang and two
from Upper Burma have tricarinate dorsal scales :—

5 - P t
Total No. |With3 Keels.|With5 Keels. wan 3 ens,

Assam ... ape 13 12; J 92°3
Lower Burma Bee 26 24 2 923
Andamans ee 14 3 11 21°4
Nicobars 5 5 5 0 100
Borneo bes 30 30 (0) 100

These figures show clearly, though the number of specimens
examined is not very great, that while Assamese, Burmese and
Bornean specimens agree with those from Malaya (fide 8. Flower)
in being mostly provided with tricarinate dorsal scales, there is a
ereater tendency among Andaman specimens for these scales to
be quinquecarinate, as I have already suggested. !

Masoura TytTuert, Bler.
M. tytleri, Blgr., Faun. Ind., Rept., p. 191.

Of this Andaman Skink the Museum possesses seven adults
and a young one. One of the adults was obtained in the
Botanical Gardens near Calcutta by the late Dr. Anderson ; but
probably it had been introduced with specimens of living plants.
As Boulenger had only Theobald’s and Stoliczka’s imperfect
descriptions to go upon, it may be well to give a new diagnosis of
the species, which is very distinct from any other.

Lower eyelid scaly: a postnasal. Body stout, head large,
triangular ; snout moderate, obtusely pointed; cheeks swollen in
the adult ; tail long and slender, more than twice the length of
head and body when perfect. Nostril behind suture between rostral
and first labial; supranasals generally in contact behind rostral ;
anterior loreal not, or but slightly, deeper than posterior, in
contact with second, sometimes also with first, labial; frontsnasal
slightly broader than long ; preefrontals in contact mesially ; frontal
generally as long as frontsparietals and interparietal together, in
contact with second supraocular ; four supraoculars, second largest ;
superciliaris inclined to break up irregularly. Har-opening cres-
centic, vertical, smaller than a lateral scale, without, or with
small and indistinct, anterior lobules. Dorsal scales tricarinate,
nuchals and laterals feebly keeled ; 24 to 26 scales round centre of
body, subequal. The hind limb reaches the axilla. Subdigital
lamelle smooth. Coloration: dorsal surface uniform greyish
brown, spotted on both limbs with dark-brown and white ; ventral
surface dirty-white or greenish, tail dull-green or dull yellow.

Se ee ee eee
1 J.A.S.B. (2), 1904, Suppl., p. 19.

Vol. I, No. 5.] Contributions to Oriental Herpetology III. 143
[N. S.] .

In the young there is a dark lateral stripe which gives the
Lizard much the appearance of Lygosoma maculatum, with which,
judging from specimens in the Indian Museum, it has sometimes
been confused. Hven a very superficial examination is of course
sufficient to distinguish between the two forms. The dimension, at
any rate in respect to length, appear to exceed those of M. mul-
tifasciata ; but the tail is very brittle and none of our specimens
seem to be quite perfect asregards this organ. The shape of its
head is very different from that of this species.

M. tytleri appears to be much scarcer than M. multifasciata in
the Andamans.

Masuia mMonticota, (Theob.)

Kuprepes monticola, Gthr., apud Theobald (nec. Giinther)
Rept. Brit. Ind., p. 52.

The specimens described as Huprepes monticola, Gthr., by
Theobald in his feptiles of British India are quite distinct
from that form, which is (as Boulenger states) a synonym of
Mabwia dissimilis (Hallow). The following description is based
upon Theobald’s examples, three in number, and a young specimen
from Arakan (Mus. colltr.).

Lower eyelid scaly: a postnasal. Habit slender ; head very
small; snout short, obtusely pointed ; tail slender, about 1+ times
the length of head and body. Hind limb reaches the elbow
of adpressed fore-limb. Supranasals meet behind rostral, fronto-
nasal broader than long; prefrontals in contact behind fronto-
nasal; four large supraoculars followed by one small one, second
largest, in contact with frontal; parietals entirely separated
by interparietals, with straight posterior termination; one pair
of nuchals. Har-opening subcircular, smaller than a_ lateral
scale, with several feeble anterior lobules. Dorsal scales bi-,
tri- or quinquecarinate, generally with only two keels distinct
34 to 36 scales round centre of body. The colour has completely
faded in the specimens. ©

Theobald’s specimens have no history; possibly they come
from the Eastern Himalayas or the hills of Assam.

MABUIA ANAKULAR, nom. nov.

Euprepes longicaudatus, Anderson (nec Hallow), J.A.S.B. (2)
XL, 1871, p. 13.

The specimen described by Anderson as Huprepes longicaudatus
represents a very peculiar form, resembling in its elongated and
cylindrical shape some members of the genus Lygosoma but techni-
cally belonging to the genus Mabwia. As Anderson’s name was
preoccupied by Hollow, I have rechristened the species. The
following description is based upon Anderson’s specimen :—

Habit snake-like; limbs well developed, pentadactyle, hind
limb reaching elbow of adpressed fore-limb; distance between
tip of snout and fore-limb contained 13 times in distance between

144, Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1905.

axilla and groin. Head very small; snout short, obtusely pointed,
convex above. Lower eyelid scaly; a postnasal. Supranasals
separated by frontonasal. Prefrontals form a median suture;
frontal shorter than frontoparietals and interparietal together ;
parietals meet behind interparietal, one pair of enlarged nuchals.
Har-opening a little smaller than eye-opening, longitudinal,
without lobules. Thirty scales round centre of body; dorsals,
laterals and nuchals with 4 to 6 keels, only two of which are at all
strongly marked. Length from snout to vent 35 mm.; tail (now
much broken) at least three times as long as, stout in comparison
with, body.

One specimen from Cachar (Mus. colltr.).

Anderson was right in regarding this species as allied to
Theobald’s Huprepes monticola, from which, however, it is quite
distinct.

Lycosoma macuLaTuM, (Blyth)
L. maculatum, Blgr., Faun. Ind., Rept., p. 196.

Comparison with other specimens (of which we have a very
large series), shows that those from Narcondam (see Annandale,
J.A.S.B., (2) 1904, Suppl., p. 13) belong to this species. Boulenger
says (loc. cit. and similarly in the Catalogue of Lizards ii, p. 242),
“distance between end of snout and fore-limb equals 11 to 14 times
distance between axilla and groin.” This is obviously a lapsus
calamt, for the latter distance is the greater.

LiyGOSOMA MITANENSE, sp. nov.
Diagnosis—

Allied to Lygosoma indicum, with which it agrees in lepidosis,
except that it has 42 smooth scales round the centre of the body,
the dorsals being considerably larger than the laterals or the
ventrals. The hind limb reaches a point midway between the
shoulder and the ear. Length from tip of snout to fore-limb is
contained about 1; times between axilla and groin. The tail,
which is laterally compressed, is more than twice the length of the
head and body. The type is much discoloured but appears to
have been marked in much the same way as L. maculatum.

Dimensions of type— .

Total Length 30) samme

Head wes Re TiO ep

Body ree ae 34°

Tail se wae Oia

Fore-limb ... cis LG.

Hind Limb ane INS) ee

Breadth of Head fae 65

99

A single specimen from Meetan, Lower Burma (Tenasserim
Hept:).-'

Vol. I, No. 5.] Contributions to Oriental Herpetology IIT. 145
[N. 8.]

LYGOSOMA DUSSUMIERII var. CONCOLOR, Var. NOV.

We have a specimen from Canara (Col. Beddome) which
perhaps differs sufficiently from others to be given a varietal name,
though the differences may be due to age. The rostral is convex ;
the dorsal and lateral surfaces are of an almost uniform pale bronze
marbled on the sides of the neck with white, a colour which
appears in the same manner on the labials and the sides of the
tail; the size is greater than that of any other specimen I have
seen (snout to vent 57 mm; tail 105 mm.).

LiyGOsoMA OLIVACEUM var. GRISEUM, (Gray).

The only specimen of this variety in the Museum is one from
Sinkip Island (J. Wood-Mason). Mr. Boulenger has kindly ex-
amined it. Specimens from the Andamans and Nicobars belong to
the typical variety.

LyGOsOMA CACHARENSE, sp. nov.

Diagnosis.

Subgenus Keneuwia, Gray. ~

Habit lacertiform; limbs well developed, pentadactyle ; hind
limb reaches wrist of adpressed fore-imb. Tistance between
tip of snout and fore-limb contained 15 times in distance from
axilla to groin. Snout short, obtuse, convex above; lower eyelid
scaly ; no supra- or postnasals. Preafrontals meet behind rostral;
frontal as long as frontoparietals and interparietal together ; fronto-
parietals meet behind parietal; so enlarged nuchals. Fifth and
sixth upper labials beneath eye, enlarged. Har-opening almost as
large as eye-opening, oval, vertical. Twenty-four smooth, sub-
equal scales round centre of body, nonimbricate laterally ; preanals
slightly enlarged. Tail less than twice the length of head and
body. Coloration—dark-brown above, with darker lateral line ;
paler below :—

Total Length ee soo lle) saaieal,
Head ie Aa ee ONE.
Body 500 see eee Sh) ”
Tail fs sae sintuteie ss
Fore-limb _... Poa aa uilctbe.
Hind Limb 500 p00 pda 23 ”
Breadth of Head a We ae tin

One specimen from Nemotha, Cachar (J. Wood-Mason).

LiyGosoMa PULCHELLUM (Gray)

L. pulchellum, Blgr., Oat. Liz. iii., p, 254, pl. xvii, fig. 1.

I have been somewhat surprised to find an example from
Tavoy (Mus. colltr.) of this extremely beautiful and distinct little
Skink, which was described from the Philippines. It agrees

146 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1905.

closely both as regards lepidosis and proportions (actual and
relative) and as regards coloration with Boulenger’s description
and figures. Major Alcock has kindly examined some of its
most characteristic features with me.

LYGOSOMA SIKKIMENSE (Blyth)

There is a specimen from Simla in the Indian Museum,
wrongly identified as L. dorizx. 1am not aware that the species
has been recorded hitherto from the Western Himalayas.

LYGOSOMA TRAGBULENSE, Alc.

L.. himalayanum var. tragbulense, Alcock, Report N. H.
Pamir Bound. Comm., p. 86, pl. II, figs. 1, la.

Out of eleven specimens of Lygosoma collected on the Trag-
bal pass by Dr. G. M. Giles four belong to Alcock’s variety trag-
bulense, while the remainder represent the typical L. himalayanum.
Some of the latter are very much smaller than those of tragbulense,
which, as well as the types, are fairly well grown. The coloration,
therefore, cannot be due to youth ; and though variety in colora-
tion in itself is not a safe specific difference in the Skinks, it may
be taken, when it is very distinctive, as an additional reason for
separation if combined with differences in scaling. The greater
number of subdigital lamellae on the fourth toe which Alcock
noted in his specimens, is constant, as are also the characteristic
dorsal and lateral stripes, while the ventral scales have not the
obscure dark edging common in L. himalayanum but are of
an opaque white. There may be two scales under the eye; but
this character is not constant.

LyGosoma BEeDDOMII, Bler.

The only specimen in our collection which can be assigned
to this species differs from the descriptions in that the limbs do
not meet when adpressed. Otherwise it conforms to Boulenger’s
diagnosis.

Liycosoma FoRMosuM (Blyth)

Mocoa formosa, Blyth, J.A.S.B., (2) xxii, -p. 651; Bilgr.,
Faun. Ind., Rept., p. 205.

The following description is based on the three types of
Blyth’s imperfectly described species :—

Subgenus Hmoa, Gray.

Habit stout; head moderate; snout obtusely pointed; limbs
well developed, overlap slightly ; head and body about 2 length of
tail. Lower eyelid with an undivided transparent disk, no
supra or postnasals. Nostril behind suture between rostral and
first labial; rostral forms a straight or nearly straight sulture
with frontonasal ; preefrontals in contact; frontal in contact with

Vol. I, No. 5.] Contributions to Oriental Herpetology III. 147
ENE S|

Ist and 2nd supraculars; 4 supraoculars, 2nd longest; 6 to 8
superciliaries, subequal; frontsparietals distinct; no enlarged
nuchals. Dorsal scales smooth, larger than ventrals or laterals ;
30 to 34 scales round centre of body. Coloration— Dorsal surface
olive-green or pale-brown, spotted with dark-brown and white; a
dark lateral band, also spotted with white; ventral surface and
tail pale-brown or olive-green.

From Mirzapore (North-West Provinces) and Wazirabad,
Punjab.

LyGosoMa ATROCOSTATUM (Gray)

Li. atrocostatum, Blgr., Cat. Inz. ii., p. 295; S. Flower,
P.Z.S: 1899, p. 649.
L. jerdonianum, Blgr. t. c., p. 300.
L. singaporense, 7d., t.c., p. 297.

In addition to Stoliczka’s type of Mabouya jerdoniana from
Pulau Tikus (Rat Island) off Penang, we have a specimen from
Sinkip Island (J. Wood-Mason) which resembles it closely on the
whole but has only 34 scales round the centre of the body, and six
specimens from Borneo (Sarawak Mus.). These Bornean and Sinkip
specimens have a single frontoparietal, while this scale is only
partially divided in Stoliczka’s. One of the Bornean specimens
has supraoculars. I agree with Flower in regarding L. jerdonia-
num asasynonym of L. atrocostatum, to the synonomy of which
I would also add L. singaporense, though I have not seen a speci-
men of the last.

L. atrocostatwm does not appear to have been recorded from
Sumatra, where it probably occurs, being found on Sinkip.

LiyGosoMA CHINENSE (Gray)

L. chinense, Blgr., Cat. Liz. III, p. 318.

A specimen from Hong Kong (J. Wood-Mason) must, I think,
be referred to this species. It has 4 supraoculars, and the
coloration is as follows :—dorsal surface pale brown ; lateral surfaces.
and tail mottled with dark brown and white; a dark lateral line
starting from below the eye and becoming indistinct behind the
fore-limb: ventral surface yellowish.

LiyGosoMA LINEOLATUM (Stol.)

A specimen from Martaban is probably one of the types, but
is entered in the Museum register simply as purchased, which is
the case with other types of Stoliczka’s.

LyGosoma comotru, Blgr.

A specimen from Tavoy (Mus. colltr.) agrees with Boulenger’s
description except that the fifth, not the sixth, upper labial is
under the centre of the eye. ‘I'he species does not appear to have
been recorded from Lower Burma.

148 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1905.

Lycosoma aneuinum (Theob.)

In addition to the types we have another specimen from Pegu
and one from Amherst in Northern Tenasserim.

Humeces scutatus (Theob.)

E. teniolatus, Blanf. Res , 2nd Yark. Miss. Rept. p. 19.
EB. scutatus, Blgr. Faun. Ind. Rept., p. 218.

The Museum has specimens from Sind (Karachi Mus.) ;
Rajputana (N. Bellety); N. Kashmir (2nd. Yarkand Miss.) ;
Chitral (#. J. Daly), and Afghanistan (Dr. R. M. Green). The
species has frequently been confused with L. teenzolatus.

EHuMECES THNIoLATUS (Blyth)

H. teniolatus, Blgr, Faun, Ind., Rept., p. 219.

Of this species we have only two true specimens, both from
the Punjab Salt Range (Theobald). One has two, the other only
one postmental; otherwise they agree closely, differing consider-
ably from the preceding form.

Scincus mITRANUS, Anders.

§. mitranus, Blgr., Cat. Liz. 111,p. 398.
S. arenarius, zd., t.c p. 392; & Faun. Ind., Rept., p. 221.

In his description of S. mitranus Anderson states that it has
five supraoculars. The type, however, (the locality of which is
doubtful) has six onone side of the head; while on the other
traumatic injuries to the skin forbid an opinion. Specimens of
Murray’s S. arenarius from Sind agree in every other respect with
this individual, which is, on the whole, well preserved.

CHALCIDES OCELLATUS (Forsk.)

There are a number of specimens (purchased) in the Museum
said to come from Haldibari (Kooch-Behar): their true pro-
venance 18 doubtful but probably Indian. They belong to var.
A of Boulenger’s Catalogue (ii, p. 401), as also do Persian ex-
amples (Blanford), but are rather darker than examples from
Palestine and Hgypt.

Vol. I, No. 5.] Contributions to Oriental Herpetology III.

156.

157.

158.
159.

160.

161.
162.
163.
164.
165.
166.
167.
168.

169.

170.
Hevple
172.

173.
174.
175.
176.
177.
178.
179.
180.
181.
182.
183.
184.
185,

186.
187.

188.
189,
190.
191.
192,

193.
194,
195,
196,

197.

198,

199.

LN. 8.]

149

LIZARDS OF INDIA, BURMA AND CEYLON (11).
LACERTIDAL-

Tachydromus sexlineatus, Daud.

be}

.. H. Himalayas; Assam; Burma.
septentrionalis,* Gthr. Assam (= 2. tachydromoides Schleg.

(partim) in Blegr., Faun. Ind., Rept., p. 169).

Acanthodactylus cantoris, Gthr.
micropholis,§ Blanf. ..,
Cabrita leschenanltii (M.-Hdw.)

» jexrdonii, Bedd.

Ophiops jerdonii, Blyth.
beddomi (Jerd.)
elegans, Ménétr. 200

», microlepis,§ Blanf.
Eremias guttulata (Licht.)
brevirostris§ (Blanf.)
velox (Pall.)

» tasciata,§ Blanf.
Scapteira scripta,* Strauch
Scapteira acutirostris, Blegr.
Scapteira aporosceles,*§ Alc.

& Finn

ene

”
a”

39
oP)

. N.-W. India.
Baluchistan ; Sind. [ Berar.
S. India as far north ag S. EH.

... Godavari Valley ; Hilore.
. Central and N.-W. India.
. 8S. India; Bombay Presidency.

Punjab.

. N. India from Katch to W. Bengal.
. sind; Baluchistan.

. Punjab.

.. Baluchistan.

.. Baluchistan.

... N, Baluchistan (Antea).

N. Baluchistan.

. N. Baluchistan (Alcock & Finn,

J.A.8.B. (2) 1896).

SCINCIDAL,

Mabnia bibronii (Gray.) se
Mabuia doriz, Blev.... ie
Mabuia dissimilis (Hallow)
septemteniata (Reuss)
novemcarinata§ (Anders.) ...
beddomii (Jerd.) Ae
vertebralis, Blgr.
rugifera§ (Stol.)
multifasciata (Kuhl)
Phy bets blotter a0
VMabuia quadricarinata, Blgr. 000
Mabnia monticola *§ (Theob.) iss
anakular,*§ Annand.

or)
Lygosoma indicnm (Gray)

or mitanense,*§ Annand.
maculatum (Blyth.)

dussumieri, D. & B.
olivaceum (Gray)
cacharense,*§ Annand,
Lygosoma subceruleum,* Blgr.

3 pulchellum * (Gray)
Lygosoma kakhienense, Blgr. ,
Lygosoma melanostictum, Blgr. ...
sikkimense (Blyth)

”

9 himalayannm (Gthr,)

rp tragbulenge,*§ Alc, evs

Lygosoma dorix, Blgr.

. Nicobars.
. Assam ;
. Andamans; Caleutta (introduced P).

S. India; Ceylon.
Upper Burma.

. N. India from Sind to Bengal.
2) Sind:

Mandalay.
S. India, north to S.-H. Berar.
Central India,
[ Nicobars.
Burma; Andamans and
Kakhyen Hills, Upper Burma.
Arakan ; ? H. Himalayas (Antea).
Cachar ( = Huprepes longicaudatus
Anders. Antea),
H, Himalayas; Hilly of Assam and
Burma.

... Lower Burma, (Antea).
.. N. Bengal; E. Himalayas; Assam

Burma.

. Malabar province.
... Tenasserim ;
.. Cachar (Antea).
. Travancore (Bler; Ann. Mag. N. H.

Andamans; Nicobars.

1891, p. 289).
Tayoy (Antea),

... Kakhyen Hills, Upper Burma.

Tenasserim ; Tavoy.

. W. Bengal (Pareshnata Hills); H

Himalayas; Simla.

W. Himalayas ; Kashmir ;
Provinces,

Tragbal Pass, Kashmir (Alc.,Pamir
Bound. Comm, N. H., p. 36).

Central

»» Upper Burma.

150

200.

201.

202.
203.
204.
205.
206.
207.
208.
209.
210.
211.
212.
213.
214,

215.

216.

217.

218.

219.
220.
221.

222,

223
224,
225.
226.
227.

228.
229.
230.
281.
232.
2338,
234,
235,
236.
237.
238.

239.

240.
241,

242,

since 1890;
type.

1 Y. Rama Chandran,

Journal of the Asvatic Society of Bengal.

[May, 1905.

Lygosoma ladacense (Gthr.) .. Ladak.
Lygosoma laterimaculatum, Blgr. ... 8. India.
Lygosoma bilineatum! (Gray.) : Ms
Lygosoma beddomii, Blgr. S. India.

af macrotympanum § (Stol. )

S. Andamans.

Lygosoma macrotis (Steind.) . Nicobars.

Lygosoma formosum*§ (Blyth) . N.-W. Provinces; Panjab (Antea.)
Bs taprobanense, (Kel.) . Ceylon.
Treas, IELTS — coo ies -
.s lineolatum § (Stol.) ... Martaban, Lower Burma.

comotti, Blgr.
albopunctatum (Gray)
guentheri (Ptrs.) 000
aguinum § (Theob.)
lppesonam calamus, tae

Lygosoma lineatum (Gray) 3
Lygosoma punctatolineatum,* Blgr....

Ablepharus brandtii, Strauch
erayanus,§ (Stol.)
rurkii, Gray.

6p travancorica, Bedd.
Ristella guenthert, Bler.
Ristella bedomii, Bler. ae
Tropidophorus berdmorii, (Blyth) ..
Tropidophorus yunnanensis, Blgr.
Humeces scutatus (Theob.) 305

Miszellen

teeniolatus§ (Blyth)
schneideri (Daud) ef

a blythianus§ (Anders.)...
Scincus mitranus,*§ Anders.
Ophiomorus tridactylus (Blyth)
Ophiomorus blandfordii, Bler.
Chalcides ocellatus (Forsk) :
Chalcides pentadactylus (Bedd). ...
Sepophis punctatus, Bedd. :
Chalcideseps thwaitesii (Gthr.) 500
Acontias burtonii (Gray)

» monodactylus (Gray)

» layardii, Kelaart 000
Acontias sarasinorum, EF. Miller

29
39

eco

punctatum (Linn.) 200

cyanellam 2§ (Stol.) 000
. Pegu; N. Tenasserim.
. Upper Burma.

. Central Provinces.

... Upper Burma; Tavoy.
. S. & H. India; Assam ; Burma.

Peninsular India; Ceylon.
S. India; C. India ; Bombay.
Burma.

Bia-po, Burma (Blgr., Ann. Mus.
Genova, 1893, p. 321.)

. Punjab; Sind; Baluchistan.
. Katch and Sind.
.. Anamalay Hills, 8. India.
. Travancore (hills).
.. Madura (hills).
. S.-W. India (hills).

. Lower Burma.

. Kakhyen hills, Upper Burma.

Sind; Katch; Punjab; Kashmir ;
Chitral.

... Punjab Salt Range.
. Baluchistan.

? Punjab; Afridi District.

Sind (-S. arenarius, Murray. Antea.)
Punjab; Sind; Baluchistan.
Baluchistan.

. Sind.

Beypore, Malabar.

. Golgonda and Godavari Hills.

Ceylon.

DIBAMIDA.

Dibamus nove-guines, D. & B.

-ee Nicobars.

In the above list, as in that of the preceding families, a * op-
posite a name indicates that the species is new to the Indian fanua

a § that the Indian Museum possesses a type or co-

Names in italics are those of species not represented in the
collection.

M.A., student, Madras, has lately sent me a

specimen of L. bilineatum which has, as he points out, 26 scales round the body.
June 22nd, 1905.

4 Including L. fee. See Boulenger, Ann. Mus. Gen, (ii) xiii, p. 320.

Vol. I, No. 5.] Contributions to Oriental Herpetology III. 151
[N. S.]

In Boulenger’s volume in the “ Fauna of India” (1890), 221
species of Lizards are described ; at present 242 appear to occur
within the Indian Empire and Ceylon, but the grounds on which
three of these are included are a little insecure. The majority
of the species added have been new to science, but a few previous-
ly known from other parts of Asia have been recorded from Balu-
chistan. Several new forms have been described from the same
neighbourhood several from Burma (chiefly from Lower Burma),
one from S. India, two from the Andamans and one from Cachar.
Undoubtedly novelties still remain to be discovered, especially in
the extreme east of the Empire; and probably certain forms now
regarded as solely Malayan will be found also in Tenasserim,
Several forms, e.g. Lygosoma zebratum and D. fex have been shown
to be at most varieties of previously descyjbed species.

Mr. Grey Pilgrim, of the Geological Survey of India, has
lately collected in Hastern Arabia and presented to the Museum
the following specimens :

Uromastix microlepis, (Blanf.) .. One specimen.
Varanus griseus (Daud.) ie 5
Hremias brevirostris ( Blanf.) ... Two specimens.

I neglected to mention in the former part of this paper, that
Gymnodactylus khasiensis has lately been recorded from Upper
Burma by Boulenger, Journ. Bombay N.H. Soc., xiii, p. 553.

July 26th, 1905.

Note.—Through the kindness of Dr. A. Willey, F.R.S., Director of the
Colombo Museum, I have lately had an opportunity of examining the types
of Neyill’s EHuprepes halianus, a Ceylonese Skink regarding the systematic
position of which Boulenger expresses a doubt. As they possess retractile
claws, while otherwise agreeing with Lygosoma, I propose to place them in a
new genus Theconyz, which will be fully described later in Spolia Zeylanica,
the organ of the Colombo Museum, August 23rd, 1905.

152 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1905.

17. Tibet, a dependency of Mongolia.—(1643—1716 A.D.).—By
Rai Sarat Cuanpra Das, Bahadur, C.1.H.

The six Khanates of Mongolia had, for a long time, remained
under a solemn compact which kept them in peace. At last, the
Khan of Chakar, named Legdan, who had grown ambitious, made
a breach into it, in consequence of which internal dissensions broke
out among them. Friendly advisors and intermediators came
from the neighbouring States to bring upon reconciliation among
the contending parties in Khalkha, the country of the Kulmue
Mongols. One of the claimants to inheritance in that Khanate
being driven out of the country, came with his hordes to the bank
of Lake T’hig-Cég Gyalmo and took possession of the province of
Hoco-tshe of Thumed-Mongolia. His descendant who had _set-
tled there was attached to the shwamar or Red-cap School of Tibet.
About this time the two rival sects of Buddhism, namely, the Red-
cap and the Yellow-cap. Lamas, were fighting with each other in
Tibet. Rab-chyampa,.a representative of the Red-cap sect pro-
ceeded to Mongolia and appealed for help to the Khan of
Hogo-tshe. In the year T'ree-hog the Khan sent his son Arsaling
(Abaling) at the head of 10,000 Tartars to Tibet to. extirpate
the Yellow-cap Church. The prince being humane and pious
refrained from doing injury to the Yellow-cap Lamas, so the
Red-cap Lamas, out of spite, sent misrepresentations against him
to his father, accusing him of partiality to their enemies. The
Khan, who was at that time engaged in war in the Kokoncr
country, became furious at his son’s conduct and wrote to the
Rab-chyampa to take the prince’s life. On Arsaling’s death, which
‘was probably caused either by poison or assasination, the Tartar
troops were thrown into disorder. For the want of a leader they
dispersed like a cloud and returned :to their-country. About-this
time the Khan of Duthukthu, a descendant of Jenghis Khan,
who had also espoused the cause of the Red-cap Lamas, started
from Chakar with a large army to help them in their struggle
with the Yellow-Church. But on his arrival at Kokonor he acci-
dentally died. A great enemy of Buddhism now arose in Kham,
who followed the Bon religion. This was the King of Beri, named
Don-yo dorje. He, like King Langdarma, had destroyed all the
Buddhist Institutions of Kham belonging to the Red-cap and the
Yellow-cap sects. He was about to start with a large army for
conquering Tibet proper when the Khan of Cileuth Mongols
entered Kham with his Tartar hordes. This was Gushi Khan the
third of the five sons of the Khan of Hocod, one of the four divi-
sions of Orad Mongolia. Like Jenghis Khan, he too was believed
to have been an incarnation of the Lord of Death. His native
name was Toral Behu, but he is better known by the names Gushi
Khan or Gegan Khan. Owing to his devotion to the causof the

Vol. I, No. 5.] | Tubet, a dependency of Mongolia. 153
[W. S.]

Yellow-cap Church he is known in Tibet by the Tibetan name
of Tenzing Choigyal, the upholder of religion or Dharma Raja.
While only thirteen years of age he was entrusted by his
father with the leadership of the Tartar hordes. He defeated
the Gokar! Tartars and brought them under subjection in 1593.
At the age of 25 he was successful in reconciling the Kulmucs
of Khalkha with the (leuth Mongols who were quarrelling
on account of a question of precedence between the hierarch of
Gahdan and Ston skor Sabs-drung named Jetsundampa, and
thereby averted a fierce and bloody war in the heart of Mongo-
la. For this service, he was decorated with the holy order of
Ta Kausri by the Emperor of China in 1605, from which cir-
cumstance his name Kushri or Gushi Khan had originated.
At the age of 35, at the earnest entreaties of Desrid Sonam
Choiphel, Panchen Rinpoche of Tashilhampo and other repre-
sentatives of the Yellow-Church, he agreed to march into Tibet
to punish their enemies. In the year Mre-ox in the first
month, 7z.e., February, he entered Kokonor with a large army.
- He despatched about 10,000 troops to Chog-thu in Khalkha to
suppress a rebellion there. His hordes routed 40,000 Tartars in
a single battle fought at Utan Hogo in one day, and killed the
Khan. From Kokonor, Gushri Khan moved towards Tibet. He
reached the great monastery of Gahdan in the auspicious evening
of the 27th day of the month, when he saw a halo of light
brightening the horizon at dusk.

During the winter of that year he again visited Kokonor, and
from there proceeding to Kham, on the 25th of the 11th month,
he annexed the whole of King Beri’s dominions to his kingdom.
Seeing that Beri would be dangerous to both the Church and the
State he put him to death and released the Lamas of the several:
Buddhist sects who had been thrown into prison by that apostate
king of Kham. Gushri then brought under his control all the
territories bordering on Jangsathul—the dominions of the king
of Jangsa. Then entering Tibet proper with his invincible hordes,
he made presents to the great monasteries of the Yellow-Church
and proclaimed his authority over the whole country. From
Iuhasa he marched to Tsang with the major portion of his army..
In the year called water-horse, on the 8th of the first month, he
captured thirteen large jongs (forts), including that of Samdub-tse
at Shigatse, and overthrew the power of the king of Tsang. On
the 25th of the 11th month he threw him into prison. At first, out:
of respect for the valour of the fallen monarch, he did not order
him to be beheaded, but at the representation of the leaders of the-
Yellow-Church he was found guilty of the highest crime, having had
established arival monastery of the Red-cap Church,called Tashizil, _
in the immediate vicinity of Tashilhunpo, with the object of ruining

! The Western Mongolians who had become Mahomedans were called.
Gokar on account of their using the white Pagri, from go head and kar
white.

154 Journal of the Astatic Society of Bengal. {| May, 1905,

the latter. Gushri Khan caused him to be packed in a hide! and
thenthrew him into the river. He then commenced the pious work of
establishing a University with thirteen colleges, which were called
Ling or divisions, at Lhasa, for the education of both the laity and
the clergy. Of these thirteen Lings only four havesurvived, namely,
Tan-gyeling, T'she-chog-Ling, Kindti-Ling and Tshemo-Ling. He
brought all the great Cholka or Provinces of Tibet under his

ower. Hearing that the Lamas of Kongpo, were greatly
attached to the Red-cap Karmapa Sect, he sent a division of his
army there and annexed the eastern provinces to his dominions.
He now declared himself the supreme ruler of all Tibet and
Mongolia, and sat on the Lion-throne of Potala at Lhasa. On this
auspicious occasion he received presents from the border states of
India, such as—Bushing (probably Bushahir), Yambu (Nepal),
Neah-ri (Ladak), ete. The Tibetans of the older sects began to
regard him as an incarnation of their saint Padma Sambhava.
After making the Yellow-Church dominant all over Tibet and
Mongolia he shewed tolerance to the followers of the rival sects
and patronized learning. Thus Mongolia and Tibet being brought
together under the sovereignity of one Royal Umbrella, the religion
of Buddha, as reformed by Tsongkhapa, flourished and shone with
greater lustre than it had done even during the reformer’s time.
Under the benign rule of this devout king all classes of people
enjoyed peace and prosperity, as if they were living in the ideal
age of perfection.

After Gushri Khan’s death his son Dayan Khan reigned for
fourteen years over Tibet. On his death his son Talai Khan, also
called Ratna Gyalpo, succeeded to the throne. Ratna’s eldest son
named Tanzin Wangyal succeeded him, but he did not reign long,
being mysteriously poisoned. During the reigns of these kings
the office of the Desrid was successively filled by Pon Sonam
Choiphel for seventeen years, from the year Iron-serpent ; by T’hin
las Gyatsho for ten years; by Lozang thutob for six years; and by
Lozang Jinpa for three years. Then it passed to the layman
Sangye Gyatsho who held it for nearly twenty-five years from the
year Harth-sheep, during which time he completed the building
of the nine-storeyed palace on Potala called the Phodang Marpo.
In the year Fire-tiger there was war between the Khalkha and the
Cileuth Mongols. The hierarch of Gahdan, named T’hi-Lodoi
Gyatsho, reconciled the belligerents to each otherand induced them
to make a treaty of peace. On the death of Tanzing Wangyal,
Lhabzang, the younger son of Ratna who was exiled, succeeded to
the throne. His first act was to wreak vengeance? on the Desrid,
Sangye Gyatsho, whohad been instrumental in bringing about his

1 This punishment is called Ko-thtmgyab-pa, i.e., packing the criminal
in hide or skin and then throwing him in the deep water of a river. This
8 the capital pnnishment that is inflicted on the higher class of criminals in

ibet.

# At this period it was suspected that the Lama authorities of the Yel-
low-cap Church were intriguing to kill the king (Lhabzang) by exorcism.

Vol. I, No. 5.] Tibet, a dependency of Mongolia. 155
[N. S.]

banishment. During his exile Lhabzang had collected about 500
Tartar troops. Entering Tibet with them he collected a large
army from the 13 Thikor of Tibet, besides Kongpo and other pro-
yinces and took possession of the throne. In the year T'ree-bird he
killed Desrid Sangye Gyatsho. He reigned for nearly thirteen
ears.

: Hearing the news of Desrid’s violent death, the Khan of
Chungar (Zungaria), the left branch of the Cleuth Mongols
named Hing Thaijé, who was devoted to the Yellow-cap Church,
sent presents to the Dalai Lama, and with a view to restore peace
and prosperity in the troubled land of the Lamas, sent his generals
to invade Tibet with a large army. In the year Pire-bird they
captured Lhasa, defeating Lhabzang ina battle in which he fell.
Thus in 1716 ended the short-lived kingdom founded by Gushri
Khan in Tibet. In the year 1717 the Chungar army, after sack-
ing the Ningma monasteries of Namgyaling, Dorje Tag, Mindol-
ling, etc., and making the Yellow-cap Church still more pre-
dominant all over Tibet, returned to Mongolia.

-———_— Yr SS SS eS

156 Journal of the Asiatic Socvety of Bengal. - | May, 1905-

18. Sarvajia-mitra—a Tantrika Buddhist author of Kasmira in
the 8th century A.D.—By Pror. Satis CHANDRA VipyapHusana, M.A.

Amongthe manuscripts presented to the Asiatic Society of
Bengal by Mr. Hodgson, there is a Buddhist Sanskrit work
named Sragdhara-stotra by Sarvajfiia-mitra. The work derives its.
name from that of the metre, viz., Sragdhard,! in which it is written.
It isa hymn consisting of 37 stanzas in praise of the Tantrika
goddess Tara who is called in Tibetan Serol-ma. ‘There is a Sans-
krit commentary on the work, called Sragdhara stotra-tika, by Jina-
raksita who was a monk of the great monastery of Vikramasila
and a spiritual guide of a king of the time.

‘The commentator states that Sarvajfiia-mitra, the author of
Sragdhara-stotra, was a devout monk of Kasmira and was re-
nowned for his unbounded charity. Having given away everything
he possessed, he left the country and wandered abroad as a men-
dicant. Once while he was proceeding to the kingdom of Vajra-
mukuta, he met on the way a poor old Brahmana who was in a
very pressing need of money for the marriage of his daughter.
The Brahmana, who was going to the place of Sarvajfia-mitra
himself for help, having learnt that the latter had nothing left.
except the beggar’s bowl and robe, fell into great despair and shed
tears. Sarvajfia-mitra, however, consoled him saying: ‘“‘ Be not
sad, I shall give you what you ask for.” Atthattime King Vajra-
mukuta was told by a certain person that all his desires would be
fulfilled if he could wash himself sitting on 100 skulls
freshly severed from the trunks. The king who had already
secured 99 persons completed the number 100 by purchasing”
Sarvajia-mitra, who sold his person for its weight in gold which
was given to the poor Brahmana. The 100 victims were in a
morning led into the Executioner’s Tank by officers of the king.
Sarvajia-mitra finding no means of escape composed and chanted
Oo” stanzas in praise of Arya Tara, whereupon all the victims.
were miraculously saved and taken to their respective homes.
Heaps of gold equal to the weight of the victims remained depo-
sited on the edge of the tank. The king, surprised at the miracu-
lous power of the monk, became a disciple of his.

The story of Sarvajiia-mitra and a literal Tibetan translation
of the Sragdhara-stotra are to be found in the Tangyur, section
Reyud, vol. L.

A similar story about Sarvajiia-mitra is narrated in the Tibetan
work called Pagsam-jon-zang edited by Rai Sarat Chandra Das.

1 The Sragdhara metre contains twenty-one syllables in each foot broken
into three equal parts. In the Chandomafijari, the Sragdhara verse is.
thus scanned :—

i a er Jk TL OJ WS TR OY J are OS nn WO

Rol I. No. 5.] Sarvajna-mitra. 157
ENE S\ 3]

Bahadur, C.I.E. According to this work Sarvajiia-mitra, though
born in Kasmira, was a student of the monastery at Nalanda in
Magadha where he became a great master of sciences. The king
to whom he sold his person is called Vajra-mukuta in the Sanskrit
Sragdharastotratika, while he is called Sarana in the Tibetan,
Pagsam-jon-zang. The story contained in the Pagsam-jon-zang
(p. 102) runs thus :—

“ A little bastard childof the King of Kasmira was carried away
by a vulture from the roof of the palace and dropped on the top
of the Gandhola (the great central temple) of Nalanda in Maga-
dha. The Pandits of the Vihara, taking mercy on it, nursed it.
As he grew up the child acquired great knowledge and became
a scholar. He propitiated the goddess Arya Tara and thereby
acquired great wealth. He gave away all his riches in charity, and
when there was nothing left he started on a journey to Southern
India. Meeting on the way an old blind Brahmana who was
being led by his son, he inquired where he was going. Being
told that the blind Brahmana who was very poor had started on
his distant journey to beg help from Sarvajfia-mitra of
Nalanda, he was overpowered with pity and determined to sell his
own body to give gold to the helpless beggar. At this time he
learnt that King Sarana, who at the advice of his wicked spiritual
guide had undertaken the performance of a Yajiain which 108
human sacrifices were necessary, was in search of one more victim
which was wanting to complete the full number. The king was
convinced that if he successfully performed the Yajnia he would
attain the longevity equal to the sum of the longevity of 108 souls
that would be sacrificed init. Sarvajia-mitra sold himself to the
king and paid the gold that he had obtained therefrom to the blind
Brahmana, While waiting one night fordeath ina dark dungeon
he invoked the goddess Tara with the utmost concentration of his
“mind. When fire blazed up from the piled firewood and all the
108 men were led in chains to the pyre, a heavy shower of rain fell
which extinguished the fire within a short time and converted the
whole plain where the sacrifice was being performed into a large
sheet of water resembling a lake. The king and his ministers
hearing that this was due to the mercy of the goddess Tara who
was invoked by the victim who had sold himself to save others,
now acquired faith in the religion of Buddha and havingreleased all
the 108 victims of the unholy sacrifice sent them to their respec-
tive homes loaded them with presents. Sarvajfia-mitra before
whom the goddess had miraculously appeared, held fast a corner
of her celestial robe and was carried to the land of his birth.”

The same story is related in Lama Taranatha’s history of
Buddhism (wide A. Schiefner, p. 168 ff.).

Neither in the Sragdhara-stotra nor in its commentary is there
any mention of the date of either of the two works. Dr, Rajendra
Lala Mitra who notices the two works in his Buddhist Literature of
Nepal, p. 228, says nothing about their dates. The Rajatarangini, the
well-known chronicle of Kasmira, supplies us, however, with some

158 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {May 1905.

data to determine the age of Sarvajfia-mitra the author of Srag-
dhara-stotra. In Book IV, verse 210 of the Rajatarangini, we find
that Bhiksu Sarvajiia-mitra, who appeared as another Jina, resided
in Kayyavihara, which had been built by King Kayya. This
Kayya is stated to have beenaking of Lata or Central and
Southern Guzerat, and was subordinate to King Muktapida-
Lalitaditya of Kasmira. As Lalitaditya is generally held to have
lived early in the 8th Century A.D., Sarvajiia-mitra who resided in
Kayyavihara could not have flourished before that time. As the
monastery of Nalanda was destroyed in the 9th century A.D., |
Sarvajiia-mitra, who was educated there, could not have lived after
that time. This leads me to suppose that Sarvajia-mitra lived in
the middle of the 8th century A.D.

King Vajramukuta or Sarana has not yet been identified.
Vajramukuta is perhaps identical with Vajraditya, son of Lali-
taditya, King of Kasmira in the 8th Century A.D.

INDEX SLIP.
MINERALOGY.

SmBperrav, C. A.—Note on a Decomposition Product of a pecu-
liar Variety of Bundelkhand Gneiss. Jour. and Proc. As. Soc.
Bengal, New Series, Vol. I, No. 6, 1905, pp. 168-171.

Vol. I, No. 6.] An Analysis of the Lankavatara Sutra. 159
NESS. ||

19, An Analysis of the Lankavatara Sutra.—By Prov, Saris
CHANDRA VipyABHtsana, M.A.

The Lankavatara Siitra is an ancient Buddhist Sanskrit work,
a manuscript of which was brought from Nepal by Mr. Hodgson
nearly eighty years ago. It gives an account of a miraculous
visit which Buddha paid to Ravana, the King of Lanka. Though
the visit was altogether an imaginary one, the book is very valu-
able as it gives a copious explanation of the Buddhistic meta-
physical doctrines as well as an account of several non-Buddhistic
sects such as the Lokayata, Sankhya, Vaisesika, Pasupata, and
others. It is one of the nine most sacred books of the Nepalese
Buddhists called their Nava-dhamma.!

A Tibetan version of the Lankavatara Siitra is found in the
Kangyur, Sect. Mdo, Volume V. In Tibetan it is called Hphags-
pa-lan-kar-gsegs-pa-theg-pa-chen-pohi-mdo, in which it is stated
that the Sutra was translated into Tibetan by order of the Tibetan
King Ral-pa-can in the 9th Century A.D. lo-tsa-wa Ge-long
(Hegos-chos-grub), who translated the Sitra in Tibetan, also added
to the translation a commentary of a Chinese professor named
Wen-hi.?

There are extant three Chinese translations’ of the Lankava-
tara Sitra. The first translation, which is incomplete, was made
by Gunabhadra, 443 A.D., the second by Bodhiruci A.D, 513, and
the third by Siksananda A.D. 700-704.

Hwen-thsang, who travelled in Ceylon early in the 7th
Century A.D., points out the Malaya mountain as the place where-
in Buddha, in olden days, sat to deliver the Lankavatara Sitra.*

The Sitra was merely known by name to the Pandits of our
country from a reference to it in the Sarvadarsanasanhgraha® of
Madhavacaryya in the 14th Century A.D.

1 The nine most sacred books of the Nepalese Buddhists are :—

1. Astasahasrika Prajiiaparamita; 2. Gandavytha; 3. Dasabhumisvara;
4, Samadhiraja Sutra; 5. Lankavatara Sitra; 6. Saddharmapundarika ;
7. Tathagataguhyaka; 8. Lalitavistara and 9. Suvarnaprabhasa Sutra.

Divine worship is offered to these nine works by the Buddhists of Nepal.
Cf. Hodgson’s Ilustrations of the Literatare and Religion of the Buddhists,
rep, LR)

2 Vide Csoma de Koros’s Analysis of the Kangyur, p. 432 (Asiatic Resear-
ches, Volume XX).

Chee Bunyin Nanjio’s Catalogue of the Chinese Tripitaka, Nos. 175,
176, ;

The first Chinese translation consisting of 4 fasciculi, 1 chapter, bears
two prefaces by Tsiang C’-chi and Su-shi, of the later Sun dynasty, A.D.
960-1127. The date of the latter preface corresponds to A.D. 1085, The
second Chinese translation consists of 10 fasciculi, 18 chapters. The third
Chinese translation consisting of 7 fasciculi, 10 chapters, bears a preface by
the Empress Wu-tsd-thien, A.D. 684-705, of the Than dynasty.

*Vide Si-ya-ki, Book XI; Beal’s Buddhistic Records of the Western
World, p. 251.

6 Madhavacaryya quotes a passage from the Lankavatara Sitra saying :—

160° Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. | June, "1905.

The work consists of ten Parivarta or chapters named re-
spectively as, (1) Ravanadhyesana, (2) Sarvadharmasamuccaya,
(3) Anityata, (4) Abhisamaya, (5) Tathagatanityanityatva, (6)
Ksanika, (7) Nairmanika, (8) Mamsabhaksana, (9) Dharani, and
(10) the tenth chapter which bears no special name.

Throughout the Lankavatara Sitra the speaker is Buddha
himself. The first chapter is addressed to Ravana while the
person spoken to in the remaining nine chapters is Mahamati.
Ravana, King of Lanka, prayed to Buddha for the solution of two
questions, vz., (1) what is the distinction between dharma and
adharma; and (2) how could one pass beyond both dharma and
adharma. Buddha’s answers to these questions form the subject-

“TSH MATA MHTAATE—
qe fafaaararat quray aa yTA |
wat factreare frraurare efter: Wo
(saauadge, chapter on 3teawa) |
The passage referred to here occurs with a little variation twice in the

Lankavatara Sutra (in Chapter II. p. 50, and Chapter X. p. 115 respectively
of the Bengal Asiatic Society’s manuscript) :—

ger fatqararat Surat aaTyTA |

qa Aas Batwargre” frraqurarg Strat: |
(MSIAT Qa, » Gicay, HF ve) |

qer frequratat Qua ATV IAIe |

Faeatwargre faraurary Shar: |i
(AFIAT Ma, lo yea, J ww.) |

The Tibetan versions of the passages run respectively as follows :—
Wa a
AUN dar qr senna yc’ |
BG ZL’ LG'eR' a LAYS |
VOL YAR S35 |
VAG ASS ~
DOR OO Ay QL Aye ||
(Kangyur, Mdo., Vol. V. Leaf 150, A.S. MSS.)
ok Wa i)
BQ’ AUN LQ AE aN’ |
LEASH Fay A HN RAHA' 4 |
VOL SAV ARG SAG |
EVG LNG ~ @ ? =) ee
OU GG Oo as YI OAS | |
(Kangyur, Mdo, Vol. V. Leaf, 253, A.S. MSS.)

“Of things that are discerned by intellect no self-existence ‘can be
ascertained ; therefore they are shown to be inexplicable and essenceless.”

Vol. I, No. 6.] An Analysis of the Lankavatara Sitra. 161
[N. 8.]

matter of the first chapter. Thereafter one hundred and eight
‘questions were raised by Mahamati; Buddha’s answers to these are
treated in the remaining nine chapters.

Some information about the author of the Lankavatara Sutra
may be gathered from the following verses occurring in the 10th
Chapter of the work :—

Arata a agafa: fuat fac: gatufa: |
RaataMtatss ata a facst | faa: |
amas agqua: faatfa a faatae:? |
ataqata agent atadwagga: |

(A.S. MSS. p. 143).

The Tibetan version of the above runs thus :—
ear S aR E55 |
Se URNS SIN
eal,
ACF gaa ANNA ||
WEAR SISTAR SASSY TC |
Ways STL SATS |
STS FTAA |
FAA AATATS Sarl ||
(Kangyur, Mdo, Vol. V., Leaf 292-293, A.S. MSS.)

The above passages may be translated thus :—

“My mother is Vasumati, my father the Brahman named
Prajapati; I belong to the same clan as Katyayana; my name is
Jina, the passionless one, I was born at Campa. Somagupta sprung
from the Lunar race is (in fact) my father and he my grandfather
too.”

1 The orig. is fafste{ which should be facet for the Tibetan equi-
yalent is to 747
BY a5)

2 The meaning of this line ig not clear.

162 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1905.

In the tenth chapter Buddha in a prophetic style predicts
certain future events which help us in determining the approxi-
mate date of the work. Thus he says :—

afa faaa uaa Bat F WTA |

waa: WILAT AAT WHA Atet whseaea | 4

Hat wets YRS aat ASI SITVAL: |

aaa Teta: Wear WAIT: |
(A.S. MSS., Leaf 142.)

The Tibetan version runs thus :—
aA Cage tag |
haenanabias r5 |
ARP TARTAN |
Aap ane ease
SSSA eG
AAA Barres erage |
(Kangyur, Mdo, Vol. V., Leaf 292, A.S. MSS.)

The passage may be translated thus :—

‘‘One hundred years after my Nirvana, Vyasa, the author of
the Mahabharata, will flourish. Then the Pandavas, Kauravas,
Nandas and Mauryyas will arise. The Nandas, Mauryyas, Guptas
and the Mlecchas, the vilest of kings, will flourish im succession.
The Mleccha rule will be followed by tumult of arms and the
tumult will be followed by Kali-yuga. ”

Several non-Buddhistic sects are mentioned thus :—

aim antaat aq fag: aequateaat |
Bwaque feufaar: fafamrafaafaat: |
(A.S. MSS., Leaf 135.)

1 The Sanskrit manuscript reads alate gia which is evidently

‘wrong. The correct reading has been restored from Tibetan.

Vol. I, No. 6.| An Analysis of the Lankavatara Sutra. 163
[N. S.]

“The Samkhyas, Vaisesikas, Nagnas, Vipras and Pasupatas
have taken the extreme views of permanence and non-permanence
and are destitute of the discriminated truth. ”

The views of Kapila and Kanada are specially discussed on
leaf 132.

Not merely in the 10th but in some of the previous chapters
too the Naiyayikas and Tarkikas are specially referred to. Thus
in Chapter II we read :—

Tafa: WA ate ufaata saat: |

(A.S. MSS., Leaf 11.)

The Tibetan version runs thus :—
Sq yeSesS |
SACS TAIL AAAICAT |

‘Tell me how in future times the Naiyayikas will flourish.”

The very first question asked by Mahamati in Chapter IT

La ° ~ g e iv en
ay fe Sad ah He aH: Gaua |

(A.S. MSS. Leaf 11.)
The Tibetan version runs thus :—
Pas TASS TA |
TTS AAA |
(Kangyur, Mdo, Vol. V., Leaf 93, A.S. MSS.)

‘‘ How is ratiocination corrected and how does it proceed ? ”
The following doctrine of the Tarkikasis specially mentioned :—

aE far: wiq afaamas aa: |
(A.S. MSS., Chap. X., Leaf 143.)

The Tibetan version runs thus :—
SNF ATS RET AN ATS |
AAAS SAT SA ||

164 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1905.

“ Whatever is Krtaka (produced) is destructible, this is the

view of the Tarkikas.” bY)
According to the peculiar calculation of the Nepalese Bud-

dhists, the Lankavtara consists of 3,000 verses. So itis stated :—
RIagaATAMatss Beaare fafavewa: | ae
2ifa uma fralageatfara |
Utaifwafas UHATAD ATTAAT |
fate: ave: eatat fratafafa 2aaq |
(A.S. MSS. Leaf 141.)

“T belong to the clan of Katyayana, I am come from the Sud-
dhavasa heaven; I teach men religion leading to the City of Nir-
vana. This religion is an old one. I and other Tathagatas teach
this religion by means of 3,000 Sutras (verses).”

Katyayana to whose clan the author of the Lankavatara be-
longed, seems to have been the same person who composed the
Hindu socio-religious institute called Katyayana Dharma Sitra,
for Katyayana is mentioned along with Yajiavalkya thus :—

qlaiat: Banat aHaen aay a |
(A.S. MSS., Chap. X., Leaf 143.)

The Tibctan version runs thus :—
TPS NASN SSS]
ABV STATS GATT
(A.S. MSS., Kangyur, Mdo, Vol. V., Leaf 293.)

‘“Katyayana is an author of Sitra, so also is Yajiiavalkya.”

1 The Sanskrit manuscript reads FATT | The reading yTWawaq is
restored from Tibetan.

Vol. I, No. 6.] Tibet under her Last Kings. 165
NETS: ||

20. Tibet wnder her Last Kings (1434-—1642 A.D.)—By
Rai Sarat Cuanpra Das, Bahadur, C.1.H.

About eighty years after Tahi Situ Chyan Chub Gyal-tshan’s
annexation of Tsang to the Goverment of Central Tibet, one of the
Governors under the Phagmodu Rulers named Rinping-Norzang, a
native of Tsang, caused a rising of the people against the Phag-
mo-du authorities, and from the year tree-hare of the 7th Cycle,
the Shikha (towns) of Rinptng and Samdub-tse (modern Shiga-tse)
passed under the authority of Kun-zang Don-dub-dorje, the two
sons of Rinptng Norzang. They established their power
over the whole of Tsang in the year 1434, but nominally acknow-
ledged the supremacy of the Phagmodu Chief. From the year
Harth-tiger of the 8th Cycle, the Government of Central Tibet
had to contend with internal dissensions both in the north and

sonth of U for which Mi-wang Nehu-dong-pa, the Ruler of
Phagmodu, removed his residence to Dansa-thil, the seat of the
Phagdu hierarchy. In the year Iron-ox, the son of Kunzang
named Don-yo-dorje, who was also called Rinptng Deba Gar-wa,
inviting the Karma heirarch Choi-tog Gya-tsho of the Shwa-mar

(Red-Cap sect) invaded U with ten thousand troops. He drove
away Miwang Nehu-dong-pa from his capital, and took possession
of it. In this connexion, it is stated, that though the hierarch
of Gahdan had twice tried to turn the tide of victory towards the
Ruler of Nehu-dong-tse by propitiating some spirits yet the Karma-
pa hierarch, his adversary, by superior exorcism made Rinptng-pa
victorious at theend. This heralded the triumph of the Shwa-mar
(Red-Cap Church) over the Yellow-Church. Thereafter, for sup-
pressing the growing power of Sera and Dapting monasteries, two
monasteries of the Red and Black Cap sects of the Karma-pa school
were erected under Rinping-pa’s auspices. This was done with a
view to make Sera and Daptng, the two great Yellow-Church
monasteries, to die a natural death for want of support either from
the State or from the pious. The Karma-pa and Dig-pa sects sent
troops to overpower some of the smaller Yellow-Church in-
stitutions which, thereby, became converted to the Red-Cap Church.
Some of the land endowments of Sera and Daptng were taken
away from them, for which reason the breach between the rival
schools became wide. From the year Harth-ow to that of Harth-
tiger in the 9th Cycle, the Lamas of Sera and Daping were pre-
vented from taking part in the Monlam Chenpo of Lhasa. But
since the year Fire-dog, Miwang Nehu-dong-pa, the Chief of Neiu-
dong-tse recovered his authority to some extent over the province
of U. Again in the year Mire-bird (about 1508) during Gediin
Gyatsho’s residence at Methog Thang of Gyal, the Digong-pa
Lamas brought troops from Kong-po for crushing down the
power of the Yellow Church. When they were about to demolish
the outer Dsong (fort) of Holkha, the Chief Nangso Don-yod of
Dohdah came with his troops for rescuing it. The Digong-pa

166 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {|June, 1905.

Lamas failing to destroy the Dsong, diverted their attention to-
wards Liing Shoi, Hod-na, and other places where they succeeded
in converting eighteen Gelug- -pa (Yellow-Church) institutions into
Red-Cap school. In the year Water-ox the Yellow-Cap Lamas also
sent troops to Kyor-ling and other places under the Kahgyud-pa
authorities. In this manner the Lamas of the different sects
and schools became involved in civil dissensions. During this
period the state of affairs in Tibet resembled the dark days which
had followed the successsion of the apostate Langdarma to the
throne of Tibet.

The Chiefs of Tsang, who held office under the Phagmodu

Rulers of Central Tibet, frequently led their troops to U to harass
the people. They sometimes retired to their own strongholds after
defeat, but often quietly annexed parts of their master’s territories
to their possessions. The Lamas of the Yellow Church struggled
for power and to establish their supremacy over Tibet, in which
act they met with reverses on account of the powerful help which
the Chief of Tsang had given to the Lamas of Shwa-mar sects.

In the year 1564, Tshe-wang Dorje, the chief representative
of the house of Rinpting,! with his son Padma-Karpo held the fort
of Samdub-tse, and having brought the whole of Upper Tsang under
his power, declared himself Tsang-toi Gyalpo, the King of Upper
Tsang. In the year 1569 (Ivon-horse of the 10th Cycle) the autho-
rities of Digong fought with those of the monastery of Tag-ling.
In the year Water-serpent, there was a rebellion at Kyid-Shoi against
the Phagmodu authorities. The Dalai Lama, Gedun Gyatsho, inter-
ceding in the affairs brought upon an agreement between the ruler
and theruled. Again afterwards, in the year T’ree-hog (1574) Rin-
pting-pa brought his troops to Kyid-Shoi for creating disturbances,
but they were compelled to withdraw from there after they had
caused some injury to the people. In the year Iron-serpent (1580)
internal dissensions again raged in Digong. On Dalai Yontan
Gyatsho’s return from Mongolia, the Shwa-mar hierar ch, Nag-wang
Choitag, complimented him with a letter written in verse ; but some
misapprehension having arisen as to its concealed meaning, Rab
Byampa Geleg Lhtndtb and others sent a discourteous reply to it
couched in terms which were interpreted as conveying insult to the
hierarch. This incident, unfortunately, raked up greater bitterness
in the strained relations between the two rival Buddhist Churches
of Tibet.

The King of Upper Tsang, with the help of afew petty
chiefs of the south and north, incited the Na-wa Rong people to
rebellion, in quelling which, Tye resources of the Cecamncnert of
Central Tibet were greatly ‘exhausted. Taking advantage of this
disturbance he asserted his independence.

In the year Tree-serpent heading the troops of the Red and
Black-cap Lamas of the Karma-pa School, he attacked the military

1 Rinpting or Rinchenpufig, a small town in the Tsang Rong district.
It contained a huge image of Maitreya famous under the name of Rong-
Cham-C hen.

Vol. I, No. 6.] Tibet under her Last Kings. 167
[N. S.]

encampment of Deba Kyid-Shoi and killed a large number of
Dingkhors (civil officers) of the Government. On this occasion the
Karma-pa Lamas became exultant and made a metrical rejoinder to
the Dalai lama’s reply by placing their letter before the
image of Buddha in the Cathedral of Lhasa. This step, which was
meant to be an appeal to show that the Shwa-mar hierarch’s wel-
come to the Dalai Lama was sincere, produced disastrous effects.
It induced the Yellow-Cap Lamas to invite the help of the Mong-
olian hordes. About the time that Sonam Namgyal was Deba
of Kyi-Shoi, several thousands of Tartar horsemen had already
come to Tibet and encamped in the neighbourhood of Lhasa. In
the year Ivon-dragon (1609) the Karma hierarch named Phun-
tshog Namgyal, with his son Karma Tan Kyong Wang-po, led the

Tsang army to U, but finding that the Mongol horsemen, that had
come to protect the Yellow Church, were waiting for an action,
out of fear they quietly withdrew. Im the year Water-mouse
(1611) he brought the whole of Tsang including Gyal-Khar-tse
(modern Gyang-tse) and Byang (northernmost province of Tsang)
under his power, and became known as Tsang Gyal, 7.e:, King of
Tsang. This was the first instance in which a Karma hierarch
had marched at the head of a victorious army, having betaken
himself to worldly life, and become lord temporal and spiritual.

e . . A .
Later on, again invading U with the Tsang army, he took
possession of Neku Dong and all the lands, and some of the smaller

monasteries of U. In the seventh month of the year Harth-hare
(1617), resolving to entirely demolish the Yellow-Cap Church he
beseiged Sera and Dapting and killed many thousand monks.
He expelled the Yellow-Cap Lamas from Lhasa. In their dis-
comfiture the Lamas took shelter at Tag-ling. In the year 1619,
that is, shortly after the humiliation of the Yellow-Cap Church
and its patron Miwang Neu Dong-pa, the Mongolian army
arrived and met the Tsang army first at Kyang-thang-gang near
Lhasa, and ultimately at Tsang-Gyadthang-gang and completely
routed them. In the seige of Lhasa, which followed this success of
the friends of the Yellow-Church, about 100,000 Tsang men were
captured. They all would have been killed had not the Panchen
Rinpoche (Tashi Lama of Tsang) timely interceded and procured
their release. The monasteries of Sang-fag Khar and others,
besides many Lamas of the Yellow Church that had been taken
over to the Red-Cap Church, were restored in 1620 to the Yellow-
Church, which got back its lost territorial endowments as well. The
king of Tsang and his friend the valiant Karma hierarch failing in
their military enterprize in Tibet, sought for help from the Mongo-
lian Chiefs who were devoted to the Red-Cap Church. It took
them nearly twenty years to consolidate their power in Tibet after
the retirement of the Mongolian hordes from Tibet. When they
had again grown powerful they began persecuting the Yellow-
Church with greater animosity than before.

168 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1905.

21. Note on a Decomposition Product of a Peculiar Variety of
Bundelkhand Gneiss.—By C. A. Strpurrad, B.A., B.Se., LCS.

During the construction of the Ken Canal, my attention was
called by the Executive Engineer in charge of the work, to a
peculiar soft, white, clayey material found in the low hill on and
around which the village of Deora-Bhapatptr in the Ajaigarh
State is built. The hill is one of the low gneissic hills charac-
teristic of this part of Bundelkhand (vide Medlicott and Bland-
ford’s ‘Geology of India, Volume I, page 11, et. seg.); but
appears to be of a somewhat unusual variety of gneiss and one
more than usually liable to decomposition. At several places on
the sides of this hill, all about half-way up, small pits have been
dug into it, and a white clayey material found, which is locally
used as “‘ white wash.” The same material has been found about
15 miles south of this in the course of excavating a deep cutting
(up to 50 feet deep) for the canal. Both positions are within three
or four miles of the head works of the canal, and some ten miles
west by south of Ajaigarh town; they are about eight miles north-
west from the Vindhyan scarp.

I accordingly obtained some samples and sent them to my
brother, Dr. O. J. Silberrad, Ph.D., Research Chemist to the War
Office Explosives Committee, who examined them, and through the
kindness of a friend had them tested at a pottery as regards the
suitability of the clay for the manufacture of earthenware or
other pottery. To them I am indebted for all the following in-
formation :—-

The report is subjoined. Beside the figures showing the re-
sults of the chemical analysis, I have added those of Pinite as
given in Dana’s Mineralogy, which appears to be a somewhat
similar material. The occurrence of Titanic Acid in the clay is,
however, of interest.

““ Report on Clay from Deora-Bhapatpir.
Analysis of clay is as follows :—

Clay from
Deora-Bhapatpur. Pinite.

Silica :e, SiO, 44°40°/, 49°11
Alumina sank: AO. 30°47 29-00
Lime at CaO ‘61 ‘51
Magnesia a MgO 2°89 1:07
Ferric Oxide 7d epeme@s 6°17 913
Potash call K,O 8:05 6:84
Soda Ai NaO, ot ‘42
Titanic Acid ae TiO, 0-54: He
Combined water and ......

organic matter... 6:14 : 4-01
Moisture i eee 1:10
Phosphoric Acid ... P.O, 091

Ay eee 100:461 100-09

Vol.-I, No. 6.] Note on Bundelkhand Gneiss, 169
PNG S|

The clay was tested for its capacity of forming a china or
earthenware in the following manner :—

1. About 20 grams of the dry clay was mixed with sufficient
water to give a plastic clay, which was moulded into the form of a
triangular pyramid. This was dried at 100°, then baked for 33
hours in a gas mufile, at a temperature of 890°. The resulting
mass was pink in colour, easily broken, possessed httle cohesion,
was soft and friable.

2. Another portion of the clay was mixed with calcium car-
bonate, in proportion to give a mixture containing 2°/, added cal-
cium carbonate (196 grams clay, 4 grams CaCO,). This was
moistened, kneaded, and the resulting plastic clay formed into a
pyramid as before. This was dried at 100°, and heated in a blast
muflle, together with the pyramid used in the first experiment
(made from clay alone). Pyramids charged into cold muffle and
muffle it at 9-10 a.m., on 8th November, 1904.

Temperature at 11-10 a.m. ah 1155°
55° ,, 12 noon a 940°
5 ,, 12-30 P.M. Are 1150°
‘5 5» IPM. se 1300°

Heating was then discontinued as one of the pyramids was
seen to be sinking, the result of incipient fusion. The muffle was
turned out at 1lp.m. Pyramids drawn at 2-15 p.m., and broken.

Clay alone.—Pyramid had sunk considerably. Was smooth,
glazed, dirty brown on the outside. The fracture was highly

orous and cindery. Heated to a temperature as high as this
(1300°), the clay would not be of any use as earthenware.

Clay + 2,/° CaCO,;.—The surface of the pyramid was
smoother and more highly glazed than that of pyramid just
described, and the mass had sunk more, indicating that the clay
mixed with 2,/° CaCO, is more fusible than the clay alone. The
colour of the exterior was dark brown. A fracture showed a
porous, spongy layer under the surface, then a more compact, blue-
black central mass. Useless as earthenware.

3. The earth was made into a plastic clay as before, without
any admixture (except water) and formed into a pyramid, and a
small dish. These were dried at 100°, charged into cold muffle,
and muffle lit at 9-15 a.m., on 9th November, 1904.

Temperature at 11 a.m, 200 1030°
44 TESTO) + Fg 930°
“p 11-50 _,, es 1050°
“ 12-25 P.M. 500 1060°
‘ i ae rap 10905
5, 1-30 ,, we 1130°
45 2-15 .,, as 980°
09 3 Aap EL Ms 950°
s 3-30 ,, 60 1130°

9 4-15 ,, fein , 1070°

170 Journal of the Asiutic Society of Bengal. [June, 1905.

Temperature at 5 A.M. hs 1090°
5-25 ,, 500 1050°

Muffle turned out at 5-30 p.m. Pieces drawn at 9 a.m. on JO0th
November, 1904. They had not altered in shape, and showed
no signs of fusion, ‘They were glazed on the surface, dark brown
in colour. Were dense and hard, giving a metallic ring when
struck. The fracture showed the pieces to be solid, not porous
at all,and was somewhat glassy. The pieces were strong and
required a sharp blow to break them.

4, Pyramids were made in the manner previously described,
containing respectively 5°/, CaCO, and 10°/, CaCO, (19 grams
clay +1 gram CaCO,, and 18 grams clay + grams CaCO,). They
were dried at 100°, charged into cold mufile, and muffle ht at
9-20 a.m., 9th November, 1904.

99

Temperature at 1] A.M. ey, 930°
‘6 IE con) WY
f TaD 7 9103
i 12-25 P.M. oe 920°
99 1 9 930°
cs 1-30, soo | HO”
ba es) sce = 940m
a 3 , be = Om
BOOM, tome 1oO0R
is Aaa en soo OU”
» o 7 se OOK
cf 5-25, Eee COOR

Muffle turned out at 5-30 p.m. Pieces drawn at 9 A.M.,
10th November, 1904.

Identical results were given by both pyramids. They were
pink, not glazed, of only moderate hardness, easily broken, giving
a dull fracture. Apparently not strongly enough heated to give
a satisfactory earthenware.

The two pyramids were recharged into cold muffle, and
muffle hit, at 9-10 a.m., 10th November, 1904. The temperatures
were taken with a thermo-couple (all the previous temperatures
having been taken in this way) andalso with the Wanner Optical
pyrometer. The corresponding readings are given below.

Thermo-couple. Wanner-Pyrometer.
Temperature at 11 a.m. «.. 1040° oes
29 11-30 am. ... 970° BE
9 12 noon are) LOQOT=I GO: 1087°
Thermo-couple. Wanner-Pyrometer.
Temperature at 12-30 p.w. ... 1110°-1130° 1132°
9 1 PM. ... 1090°-1100° 1108°

” 2-15 p.m. ... 1040°-1050° 1052°

Vol. I, No. 6.] Note on Bundelkhand Geiss. 171
ENE S« |

When two thermo-couple temperatures are given for the same
time, they refer to different points in the mufile.

Mufile turned ont at 2-20 p.m. Pieces drawn at 53 P.M.

Pyramid with 5°/, CaCO;—This was a dark, coloured, hard,
dense mass, glazed on the surface though not so much as the
pyramid made from the clay alone, and somewhat lighter in
colour. No change of shape could be detected, and there were no
signs of fusion. The fracture was glassy in parts, the rest being
dull and stony, and was blue to brownish-black.

Pyramid with 10°/, CaCO;.—This was much lighter in colour
than the two previous pieces, was light brown, dull, not glazed,
Was not so hard or dense as the Pyramid with 5°/, CaCO,. The
piece was easily broken, giving a dull, sandy fracture, and show-
ing the interior to be fairly compact. ‘The colour of the fracture
was a brownish pink. The pyramid had not sunk at all, and
showed no signs of fusion.

The best results as regards the making of earthenware ap-
pear to be given by employing the clay alone, without any ad-
mixture of lime. ‘The addition of lime in small proportions re-
duces the melting point. The hardness and density of the ware
depend on the temperature to which it has been heated. If that
temperature has been too high, the upper parts of the pieces are
porous and cindery, this probably being due to the liquation of a
fusible silicate. The colour of the ware is necessarily dark,
owing to the high percentage of oxide of iron in the clay.

It does not appear to be possible to obtain good earthenware
from the clay. Hxperiment III gave the best pieces.

The clay is evidently not Fuller’s earth.

When mixed with water, with, or without additional lime, a
highly plastic clay is obtained.”

In addition to the experiments recorded in the above report,
the clay was fired in an ordinary earthenware kiln, but it refused
to bind and simply dried to a porous friable mass differing very
little from the product obtained by merely moistening it and let-
ting it dry at an ordinary temperature. Heated in an electric
furnace to a temperature of about 2900°C the clay melted to fluid
which could be easily poured or cast.

From the foregoing it will be seen that the clay is little like-
ly to be of any use except that to which the villagers have put it
from time immemorial, 7.e., for whitewashing their houses.

Vol. I, No. 7.]. Oriental Snakes in the Indian Musewm. 173
[N. 8.]

22. Additions to the Collection of Oriental Snakes in the Indian
Museum.—Part 2.—Specimens from the Andamans and Nico-
bars—By Nenson Annanpate, B.A., D.Sc., Deputy Superin-
tendent of the Indian Musewm.

All the snakes recorded or described in this communication are
fromthe Andamans or the Nicobars. With one exception, they have
been collected and presented to the Museum either by Major A. R.
Anderson, I.M.S., or by Mr. C. G. Rogers. The one exception is
the type of a new Sea-Snake, which was taken by the Indian
Marine Survey. Mr. G. A. Boulenger has kindly examined several
of the other specimens. [am much indebted to Major Anderson
for several letters on the snakes of the islands. I have added a
revised list of the species known to occur in the two archipelagoes
or represented from them in the Indian Museum, having re-examined
the specimens recorded by Mr. W. L. Sclater in all cases in which
there was any doubt.

TYPHLOPID Ai.
TYPHLOPS BRAMINUS (Daud,)

This is evidently the common species in the Andamans, or at
any rate in the neighbourhood of Port Blair. Major Anderson has
lately sent us twenty-four very dark specimens from that station.

The type of T. andamanensis still remains unique, if it is in
existence. I have notbeen able tu trace its history. The Museum

does not possess examples of J. oatesvi, described from the Cocos
group.

COLUBRID 2.
Lycopon avuticus (Linn. )

We have lately received several specimens of this common
Indian species both from the Andamans and the Nicobars. One
from the Nicobars belongs to var. EH of Boulenger’s ‘“ Catalogue ; ”
those from the Andamans to var. C, a common form in Ceylon.

OLIGopDON woopmasont (Scel.)

Simotes woodmasoni, Sclater, J.A.8.B., (2) LX, p. 235; List.
Snakes, p. 24.

A young specimen, lately received from Major Anderson, has
been submitted to Mr. Boulenger, who regards it as belonging to
the genus Oligodon. I have compared it with Mr. Sclater’s types,
with which it is identical. Mr. Boulenger notes that it is nearly
related to O. trilineatus, a Malayan species,

COLUBER MELANURUS, Schleg.

A specimen from the Andamans has the entire dorsal surface
of the head and body of an almost uniform dark plumbaceous

174 Journal of the Asiatic Soctety of Bengal. | July, 1905.

erey. The markings on the side of the head and on the neck are,
however, quite distinct, and the individual is otherwise normal.
We have in the Museum a similar specimen from Borneo.

DENDROPHIS pictus (Gmel.) ©

A specimen has been sent by Mr. Rogers from Henry Law-
rence Island, Andamans. ‘he species appears to be common all
over the Andamans and Nicobars. Some of the Andaman speci-
mens, are very dark in colour, but this character does not seem
to be constant.

TROPIDONOTUS PISCATOR (Schneid. )

We have lately received a specimen from the South Anda-
mans, while we had already a number from several localities in the
archipelago. I have not been able to find any record of the
occurrence of this common Indian species in the Nicobars.

TROPIDONOTUS NICOBARENSIS, Scl.

T. nicobaricus Sclater, J.A.S.B., UX (2), 1891, pp. 231, 250.

T. nicobarensis, ¢d., zbd, p. 241.

T. nicobariensis, Boulenger, Cat. Snakes; p. 192.

The type of this species stiJl remains unique. I have examin-
ed it very carefully, dissecting out the maxillary on one side, and
have no doubt that Mr. Selater was right as to its generic identifica-
tion. The maxillary teeth, 24 in number, increase shghtly from
before backwards, and show no signs of being stunted posteriorly ;
but the division of the anal plate appears to me to have been trau-
matic. If the species is identical with Cope’s Prymnomiodon, the
latter must have been founded on an individual injured or abnormal
as to its dentition. This seems possible, as the type was otherwise
deficient.

}DIPSADOMORPHUS CEYLONENSIS, Gthr.

Mr. Rogers has presented two specimens from the South
Andamans. The snakes from Assam and the Andamans identi-
fied by Mr. Sclater as Dipsas fusca, are young individuals of this
species.

DIstiRA ANDAMANICA, Sp. nov.

Head moderate, hardly separated from the neck ; the greatest
depth of the latter half that of the body; body deep, strongly
compressed ; tail short. Rostral much broader than deep; nasals
shorter than frontal, three times as long as the suture between the
prefrontals ; frontal not much longer than broad, shorter than dis-
tance from rostral, much shorter than parietals; one preocular,
very large; 3 postoculars; no loreal; 2 large, superimposed
anterior temperals; 7 upper labials, 3rd and 4th entering eye ;
two pairs of sub-equal chin shields, the posterior pair separated

Vol. I, No. 7.] Oriental Snakes in the Indian Musewm. 175
LN. 8.]

from one another by two rows of scales. Head scales smooth for
the most part, but with a few minute, irregularly placed pits. Hyes
large and prominent. Body scalesimbricate, but feebly so or not at
all posteriorly, with a very short keel or a tubercle ; 31 scales round
neck, 39 round body ; ventrals distinct, bituberculate, with a cen-
tral longitudinal groove, occasionally divided, 238 (in the type) in
number. Colowr—pale-yellow on sides and belly, with about 40
large, black rhomboidal marks on the dorsal surface. These are not
im contact either above or below, reaching about half way down the
body on the neck and tail and almost to the ventral margin of the
tail. Throat and chin darker yellow, the former feebly irrorated
with black. Dorsal surface of the head pale-green as far backwards
as the posterior border of the preefrontals and of the 2nd supraocu-
lar, black posteriorly,

Measurements of type—

Total length ie ... 30) inches.
Length of tail... Oe os

A single female from the Andamans. Judging from its bold
coloration, this specimen is immature. In many respects the spe-
cies resembles Hnhydris curtus, from vhich it may be distinguished
superficially by the possession of unbroken parietals and distinct
chin shields. It has six grooved teeth posterior to the large poison
fangs in each maxilla. Its nearest ally is D. lapimidordes. ;

SNAKES OF THE ANDAMANS AND NICOBARS,

NaME OF SNAKE. Andamans.| Nicobars.

Typhlops braminus§|| (Dand.)
Typhlops oatesii,* Bler. ...

m andamanensis,* Stol. Po
Python reticulatus,§|| Schneid.

Lycodon aulicus§}|| (Linn.) ..
Polydontophis sagittarius$|| (Cant.)
f bistrigatus|| (Gthr.)

Ablabes nicobarensis,* Stol.
Oligodon sublineatus, D. & B.

» woodmasoni* (Scl,)
Zamenis mucosus§|| (Linn.)
Coluber porphyraceus, §|| Cant,
melanurus§|| (Schleg.)

3 oxycephalusg,§|| Boie
Dendrophis pictus§|| (Gmel.)
Tropidonotus stolatus§|| (Linn.)
piscator§ || (Schneid.)

E, nicobarensis,* Scl.
Chrysydrus granulatus §|| (Schneid).
Dipsadomorphus hexagonatus (Blyth) ...

lexelexixx

B
v

|
f] SS SS eS Se Oe Oe

”

”

3 $2 |] Ss |) S& 3S Re oe BS os. |
fl Se {] Se oe 8 & |

i

176 Jowrnal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [ July, 1905,

NAME OF SNAKE. Andamans.| Nicobars.

|

Dipsadomorphus ceylonensis,||! Gthr. ... a x
Chrysopelea ornata§|i2 (Shaw) ake ... |(Narcondam)
Cerberus rhynchops§|| (Schneid.) 34! ae x
Fordonialeucobalia §|| (Schleg.) ne
Bungarus ceruleus §|| (Schneid.)
Naia tripudians,§|| Merr.

,, bungarus,§|| Schleg. ...
Platurus colubrinus§|| (Schneid.)
Distira andamanica,* Annand.
Hydrus platurus§}|| (Linn. )
Amblycephalus monticola|| (Cant, ) ae
Lachesis cantoris* (Blyth)... 505
eramineuss§|| (Shaw)
purpureomaculatus§|| (Gray)

) ee Se

[Be Xie ca]

x x X |

”

DOS Xeno ah ea

39

In the above list, the names of those snakes which are not
represented in the Indian Museum by specimens either from the
Andamans or from the Nicobars are printed in italics. In the
first column a * indicates that a species is peculiar to the Andamans,
the Nicobars or both archipelagoes ; a § that it has been recorded
from the Malay Peninsula south of the Isthmus of Kra; a || that
it is known from Assam or Burma. In the other columns, a x
shows that a species is known to occur, a — that specimens have
not been taken.

Tt will be seen from this list that the Ophidian fauna of the
islands has close affinities with that of Burma and Malaya, while
there is possibly a less obvious connection with Ceylon. So far
as we know, three species are peculiar to the Andamans, two to
the Nicobars, and two to the Andamans and Nicobars together ; but
our knowledge is still extremely limited, especially as regards the
smaller snakes of the Nicobars.

1 Dipsas fusca (Gray) apud Sclater, List Snakes, p. 47.
2 Major Anderson has taken a specimen (var. A) on Narcondam.

SO Ais ie a OS EO EN IO

Vol. I, No. 8.] History of Nydyasastra. 177
[ENETS,|

23. History of Ny@yasdstra from Japanese Sources.—By
-MAHAMAHOPADHYAYA HarAPRASAD SHASTRI.

The bibliography of Nyayasastra of the Orthodox Hindus is a
yery short one. It consists of :—

(1) The Sitras attributed to Gautama or Akgapada.
(2) Bhasya attributed to Vatsyayana.

(3) Vartika by Uddyotakara.

(4) Tatparyatika by Vacaspati.

(5) Parisuddhi by Udayana.

But the bibliography of the Buddhist Nyayasastra, as known
in China and Japan, is a long lst. It attributes the first inception
of the Nyayasastra to Shok-mok or Mok-shok which, transliterat-
ed into Sanskrit would be Aksapada.

The second author who treated of Nyaya is said to be Buddha
himself. The third is Ryuju, who is said to have preached the
Mahayana doctrines of Buddhism with great success. His Hoh-
ben-shin-ron is one of the polemical works against heretics. Itcon-
tains one volume on logic. The fourth is Mirok (Maitreya).
The fifth Muchak (Asanga), Mirok’s disciple. Muchak’s younger
brother Seish (Vasubandhu) wrote three books on Logic—Ronki,
Ron-shi-ki, and Ron-shin. After Vasubandhu, came Maha Din-
naga and his disciple Sankarasvami, whose works were translated
into Chinese, by the great Hienth Sang. Huienth Sang had two
great disciples—Kwei-ke in China, and Doh-Soh in Japan.
Kwei-ke’s “‘ Great commentary ” is the standard work on Nyaya in
China and Doh-Soh is the first promulgator of Buddhist doctrines
and Nyaya Sastra in Japan. Since then there had been many dis-
tinguished teachers of Nyaya both in China and in Japan, and up
to the present day Din-naga has a firm hold on the learned people
both in China and Japan. The EHuropean system of logic is
a very recent introduction in Japan, where Din-naga is still
studied.

In the two paragraphs given above, I have tried to give the
bibliography of Brahmanic and Buddhistic logic of ancient India.
Both attribute the invention of the science to one person, namely,
Aksapada. ‘The only clue given about this personage’s chronology
is that it was before Buddha. But no clue of his time can be
found in Brahminical works. Mr. Justice Pargiter tells me that
there is no such person as Aksapada mentioned in the Mahabha-
rata, which was in a nascent condition about the time of Buddha’s
birth, The Chinese attribute to him two things, namely, “ Nine
Reasons” and ‘‘ Fourteen Fallacies,” while the Hindus attribute to
him the entire body of Sitras divided into five Adhyayas, ten
lectures, eighty-four topics, five hundred and twenty-eight sitras,
seventeen hundred and ninety-six words, eight thousand three
hundred and eighty-five letters. It maybe said, in passing, that
the Chinese people are doubtful about the ‘ Nine-Reasons”’ being
attributed to Akgapada. It may also be remarked that in the

178 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. { August, 1905.

whole body of Sitras, there is nothing which corresponds to the
“Nine Reasons” and ‘“ Fourteen Fallacies,’ which, we know
from Chinese sources, and which even Din-naga is said to have
attributed to Soc-mock. An examination of the “ Nine Reasons”
reveals the fact, that it is historically prior to the invention of
syllogism. It means an effort of the human mind to exhaust
all possible forms of the relation between, whatis now called the
Major Term and the Middle Term of a syllogism. And such
an examination must precede the formulation of syllogism. In
what light the later writers have seen this examination, and
what conclusions may be drawn from it, need not trouble us
here. Suffice it for a historical student to know, that this early
effort is attributed to Soc-mock, universally known as the first
writer on Nyaya. Thetheory of “Fourteen Fallacies” too, in
their crude and undeveloped shape, shows signs of greater
antiquity than the Nyaya Sitras.

These two theories of Aksapada seem to have been the com-
mon property of Indian pandits before Buddha’s time, as Buddha
did not scruple to take advantage of these.

The “ Nyaya Siitras,” as we have them, seems to be a much
later production, Haribhadra, a Jain scholar of the 6th Century
A.D., says that it isa sectarian work; that the sect, which either
composed it or adhered to it, was a Saiva sect. Now a Saiva or
Mahesvar sect existed long before Buddha. Soc-mock and the
eighteen gurus of the sect, Nakulisha and others, might have be-
longed to this sect. That the Sitras were not composed by
Akgsapida appears to be almost certain. But it bears his name.
How to explain this fact ? The only explanation is that it belonged
to that sect, of which he was thought to be one of the earliest
representatives. I am not sure if the work “ Nyayasitra”’ had
not gone through several redactions before it assumed its present
shape. But it is pretty sure that from the time of Soc-mock to the
period when the Nyayasttras were reduced to their present form,
India was full of polemical writings, much of which has perished.

Though we know nothing from Brahmanical sources of the
process of the development of Nyaya, we know some stages of this
development from the Buddhists. Nagarjuna and Maitreya wrote
on Nyaya. In fact one of the volumes, I believe, the fifteenth of the
great polemical work by Nagarjuna on Upayakausalya is devoted
to the exposition of Nyaya. Maitreya, Asanga and Vasubandhu
—all wrote on Nyadya. Then came the great Din-naga, the dis-
ciple of Asanga, whom the Japanese place between 410 to 500 A.D.,
and Kern between 520 and 600.

But in the meanwhile on the Brahminical side the Sitra has
been reduced to its present shape and a Bhasya has been composed
when, nobody can say. If am permitted to hazard a conjecture,
both the Sttra and Bhashya came after the development of the
Mahayana School, i.e., both came after Nagarjuna and Aryadeva,
say in the 2nd Century A.D. The Bhasyakara,- Vatsyayana,
though he does not even mention the Buddhists or even any Bud-
dhist writers, pointedly refutes all the Mahayanists doctrines of

Vol. I, No. 8.] History of NyayaSastra. 179

EVES. |
Transitoriness, of Void, of Individuality, and so on. Savara, the
Bhasyakara of Mimansa, was liberal enough to speak of refuting
the Mahayanic theory that the whole is merely a collection of
parts and not in any way different from them. But Vatsayana is
not so liberal. He would not name the Buddhists. There is
another Vatsyayana, however, who flourished about this time. He
may be identical with or a relation of, or at least, have be-
longed to the same gotra with the Nyaya Bhasyakara,” on the
supposition that families and clans rise into importance under one
political circumstance and then disappear from history, both Vat-
sayanas may be said to have belonged to the same epoch. That
Vatsyayana is the celebrated writer on Hratics. He mentions some
scandals about the Satavahanas who flourished by the middle of
the 2nd Century A.D. And the geographical information gleaned
from his book cannot refer to a period later than the rise of the
Gupta family.

We glean one historical information from the Brahmanical
sources, namely, that Din-naga severely criticised the Bhasyakara
Vatsyayana, and that the Vartikakara, who comments upon the
Bhasya, defends Vatsyayana’s work against Din-naga.

The modern Hindu idea is that the Buddhists believed in two
of the pramanas only, namely, Pratyaksa and anumana, 7.e., per-
ception and inference. But this is not a fact, so far as early
Buddhism and even early Mahayanism are concerned. For we know
distinctly from Chinese and Japanese sources that Analogy and
Authority were great polemical instruments in the hands of the
early Buddhists, 7z.e., that all early Buddhists from Buddha to
Vasubandhu were indebted to Aksapada for their pramaras or
polemical instruments of right knowledge. Maitreya discarded
Analogy, and Din-naga discarded Authority, and made Nyaya pure
logic, in the English sense of the term......_.

The followers of Aksapada are sometimes called Yogins, and
Yaugas, and the Buddhist tradition is that Mirock (Maitreya) in-
troduced Yoga in the system of discriminating true knowledge
from false (7.e., the system of Aksapadda), some form of Yoga.
And we find that at the second lecture, fourth chapter, of the Nyaya
Sitras, there is a long section devoted to Yoga, and that Yoga is of
a peculiar character. How the section on Yoga was adopted into
the Nyayasastra, it is is difficult to say, because Yoga does not be-
long to the sixteen topics which Aksapada, in the first stitra, pro-
mises to expatiate upon. Whether properly or improperly intro-
duced, it forms a part of Hindu Nyayasastra and also of Buddhist
Nyayaésastra. The Buddhists say that Mirok introduced it, but
the Hindus cannot say who introduced it.

I reserve the result of my examination of the Nyayasitras
for the second instalment of this paper; and I conclude this in-
stalment with the remark that though Din-naga and the Buddhist
system of Nyayasastra is almost completely lost in India, so
much so, that the discovery of a Tibetan translation of one of Din-
naga’s works, was regarded by scholars as a matter of congratula-
tion, it is still studied and commented upon in China, Japan, Corea,

180 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [August, 1909.

and Mongolia. In Japan only, it has a rival in the Huropean
system. But I have been assured that the rivalry has only
strengthened the position of the Hindu system. While the colleges
study the European system, the monasteries study the ancient

system with great zeal.

en ES a ee oot

INDEX SLIP.

ZOOLOGY.
ANNANDALE, Nextson.—Additions to the Collection cf Oriental
Snakes in the Indian Museum. Part 3. (With 3 figures)
Jour. and Proc. As. Soc. Bengal, Vol. I, No. 8, 1905, pp.

208-214.

TYPHLOPIDA,
Typhlops kapaladua, n. sp. from Malay Archipelago.

Annandale, N., pp. 208-209.
Typhlops acutus, habits of, pp. 209.

CoLUBRIDa.

Dryocalamus tristrgatus, from Malay Archipelago.
Annandale, N., p, 210.

Ablabes gilgiticus, n. sp. from Gilgit,
210-211.

Dipsadoides, n. gen., Annandale, N., pp. 212-213.

Dipsadoides decipiens, n. sp. from Malay Archipelago.
Annandale, N., p. 213. ae

Annandale, N., pp.

Vol. I, No. 8.] ‘The People of Mungeli Tahsil. 181
[N. 8.]

24. Notes concerning the People of Mungelc Tahsil, Bilaspore District.
—By Rev. E. M. Gorvon (continued from the Journal of the
Asiatic Society of Bengal, Vol. UX XIII. Part 3, No. 1, 1904).
[With one plate.] Communicated by the Anthropological
Secretary.

B. 38. The Measuring of Grain.—li is a never-failing practice
when a man stops measuring for him to throw a handful of grain
back into the measure. On innumerable occasions, for many
years, I have seen grain being measured and not once has this act
been omitted or forgotten. It is considered lucky for the measure
to be never empty. Much the same idea probably underlies the
practice of never sweeping out the granary. ‘I'his would be consi-
dered tantamount to sweeping out prosperity.

39. Sowing Mango Seeds.—There is a prejudice against the
sowing of seeds from mangoes which have been eaten. The
fruit of trees grown from such seeds would be considered impure.
They would be called ghutta, 2.e, false or impure. This is an ad-
jective applied to food left over on one’s plate after eating.

40. Respect paid to Cattle which have died.—I once noticed a
few clods of earth placed on the carcass of a cow which was lying
on the outskirts of the village. On inquiring as to why those
clods were placed there, I was told that the owner of ‘a beast of
burden” or other domesticated animal that has died will with
due respect place a few of clods of earth on the carcass and consider
that this act has taken the place of a formal burial. The car-
cass is then taken by the leather workers, who remove the hide,
or it is thrown away at a distance to be devoured by vultures.

41. Granaries causing Dumbness.—I was once questioning a
father regarding his child and remarked that it was late in speak-
ing. His reply was that the child had been placed on a granary,
and this was assigned as the reason for the delay in its acquiring
the power of speech.

42. The Cause of prolonged Pregnancy.—A. woman came to the
Mission Hospital in Mungeli, and stated that for eleven months
she had been pregnant and yet there were no signs of the ap-
proach of the expected event. In conversation the doctor learnt
that there is a belief amongst the women that if one who is preg-
nant should step across a string by which a horse is tied, her
term of pregnancy will be prolonged and she will take the term
required by a mare before delivery. In order to remove the evil
consequences of having crossed the rope of a horse, the woman in
question must take a quantity of grain in her s@vi and present
the grain to the horse which has affected her. The horse having
eaten of the grain she will be relieved of the malign influence.

43. Wedding the Fields.—There is a practice in connection
with the sowing of fields, which I mention because of the desire of
folklorists to have on record every insignificant item which is
apparently of no consequence to the layman and yet may be
fraught with much meaning to the specialist. After sowing the
cold-weather crops, such as wheat, gram, etc., it is customary to

182 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [August, 1905,

take the plough around the field and sow in a circular form in
several rows. This may be for the purpose of covering the ground
which had not been sown; but it is interesting to note that the
farmers call this final sowing bihana, to wed or marry. Going
around the field in a circle may be associated with the circumven-
tion of the marriage pcle.

44, The Milk Woman on the Piough.—In sowing the cold-
weather crops, the plough invariably has a mass of damp earth
placed on it at the point where the handle of the plough meets the
tongue. This is said to assist the plough to go deep down into
the soil. But why should it be called the “ milk woman ”’—the
Rautain? The farmers are always greatly amused when I ask
them why they call the lump of earth the Rautain; the term is so
familiar to them that they have never asked themselves the ques-
tion as to where the connection comes in with the “‘ milk woman.”

45. A Possible Haplanation of the Preceding.—Since writing
the two preceding notes I have been reading Hiawatha. In the
section entitled ‘“‘ Blessing the Cornfields,”’ I find the following
lines. These lines are given without note or comment and the
reader must judge for himself as to whether there is any connection!
between the practice they refer to and the practices described in
notes 43 and 44.

‘Once when all the maize was planted,
‘“‘ Hiawatha wise and thoughtful,

‘“‘ Spake and said to Minnehaha,

“To his wife the Laughing Water.

“‘' You shall bless to-night the cornfields,
“ Draw a magic circle round them.

“To protect them from destruction

“ Blast of mildew, blight of insect.

“Tn the night when all is silence,

“Tn the night, when all is darkness,
‘Rise up from your bed in silence

‘““ Lay aside your garments wholly

‘“‘ Walk around the fields you planted
‘“‘Round the borders of the cornfields

‘“‘ Covered by your tresses only.

‘““Robed with darkness as a garment

‘““ From her bed rose Laughing Water.

‘“‘ Laid aside her garments wholly,

“And with darkness clothed and guarded
“ Unashamed and unaffrighted, '

‘Drew the sacred magic circle,

“Of her footprints round the cornfields.”

In these lines, then, we find definite reference to a nude
woman going around the borders of the cornfields for the purpose
of protecting them from injury. In my notes Nos. 43 and 44, it
is stated that a plough with a lump of earth called “ the milk
woman” is taken around the fields several times after they are

1 [See Frazer, The Golden Bough, 2nd ed., vol. 1I, chap, I1I,—Ed.]

Vol. I, No. 8.] The People of Mungeli Tahsii. 183
NES.

sown, and this making of a circle around the field is called
. pcuding the fields.” Is there a connection in these two prac-
tices !

46. Binding the Rain.—Mr. Crooke, in his Folklore of North-
erm India, tells of various devices for binding the rainfall. In
this district there is the belief that certain persons have the
power to cause the rain to cease. It is said that the merchant
when he has stored away large quantities of grain to be sold at a
profit, will gather some rain from the eaves of the house in an
earthen vessel, and this vessel filled with rain-water he will bury
under the grinding mill. The consequence is that from that time
forward the thunder will be heard rumbling in the distance like
the grinding of a flour-mill, but there will be no more rain. I
think it is said that the rain must be gathered from the eaves
of a house at the Pora Festival.

47. Counting and keeping Records.—The method of enu-
meration followed by the most ignorant people of the district is
that of counting by fives. For instance, if a man is counting
fruit, he lays aside five which make one ganda. Four groups
of five make one kori, and five groups of kories make one hun-
dred. According to Bates’ Hindi Dictionary, a ganda means four,
in this district, however, it invariably means five. The great maj-
ority of the people in the district cannot count further than ten.
The usual way to state high numbers is in koris or twenties—
160 rupees is eight kories, and so on. Intermediate numbers are
expressed as follows: 46=six over two kories; 115=five less six
kories, and so on. The grain measures most in use are also on
the same principle. Twenty kaids make one khandt, and twenty
khandies make one gard. When grain is being measured at the
threshing floor, the record is kept by making one small pile of
grain (a handful in quantity) for every khandi. When grain
is given out to the labourers from the granary, the record is
made on the earthen wall of the granary in cow-dung,—one stroke
of the finger dipped in cow-dung means one ata, when twenty
strokes have been made they are crossed out and a cipher takes
their place and the perpendicular strokes start again from one to
twenty.

48, Some Agricultural Practices—(1) With regard to the
sowing of linseed, there is a belief that if the seed is sown from a
woollen blanket and cattle graze in a field grown from seed thus
sown, the cattle will surely die. I questioned a farmer in the
Damoh District on this poimt and found that the same belief
prevails there also. (2) It is also said that if iron in any shape
should come in contact with peas when they are being sown,
the seeds will not germinate. An iron or metallic spoon is
never used to stir the peas when they are being boiled as dall, for
the metal will cause the dall to be tough and indigestible. (3)
When the rice or kodo harvest is about to be completed and the
reaper comes to cut the last sheaf, he will throw it up into the air
and use some of the obscene phrases which are used in the Hola
Festival. (4) When the grain has been threshed in the threshing

184 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengat. [ August, 1905.

floor and the first load of threshed grain is being carried to the
house to be stored, the housewife will come out to meet the labourer
who is carrying the load. She has in her hand a lota of water, and
with this she walks around the man carrying the grain and ‘does.
obeisance to the grain. This respect is paid to the first load of
grain only.

49, Cause and Cure of Styes—There is a wide-spread belief
that styes are caused by seeing a dog in the act of defcecating.
And there are several remedies employed to remove a stye. One
of the most common remedies is connected with the Dal/han Pahar,
the hill which occupies such a prominent position as a geooraphi-
cal feature of the district. This hill may be seen at a distance
of filty or eighty miles. The peak of the hill seen at a distance
just. appearing above the horizon has some resemblance to a stye.
The belief is that if a person suffering from a stye should face this.
mountain and say, ‘“ Dalhan Pahar chota mor sulie bara” (the
Dalhan Hill is small, my stye is big) the hill will be annoyed, the-
stye will be pleased, and as a result the stye will disppear. Some
say that while saying these words, the afflicted person should rub
the third finger of the right hand in the palm of the left hand and
apply the finger to the stye. It is also customary to take a grain
of the wild rice, apply it to the stye, and then throw it away. As

the grain decays the stye will disappear.

"50. Saluting at Lamp-light.—lt is customary amongst the
Satnamies for the menials and subordinates to salute a superior
when the lamp is first lighted at dusk. I was once seated outside
a tent with a number of villagers around me, when the servant
lighted the lamp and placed it on the table inside the tent.
Immediately all the villagers arose and said “ Satnam” to me and
then resumed their seats. Being a stranger to the people at that
time, I was completely taken aback ; but on inquiry I learned that
this is a common practice. Now I have come to look for the saluta-
tion under similar circumstances. The entry of the lamp is
considered the ushering in of a new period of time, and hence the-
people ‘‘ wish you the time.”

51. Concerning Mecting and Entertaining.—It is an invariable
practice when relatives come together who have not met for a long
while, for the womenfolk to weep and wail loudly. A son has
been away for months and returns to his parents’ house. He will
first go and touch the feet of his father and mother. When he has
been seated, the mother and sisters come to him and each in turn,
placing both hands on his shoulders, weeps loudly and in a
wailing tone narrates anything special that has taken place in his.
absence.

To a stranger it would seem that a great loss has befallen
them. A daughter would be welcomed in the same way. Fre-
quently I have mistaken the weeping of meeting for that of
mourning. Experience, however, has taught me to distinguish the-
two kinds of wailing. When anyone goes as a guest to a friend’s
house, he partakes of the usual food prepared by the family. When.
the people who are entertaining prepare some specially good food,.

Vol. I, No. 8.] The People of Mungeli Tahsil. 185
EES: |

he takes it as a sign that his entertainment has now come to an end,
and the next day he takes his departure.

52. The Spindle and the Panchayat.—When a panchayat or
meeting of the leading men in a village is in progress, it is consi-
dered unwise to have anyone present who is twirling a spindle.
It is said that as the spindle keeps revolving, so will the discussion
move in a circle and fail to come to a decided issue.

53. Vermin from the Clouds.—There is a very prevalent belief
that worms, frogs and snakes drop from the clouds. After cloudy
weather, when insects appear on certain vegetables, it is said that
they have dropped from the clouds. Strange as this idea may
seem to us, we have a phrase whichis even still more strange, for
we sometimes say, ‘It is raining cats and dogs.”

54. Tattooing.—This is done by the Gond women who usually
travel through the district during the harvest time. The tattooing
is not as elaborate as is seen in other parts of India. In fact, it
appears to me to be strikingly meagre. The most common figures
are those of two deer facing each other, and also the figure of a
chain or part of a chain. Itis said that if a woman is not tattooed
in this world, she will be marked with a Sabar or crow-bar by the
gods in the next world. A woman will on no account allow her
husband to pay for any tattooimg she may have done, lest he should
say to her when displeased, “I have not only paid for you at our
marriage, but I have paid for your tattoo marks as well.” Rather
than give occasion for this taunt, she will beg of a friend to pay
for the tattooting she may have done after leaving her parents’
home.

55. Some Matrimonial Beliefs and Practices—(1) In the event
of a bachelor marrying a widow, he alone goes through the
marriage ceremony, for a woman never goes through the marriage
ceremony more than once. The bachelor in this case would be
wedded to a dagger, and the dagger will take the place of the bride
throughout the ceremony. (2%) Ifa couple should have twenty-one
children, it is said that they would go through the marriage cere-
mony together a second time. Or if a coupie should live to see a
grandchild’s grandchild, they will do the same. I was told
that acouple in a certain village lived to see their grandchild’s
grandchild; and my informant claimed to have been present at the
marriage ceremony which was performed. I will not vouch for
the truthfulness of my informant.

56. Lippoing.—When a house is Jippoed, i.e., the floor
plastered with cowdung, it is customary to begin at the doorway
and do the plastering inwards. Never is the house lippoed out-
wards except after a death.

57. Hiffects of an Hclipse.—An eclipse, it is said, has a detvi-
mental effect on granaries and on animal life not yet born. In
order to avoid the grain in the granary losing its germinating
power, a mark is made on the side of the granary with cow-dung,
The same means is employed to remove the evil influence from
pregnant animals. A mare would have a mark made on the side
with gobur (cow-dung) and a pregnant woman has a mark made

186 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [August, 1905.

on her left side. J think it is a circular mark that is made. If
this precaution was not taken, the offsprimg would be deformed.
I once met a lad on the roadside with a deformed leg. [I after-
wards questioned the man who accompanied me as to the probable
cause of the deformity. The reply was “ Grahan khich liya”—The
eclipse has drawn it up. His meaning was that shortly before
the lad was born, there had been an eclipse, which caused the
deformity.

58. Cause of another deformity—There is a firm belief that
if one should havea sixth finger, it was caused by his having
stolen garlic or huldi (turmeric) in the previous incarnation.
So firm is this belief that gardeners have no fear of losing these
vegetables from their gardens by theft. One who steals would
appear in the next world with the mark of theft on his hand.

59. Toothache, Cause and Cure.-—An insect is said to be
boring in the tooth and causes the pain. In order to remove the
insect, the patient is given a piece of hollow bamboo and he sits
over a slow fire in which some particular leaf is burning. One
end of the hollow bamboo is over the smoke rising from the
fire, the other end is placed in the mouth as near as possible to
the decayed tooth. It is said that the insect comes out of the
tooth, falls through the hollow bamboo into the fire, and the
toothache ceases. The gum of some of the Indian figs is also
used to close the hollow of a decayed tooth.

60. Anent the Holi Festival—Crooke in his Folklore of Upper
India gives many interesting particulars regrading the Holz.
I will mention only a few details observed in this locality. A
heap of thorns, ete., are stacked about the first of the lunar
month of Pha@gun. This stack is made just outside the village on
some open space. As the days go by and the Holi festival draws
near, the stack of thorns and dried branches increases continually,
for the boys keep adding to the heap of fuel day by day. In the
centre of the stack of thorns is a high bamboo pole, to which is
tied a branch of the castor plant (Ricinus communis.) Under
the pole which stands in the centre of the Holi stack are some
kowries or pice, and some turmeric. To the top of the pole is tied
a sheaf of dried grass or straw. On questioning a gardener as to
when he would sow a certain vegetable, he replied he would do so
when the Holi pole (dang) falls. His meaning was when the Holi
is burnt. I find this is a common idiom—‘ When the Holi pole
falls.” The stack is set on fire by the village priest, who presents
hom at the village shrine, and he is often a Gond or a Baiga@ or
one of the “ aboriginal tribes.” The fire with which the Holi is
lighted must be obtained from the chak mak or flint and steel.
No other fire will suffice. Some of the ashes of the Holi are kept
and supposed to have power in remoying evil influences of spirits.

61. The Burial of Gosais——On hearing of the burial of a
prominent Gosai, I gathered the following information from some
disinterested persons of other castes, who were present at the
burial and witnessed the whole ceremony. (1) Immediately after:
death the body was washed and covered with moist ashes. (2) A

Vol. I, No. 8.] The People of Mungeli Tahsil. 187
[N. S8.]

deep whole was dug on the bank of the tank and the body was
placed in this hole in a sitting posture with legs crossed as
represented in the figures of Buddha. (3) The face was toward
the north. (4) The body had a langotc, a meagre loin cloth.
(5) Another piece of cloth was cut open in the centre and the
head was put through this opening in the cloth, so that the cloth
rested on the shoulders. It was coloured with a red earthen
dye (gern). See Haod. xxviii. 31,32, R. Version. ‘“ Thou shalt
make the robe of the ephod all of blue. And it shall have a hole
for the head in the midst thereof.” (6) Under the shoulder was
placed a jholi or bag of cloth, the string of which went around the
shoulder. (7) The right hand was placed to the mouth and in the
hand was a chappatie (loaf of unleavened bread) touching the
lips. (8) Inside the mouth was an wdraj (the sacred bead which
mendicants or those of the priestly castes wear around the neck.
In the mouth was also a leaf of the Baei tree (Alyle mar-
melos). (9) By the side of the body was placed a stick such as
mendicants carry and also a kamandal or water-vessel made from
a gourd. (10) There were placed by the body a pair of wooden
sandles. (11) A piece of cloth was tied carelessly around the
head, and over this was placed an earthen plate turned upside
down. (12) The body was then surrounded with fifteen katas of
salt (something over a maund.) (13) When the earth had been
filled in there was a Stv (stone image of of the Linga) placed over
the grave, and the fellow-caste-men went around the grave seven
times and sprinkled rice on the Siv. (14) Every night a lamp is
lighted at the grave for one year and a lota of water and some
rice is sprinkled over the Siv daily. In connection witii this burial
T should mention that a short distance (five miles) from the village
(Heraspore) in which this burial took place, is another village
(Dharampura) which for many decades past has been the residence
of Gosais. On the banks of the tank of this village are five different
temples. I was told that each of the temples is built over the
grave of a man buried as described above. My informant was
able to give me the names of four of the Gosais buried there, but
he said the name of the man buried under the fifth temple
(certainly the oldest and now in a delapidated condition) was un-
known to the village people. They had forgotten the name.

62. Birth Practices—Immediately on the delivery of a child
the mother has cotton stuffed into herears. Thisis said to “ keep
out the wind.” ‘This is also done when one is expiring. There
is a belief that a male child comes into the world the face upwards,
and the female with the face downwards. It is said that if a male
is born face downwards, he will be effeminate, and vice-versa. The
hair is never allowed to remain knotted during delivery, and if
delivery is prolonged and painful, the woman is taken into another
house as it is believed the house has something to do with the delay
in the child being born.

63. Sworn Friendships.—These are known by various names,
which are usually connected with the object employed in sealing
the friendship. One of the most common names is Mahaprasad,

188 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [August, 1905.

(the great feast or food). It is supposed to be formed by the
convenanting parties partaking together of some of the food cooked
and sold at Jugganath, and brought home by returning pilgrims.
As a matter of fact Mahaprasad now means anyone who has sworn
to bea life-long friend. These friendships are also formed with the
use of Ganges water brought home by pilgrims. In this case the
friendship is known as Gangd@jal.

Then, again, any flower may be employed, and the friendship
would be termed merely phul (flower). This is usually the
case amongst women. Hach party places a flower in the ear
of the other and the friendship is formed. If some particular
flower is used that flower gives the name to the friendship. In
all these bonds of friendship, it is incumbent on the promising
parties to refrain from taking the name of his friend, and they
call each other Mahaprisad, Gangajal, Douna (Artemisia vul-
garis or Indian wormwood) or merely Phul. It is astonishing
how very binding these friendships are considered. After an
acquaintance with the people of 14 years I can recall only one
instance 1n which such a friendship was broken. Like David
and Jonathan, the parties stand by each other, they are bound
together for better or for worse, etc., etc. In has been hinted to
me tliat these friendships sometimes result in a community of
possessions extending even to a community of wives. in this
connection it is interesting to note what is done when one of the
friends happens by forgetfulness or necessity to take the friend’s
name. He will go to his friend and say, “Vor dowki mor dowka,
gendi gajla phul.” These words may have two meanings and
have been interpreted both ways tome. They may mean, ‘‘ Your
wife and my wife are a garland of marigold flowers;” or they
may mean, “ Your wife is my wife, a garland of marigold flowers.”
By repeating this couplet to his friend itis supposed the offending
one makes propitiation for his offence.

64. Concerning Witches, Fairies, etc.—(1) There is a belief
that witches sometimes have an insatiable desire for human
blood, and they can suck blood from the navel of a child with-
out anyone knowing it. As a result the child becomes ema-
ciated and dies. There was once a Telin witch who was possessed
by this desire for blood, and not being able to suck the blood
from the navel of any other child she was compelled to draw
blood from her own infant. If an adult also should suddenly
become emaciated and loose flesh, it is said that a witch has sent
down a long tongue or tube from the roof of his house when he
was asleep and has drawn blood from his navel. In order to regain
strength it is necessary to eat a small kind of fish found in
the rivers. Also to eat a kind of rice. (2) If a child is
believed to be possessed by a witch or an elf, it is customary
for the parants to take a bangle and a tassel worn at the end of
a plait of hair by women and to tie these articles to a twig of
the Baer tree (Jujuba vulgaris). The Baer tree is supposed to
be the special residence of witches, or elfs or other invisible
beings. (3) According to Bates’ Hindi Dictionary, the word Pret

Vol. I, No. 8.] The People of Mungels Lahsil. 189
fen. S.]

has several meanings, ‘“‘a spirit of the dead, a goblin spirit, evil
sprite, fiend, etc.” Here I find it is commonly used to mean an
elf or fairy, not necessarily a being with evil influences. Pretins
are said to assume the form of women and frequent the bazars.
By their superhuman powers they can take away articles from
the stalls of tradesmen without being detected. A woman with
a crooked nose is suspected of being a Pretin. The story is told
of a Raut (milk-man) who was returning from a bazar when he
saw a Pretin, most beautiful to look upon, fomenting her child
under a Baer tree. He persuaded her to go to his house, but he
hid her sai ina hollow bamboo, The Pretin lived happily with
the Raut and they had three sons. At the marriage of the eldest
son the neighbours asked the mother to dance and amuse them.
She refused to do this unless she was given her own sari, which
the Raut had hidden. Persuaded by his guests the man at last
produced the hidden sari from the hollow bamboo. Scarcely
had the woman put it on when she became invisible and dis-
appeared, never to return. It is said that the descendants of the
three sons of this Pretin are still in this district, but no one has
ventured to inform me just where they may be found. Students
of folklore will recognize in this story the widespread belief that
the influence of fairies, giants, etc., lies in some special object,
€.g., Samson’s strength being in his hair. (4) It is believed that
some have the power of placing a Pretix in a flute or fiddle, and
in this case the instrument will make music of its own accord
without any human assistance.

65. Deserting Houses—I have been told that amongst the
jungle people of this district if a death should take place, the
entire settlement, never very large, moves away to another site,
doubtless because of the belief that the deceased will frequent his
former abode. Amongst the people of this Tehsil, who live in
larger and more settled villages and hamlets, there is an inclina-
tion to desert the house in which a death has occurred, and
to build another house on another site. Higher up in the grades
of civilzation we find a desire to withdraw from the room in
which one has died, if not from the belief that it is haunted,
then on account of the unpleasant associations. Amongst the
people of whom I write, if a house is to be deserted it will be
leepoed, a lamp lighted, and the residents will withdraw.

66. Punishment of Witches.—If I was to tell of all the witch
stories which are told amongst the people, these notes would have
to swell out to undue proportions. Perhaps I should mention that
Chhattisgarh has long had a reputation for witchcraft and similar
cults. Sleeman, writing as far back as 1835 in his Rambles and
Recollections, mentions these parts as having an unfavourable
reputation. It is currently reported that in the old days when
a witch was found she would be tied to the horns or the legs of
a buffalo, and the buffalo was then infuriated till the victim
was killed.

67. A Ouse of “ Possession.’’—It was on the night of the 9th of
August, 1901, that Lhad the following experience with a man said

190 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. { August, 1908,

to be possessed by the Devil. At eleven o’clock I was called to
the Leper Asylum, of which I am Superintendant, to see a leper
named Visahu, who was laid hold of by Shaitan. It was a
dark, drizzling mght and I went to the Asylum lantern in hand.
Approaching the gate of the Asylum I heard many loud voices
for the lepers were greatly excited, and I could also hear the
grinding of teeth from the unfortunate man. This was heard
at a distance of fully one hundred yards. On approaching the
crowd I found the leper Visahu, a man of medium physique,
lying on the ground on his chest struggling violently, while
two men were seated on him trying to keep him down. They
told me he was making efforts to run away from them, and as
the river was not far off they feared he would drown himself. I
immediately ordered the men to loosen their hold of him, and
I talked with him calmly and firmly and tried to pacify him.
Meanwhile I noted the wild meaningless look in his eyes, as
though he was terribly frightened. He was trembling, shaking
from nead to foot, his teeth were grinding, and I was convinced it
was not a case of shamming. I concluded he was in a fit of
some kind. Ordering the ammonia bottle from the hospital, I
led Visahu to his own room, and had his bed put in readiness. As
we were about to enter his room, the man broke away from me
and rushing through the lepers who had gathered around, he
went straight for the gate. I went after him as fast as possible,
and the crowd followed me. Visahu ran straight into the grveyard,
close by; seeing this the crowd hung back and only two atten-
dants followed me as I ran after the man over the Chamar
graves. With shod feet and with a lantern we had difficulty in
following the man because of the cactus thorns and the ditches full
of water. He, however, did not seem to heed these, and ran alone
bare-footed over the graves and the thorns to the other end of the
graveyard where he plunged into a ditch full of water. When
we overtook him, he sat quaking and grinding his teeth staring
around wildly. I again laid hold of his arm and led him back
to the Asylum and seated him in the Chapel. Here I kept him
under my gaze, talked with him and poured water between his
set teeth. For sometime he gazed at me stolidly, with a vacant
look and without blinking; there was no intelligence in his face.
In the meantime the ammonia was brought from the hospital.
He did not seem affected by it. After about ten minutes in the
Chapel, his face changed, he looked around to the others and
said, ““ Why have you brought me here?” He seemed like one
waking from sleep. He felt the mud and water on his body
and asked why we had thrown water on him. I asked him
where he had been; he said, “Nowhere!” He had no recollection
of having acted strangely. He then became conscious of the
bruise on his knee and the thorns which had become imbedded
in his feet. On questioning him I learned that he had been
on leave from the Asylum and had returned that morning walking
some eight miles. After a night meal, he sat in the corner of
his room playing on a long bamboo flute which has a deep

Vol. I, No. 8.] The People of Mungelt Tahsil, 191
[N. 8.]

monotonous tone. He wife was alsoin the room. After playing
for some time he arose and went to the door to go out. Outside
the door he said he saw a figure and exclaimed, “ What is this ? ”
Immediately he fell forward, and that is all he could remember.
I am positive that this was not a case of shamming. I am also
positive that he did not recall what took place, that he had no
recollection of what took place from the time I saw him on the
ground to the time he “came to himself” inthe Chapel. I am
also certain that he was not under the influence of an intoxicant.
This case puzzled me for a long while. I could not bring myself
to believe it was a case of demon possession, though everything
seemed to support that theory. Since this experience, I have
looked into the subject of hypnotism, and I am now of opinion that
this so-called ‘“‘case of possesion” was actually a case of auto-
hypnotism. The man playing his flute in a monotonous tone
for a long time (probably gazing at the light) brought himself
into the hypnotic state when he was susceptible to any outside
suggestion. Seeing a shadow, may he not have taken this to be
a spirit about to possess him? ‘Then the cries of his neighbours
“ Shaitan laga har” would still further deepen the impression, or,
technically, the “ suggestion,” until he actually became to himself
a man possessed. J have seen persons coming out of the hypnotic
state, and the way in which consciousness returned to them re-
minded me of the way in which the leper came to himself and was
first conscious of his bruises. I mention this case with the only ex-
planation which suggests itself to me. Perhaps I should say
again that there was no history of the use of intoxicants, and the
man whois stillinthe Asylum (May, 1905) is not addicted to the
use of intoxicants. Need I add that all the lepers and all the
neighbours were fully convinced that it was Shaztan who possessed
the man, and the Shaitdn was supposed to be the spirit of a leper
who had died fifteen days before and was buried in the grave-
yard into which Visahu took us on that memorable night in
August.

68. Pacifying the God.—I once saw a man leading a black
goat. On questioning him I was told that he had a buffalo worth
forty rupees which was ill. He was taking the goat to tie near
the buffalo. He would feed the goat in the name of the deo
which possessed the buffalo, and when the buffalo recovered, at the
next principal festival, the goat would be slaughtered in the name
of the god. Some days later I heard that the buffalo had died,
and the man was wishing to sell the goat. Another sacrific, however,
proved more fortunate. I had a syce, a Ghassia by caste, who had
an only son, who was drowned in the river. As the syce and his
wife were getiing onin years, they wished to have another son.
I recall the time when my syceasked leave that he might sacrifice
a pig at some shrine in order to havea son. A year or eighteen
months later I was told that Raru, the syce, had a son. This boy
is now living, is about ten years of age, and comes to me every
Christmas for Baksheesh. His father is too old for service.
Nothing cculd convince the father that the son was not given im

192 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [August, 1905.

answer to his sacrifice. To his parents he is in very truth a Samuel
— asked of God.”

69. Terrors of the Night.—In common with all primitive
peoples, the villagers of this Tehsil are greatly scared by the dark
night. It is not the dread which civilized persons have of stepping
on a snake or ascorpion, but the darkness to them is frequented by
evil spirit and malign influences. Specially after someone has died
is this fear apparent. It is completely removed during the moon-
light nights and most apparent during the dark wet nights in the
rains. Ona dark night it is considered unwise to name a person
recently deceased; a snake also should not be mentioned. By
naming the snake or the deceased they will come near. “‘ Speak
of an angel,” as the saying goes.

70. Settling Quarrels.—The Rauts or herdsmen havea festival
in September or October, which Lam sure will repay investigation
by an expert. I wish to mention one item in this connection. Tor
about a month the Rauts go around dressed up with strings of
shells (kowries) with leather or metallic shields and lathies or
wooden swords in the hand. At this time they have what is
called maiar jagna. Jagna means to awake, but what Matar
means I cannot say. The Rauts get together on the site where they
usually tie the cattle during the heat of the day, and at this place
they have a great feast anda merry time. They are all dressed
up as described above, and I am told they eat with their shoes on
and their dathies in their hands. After this feast they go forth to
settle any quarrel which may have arisen with neighbouring
Rauts during the past year. The quarrel is settled by the use of
lathies and not by words, one party throws out the challenge by
shouting out words of abuse, the others reply and they engage in
a hand-to-hand fight till the people in one party are defeated and
take to their heels. The people tell me that these fights still take
place, but I have had no positive evidence of this being the case.

71. Scorpion Stings, Immunity from.—l know for a fact that
there are persons on the Tahsil, whoare immune to the sting of
the scorpion. A man of my acquaintance will deliberately take
up a scorpion holding it by the tail. This is not merely done by
courage due to dexterity, for I once saw the scorpion strike him and
the only discomfort he experienced was a pain as though the part
had been burnt or rubbed with chillies. There isa belief that dark
skinned persons are more susceptible to the poison, for they suffer
more intensely. It has also been stated that if a woman is stung
by a scorpion during pregnancy, her offspring will be immune to
the scorpion poison. ‘There are certain persons who have a re-
putation for removing the pain consequent on the sting of a scor-
pion, and they go through various mesmeric passes over the part
stung; and if the distressed portion be the arm, they profess to
gradually bring down the pain to the fingers from which extremity
the pain is eliminated.

72. Concerning a Mushroom.—There is a dark-coloured
rather high-growing mushroom found in the open fields, which is
known as Suri gae ki dhetti, v.e., the teats of the Suri (wild) cow.

Vol. I, No. 8.] The People of Mungeli Tahsil. 193
EN S|

I am told that this mushroom grows over the spot where a cow has
given birth to its young. It is an invariable practice for the herds-
men or the ploughmen when they find this mushroom to stick it
in the cord round the waist or to put it behind the ear. It seems
to serve no practical purpose, and yet people carry it around like a
charm. This mushroom is tough and leathery and appears to be
quite durable.

73. The Festival of Stults—During the latter half of the Hindu
month of Sravan is held, what I have termed, the festival of stilts
because of the practice amongst the boys and sometimes the young
men of making stilts and playing with them for 15 days. Just as
soon as the light half of Sravan comes around, these stilts will be
seen. The stilts are made by tieing small pieces of bamboo about
a foot in length to a long bamboo six feet long, and the foot is placed
not across the step of the stilt, as is usually done by English school-
boys, but the foot is placed lengthways on the step of the stilt, so
that the long bamboo is held by the toes of the foot. The stilts are
not nailed in any part but are tied with twine ; and when the twine
is wet it makes a creaking noise rubbing against the bamboo, and
this noise made at every step of course adds immensely to the enjoy-
ment of the youngsters. When the fifteen days are over, at the Pora
festival, the children make some specially dainty cakes, and taking
their stilts they all go down ina body to the river or tank. Here the
stilts are all stacked together like rifles in a guard-room. Before
this stack of stilts the children offer hom (incense), sometimes
merely burning dried cow-dung Then they untie the foot-pieces
from the stilts, and one foot-piece is thrown into the river and the
other is either buried in the sand by striking it upright or it is
carried to the home and struck in the ground in front of the door-
way.

4 The long pieces of bamboo are also taken home and put in the
root to be kept tillthe next season. After this festival of stilts, the.
Kumhars make earthen buliocks, paint them in gay colours and
take them round for sale. They also make earthen grinding mills
and small vessels to amuse the girls. This time of the year
appears to be specially the time of amusement for the little ones.

74. The Fisherman’s Net.—During the Dasherah festival a
fishermaii goes around with his net and he throws this on to the
child of any prominent person. This appears to be a sign of
good-luck or prosperity, for the parents of the child reward
the fisherman with gram or money. A fisherman once tried to
throw his net on my little girl; she was greatly alarmed and
would not allow it to be done. The man thought it would be
unfortunate to be thus hindered; so he placed his net over me.
It is a question whether he was more concerned for his own
interests or mine.

75, Snake-Lore and Snake-Charmers.—The snake-charmers of
the district are called Gouriyas. They appear to be few in number
and I do not find them named in the Census Report. They reside
in a few villages of this Tahsil, engage in agriculture during the
rains, and in the dry months they wander away to great distances

194 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [ August, 1905,

with their curious pets, which they exhibit and thus make a
precarious living. I have called them snake-charmers, but they
do not charm with music. I have yet to see the Gouwriya who uses
the gourd flute so often seen in other parts of India. They
wear the peculiarly twisted narrow turban which is characteristic of
the Indian snake-charmer. 'They have attached to their turbans a
few claws of bears or tigers and the talons of hawks or large birds
of some kind. The snakes usually carried around are the Python
molurus and two varieties of the cobra ; one with the spectacles and
the other without them. The cobra with the mark on the head is
called the Domi; without this mark it is called the Gouha, they
are believed to be quite distinct snakes. I learned, in conversation
with the men, that they make an agreement with the snake when it
is first captured as to how long it will be kept in captivity. Some
vow to keep it for six months, others for a year-and-a-half. When
the time is up, the snake is given its freedom and another is cap-
tured. It would be considered a very great misfortune if a snake
should die in captivity. On questioning a man as to how the
cobra came to have the mark on its head, I was told that when
Bhagwan, the deity, went into Patal, (the nether region) he placed
his foot on the Nag, and it is the footprint of Bhagwan that is
seen on the snake to-day. ‘It shall bruise thy head, etc.” Gen.
i, 15. The Python molurus is considered the most dharma
(righteous) of all snakes. The reason is that it will never go out
of its way to seek for its prey ; it lies quietly till the victim hap-
pens to come into its immediate vicinity, and then it will lay hold of
it. The Ptyas mucosus is locally known as the Ashariya, from the
month Ashar, corresponding with June-July. It is socalled from
the popular belief that it is poisonous only in Ashar. The follow-
ing interesting story is told concerning this snake. I have heard
this tale with many variations and it appears to be widely known:
At one time the Ashariya was the only poisonous snake! in existence.
It found a raut (a herdsman) lying on the side of a field where
he had fallen asleep while tending his cattle. Near the head of
the herdsman lay his bamboo flute, which he often played to while
away the time while watching his cattle. Now the Ashariya
had often heard the sound of the flute, and was annoyed at
hearing the music. Finding the raut asleep, he determined to
silence him forever. He approached the head of the sleeping man
and struck him in the forehead saying, ‘‘ Now you are silenced, and
I will never again be troubled with your music.” When the
Ashariya had gone away, to his great astonishment he again
heard the sound of the herdsman’s flute just as before. The flute
lay at the head of the dead body in such a position that the wind
blowing through it caused it to make music just as when played
on by the owner. The Ashariy& was much enraged at the thought
of his poison not having silenced the raut. He determined to
distribute his poison to others, and to increase the possibility of
the man being killed by his poison. He therefore gave an invita--
tion to all manner of reptiles to come to a feast which he had
prepared. All the reptiles came in great numbers to this feast.

1 (Cf. the Karin and Patani Malay stories of the python (Mason’s Burma
and Annandale, Fascic. Malay Anthrop. I).—Ed. ]

Vol. I, No. 8.] The People of Mungeli Tahsil. 195
[N. S.]

While distributing food to the guests the Ashariya mixed with the
food a good portion of his own deadly poison, which up to that time
he alone had possessed. The cobra and the scorpions andall
other stinging insects received as much poison as was contained
in the foed of which they partook. Hence the various degrees in
the poison of snakes. The Ashariy& in consequence had only a
little poison left, and so it is poisonous only in the month
of Ashar. It is said that traders in cattle and those who
have to do_with the breaking in of cattle keep a piece of the
tail of the Ashariya by them. If the tail of this snake is pushed
up the nostril of a refractory animal (a bullock or a buffalo) the
animal will immediately become manageable and submissive.
There is still another snake which holds an important place in the
folklore of the district. This is locally known as the “ Murari
sap.” I cannot supply the scientific name, but it belongs to the
family of earth-snakes, which burrow underground and come to the
surface only occasionally. It is not much more than eight inches
in length, thick and of much the same dimension from end to end,
On account of the similar appearance of head and tail, it is some-
times said to have two heads. For six months it goes one way,
and for six months the other. On being touched this snake
has a way of curling around inacircular from. This may account
for the name (murnd means to twist), and it certainly accounts for
the popular belief that it is the greatest enemy of the larger
snakes, for it will twist itself around them till they are strangled.
But the most common belief with regard to the Murari is that it
will attach itself to a woman’s breast and draw away her milk
while she sleeps. The snake, it is said, will place its tail in the
child’s mouth and thus soothe the child while drawing away the
milk for its own nourishment. Women hold this snake in special
abhorrence.

While speaking with a man concerning the Murarz, he told me
that only recently he had killed this snake in the house of a
neighbour, and he had found a quantity of milk inits maw. On my
expressing my doubt he went on to explain that his neighbour’s wife
had a child which had lost flesh for some time past. The reason
given was that the snake was taking the woman’s milk while the
child was starving. Now that the snake had been destroyed, the
child was gaining flesh and improving in health. If a Murari is
found in the fields, it is taken up ona stick and thrown towards
the sun. This is called swray dekhana@ (shown the sun). It is
thrown high up in the air and is killed as a result of the fall. The
snake charmers also informed me that at the Hariyalz festival, it is
their practice to go out inthe fields and burn hom (sacrifice) at the
roots of the trees or herbs which are employed as antidotes to snake
poison. It is at this festival also that they lay in a stock of anti-
dotal herbs for use during the coming year.

76. A Love Portion called Hathajori.—The Gond women who
go around tle Tehsil in the winter months tattooing and selling
herbs and roots with medicinal properties, also have with them a
herb known as hathajori, which may be roughly translated hands

196 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. { August, 1905.

joined. Ihave seen this herb or root, and it certainly resembles two
hands clasped together. This is said to be a mohini and is
given by a suitor to a woman whose affections he may wish to win.
Dr. Watt’s in his Economic Products of India mentions a vege-
table growth of this name and he calls it “ Hagle’s claw.” (See his
Dictionary M. 208.) He makes no-reference to its being a love-
portion, and may be he describes an entirely different herb to that
which is sold by the Gond women. I have mentioned the hathajorz
here because of its connection with the following passage in The
Sacred Tree (a work by Mrs. J. H. Philpot), page 106. ‘‘In the
valley of Lanzo in Piedmont, lovers in doubt whether to marry
consult the oracle in the form of a herb called concordia, the root
of which is shaped like two hands each with its five fingers.”
Jewellers sometimes advertize in their catalogues ladies’ brooches,
which represent two hands clasped together. Is this merely a
convenient emblem of friendship, or is it a survival from herbs
which looked like clasped hands which were used as _ love-
portions P Since scarf pins with the horse shoe are a survival of
the primitive belief that iron wards off evil spirits, why may not
this clasped-hand brooch also claim as ancient an ancestry P

77. A Marriage Practice —Going through a village, I noticed
a strange figure made of straw attached to a long bamboo hanging
over a house. On inquiring I was told that a marriage had re-
cently taken place in the house, and the figure which drew my
attention was that of adeer. I then learned that itis customary after
a marriage for the bride and bridegroom and friends to resort to the
river or tank and wash off the huldi with which the persons of the
bride and bridegroom have been covered ; and while this is being
done there is much fun and joking and teasing. One of the plays at
this time is to make a deer of straw and place a bow and arrow
made of bamboo in the hands of the bridegroom and not let him
go from the river till he has taken good aim and pierced the deer
with his arrow. After striking the deer he gives chase to the
bride who with her friends runs away to the house, and is there
overtaken by the bridegroom and his friends. The deer is hoisted
on a high bamboo and hangs over the house for some time.

78, A Primitive form of Lamp Light—The Croton tiglium is:
most commonly found throughout this Tehsil. It is used asa
border plant for gardens and groves. The seeds of this shrub form
a drastic purgative, and are used for this purpose by the people.
But there is still another use made of the seeds. They are strung
together by children in long rows, and the lowest seed is set on fire
and the seeds burn in succession one after the other very slowly, at
the same time giving out quite a dealoflight. This play amongst
the children may possibly be the remains of a general practice of
lighting the houses with the seeds of the croton strung together.

79. Massage and Branding of Infants.—It is considered a neces-
sity for the mother to massage her infant daily. The mother sits
on the floor with her two legs stretched out together straight in
front, The child is placed on its back in her lap, the head resting
between the knees and the feet towards the mother. By the side

Vol. I, No. 8.] . The People of Mungelt Tahsil, . 197
NE S23]

of the mother is the Gorsi or roughly-made earthen pot in which
are kept the slowly-burning cowdung cakes. The infant’s abdomen
is first oiled and then the mother places one hand over the fire and
the other over the child’s stomach, and thus with rapid movements
ot the hands massages the. child with each hand alternately.
Meantime she is singing some soothing lullaby. .This fomentation is
intended to remove flatulence. But sometimes a much. severer
process is adopted. The child is ‘said to be attacked with a
complaint which is called Dhabha.. Iam unable to say whether this
is merely a severe attack of flatulence or constipation or a specific
disease. The stomach of the infant, it is said, becomes swollen and.
hard. Ifit be amild attack of Dhabha, the abdomen is branded
with the point of aniron sickle. The sickleis placed in the fire till
it is red hot and the point is then applied to the stomach in eight
or ten different places. Once when passing through a village at
night I heard excrutiatmmg cries from a child ;.on inquiry I was
casually informed that a child was suffering: from Dhabha and
the parents were having it branded. If the disease assumes a
severe form, what is called big Dhabha, then several double-pice are
placed in the fire, they are then taken up with pinchers and applied
to the surface of the abdomen leaving a burn the size of the face of a
pice. I believe fully 99 per cent. of the natives of this Tehsil carry
on their person the marks of this infantile branding. Some of them
carry the marks for forty and fifty years. May we not ask if this
practice of branding infants has not some connection with the
widespread belief that changlings and witches are afraid of fire
and also of iron. This belief may have originated the practice,
which has continued because of the beneficial results due to counter
irritation. Adults are also branded on the arms and legs in severe
cases of rheumatism or in cases of sprains.

80. Stone Heaps.—In certain parts of the Tehsil will be found
a great pile of stones. A single heap of stones is called a Kuriha,
from Kurhonia to heap. The people can tell nothing as to the origin
of the practice, but they say it is considered fortunate to throw a
stone on to the heap in passing and thus add to the accumulation of
stones. In 2 Sam. xviii 17, with regard to the burial of Absolam,
we read that he was thrown into a pit and they “‘ raised over him a
very great heap of stones”’ (Revised Version). In Adam Clark’s
commentary on the above passage I find the following remarks:
“This was the method of burying heroes and even traitors .....The
ancient cairns or heaps of stones in different parts of the world are
of this kind.” In Col. Meadows Taylor’s novel Tara, a Maharatta
Tale, 1 find the following passage descriptive of the country near
Bijapore. “The heap of stones had been formed gradually by
travellers who, coming from all sides, took up one from the path,
and threw it with a prayer to the local divimty upon the pile.
This had been done no doubt for centuries,”

81. Ideas regarding Transmigration.—Some years ago I was
quite intimate with a Satmani Chamar. He was fully eighty years
of age. This man had many strange ideas, which, unfortunately,
at that time I did not appreciate. With my present acquaintance

198 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [August, 1905,

with folklore, I would have regarded him a valuable “ find.”
For many years now at the Divali festival, a lamp has been burnt
at his grave for three nights in succession. This old man claimed
to be able to tell just what form any man or animal has assumed
in the last life, or incarnation. He said that he had some cattle,
who were persons who had died owing him money ; and they had
returned in this form to pay their debts. He himself claimed to
have been a Rajput in the last life, and for some offence he was
born a Chamar. He expected on his return to the earth to be born
a Brahman. I once took him to see my horse which was tied in the
stable. On our entering the stable the horse started. I said to
Goburdhan, “‘ Now, can you tell me what this horse was in the last
life.’ He was equal to the occasion, for he replied immediately,
“He was a deer and was shot.” ‘‘ How do you know?” I asked.
‘Did you not notice how he started when we entered,” he replied,
“he is timid like a deer, and look at this,” pointing to a birth-mark
on the side of the animal, “this is where a bullet has entered,
He was a deer and was shot.’ It is a common idea amongst the
people of this district that marks on the body are transmitted.
If a child should be born and should die almost immediately,
the expression used is “ bahurgayd, ‘‘It has returned.” The idea
is that the life came into this world and went back from whence
it came.

82. Observation during a Small-poxr Hpidemic.—Harly in 1904
there was a small-pox epidemic in the town of Mungeli; and I had
ample opportunity of making many interesting observations. ‘The
conclusion I came to was, that during the epidemic the people feel
that there is some strong personality in their midst, and all their
efforts are with the purpose of pleasing this great power or in-
fluence or person. As is usually the case, they believe what
would please themselves will please this great being or power.
The mata or devi is supposed to be visiting the family in which there
is a case of small-pox. It is not considered a misfortune but rather
an honour. The yard of the house in which the patient lies is
surrounded by a hedge of thorns or dried twigs. The pur-
pose is to keep away persons whose presence will annoy the
goddess and to hinder persons with shod feet approaching the house.
Someone is always in attendance on the patient. Hvery word he
may utter is considered the word of the goddess. If the patient
requests water, the attendants will say, “The goddess is thirsty,”
and will bring the coldest, purest water obtainable. In the delirium
all the wild sayings of the patient are considered the utterances of
the great person in their midst. The behests of this person must
be complied with, however difficult and repulsive. If the patient
says he wants food from the house of a scavenger, it must be done
rather than incur the wrath of the goddess. Once a man walked
eight miles to ask for food from my table. The reason was that
his daughter had small-pox, and when asked what she wanted, she
was understood to say she wanted food from the sahib’s house, and
the father begged me to give him some. On several occasions the
people have come asking for the fruit of the papiya from my

Wol. I, No. 8. j The People of Mungeli Tahsil. 199
ENG Se]

garden, as the mata had asked for thisfruit. If the goddess should
demand a hen, the hen will be purchased and tied near the bed of the
patient. Itis said that a hen with reversed feathers is the one
most appreciated. During a small-pox epidemic I have known
poultry with reversed feathers to sell at an exorbitant price. Some-
times a goat is tied in the house of the patient and daintily fed in
the name of the goddess, with a promise that it will be slaughtered
in the event of the patient’s recovery. Hvery evening in each
house in which there is a small-pox patient, music is heard and
songs are sung in praise of the goddess. Musical instruments are
also employed, more especially the drum. The friends of the patient
will sit up all night. If the patient is in distress, nothing is
-done to alleviate the suffering ; but the friends perplex themselves
in trying to find out what they have done to annoy the goddess or
what they have omitted to do which will please her. One evening
I questioned a young man passing my gate as to where he was
going. He replied he was going to join his friends who were to
watch by the house of a caste-fellow who had small-pox. On in-
quiring why he was going to watch, he replied, ‘‘ In case a dog or
a cat should come near the house at night and annoy the goddess.”
I asked how long the friend had had the sickness. He replied, ‘“ Six
years.” On seeing my perplexity he explained that they say
year for day in speaking of this illness. I then asked how much
longer he expected the friend would be sick. He replied, “ Hight
or ten years.” When the epidemic was abating in the town of
Mungeli, the following story was told around and about the town
and was believed to be true by all who heard and all who told it. A
certain Bania, whose name was given, went from Mungeli to the
neighbouring town of Nawagarh ; on his return after dark he came
upon seven women seated by fires on the roadside. He addressed
them as “friends” and asked them for fire to light his birhz (pipe).
They paid no attention to him, and he noticed their fires had no
smoke and that they burned steadily. He then went his way on
horseback. His syce or groom came behind him and met these
same women. They said to the syce, ‘‘ Your master addressed us as
friends and we have destroyed two of his children. Tell him we
have done our work in Mungeli and are now going to Nawagarh.”
This story was believed to account for the sudden cessation of the
disease in Mungeli and its sudden appearance in Nawagarh just at
that time. I have been told that when the disease first appears on
a@ person, he is seated on a bed and his feet are bathed with
great ceremony. The waterin which his feet are washed must be
taken from arunning stream ; and the water must be taken up in a
vessel drawn against the current and not in the direction in which
the water is flowing. Whenthe sickness has left the patient his en-
tire body is bathed with great ceremony either on a Monday or a
Thursday. Several months after the patient has recovered, the
people have the ceremony of “ Vida karo,” that is, “sending away ”’
the goddess, as some visitor, is sent off, with ceremony. Special
food is prepared, and the family party all wear new clothes, and
with music and procession they all proceed to the river, where

~ 200 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [ August, 1905.

_ food and small articles are thrown into the stream. Those who
_-yowed the gift of hens or goats, go to the temple or shrine of the
goddess, and there they will either set free those creatures or will
slaughter them and leave the remains to be removed by the
sweepers or other low-caste people. It so happened that the holi
_ festival came on when the epidemic was in full force. I had ex-
pected this festival to be observed with much zest as the harvest
had been plentiful. In such years all festivals are observed with
muchado. To my surprise the holi festival that year received but
little attention, and singing and obscene language were guardedly
employed. The reason, | learned, was the presence of the mata in
their midst. It was considered offensive to the goddess to sing
the holi songs. Special songs are sung at night to please the god-
dess, and it will be interesting some time to have these songs re-
corded and translated and published in this Journal.
83. Concerning Stone Inplements.!|—W hile conducting a class of
oung men, I happened to have on my table a copy of the Journal
of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. I showed the class illustrations
of the stone implements in the Journal. One of the men remarked,
‘“When I wasa boy my father had a stone like that one,” pointing
out one in the illustrations. The youngman said his father called
it a “sarag patar”’—heaven or sky stone. [immediately saw the
importance of this name and was positive the young man referred to
astoneimplement. In widely separated countries the belief prevails
that the stone implements are thunderbolts, and here was the name
“heaven stone”? used by the people in Mungeli. Next morning
I made further inquiries, and my syce offered to get me a “ sarag
patar’’ which was owned by one of his uncles. The uncle turned
up in due time bringing with hima bored stone, and I saw
immediately that it was undoubtedly a stone implement of former
days. The only use for which this stone was now employed was
as a remedy for galwa, swollen glands, round the neck. The
man who owned the stone, said it had come down from father to
to son in his family, for generations. Together with this
stone the man brought me a piece of stag’s horn, which he said
had always been with thestone. I now very much regret that I
took no interest in the stag’s horn and purchased only the bored
stone. It did not occur to me that there was any possible con-
nection between the stone and the stag’s horn. Some months later
I was reading Sir Daniel Wilson’s book on Left-handedness.
On page 49, he shows that in all probability the makers of flint
arrows, etc., employed bones or horns, for these were the only imple-
plements at their service. The fact that a stone and a stag’s horn
were handed down for generations together would indicate some close
connection between the two ;and it seems probable that the stag’s
horn was the implement with which the stone wasthe bored. After
two years of search I have succeeded in getting together only a
dozen stones. Some of these have been badly rubbed when they
were used medicinally. But we are able to judge of their original
shape and form. One or two of the stones are beautifully smooth
inside where bored, ‘as smooth as glass,” as a friend remarked.

1 See Plate VI.

Vol. I, No. 8.] The People of Mungeli Tahsil. © 201
[N. S.]

One stone has undoubtedly been arrested in the process of manu-
facture. Theoutward form is complete and it has not been rubbed
in any way for medicinal purposes. The hole in the centre, how-
ever, is only half bored. This hole was evidently made by strik-
ing in some sharp-pointed implement. It certainly does not show
signs of the rotatory action of a horn or bone implement. One or
two of the stones in my collection were said to have been found
in fields near the site of an old village. Others have been heirlooms .
in families for many generations. One mantold me he owned a
“heaven stone,” but his house was washed away in a flood and the
stone disappeared. The people are very reluctant to make known
the fact that they own the stones; and they seem very reluctant
to part with them.

id —— See Serre eo weSOerrwr

202 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (August, 1905..

25. A short history of the House of Phagdu, which ruled over Tibvet
on the decline of Sakya till 1482 A.D.—By Rai Sarat CHANDRA
Das, Bahadur, C.1.E.

When in former times the Sakya hierarchs enjoyed the proud
privilege of being the spiritual instructors of the Tartar Emperors:
of China, the envoy Situ Akyid took a census of the households
of the agricultural Tibetans and also of the Hor Tibetans (so
called from their leading a nomadic life like the Mongols). With-
in the YThikor or governorship of Phagmodu in Central Tibet,
there were included two thousand four hundred and _ thirty-
eight families, out of which six hundred belonged to Lhasa City,
and five hundred to Tagling. When Hor Jam, one of the
Tartar Commissioners of China, visited the Chyangkha (the
northern province, including Nom-tsho or lake Tengri Nor), he
included the numerous tribes of herdsmen that dwelt there in
the political province of Phagmodu. The Hmperor of China,
in consultation with the spiritual authorities of Sakya, placed
this large division under an able Z’hipon or provincial governor.
Formerly, when both Dikhting Di-gifi and Dansa-thil hierarch
amalgamated their temporal and monastic possessions, Gompa
Shagrin, the abbot of Dikhing, with the general consent of the
clergy and laity of Tibet got one of his relations, named Gom-
tson, appointed as 7”/ipou who, under the patronage of the Chiefs
of Kang-yeng and lower Mongolia built the government house
(T’hikhang) of Tshong-du-tagkhar. Thereafter, Khanpo Ringyal,
the Tolpon of the famous hierarch Chyan-fita Rinpoche, became the
chief of Lhobrag Shong-de. About this time a native of Kham,
named Dorjepal, by his ability, energy and accomplishments,
attracted the notice of Chyan-na-Rinpoche. This young man,
introducing himself to that Grand Lama as one sprung from the
noble family of Dag Lah-zig, and as very anxious to be his dis-
ciple, so insinuated himself into his confidence, that the Grand
Lama, struck with his general efficiency in all matters of impor-
tance, sent him to China to represent the interests of his grand
hierarchy. There he took the opportunity of securing for himself
and his heirs the governorship of Central Tibet, together with a
state seal and decorations. Returning to Tibet in the year Tree-
tiger (1192 A.D.), he built the T°hikhang (government houses) of
Yarling, called Namgyal-ling and Nedong-tse. During his rule,
which extended over thirteen years, he enjoyed the goodwill both
ef those who were above and under him. He was renowned for
his liberality. His governorship extended over twelve important
places, besides Nedong-tse, which was the chief seat of his
government, These were MHalayang, Namo, Chag-tse-tugu,
Thangpo-chin-ling-me, Choi Slukha, Monkhar, Tashi-dong, Gya-
thang, Tshong-dui-tag-kha, Zangri-Phodang-gang, Khortog-cha,
and Kardo. After his death, his younger brother named Shon-nu
Gyal-tshan, discharged the duties of T’hipon for three or four
years. He was succeeded by one of his relations, named Chyang-

Vol. I, No. 8.] History of the House of Phagdu. 203

PNG S:i]
shon (born of the family of Kya-ya-dag-chu), during whose
administration the Sakya and Dikhung hierarchies fought with
each other. Chyang-shon had the good wishes of the Sakyapa
authorities, but owing to some cause having incurred the dis-
pleasure of Ponchen (chief Governor) Anglen of Sakya, he was
ordered to be burnt alive, but on explaining matters he was
exonerated and his life spared. After his death the grand-
son of Shon-nu Gyal-tshan, named Shon-nu Yontan, became
T’ hipon.

At this time Thumer Bukhoi, a Mongol prince of the Im-
perial family, with his wife, came on a pilgrimage to Tibet, The
T’hipon having failed to show his efficiency in military as well as
in civil matters, and being reported to have oppressed his subjects,
the younger brother of Chyan-na Rin-pochhe, nicknamed Gyavo,
or the bearded, recommended his dismissal to the Mongol chief.
During this time the State affairs of T’iikhor were conducted by a
council formed of the following: The governor of Sakya Mon-
astery, named Rin-chen Tashi, Tson-dui Pal, a relation of Chyan-
na-Rin-poche, the second cousin of Shon-nu Yontan, Tagpa-Pho-
zer, the son of Gogochu, named Dorje of Yarlung, Jovo Tagpa
Rin, and others. In the meantime, with the sanction of the
Emperor of China, Taisri Tagpa-hodpa became governor. By
bringing Gyavo, the brother of Chyan-fa-Rin-poche, over to his
side, he also assumed the spiritual power. He gave the ex-
governor, Shon-nu Yontan, the villages of Tenpora and Chomon-
khar for his personal maintenance. On the death of Gyawvo, the
elder brother of Chyan-na-Rin-pochhe, named Gyal Shonpal, pro-
ceeded to Peking, and with the sanction of Lhaje Phagmodu,
(Phag-du heirarch) assumed the office of #’hipon. Shortly after,
he was deposed by the Sakyapa authorities, who placed his
younger brother in charge of the government. From him the office
descended to Gyal-tshan Kyab, the son of Shon-nu Gyaltshan.

When Disri Kuntob-pa proceeded to China, Gyal-tshan
Kyab was discharged from the governorship. Ritsi Wang Gyalpo
then became ?’hipon, and received the title of Tai Situ. He was
succeeded by Sonam Gyal-tshan, the grandson of Gyal-tshan Kyab,
who performed the duties of T’hipon. He was very popular with
his subjects. He was so very resolute that no one could oppose
his views or outdo him in anything. He brought all Tibet under
his sway. Situ Chyan-tshan, from his early age, became skilful
in war, literature, and religion. At the age of fifty-five in the
year Water-monkey, in the 15th of the second month, he undertook
the task of rescuing the Sakya regent, Ponchen Gyal-tshang, who
had been kept in durance by the abbot Lhakhong Labrangpa of
the great temple of Sakya; and for this purpose he placed himself
at the head of the troops of U and Tsang and waged war with
Sakya. Onthe 5th of the fifth month of the same year, with
the assistance of the minor chiefs, he besieged Sakya and delivered
the chief from the hands of his enemies. Before dispersing his.
army he compelled the heirarch to appoint him as chief t’hipon
of Tibet, and was supported by his nephew, Situ Lodoi Gyal-tsan,

204 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [{ August, 1905.

in his works: He was presented. with a hexagonal seal, and the
people of Tsang distinguished him by raising white silken banners:
in his honour. He encouraged both literature and religion.

Chyaf-chub Gyal-tshan (the younger brother of Rinchen
Tagyal) was born in the year Tree-tiger 1302, A.D. In the four-
teenth year for his age (Hare-year) he took his admission into the
monastery of Sakya, where he stayed with the heirarch Dag-nid-
chenpo. He was. entrusted with the office of keeping the Govern-
ment seal. Once the Grand Lama asked if he (Chyan-chub) would
goup for the church, so as to be called a Rinpoche, or for the State
to be called Phipon or governor. On his wishing to be a Rinpoche,
the Grand Lama said, ‘‘ No, you are destined for the State. In
order to qualify yourself for a governorship you should study the
work called ‘Yul-Jyal’ and some works on political ethics.”
Thereafter, taking leave of the Grand Lama, he became a pupil of
Lama Nam-mé-chenpo and learnt the two parts fof logic. In
the autumn of Tiger-year Chyan-Chub and his elder brother
Lopon Tagzang were respectively invested with the temporal and
spiritual offices. At the investiture, people were entertained with
tea boiled in the same cauldron. Lopon Tagzang expounded the
sacred laws and delivered sermons, while Chyan-Chub assumed
the dignity of T’hipon or governor.

When Chyafi-Chub became known all over the country, with
the help of all other minor T’hipon, he besieged Sakya. He occu-
pied Chya-zang-gang, which was then called Cha-zang-kang, and
from some good action done in it,it became known by the name
of Chyazang Jong (or the place of good action). During his reign
the house of Lha-zig became very powerful. Having achieved
many exploits in temporal matters, he (Chyan Chhub) resolved
upon doing pious actions. He built the monastery of T'se-thang
(Chethang) and established a college there. He made Nedong-
tse the chief seat of government. Inviting the Grand Lama
Sonam Gyal-tshan, he consecrated the religious establishment
founded by him and appointed his cousin, Shakya Gyal-tshan, as
the head of the church and president of the ceremonies to re-
gulate the order of precedence. Thus the government of Phag-
modu, for its efficiency both in temporal and spiritual matters,
became very famous, and excelled those preceding it. At the
age of 63, in the year Fvre-dragon, he retired from this existence at
the palace of Nedong (Gahdan-tse). His cousin, Cakya Gyal-
tshan, succeeded him in the throne of Nedong-tse, and assumed both
the spiritual and temporal affairs of the State. By his able adminis-
tration of the church and the secular laws, he increased the pros-
perity and peace of U and Tsang. On account of his being ever
thoughtful for the happiness of his subjects, he was praised by all
men and called Jan Yang Cakya. The Tartar Hmperor, Thugan
Themur, conferred on him the title of Changa-king. After his
death, his younger brother Shakya Rinchen, became chief the
Vhipon and filled the throne of Nedong-tse. He was very fond
of inspecting the works of local officers and inquiring after the
condition of his subjects. Once while on tour in U and Tsang, he

Vol. I, No.8.) History of the House of Phagdu. A 205
[N. S.]

stopped at the village of Gya-mo-Shong. Here the house that he
and his party occupied, accidently caught fire, which quickly
spreading so surrounded him that he and his servants very
narrowly escaped from being burnt. _ On his return he founded the
monastery of Khartag Gonsar, and stayed there to avert the
calamities that, according to his fortune-tellers, hung over him.
He always roved from one place to another. Chyang-tag Chyan
presided at the head of the State Church for a few years.

. After Cakya Rinchen’s death his younger brother, Tagrin,
filled the throne of Nedong-tse.. For some time the state affairs
were in the hands of Gyal-tshan-Zang and his cousin. The con-
trol of the government remained with Chyan-fa till Gyal-tshan
Zang, also called Tagrin, came in a state ,hide-boat from
Gongkar to relieve him of the charge. He was succeeded by
Tagpa Gyal-tshan, a boy of eleven, the son of Cakya Rinchen, in
the year Tree-bird.

From his boyhood Tagpa Gyal-tshen took to athletic and
intellectual exercises. When he advanced in age he began to
show his ability and fortitude. Within a few years of his attain-
ment of youth, he established his authority over all the governors
of U and Tsang. The Emperor Ta-Ming bestowed on him the
decorations of Konting Gushri and Tshan-ha Wang, and presented
him with a gold seal. He also from time to time received other
titles of honour, besides kind instructions from the Emperor him-
self. Power, fortune, and wisdom were ever attached to him.
His reign extended from the 11th to the 59th year of his age.
The State under his rule progressed very much in wealth and
prosperity. Of all the rulers of the Phagdu dynasty, his reign
was the longest. He died at Nedong-tse in the 59th year of his
age in the year Water-mouse.

From the foundation of Nedong-tse and Namgyal Jong of
Yarlung by T’hipon Dorjepal in the year 'ree-tiger to the present
year Tree-tiger (1432 A.D.) 240 years have elapsed. Nedong-tse
was therefore founded in the year 1192 A.D.

Another account of Ohyan-Chub Gyal-tsan and his successors.

In the year 1302 A.D. Chyaf-Chib Gyal-tshan, of the well
known family of Lhazig, was born in the town of Phag-du in
Central Tibet. After subjugating all the thirteen (Thzkor) provinces
of Tibet proper and also Kham, he had established his sway over
Tibet. At the age of eighteen he was appointed to the com mand
of 10,000 soldiers under orders from the Hmperor of China. This
sudden elevation excited the jealousy and enmity of the chiefs of
Di-gun, Tshal, Yahzani and Sakya authorities, who spared no pains
in devising means to ruin him. -At last, they drove him to war.
In the first battle he met with some reverses, but was victorious in
the second. The war lasted for many years, when ultimately
victory attended the arms of the chief of Phagdu, who captured,
almost all the hostile chiefs and threw them into prison. After

*

206 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [August, 1905.

this discomfiture, the chiefs, nobles and Lamas of U and Tsang”
jointly petitioned the Emperor to degrade the upstart. But the
irrepressible Chief proceeded to Peking; there, presenting the skin
of a white lion, besides other rich and rare presents to Hmperor
Thugwan Thumer, he represented the circumstances connected
with the case. Pleased with his sincere statements, the Emperor
decided in his favour and appointed him hereditary noble of Tibet,
assigning the whole of U to him with the exception of the province
of Tsang which continued to remain under the heirarchy of Sakya.

After his return to Tibet from Peking, Chyan-Chib organized
aregular form of government for Central Tibet. He reformed
legislation, and revised the ancient laws and regulations. He
built the castle of Nedong-tse and a large fortress with three gates
to the ramparts. Inside it he founded a monastery. He endea-
voured to observe the Dasa Cila (ten moral virtues). By his
exemplary morals and pity, and above all by his beneficial rule,
he won the sincere esteem of his subjects. He founded the town
of Tse-thang with a monastery in it. He built thirteen forts
such as Gongkar, Tagkar, &c. Later on, he induced the Tartar
Emperor to confer on him the high distinction of Tai-Situ together
with authority over the whole of Tibet. By his able rule he
increased the happiness and prosperity of his people.

The fourth in succession from him was Sakya Rinchen,! who
became a favourite of the Hmperor, by whom he was entrusted
with the collection of revenue from one of the great provinces
of China, and also with the charge of guarding the Imperial
palace. Sakya Rinchen, intead of showing his gratefulness, took
part in a conspiracy matured by the Chinese prime Minister
named Kyen-Htn, to usurp the throne. He sent many wagons,
loaded with armed soldiers, concealed under heaps of silk clothes
under cover of darkness inside the imperial city. The Hmperor,
fortunately, having got scent of the matter secretly fled towards
Mongolia. Sakya Rinchen proclaimed the minister’s son, Li-Wang,
as Emperor of China. Thus through the help of a Tibetan chief
the Ta-Ming dynasty was established. Ying Ming presented
Tag-pa Gyal-tshan, son of Sakya Rinchen, witha gold seal and
the additional possession of ulterior Tibet. He was made the
undisputed sovereign of all Tibet, which extended from Nagah-
rikor-sum to Sze-chuan. Tag-pa Gyal-tshan was succeeded by
his son Wang-Jting-né, whose appointment was confirmed by the
Emperor Kyen Tai Li-Wang. He built the fortresses of Hug-
Yug-ling and Karjong. His grandson, Rin Dorje, obtained the
title of Wang (king) from China. Nag Wang Tashi was a very
impartial and just ruler. He shewed great veneration for the Dalai
Lama So-nam Gyatsho, whom he greatly patronized. The cele-
brated Dharma Raja named Padma Karpo of Bhutan was also a
friend of his. He several times fought with his rebel minister:
Rinchenptiipa and was every time successful. He was decorated:
with the title of Kwa-tin Kau Sri by the Emperor.

1 Son of Rinchen Kyahb.

Vol. I, No. 8.] History of the House of Phagdu. 207
[N. 8.]

During the reign of the Phagdu dynasty all Tibet enjoyed
peace and prosperity. People became rich in money and cattle.
The country enjoyed immunity from famine and murrain, and was
not harassed by foreign invasion. Although, some petty fights
and quarrels with some of the disaffected and rapacious ministers
now and then disturbed the peace of the country, yet on the
whole, the dynasty was beneficial to Tibet.

208 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [August, 1905.

26. Additions to the Collection of Oriental Snakes in the Indian
Museum, Pari 8. (With 3 figures).—By N. ANNANDALE, B,A., ~
D.Sc.,Deputy Superintendent of the Indian Museum.

The present communication deals with a miscellaneous assem-
blage of specimens, and completes for the present my notes on recent
additions to the collection, all the Oriental species having now being
worked out and arranged!. Four new speciesand a new genus are
described below, two of the former coming from the Malay Archi-
pelago, one from N. EH. India, and one from Gilgit. Considering
the number of individuals examined, this does not represent a
large percentage of novelties; and although new forms will certainly
continue to be discovered from time to time in the remoter dis-
tricts of the Indian Empire, it is clear that we now have a good
general knowledge of the systematic ophiology of the country.
The addition of a second species of Helicops to the fauna of Asia
is interesting, while one of the new Malaysian forms is a good
example of superficial resemblance, if not of “‘Mimicry.” A new
Typhlops and a new Ablabes have no particular importance, but
must be recorded in order to complete the list.

In regard to doubtful specimens, I have made it a practice to
dissect out the jaws on one side. This seems to me to be the only
way in which it is possible to ensure a satisfactory view of the
dentition. The operation can be performed without materially
damaging the specimen externally, and if the bones are preserved
in a small tube stoppered with cotton wool in the bottle in which
the specimen is kept, they are available for future study.

TYPHLOPIDA.

TYPHLOPS MULLERI.™
A specimen from the Malay Archipelago is mottled on the
dorsal surface of the posterior part of the body with dull yellow,

the remainder of the back and sides being brown instead of black ;
but the latter peculiarity may be due to imperfect preservation.

TYPHLOPS KAPALADUA,* Sp. nov.

Diagnosis—Habit stout; length about 27 times diameter of
body ; tail much broader than long, ending in a spine; snout obtuse,
the sides rounded, moderately projecting. Rostral between 3 and 3
as broad as head, reaching the level of the eyes behind, separating
the nasals completely. Nostril lateral, almost visible from above,
with a single large subcircular pit embracing the nasal cleft
beneath it ; nasal completely divided, the cleft starting from the

1 Since this sentence was written I have obtained some further addi-
tions to the collection in the desert tract of S.E. India. They will be de-
scribed in a later communication to the Society. September 16, 1905.

Vol. 1, No.8.) . Oriental Snakes in the Indian Museum. 209
[N. S.]
second labial, not reaching the uppersurface of the head. Supra-
oculars large, frontal and parietal feebly developed. A procular;
no subocular ; the former larger than the ocular, in contact with the
second and third labials ; eye barely distinguishable. Twenty-six
scales round body. Coloration —Upper surface olive-brown, each
scale paler at the edge; upper head scales broadly edged with
yellow, a yellow [jon the snout and a wedge-shaped mark of the
same colour behind each eye; lower half of the rostral and labials
and the whole of the lower surface, yellow.
Total Length.—280 mm.
__A single specimen from the Malay Archipelago, probably
from Java.
TYPHLOPS ACUTUS.

This species appears to be commoner than any other in Cal-
eutta. It is sometimes found in native houses. I have lately had
~an opportunity of observing living specimens. When placed in a
vessel with earth at the bottom they burrowed very rapidly, pro-
vided that the earth was not too hard, forcing their way down by
~muscular action of the anterior part of the body and making a
passage no broader than their own diameter. I failed to see them
feed, but have reason to think that they eat the earthworms with
which they were supplied, at night. When taken in the hand they
coiled round one of the fingers and pressed the tip or side of their
hooked and pointed snout against the skin. They could do no in-
jury in this way to the human skin, but seemed rather to be at-
tempting to get a grip. Probably this peculiar modification may
be useful in restraining captured worms and it 1s worthy of note
that the caudal spine present in a larger number of the Typhlopide
is absent both in this form and in several exotic species in which a
beak is developed.

GLAUCONIIDA.
GLAUCONIA BLANFORDII.

G. blanfordii, Alcock and Finn, J.A.S.B., 1896, (2), p. 561.

In addition to the specimens recorded by Messrs. Alcock and
Finn, we have received during the last few years others from
Quetta (Majer G. C. Nurse); Khotri, Sind (Bombay Nat. Hist.
Soc.), and Bushire, Persia (Karachi Mus.). The relative diameter
of the body varies considerably, but the number of the scales round
it appears to be constant. Well preserved specimens have the
upper scales feebly edged with pale-brown,

COLUBRID Ai.
CALAMARIA LEUCOCEPHALA.*

Two specimens from the Malay Archipelago, one from Java.

210 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [ August, 1905.

DRYOCALAMUS TRISTRIGATUS.*

A small specimen of this rare snake from the Malay Archipelago.

TROPIDONOTUS KHASIENSIS.*

A specimen, probably from Burma, obtained by one of the Muséum
collectors.

MACROPISTHODON HIMALAYANUS.
Tropidonotus himalayanus, Boulenger, Faun, Ind., Rept., p. 347.

Dissection of the jaws of a specimen lately received from Sureil,
Darjeeling, (Major A. Alcock) shows that this species belongs to the
genus Macropisthodon. Fourteen small teeth are followed in the
maxillary, after an interspace, by two large, backward-directed
fangs. In T. subminiatus, the condition is somewhat similar, but
the interspace is not so clearly marked. Evidently the separation
between the two genera is not a natural one, but the great number of
forms included in Tropidonotus, in which I would propose to leave
submintatus, makes it convenient.

COLUBER RADIATUS.

A specimen from Cuttack, Orissa, (R. T. Crighton). I am
not aware that the species has hitherto been recorded from this
part of India. The late Prof. J. Wood-Mason corresponded with
the donor about the specimen, which has been in the Museum for
many years; but it appears to have been mislaid at the time when
Mr. W. L. Sclater was compiling his List of Snakes.

L

ABLABES BALIODIRUS.* 2,

Specimens from Java and the Malay Archipelago.

ABLABES GILGITICUS,* sp. NOV.

Diagnosis.—Habit slender; head small; tail short, ending in a
well developed spine.! Rostral deeper than broad, visible from
above; nasal divided ; eye half as long as snout; prefrontal un-
divided, its length much greater than that of the sutures between
the internasals; frontal as long as its distance from the snout,
much shorter than the parietals; one pre-and one postocular ;
loreal large, much longer than deep; temporals 1+2; 7 upper
labials, third and fourth entering eye; 4 lower labials in contact
with the anterior chin shield, which is larger than the posterior.
Scales smooth, in 15 rows; ventrals 158; anal entire; caudals 34,
Coloratvon—Back and sides dark brown, each scale edged, spotted

L A similar spine occurs in other members of the genus, notably A. rappit
but is not so large in any Indian form as in the new species.

Corrigendum Vol. I, part 8, p. 211.

Helicops indicus, Annandale= Hypsirhina enhydris (Schneid.)

Vol. I, No. 8.] Oriental Snakes in the Indian Museum, 211
[N. S8.]

or blotched with pale yellow ; ventral surface paler brown; a broad
yellow collar ; nape, labials, chin and throat, yellow.

Dimensions—

Total Length 580 .. 125 mm,
Length of Tail... ree Ste

A single specimen from Gilgit, collected and presented by
Capt. McMahon.

This species may be distinguished from any other Indian
Ablabes by its extremely short tail. It has much the facies of a
Calamaria.

HLELICOPS INDICUS,* sp. nov.
Head flat, rather viperine; snout obtuse ; canthus rostralis well

marked. Hye not more than half the length of the frontal; pupil
very small. Rostral much broader than deep, well visible from

Fig. 1.

Helicops indicus.

above, separated from the internasal, which is undivided ; frontal
more than twice as long as broad, obtusely truncated in front,
sharply pointed behind, slightly longer than its distance from
snout and than the parietals; loreal deeper than long; one
preocular, two postoculars ; temporals 142; 7 upper labials, the
fourth entering eye ; three lower labials in contact with the anter-
ior chin shield, which is shorter than the posterior. Scales
smooth, in 21 rows; ventrals 161; anal entire; sub-caudals 72.
Ooloration—dark brown above; on each side of the dorsal surface
a pale line originates at the posterior border of the parietal and
runs along the body and tail. Ventral surface dull yellow reticu-
lated more or less distinctly with dark brown ; a dark spot in the
centre of each ventral shield. Labials dull yellow marbled with
dark brown.

Dimensions—

Total Length ner .. 200 mm.
Length of Tail ... beady AO

vy)

212 » Jowrnal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. August, 1905.

Localities—

Monghyr, Bengal, and Rampore Tea Hstate, N. Cachar. Two
specimens, both purchased.

H. indicus may be distinguished from H. schestosus, the only
other Asiatic species, by its viper-like head, small eye and smooth
scales. As possibly the type specimens are immature, the colo-
ration may be more uniform in the adult than that described.

The following is a “‘ Key” for the two Indian species :—

1. Diameter of the eye more than half the length of the frontal.

Seales keeled, in 19 rows ie Ae schistosus.
2.|Diameter of the eye not more than half the length of the

frontal. ne

Scales smooth, in 21 rows; nasals in contact behind the
rostral ae Se 06 Sud indicus.

The distribution of the genus Helicops is very interesting
Species occur in Tropical Africa; in 8. and EH. India, Burma,
Ceylon, Malaya and Yunnan; in Florida, Central America, the
West Indies, and 8. America east of the Andes. The similarity
between this distribution and that of the Cecilian genus Herpele,!
which has recently been elucidated by Alcock, is striking. 1 may
point out that one of the types of Helicops indicus is from the same
locality and collection as that in which the type of Herpele fulleri
was found. This fact, seemingly trivial in itself, illustrates the
improbability of convergence or parallel development being the
explanation of all such difficulties in the study of the distribution

Vig. 2.

Helicops indicus.

of animals ; for both Helicops and Herpele are well defined and ap-
parently natural genera, having no peculiarity in common with
one another superficially or anatomically.

DIPsADOIDES, gen. nov.

Family Colubride ; sub-family Dipsadomorphine.
Head distinct from body ; eye large, with circular pupil; body

1 Ann. Mag. N. H. (xix), 1904, p. 267.

Vol. I, No. 8.] Oriental Snakes in the Indian Museum. 213
EN So]

strongly compressed, with dorsal row of scales enlarged through-
out, scales in rows of uneven numbers (19 in type), with apical
pits; caudals divided. Palate toothed ; solid maxillary teeth few
(6 in type), subequal, followed, after a short interspace, by a pair
of moderately sized, almost vertical grooved fangs; mandibular
teeth subequal.

Fig. 3.
Right maxillary of Dipsadoides decipiens.

DIPSADOIDES DECIPIENS,* sp. nov.

Head small, flattened, very distinct from neck; snout short,
obtusely rounded ; eye prominent, nearly as long as snout; nostril
large, directed backwards, in undivided nostril. Tail slender,
tapering. Rostral broader than deep, just visible from above. In-
ternasals larger than preefrontals ; frontal longer than broad, as
long as its distance from snout, slightly shorter than parietals; a
large preocular and a small postocular ; supraocular very large;
loreal deeper than long; temporals 2+ 2; eight upper labials, the
third, fourth and fifth entering the eye; two large subequal chin
shields, the anterior in contact with four labials, both in contact
with their neighbours. Body scales narrow, leaf-shaped, slightly
oblique on neck, strongly imbricate ; in 19 rows; the dorsal row
enlarged throughout, broader than long. Ventrals rounded at
the edge, keeled at either side, 258 in number ; anal entire ; caudals
152. Coloration—dorsal surface and sides pale brown profusely
spotted and marbled with dark brown and, less profusely, with dull
yellow ; a large number of irregular dark bars on the dorsal sur-
face. Ventral surface dull yellow marbled posteriorly with dark
brown; chin and throat spotted with dark brown.

Dimensions—

Total Length a soo GIO) satbai,
Length of Tail... w. 265

Habitat. Malay Archipelago, A single specimen.

This remarkable snake was confused at first sight with some
specimens of Dipsadomorphus cynodon in the same collection to
which it bore a close external resemblance. It is one of the many
interesting species received from the Royal Natural History Society
of Batavia.

99

Bonearvs stnpanvs*, Bler.

B. sindanus, Boulenger, Journ. Bombay N. H. Soc. XI, 1897-
1898, p. 73, pl.

214 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [ August, 1995.

A specimen 645 inches long has lately been sent to the
Museum from the Zoological Garden, Alipore. The Superintend-
ent of the Gardens tells me that it was captured at Midnapore,
Lower Bengal, by a reliable collector and arrived at the Gardens
early in 1896, It must, therefore, have lived in captivity for nine
years. The Giant Krait, as this species may be called, has hither-
to been recorded only from Sind, but probably occurs, somewhat
sparingly, all over northern India.

Vol. I, No. 8.] Kantabudiyas of Cuttack. 415
LN. 9.]
27, Note on the Kantabudiyds of Cuttack.— By Jamin1 Mowan Dae.
Communicated by the Anthropological Secretary.

The Kantabudiya caste numbers less than one thousand per-
sons, and is confined to the Cuttack District. The family titles
are Khuntiya, Parira, Nayak, Lenka, Sahu, Baru, Behara, Raut,
and Mahanti. Most of these are also titles of the Khandaits and
Chasas, and the Kantabudiyas may have been degraded from one
of these castes because they took to the occupation of dealing in
tobacco. The members of the caste claim that it is an offshoot of
the Khandait caste. They use the same Santak or signature mark
as the Khandaits—the Katari or dagger, Like the Khandaits, they
assume the sacred thread at marriage, but unlike them, they only
wear it for eight days and not permanently. They account for
their name by a legend that they are the descendants of a found-
ling who was abandoned near a thorny bush (Kantabuda) but
tradition does not give any further particulars as to his origin or
history. The caste is divided into two totemistic gotras, Kacchap
and Nagasa, the members of which revere the tortoise and the
cobra respectively. These groups are neither endogamous nor ex-
ogamous. There are no endogamous groups within the caste.
The exogamous limit is formed by the family title. A Khuntiya
for instance may marry a Parira but not another Khuntiya.
Similarly, a person may not marry into a family which bears the
same title as his maternal grandfather.

Widow re-marriage is allowed. Divorce is permitted on the
eround of unchastity. There is nothing to prevent the re-marriage
of a woman who has been divorced, if any one will take her.
Polygamy is not practised unless the first wife is barren or suffers
from an incurable disease.

The Kantabudiyas belong to the Vaisnava sect. Adhikari
Brahmans act as their priests, and Brahman and Karan Vaisnavas
as their gurus. In all essential respects they follow the marriage
customs of the Khandaits and Chasas.

Persons who die before marriage are buried. Others are
buried or burned according to convenience. Mourning continues
for ten days and the Sraddha is performed on the eleventh day.

The traditional occupation of the caste is dealing in tobacco
and turmeric, but about half of the members now combine agricul-
ture with it. There is no organised caste council; meetings of
the caste are presided over by the most learned or intelligent
member present.

In the matter of food and drink, the Kantabudiyas follow the
customs of the Khandaits and Chasas, who will not, however, take
any food from them. The higher castes will not take their water,
but they are served by the barber and washerman. The Gauras,
however, will neither carry their palkis nor eat in their houses, and
this alone is sufficient to show that they rank lower than the
Khandaits and Chasas. As a consequence of this custom, the
Kantabudiya bridegrooms walk on foot in their marriage proces-
$1008.

— oe SS

Nee rie
ae

Topp
r

Mo ee

Beane

“tg
or
is
=

abd.

a

>
pads a

INDEX SLIP,

GEOLOGY.
Morony, E.—Some remarks on the Geology of the Gangetic
Plain. Jour. and Proc. As, Soc. Bengal, Vol. I, No, 9, 1905,
(N.S.), pp. 230-235.

ZOOLOGY.

AnnanpaLe, N.—Notes on the Species, Habits and external
characters of the Dugong. Jour, and Proc. As. Soe. Bengal,
Vol. I, No. 9, 1905, (N.S.), pp. 238-243, with three plates.

BOTANY.

Gags, A. T.— Hedyotis sisaparensis : a hitherto undescribed In-
dian species. Jour. and Proc. As. Soc. Bengal, Vol. I, No. 9,
1905, (N.S.), p. 244.

CURENY

ee

Vol. I, No. 9.) Dignaga and his Pramana-samuccaya. 217
[N.S]

28. Dignaiga and his Pramana-samuccaya.—By Saris CHANDRA
VipyAsytsana, M.A.

Hindu philosophy is divided into six principal systems of

iS ea which the Nyaya is one. This Nyaya

Distinction be- again is divided into two schools called re-
Meee avd csaorn spectively the ancient Nyaya and modern
Nyaya. Nyaya. The distinction between the two
schools is this: the ancient Ny4aya treats of

atoms, properties of atoms, souls, the transmigration of the soul,
mind, God, etc., as well as of processes of perception, inferences,
and the like, while the modern Nyaya deals only with the methods
of perception, inference, etc. The object of the ancient Nyaya is to
explain the means of salvation, while that of the modern Nyaya is
to give an exposition of the fundamental principles of reasoning.
This shows that the ancient Nyaya is a mixture of physics, meta-
physics, theology, logic, etce., while the modern Nyaya is exactly

identical with what we understand by the term logic.

As this modern Nyaya is the most favourite and honoured

ae . subject of study in the Sanskrit tols (acade-

Buddhistic ori- mies) of Bengal, it is worth while to trace
gin of the modern . eee
Nyaya. its origin. There can be no doubt as to the

modern Nyaya having been developed from
the ancient Nyaya, but nothing can be definitely stated as to how
and when it was so developed. The first extant work on ancient
Nyaya is undoubtedly Gotama’s Nyaya Sitra dated about 500 B.C.,
but we do not know definitely what was the first work on modern
Nyaya.

7 It was for a long time the universal belief of the Pandits of :
our country that the Pramana-cintamani, compiled by Gangesa
Upadhyaya of Mithila in the 14th century A.D, was the oldest
work on modern Nyaya. But this belief of the Pandits was shaken
nearly sixteen years ago by Professor Peterson, who published
under the auspices of the Asiatic Society of Bengal a Buddhist
Sanskrit work on modern Ny@ya, called Nyayabindu, by Dharma-
kirti. This work, which was dated the 7th century A.D., at once
showed that Gafiigesa Upadhyaya’s Pramana-cintamani could not
have been the first work on modern Nyaya Recently another re-
volution has been caused in our theories by the literary collection
of the late Tibet Mission. The Mission has brought from Gyantse
the Tibetan version of another Buddhist Sanskrit work on modern
Nyaya, called Pramana-samuccaya, compiled by the Buddhist logi-
cian Dignaga who flourished long before Dharmakirti. The Sans-
krit original of this work is not available in India or Nepal and has
perhaps been lost. But the Tibetan version and numerous authori-
tative commentaries on the same show in unmistakable terms that
this work is the earliest at present known work on modern Nyaya.

In Tibetan there are numerous treatises on. logic by various
Indian Buddhist authors. These treatises are contained in the
Tangyur, section Mdo, volumes 95-116. There the first work on

e

218 = Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1905.

logic is Pramanasamuccaya by Dignaga. The next work is Pra-
mana-vartika-karika (or a commentary in verse on the above).
Then follows Pramana-vartikalahkaéra, and so on. Jinendrabodhi’s
excellent commentary on the Pramana-samuccaya, called Visalama-
lavati-nama-Pramana-samuccaya-tika,! is also to be found there.
Nyayabindu, Pramana-viniscaya and other excellent Buddhist
works on logic are also preserved there. The Tangyur, containing
all these wor ‘ks, has been brought from Gyantse by the Tibet Mission,
and is now deposited in the British Museum, London. Nearly
eighty years ago another set of the Tangyur was brought from
Tibet by the late Mr. B. H. Hodgson. That set is now contained in
the library of the India Office, London. These excellent and old
works on logic lead us to conclude that the credit of having
founded the modern Nyaéya must be attributed to the Buddhists,
among whom there were numerous logicians such as iignaga,
Dharmakirti, Dharmottara, Vinitadeva, Santabhadra, Akalanka-
deva, Jinendrabodhi, Kamalasila and otners. These Buddhist
writers had flourished long before the Brahmanic logician Gangesa
Upadhyaya compiled his Pramana-cintamani.

The circumstance which led the Buddhists to forsake the
ancient Nyaya and to lay the foundation of a new system called
modern Nyaya was due to the peculiarity of the religion which
they professed. Having considered the sixteen categories treated
in the ancient Nyaya to be redundant and some of them as mainly
based on the orthodox principles of the Hindus, the Buddhists took
up only one category, viz., Prama@na (evidence of knowledge), and
treated it in such a way that the doctrine of evidence might be
equally applied to the religious systems of the Hindus and Bnd-
dhists. The attempt on the part of the Buddhists to divest the
principles of logic from those of theology, metaphysics, etc., was
the cause of the foundation of the modern Nyaya, otherwise called
Tarka-sastra or Logic proper.

As Pramana-samuccaya (Tibetan: ay RY mg sie) is the

earliest-known work on the Buddhist Nyaya,
a short account? of its author may be of
some interest to the reader. Dignaga (Tib. Phyogs-glan
SAV AIC ) the celebrated author of this work, was born in a

Life of Dignaga.

Brahman family in the south near the country of Kafici bordering
on the city of Simhavakta, and acquired vast knowledge in all
Tirtha systems. By Nagadatta the Pandit of the Vatsiputriya
school he was admitted to the religious system of that school and

! This work (together with the Tibetan version of the Nyaya-bindu-tika,
Caudra-vyakarna and Tara stotra) has been kindly lent to me for six months
by the Government of nel

® Vide SQ Qua’ aa Qa" Pag-sam-jon-zang (pages 100-101), editea

by Rai Sarat Chandra Das, Bahadur, C.I.E., and Lama Taranatha’s Buddhism,
Schiefner, pp. 130-185.

Vol. I, No. 9.) Digniiga and his Pramana-samuccaya. 219

[ N.S. ]
attained erudition in the Tripitaka of the Sravaka. Afterwards he
became a disciple of Acaryya Vasubandhu, with whom he studied
all the Pitakas of the Mahayana and Hinayana. When he had
specially obtained incantation formula from a mantra-knowing
Acaryya and practised sorcery, he saw the face of Manjusri and
learned the dharma (Law) from him. He resided ina solitary and
woody country in the land of Orissa in a cavern of a mountain
called Bhorasila, and gave himself entirely up to contemplation.

A few years later he was invited at Nalanda, where he
defeated the Brahman Sudurjaya and other Tirtha dialecticians
and led them into the doctrine of Buddha He expounded many
Siitras to the religious body, spread the Abhidharma, and composed
several logical and dialectical Sastras. He is said to have com-
posed one hundred sastras in all. Returning to Orissa he busied
himself with contemplation. Seeing that the Sastras on Dialectics,
composed earlier by him, remained scattered about, he resolved to

wae collect them. Accordingly, putting together

maven oo fragments from particular works, he engaged

ciya himself in compiling the Pramanasamuccaya

(Tib. Tshad-mahi-mdo-kun-las-btus-pa, or

simply, Tshad-ma-kun-btus) in which at the opening lines he pays
obeisance to Buddha :—

AAAI TAT ANG S52 |

PFVIF AN HVAT ASIA |

“Having bowed down before Him who is Logic incarnate, the
benefactor of all creatures, the teacher, Sugata and the protector.”’...

While he was writing the opening lines the earth trembled
and all the places were filled with light and a great tumult was
audible. A Brahman named I[svara.Krsna,! surprised at this
wonder, came to Acaryya Dignaya, and, finding that he had gone
out to collect alms, wiped out the words he had written. When in
this manner he had wiped them out twice, Dignaga wrote them a
third time and added—“ Let no one wipe this out even in jest and
sport, for none should wipe out what is of great importance ; if the
sense is not right and one wishes to dispute on that account, let
one appear before me in person.” When, after he had gone to col-
lect alms, the Brahman came to wipe out the writings and saw
what was added, he waited. When the Aciryya had returned they
began controversy, either staking his own doctrine. When he had
vanquished the Tirtha several times and challenged him to accept
the Buddhist doctrine, the Tirtha scattered ashes, pronounced in-
cantation formula on them and burnt all the goods of the Acaryya;

' Krsn-ISvara, or simply Krsna, seems to be the sameas Isvara Krsna, the
celebrated author of Samkhya-Karika, which was translated into Chinese by
Paramartha, A.D. 557-56), noticed in Nanjio’s Catalogue, No. 1300. The

Tibetan name is 45) QW’ AQ' XY = Krsna-’1svara.

220 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1905.

and when the Acaryya was kept back by the conflagration the
Tirtha went away. Thereupon Dignaga reflected that when he
could not work the salvation of this single individual he would not
be able to work that of others, and was on the point of giving up
his purpose (of compiling Pramana-samuccaya). Aryya Mafijusri
appeared to him in person and said :—

BATHE FA SATE NAT ATES SS

ay ry ny 5 ssrazarah ara SaNAA] aI MSNA] x sr aa ZIR:
AA

BA Dsrsrar ga SS 55719 are CASS] |

Ey a1e SARAH TSIM STATIS FAH AINA ||

‘“‘Son, don’t do so, don’t do so: owing to contact with a low
person there has arisen a bad thought in thee: know that the
Tirtha crowd cannot harm this Sastra of thine: since I shall remain
thy spiritual adviser until thou attainest perfection, this Sastra
will henceforth become the sole eye of all the Sastras.”

The Acaryya asked :-—

SSA TA STB USER AT ATA a
RAIN ESAT TATA SH TATATA CE

x Be scl ARS ATIA a5 ation! 5 Aga “NE” |
RATTAN STANA TAINS VS IFAS |

“Tf IT am to suffer many unbearable misfortunes and have to
rejoice in the practice of an ignoble being, and if it is difficult to
meet with a noble one, what profits it to me to see thy countenance
if thou dost not bless me ?”

Mafijusri replied, “‘ Trouble*thyself not, I will protect thee
from all terrors,” and disappeared. Thereupon Dignaga completed
the Sastra.

Once he was slightly ill and obtained alms from the city ;
and having fallen asleep while staying in a
forest he dreamed adream. In that dream
he saw the face of many Buddhas and at-
tained many samadhis. Hesaw many gods pouring rain of flowers,
and the flowers of the wood coming together before him and the
elephants affording him cool shade. The king of the country, who
had gone for a pleasure excursion with a troop, saw him and, full
of admiration, he caused him to be awakened from sleep by the notes

Supernatural
powers of Dignaga.

Vol. I, No. 9.] = Dignaga and his Pramana-samuccaya. 221

[N.S.]

of music. Being asked whether he was Dignaga, he replied in the
affirmative, and the king fell at his feet. Subsequently he travelled
to the south, chiefly meeting his Tirtha controversalists in discus-
sions.

He restored, for the most part, the schools of religion founded
by the former Acaryyas. Again, at Orissa, he converted to
Buddhism Bhadrapalita, the treasury minister of the king. This
Brahman founded sixteen viharas and placed religious men in them.
As a proof of the perfect purity of his character, the stem of a
Myrobalan tree, called Mustiharitaki, which cured all diseases and
which was to be found in the garden of this Brahman, having been
entirely withered, revived in seven days after the Acaryya had
uttered an incantation for its restoration.

Since he had refuted chiefly the Tirtha controversalists, he was
called the “ Fighting Bull” (Sanskrit: Tarkapungava; Tibetan :

VV nN — ° . . o
EN AIQA TH AAA His pupils, combined together by religion, filled
Aa EA)

all countries, but he had not with hima single Sa@manera who could
succeed him. Since he was a man of limited desires and content-
ment, he performed during his life-time the twelve tested virtues
and died in a solitary wood of Orissa.
In the works of the Chinese pilgrims the name Dignaga is not
finn 6 oidentified mentioned at all. But there occurs the
with Dignaga name Jina, which I suppose to be identical
: with Dignaga. Dignaga in the Brahmanic
works, especially in those of Udyotakara and Vacaspati Misra, is
designated as a Bhadanta. Similarly Jina in Chinese books,
specially in those of I-tsing, is mentioned as one of the ten Bhadan-
tas {vide I-tsing’s Takakusu, p. 181). As Dignaéga in Sanskrit
and Tibetan books is known as an eminent logician, so is Jina in
Chinese books. Thus I-tsing observes (Takakusu, p. 184) :—
“ When they have understood the arguments of Hetuvidya (logic),
they aspire to be like Jina (the great reformer of logic). I-tsing
continues (Takakusu, p. 188) :—‘‘ When a priest wishes to distin-
guish himself in the study of logic he should thoroughly under-
stand Jina’s eight S/astras.” These, according to I-tsing, are :—

1. The Sastra on the Meditation of the Three Worlds (not

found).

2. Sarva-laksana-dhyana-sastra (kariki)—(Nanjio’s Cata-
logue, No. 1229),

The Sastra on the Meditation on the Object. Probably
Alambana-pratyaya-dhyana-sastra (Nanjio’s Cata-
logue, No. 1173).

4, The Sastra on the Gate of the Cause (Hetu-dvara)—(not
found).

The S/astra on the Gate of the Resembling Cause (not
found ).

6. The Nyaya-dvara (taraka) S/astra (by Nagarjuna ?)—

(Nanjio’s Catalogue, Nos, 1223, 1224),

wo

Or

222 = Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [| November; 1905

7. Prajiiapti-hetu-sangraha (?) Sastra—(Nanjio’s Cata-
logue, No. 1228).
8. The Sastra on the grouped inferences (not found).

The seventh book, called Prajnapti-hetu-sangraha, compiled by
Jina, seems to be identical with Pramana-samuccaya which, besides
ninety-nine other works, was compiled by Dignaga.

According to I-tsing (Takakusu, p. 182) Dharmakirti made
a further improvement in logic after Jina. From Indian sources too
(such as from Nyaya-bindu) we know that Dharmakirti was a
distinguished successor of Dignaga and a commentator on his works
(vide K. B. Pathaka’s article on the authorship of Nyayabindu in the
Journal of the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, 1895,
Vol. XIX, No. LI, pp. 47-57; also G. A. Jacob’s Note on the
authorship of Nyaya-bindu in the London Royal Asiatic Society’s
Journal, April 1905, pp. 361—362).

Hwen-thsang (vide Beal’s Buddhistic Record of the Western
World) mentions Jina as having been born in the country of
Andhra in the south. We have already seen that Dignaga was
born near the country of Kafici in the south, probably in the
dominion of the Andhras.

The facts stated above go to show that Dignaga and Jina were
the same person. As a matter of fact Jina seems to be only a
Chinese phonetic equivalent for Dignaga.

So it appears that Dignaga (Tibetan: phyogs-glan) was

: variously named as Jinu (victor) Bhadanta }
of Disuses names (a venerable monk) and Acaryya (as in

; Nyayabindu, the Tibetan equivalent being
Slob-dpon). He was also called Mahadiqnagarjuna (vide Hitel’s
Dictionary of Chinese Buddhism), and is thus often mistaken for
Nagarjuna. This explains the fact that Nyaya-dvara-taraka-sastra,
really composed by Dignaga, has been attributed to Nagarjuna.
Dignaga also bore the title of Tarkapungava (a fighting bull) ; while
his Brahmanic opponents gave him the title of Ku-tarkika (a
quibbler).

Besides the allusion to Dignaga in Kalidasa’s Meghadtta 2
we come across several of his actual views
criticised by such eminent authorities as
Udyotakara, Vacaspati Misra and others.

Brahmanic refer-
ences to Dignaga.

I The word Bhadanta in the vocative case assumes the forms Bhaddanta
and Bhante. Compare HSAW Vs wa (2-8-e4) Kaeccayana, p. 141,
edited by Satis Chandra Vidvabhisana,). A junior monk should address a
senior monk by calling him Bhante or Ayasma. So Buddha says —AqaAt aH

frager acact free wate ot sraerfa at eyerefCASt (Mahaparinib-
banasuttta, Bhanavara, 6) :
2 we weg wife uaa: fafafearnal fi:
eaiaiesfaaufa qrafasisarf: |

Vol. I, No. 9.] — Dignaga and his Pramana-samuccaya. 223

[N.S.]

Udyotakara in his Nyaya-vartika! mentions Dignaga under
the name of Bhadanta, and describes him as a Ku-tarkika. Vacas-
pati Misra, in his Tatparyatika? on the Nyadyavartika has identified
Bhadanta with Dignaga, has mentioned Dignaga by name and has
tried to justify his appellation Ku-tarkika. Dignaga’s definition of
Pratyaksa (perception) has been mentioned by Udyotakara and
Vacaspati Misra? thus :—yeapet amaqigiea | “ Perception is (intui-
tive and therefore) exempt from reflection.” *

wiTeHiaratagagunesgqu: G
fesatatat ufy ufawigq WAS MITU I
( Fea, Waae:, c8 ) I

The commentator Mallinatha says that Dignaga referred to in this verse
was the Buddhist philosopher of that name.

1 qemqure: yaqat aatai
Wal Wes Anat Aare :
qRatfaatataftsiasa:
afoea ay wat faqar | ( araattaan, & 2,
edited by Vindhyesvari Prasada Dube, in Bibliotheca Indica series).

2 gay ulaMal Haaaesaaq auity fesatagewfatue-
alaia: qeaamAe-aqe@uaa saifed ae a avatanaa
yarafaaentanen afagateriaa acuaiad xfa yatsaqa-
Alcea a | P.1, Nyayavartika-tatparyyatika, edited by Gangadhar Sastri

wat q Far sad aaatutefale | we Fa Raa aA
aifaaiaafa | aa fanaa ata afadaa a a stenfefuad-
fezaa faaaqemgfauifa ufemennimedaed aq vadfafa |
.. Be ae atsat afte saat Baa: He yaa Raar-
Wizfata waa area afta a afwaafafa atsat wens
amneta |
x ( araqifrar, 2-0-8, Bi 88-88 ) I
afe aut aquaiafaae sania ad aifaar
amr fesartia Jahan ai gafasa aaatetata wa |
( araaifaaareaetat, t-%-8, B Ver) |
4 The same definition of Pratyaksa (perception) occurs in Dignaga’s

Pramanasamuccaya. Compare the Tibetan version of the Pramanasamuccaya
in the Tangyur. section Mdo, volume XCY, fol. 2a, quoted by Prof, De La

224. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [ November, 1905.

Regarding anumdana (inference)! Dignaga, according to Udyo-
takara and Vacaspati, says:— By seeing smoke, we do not, as it
has been usually asserted, infer two things—vzz., (1) fire, and (2)
the connection between fire and the place which is the abode of
fire; but we infer only one thing—v7z., the place as containing the
fire.

Udyotakara and Vacaspati further inform us that Dignaga
did not accept wpamdna (comparison)? and G@ptavacana (testi-

Vallee-Poussin in the Museon; vide Prof. Poussin’s Extrait du Museon, p. 53.
The definition runs as follows HOG Fars a Y'5G 29 QZT |
lfm wa: sta aaa sfauga fa faanfaa va 22a va
aut vatfuari e941)... Bhar em af VqQ a NHe
a
BASMATT ...... ( BIA, %--¥, BWA ) |

aa feats gaiefeumlaigaag afar: aa-
Waa a zafaar afatatrstaiqaT aafaaq aut ae |

afaz uatac aa fayeafeatea: |
aaj afafemin fasareshufear: |
fay ua ofas Sq faq aa tae |
aru ufaitu awa faae aqaaat |
waaisfy ea aif wat wad Tata |
Harsaisqee aaa ara faraga: |

( araaitoat aterey StHT, {-t-¥, Bi rre ) |

2yamaara atuad fuga, wafafa) aet avait
alan uaa uta) act qaata aey sfa yada:
ufauga : aetfa yeatfa azar mea maqq xfa ache waqa wq
atearmiad afae materi away safaa sustaadt afas
afatfaa xfa agar fe au adaa 4 wiq ya MED Tat
Taq sad oufauaa «ata yauamarat fuad
sfa! mat nawergm uvfaua aqaani afti set
TaMfUaa wey Wal Tawareugfayae Wal-afa-aaqeay
ufauga sfa aati | a@nedfesta aare afafyeud |
( Tal Y-R-2, Bi ged ) |
agigngramaad Bae wea agalafa

Vol. I, No. 9.) Diynaga and lis Pramana-samaccaya. 225.

[ENE S=)|
mony)! as separate forms of evidence, but included the former in
perception and the latter in perception and inference. Dignaga
eriticised Vatsyayana’s inclusion of manas (mind)? among the sense-
organs, while his own theory of sdntaratva (interstice or interval) 3
was criticised by Udyotakara and Vacaspati.

Dignaga is said to have cited an instance of inference contrary
to perception, and his view was criticised by Kumarila Bhatta, as
we learn from Parthasarathi Misra’s gloss. on 59-60, Anumana-
pariccheda of Kumarila’s vartika on the 5th stitra of Jaimini.
Udyotakara and Vacaspati Misra too* criticise the same view of
Dignaga.

aitwarastafs writ wert fesan aifaqufa ...
Hematiaagienfa |

( qraattaen ates Star, Y-e-¢, BW Vay)

Lerman sfa faamima sfadafes at sfauaa
setfaeie ayia sfa | afe sraata wfawafes ufautaa
qeqaig | By wie aun: atsfe yada) aur
Gaia yaamasya aet auntie yfauaa sfa | aq |
aaraiefeaiatg | ate ears: | sraluem: wee sft | fag
tiqieaeaqey aye at wete@a ofauta: aad: |
qwaizaraatse fraren: |

( ataarfia 3-7-9, B ¢2 )

Ba We yawmiaeaaramat feguaaaqaa fanaa
saifauta | ( araatfamaraaeya 1-1-9, Bi wes)

2 qed HARB Ula Bela | aefaa fesatata—
afiguicuid Seafeaad Ta |

( qraattarRaTaeS tA 2-0-8, Bi €9-es ) |
saute fesaitia | arated a wig wet sasha a
( mraatfimreaaint 7-2-8, Bi O¢-99 ) |
aq ua fecatta vadfaasaquigqered acuta |

aut uafafa | aatam wee Ramate veifeafefa sata
weqeqaqqauta |

( araarfrmaimeaetat 2-2-2, B32 ) |

226 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1905.

Jayanta in his Nyayamafjari (3rd ahnika, p. 131, Vizianaga-
ram Sanskrit series) probably alludes to Dignaga in the subject
called “ Bhadanta-kalaha.”

I have already referred to the fact that Dharmakirti wrote a

av commentary! on a certain work of Dignaga

seeets DieineE besides cine to his logical views in the

* Nyaya-bindu. It was Dharmottaracaryya?

who explicitly mentioned Dignaga sometimes under that name, but

often under the name of Dignagacaryya or simply Acaryya.

Jinendrabodhi? and others wrote commentaries on Pramanasa-
muccaya of Dignaga.

The exact date of Dignaiga is not known. On the authority of
Mallinatha we have found that Dignaga was
an opponent of Kalidasa, and from Tibetan
sources we have seen that he was a contemporary of one Isvara-
Krsna who, I believe, was no other person than the celebrated
author of the Samkhya-karikaé. From Sanskrit sources we have
further learnt that Dignaga was anterior to Udyotakara but pos-
terior to Vatsyfyana, and that Kumarila Bhatta and Dharmakirti
flourished after the time of Dignaga. But these facts do not help
us much, as the dates of most of these writers are unknown. From
Chinese sources we know that Isvara-Krsna’s Samkhya-karika was
translated into Chinese by Paramartha 557-567 A.D. (Nanjio’s Cat.,

Dignaga’s date.

| Compare.
aa y faag aramfecatatea: | a: wey aifeaaTeT
Hai mat ate: | (arafagetat B: 9s) |
2 aq saa faegrafuaty daasaem: |
( arafagelat, Use ) 1
aaga Bawa | aa fas ata |
( wrafagetat, a se ) |
q afe sialafenaitaa Sq ate SA RAIS |
rafagetar, a: Se ) |
aaa fanmighiaat sa srawafa |
( aiafagetat, B Sy) |

® Jinendrabodhi’s commentary on Pramana-samuccaya is named “ Visala-
malavati nama Pramana-samuccaya-tika ’—Tibetan UGA YRS a as’
v ’ , ~ : “ ° v v v, iA © = ve
NSO My EV I AVA a My YAN AVY 2 Aqq WAH by FA
vy We ~~
Na’ SQAQGQAN| It is contained in the Tangyur, section Mdo-

Volume Re.

Vol. I, No. 9.] Dignaga and his Pramana-samaccaya. 227
[N.S.]

1300). One of Jina’s works was also translated about the same time
and by the same translator (Nanjio’s Catalogue i. 10). We have
already seen that Jina was identical with Dignaga. These lead us
to conclude that Dignaga flourished before 557 A.D.

From Tibetan sources we have further found that Dignaga
was a disciple of Vasubandhu. Now Vasubandhu! was contem-
porary of Lha-tho-ri, King of Tibet who lived up to 371 A.D.?
There seems to have existed a Sanskrit work? on the life of Vasu-
bandhu which was translated into Chinese by Kumarajiva A.D.
401-409. These facts go to show that Vasubandhu lived in the
middle of the 4th century A.D. and Dignaga about 400 A.D.*

1 Vide Pag-sam-jon-zang.

* Csoma De Koros’s Tibetan Grammar, p. 182.

8 Nanjio’s Catalogue, Appendix i. 6.

4 Mr. Takakusu in a very learned article on Vasubandhu, published in the
Journal of the London Royal Asiatic Society, January 1905, fixes the date of
Vasubandhu at about A.D. 920-500. According to this theory Dignaga must
have flourished about 500 A.D. Takakusu’s chief argument is that Samgha-
bhadra was a contemporary of Vasubandhu (vide Hwen thsang, I-tsing,
Paramartha’s Life of Vasubandhu, etc.), and was the translator of the Saman-
tapasadika of Buddhaghosa into Chinese in 488 A.D.

Bld NY Co ee ee SI eR Py -

228 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1905.

29. Vidyapati Thakur.—By G. A. Grierson, C.1.H., Pu.D.,
D. Litr., Honorary Member of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

I have read with great interest the account of the collection
of Vidyapati’s poems, which is given by Babt. Nagendra Nath
Gupta on pp. 20 and ff. of the Extra No of Vol. LXXIII, Part
I, of the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. He has been
kind enough to refer to the small collection of songs published by
me about twenty-three years ago. In order to facilitate his
labours, may I state at once that I have learnt a good deal since
then, and that I by no means maintain all that I wrote about
Vidyapati in 1882.

Babt' Nagendra Nath Gupta refers to the deed of gift of the
village of Bisphi as if he considered it to be a genuine document.
I am afraid that this contention can hardly be sustained. The
plate contains a date in the Fasli San, and that date was lone
before the Fasli era had been invented. He will find a facsimile
of the grant in the Proceedings of the Society for August, 1895.
My reasons for considering it to be spurious are given in fall on
page 96 of Vol. LXVIIT (1899), Part I, of the Journal. See also
Dr. Eggeling’s Catalogue of Sanskrit MSS. in the India Office
Library, Part IV, No. 2864.

The following list of articles on Vidyapati may be useful :—

J. Beames. The Harly Vaishnava Poets of Bengal. Indian
Antiquary, II, 1873, p. 37.

J. Beames. On the Age and Country of Vidyapati. Ibid. IV,
1875, p. 299.

Article in the Banga-dargan, Vol. IV, 1282 B.S. (Jyaistha),

Badia:
: Sarada-caran Maitra. Introduction to Vidyapatir Padavali.
Second edition, Calcutta, 1285, B.S.

G. A. Grierson. Vidydpati and His Contemporaries. Indian
Antiquary, Vol. XIV, 1885, p. 182.

G. A. Grierson. On some Medieval Kings of Mithila. Ibid.
Vol. XXVIII, 1899, p. 57.

Pandit Chanda Jha, referred to by Babi Nagendra Nath
Gupta, has published a useful edition of the Sanskrit text of the
Purusapariksa, together with a translation into Maithili. It was
printed at the Raj Press, Darbhanga, in 1296 F.S. He has added
a valuable Appendix dealing with historical questions, and con-
taining frequent quotations from the Kirtti-lata, a work of Vidya-
pati partly written in the Maithili of his time. If these quotations
are correct, they show that the vernacular of the poet’s time
differed widely from modern Maithili, and was rather a form of
Prakrit.

I believe that Mahamahopadhyaya Pandit Hara Prasad
Sastri discovered a very old collection of Vidyadpati’s poems in
Népal in the year 1899. He was kind enough to send me a copy
of one of them, which showed much the same Prakritic appear-
ance. I had published a current version of the same song in my

Role I Nox 9:| Vidyapati Thakur. 229
[N.S.]
edition of 1882, and the points of difference showed that there
had been extensive modernization in the language of my copy.
The same is no doubt also true with regard to all the genuine
songs in my collection.
I am very glad to learn that an attempt is going to be made
to publish a correct text of the dainty sonnets of the old Master-

Singer, and I look forward to its appearance with pleasant anti-
cipations.

230 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. | November, 1905.

30. Some remarks on the Geology of the Gangetic Plain.—By
EK. Motony. [With one plate. |

It requires no argument to prove that the present gangetic
plain is the alluvial deposit of the river Ganges, and that the
whole of the area of the gangetic plain south of the Himalayas.
must at one time have consisted of a network of morasses and
river-channels very similar to the Sunderbans at the present time.
It is also evident that, over the whole area of the United Pro-
vinces of Agra and Oudh, so far from the Ganges being at pre-
sent engaged in raising its flood plain, it has become an agent of
denudation, and has, long since, entered on the work of denuding
the whole of its plain which lies above flood-level.

It may be taken as proved that this great change has been
occasioned by the submergence of the area at the mouth of the
river.

The period at which this important movement took place
must have been very remote.

The river has eroded a bed in the old alluvium which is in
many places several miles in width.

Within the limits of the former bed there is a considerable
amount of later alluvium, but it varies very much from the older
alluvium in its characteristics, and, in most places, there is a very
well-marked line of demarcation between them

Most of the recent alluvium is liable to be flooded during
high floods of the Ganges, though there is some which has never
been flooded during the memory of man. This is probably due to
deposit of sand and light soil by the action of the wind during
the hot weather.

In the recent alluvium the substratum is nearly always pure
river sand, the finer soils being deposited in shallow water where
the current is usually less.

Another difference is that the recent alluvium never contains.
nodular limestone (kwnkar), which occurs in most places in the
old alluvial deposits.

I have perhaps made this assertion more positive than the
text-books would appear to warrant, but I have never come across
an instance in which kunkar was found in soil that clearly
belonged to the recent alluvium, though I have occasionally found
it in a locality near the boundary of the new and old alluvium.

The soil also differs, the recent alluvium being generally
much more fertile, at any rate in the eastern portion of the United
Provinces, where the recent alluvium contains a percentage of the
black cotton soil brought down by the Jumna and its tributaries
from Central India.

The area that lies between the extreme limits up to which
the Ganges has excavated its bed in the old alluvium may be
styled the ‘ Khadir.”

Having had good opportunities for observation in the Ghazipur

Vol. I, No. 9.] The Geology of the Gangetic Plain. 231
eee ENS):

District, I have marked in on a map of the district the limits of
the “ Khadir.”

I may say that in some places the limit of the “ Khadir” is
exceedingly plain, whereas in other places it is not at all so plain
.to the eye.

However, by tracing the line from one curve which is well
defined and following slight indications, it is almost always pos-
sible to follow the line till it reaches another point where the
indications are again quite unmistakeable.

In the Ghazipur district the only part where, in my opinion,
the line is really doubtful, is the western edge of the island of old
alluvium opposite the confluence of the Ganges and Karmnasa.
Both the northern and the southern edges of that island are
extremely well defined as far west as a line drawn north and
south just west of Birpur; but the western edge is very ill-
defined.

In my opinion, two causes have united to create this diffi-
culty. The first is the proximity of the deep stream of the Gan-
ges within comparatively recent years, which has led to a great.
accumulation of water-borne material; and the second is the prox-
imity to the west of the boundary of a large sandy tract whence
a considerable amount of material has probably been blown by
the strong west winds which prevail during the early part of the
hot weather.

It is clear that at any particular time each bank of the river
must have concave bends alternating with convex bends. Ceniri-
fugal force throws the current against the concave bends and
away from the convex bends. LHrosion, therefore, only takes place
at the concave bends, and this is the reason why the edge of the
““Khadir,” as delineated on the map, does not contain any convex
bends.

The fact that these concave bends, which form the limits of
the “ Khadir,” are not connected by convex bends, but cut each
other at various angles, proves that no two adjacent bends could
have been made at the same time. ;

The width and shape of the “ Khadir” opposite the town of
Ghazipur show that there must have been many complete altera-
tions in the course of the river.

Between each of the alterations in the course of the river,
indicated by the indentations in the edge of the “ Khadir,” a very
long period must have elapsed.

Although the vagaries of the Ganges are proverbial, it must
be borne in mind that, whenever the river impinges on the old
alluvium, the process of denudation is very slow.

In the new alluvium the river often cuts away three or four
hundred feet in a year, but in the old alluvium, whenever the
river impinges on reefs of kunkar, there is practically no denudation.

Even where the river impinges directly on the stiffish clay
(without any kwnkar reefs to protect it), which is the prevail-
ing soil in the Ghazipur district, the denudation, as will be shown
later, does not exceed ten feet in the year.

232 Journal of the Asvatic Society of Bengal. [{November, 1905.

Tt will be noticed that all sharp bends of the river are in the
old alluvium, and that the main direction of the river’s course is
determined by the bends in the old alluvium. Although, in the
new alluvium, the river does, at times, rapidly make consider-
able changes in its course, yet its general direction remains con-
stant for long periods of time, owing to the fact that it is deter-
mined by the bends in the old alluvium, which alter very slowly.

There is no historical record of the river ever having been at
any distance from either Zamania, Ghazipur or Chausa, although
the configuration of the “ Khadir” shows that, at some past
period, it must have been several miles distant from each of these

places.
: The same probably holds true of both Benares and Chunar.
At the time of the battle of Chausa, where Humayun was
defeated in 1539 A.D., the point of confluence of the Ganges and
Karmnasa must have been at the same place as at present,
though it is clear, from the island of the old alluvium just oppo-
site, that, at one time, the Ganges must have been flowing a con-
siderable distance to the north, and the confluence of the Ganges
and Karmnasa must have been east of Buxar. There is, there-
fore, unmistakeable historical evidence that there has been no
radical alteration inthe course of the Ganges in the Ghazipur
District for close on four hundred years.

At Chochakpur there has been very little alteration in the
course of the river. The configuration of the ‘ Khadir” in the
reach between Chochakpur and Zamania can be accounted for by
supposing that between Chochakpur and Karanda the river origi-
nally flowed nearly east to west, and that the great bend at
Zamania has been the result of gradual and continuous erosion
by the river.

The distance between Karanda and the point of the bend at
Zamania is 72 miles or 39,000 feet.

Allowing 4,600 feet as the original width of the river, this
would give a distance of 35,000 feet which has been eroded by the
river.

The first survey was made of the district in 1840. From
that time to 1872 Mr. Oldham records in his Memoirs of the
Ghazipur District that the annual rate of erosion was 12 feet
(vide p. 3 of Oldham’s Memoirs of the Ghaxpur District). Since
the last survey, made in 1882, the annual rate of erosion has
been 9 feet. This gives an average of close on 11 feet a year for
the last 64 years.

At this rate the erosion of the Zamania bend would require
about 3,200 years. At the Zamania bend the soil is the ordinary
stiff clay found in the district without any kunkar reefs. There
is, however, a kunkar reef at Zamania town, and very solid kun-
kar reefs at Ghazipur.

Another noteworthy feature shown by the map is the island
of old alluvium opposite Chausa surrounded on all sides by the
“ Khadir.”

It is stated in Mr. Oldham’s Memoirs that a similar island

Vol. I, No. 9.] The Geology of the Gangetic Plain. 233
[N.S.]

exists in the Benares District opposite Saidpur. I have not had
an opportunity of verifying the statement, and have not therefore
shown it on the map.

Mr. Oldham’s is the only possible explanation, wiz,, that the
river Ganges has gradually eroded the land at some bend in its
course till it has cut into the course of the affluent at a point
above the former confluence.

When once a channel had been made into the course of the
affluent, centrifugal force would drive the water of the Ganges
through the breach so made, and the new channel would rapidly
be widened out till it became the main course of the Ganges.

The island opposite Chausa must have been caused by the
Ganges usurping the course of the Karmnasa, and that opposite
Saidpur by the usurpation of the course of the Gumti.

Similarly, tradition, which Mr. Oldham considered trust-
worthy, says that, at one time, the water of the Gogra passed
down the present river Sarju, or Tons as it is sometimes styled,
which separates the Chazipur and Ballia Districts, This would
indicate that the Ballia District consists of a similar island caused
by the river Gogra (or Sarju as it is called in some parts) usurp-
ing the course of some smaller river that used to flow down the
present bed of the Gogra.

Any such usurpation of another river’s course would probab-
ly completely alter the set of the current at the old confluence,
and release the river from the bends in the old alluvium which
had formerly given the river its general direction.

At the commencement of the paper it was taken as already
proved that the area at the mouth of the Ganges was an area of
subsidence.

There are, however, indications that within the area of the
United Provinces of Agra and Oudh the southern portion of the
Gangetic plain has sunk relatively to the northern portion.

The first piece of evidence is that supplied by the artesian
well sunk at Lucknow. (vide Oldham’s Geology of India, p. 434.)

At a depth of 158 feet the water stood at 61 feet below the
top of the borehole. Ata depth of 975 feet the water had risen
to 2 feet. At 990 feet it stood at a depth of 5 feet below the
top of the borehole, and at 1,189 feet the water rose over the top
of the casing, itself 24 feet above the surface of the ground.

This shows that the lower strata must be inclined, though it
does not indicate the direction of the dip,

As the Himalayas are known to have risen and the Gangetic
plain to have sunk, the probability is that the dip of the strata is
from north to south.

A river flowing over a flat alluviual plain would naturally
find its way directly down the slope, and there is no reason why
the watershed should not be equidistant from either bank.

If, however, after the river had excavated a channel for itself
with the watershed equidistant from either bank, the whole allu-
vial plain through which it flowed was slightly tilted at right
angles to the river’s course, the result would be that the slope into

234 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {| November, 1905.

the river from one bank would be increased, while the slope to the
other bank would be decreased. Consequently, denudation on one
side of the river would be greater than on the other. The same
thing would happen to all the rivers flowing on parallel courses.
Thus, in the area between two rivers which run on nearly parallel
courses, the denudation into one river would be greater than into
the other. Each river would, in time, force the water-shed on one
bank back towards the next river, but, in exchange, would lose on
the other bank an equivalent in its catchment area.

The result would be that each river would have a larger
catchment area on one bank thanon the other. This appears to
be the case in several districts of the United Provinces with which
I was acquainted.

Canals are generally aligned to run along the water-sheds,
and in the following cases the canals are aligned very near the
rivers running parallel to them on the north side :—

(a) The main upper Ganges canal in the Aligarh District is
very much nearer the Kali Naddi on its north than
the Jumna on the south.

(6) The Anupshahr branch of the Ganges canal in the
Aligarh District is very much nearer the Ganges on
its north than the Kali Naddi on its south.

(c) The projected Sarda canal in the Lucknow District was
aligned very much nearer the Gumti on its north
than the Sai on its south.

The fact that, at Lucknow, water from a great depth rose to
above the surface, shows not only that the strata at great depths
are inchned, but that they are continuous over very considerable
distances.

This is a very interesting fact, because it has been conclu-
sively shown that the surface strata are not continuous.

For certain reasons too technical to be given here a good
irrigation well can only be made where the masonry cylinder can be
taken down to a firm clay stratum underlaid by waterbearing sand.

A good deal of attention has therefore been paid to the strata
near the surface, by which I mean down to a depth of say 125
feet.

Colonel Clibborn was deputed in the seventies to make an
examination into the subject of wells, and, in his report published
by the Board of Revenue of the North-West Provinces and Oudh,
in a collection of papers relating to the construction of wells, it is
clearly demonstrated that the clay strata so essential to the
success of wells are not continuous.

I might add that anyone practically acquainted with the
construction of irrigation wells knows that Colonel Clibborn’s
conclusions are correct.

A very difficult problem is here presented to us ; how can
we account for the fact that the surface strata are clearly not con-
tinuous, while those at great depths appear to be continuous? Two
possible explanations suggest themselves ; the firstis that at great

Vol. I, No. 9.] The Geology of the Gangetic Plain. 235

[N.S.]
depths, the pressure of the superincumbent earth renders imper-
vious to water everything but the coarser and cleaner kinds of sand.

Extensive and continuous deposits of such sand would only
be found along the beds of the larger rivers which may be pre-
sumed to have existed though they have been long since deeply
buried by alluvial deposits.

If a deep borehole struck such an old river-bed, it is concei-
vable that the necessary head to bring the water to the surface
might be supplied through a deposit of sand in the former river-
bed continuous up to a point in its uppper course where it attained
the necessary elevation.

The observed facts at Lucknow do not, however, support this
explanation, as there were several rises in the level of the water in
the borehole, and it seems unlikely that one borehole should have
struck the beds of several such former rivers one above the other.

The second possible explanation is that the surface deposits
were laid down in running water and the deeper deposits in still
water. Anyone acquainted with the country can see in the cres-
cent-shaped swamps and the alternations of clay, light soil and
sand on the surface of the country, the result of the same agency
that is reproducing similar features in the alluvium of the great
rivers, namely deposition by running water; and the inference is
inevitable, that the surface of the country was formed by the
deposit of the material derived from the mountains in a labrynth
of vast morasses amd deltaic rivers.

This agency, however, would not explain the enormous area of
clay and sand revealed to us by the Lucknow borehole; and it
seems necessary to assume the existence of an enormous sheet of
water with currents sufficient to transport sand great distances
to account for the phenomena.

In Oldham’s Geology of India, p. 144, the occurrence of a
species of fresh-water porpoise, common only to the Ganges and
Indus and their tributaries, is cited as showing that the Ganges
and Indus flowed at one time into the sea through a common delta.

The sea is shown to have extended up the Indus valley within
a geologically recent period ; and it seems possible that it may have
extended east much further into the gangetic plain than is usually
supposed,

The absence of any indications of marine origin in the upper
strata might well be due to their having been deposited in fresh
water after the communication with the sea by the Indus valley
had been cut off.

At any rate, whether the water was fresh or salt, the con-
tinnity of the deeper strata over great distances seems to strengthen
the theory that the lower strata were deposited in a great sheet of
still water.

Such a great sheet of water, originally salt but gradually be-
coming fresh as the communication with the sea became gradually
more and more obstructed, would satisfactorily account for the
change of the salt-water porpoise into an animal inhabiting fresh
water.

236 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1905.

31. The Nafaisu-l-Maasir—By H. Beverives, 1.C.8. (vetired).

Among the Elhot manuscripts in the British Museum there is
a volume which contains, among other things, about a hundred
pages of an extract from the Nafa’isu-l-Maasir. It is numbered
Or. 1761 and is described at p. 1022a of vol. III of Rieu’s Persian
Catalogue. The title Nafa’isu-l-Maasir may be rendered “Choice
Deeds,” and is a chronogram implying that the book was begun in
973 (1565-66). It is stated by Dr. Sprenger that a postscript
gives 979 as the date of the completion of the work, but that much
later dates are mentioned init. The work was a biographical dic-
tionary of Persian poets and was written by Mirza ‘Alau-d-daulah
Qazyvini, the younger brother of Mir ‘Abdu-l-latif, who was for a
time Akbar’s preceptor. ‘Alau-d-daulah was himself a poet, and
wrote under the name of Kami. He is described by Badaytni at
pp. 97 and 316 of the third volume of his history. A copy of the
original work was seen by Dr. Sprenger in the Moti Mahall Library
in Lucknow, and he has described its contents at pp. 46-55 of his
Catalogue; but apparently the manuscript was lost in the Mutiny,
and there does not seem to be any copy in our public libraries. It
is to be hoped that a copy will turn up in India some day for the
work was a valuable one and was the basis of Badayitni’s
third volume. Sprenger states that the book contained notices of
about 350 poets, most of whom flourished in the time of Akbar.
He also gives the index of the names. Fortunately the Elhot MS.
contains the historical introduction which gives an account of the
reigns of Babar, Humaytin and Akbar. The account of Akbar is
the fullest of the three, but only goes down to 982 or 1575, 2.e., to
the twentieth year of the reign. Though the historical introduc-
tion is only a sketch, it gives here and there useful bits of infor-
mation, and it is valuable as being, apparently, the earliest written
of all the lives of Akbar. Like his father Mir Yahya, the author
of the Labb-u-tawarikh, ‘Alau-d-daulah is very fond of chrono-
grams, and gives many of them in his introduction. Among others
he gives the well-known one about Babar’s birth, and adds that it
was composed by Maulana Jami. This cannot have been the great
Jami. On p. 260 he speaks of Babar’s religious poem, and corrobo-
rates Sprenger’s statement that it was entitled ‘‘Dar Figh.” He
adds that it was sent to Hazrat Imam A‘zam, who is probably the
same person as the Maqdtm A‘zam of Transoxiana whose name is
mentioned in Ney Hlias’s history of the Khojas. That is, he is
probably one of several Maqdtim A‘zams, for the name was borne
by more than one saint. At p. 33b we have the statement that
Humaytn conversed in Herat with the writer’s father, here called
Amir Nasiru-d-din Yahya. At p. 376 mention is made of a Khwa-
~ jah Qazi who was Humayun’s prime minister and who, unless he
be the same as Khwajah Ghazi, does not seem to be named by other
authorities. It is added that he belonged to the family of the
famous enthusiast Shams-i-Tabrizi. The account of Humayin’s
death gives one or two new details. In the first place it says that.

Vol. I, No. 9.] The Nafaisu-l-Maasir. 237
Eves ||

the accident of the fall from the roof occurred on Friday the 16th
Rabi-al-awwal, and not on the 11th, and that he died on the follow-
ing Sunday the 18th. Then it adds, p. 376, that Humaytin was
wrapped ina blanket, or dressing-gown (galimwar) at the time,
and was leaning on his staff when the latter slipped on the stones.
When he came to his senses, he repeated the Kalima. Then follow
several chronograms. Khizr Khwajah Khan, the husband of
Gulbadan Begam, is mentioned as one of those who concealed the
fact of the death for some days.

In the account of Akbar’s conquest of Hajiptir we are told
that Rajah Gajpati (of the Dumraon family) assisted with 2,000
Cherus, and in mentioning Da’tid’s escape by boat from Patna on
the night of Sunday 21 Rabi-as-sani the new circumstance is
given that he fled to Tanda. When the bridge over the Pin Pin
was broken down by the flying Afghans, some 2,000 of them were
killed.

The Elliot MS. gives, besides the introduction, a few extracts
from the notices of poets in the body of the work. Among them is
the interesting account of Wafai, 7.e., Zainu-d-din Khwafi, who was
Babar’s Sadr, or ecclesiastical judge, and who translated, or para-
phrased Babar’s Memoirs. It is this account which has been
borrowed by Badayiini (see Dr. Ranking’s translation, p. 609).

I hope that this notice may lead to the discovery of the ori-
ginal work, and if not, that someone will publish the extracts in
the Elliot Manuscript.

24th July, 1905.

238 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [ November, 1905.

32. Notes on the Species, Hxternal Characters and Habits of the
Dugong.—By N. Awnnanpatz, D.Sc., Deputy Superintendent
of the Indian Museum. {With three plates. ]

The present communication is largely of the nature of a pre-
liminary notice. Later I hope to offer to the Society a memoir on
the anatomy of certain organs and structures in the Dugong,
which will be based partly on the specimen whose measurements
are given below, and partly on the fine collection of Indian and
Australian skulls and other bones already in the Indian Museum.
At present I feel confident in stating (with four fully adult Indian,
two fully adult Australian, and parts of three immature Indian
skulls before me) that the individual variations among Indian
specimens are at least as great as those which were believed by
Owen to constitute a specific difference between Indian and
Australian species. Skeletons of the Dugong exhibit very great
differences (not solely connected with sex and age) inter se, and
these cannot be specific, as they are not constant even in a series
from the same seas. Owen’s Halicore australis, therefore, must
be relegated, as most recent mammalologists have thought pro-
bable, to the synonomy of HA. dugong.!

In the summer of 1905, I was deputed by the authorities of
the Indian Museum to visit the northern part of the Gulf of
Manaar, in order to obtain a complete skeleton and skin of an
Indian specimen of the Dugong, the only skins hitherto in the
collection, and the most nearly perfect skeleton, having been
obtained from Queensland in exchange with the Brisbane
Museum. . Thanks largely to the kind offices of the Rey. A. D.
Limbrick, of Ramanad, I was so fortunate as to obtain a fine
male, the external characters of which are described below :—

Dimensions—

1 Length to tip of tail ... veo ft eOmmmua
2 Length to extremity of fluke Pree! reed tI)
3 From posterior border of anus to tip

of tail 65 Pes Wrrimieen S .
4 From anterior border ‘of anus to

genital opening win gl eS
5 Length of flipper wea ace eet i,
6 Width of flipper : HO 5
7 Breadth of fluke (injured at one

extremity ) Boe foe LORIE
8 Height of facial disk gees 00 8
9 Breadth of facial disk LL
10 Length of upper lip (upper jaw pad) 63 ,,

1 Strictly speaking, the specific name should be duyong, in accordance
with the Malay; but the incorrect form is so well known that it seems
better not to change it.

Wolk No. 9.) ' Notes on the Dugong. 239
[N.S.]

In this table and throughout the paper the “tip of tail”
means the extremity of the actual tail. The length between this
point and the extremity of the snout was measured by means of
sticks stuck into the sand. The “length to extremity of fluke”
was obtained by drawing a straight line immediately in front of
the snout and another parallel to it immediateiy behind the unin-
jured extremity of what may be called, on the analogy of the
Cetacea, the fuke. The posterior margin of this organ being con-
cave, the latter measurement is considerably the greater. The
third measurement given practically represents the length of the
tail, which is a little less than half that of the head and body.
This observation is perhaps of some importance, as the pads of
stout connective tissue intervening between the dorsal vertebre are
of considerable thickness, although there are no bony epiphyses.
Consequently, skeletons, as set up in museums, very often do not
represent anything approaching the true length of the animal.
By the “facial disk”? I mean the flattened area, which does not
include the nostrils, above the tusks. It will be described in
detail later. What f have called the “upper lip” is plainly the
homologue of what Murie and others have called the “ upper
jaw pad” in the Manatees; but it is better developed in the
Dugong and probably plays a more important part in the assi-
milation of food.

Colour—

The dorsal surface, shortly after death, was a dull brownish
grey, which faded gradually, though pure grey on the sides, to
dirty flesh-colour on the belly. The face, flippers and fluke were
dull grey ; but the skin round the base of the tusks and the upper
lip was mottled with dirty flesh-colour, which was also the tint
of the lower jaw. Judging from the different descriptions given
by different observers, the coloration of the animal is as variable
as I find its skeleton to be.

Integument—

The skin of the specimen had not the corrugated and wrin-
kled surface of that of the Manatees; but, on the other hand, it
had not quite the smooth and oily appearance of that of many of
the Cetacea. It was smooth, as it were, but not polished.
Undoubtedly the hair, especially on the back, contributed to this
effect, giving the animal quite a prickly appearance in certain
lights. I shall here state merely that three distinct kinds of hair
existed on the external surface, two on the facial disk and lower
jaw, and a third over the whole of the trunk, limbs and fluke, the
the kind last mentioned having two distinct phases of growth.
The hairs are apparently devoid of pigment. The general
character of the integument, apart from the hairs, resembled
that of tropical Cetacea, the “blubber” being less thick than
that of northern Porpoises. No oil was set free by cutting through
it. Beneath it, however, there was a layer of opaque white fat
very like that of a pig in appearance.

240 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. | November, 1905.

General Characters of the Trunk and Limbs—

The general form differed very considerably from that of all
Cetacea, resembling that of some of the larger Hared Seals in
several points. The appearance of the animal was clumsy, and
evidently not adapted for rapid motion of any kind, the back and
sides being rounded and the belly flat. There was no apparent
neck, but the head was massive and terminated bluntly in front.
The tail was distinct from the trunk, having a more compact and
a less amorphous character. The vertebral column extended to the
tip, which projected slightly below the edge of the fluke. The
latter organ was deficient as regards one extremity, which had
been removed, probably by the bite of a shark. The wound had
healed completely. Running from near the tip of the tail toa point
near its commencement was a conspicuous ridge formed chiefly by
a thickening of the epidermis. This was about two inches high
near the centre. Itis wellshown in the photograph reproduced on
plate 7. The fore-limbs were regular in outline, flattened, with a
distinct posterior fringe, but with no trace of separation of the digits
externally. Only the fore-arm projected externally, the humerus
being buried in the body as far as the articulation of the radius and
ulna. There was a conspicuous fold of skin immediately above the
limb. The mamme, which were large considering the sex of the
individual, were situated immediately behind the limb, almost on
a level with its posterior edge; they were long in comparison
with their diameter. Judging from a female, otherwise correctly
mounted, in the Colombo Museum, this elongated character of the
mammee is characteristic of both sexes. The lateral position is
apparently characteristic of all living Sirenia. Native fishermen
tell me that in the lactating female the milk squirts out with
great violence to a considerable distance if the mamma is pressed.
The copulatory organ, of which Dr. Francis H. A. Marshall, of
the University of Edinburgh, has kindly promised to furnish a
description later, was entirely withdrawn into the body.

Head—

The head of the Dugong is perhaps its most characteristic
feature, but all the figures of the animal, including some very
recent ones, that I have been able to discover, are incorrect as
regards this part, at any rate if they are intended to represent
adult males. The only mounted specimens J have seen which
are at all correct are those in the Colombo Museum; but these
are a female, a half-grown male and a newly (probably pre-
maturely) born young one. Except as regards the tusks, they
agree very fairly well with my notes and photographs.

The mouth of the specimen was very small. It was tightly
closed by the upper lip (‘‘ upper jaw pad’”’) which projected over
the lower jaw, the lower lip being represented merely by a thin
fold of skin. The upper lip was stout in shape, flabby in struc-
ture, in the newly-killed specimen; tongue-shaped, smooth and
hairless on the surface. The tusks, one of which was broken,
projected through the skin above it, not from the mouth, as has

Nols 1, No: 9:] Notes on the Dugong. 24.1
[N.S. ]

been stated. The curious projection of the anterior part of the
lower jaw was only covered by a thin layer of skin and con-
nective tissue ; itis the rounded structure which looks like a heavy
lower lip in fig. 1, plate 8. Above the tusks the integument
expanded into a large flattened disk, which was divided into two
halves by a vertical cleft. This cleft also extended along the base
of the upper lp between the tusks. The lower part of the disk
bore two broadly raised transverse ridges, which were divided from
one another by the cleft and covered with bristles comparable to, but
shorter and blunter than, the spines of a Porcupine. These ridges
are evidently the homologues of the two lobes of the “‘ upper lip,”
by means of which the Manatees crop the plants on which they
feed. They do not appear to be either so mobile or so widely
separable, however, in the Dugong. Above them the disc was
covered with longer and finer bristles, evidently of a sensory
nature. The upper edge of the disk was turned backwards and
upwards, and there was a more or less inturned flap on either side.
The nostrils were entirely outside the disk, on the top of the head :
they were crescentic in shape and could evidently be closed during
life. The tissues surrounding the eye were somewhat prominent ;
but the eye itself was small, black, beady and deeply sunk. It was
not surrounded by radiating wrinkles as in the Manatees. The
presence of large glands in connection with it afforded some justi-
fication for the Malays’ belief! that the Dugone weeps when
captured. The external ear was extremely minute, being a
circular aperture less than 10 mm. in diameter.

Habits—

It seems probable that the habits? of the Dugong have
changed considerably within the last half century, together with
the diminution in its numbers noted by Blanford and others.
Only having seen a freshly-killed specimen, I am not in a position
to say anything on this point from actual observation, but from
what I was told by the native fishermen, who possess special nets
for the capture of the Dugong, it is rare nowadays for more
than one specimen to be taken at a time, whereas formerly, in the
Gulf of Manaar, flocks of many hundreds were said to occur.
Further, the animal appears to have ceased to frequent shallow
water, for, according to the fishermen, the only specimens they

1 They regard the tears of the tkan duyong (‘‘Dugong fish)” as a
powerful love-charm. Muhammadan fishermen on the Gulf of Manaar
appeared to be ignorant of this usage, but told me that a ‘‘doctor” once
= out with them to collect the tears of a Dugong, should they capture
one. Though they do not call the animal a fish, they are less particular
about eating its flesh than are the Patani Malays and the Trang Samsams,
who will not do so unless the “‘fish’s” throat has been cut in the manner
orthodox for warm-blooded animals. The common Tamil name for the
Dugong is kadalpudra (“ sea-pig”’); but the fishermen at Kilakarai (Lubbais)
call it Williah,

2 These remarks refer only to the Gulf of Manaar. Major A. R. Ander-
son informs me that in the Andamans, Dugongs still enter Port Blair
harbour occasionally in parties of two or three. Dec. 15th, 1905.

242 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [| November, 1905.

see near the shore are those which have been wounded or are sick.
I was unable to discover the depth at which those taken for the
market are usually captured; but a gentleman who has visited
the Dugong “ fisheries” off the northern coast of Queensland, tells
me that in Australian waters the usual depth is from the ten
to twelve fathoms. In the Gulf of Manaar stout nets, very deep,
with a large mesh and heavily weighted, are sunk in the neigh-
bourhood of the animal’s known feeding-places, and individuals
of both sexes, but apparently more especially young ones, become
entangled in them and are thus taken. Occasionally specimens
are even captured in the ordinary drift nets used in catching fish.
I was told that as many as sixty were sometimes brought into
Kilakarai, a large native port near the northern corner of the Gulf
on the Indian shore, in a year; but this number is probably
exaggerated. The Muhammadans of the district are so fond of
the flesh! that they give large prices for it, and probably the
fishermen who possess the right kind of nets go in pursuit of the
Dugong as often as they have nothing else to do; for the search is
precarious, but the profits considerable should it be successful.

As regards the food of the Dugong, it has often been stated, but
not by Blanford, that it feeds exclusively on a marine phaneroga-
mous plant. This is evidently not the case, as the stomach of my
specimen was full of pieces of a green alga, all of which belonged to
one species. Two things struck me about the contents of the stomach
and the upper part of the intestines: (1) their freedom from all
adventitious growths, either animal or vegetable, and (2) their
perfect and unbruised condition. They consisted of clean pieces of
seaweed about 25 inches long, plucked off and evidently not
masticated. Hven the little bladders which the seaweed bore
had not burst. As regards the method of feeding, I do not think
that it can be the same as that of the Manatees, which pluck the
plants which they eat by means of the two lobes above the “ upper
jaw pad,’ and push their food towards the mouth with their
flippers. Similar lobes certainly exist in the case of the Dugong,
but they did not appear in the fresh specimen to be capable of
any great degree of separation or movement, while the flippers
are hardly long enough to give any great assistance in feeding.
As the ‘‘upper jaw pad” (upper lip) itself, on the other hand, was
evidently freely moveable and possibly to some extent extensile, it
seems possible that it is used in plucking seaweed, which certainly
could be grasped between it and the lower jaw. This would
necessitate the food being passed under the horny pad, with its
bundles of more or less consolidated hairs, on the anterior part of
the palate. Possibly these hairs may have the function, as they

1 The meat is excellent ; roasted, I could not have distinguished it from
good, but rather tough beefsteak. It had none of the peculiar flavour of
whale-meat. Moreover, it has the same quality as that assigned, both by the
old voyagers and by modern observers, to the flesh of the American Manatees
—it keeps good for a considerable time, for at least three days in hot
weather, during which mutton goes bad in twenty-four hours. The blubber is
not made into oil at Kilakarai.

Wola No. 9.) Notes on the Dugong. 243
[N.8.]

certainly have the appearance, of the bristles of a scrubbing
brush. I have already noted the small size of the mouth, and I
believe, judging from the small area of the articular surface of
the lower jaw, as well as from observations on the fresh specimen,
that the jaw has very little, if any, lateral movement. For all
these reasons I doubt whether the persistent teeth have any
function beyond crushing the calcarious or other growths brushed
off the seaweed by the hair-papillee of the anterior palate.

The fishermen told me that they took females with young
ones accompanying them at all times of year, but never more than
one young one with each female. They had never seen the female
raise the upper part of her body vertically from the water, clasp-
ing the young one in her flippers, which seem hardly suitable for
the purpose. Judging from the scars on the specimen examined,
I believe that the males fight with their tusks at the breeding
season.

a NN NN NO

244 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [November, 1905.

32. Hedyotis sisaparensis, a hitherto undescribedIndian species.—By
Captain A. T. Gace. I.MS.

The writer when re-arranging the earlier genera of Rubiacez
in the Calcutta Herbarium in 1902, came across what appeared to
be an undescribed species of Hedyotis. The writer’s opinion was
confirmed by Sir George King, who kindly compared the species
at Kew. The Cascgygalon written in 1902 is now offered for pub-
lication.

Hedyotis sisaparensis. adden tean with branches about as
thick as a crowquill, glabrous, pale grey almost white, four angled ,
internodes much shortened in the region of the infloresence and
hidden by the stipules. ‘Stipules about 9 mm. long, pectinate,
scurfily tomentose, and showing a few raphides. Leaves shortly-
petioled, lanceolatet acute, base narrow cuneate tapering into the
glabrous petiole; lamina olabrous on both surfaces, upper surface
bright green, lower grey, with abundance of raphides ; midrib on
lower surface of lamina flattened out, white; lateral nerves 4-6,
rather faint, running forward at an acute angle with the midrib ;
length of lamina 5-8°8 cm., breadth 1:25-2°5 cm, length of petiole
65 mm.-1°25 cm. Flowers in axillary bracteate cymes of about
4°5 cm. in length; main peduncle 1°38 cm. long; bracts about
5 mm. long, flowers pseudo-pedicellate in groups of three on the
secondary peduncles. Calyx including lobes 8 mm. long, lobes 4,
subulate, equalling the length of the calyx-tube, but exceeding the
capsule. Corolla, unopened, exceeding the calyx tube, lobes 4.
Stamens 4. Ripe capsule 3 mm. in diameter, glabrous, dehiscing
septicidally. Seeds not seen.

Wynaad, Beddome. Above Sisapara, Nilgiri district, 7,000 feet
alt. Gamble, No. 13381.

The affinity of this species 1s with H. mollis, Wall., from
which it is easily enough distinguished by its infloresence.

INDEX SLIP:
ANTHROPOLOGY.

Bory, R.—Formation of New Castes. Journ. and Proc. As.
Soc. Beng., Vol. I, No. 10, 1906, pp. 256-257.

Vol. I, No. 10.] An Hxamination of the Nyaya-Sitras. 245
[NV.S. ]

34. An Examination of the Nyaya-Sitras.—By Haraprasip SAsiet.

Anyone who carefully reads the Nyaya Sutras will perceive
that they are not the work of one man, of one age, of the pro-
fessors of one science, or even of the professors of one system of
religion. It would seem apparent that at different ages philoso-
phers, logicians and divines have interpolated various sections into
an already-existing work on what we may, for the want of a better
term, call Logic.

Tt is evident that such a book would be full of contradictions,
inconsistencies and irreconcilable passages. So the Nyaya Sutras
are. The Hindu Commentators from Vatsayana, in the third
century A.D. to Radhamohan Gosvami in the nineteenth, have
attempted to evolve a harmonious system of Logic and Philosophy
from the Sutras. The task is an impossible one, and so every
one of them has failed, and that miserably. They have imported
later and more modern ideas into the commentaries, but without
success. The acute logicians of Bengal thought it was a diffi-
eult work; and they had recourse to various shifts to explain the
Bhasya and other commentaries, They have changed some
passages and imported extraordinary meanings into others.

But unfortunately the idea of studying the Sutras by them-
selves did not occur to any one of them. Ninety-nine per cent. of
the manuscripts of this work are accompanied with some comment-
ary or other. Manuscripts giving the Sitras only are extremely
rare. I got one from Midnapore, and gave a copy of it to my
friend Dr. Venis, and it was published at Benares. It is known as
the Nyayastitroddhara. My friend Pandit Vindhyesvariprasada
Duve got one at Benares, and he published it in the Bibliotheca
Indica as an appendix to his edition of the Nyayavartika. This“
is known as Nydyasacinibandha. But from what I know of the
habits of pandits, lam sure nobody has studied the Sitras by
themselves. They have been used only as works of reference.

I took up the Nyayasucinibandha for independent study.
On comparing the Sitras as given there with Sitras in editions
accompanied by commentaries, and also with the Nyaéyasttrod-
dhara, I was struck with the variety of readings which the Nyaya.
Siitras presented. A number of Sitras are regarded as spurious,
The readings of a large number of Stitras are irreconcilably
different in different editions. This is not the case with the
Vedanta Sitras, and with the Mimimsa Sitras, in which various:
readings are extremely rare, almost non-existent, and interpolated’
Siitras there are none. I am not speaking” of the Samkhya and:
Yoga Sitras, which are comparatively modern. The: difficul ty?
which I feel in regard to the Nyaya Stitras was also felt about a!
thousand years ago, when Vacaspatimisra, who flourished about’
the end of the tenth century, twice attempted to fix the number’
of Sutras and their readings, namely, in Nyayasitroddhara, and
in Nyayasicinibandha, both of which go by:his name. If both)
are the works of one man, as they | profess to ‘be, it is apparent
that the author did not feel sure of his ground.

246 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [| December, 1905-

For convenience sake, I took up the Nyayastcinibandha
dated 898 Saka, z.e., 976 a.p., and that for three reasons,
—(l) because it counts the number of Sitras, number of
words, and even the number of letters in the Nyaya Sitras; (2)
because it divides the Stitras into sections, each dealing with a
single topic; (3) and because it is dated, and there are internal
evidences to show that it was written by the great Vacaspati,
the commentator on the six systems. I have made an English
translation of the Sitras with as little help from the commentaries
as possible.

The study of the Sttras makes it apparent that works of two.
different sciences have been mixed up. One is a work on
Logic, or rather the science of Reasoning, or, as Sadajiro
Sugiura terms it, ‘‘ science of discriminating true knowledge from
the false” ; and the other is a work on some system of philosophy.
The work on Logic is confined almost exclusively to the first
and the fifth chapters. I say almost, because some sections of the
second chapter also may belong to the Logic part. The rest of
the work with about eight Sitras in the first chapter belong to:
the philosophical part.

Let us analyse the Logic section. This section seems to
contain three separate treatises. The first chapter, with the
exception of the Sitras mentioned above, constitutes the first and
the most important treatise. It is complete in itself. The first
Sttra enumerates the sixteen topics essential in Debate, and
all the sixteen topics are fully treated of in the first chapter. It
is fully self-contained, and nothing farther is needed to complete
it. The first Stitra gives, so to say, the objects and reasons for
the science. It says that anyone who has a complete knowledge
of the sixteeen topics attains the highest proficiency in every
walk of life, and the first chapter deals with the complete knowl-
edge of all the sixteen topics.

I may remark in passing that the science embodied in the
first chapter of these Stitras is not Logic, in the present signi-
fication of the term, but Logic in its primitive and rudimentary
stage. It may better be called the Science of Debate. And all
the requisites of a well-regulated Debate are included in the:
sixteen topics. They are not always the requisites of the science of
Logic, as known at present. The second treatise on Logic, embodied
in the Sutras, is the first ‘‘ daily lecture” of the fifth chapter. The
last Sutra of the first chapter simply says that Jatis and Points
of Defeat are many, thus leaving no room for any elaborate
subdivision of these two topics. But the first lecture of the fifth
chapter not only enumerates twenty-four subdivisions of the Jatis,
but gives careful definitions of every one of them. The author who
wrote the first chapter is not the author of the first Lecture of
the fifth chapter. The last section of the first lecture of the
fifth chapter, which has nothing to do with definitions of the
subdivisions of Jatis, but which limits the extent of a fruitless
Debate, is no part of the second treatise, and seems to be an
addition. The third treatise consists of the second “daily lecture’”

wile Nov 10) An Hxamination of the Nyaya-Satras. 247
[N.S. ]

of chapter fifth. It enumerates the various Points of Defeat and
defines them.

One of the most cogent reasons for considering these trea-
tises as separate, and also for considering them to be composed by
different authors, is the fact that the same technical terms have
been used and defined in all the three, but im very different senses.
The Definition of Jati, as given in the first, does not cover all the
subdivisions enumerated in the second. The terms prakaranasama
and s@dhyasama are defined among the “‘Semblances of Reason ”
in the first treatise, but these two have been differently defined as
subdivisions of Jatis. The term matanujna@ has been defined one
way in the second and another way in the third. If all the
three had been written by one and the same person, the same
technical terms would not receive at his hands two such wide
definitions.

It is difficult to say whether the composition of the second

and third treatises preceded or followed that of the first treatise,
_ which is a comprehensive work on the Science of Debate. Many
scholars hold that such comprehensive treatises generally follow
separate and partial treatises on parts, just as the unidi-sttras
and the gana-satras preceded Panini, and that these separate treatises
after the composition of the comprehensive treatise, formed its
appendices.

One would be tempted to believe that all the sections of the
first lecture of chapter second, with the exception of the last,
and the first and last sections of the second Daily Lecture of that
chapter, may be included in the Logical part, because they have a
direct bearing on pramana or the instruments of true knowledge,
which forms the first essential topic in the Science of Debate.

The commentators and modern pandits, in order to make
this incoherent collection of Stitras a harmonious whole, are
obliged to say that the Nyayasttras consist of the enumeration,
the definition and the examination of the sixteen topics. The
enumeration is complete in the first Stitra, the definition in the
first chapter, and the examination in the other chapters. There
would have been no cause of complaint if all this were a fact.
The examination is, however not complete. It does not comprehend
all the sixteen topics. The topics examined in fact are the Ist,
2nd, 3rd, 15th, and 16th. The examination of others have been
altogether omitted. If there is any, itis of a very nebulous charac-
ter. So a complete examination of the sixteen topics is not to be
found in the Siitras, and this is exceedingly suspicious. The
examinations are, as a rule, examinations of the definitions given in
Chapter L., at least so the commentators say. If so, the examina-
tion of Jati and of the Points of Defeat are not really the examina-
tion intended by the commentators. On the other hand, in the
case of Jati, we find that the definition as given in Chapter I.,
depending simply upon homogeneity and heterogeneity, does
not apply to a number of the subdivisions of Jatis as given in
Chapter V. The examination of other three topics, too, contains so
much of heterogeneous matter, besides an examination of the

248 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1905.

definition, that one is tempted to say that the whole of the
examination affair, z.e., all the chapters II. to IV. are an addition.
So far about the Logic portion.

The Philosophy portion has its beginning in the second Sitra of
the first chapter. The first Sutra of Chapter I., as has been already
said, gives the objects and reasons of the work. And these
objects and reasons seem to be all secular. There was no
need for a second enunciation of the objects and reasons. But
the second Sitra again enunciates them. And in this case,
they are philosopical and spiritual. Vacaspatimisra puts the
two together in one section, and calls the section “objects and
reasons.” The commentators have tried to reconcile this double
enunciation of objects and reasons, but without success. The
only reasonable explanation of this double enunciation seems to
be that some later writer has interpolated the second Sttra with
a view to add philosophical sections to the work. The second
Sutra contains topics which are not enumerated in the first, and
the thoughtful reader is struck with the introduction of new
matter so early as in the second Sitra. These topics are misery,
birth, activity and fault together with “apavarga.” The intro-
duction of these new topics is defended by saying that they fall
under the subdivisions of the second topic, in the first Sutra,
namely, ‘“ objects of true knowledge.” ‘“ The object of true knowl-
edge” is a topic which is so vast that all the topics of the world
may come under its subdivisions. And, as a result of this, the
interpolator has tampered with the definition of prameya (Sitra I.
1:9) which is virtually an enumeration of its subdivisions, and put
in five new topics into it. That the prameyastitra at one time was
different from what it is now, is apparent from the statement of
Haribhadrasiri, a Jain writer, who in his saddarsana samuccaya
describes the prameyasttra in the following terms :—

FAY QiaASea Teifeagarta ¥, (Bibliotheca Indica edition),
or, as in the Benares edition, 34a WIaeeTa qsitegarta yw. The
order of words is different; sukha or happiness seems to have
been included in the old prameyasttra Sukha finds no place in
that Sutra now and in Chapter [V., Ahnika I., the Section 13 on
the examination of duhkha, reduces sukha into duhkha, and is not
prepared to admit sukha as a separate subdivision of prameya.
But from Haribhadra’s statement we find that sukha was there at
some early time. Now the question is, who changed the Sitras
and why? The answer is not far to seek. In a work on Logic
prameya, as a topic, must comein. But Logic does not require a
long enumeration of prameyas and an elaborate examination of
their details, which are essential in philosophy. So the author
who wanted to convert a logical treatise into a system of
philosophy, and who is responsible for the interpolation of the
second Stitra is also responsible for this alteration in the
prameyasttra The logical treatise was an ancient Hindu
treatise, and Hindus never took an ultra-pessimistic view of the
world. Sukha is the ultimate goal of the Mimamsakas, of the

Wolk 1, Nos10-] An Examination of the Nyaya-Sitras. 249
[N.S.] ;

Vedantins, the two really orthodox systems of Hindu philosophy.
Why should Nyaya be so pessimistic? There is’ no reason
for it, and it has been shown that the word sukha did at one
time occur in the prameyasttra. The Buddhists are downright
pessimists. To them everything is duhkha, and it is they who
believed that sukha was, if properly analysed, duhkha. It seems
that the Hindu logical treatise underwent the first stage of its
philosophical transformation in the hands of some Buddhist phil-
osopher, and became a gloomy and pessimistic science. The second
Sutra of the first chapter, destroying so many things successively
and reaching to apavarga, has the appearance of Buddhistic
teaching. They enumerate a long series of effects from false
knowledge, and teach us that as we destroy effects, we perceive
the causes, that these causes are also effects; we destroy them and.
gradually we come to the original cause of all these, namely,
false knowledge ; when that is destroyed we come to nirvana.
This is precisely the teaching of the second Sitra, though the
enumeration is not go long. The Buddhist tradition, as we know
it from China and Japan, distinctly says that the Logic of
Aksapada was their handbook in logic, and that they added to and
subtracted from it. The tradition is positive that Mirok mixed up
Nyaya and Yoga, and we find in the present Nyayasttra a lone
section on Yoga in IV. 2, and one is puzzled to know why it has
been introduced. The grounds advanced by Hindu commentators
for its introduction are of the flimsiest kind. But the fact
comes from China that Mirok mixed the two up. So some other
Buddhist philosophers might have introduced the second Sitra
and changed the prameyasttra so as to suit his purpose.

That the science of Aksapada was, for a long time, in the
hands of the Buddhists, and, therefore, not in great favour with
the Brahmanist, will’ appear from the following considerations.
The Ramayana, the Mahabharata, the Puranas, and even the
Dharmaastras dislike those who studied the Tarkasastra.
The Vedantastitras distinctly say that this science was not
accepted by the orthodox. They are known as little removed
from the Buddhists—the Buddhists are nihilists, they are half
nihilists (ardhavainasika). That there was an unholy alliance
between the Nyaya and the Buddhists in the early centuries of
Buddhism, is not open to grave doubts. The introduction of the
second Sutra, the alterations in the prameyasitra, and the
definitions of misery, birth or rebirth, activity, faults, and
emancipation in the first chapter appear to be the work of Bud-
dhists. The examination of these definitions occupy the whole of
the first Lecture of the fourth chapter.

The work underwent another transformation in the hands of
a later Hindu sect who vigorously assailed some of the prominent

suddhist doctrines, both Mahayanist and Hinaydnist. These
assailed SarvadSinyatavada on the one hand, and Sarvastvada
on the other. To know who they were not, one has simply to
cast his eyes on the various theories that have been assailed
in connexion with the examination of rebirth. These are

250 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [|December, 1905.

wane, tate, wafsas, wala, wafaqe, aouae,
ce e A 5 . 3
eameyal, searaate | But this gives us no clue to the identi-

fication of the sect, save and except that they were non-Buddhists,
Haribhadra, however, tells us that these were Saivas and Hari-
bhadra belongs to the fifth century of the Christian era.

Haribhadra’s statement is borne out by two facts. Sutra 8,
Chapter I., seems to be out of place. The pramanas are defined
in the four previous Sutras, and, all of a sudden, comes a Sitra
subdividing sabda; subdivisions of Sabda are unknown in other
systems of philosophy. It is generally translated by the word,
“dogma.” ‘The distinctions between the Revealed Word and the
Ordinary Word is peculiar to the Nyayastitras. It is not Buddhis-
tic, because they did not know of this subdivision. And in the
fifth century, they discarded dogma altogether. Moreover, the
introduction of this Sttra explains the introduction of the section,
on the authority of the Vedas, and along with it, ofa quarrel with
the Mimamsakas on the eternity of sound.

All this seems to be the work of a Hindu sect which we take
to be the Saivas at the instance of Haribhadra. These are a
compromise between the Hindus and the Buddhists.

So the present Nyayasatras consist of three treatises on Logic.
And the bit of Hindu systems of philosophy that it contained has
been mixed up with two other systems of philosophy, which have
been laterly interpolated into the book.

Even after a careful examination, I do not find the Nine
Reasons and Fourteen Fallacies attributed to Akgapada by the
Chinese authorities. There are chapters on fallacies and ‘ homo-
geneity, and heterogeneity’ play an important part in the Nyaya-
sitras. But yet no “ Nine Reasons” and “ Fourteen Fallacies.”
Perhaps the primitive work of Aksapada was systematised in
yery early times by another person named Gotama. But this
is diving too deep into the antiquity of Hindu thought, and our
appliances are not sufficient for the purpose.

Kee eee eee OOOO

Vol. 1, No. 10.] = Optimism in Ancient Nyayu. 251
[N.S.]

35. Optimism in Ancient Nyaya.—By VANAMALI VEDANTATIRTHA,

In the interesting paper ‘‘A study of the Nyaya-Sttras,”
which Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasada Sastri read in the
Asiatic Society’s Meeting in November 1905, I was delighted to
find him advocating, with very cogent arguments, that the original
Nyaya-Sutras were not pessimistic. Nowadays Nyaya Philosophy
means Nydyavaisesika, and the philosophic productions of the
modern Naiyadyikas are really Vaisesika Philosophy in a Naiya-
yika garb. The terminology and the method are Naiyayika, but
the philosophy is, nevertheless, Vaisesika. Thus the pessi-
mism of the modern Naiyayika is due not to his Nyaya, but to
his Vaisgesika, from which he does not know how to distinguish
his Nyaya. The well-known couplet

qe Saas CW RMS AAS |
aq antaat afa smatfa aera |

makes the Vaisesika salvation consist in an unconscious, pleasure-
less, painless existence. This is as it should be. But when
Srihasa makes Gotama (otherwise called Aksapada) responsible
for a pessimistic doctrine of salvation, he seems to have uncriti-
cally stated the common opinion of his time. Says he—

qaa & fraeats WeAy awa |
° ~A VER EN
Waa ana (a) 4 aut faw ava & |

(Naisadha XVII., 75.)

The following extracts from the Samksepa-Sankarajaya of
Madhavacarya will substantiate the Sastri’s view. It shows
that even the comparatively recent Madhava was not unacquain-
ted with the fact that the Naiyayika salvation was really optimis-
tic and included an element of pleasure, though it was vulgarly
identified with the Vaisesika salvation, Whether the author
was or was not the celebrated Madhavyacarya, the minister
of the Bukka family of Vijaynagar, is immaterial to the argument.
For what is contended here is that even in such a late production
as the Saksepa Sankara-jaya, which professedly is an abstract
of a larger life of Sankara, the Naiyayikas are credited with an
optimistic view of salvation.

aarty Faifaa Brand: RUMeyAIeCMANS
qafata 3 wafaga atq fast aa aafa |
Saat qoaFaat fafanitaanwaTs |
qfamasiat aamaua ameedfaafeat faafa: |

252 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. | December, 1905.

(Samksepa Sankarajaya XVL., 68-69).

Says the Naiyayika vauntingly (to Sankara) : “If you are
omniscient, state the difference between the theories of salvation as
held by Kanada and by Aksapada. Otherwise give up your
pretensions to omniscience.” (Replies Sankara) “ According to
Kanada, salvation is existence, where all connexion with attributes
has been absolutely destroyed, and the soul remains like the sky.
According to your Aksapada that salvation includes a conscious-
ness of pleasure.”

Sankara, the great Advaita commentator on the Brahma-
sutras, went to Sarada-pitha in Kasmira, and before he could
enter into the shrine, he was questioned by different philosophers
on nice points of Indian Philosophy. Permission to enter was
conditional upon answering these questions rightly. The two
couplets quoted above occur just after Sankara had successfully
answered the atomic philosopher (Kanada).

From what has been said, it. will be evident that though
sukha ov pleasure is not enumerated as a separate prameya in
Nyayasttra (I. 1.9), as known at present, and though section 13
of the first ahnika of the fourth chapter reduces it to mere pain, yet
it (pleasure) had a place in the old Nyaya Sastra, and that the
true tradition was not lost in such out-of-the-way places as the
_arada pitha in Kasmira, and that only such great masters as
Sankara were expected to know it, the tradition having been lost
in the mainland of India much earlier.

RN

Vol, I, No. 10.] The Dutes of Subandhu and Din-naga. 253:
LN.S.]

36. Some Notes on the Dates of Subandhu and Din- -nidiya. —By

CV =

HARAPRASAD SASTRI.

Since the publication of an edition of the Vasavadatta by
Edward Hall, in the Bibliotheca Indica, in 1859, the date of its
author is taken to be either the end of the sixth century or the
beginning of the seventh. The reason assigned by Hall for
arriving at this conclusion is the fact that Bana in the beginning
of the seventh century mentions Subandhu as one of his prede-
CeSSOrS.

However unsatisfactory the reason might be, the Orientalists
have accepted the above date for Subandhu. The question, how-
ever, is still an open one; and here are facts which may be taken
for what they are worth.

In discoursing on the excellencies of sfpylle, Vamana, who
belongs to the ninth century A.v., In his Kavyalankara Sutra
Vrtti, quotes a verse as an example of the excellency named
Significance (sabhiprayatva).

The verse or rather hemistich runs thus :—

“atsa aafa waQHIta: aRTRAT TAT |
alat qufaarss: watuat feeqt AataTsa: 1”

“The celebrated son of Candragupta, the young raja Candra-
praksa, has become the refuge of learned men, and fortunately
his labours are successful.”

Commenting on this the author says, that the words, “the
refuge of learned men,” are significant, because they bring to.
mind the fact that Subandhu was one of his ministers.

Now, there were two Candraguptas in the Gupta line; both
were called Vikramaditya. The first was the founder of the
empire and the second his grandson. The second Candragupta
was a patron of learned men. Is it not likely that Subandhu
served under one of his sons, Candraprakasa ?

It is an old custom among Indian sovereigns to appoint Gem
adult sons to rule extensive territories, and = ahaR@ Princes used
to hold courts on the model of their imperial fathers. This
Candraprakasa seems to have done with Subandhu as one of
his ministers.

As Candragupta’s inscriptions range from 400 to 414, A.D.
Subandhu must have flourished about that time, ¢.e., in he
beginning of the fifth century.

There may be an objection to this, that in some MSS.
the word is not Subandhu but Vastubandhu. But there is no such
name as Vastubandhu in the history of Sanskrit literature, so
far as it is known. Vastubandhu may be a corruption of
Vasubandhu who flourished about this time; but he was a
Buddhist monk who would not accept office and would not be
spoken of with favour by a Hindu writer. Vastubandhu is only,
I believe, a scribe’s mistake for Subaudhu.

254 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. |December, 1905.

There is a passage in Subandhu’s own work V4savadatta
which seems to confirm my conclusion. In the preface to his
Vasavadatta, he regrets that on the death of Vikramaditya, new
people came to the front, the old taste for poetry was gone, and
everyone’s hand was at his neighbour’s throat. It seems that on
the death of Candragupta there was a civil war, and Subandhu
came to grief, by supporting a losing cause. The successor of
Candragupta Vikramaditya was Kumaragupta and not Candra-
prakasa.

Kern in his “Indian Buddhism” puts down Dinnaga between
520 and 600 a.p. The Chinese think that he flourished in
the tenth century of the Buddhist era, 7.e., between 420 and 520
Ap. Takakusu, in his paper on the date of Vasubandhu, has
shown from the dotted Buddhist records left by Indian
pandits in Chinese monasteries, that the date of Buddha’s death
is very nearly the same as has been arrived at by the Orientalists
of Europe, viz., 480. B.c.

I have got a quotation from Dinnaga’s work in Haribhadra’s
famous work entitled “ Saddarsana Samuccaya.” He says that the

definition of Pratyaksa or perception is @@aTqeayrei—and he

also says that the Buddhists believe only in two sources of right
knowledge. It is well known that Dinnaga discarded Sabda,
or dogma, from the sources of right knowledge, and fixed the
mumber of these sources at two; and Dinnaga’s definition of

Pratyaksa is known to be @MaTsSaTeHyIe. So the quotation is
from Dinnaga.

Haribhadra was one of the great Jaina writers whose date
of death is fixed by the universal tradition amongst the Jainas, at
535 Vikrama samvat, ¢.e., 479 sp. The dates are given in
two Prakrta gathas, in pp. 372 and 578, vol. iv. Peterson’s
Reports.

A study of Haribhadra’s work confirms the idea that he
belonged to about the fifth century a.p. He does not know
Vedanta as a system of Philosophy. He enumerates the following
as the six systems :—

Bauddha, Naiyayika, Samkhya, Jaina, Vaisesika and Mimam-
saka. But, says he, if one considers Naiyayika and Vaisesika
to be one and the same system, to him the sixth would be the
Carvaka. All these stamp him as flourshing before the rise of
Vedanta and Yoga. His Mimamsa does not show any sign that
he knew Kumaérila.

If Haribhadra, before 479 s.p., quotes from Dinnaga and
adopts his view as universally accepted by Buddhists, Dinnaga
must have flourished some time before him.

Sadajira Sugiura, who writes a monograph on Hindu Logic
as preserved in China and Japan, says that the name of Dinnaga’s
teacher is not known. But Kern says he was a pupil either of
Asanga or of Vasubandhu—two brothers who distinguished them-
selves as Mahayanist writers. Takakusu places Vasubandhu in
the reign of Skandagupta, and his son Baladitya in the seventies

Vol. I, No. 10.] he Dates of Subandhu and Din-naga. 255

[N.S.]
and eighties of the fifth century a.p. This, I think, is untenable.
Takakusu makes two initial mistakes: (1) Skandagupta is not
Vikramaditya but Kramaditya; and (2) he was not succeeded by
Baladitya but by Pura Gupta.

If we take the Vikramaditya mentioned by Takakusu to be
Candragupta, who is really called Vikramaditya in his coins, and
Baladitya for his heir-apparent Kumaragupta, then the account by
Takakusu and that by Haribhadra can be reconciled. Baladitya
is not a proper name: it simply means “the young Sun,” the
heir-apparent. If this view of the thing is accepted. Dinnaga,
the pupil either of Vasubandhu or of Asanga, would write his
books in the first quarter of the fifth century; and by the time
Haribhadra wrote, they would be well-known works.

Candragupta Vikramaditya seems to have had two sons—
Candraprakasa and Baladitya; of these Baladitya favoured the
Buddhists and succeeded to the throne, while Candraprakasa was
worsted in civil war and his minister Subandhu complained.
that “new men” came to the front, the old taste for poetry was
gone, and eyeryone’s hand was at his neighbour’s throat.

256 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. | December, 1905.

37. Formation of New Oastes.—By R. Bury, I.C.S8.

Aninteresting example of the constant movement going onamong
Hindu castes has recently been brought to my notice. Among the
numerous endogamous groups included in the term Vaisya or Bania
are two known as Barahseni and Chauseni, the members of which
are chiefly found in the Central Doab. The former claim descent.
from the Chandravansi King Brasni, while one account of the
latter traces their origin to Chantr, a wrestler attached to the
Court of Raja Kans who was slain by Krisna. There seems little
doubt that neither group is in reality of any considerable antiquity.
While the Barahsenis are shopkeepers and frequently confectioners,
they were, till recently, only allowed to sell articles made up of
milk and curds, such as pera, barfz, etc., and not sweetmeats contain-
ing flour or grain such as puri and halwa. The Chausenis are
usually regarded as a class composed of illegitimate children oH
Bar ahsenis or outcastes from that group.

_ Two events have, however, recently happened which shoes
that the Chausenis are rising in importance and now object to
receive recruits in the usual manner. The Hindu Barahsenis
have already reached the stage at which widow remarriage is no
longer recognized. Some members have, however, joined the
Arya Samaj, and a marriage was lately celebrated between a
Barahseni man and a widow of the same group. When the
project was announced, the orthodox Hindus held a meeting and
endeavoured to stop further proceedings, but without success.
Two days after the marriage another meeting was held, and the
married couple and those who aided them were solemnly ex-
communicated. A printed notice has been widely circulated
directing all Barahsenis to avoid dining, marrying, drinking or
holding any communication with those outcasted. A large feast
was subsequently held, at which about 4,000 orthodox Barahsenis
were present, but to which none of the guilty members were
invited. The feeling has gone so far that some men whose sons
had previously married into families now outcasted have re-
called their daughters-in-law, and refuse to let them visit their
parents. Others have turned their own daughters out of their
houses as they are married to outcastes.

The other case differs in nature. A Barahseni, A, has a
daughter who was married to B. B abandoned his wife and
kept a Musalman woman by whom he had several children, and
it was thought that he had become a Musulman, He recently
came to A and claimed his wife, and was entertained by his
father-in-law. A has, therefore, been outcasted, and was not
invited to the caste feast which celebrated the expulsion of those
concerned with the remarriage of a widow.

The question now arises, what is to become of the persons
outcasted ? Up toa recent date they would have been received.
by the Chausenis. This group, however, refuses to admit them,
as an important section of it has refused to recognize widow
marriage, and even the rest of the group look on the practice

Vol.§1, No. 10.] Formation of New Castes. bs 257
[N.S.]

with growing disfavour. The outcastes in the first case themselves
refuse to be considered as Chausenis on the ground that the widow
remarriage took place between persons of the same caste, while
degradation is only effected where a connection takes place be-
tween members of different castes. The Chausenis refuse to
accept A and B, because they hold that the contact with Musal-
mans has rendered them unfit for any relations. So far, no final
decision has been arrived at, and the result is that the excommu-
nicated persons are regarded as having no caste at all. It is not
improbable that the persons turned out for their connection with
the widow remarriage will form a separate group.

SS eee aeeeaEOes ewe

258 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [ December, 1905.

38. Ascaris halicoris Batrp.—By Dr. V. Linstow. Communicated
by N. Annanpate.! (With 1 plate).

Aus der Pars pylorica des Magens von Halicore dugong Quoy
& Gaim. Golf von Manaar.

Owen, Catalogue of the Physiological Series of Comparative
Anatomy, London, 1833.

Owen, Proc. Zool. Soc, London, VI., 1838, p. 30.

Baird, Proc. Zool. Soc., London, XXVIT., 1859, pp. 148-149,
tab. lvi, figs. 2—2c.

Parona, Annal. Mus. Civic. Genova, 2 ser., VII., Genova,
1889, pp. 751-761, fig. 1-3, tab. xiii, figs. 1-16.

Stiles u. Hassall, Intern. Paras. of the Fur Seal, Washington,
1899, pp. 147-151, figs. 70-75.

Aus dem Magen von Halitcore dugong; Penang, Rothes Meer,.
Assab.

Die Art hiess frither Ascaris halicoris Owen, aber OweEn’s:
Bezeichnung vom Jahre 1833 ist ein blosser Catalog-Name ohne:
jede Beschreibung ; anchim Jahre 1838 sagt er nur: “in each case
the gland (des Magens von Halicore dugong) was infested by
Ascarides, hereafter to be described”; er hat aber eine solche
Beschreibung nicht gegeben.

Die erste Beschreibung, auch unter dem Namen Ascaris
halicoris, stammt von Barrp, der die Lange des Mannchens auf
63°5 mm, die des Weibchens auf 82°5 mm. angiebt, und die Vulva
des Weibchens in § der K6rperlange vom Kopfende findet.

Hine eingehendere Beschreibung lieferte erst PARoNna; er
giebt an, dass das Mannchen 85-115 mm. lang ist, am Schwanzende
stehen jederseits 4 prae- und 1 post-anale Papille und die Spicula
sind kurz; das Weibchen hat eine Linge von 85-144 mm. und
eine Breite von 3° 5 mm; die Vulva liegt an der Grenze vom 1.
und 2 Drittel des Korpers ; die Vagina ist 6:5 mm., die Uteri sind
29 mm. lang; eine blinddarmartige Verliingerung des Darms
verlauft nach vorn neben dem Osophagus und hat 14 der Lange
desselben ; Parona giebt Durchschnitte der Korperwandung mit
der Muskulatur, dem Dorsalfeld und dem Lateralfeld, letzteres
mit dem in ihm verlaufenden Excretionsgefass, Durchschnitte der
3 Lippen, des Osophagus, des Darms, des Blinddarms, des.
Ovarium, des Uterus und des Hodens.

Stites und Hassani haben die Art nicht untersucht; sie
referiren tiber die Beschreibungen Batrp’s und Parona’s, und
reproduciren einen Theil der Abbildungen derselben.

Parona’s Schilderung kann ich mehrfach erganzen und die
Exemplare, welche meinen Untersuchungen zu Grunde lagen

[1 Dr. von Linstow has been kind enough to send me the accompanying
note on the Round Worm of the Dugong. It appears that no commu-
nication hag previously been published in German by the Asiatic Society of
Bengal; but it has been felt that the work of so distinguished an authority
should be issued exactly as it wasreceived. Nostudent of the Nematodes
can be ignorant of the contents of Dr. von Linstow’s numerous and invaluable
contributions to the literature of the gronp.—N. A.]

Vol. I, No. 10.] Ascaris Halicoris Batrp. 259

[N.S.]
verdanke ich der Giite des Dr. N. AnNANvALE, Deputy Superinten-
dent of the Indian Museum in Calcutta.

Die Farbe der Nematoden soll im Leben eine griinliche sein.
Beide Korperenden sind verdiinnt, und Kopf und Schwanzende
sind abgerundet.

Die Cuticula ist in Abstinden von 0:016 mm. regelmissig
quergeringelt ; eine grobere, tiefere Querringelung findet sich in
Entfernungen von 0'28—0°35 mm., und in den beiden Seitenlinien
stehen in Intervallen von 0:79 mm. vertiefte schwarz-pigmentirte
Querfurchen.

Die Leitenfelder haben eine Breite von $-1 des Durchmessers
und schimmern als weisse Strange durch die Ohio hindurch,

Die drei Lippen sind ohne Zwischenlippen, Zahnleisten und
Loffelbildung; die Dorsallippe ist 0°45 mm. lang und 0°48 mm.
breit; die grosste Breite liegt etwas vor der Mitte; die Form ist
gleichmassig abgerundet, die Pulpa bildet 2 rundliche Vorspriinge
nach yorn, die jeder einen kleinen fingerformigen Ausliufer nach
innen, nicht weit vom Vorderrande, haben; die Papillen stehen
im vorderen Drittel und sind weit nach aussen geriuckt,

Der Osophagus nimmnt +—+ der Gesammtlinge ein und ist
0°59 mm. breit; der 0°51 mm. breite Darm sendet eine blinddarm-
artige Verlinger ung nach vorn, die an der Dorsalseite des Osopha-
gus verliuft und linger als die Hilfte des letzteren ist.

Das Mannchen “erazenelni eine Lange von 115 mm., und eine
Breite von 3°16 mm. ; das Schwanzende, welches ;+, der Gesammt-
lange einnimmt, ist ventral eingebuchtet; an demselben stehen
jederseits in grossen Abstiinden 4 prae- und 3 post- anale Papillen ;
die vorderste der prae-analen steht 49 mm. vom Schwanzende
entfernt ; das 0°19 mm. breite Vas deferens schwillt 47 mm. vor
der Cloakenoffnung zu einer spindelformigen 062 mm. breiten
Samenblase an; die beiden Sirren sind fast gerade, an der Wurzel
knopfférmig verdickt und 158 mm, lang bei einer Breite von
0°079 mm. Sie verlaufen in einem Musculus protrusor, der sie mit
einer Scheide rings umgiebt, und kénnen von einem Musculus
retractor zuriickgezogen werden. Das dickwandige Vas deferens
ist aussen gebildet yon einer Ringmuskellage, an der innen ein sehr
breites gekerntes Epithel steht; auch der Ductus ejaculatorius hat
im Innern hohe gekernte Epithelzellen.

Das Weibchen wird 140 mm. lang und 3°95 mm. breit; das
Schwanzende nimmt 1, der ganze Thierlange ein; die Vulva
theilt die Linge yon yorn nach hinten im Verhaltniss von 14-29,
liegt also an der Grenze yon 1. und 2. Drittel. Die Vagina ist
4°75 mm. lang und 0°39 mm, breit; sie ist sehr dickwandig und
lisst unter dev Hiillmembran eine breite gekernte Ringmuskel-
schicht erkennen; dann folet eine homogene Lage und nach innen
yon dieser eine breite Auskleidungsmembran mit Lingsleisten.
Die Vagina theilt sich in 2 Uteri, die 1:07 mm. breit sind; unter
der dicken Hiillmembran hegt eine gekernte Ringmuskelschicht,
innen von dieser eine gramulirte Lage mit kleinen Kernen und
nach innen von der letztern eine Schicht sehr kleiner hyaliner
kugelformiger gekernter Korperchen. Die Uteri verschmilern

260 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [| December, 1905.

sich am Ende auf 0°24 mm. und gehen in ein gestreckt eifoérmiges
Receptaculum seminis von 1° 78 aum Lange und 0°59 mm. Breite
tiber, das an seiner Innenwand rundliche gekernte HEpithelzellen
tragt ; dann folet eme 4°3 mm. lange und 0°24 mm. breite Tuba,
welche ausser der Hiillmembran nur aus einer sehr machtigen
gekernten Ringmuskulatur besteht, und auf die Tuba folgt das
0°39 mm. breite, sehr lange, vielfach gewundene Ovarium.

Die Hier sind kugelrund und 0°13 mm. gross; die Schale ist
dick und aussen dicht mit unregelmiassigen Hindriicken bedeckt, -
die bald rundlich, bald viereckig, bald dreieckig und bald linien-
formig sind.

Hrklirung der Abbildungen.

Fig. 1. Dorsallippe.

Fig. 2. Mannliches Schwanzende von der linken Seite.

Fig. 3. Querschnitt durch das Vas deferens.

Fig. 4. Querschnitt durch die Vagina,

Fig. 5. u Uterus-Ende; r Receptaculum seminis; t Tuba;
o Theil des Ovarium.

Fig. 6. Querschnitt des Uterus.

Fig. 7. Theil eines Uterus-Querschnitts (starker vergrés-
sert).

Fig Querschnitt der Tuba.

8.
Fig. 9. Theil emes Querschnitts des Receptaculum seminis.
Fig. 10. Vagina mit dem Beginn der beiden Uteri.

NNN NSSF SS ESE

Vol. I, No. 10.] Numismatic Supplement VI. 261
[.N.S. |

39. NUMISMATIC SUPPLEMENT VI.

N.B.—The enwmeration of these articles is continued from page 1385

of the Journal for 1905.

II.—MEDILAVAL INDIA.
42. A Hoard oF RAJPUT COINS FOUND IN THE GARHWwAL District,

The following analysis of a hoard of Rajput coins found at
Lansdowne, in the Garhwal District of the United Provinces, is of
some interest, both on account of the contents of the hoard and on
account of the place of its discovery.

The circumstances of the find cannot be better described than
in the words of the owner, Major M. B. Roberts, 1/39 Garhwal
Rifles. In a letter to the British Museum, dated 29th May, 1905,
he says :—

2 The following is the history of the finding of these coins:
sses..--.e. My Regiment is permanently stationed at Lansdowne (a
cantonment which came into existence on 4th November, 1887) in
the Garhwal District of the United Provinces of Agra and Oudh
(late North-Western Provinces). The station is situated on the
outer range of the Himalayas between 5,000 or 6,000 feet above
sea level, and lies just about half-way between Naini Tal and
Mussoorie. The district is populated for the most part by Rajputs,
who were supposed to have immigrated there from Rajputana at
yarious periods up to about 1,000 years ago, I believe. On the
22nd October last, whilst having a building site for my house ex-
cavated on the top of the ridge, a number of these coins, all exactly
alike, were discovered buried in a small earthenware pot about two
feet below the surface. Unfortunately the earthenware pot was
broken into minute fragments by the pickaxe.”

The coins were 157 in number ; they were of copper, often show-
ing traces of silverplating, and they were all of the well-known
Rajput types “the bull and horseman.” They are distributed as
follows :—

Tomara Dynasty of Dehli and Qanauj.

No.
Sallaksana-Pala Deva, A.D. 978-1003.!
(v. Cunningham, Coins of Medixval India, page 88,
TPL ID) bias 360 airs 5
Ananga-Pala Deva, A.D, 1049-1079.
(ibid. page 85, Pl, [X. 4 and 5) see 3 6
Rtahtor Dynasty of Qanauy.
Madana-Pala Deva, A.D. 1080-1115.
(ibid. page 85, Pl. IX. 15) ove Bg)

1 The dates given are those of Cunningham.

262 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [ December, 1905.

Chauhan Dynasty of Ajmir and Dehlz.

Somegvara Deva, A.D. 1162-1166.
(cbid. page 86, Pl. IX. 9) tee senate

Rajputs of Narwar.

Chahada Deva, A.D. 1234-1255.
(Thomas, Pathans, page 70, referred to but not
illustrated in Cunningham, op. cit. page 92) 72

Coins not completely identified.
(cf. Cunningham, op. cit. page 88)... Bee id:

——

TOTAL Rotel |/5)7/

—

It will be seen that the coins, which are at the same time both
the most numerous and the latest in date, are those of Chahada
Deva; and it is, therefore, not unreasonable to suggest that the
hoard was most probably concealed during his reign.

An excellent summary of the chief events of the reign of
Chahada Deva is to be found in Thomas, Pathans, page 67ff. His
position seems to have been that of “the recognised leader and
lord paramount of the Hindu princes of Central India, struggling
to preserve their kingdoms from the foreign invader” (op. cit.
page 68). He is described in an inscription of his descendant Gana-
pati (Vikrama 1355, A.D. 1298) as the founder of a family of
Rajput princes reigning at Nalapura (Narwar),! and his coins of
the Narwar type bear dates varying from 1292 to 1311 Vikrama
(A.D. 1233+ 2 to 1254)%; but such of his coins as occur in the
persent hoard are not of the well-known Narwar type, and they
would certainly seem to indicate some extension of his dominion.
Ajmir would be a far more probable attribution for these coins,
though the varieties of Rajptit coinage have not yet been studied
with sufficient mimuteness to enable us in most cases, to deter-
mine their different localities with precision. All that can be said
with certainty in regard to the locality of these coins is that they
do not belong to Narwar, the characteristic types of which are
quite different.

As Thomas points out (page 70), the coins bearing the name
of Chahada Deva represent him either (1) as an independent sov-
ereign, or (2) as atributary to the Muhammadan conqueror, Shams-
ud-din Altamsh. All the seventy-two coins of his which are in-
cluded in this hoard belong to the former class; and we may

1 Indian Antiquary, XXII, p. 81.

2 Cunningham, Coins of Medizxval India, p. 90, Pl. X. 5-7.

3 Cunningham (op. cit. p. 91) attributes these coins to Ranthambhor.
But if the chronological table given by Thomas, p. 45, is correct, Rantham-
bhor was captured by Altamsh in Hejira 623=A.D. 1226; and Chahada-
deva seems not to be heard of before A.D. 1234 (Thomas, p. 67).

Vol. I, No. 10.] Numismatic Supplement VI. 263
[ N.S. |

perhaps conclude that the hoard was buried in the earlier part of

his reign before the date of his submission to Altamsh.

Major Roberts has noticed the tradition which is still preserved
of immigrations of the population from Rajputana to Garhwal.
Tt is extremely probable that the Muhammadan conquests were
one of the chief causes of such immigrations ; and the hoard, which
we have examined, may, therefore, be regarded as an historical
record of considerable interest.

It remains only to add that, through the generosity of Major
Roberts, specimens of each variety represented in the hoard have
been added to the collection of the British Museum.

British MUseuM : K. J. Rarson.

43. IV—MUGHAL EMPHRORS.
Some rare MucaHan Corns.
(i) Akbar.
fA.
Weight, 306 grains.

Size, ‘84 inch.
Date, 981 in Persian words.

SleSiyts
Obverse. ushto C8 pm

Luar)

Reverse. sas (San-i-Nuhsad hashtad wa yak)

cS We

Fulas of Akbar from the Dehli Mint with the title Hazrat are
known, but this Fulds bears the full title Dar-ul-Mulk Hazrat,
which we;meet on Humayun’s Fulus.

(ii)
Ab.
Weight,4154 grains.
Size, °7 inch.
Date, 965 in Persian words.
Obverse. $9 939 (Zarb Fulus
jas Hissar Piroza )

x7)9 Sys

264 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1905.

Srey Fale (San-t-Térikh
Reverse. ane Nuhsad Shasht.)
BY-Ya) (wa) Pang).
This Fulus (hitherto unpublished) weighs 154 grains, and is
therefore half a Dam or half a Fulus. ;
There is an eight-rayed star just to the right of SG of cps?

Gu) Farrukhsiyar.
Fay)

We pight, 100 grains.
Size, °75 inch.
Mint, Bahadur garh. ?

No date.
Obverse. gee e a
um sh?
teverse. S 8,5 yolks
eye

This is a new mint in copper of this king. As the word Baha-
dur is found engraven on this Fuliés, it is open to question whe-
ther it is (1) Bahadurgarh, (2) Bahadurpatan, or (3) Bahddurpir.
I was fortunate in getting this coin as a present from my kind friend
Mr. Cowasjee Eduljee Kotwall of this place, alone with some
rubbings of copper Fulius of the same king. On one of the rub-
bings I read distinctly the mint (Bah)adurgarh.

(iv) Jahandar Shah.
AB).
Weight, 166 grains.
Size, °75 inch.
Mint, Daru-s-Saltanat Burhanptr.
Date, Ahad =|
Obverse. Portions of the usual legends.
510 9 40 Os> Biwe d3 ls! ys
BS yosla APS eos
in three lines.
Reverse.
Leper wel
Wah io
wy

dep leys

Vol. I, No. 10.) Numismatic Supplement VI. 265

[N.S.]

Hitherto coins are known to have been issued from the Bur-
hanpur Mint either without, or with one of its titles—viz., Baldat
8a Buldat-i-Fakhira ts! ¥oly and Daru-s-Sarir yyrtyto. This
mohr adds a new epithet to this mint.

(v) Rafiu-d-Darjat.
Vai)

Weight, 170 grains.
Size, °92 inch.
Mint, Zinat-ul-Bulad Ahmadabad.
Date, 11(31) A.H.
Obverse. Couplet in three lines thus—
IS Wiha by dies ASee 05
crlaya} ey) yo rae CSL)
The Hijri year is at the right ofthe top line.
tril.
Reverse.
sbjoes!
ot} 23}
90
Utz! eae Cpl

I have had a rupee similar in design to this gold mohr pre-
sented by my kind friend Dr. Geo. P. Taylor, of Ahmadabad.
It was Dr. Taylor who pointed out, for the first time, that
Ahmadabad, like other epithets, was associated also with the
title Ginat-ul-Bulad (the Beauty of Towns). Vide his interest-
ing article on “ Coins of Ahmadabad,” pages 436-437, Plate V.
Volume XX. No. LVI, Journal Bombay B.R.A. Society.

KF. J. THANAWALA,
Bombay.

44, A New Type or tHp Coins or Sain Sausa’.

The coin described below has recently been acquired for the
Lucknow Museum from a find in the Banda District.

Obverse. Reverse.
al) Sy aly y csi ga (ly? )
o4 —_s> glsS os] lf osme
4} J yao si, 20!) ydiSne

Margin doubtful.
AM. Weight, 143. Size, ‘79 inch.

266 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. | December, 1905.

No coins of Shah Shuja are recorded in the catalogues of the
Calcutta and Lahore Museums. The British Museum Catalogue
describes two coins (Nos. 690 and 691). The reading of the
new coin differs from these in the case of the reverse. There
is no trace of a square area, and in this respect the new coin
resembles the early issues of Shah Jahan. The horizontal mark
below the first line is probably part of the word 4, and the similar
mark above the last line is possibly wx, the completion of the word
St which commences in the last line. J cannot explain the letter
read as _» which comes between ols and csjle in the first line. The

reading of the last line suggests that the lower margin of the re-
verse on both the coins described in the B.M. catalogue should

read 8l& yoiSe. In Coin No. 690 it is read ob (} ) 45 (| ) which
is historically improbable. The right margin of Coin No. 691 is
read sl} wie. A comparison with Coin No. 690 shows that it
should be gil wissale, The top margin of No. 691 seems to

read yds} yO)... , which presents a difficulty.
: R. Bury.

45, ON THE IDENTITY OF THE CoINS OF GUJARAT FABRIC AND THE
Strat Maumoptis.

In this article I purpose submitting evidence which, in my
opinion, goes to prove that the silver coins designated in the
British Museum Catalogue comms of ‘Gujarat Fabric” are iden-
tical with those known to early writers under the name of ‘“ Sarat
Mahmidis.”

I. From the testimony of European travellers in India in
the seventeenth century, it is clear that in the first half of that
century silver coins of two distinct types were current in and
around the city of Surat.

(a) Edward Terry, “Chaplain to the Right Hon. Sir
Thomas Row, Knt.,” landed from the good ship
“Charles” at the port of Strat on the 25th of
September, 1616 (A.H. 1025). In his “ Voyage to
East India,” first published in 1655, he thus
writes :—

“They call thei pieces of money roopes, of which
“there are some of divers values, the meanest
“worth two shillings and three-pence, and the
“best two shillings and nine-pence sterling. By
“these they account their estates and payments.
“They have another coin of inferior value in
“ Guzarat, called Mamoodies, about twelve-pence
“ sterling; both the former and these are made in
“halves, and and some few in quarters ; so -that
“‘three-pence is the least piece of silver current in
“those countries, and very few of them to be seen.

Vol. I, No. 10.] Numismatic Supplement VI. 267
[N.S.]

DR aes Their silver coin is made either round or

“square, but so thick as that it never breaks, nor
“wears out.!”

The “meanest” rupees in this passage correspond doubtless to
the ordinary rupees issued by Akbar and Jahangir, weighing each
about 180 grains; but the “best”? rupees will be the heavy ones,
from 212 to 220 grains each, that were struck in the first few
years of Jahangir’s reign. The ratio of the former to the latter
would be 180: 220, or, as Terry has it, 27: 33. But besides
these rupees a coin distinctly inferior was also current in Gujarat,
to wit, the ‘‘mamoody,” worth about 12d., or a little less than
half the ordinary rupee of that time.

(6) Sir Thomas Herbert, who, as Secretary to the English
Embassy to Persia, journeyed in the East from
1627 to 1629 (A.H. 1037-9), writes in his ‘‘ Travels”
regarding the money of ‘ Indostan. ”’

‘The current money here is pice, which is an heavy
“round piece of brass, 30 of which make one
“shilling. The Mamoody, which is of good
“silver, round and thick, stamped after the man-
“ner of the Saracens (who allow no images) with
‘““ Arabick letters, only importing the King and
‘““ Mahomet, is in value one shilling of our coin ;
“and the Roopee, which is made also of like pure
““ silver, is 2s. 3d., and a Pardow 4s.?

(c) But it is Albert de Mandelslo, resident in Strat in
1638 (A.H. 1048), who gives the most precise infor-
mation as to the money current in “the Kingdome
of Guzuratta.” In his ‘‘ Voyages and Travels ” he
writes :—

“They have also two sorts of money, to wit, the
“ Mamoudies and the Ropias. The Mamoudis are
‘made at Surat, of silver of a very base alley, and
‘“‘ are worth about twelve-pence sterling, and they
“90 onely at Surat, Brodra, Broitchia, Cambaya,
‘‘and those parts. Over all the Kingdome be-
“ sides, as at Amadabath and elsewhere, they have
““ Ropias Chagam, which are very good silver,
“and worth halfe a crown French mony. Their
“small mony is of copper, and these are the
‘““Peyses we spoke of, and whereof twenty-six
“make a Mamoudy, and fifty-four a Ropia.........
“ Spanish Ryalls and Rixdollars are worth there
“five Mamoudis...... The Chequines and Ducats of
‘“« Venice are more common there (than the Xera-
“phins), and are worth eight and a half, and

| Terry : “A Voyage to East India,” edition of 1777, p. 118.
2 Harris: “A Compleat Collection of Voyages and’ Travels,” Vol. I.;
p. 411.

268 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. { December, 1905.

“sometimes nine Ropias, Surat-money, accord-
“ing to the change and the rate set on the
‘“¢ money.’’”!

Reckoning the French crown (écu), the Spanish real, and
the German rixdollar (veichsthaler) each at 4s. 6d., and the
Italian sequin and Venetian (gold) ducat each at 9s. 4d., we arrive,
according to the above passage, at the following values: The
““Ropia Chagam ” 27d.; the Mahmtdi, or ‘ Ropia, Surat-money,”
12d., or 13d. or 10 8d. or 12°4d. It thus appears that, while the
“Ropia Chagam,” which is evidently the full Imperial rupee,
stood fairly constant at 27d., the value of the Sarat Mahmiudi
fluctuated between a minimum of 10°8d. and a maximum of 13d.
We should also bear in mind that the silver of the Mahmiudi is
here stated to have been inferior to that of the rupee; also that
the district in which the Mahmidi passed as current coin was
limited to the southern part of the province of Gujarat, say from
Stirat to Cambay.

Il. With what coin may we identify this Strat Mahmtdi? Is
it the same as the well-known Mahmidi of Persia ?

That any Persian money should have been current in Gujarat
and restricted there to merely the southern districts is certainly
very improbable.

Moreover the value of this Persian Mahmidi is given by
Tavernier as one-sixteenth of the Venetian sequin, 1.e., 7d. or
one-eighth of the Spanish dollar, 7.c., 6$d.2_ Also in the Table of
Equivalences prefixed to J. P{hillips]’s English Translation of
Tavernier’s “Six Voyages” (1636-1667) the Persian Mahmidi is
entered as 8°05d. This, then, is plainly a considerably less valuable
silver piece than the Strat Mahmidi ranging from 10°8d. to 13d.

When treating of the Persian coins, Fryer, whose eight
letters were written from India or Persia between the years 1672
and 1681, states —

“3 Shahees is 1 Mam. Surat ;
2 Shahees is 1 Mamood. Persia.””®

When Fryer thus definitely distinguishes between the Surat
Mahmidi and the Persian, we may safely conclude that the two
coins are not identical.

III. Can the Strat Mahmidi have been a silver coin of one
or other of the various types that were current in Cutch and
Kathiawar (Navanagar, Jimagadh, and Porbandar) ?

The trade between Gujarat and Cutch, or Gujarat and
Kathiawar, was for the most part carried on by land and not by

1 Mandelslo: “Voyages and Travels”: English translation by John
Davies, edition of 1662, p. 85.
Ball’s edition of “Travels in India by Jean Baptiste Tavernier,”
Vol I., p. 26, n. 4.

3 Fryer: “A New Account of East India and Persia’’: edition of
1698, p 211.

Vol. I, No. 10.] Numismatic Supplement VI. 269
[N.S.]

sea, and the influence of this trade would thus be specially felt in
the north and north-west portion of the province. It hence
appears extremely improbable that any coins from Cutch or
Kathiawar should become the circulating medium in South Guja-
rat, yet not find acceptance as currency for Ahmadabad and the
north.

The coms of Cutch and Kathiawar may indeed have been
originally called ‘mahmidis,’ but this designation soon gave
place to the term ‘kori,’ the name that still attaches to them.
Accordingly, if ever current in the Strat district, they would, in
all probability, have been denominated not the Mahmudis but the
Koris of Strat.

Lastly, these Koris, like the Persian Mahmudis, were all of
them considerably inferior in value to the Strat Mahmiidi. The
latter, we have seen, was reckoned at about 12d., the rupee being
27d., but the Cutch Kori is now, and was probably then too, ap-
praised at 7:1d., that of Jinagadh at 7-3d., of Navanagar at 7-6d.,
and of Porbandar at 85d. Or, to express these relative values in
another way, in exchange for Rs. 100, 225 Strat Mahmtdis
sufficed; but of the Ranashai Koris of Porbandar 318 were
required ; of the Jamshai Koris of Navanagar, 355, of the Diwan-
shai Koris of Jainagadh, 369; and of the Koris of Cutch, 380. In
fact it would seem that, while the Surat Mahmidi fluctuated
between half a rupee and a third, inclining to the half, the Kori
ranged in value between a third of a rupee and a quarter, inclin-
ing to the quarter.

For the above reasons the conclusion is inevitable that the
Kori, whether of Cutch or of Kathiawar, cannot be regarded as
identical with the Surat Mahmidi.

IV. Were the Strat Mahmidis the same as the silver coins
of the Gujarat Saltanat ?

No reason can be given why the Gujarat Saltanat coins should
have remained current in the south of Gujarat, yet not in the
north. Indeed, bearing in mind that during the declining years of
the Saltanat, say, after the death of Bahadur in 1536, its coins
probably all issued from a single mint—that of Ahmadabad—we
may fairly assume that they would survive in circulation longer in
the Ahmadabad, or northern, districts than in the south, It seems
incredible that coins struck in Ahmadabad should be superseded
there and yet be accepted as the currency of Sirat.

It was in A.H. 980 (A.D. 1573) that Akbar conquered Gujarat
and annexed it to his Hmpire. In that same year he issued coins
in his own name from the Ahmadabad Mint, and we may safely
affirm that thereafter he would permit no more coins to be struckin
the name of the vanquished Sultan Muzaffar III. Save for the five
months of A.H. 991 (A.D. 1583) when Muzaffar again held the
sovereignty of Gujarat, the minting of coins of the independent
Saltanat must have ceased in the year 1573, thus some sixty-five
years before Mandelslo’s visit to Strat. Now it is surely most im-
probable that during all these sixty-five years the coinage—never
very plentifnl—of the conquered province of Gujarat should have

270 Journal of the Asiatic Sowety of Bengal. | December, 1905.

maintained its standing as the recognised currency of the southern
districts.

We have already seen that the Sirat Mahmitdi was worth just
about four-ninths of the Imperial rupee, hence, had both coins been
of equally good silver, the Mahmitidi would have weighed 80 grains
over against the 180 grains of the rupee. Its actual weight, how-
ever, owing to the presence of a “‘ very base alley,’ must have been
more than 80 grains, say between 85 and 90. Now, no silver coins
of the Gujarat Saltanat are known of this weight: they are all
either much lighter or much heavier. Of fifteen silver coins of
Muzaffar III, now in my possession, the weights are as follow :—

35, 36, 67, 70, 71, 72 (four), 73, 74, 110, 111, 112, and 114 grains.
Of these not one could by any possibility be regarded as in value
four-fifths of a Mughal rupee.

Thus we are compelled to the conclusion that the Strat Mah-
mudi was not identical with any silver coi of the Gujarat
- Saltanat.

V. Hf, now, this Mahmidi current in Strat was not the Persian
Mahmidi, nor the Cutch or Kathiawar Kori, nor the Mahmidi of
the Gujarat Saltanat, then, by the “ method of exhaustion,” it must
have been the Coin of Gujarat Fabric—the only remaning type.
The identity of these two is confirmed by the following considera-
tions :—

(a) All the Gujarat Fabric coins bear impressed the name ot
Akbar, the conqueror of the province, and hence the
Imperial Government would readily sanction the use
of such coins for currency in a portion of the Empire.

(6) The dates on these coins, ranging, so far as yet known,
from A.H. 989 to 1027 (A.D. 1581-1618), bring
them easily within the period to which the state-
ments made regarding the Strat Mahmudi by Terry
and Herbert and Mandelslo have reference.

(c) One comes across these coins nowadays in the strip
of country between Sitrat and Ahmadabad, but
they are seldom found in Kathiawar or in North
Gujarat. Thus it is the area in which the Strat
Mahmidis were originally current that mainly sup-
plies us at the present day with specimens of Guja-
rat Fabric coins.

(d) And—most important of all—the average weight of
these Gujarat Fabric coins which now come to hand
proves to be 85 grains. Hence we may infer the
original weight to have been about 90 grains. Con-
sidering both their base material and their weight, the
money-value of such coins would bear to that of the
Akbari or ordinary Jahangirt rupee a ratio of just
about 12: 27—the ratio affirmed by Mandelslo to
subsist between the Strat Mahmidi and the ‘ Ropia
Chagam.”

Tf, then, as the conclusion of the whole matter, we may regard

Wolk D..No.. 10,1 Numismatic Supplement VI. 271
ENS.)

the Gujarat Fabric coins as identical with the Strat Mahmidis,
we may further unhesitatingly accept as true Mandelslo’s express
statement that these coins were “ made at Strat.” For acurrency
purely local there was a purely local mintage. The capital city of
the province, Ahmadabad, issued imperial rupees in the very year
of the imperial conquest ; but soon thereafter the less important
city in the south, Siirat, opened with, we may well believe, im-
perial sanction, a mint of its own, whence for some forty years
issued not indeed ‘“ Ropias Chagam” but the Strat Mahmidi,
known to-day as the coins of “ Gujarat Fabric.”

Ahmadabad. Guo. P. Taytor.

V.—MISCELLANEOUS.
46. On some “ GENEALOGICAL” COINS OF THE GusaRat SALTANAT,

On the occasion of a recent visit to Bombay it was my good
fortune to visit the rooms of the Bombay Branch of the Royal
Asiatic Society in the company of my kind friend Mr. Framji
Jamaspji Thanawala. He had previously written me that in the
Society’s cabinet he had discovered two coins of the Gujarat Sal-
tanat, remarkable since bearing the pedigree of the regnant Sultan
traced back, in each case, to the founder of the dynasty. Two
such, if we may so call them, “genealogical” coins of Gujarat
haye already been published, one in Thomas’ “ Pathan Kings,” and
the other in the Journal of the Bo. Br. R.A.S. No. LVIII. A
description of all the four coins now known of this extremely rare-
type may prove of interest.

1, Vide Thomas: “ Pathan Kings,” page 352.

AR.
Weight, 172 grains.
Date, A.H. 828 (by a misprint entered in Thomas as A.H.
823), A.D. 1424-25,
Obverse,
Ara @ss& ole
Iteverse. -

em Si J

272 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1905-

2. In cabinet of Bo. Br. R.A.S, This coin was once looped,
but the loop has been wrenched off.

JR.
Weight, 167 grains.
Date, wanting.
Obverse. In square.
OFS wy BLO Seat
sisS wold sl

Margins quite illegible.

Reverse.
peed wy blend

el xt

3. In cabinet of Bo. Br, R.A.S. This coin is looped.
JAB
Weight, 188 grains.
Date, A.H. [8]65, A.D. 1460-61.
Obverse.
So SU Lys} BLA Sges5U0
OS Cpt BLS Seat Gp! lh
gla hbo wt sla

48 eve 200 coe eee

On the last line the first word is probably wlelJt

Reverse.
olin} Why Sy)
HH sy ott peli

ot al

_ This is the earliest Gujarat coin yet known bearing the phrase
who} aly 51,1, the Truster in Allah, the Gracious.

Vol. I, No. 10.] Numismatic Supplement VI. 273
[N.S. ]
4. Vide Jour Bo. Br. R.A.S., No. LVIII., page 334, and

Plate IV.

AR.

Weight, 130 grains.

Date, A.H. 933, (A. D. 1526-27).

Obverse.
Latest owt» Lio — bs
glo eben Cy Bla yoles
Part of this legend is worn, but it is probable that the coin

bore at this part the words 225441

Reverse.
BLS S450 Cy) HLS 394500 Gy?
$1, 2b uy slAras0uy) BlSder! oy
Tt

Thus the legend, beginning on the obverse, is continued on the
reverse.

This most interesting coin was very kindly presented to me
four years ago by Mr. H. Nelson Wright, I.C.S.

In connexion with these four “ genealogical” coins in silver,
reference may be made to a bullion coin of allied type, struck by

N.B.—The following Genealogical Table includes all the kings
of the Gujarat Saltanat whose names occur on any of the five
coins :—

2.—Muzaffar I., H. 810-813.
|
1.—Muhammad I., H. 806.
|
3.—Ahmad I., H. 813-846.

4,,— Muhammad II., H. 846-855.
|

ee nF |
5. - Qutbaldin Ahmad IL, 6.—Mahmiid I., H. 863-917.
H. 855-863,

|
7.—Muzaffar IT., H. 917-932,

|
8.—Bahadur, H. 932-943,

274 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [December, 1905.

Mahmid I in A.H. 863 (A.D. 1458-59), in which his relationship
to the two preceding Sultans is indicated. The coin is figured
on Plate II (Nos. 15a, 156) of the Jour. Bo. Br. R.A.S.,

No. LVIII.
ts legends read as follow :—

Obverse.

eu ott eye!

gla Sse S70

Reverse.
$l whs zl!
XL eso Gy!

A“ wlblS|

Ahmadabad. Gro. P. Taynor.

en rg

NOV 23 1905

PROCEEDINGS

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL
ane temple
JANUARY, 1905. NEW YORK
BOTANICAL
ee ee ome ' GARDEN.

The Monthly General Meeting of the Society was held on
Wednesday, the 4th January, 1905, at 9-15 p.m.

The Hon. Mr. Justice F. H. Pargiter, B.A., I.C.S., President, ©
- in the chair. ¥

The following members were present :—

Mr. J. Bathgate, Major W. J. Bythell, R.E., Babu Manmohan
Chakravarti, Rai Sarat Chandra Das Bahadur, Mr. F. Doxey,
Mr. G. C. Dudgeon, Mr. N. lL. Hallward, Dr. W. C. Hossack, Mr.
H.H. Mann, Dr. M. M. Masoom, The Hon. Mr. Justice Saroda
Charan Mitra, Captain L. Rogers, I.M.S., Pandit Yogesa Chandra
Sastree, Pandit Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana.

Visitors :—Mr. H. Chandler, Mr. P. M. Choudry, Rev. Ekai
Kamaguchi, Mr. B. T. Pell, and Mr. 8. C- Sanial.

The minutes of the last Meeting were read and confirmed.
Sixty-nine presentations were announced.

His Honour Sir A. H. L. Fraser, K.C.S.1., Lt.-Col. H. T.S.
Ramsden, I.A., Mr. J. T. Rankin, Mr. Sukumar Sen, Babu Muck-
soodan Das, and Mr. F. Turner, were ballotted for and elected
Ordinary Members.

It was announced that Babu Roormall Goenka and Major A. H.
Bingley, 1.A., had expressed a wish to withdraw from the Society.

The President announced that he had, in accordance with the
resolution passed at the last Council Meeting, that the objects
which the Society decided to lend to the Trustees of the Victoria
Memorial Hall for exhibition should be lent to them for exhibition
during this cold season as soon as H.E. the Viceroy wished for
them—handed them over to the Trustees, except the Asoka stone
which the Trustees excluded.

The President also announced that he had received six essays

2

Proceedings. [ January, 1905.

in competition for the Elhott Prize for Scientific Research for the
year 1904.

Rai Sarat Chandra Das Bahadur described the Lamaic in-
carnation of Tibet.

The following papers were read :—

1. On the Markandeya Purana..—By Tur Hon. Mr. Justice
F. BE. Pareirer, B.A., 1.C.8.

The paper will not be published in the Journal.

2. The Dalat Lama's Hierarchy— By Rat Sarat CHANDRA
Das Banapor, C.1.E.

The paper’ has been published in Journal, Part I, Extra
No., 1904.

3. On the Prevalence of Fevers in the Dinajpur District —By
Leonard Rogrrs, M.D., 1.M.S., Officiating Professor of Pathology,
Medical College, Calcutta.

The paper has been published in Journal, Part II, Sup-
plement, 1904,

ee ae ae a a a a ee

Lt)
a]
=P)
=

*)

van

)
2

9

NOV

' Ups 4 Sur
LIBRARY
NIG o = Vv
NEW YORK

FEBRUARY, 1905. BOTANICAL

GARDEN.

The Annual Meeting of the Society was held on Wednesday,
the Ist February, 1905, at 9-30 P.M.

His Excettency Lorp Curzon, G.M.S.L., GALLE, Patron;
in the chair. E

The following members were present :—

Dr. A. G. Allan, Mr. N. Annandale, Mr. J. Bathgate, Rev.
P. O. Bodding, Babu Monmohan Chakravarti, Mr. B. L. Chaudhuri,
Mr. W. R. Criper, Mr. J. N. Das-Gupta, Mr. W. K. Dods, Mr.
F. Doxey, His Honour Sir A. H. L. Fraser, Mr. N. l. Hallward, Mr.
T. H. Holland, Mr. D. Hooper, Dr. W. C. Hossack, Mr. G. W.
Kichler, Mr. C. W. McMinn, Mr. J. Macfarlane, Mr. EH. D. Macla-
gan, Kumar Ramessur Maliah, The Hon. Mr. Justice F. H. Pargi-
ter, Mr. W. Parsons, The Hon. Mr. A. Pedler, Kumar Satindradev
Rai Mahasai, Dr. P. K. Ray, Mr. H. H. Risley, Captain L. Rogers,
I.M.S., Dr. EH. D. Ross, Pandit Yogesga Chandra Sastree, Mahama-
hopadhyaya Haraprasad Shastri, Mr. H. EH. Stapleton, Pandit
Satis Chandra Vidyabhushana, Mr. H. Vredenburg, Mr. W. H.
Arden Wood, Mr. J. Wyness.

Visitors :—Mr. R. EH. V. Arbuthnot, Miss B. Buckland, Mr. H
Chandler, Mr. E. C. Cotes, Mr. A. F. Cousins, Rev. J. Dahlmann, §.J.,
Lady Fraser, BabuD evabrata Mukhopadhyaya, Kumar Manindradev
Rai Mahasai, Mr. 8. C. Sanyal, Mr. G. Stapleton, Rey. A.
Willifer- Young.

According to the Rules of the Society, the President ordered
the voting papers to be distributed for the election of Officers and
Members of Council for 1905 and appointed Messrs. G. W. Kiichler
and N. L. Hallward to be scrutineers.

The President announced that the Trustees of the “ Elliott
Prize for Scientific Research” had awarded the prize for the
year 1904 to Babu Sarasi Lal Sarkar, and read the following report
of the Trustees :—

Report on the Hlliott Prize for Scientific Research for 1904.

The Trustees have received Hssays from the following com-
petitors for the prize :—

1. On the crystalline properties of a potassium copper fer-
rocyanide compound. Parts I & II.—By Sarast Lat Sarxar, M.A.

2. On the experimental determination of the Hlectro-chemical
equivalent of nickel. (With diagrams.).—By Svurunora Nave ?
Maritra, M.A.

3:

Annual Report. [ February, 1905,

3. On a complete investigation of a Phenomenon taking place
beyond the critical angle—By JAGAvtnpRA Roy.

4, Hssay on metal soaps— By AKSHAYA KumMAR Masumpar, M.A.

5. An Hssay on the results of “ Original Researches” (made
during 1903-04) leading to the discovery of a cheap and simple chemical
process for the extraction and cleaning of fibre from plantain and banana
‘stalks easily adoptable for the development of a profitable industry by all
classes of people in Bengal or in any place in India.—By MANINDRA-
NATH BANERJEE.

6. On the Hindu method of manufacturing spirit from rice
and its scientific explanation By Jocus CHANDRA Roy.

The Trustees, after consulting experts as provided in the
scheme, adjudge the prize for the year 1904 to Babu Sarasi Lal
Sarkar, M.A. :

F. H. PArciter,

President, Asiatic Society of Bengal.

Apx. PEDLER,
Director of Public Instruction, Bengal,
AND
Vice-Chancellor, Calcutta University.

_ QCAatcurta,
30th January, 1905.

The President also announced that the Barclay Memorial
Medal for the year 1904 had been offered to Lt.-Col. D. D. Cunning-
ham, F.R.S., C.1.B., 1. M.S., (retired).

The President then called upon the Secretary to read the
Annual Report.

AANNUAL REPORT FOR 1904.

The Council of the Society have the honour to submit the fol-
lowing Report on the state of the Society’s affairs during the
year ending 3lst December, 1904.

Member List.

_ During the year under review, 39 Ordinary Members were
elected, 8 withdrew, 5 died, and 18 were removed from the list,
viz.: 6 under Rule 38, as defaulters; 9 under Rule 40, being
more than 3 years absent from India; and 3 under Rule 9, not

4,

February, 1905.] Annual Report.

having paid their entrance fees. The election of one member was
cancelled at his own request as he was not, prepared to join
the Society at once. Of the members elected, 2 were old members
who rejoined. The total number of members, at the close of 1904,
was thus 343 against 335 in the preceding year. This is higher
than that of any year on record. Of these 132 were Resident,
130 Non-Resident, 14 Foreign, 21 Life, and 45 absent from India ;

-and one a Special Non-Subscribing Member, as will be seen from
the following table, which also shows the fluctuations in the nume
ber of Ordinary Members during the past six years :—

Pavyine. | Non-Payine.
Y 5 3 sj GRAND
BAD: = a | 3s |d'3w Tora.
2 |} e202} & 3 a (Sm.8| =
Spee ee ie | eee
= ox
re ao | e a5 a \@e3/¢
1899 120| 119] 13 | 252] 21 27 1 | 49 |. 301
1900 .. | 116 | 124] 18 | 258| 22 | 80 1 | 53 | 3811
1901 | FOS eeISS es |, 269) | 22). 36 1 | 59 | 328.
1902 126 | 126] 14 | 266] 21 46 1. | 68 | 334.
1903 127 \et260) 159 268 | 21 45 A Gye Ge
1904 BR) BO) I SK) | Ben] aL 45 1 | 67 | -343-

The five Ordinary Members, whose loss by death during the year
we have to regret, were Dr. U.C. Mukerjee, Mr. A. T. Pringle, Mr.
H. M. Rustomjee, Dr. Mahendralal Sircar and Dr. C. R. Wilson.

There was one death amongst the Honorary Members, wiz., Dr.
Otto von Béhtlingk. To fill this vacancy and others previously
existing, the Society on the recommendation of the Council elected as
Honorary Members, Professor H. Kern, Professor Ram Krishna
Gopal Bhandarkar, Professor M. J. DeGoeje, Professor Ignaz
Goldziher, Sir Charles Lyall, Sir William Ramsay, and Dr. G. A.
Grierson.

The List of Special Honorary Centenary Members and Associate
Members continued unaltered from last year; their numbers
standing at 4 and 13 respectively.

Tntimation was received of the death of Dr. Emil Schlagint-
weit, the only Corresponding Member of the Society.

No members compounded for their subscription’ during the
year.

5

Annual Report. (February, 1905.

Indian Museum.

. There was only one change amongst the Trustees; it was
caused by the death of Dr. Mahendralal Sirear, and Mr. J. Macfar-
lane was appointed to fill the vacant place.

The other Trustees who represent the Society have been :—

The Hon. Mr. A. Pedler, C.I.H., F.R.S.
G. W. Kichler, Esq., M.A.

T. H. Holland, Esq., F.G.S., F.R.S:
The Hon. Sir J. A. Bourdillon, K.C-S8.1.

Finance.

The accounts of the Society are shown 1 in the Appendix under
the usual heads, and besides in this year’s account there is an
additional statement under the head “ Arabic and Persian Manu-
scripts.” Statement No. 9 contains the Balance Sheet of the
Society and of the different funds administered through it.

The financial position of the Society shows an improvement,
and the credit balance at the close of the year amounts to
Rs. 1,92,939-7-5, which is more than eleven thousand rupees in
advance of last year, and is ORY due to the special Government
grant of Rs. 10,000.

The Budget for 1904 was estimated at the following firures:; —
Receipts Rs. 17,700; Expenditure Rs. 25,374-4 (Ordinary
Rs..17,254-4 ; Extraordinar y Rs. 8,120.) Taking into account only -
the or dinary items of receipts and expenditure for the year 1904, the
actual results have been :—Receipts Rs. 30,368-13-8 ; Expenditure
Rs. 14,134-0-7, showing a balance (after setting aside the special
grant of Rs. 10,000) in favour of the Society on its ordinary
working of Rs. 6,234-13-1. Against this balance, there have
been several extraordinary items of expenditure amounting to
Rs. 5,182-8-10 ; the net balance is Rs. 1,052-4-3. There is a Tem-
porary Investment of Rs. 48,500, at the close of the year, out of
which Rs. 33,259-5-7 is in favour of the Society, Rs. 5,097-1-3
Oriental Publication Fund, Rs. 3,578-0-5 Sanskrit MS. Fund, and
Rs. 6,365-8-9 Arabic and Persian MS. Fund. In addition to this,
a sum of Rs. 1,088 has been added to the Reserve Fund from
entrance fees paid during the year.

There is an increase in receipts under every head except
** Miscellaneous,” which has fallen off very shghtly.

The ordinary expenditure was estimated at Rs. 17,254-4-0,
but the amount paid out was only Rs. 14,154-0-7. The principal
items in excess were “ Postage,” “ Freight,” “ Books,’’ ‘“ Proceed-
ings,” and the increase was caused by larger transactions and
the payment of outstanding printing charges and of Messrs. Luzac
and Co’s account from April 1902 to October 1904. The actual
expenditure on the Journals was Rs. 3,673, against a budget provi-
sion of Rs. 6,200. The balance is due on outstanding printing bills’

6

=

February, 1905.] Annual Report.

There were three extraordinary items of expenditure during
1904 under the heads “ Furniture,” ‘“‘ Pension” and “ Building ”
not provided for in the Budget. New furniture was required, the
lavatory arrangements were improved, and on the retirement of
the Cashier, a pension of Rs. 112, at the rate of Rs. 20 per month ;
has been paid to him, and in his place Babu Asutosh Dhur has been
appointed.

The expenditure on the Royal Society’s Catalogue (including
subscriptions sent to the Central Bureau) has been Rs. 5,842,
while the receipts under this head from subscriptions received
on behalf of the Central Bureau (including the grant from the
Government of India) Rs. 5,352. A sum of Rs. 610 is due to
the Central Bureau and will be sent.

Four extraordinary items of expenditure were budgetted for,
Out of the sum of Rs. 1,000 for the salary of the Assistant engaged
in revising the Library Catalogue, Rs. 81 only have been spent, as
his services have been dispensed with. Rs. 1,800 were assigned
for cleaning, varnishing and relining the Society’s pictures, and
Rs. 1,306 have been spent; but a sum of Rs. 500 which had been
advanced to the late Mr. A. E. Caddy, for cleaning the pictures,
has been written off as unrecoverable on his death, and Rs. 566
have been spent on the freight, etc., due on the frames which
were procured from England, while their cost has yet to be paid.
Rs. 2,320 were paid for renewing the floor of the entrance hall,
which is now greatly improved, and Rs, 366 were spent in
additions to the lavatory arrangements.

The Budget Estimate of Receipts and Disbursements for 1905
has been fixed as follows: :—Receipts Rs. 18,100, Expenditure Rs.
17,654. The item “ Rent of Rooms” has been increased, as one
room has been rented to the Automobile Association of Bengal at
Rs. 50 per month. On the expenditure side, the items “‘ Freight ”
and “ Journal Part III” have been increased, as greater activity
is expected. “ Insurance” has been reduced by. half owing to the
remoyal of the Photographic Society of India. The item, ‘‘ Regis-
tration Fees” has been omitted, as under the Act no fee will be
charged for filing copies of the Society's papers. There is a new
item of Rs. 192 under the head “ Pension.”

Three extraordinary items of expenditure have been budget-
ted for during the year 1905, namely, Rs. 1,000 for the new
Library Catalooue, Rs. 2,809 for reframing the pictures, and Rs.
1,220 for white-washing and colourwashing part the Society’s
premises. Besides these provisions, the application of the
special grant of Rs. 10,000 from the Government towards the
thorough repair and improvement of the Society’s premises is
under careful consideration.

>

Annual Report. [February, 1905.

- BUDGET ESTIMATE FOR 1905.
Receipts.

1904. 1904. 1905.
Estimate. Actuals. . Estimate.

Rs. Rs. Rs.
Subscriptions ae spe ROO) a RAL) 7,800
Sale of Publications pr 600 1,053 600
Interest on Investments ... 6,000 6,787 6,000
Rent Orwooms: lesan act 500 730 ~ 600
Government Allowances... 3,000 13,000 3,000
Miscellaneous le ave 100 80 100

Total e 17,700 30,3869 18,100 -

Expenditure.
Rs. Rs. Rs.
Salaries a 3,800 3,460 3,800
Commission ae as 425 376 425
Pension ne ba aa 8 192 |
Stationery ae 120 134 120
Lighting and Seng ae 320 218 320
Municipal Taxes ... B53 - 884 884. 884
Postage a3 ne 500 567 500
Freight 75 129 100
Meetings 100 105 ~=100
Contingencies... ce 500 459. 500
Books a oe 2,000 2,135 2,000
Binding aes “as 700 599 700
Journalist elses ose 2,100 1,437 2,100
me siete Bes 2 iy 2,100 1,381 - 2,100
i Cs ee sf 2,000 855 2,500
Proceedings be 600 dae 600
Printing Cir culars, ‘ke. ee 200 200 200
Registration Fee ... Siete 5 Roe a
- Auditor’s Fee ne Bs 100 100 100
Petty Repairs 100 29. 100
Insurance Raa idl 625 313 Bua

17,254 14,134 17,654

eee

February, 1905.] Annual Report.

Extraordinary Expenditure.

1904. 1904. 1905.
Estimate. Actuals. Hstimate.

Library Catalogue sor LOCO 81 1,000
Royal Society’s Catalogue ... ... 5,842 Sat
Cleaning and Varnishing

Pictures oe 1 * L800 1,306 ts
Picture Frames . sor GOOG 566 2,809
Repairs ae Bie 2, 220) 2,080 ase
Furniture ae “Ac S00 304
Pension aa re ae 112 Sot
Building er Serie Gat 78 1,220

8,120 11,025 5,029

Agencies.

The Council has transferred the London Agency of the
Society—trom Messrs. Luzac & Co. to Mr. Bernard Quaritch, 15
Piccadilly.

During the year no publications have been sent to Messrs.
Luzaec & Co., pending the settlement of the question of Agency,
but from them we have received books and papers of the value
of £28-13-5. They have submitted a statement of their accounts
to the end of October 1904, and the balance of £36-6-11 due to
them has been remitted in full settlement of their account.

Two consignments of publications have been sent to Mr.
Quaritch since his appointment as the Society's London Agent,
amounting to £60-17 and Rs. 533-2, being value of 480 copies -
of the various issues of the Journals and Proceedings and of 741
fasciculi of the Bibliotheca Indica, respectively.

Our Continental Agent is Mr. Otto Harrassowitz, to whom we
have sent publications valued at £19-17-6 and Rs. 560-8, of which
£19-14-4 and Rs. 229-11-9 worth have been sold for us.

Library.

The total number of volumes or parts of volumes added to the
Library during the year was 2,949, of which 675 were purchased and
2,274 presented or received in exchange for the Society’s publica-
tions.

The MS. of the new edition of the Society’s Library Catalogue,
after careful revision by the members of the Library Committee,
was sent to the Press at the beginning of Jannary 1905.

The Government of India, with the assent of the Council,
decided to publish a combined subject- index of the books in Euro-
pean languages in the Society’s Library and the Imperial Library.
This is expected to be in print early in 1906.

9

Annual Report. [ February, 1905.

In continuation of the Council order, the Imperial Library has
been allowed to borrow books and MSS. from the Society for
the use of its readers until the end of August 1905. During the
period from 28th January to 3lst December, 1904, 26 books and 5
Manuscripts have been thus borrowed.

In connection with the proposed rejection of certain books
from the Society’s Library, the General Meeting resolved (1)
that the books weeded out by the Committee be rejected and
disposed of, the Medical works being placed in a collection by
themselves; (2) that the best way of disposing of them is by
sale, and that they be accordingly offered for sale; (8) that
the first offer be made to the Imperial Library, and that, if
it purchases any of these books, the prices of the books be settled
between the Council and that Library according to the price-
catalogues of Quaritch and other booksellers; (4) that the next
offer be made to the Calcutta University, the Presidency and
other Colleges and the Medical College, and that the prices of books
bought by them be settled similarly ; (5) that the remainder of
the rejected books be disposed of by public auction under some
arrangement by which members and others can bid, and by which
real prices may be obtained if possible; and (6) that all books
rejected and disposed of be first stamped plainly and indelibly
with a special stamp.

International Catalogue of Scientific Literature.

During the year, the two remaining volumes of the first
annual issue and the volumes of the second annual issue, with the
exception of the volumes on Chemistry, Meteorology, Botany and
Zoology have been received and distributed.

Of the third annual issue the volumes on Physics and Astro-
nomy have been published but have not yet been received.

A great fallmg off among subscribers for the second and
subsequent issues has to be here recorded. The Agent to the
Governor-General in Rajputana (four sets), the Agent to the
Governor-General in Central India (two sets), the Bombay Univer-
sity Library (one set) and the Native General Library, Bombay
(one set), are the most important; special part subscribers have
in three instances discontinued their subscriptions.

The Director at the Central Bureau was informed of the
number of copies thus left in hand, and he advised that they
should be returned to London. The books have been packed up
and will be sent off soon.

All the subscriptions for the first annual issue, with two or
three exceptions, have been received. A sum of £340, representing.
subscriptions for 20 complete sets, and another sum of £17-15-0
for special parts, have been remitted to the Central Bureau during
the year.

The sanction of the Government of India was obtained

10

February, 1905. | Annual Report.

during the year to the expense of postage in the distribution
of the Catalogue being met from the grant.

Owing to the illness of the clerk during three months of the
year a number of index slips were left over; these after bemg
checked by the experts will be despatched shortly. The number
of slips sent to London was 71.

Mr. W. D. Wright was appointed Clerk attached to the Regi-
onal Bureau of the Royal eae in the place of Mr. J. B. Richard-
son, resigned.

Elliott Prize for Scientific Research.

A sum of Rs. 1,000 out of the accumulated interest on account
of the Elliott Prize Fund in the hands of the Accountant General
of Bengal has been invested in 35 per cent. Government securities ;
and the Council has decided to reserve the power to make use
of this investment, if required by the Trustees, in awarding the
prize.

Barclay Memorial Medal.

In connection with the Barclay Memorial Medal, the following
gentlemen were appointed to form a special Committee to make
the award during 1905—Captain L. Rogers, I.M.S8., the Natural
History Secretary; Mr. N. Annandale, Captain A. T. Gage,
IM.LS., Mr. A. H. Hayden, and Major F. J. Drury, I.M.S.

The Society’s Premises and Property.

The Council met several times to consider a letter from the
Secretary to the Trustees of the Victoria Memorial, suggesting
the loan of certain portraits and other objects of interest to the
Victoria Memorial Hall, and, on the matter being referred to the
general body of members, under rule 64A, it has been decided
to lend certain specified objects for exhibition in the Victoria
Memorial Hall, namely, the following portraits and ° other
objects :—

Two portraits of the Society’s founder Sir Wilham Jones
(one of him asa youth and the other in middle age)
(Nos. 67 and 41);

the portrait of Warren Hastings (No. 65) ;

the bust of James Prinsep (No. 19) ;

the old cannon of Mir Jumlu (No. 2) ;

a Ms. of the Gulistan (No. 114) ;

a Ms. of the Badshah-nama (No. 118) ;

three old copper-plate _inscriptions (No. 126, found at
Amgachi ; No. 135, found in the Sambalpur district ;
and No, 136, found at Angasi) ;

a stone edict of King Asoka (No. 25) ;

11

Annual Report. (February, 1905.

a portrait of Shah Ghazi-ud-din’ Haidar, King of Oudh
Bie (No. 26);
a portrait of. James Grant Duff, author of the ‘“ History
of the Mahrattas ” (No. 51) ;
a painting of the interview between the Governor-General
and the Raja of Kota, (No. 107) ; and i
a portrait of Nasarat Jang, Nawab of Dacca (No. 91).

This decision was communicated to the Trustees. They
asked that these objects might be placed at their disposal at once,
with the exception of the Asoka stone, for exhibition along with
the other Victoria Memorial Hxhibits in the galleries of the
Indian Museum, and the Council have handed over the objects
for exhibition in the Indian Museum Gallery during the cold
season of 1904-5 with the request that the objects be returned
when the exhibition closes, to be on view in the Society's rooms.

During the year certain portions of the Society's rooms were
whitewashed and colourwashed ; and the Council has now under
consideration a proposal to execute thorough repairs and certain
structural improvements in the Society’s building. The cost will
be great, but will be chiefly met out of a grant of Rs. 10,000
which the Government of India has generously made to the
Society for the purpose. The estimates are now under considera-
tion.

All the pictures of the Society have been cleaned and var-
nished at a cost of Rs. 1,806, and new frames have been received
from London. The pictures will be reframed as soon as possible.

Exchange of Publications.

During 1904, the Council accepted eight applications for
exchange of publications, viz: (1) from the Botanic Institute of
Buitenzorg, Java, the Society’s Journal Part II and Proceedings
being exchanged for their ‘“‘ Annals” and “ [cones Bogorienses ” ;
(2) from the Schlesische Gesellschaft fiir vaterlindische Cultur,
Breslau, the Society’s Journal Parts I—III and Proceedings
being exchanged for the publications of that Society ; (3) from
the University of Montana, the Society’s Journal Parts II
and III for the “ Bulletm”; (4) from the R. Accademia dei
Lincei, Rome, the Society’s Journal Part I-III and Proceedings
being exchanged for the publications of the Academy; (5)
from the Société d’Ethnographie, Paris, the Society’s Journal
Part III, for their “ Bulletin ” ; (6) from the Société Royale Belge
de Géographie, Brussels, the Society’s Journal Part III being
exchanged for their ‘“ Bulletin;” (7) from the Department of
Fisheries, Sydney, the Society’s Journal Part II, for their
“Report”; and (8) from the Archeological Survey Department
of India, the Society’s Journal Parts I and III being exchanged
for the publications of that Department.

In addition to these exchanges, the Imperial Library

12

February, 1905. | Annual Report.

and the Lucknow Provincial Museum have been placed on the
distribution list of the Society’s publications.

Secretaries and Treasurer.

Dr. EH. D. Ross carried on the duties of Philological Secretary
till April, when Dr. T. Bloch returned from tour and took charge
of the office in addition to the editorship to the Jowrnal Part
ZI, and the numismatic work which he had retained. Dr. Bloch
continued till November; he left then on tour, and Dr. Ross con-
sented to- undertake both the duties, while Mr. H. N. Wright was
in charge of the numismatic work.

Captain L. Rogers, I.M.S., continued Natural History
Secretary and editor of the Jowrnal Part IJ, throughout the
year. -

Dr. Ross continued Anthropological Secretary and editor
of the Journal Part LIL, till July, when he left India on leave for
three months, and Mr. J. Macfarlane took charge of his work
during the interval. In December, Mr.-N. Annandale was per-
manently appointed Anthropological Secretary in the place of Dr.
Ross, who resigned.

Dr. C. R. Wilson continued to be Treasurer till April, when
he left for Darjeeling. The Hon. Mr. Justice Asutosh Mukhopa-
dhyaya consented to officiate during his absence, and when Dr.
Wilson resigned his office, because of ill-health in May, he was
appointed permanently to this position. During October he left
Calcutta for a few weeks and Mr. W. K. Dods officiated for
~ him.

Mr. Macfarlane continued General Secretary and editor of
the Proceedings throughout the year, except during three months,
from May to July, when he went to Kurope on leave, and Lt.-Col.
J. H. Tull Walsh, I.M.S., took charge of the work.

Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Shastri, was in charge of
the Bibliotheca Indica and the Search for Sanskrit Manuscripts,
and carried on the duties of the Joint Philological Secretary
throughout the year.

Mr. J. H. Elliott continued Assistant Secretary and Librarian
throughout the year.

Publications.

There were published during the year ten numbers of the
Proceedings (Nox. 9—11 of 1903 and Nos. 1—7 of 1904) containing
115 pages.

Of the Journal, Part I, five numbers were published (No. 2 of
1903 and Nos. 1—4 of 1904) containing 472 pages and 9 plates.
The Numismatic Supplement has been published in Journal Part
J, nos. 1, 2 and 4, under the editorship of Mr. Wright.

Of the Journal Part II, six numbers were published (No. 4

13

Annual Report. - (February, 1905

of 1903 and Nos. 1—5 of 1904) containing 358 pages and 9 plates.
The Index for 1903 was also published.

Of the Journal Part III four numbers were published (Nos.
1—4 of 1904) containing 77 pages and 4 plates. The Index for
1905 was also published.

The other publications issued during the year were the 4th
fasciculus of the Catalogue of the Society’s Sanskrit Books and
Manuscripts, and the 2nd fasciculus of the Catalogue of the
Society's Arabic Books and Manuscripts.

Proceedings.

All important papers noticed in the Proceedings have appeared.
in full in the various parts of the Journal, only small papers and
abstracts of the important papers being published i in the Proceed-
ings. The Rey. P.O. Bodding contributed a paper on Shoulder-
headed and other forms of stone implements in the Santal Parganas.
Of the implements those with square edges are supposed to be very
rare in India. Mr. H. H. Walsh described certain stone implements
found in the Darjeeling District, which are locally believed to be
the weapons of gods and to possess various protective and
medicinal powers. Mr. C. Little contributed two papers,
one on the Himalayan Summer Storm of September 24th
1903, and the other on the Cyclone of 13th November 1903 in
the Bay of Bengal; both have been published in the Journal with
maps. Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Sastri exhibited two
Bengali documents obtained from Rai Jadunath Mozumdar Baha-
dur of Jessore, in which the executant purported to sell himself
and his family into slavery. One was executed during the later part
of the Emperor Aurangzeb’s reign and the other during the great
famine of 1176 B.S. Among other exhibitions one may be
mentioned by Pundit Yogesa Chandra S‘astree of two important
copper-plate grants from Rajputana and Guzerat and a beautiful
image of Manjunath, a Buddhist deity, brought from Lhassa.
Major P. R. T. Gurdon, 1.A., contributed Notes on the Khasis,
Syntengs, and allied tribes mhabiting Khasia Jaintia hill district
in Assam. These tribes are matriarchal; and among them the
youngest daughter inherits from the mother; failing daughters, the
property passes to the youngest niece; and failing a niece, to the
youngest female cousin. Babu J..M. Dass in his paper ‘“‘ Notes on
the titles used in Orissa” said that the Oria people are very fond
of titles, which they accept not only from the Raja of Puri but also

from great landlords and even from uber castemen, while new titles
are still being invented.

Journal Part I.

Five numbers were published during the year under review,
namely, No. 2 of Vol. UXXII and Nos. 1-4 of Vol. LXXIII. The

14.

February, 1905. | Annual Report.

papers published in these numbers are of historical and linguistic
value and ranged from the 6th century B.C. to the 19th century
and from the Hastern extremity of Assam to the Western pro-
vinces of the Indian Empire.

Taking the papers chronologically :—Babu Parmeshwar Doyal
identified the Pragbodhi cave, where Buddha sat in meditation for
some time before The came to Budh Gaya, with a stone chamber about
14 or 15 lifrom the Bodhi tree in the range of hills called by
General Cunningham, Pragbodhi mountain. The chamber, says
the writer, had never before been visited by an antiquarian.

The late lamented Dr. C. R. Wilson identified Sandanes of the
Periplus with Sundara Satakarni of the Puranas and placed his
short reign between 83 and 84 A.D.

Babu Gangamohan Laskar, a research scholar, has deciphered
three copper- plates from Khurda written in what is called the .
Kutila variety of the Nagari character and placed the donor of the
grant before the latter half of the 7th century. These plates give
some information about the S’ailodbhava dynasty of Kalinga, with
seven kings. This dynasty was already known from the Baguda
plates explained by Dr. Kielhorn.

Mr. W. N. Edwards and Mr. H. H. Mann described some
interesting fortifications situated just over the boundary line of
British territory in the independent Daphla country and gave the
local traditions connected with them. ‘These traditions reach back
to the 13th century of the Christian era.

Babu Monmohan Chakravarti’s paper on the Chronology of
the Hastern Gayga kings of Orissa has already been referred to in the
last Annual Report. It is a scholarly paper giving a collected history
of these kings from the 11th century to the 15th century based
upon inscriptions. The author says, “ Their history (7.e. of the
kings of the Ganga dynasty) now rests on surer grounds than the
unreliable traditions embodied in the Madala Panji.”

The works of the genealogists or ghatakas of Bengal have never
been explored by Oriental scholars, yet they embody valuable in-
formation about the great races inhabiting Hastern India from the
7th century downwar ds. For this reason we welcome Pundit
Yogesa Chandra S’astree’s paper on the Kap section of the Varendra
class of Brahmans, though short, as the beginning of an important
line of research.

Coming down to Mahommedan history, Mr. Beveridge has
eriticised General. Maclagan’s paper on the Jesuit Mission to the
Emperor Akbar published in our Journal for 1896, p. 38, and a
portion of Dr. Wise’s paper on the “ Bara Bhityas of Hastern
Bengal” published in our Journal for 1874. In the former the
writer expatiated on certain chapters of the Ain-i-Akbari dealing
with the position of Akbar as a founder of a religion; and in the
latter the author gave much valuable additional information about
Isa Khan, one of the twelve Bhiyas. Myr. W. Irvine’s monograph
on the Later Mughals is continued. Mr. J. F. Fanthome’s paper

45

Annual Report. [ February, 1905.

headed ‘“‘ A Forgotten City ” deals with Nagarchain, the halting-sta-
tion or villa of the Emperor Akbar, a few miles from Agra, which
rose to be a city in the early part of his reign but was lost sight of
before his death, and can with difficulty be identified at the present
moment.

“The Mints of the Mughal Emperors,” by Mr. Burn, gives a
list of the mint towns of the Mughal Emperors arranged
in alphabetical order and divided into chronological sections.
Mirza Mehdy Khan criticised the translation of the Quatrains of
Baba Tahir by Mr. Heron-Allen and gave an edition of these. Mr.
H. R. Nevill’s paper on Mahals in Sarkar Lakhnau and Maulavi
Abdul Wali’s paper on the Antiquity and Traditions of Shahzad-
pur, throw some light on obscure points of Mohammedan history.

Coming to modern History, Babu Gerindranath Dutt’s history
of the Hutwa Raj is an important contribution on the struggles
which the English Government had in the revenue settlement of
the Provinces of Lower Bengal for 30 years or more from the
date of the Diwani. When. writing in our Proceedings, for 1888
on the Dutch hatchments in Chinsura Church, Mr. Beames left some
initials undeciphered. The late Dr. C. R. Wilson studied Dutch
heraldry and identified these names. His paper is to be found in
vol. LX XIII, No. 3. oe

Of the linguistic papers the most important is that by Major
P. R. T. Gurdon on the Morans, a tribe inhabiting the hills in the
Assam valley. By a comparison of the words in their language
with those of Kacharis, Bodos and Dimasas, Major Gurdon says
that they are allied to the Kacharis. Babu Gerindranath Dutt’s
paper on the Bhojpuri dialects spoken in Saran is a revised edition
of the notes supplied by him to the Linguistic Survey. :

Of the Tibetan papers, those by Mr. EH. H. Walsh have already
been noticed in the last Report. The only interesting additional
paper received during the year under review is by Rey. A. H.
Francke entitled “A Language Map of West Tibet with notes”
prepared for the benefit of the students of his Ladaki Grammar.

There has unfortunately been some irregularity in the issue
of the Society’s Journal, Part I, and it has now been decided
to issue the Journals promptly, publishing such material as is
available, and at least quarterly.

Journal Part II.

The past year has been one of great activity in the Natural
History section of the Society, no less than six numbers of Part IT
of the Journal having been issued with 358 pages and nine illustra-
tive plates, this quantity being more than three times as much as
in the preceding year.’ This is due partly to the fact that some
papers read during 1903 were published during the past year, and
partly to the greater efforts that have been made to publish papers

16

February, 1905. | Annual Report.

more rapidly than has hitherto been done; hence only two papers
read recently remained in hand at the end of the year.

Botany has been specially well represented. The papers
published include two important memoirs on “ Materials for a Flora
of the Malayan Peninsula” by Sir George King and Mr. J. 3.
Gamble, in which the natural orders Caprifohacese and Rubiaceze
are dealt with; Nos XXI to XXIV of the Noviciz Indice and three
other papers describing new plants by Major D. Prain, I.MS.;
two joint papers by Major Prain and Mr. I. H. Burkill on Dioscorez
or Yams; and one by Mr. J. R. Drummond on a new Scirpus.

The Zoological contributions include three papers on the life-
history of certain insects of economic importance, by Mr. E. P.
Stebbing, a paper on Additions to the Oriental Snakes at the Indian
Museum by Mr. Nelson Annandale, and another by the same author
(not yet published) on the Lizards of the Andamans.

Among’ the other contributions of interest must be mentioned a
series of four papers, illustrated by plates, on ‘‘ Cyclones in the Bay
of Bengal” and on ‘ HimalayanSummer Storms” by Mr. C. Little,
and two by Mr. D. Hooper on the occurrence of Melanterite in
Baluchistan and on Rusot, an ancient Hastern Medicine.

Adopting a proposal made by Major Prain, I.M.S., the Council
resolved to hasten the publication of Sir George King’s “ Materials
fora Flora of the Malayan Peninsula” by having it printed in
London, and to issue it as an “Extra Number” of the Society’s
Journal, Part I.

Journal Part IIL.

Four numbers have been issued, three containing supplements
as well as long communications. The papers are of considerable ~
importance, for they are concise statements by men who have had
opportunities of studying the less accessible Indian races or the
archeology of interesting localities. Mr. J. H. Friend-Pereira
contributed an Hssay on the septs of the Khonds and the customs
which regulate intermarriage among them; the Rey. EH. M. Gordon
and Major P. R. T. Gurdon have dealt, chiefly from a cultural
standpoint, with primitive tribes in the Bilaspore district and in
Assam respectively ; the Rev. P. O. Bodding and Mr. H. H. Walsh
have described stone implements from different parts of India ; and
various authors have furnished shorter notes and papers on other
points in ethnography or sociology. The matter printed fills 77
pages and is illustrated with four photographic plates.

It has been decided that the subject of National Indian Hymns
and Popular Chants might well be taken up by the members of
the Society in connection with the Journal Part ITI.

Coins.

Ten copper coins and 13 silver coins haye been presented

17

Annual Report. [ February, 1905.

to the Society in 1904. The copper coins belong to the following
Pathan Sultans of Delhi :—

Jalaluddin Firoz Shah
‘Ata’uddin Muhammad Shah
Muhammad ibn Tughlaq Shah ...
Firoz Shah Tughlaq bt
with Fath Khan...

Of the 13 silver coins 4 are coins of the East India Company
struck in the name of Shah ‘ Alam at the Muhammadabad-Benares
Mint; one belongs to the kings of Oudh, and the remaining eight
are coins of the following Mughal Emperors :—

> et

Jahangir
Aurangzeb
Farrukhsiyar
Muhammad Shah
Ahmad Shah

. ‘Alamgir IT.
Shah ‘ Alam II.

In accordance with the Council order to lend to the Trustees
of the Indian Museum as many of the Society’s coims as may be
required by them for the purpose of classification and exhibi-
tion along with the Museum coins, all the coins have been made
over to the Indian Museum for selection and for return of the
remainder not required by them.

In July 1904, the Council resolved to separate the Society’s
numismatic work from that of the Philological Secretary, and Mr.
~ H. Nelson Wright, I.C.S., was appointed Honorary Numismatist of
the Society.

ee Oe

Bibliotheca Indica.

In the year 1903, thirty-five fasciculi were published—a
larger number than in any previous year. During 1904, however,
forty-two fasciculi have been published, showing an unprecedented
activity in the publication of the Bibliotheca Indica.

The cost of printing these forty-two fasciculi is Rs. 1,076
and the cost of editing Rs. 4,971; the average cost for each
fasciculus being Rs. 375. ;

These fascicul contain twenty-five works, of which two are in
the Arabic-Persian and the rest in the Sanskrit series. According
to resolution of the Council a description is to be given in the annual
report only of such works as are either commenced or ended. In
the case of the first, the description serves as an introduction and in
the case of the last as an advertisement. The Arabic-Persian series
contains translation of the Akbarnamah and Riyazu-s-Salatmm. In
the Sanskrit series too there are three English translations, namely,
Markandeya Purana, Tantra Vartika and Sloka Vartika, The last

18

February, 1905.] Annual Report.

two are editions of Sanskrit works of rare value which have no
chance of being published by private enterprise. Two of these
belong to Jaina literature, namely, the Tattvarthadhigama Sutra
.and Upamitibhava-prapaficakatha; the first was composed by
Umasvati Vacaka in the lst Century A.D. at Pataliputra, and the
second by Siddharsi, reputed to be the brother’s son of the poet
Magha, in the beginning of the 10th century. There are two
Buddhist works among these, namely, the Bodhicaryavatara by
Santi Devain the 7th century, and the Satasahasrika Prajiapramita
attributed to Nagarjuna, the founder or at least the first great
writer of the Mahajana School, in the 2nd century A.D. Several
other works are in the course of publication of which no mention
is made here, since no fasciculi have been published during the
ear.
‘ Of the Brahmanic Sanskrit works two belong to the Orissa
school of Smrti, two to the Bengal, one to the Bombay, and one
to the Benares school; one to the Ramanuja School of the Vedanta,
one to the Sankara School, and to the Mimamsa School.

_ Of the works that have been completed, the Riyaz-tis-Salatin
belongs to the Arabic-Persian series. It is an Hnglish translation
of a history of Bengal composed by Ghulam Husain Salim between
1786 and 1789. The translation has been made by Maulavi Abdus
Salam, M.A., of the Bengal Provincial Service, and he has elucidated
it with ample footnotes and enriched it with an elaborate table of
proper names. The Riyaz-tis-Salatin is the only comprehensive
history of Bengal, and Stewart’s History of Bengal is based upon
it. Dr. Blochmann long ago strongly recommended that it should
be translated, and the translation has now been accomplished.

Since H. H. Wilson translated the Visnu Purana, no sustained
effort was made to translate any other Purana till in 1884 Mr. Jus-
tice Pargiter (now our President) undertook the translation of the
Markandeya Purana. Onerous official duties and other difficulties
impeded the preparation of the work with the notes. The progress
was slow, but the translation has at length been brought to a close.
It is accompanied by a full index and a preface in which the trans-
lator expresses the opinion that the Purana had its origin in the
Narbada valley, and that parts of it may beasold as, if not older
than, the Christian era.

Godadhara Rajaguru, who flourished by the middle of the
18th Century, was the spiritual guide of the Gajapati Rajas of
Puri. Hecompiled a complete code of Hindu law and ritual for
Orissa. As no Hindu work from Orissa had ever been published,
the publication of this work was thought desirable, and it was placed
in the hands of Pandit Sada Siva Misra, a well-known pandit of
Orissa. The work consists of three volumes, of which the first has
been completed with an elaborate index.

Last year was notified the completion of the Vargakriyé Kau-
mudi, by Govindananda Kavikankanacarya; and the other work
by the same author, belonging to the same code of Hindu law and

19

Annual Report. . [February, 1905

ritual, has been completed this year, namely the Sraddhakriya
Kaumudi, by the same young editor Pandit Kamal Krsna Smrti-
bhasana of Bhatpara. He has added a full subject index of the work.

The new works undertaken during the year are :— #

The Baudhayana Srauta Sitra. Professor Hillebrandt of
Breslau, the great authority on Vedic subjects, undertook the edi-
tion of three Vedic works for the Bibliotheca Indica, namely,
Sankhayana, Baudhayana and Hiranya-Kesi’s Srauta Sitras. He
completed the Sankhayana Stitra and transferred (with the consent
of the Council) the editorship of Baudhayana’s work to Dr. W.
Caland of Utrecht. Dr. Caland has published two fasciculi of the
work during the year under review. Baudhayana’s School is still
current in Southern India, and he seems to have flourished several
centuries before Christ.

The Balambhatti or Laksmi is a commentary on the Mitaksara,
by Balambhatta Payagunda of Benares in the 18th century. It —
is an important work on the Hindu Law of the Benares school,
and the Hon’ble Mr. Justice Asutosh Mukhopadhyaya obtained the
permission of the Council to edit it. But his numerous engage-
ments afforded him little leisure, and the editorship was trans-
ferred to Babu Govinda Das of Benares, who has published the
first fasciculus during the year under review.

The Caturvarga Cintamani, by Hemadri, the Minister of the
Yadava Kings of Devagiri, about the middle of the 13th century,
is an encyclopedic work on Hindu Laws and rituals of great value.
As it quotes from a variety of works, the publication of the entire
work was considered forty years ago to be of great importance,
as giving the names of Sanskrit works existing before Hemadri’s
time. The workis divided in parts or kandas, three of which have
already been published during the last forty years. MSS. of the
other parts not being procurable, the publication was kept in abey-
ance. During the past two years, however, the MS. of a fourth
part, the Prayascitta-khanda, being available, the Council requested
Pandit Pramatha Nath Tarkabhisan, Sanskrit Professor in the
Sanskrit College, Calcutta, to undertake the editing of it. He has
issued three fasciculi of the work this year.

The Vallala-carita purports to be biography of Vellala Sena,
a great King of Bengal who reigned during the middle of the 12th
century. Jt was composed from old materials by Ananda Bhatta in
the beginning of the 16th century at Navadvipa. Several incom-
plete and partial reprints of the work were published in the Bengali
character in Calcutta, but no authentic MS. wasforthcoming. Dur-
ing the caste agitation that arose after the census of 1901, two
authentic MSS. of the work, were placed in the hands of Maha-
mahopadhyaya Haraprasad Sastri, and the Council requested him
to publish the work in Deva Nagari with an English translation and
historieal notes. The first fasciculus has been published containing
the text only. The translation and notes are in the course of pre-
paration.

20

| February, 1905. ] Annual Address.

Search for Sanskrit MSS.

This department of the Society’s work was, as in previous years,
in the hands of the Joint Philological Secretary. He paid several
visits to Benares and other places, and with the assistance of his
travelling pandits collected more than 1,200 MSS. and about 300
notices of MSS. So much material has been collected that it is now
possible to give a connected history of Hindu literature during the
whole of the Mohammadan period and to check in many important
instances the statements of Mohammadan historians about the
Hindus. A complete list of the names of the MSS. in the entire
Government collection, now amounting to nearly 7,000 MSS., has
been prepared in alphabetical order for publication. The second
volume of the second series of notices of Sanskrit MSS. has been
published. The third volume has been printed, and the Nepal
Catalogue is in type; and both will shortly be published. The
fourth and fifth volume are ready in manuscript and will soon be
sent to press.

The President was empowered to apply to the Government
of India for a special grant for the purchase of about 2,000 Jaina
works in Sanskrit, Prakrit, Guzerati, Hindi, Marwari and other
languages on behalf of the Government, if, on further examination
’ of the manuscripts, he is assured that the collection is valuable
ee to warrant such an application. The applcation has been
made.

The notices of Hindi manuscripts collected by the Society’s.
agents during the year 1895 have been made over to the Nagaripra-
charini Sabha of Benares for publication at the Society’s cost.

Search for Arabic and Persian Manuscripts.

Im answer to the representation made by the Society to the
Government of India, in favour of a systematic search for Arabic
and Persian MSS., the Government approved of the scheme and
sanctioned an annual grant of Rs. 5,000 for a period of five years
for its prosecution, and a further annual grant of Rs. 2,000 for the
same period, for the purchase of manuscripts of exceptional value
and interest. The search is in charge of Dr. Ross, and he has

appointed two Travelling Maulavis and a Resident Maulavi to assist
him in this work.

The Report haying been read and some copies having been

distributed, The Hon’ble Mr. Pargiter, President, gave his An-
nual Address. ‘

Annual Address, 1904.

The Secretaries have laid before you their combined report
setting out briefly the business that has been transacted by the

21

Annual Address, [February, 1905

Society or that has come before it during the past year, and it
remains for me to offer some remarks on its affairs during the same
eriod.

H The matter [that engrossed the largest share of time has been
the preparation of the new catalogue of the books in the Society’s
Library. The catalogue now in use was published twenty years
ago, when the Society celebrated its centenary, and the need of a
revised one has been felt for some years past. A new catalogue has
been gradually compiled in manuscript, and there remained the
arduous business of making a thorough revision of it. This has been
carried through by the Library Committee with the help of the
General Secretary, who, as a skilled librarian, was specially qualified
to deal with it. The members of the Committee have given
liberally of their time and have held many meetings to complete
the revision ; and but for the care, and I may say devotion, which
they and the Secretary have bestowed on it, it could not have been
carried through with any expectation that the catalogue would
be full, accurate and useful. In this matter two tasks called
for special consideration—first, the revision of the Library itself
and the separating out of books and pamphlets that are not needed
by the Society ; and secondly, the framing of the entries in the
most serviceable shape.

A considerable quantity of publications had accumulated
which appeared to be either superfluous or of too little use to the
members, and it was desirable to remove them because of the
limited space and for economy. These were separated as the
revision went on. The principles adopted were two, first, that
the Library should aim at completeness in all publications
relating to Asia in conformity with the Society’s name and
scope, whatever might be their character or value, official reports
and publications being placed in a separate category ; and secondly,
that the Library could not maintain works relating to other
parts of the world except such as are of general interest and high
reputation. Yet the process of exclusion was applied with so
conservative a spirit that nothing was put out unless the members of
the Committee were unanimous. <A list of the works thus excluded
was laid before the monthly meeting in June for general considera-
tion, and has been passed without objection. These will be
disposed of as mentioned in the Report.

The second task dealt with the method of cataloguing the
names of Oriental authors, and the Committee decided that no
single method was feasible, and that the most convenient course
was that, while the names of authors now living or recently
deceased should be spelt as the authors themselves Anglicized
them, the names of all others should be transliterated correctly in
the headings according to the system approved by the Society.

The catalogue is now in the press, and the Council trust that
it will be as complete, accurate and useful as is possible in such an
undertaking. When it is published, members will be able to keep

22

February, 1905.} Annual Address.

their copies correct up to date, since lists of the additions are pub-
lished quarterly with the Proceedings.

Another important matter was the part which the Society was
able to take in contributing to the objects to be exhibited in the
Victoria Memorial Hall. The Society’s existence is nearly coeval
with British rule in Bengal, and it has represented the lnguistic,
scientific and literary activity of this rule. It has numbered
among its members, besides its founder, some of the most distin-
guished men whose services have helped to make India what it is
now, and it possesses unique memorials of them. The members
resolved, with but little difference of opinion, to lend some of the
most interesting of their treasures to the Trustees of the Memorial
Hall to be exhibited there. The Society is gratified at this public
recognition of its achievements, and cannot but gain by the wider
interest which the exhibition of these objects will arouse among
those who will visit the Memorial.

The collection of Oriental MSS. is an important branch of the
Society's work. The Society has received during many years an
annual grant from the Government for the systematic search after
and the purchase of Sanskrit MSS. This is in the charge of
the Joint Philological Secretary, Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad
Sastri. He has found and acquired a large number of valuable
and interesting writings. No similar measures have hitherto been.
taken to collect Persian and Arabic MSS. from among the stores
that exist in this country, except such as private persons have
undertaken at times on their own behalf; but during the past year
the Government of India has generously assigned a further annual
grant in order that a systematic search may be made for those
classes of writings, and that valuable MSS. may be bought and
preserved here in the same way as Sanskrit MSS. This business
has been placed in the hands of the present Philological Secretary,
Dr. Ross, and he has been prosecuting an active search witb the aid
of maulavis during the last five months. He has discovered a
number of private libraries that were not known to us before ; the
works in them have been examined, and what has been already
found offers sanguine expectations that the grant will enrich
our collection with writings of the highest interest and value,
especially for historical purposes. I may add that the recent
expedition to Thibet has brought to light a quantity of Thibetan
MSS. ; these have been placed temporarily in the Imperial Library
here and are available for study.

The Society has about 600 Jain manuscripts in its custody at
present. These are not always easy to be obtained, because the
Jains do not part with their writings readily. Mahamahopadhyaya
Haraprasad Sastri has however recently learnt of a valuable col-
lection of such manuscripts, comprising nearly two thousand works-
or portions of works, and the owner, who is not a Jain, is willing to
sellthem. It is very desirable that they should be secured. An
application has been made to the Government of India for special

93

Annual Address. [February, 1905.

aid towards their purchase, and if they can be bought, the total
collection of Jain manuscripts which will be in the Society’s
custody will be the finest in the world.

These collections demand that the fullest use should be made of
them, and one of the first duties will be to compile descriptive
catalogues of the Persian, Arabic and Jain manuscripts, as has been
done for the Sanskrit manuscripts. In all this fresh work we must
look more to our Indian members to prosecute the research neces-
sary. Some use is made of these manuscripts by scholars in Hurope,
and by Huropean scholars resident in this country ; but the number
of the latter is very small and will probably be fewer in the future.
Members of the Government Services can only give of the leisure,
which they can spare from their official duties, towards qualifying
themselves in Oriental learning and studying Oriental works; and
they are less able year by year to find leisure for such studies. Their
official duties increase and become more exacting, and do not in any
way conduce towards acquiring any thorough acquaintance with
ancient learning. The two pursuits have been continually diverg-
ing more and more markedly. Moreover, to add to the hesitation
that besets Oriental study here, the standard of Oriental-attain-
ments required rises with the additional knowledge that is con-
tinually accumulated by scholars in Europe. These and other
reasons deter members of those Services from attempting original
research in these fields, and there are very few, if any, inducements.
The opportunities therefore are all the ampler for Indian students,
and a career of distinction is open to them, if they will carry on
their investigations according to the standard of Huropean scholar-
ship. This is, no doubt, not a simple qualification, yet it is essen-
tial; and those of them are fortunate who can receive some part of
their training from Huropean teachers. It is very much to be
wished that more training of this kind should be available for them.

The scientific side of the Society’s work, on the other hand,
should increase in the future. The Scientific Departments of the
Government have been strengthened. Among the members of
those services there is no such disagreement between official duties
and private pursuits; but the two blend and strengthen each
other, and scientific research and professional success go hand in
hand. For scientific investigation, therefore, there are the most
encouraging inducements. Moreover, as private enterprise develops
the resources of the country, Science will be applied to those objects
in larger measure, and the number of workers in scientific fields
should steadily increase. The Society must hope that it will re-
ceive the benefit of all such investigations in future, and that more
scientific papers will be contributed to its Journal rather than
communicated to the publications of the various Societies in
England. '

A matter that concerns us closely is the style in which our
Proceedings and Journal are published. This is now under con-
sideration. The present style is what was adopted many years ago,

24,

February, 1905.] Annual Address.

and the Council desire to improve and probably enlarge these
publications and add more illustrations, so as to suit the require-
ments of the present day better. Lfforts are also being made to
issue our publications promptly, and the Council hope that mem-
bers will contribute papers the more readily in that the Journal
will then supply them with a greater quantity of matter of varied
interest. These modifications should tend to increase the sale of
our publications in Hurope; and the Report mentions the change
which has been made in the Society’s agency in London to secure
a veadier, larger and more remunerative disposal. Our thanks are
due to Mr. Macfarlane who arranged the new terms during his
visit home on leave last year.

Steady progress has been made in the publication of the Bib-
liotheca Indica. My. Beveridge has finished his translation of the
Akbarnama ; fresh work will be placed in his hands, and it is hoped
arrangements may be made for additional works on the Persian and
Arabic side, which has of late years rather given way to the Sans-
kait side. This should be one of the first results. of the systematic
search that (as I have mentioned) is being made for Persian and
Arabic manuscripts. Among Sanskrit writings the Society should,
I think, pay more attention to various old works in future, which
represent rather the general or popular side of literature. Arch-
zological discoveries in ancient countries have shewn that the
accounts handed down from ancient times are not as fictitious
as was imagined formerly, but contain much substantial truth. This
should be found true in India also. With regard to the Puranas,
for instance, recent researches have indicated that they are more
ancient than was conjectured a generation ago. Professor Wilson
estimated their age as lying between the eighth and thirteenth cen-
turies approximately, but it now seems that all of them were com-
posed earlier, most of them before the seventh century, and some
at least in the earliest centuries of the Christian era. Similarly the
Tantras appear to be more ancient than was imagined, and a study
of them will throw much needed light on a very wide and obscure
though important subject, namely, on various phases of the popu-
lar forms of Hindu religion of modern times and of the present day.
The Society might well turn part of its attention to these and
other original compositions rather than towards editing commen-
taries, which are admittedly of comparatively modern origin.

Much attention has been given to the Society’s house, and
various repairs and improvements have been carried out. Through
the generosity of the Government of India the munificent sum of
Rs. 10,000 was granted for the further improvement of this build-
ing. Proposals ‘and estimates have been drawn up and are now
under consideration, and when the Council has decided ‘how the
fands at its disposal can be best utilized, the alterations will be
undertaken and should be finished this year.

The valuable pictures which the Society possesses, either as its
own or as Trustee of the Home Bequest, required renovation. They

25

Annual Address. ~ [ February, 1905.

have been cleaned, re-stretched and varnished. Fresh frames were
selected by the late President, the Hon. Mr. Bolton, in London, and
have recently arrived. The pictures are now being placed in their
new frames and will be re-hung, when the repairs to the building
are completed, and re-arranged so as to show to better advantage.
The expense has been great, but the renovation should suffice for
many years.

The Report shows that the list of the Society’s members has
increased so as to stand now at a higher number than it has ever
recorded in the past. This is of good augury for the future, and
we trust that among the new members many will contribute not
only their interest in the Society’s business, but also the results
of travels and inquiries. The inquiries that were open to members
in the Society’s early days were many and wide, and offered all the
attraction and interest that newly-discovered fields possess, where all
information is welcome ; but the conditions of research have greatly
altered now. In the settled Provinces of India, no doubt, the har-
vest of investigation has been freely reaped, and what more is to be
gathered becomes rather the work of specialists and experts. The
field of Indian investigation has been surveyed and described, and
the work that remains is for those who can bring minds, unbur-
dened with other demands and replete with knowledge, to the eluci-
dation of the problems and difficulties that have arisen out of the
general survey. Yet much valuable ethnological information still
awaits the gathering among the ruder tribes, especially in the outly-
ing Provinces. To members who have such opportunities the
ethnological side of the Society’s researches offers ample scope for
investigation, and if they will make careful and systematic notes
about those tribes and their languages, customs and religion, they
can supply facts of real interest and value, as regards both the early _
conditions of such tribes and also the changes that are being work-
ed among them by the influence of Hinduism.

-I will conclude by mentioning some matters of interest which
le outside the Society, but in which members have taken or are
taking a part.

A Buddhist Sanskrit Appendix was compiled to Rai Sarat
Chandra Das’ Thibetan Dictionary under the auspices of the
Government, and the Government has recently placed it in the cap-
able hands of M. de La Vallée Poussin in Belgium, in order that it
may receive a finishing revision from a European scholar.

The Archeological Department of Government has published
its first annual volume. It covers the whole ground of such
research and sets out most interesting discoveries with a wealth of
detailed information.

A book of great interest has lately been published by Mr. Vin-
cent Smith on the early history of India from B.C. 600 to the Mo-
hammedan conquest. It brings the latest discoveries to elucidate
that long and most important period, arid will be of signal service to
students in this country. Prof. Thibaut has published in the series

26

February, 1905. | Anunal Address.

of Sacred Books of the Hast a translation of Ramanuja’s great
work, the Sribhasya, which is a commentary on the Vedanta Sia-
tras and is the standard book of the Vaisnavas of South India. Dr.
Grierson has published two more parts of his monumental work in
the Linguistic Survey of India.

A Flora of the Panjab is now under compilation, and the duty
has been entrusted by the Government to Mr. Drummond of the
Civil Service.

The Imperial Academy of Sciences of Vienna wished to obtain
a record of Sanskrit recitation and music for the study of ancient
texts, and Dr. Exner, who is now in India, succeeded in obtaining
the best results that are possible in Caleutta with the aid of a pho-
' nograph, as selected passages were recited by the best qualified

pandits.

members should attend and offer it our congratulations, _-

The President announced that the Scrutineers reported the

result of the election of Officers and Members of Council to be as
follows :—
President.

His Honor Sir A. H. L. Fraser, M.A., LL.D., K.C.S.1,

Vice-Presidents.

The How. Mr. Justice Asutosh Mujhopadbyaya, Mid... 2D L.,
F.R.AS., F.R.S.E.

ig H. Holland, Hsq., F.G.S., F.R.S.

C. W. McMinn, Esgq,, I.C.S. (retired).

Secretary and Treasurer.

Honorary General Secretary :—J. Macfarlane, Hsq.

Treasurer :—The Hon. Mr. Justice Asutosh ee eee,

M.A., D.L., F.R.A.S., F.R.S.E.

Additional Secretaries,

Philological Secretary :—E. D. Ross, Hsq., Ph.D,

The Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society has just cele-.
brated its centenary, and the Council arranged that three of our

Natural History Secretary :—Capt. L. Rogers, M.D., B.Segc.

IMLS.
Anthropological Secretavy :—N. Annandale, Hsq., B.A.

Joint Philological Secretary ,—-Mahamahopadhyaya Harae

prasad Shastri, M.A.
27

General Meeting. [February, 1905.

Other Members of Council.

The Hon. Mr. Justice F. E. Pargiter, B.A., I.C.S.
Kumar Ramessur Maliah.
I. H. Burkill, Esq., M.A.
H. E. Kempthorne, Esq.
~ W. D. Dods, Esq.
The Hon. Mr. A. Earle, 1.C.8.
Lt.-Col. J. H. Tull Walsh, 1.M.S..-
_R. O. Lees, Esq.
H. H. Hayden, Esq., B.A., F.G.S.
E. Thornton, Esq., F.R.I.B.A.

The Meeting was then resolved into the Ordinary. General
Meeting.

His Excettency Lorp Curzon, G.M.S.1., G.M.1.E., Patron,
in the chair.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed.
Thirty-six presentations were announced.

Mr. J. De Grey Downing and Captain G. W. Megaw, I.M.S.,
were ballotted for and elected Ordinary Members.

_ It was announced that Mr. B. C. Sen and Rai Lakshisankar
Misra Bahadur had expressed a wish to withdraw from the Society.

The President announced that Mr. P. R. Bramley, Babu Gopal
Chandra Chatterjee and Mr. Mahammad Rafiq elected members of
the Society on 3rd February, Ist June and 6th July 1904, respectively,
not having paid their entrance fees, their election have become null
and void under Rule 9, and that the election of Rey. S. Endle has
been cancelled at his own request.

- The General Secretary exhibited two photographs of the
stone image of Buddha forwarded by the Commissioner of the
Chittagong Division, and read the following note on it prepared
by Pandit Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana :—

This image represents Buddha sitting on Padmdasana or
lotus-seat which is defined as a particular posture in religious
meditation in which the devotee sits with the thighs crossed, with
one hand resting on the left thigh, the other held up with the
thumb bent towards the heart, and the eyes directed towards the
tip of the nose.

The image, which is a specimen of neither the Indo-Greek,
Indo-Scythian or Dravidian sculpture, is the representation of an
Arakanese Buddha which differs a little from the Buddhas of
Burma proper. The image must have been prepared about the
year 1560 A.D., when Chittagong was completely conquered by the
Arakanese and was made a province of Arakan. Chittagong
remained a province of Arakan up to 1666 A.D., when it was

28

February, 1905. ] General Meeting.

snatched-away by the Mahomedans. The town was stormed and
the Arakauese settlers driven out of Chittagong. After the
annexation of Arakan by the King of Burma, a large number
of fresh Arakanese Buddhists immigrated into Chittagong at the
close of the 18th Century A.D. The Maghs that now live in
Chittagong are the descendants of these last immigrants. They
know nothing of this image and there is no local tradition about
it. It was in fact prepared before their arrival in Chittagong,
and before the storming of the city by the Mahomedans.
According to the Burmese legends, in the reign of King
Thirimegha in the middle of the 14th Century A.D., a canine
tooth of Buddha was brought to Tsitkain. If Tsitkain is identi-
fied with Chittagong (about which there is of course a grave
doubt), then in some future time we may expect also to find in
Chittagong the golden casket in which the precious tooth-relic ~
was placed.

Pandit Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana exhibited images of
five of the sixteen famous Buddhist Mahasthaviras recovered from
Tibet.

OO a a a a a aaa

Ly

pre a ee oe
PALS ‘ SP pe e
yh ;
, a By “a
* & “2 ~ehe A By
nes ~~

ie ‘
a
44
(m4

Pee”
areohe se

Ms f=s4 Ra - a =

| : ee on 5 ‘ *
Paes ie 7
{Fh $240 be OS

i es ie Se de inch ae
r Bheka eos: OUI:
;
: CS eee
Sur Sere
oe
;

SAN NR PRET eee Ne a
,
> i
P 2
'
a
y
oe al
i :

NOV 23 1905

LIBRARY
NEW YORK

MARCH, 10905. BOTANICAL

GARDEN

The Monthly General Meeting of the Society was held on
Wednesday, the lst March, 1905, at 9-15 p.m.

C. W. McMiny, Esq., I.C.S. (vetired,) Vice-President, in the
chair.

The following members were present :—

Mr. N. Annandale, Mr. R. Burn, Babu Monmohan Chakra-
yarti, Mr. B. L. Chauduri, Rai Sarat Chandra Das Bahadur,
Mr. J. N, Das Gupta, Mr. D. Hooper, Dr. W. C. Hossack, Dr.
H. H. Mann, Capt. J. H. D. Megaw, Captain L. Rogers, I.M.S.,
Pandit Yogesa Chandra Sastree, Babu Jogendra Nath Vidyabhusan,
Pandit Satis Chandra Vidyabhushana, Mr. H. Vredenburg.

Visitors :—Mr. D. MacDonald, Mr. 8. C. Sanial, Babu Bra-
jendra Kumar Seal.

The minutes of the last Meeting were read and confirmed.
Eleven presentations were announced.

Rey. A. Willifer Young, Mr. W. B. Brown, Miss Cornelia
Sorabjee, Babu Sasi Bhushan Bose, Mr. 8. C. Sanial, and Babu
Muralidhar Banerji, were ballotted for and elected Ordinary Mem-
bers.

It was announced that Dr. A. HE. Caddy had expressed a
wish to withdraw from the Society.

The Chairman announced that a second Elliott gold medal
had been awarded to Babu Surendra Nath Maitra, M.A., for his
essay entitled “‘On the Experimental Determination of the Elec-
tro-chemical equivalent of Nickel,” submitted in competition for the
Elliott Prize for Scientific Research for 1904, under Rule G of
notification in the Calcutta Gazette of the 28th December, 1892.

The General Secretary read the following report of the Sub-
Committee appointed by Council to consider the style, paper
and design of the Society’s publications held on Wednesday, the
22nd February, 1905, at 8 a.m.

Resolved—

1. The Committee is of opinion that by the establish-
ment of a quarto publication for the larger memoirs, the
residue of small papers can be conveniently published in a single
Journal styled the “ Journal and Proceedings ” of the Society issued
on the lines of the Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society.

2. That the paper most appropriate for use in all the Society's
publications is that employed for the Quarterly Journal of the
Geological Society, in which photo-blocks can be printed with

31

Proceedings. _ [Mareh, 1905.]

fair clearness on a paper which is not inconveniently thick or
smooth.

3. The Committee after seeing representatives of Messrs.
Thacker, Spink & Co., and the Baptist Mission Press, recommend
the following estimate submitted by the latter :—

Paper A. Rs. 3-8 per page for 8vo.
C. 6-4: o » Ato.

99 29

4, The Committee also recommend that the new paper and,
as far as possible, the types should be employed for works here-
after to be published in the Bibliotheca Indica.

The question of improving the vernacular types used in his
publication must be postponed, nothing better being available in
India, but the Committee has reason to believe that improvements
will shortly be effected.

- 5. The present Report is submitted to this Meeting . of
Council in order that if it.1s adopted the new arrangements may
apply to the publications of 1905. The preparation of a design for the
new printed cover is still under consideration, but can be easily
completed before any new publications are issued.

6. The Committee were further of opinion that select Barer:
tisements should appear in “ Journal and Proceedings,” as in the
J.R.A.S., and that the arrangements for this purpose should be
entrusted to Messrs. Thacker, Spink & Co., whose representative
informed the Committee that they were ready to undertake the
work and that the income to be derived from this source would
probably recoup the Society for a very large proportion of the
cost of the “ Journal and Proceedings.” It is suggested that these
advertisements besides being a source of income would be of con-
siderable practical use to members.

7. To facilitate the system of publishing papers, and to avoid
the delay often caused by reference to Council, in accordance with
the standing regulations, the Committee recommend that all
arrangements with regard to the publication of papers be made
by a “Standing Publication Committee, composed of the Hditors
of the Journal and Proceedings, and that this Committee be given
the powers now resting with Council, except when the publication
of a paper involves expenditure beyond the sanctioned grant. In
such a case, the sanction of Council would be necessary before the
printing of a paper. This change of regulation can be introduced,
on resolution of the Council, by a single change in the wording
of the standing regulations printed in pp. 25 and 26 of the Rules, &e.
of the Society.
>» 8. The Committee recommend the restoration of the old
practice of publishing in the Proceedings from their minutes, the
list of members at each Meeting of Council as well as extracts
when they appear to be of general interest. Such extracts might
Be aa read at the ‘General se ion the eee of

ounci! GAS

32

{ March, 1905.] Proceedings.

Order.—That the recommendation of the Committee relating
to the following matters be accepted :—

(1) Publication of a quartoseries (2) Publication of a new
series (8vo) containing the Journal and Proceedings combined.
(3) Paper and Type to be used. (4) Insertion of advertisements
relating to books and scientific mstruments. (5) Appointing
Messrs. Thacker, Spink & Co. to secure advertisements. (6) Pub-
lication of such resolutions of the Council, as the Council may
- determine, in the Proceedings. Circulate proposal about the ap-
pointment of a Publication Committee and their powers.

Read the following extract from a programme from the
Royal Academy of Sciences of Turin, announcing a prize :—

The Royal Academy of Sciences of Turin announce a prize,
open to sayants and inventors of all nations, to be given to that
person who during the four years 1903-06 shall, in the opinion of the
Academy, have made the most striking or useful discovery, or have
produced the most celebrated work in physical and experimental
science, natural history, pure and appled mathematics, chemistry,
physiology, and pathology, including geology, history, geography
and statistics. The value of the prize is 9,600 francs.

Anyone wishing to compete may apply, but the prize will be
awarded to the most worthy, though he may not have applied.

The following papers were read :—

1. Occurrence of the yenus Apus in Baluchistan —By KE.
VREDENBURG, Geological Survey of India.

2. Tibet under the Tartar Emperors of China.—By Rat Sarat
Cuanpra Das Banapur, C.1.E.

This paper has been published in Journal Part I for 1904.

3. Pavana-dutam or Atr-messenger, by Dhoyika, a Court poet of
Laksmanasena, King of Bengal, with an Appendix on the Sena
Kings.— By Monmowan CuakravaRTI, M.A., M.R.A.S.

4, Harwigs of the Indian Museum. By M. Burr. Communi-
cated by the Anthropological Secretary.

This paper has been published in “ Journal and Proceedings,”
WS Volil, No. 1.

5. The Hydra of the Calcutta Tanks.—By Neuson ANNAN-
pALe, B.A.

6. The composition of the oil from Bir Bahote or the “ Rains
Insect” (Trombidium grandissimum).—By HK. G. Huu, B.A.

7. Contributions to Oriental Herpetology II. Notes on the
Lizards in the Indian Museum with descriptions of New Forms and
Lists of species recorded from British India and Ceylon and of spe-
cimens collected in Sinkip Island (Hast Sumatra) by the late Pro-
fessor Wood-Mason’s Collector (Part I).—By Nutson ANNANDALE,
B.A.

8. Customs in the Trans-border Territories of the North-West
Frontier Province.—By H. A. Ross, J.C.8.

33

Proceedings. [Mareh, 1905.]

9. The Agraharis of Sasaram—By L.S.8. O’Matisy, LCS.
Communicated by the Anthropological Secretary.

These papers have been published in Journal, Part ITI, for
1904.

10. Contributions to the Kanawar folklore—By Panviv TrKa-
RAM JOSHI, Communicated by Mr. H. A. Rose.

11. A review of the first volume of the Archeological Reports
of the Government of Java. Illustrated by a collection of photo-
graphs belonging to the reader of the paper—By FaTHerR DAHLMANN,
S.J. Communicated by the Philological Secretary.

LDA NAO OO

IRDADYV
LIBRA i X

NEW YORK
BOTANICAL
APRIL, 1905- GARDEN.

The Monthly General Meeting of the Society was held on
Wednesday, the 5th April, 1905, at 9-15 p.m.
His Honour Sir A. H. L. Fraser, M.A., LU.D., K.C.S.1.,

President, in the chair.
The following members were present :—

Mr. N. Annandale, Mr. R. P. Ashton, Major W. J. Buchanan,
1.M.S., Major W. J. Bythell, 1.A.. Babu Monmohan Chakravarti,
Mr. B. L. Chaudhuri, Rai Sarat Chandra Das Bahadur, Mr. Hari
Nath De, Mr. L. L. Fermor, Rev. EH. Francotte, 8.J., Mr. N. L.
Hallward, Mr. H. H. Hayden, Mr. D. Hooper, Dr. W. C. Hossack,
Mr. J. Macfarlane, Mr. C. W. McMinn, Kumar Satindradeb Rai,
Captain lL. Rogers, I.M.S., Pandit Yogesa Chandra Sastree,
Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Shastri, Mr. H. E. Stapleton,
Pandit Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana.

Visitors: —Mr. A. J. F. Blair, Mr. S. H. Browne, Mr. A. G.
Fraser, Mr. EH. H. Pascoe, Kumar Kshitendradeb Rai Mahasai,
Kumar Manindradeb Rai Mahasai.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed.
Highty-three presentations were announced.

Mr. J. M. Dunnett was ballotted for and elected an Ordinary
Member of the Society.

It was announced that Lt.-Col. H. T. S. Ramsden, I.A., had
expressed a wish to withdraw from the Society.

The General Secretary read the names of the following gentle-
men who had been appointed to serve on the various Committees
for the present year :—

Finance and Visiting Committee—

Mr. N. Annandale.

Mr. W. K. Dods.

The Hon. Mr. A. Earle.

Mr. T. H. Holland.

Mr. H. E. Kempthorne.

The Hon. Mr. Justice Asutosh Mukhopadhyaya.
Captain L. Rogers.

Dr. E. D. Ross.

Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Shastri.

Library Committee—
Mr. Harinath De,
Mr. H. H. Hayden.

Lo)
35
Lp)

23 190

‘

NOV

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1905. |

Mr. T. H. D. LaTouche.

Mr. C. W. McMinn.

The Hon. Mr. Justice Asutosh Mukhopadhyaya.
Dr. E. D. Ross. ‘
Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Shastri.

Mr. E. Thornton.

Philological Committee—

Babu Muralidhar Banerjee.

Babu Monmohan Chakravarti.

Mr. Harinath De.

Mr. EH. A. Gait.

The Hon. Mr. Justice Asutosh Mukhopadhyaya.
The Hon. Mr. Justice F. E. Pargiter.

Dr. EH. D. Ross.

Pandit Satyavrata Samasrami.

Pandit Yogesa Chandra Sastree.
Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Shastri.
Mahamabopadhyaya Chandra Kanta Tarkalankara.
Dr. G. Thibaut.

Babu Nagendra Nath Vasu.

Mr. A. Venis.

Pandit Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana.

The proposed revision in Rules 5 and 7 of the Society’s Rules,
of which intimation had been given by circular to all resident
members in accordance with Rule 64A, were brought up for dis-
cussion.

Mr. D. Hooper exhibited some peculiar knives from Nepal
and Coorg.

The following papers were read :—

1. Aniruddha Thera.—A learned Pali author of Southern India
in the 12th Century A.D.— By Panpit Satis CHANDRA VIDYABHUSANA.

2. The Colouring Principle of the flowers of Nyctanthes Arbor-
tristis. —By H. G. Hiun, B.A.

3. On some Forms of the Kris hilt, with special reference to the
Kris tadjong of the Siamese Malay States. With exhibition of speci-
mens and drawings.—By N. ANNANDALE, B.A.

This paper will be published in the Memoirs.

4. The Monasteries of Tibet—By Rat Sarat Cuanpra Das
Bawapor, C.1.E.

5. On the occurrence of the Fresh-water Worm Cheetogaster in
India, with notes on the habits of a species from Calcutta.—By N.
ANNANDALE, B.A. 5

6. A letter from Mr. H. Beveridge toBabu Girindra Nath Dutt
on his paper on the History of the Hutwa Raj.

I am much obliged to you for the present of your History of
the Hutwa Raj. I have read it with interest. The only point on
36

April, 1905.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

which I am capable of commenting is that relating to the time of
Akbar and his father. At page 4 you speak of the last of the Lodi
kings falling into the hands of Baber, the exact fact being that he
was killed in battle, and the battle of “ Baksar” a little lower
down is a slip for the battle of Chausa (on the other side of the
Ganges). Your note at pages 48 and 49 on the Hutwa Raj in the
Ain Akbari should rather be the Hutwa Raj in the Ain and
the Akbarnama, for the chief references to Kalyanpore and _ its
Zemindar are in the Akbarnama. Blochmann’s notes to which
you refer are derived from the Akbarnama, not from the Ain.
Kalyanpore is twice mentioned in the Akbarnama vol. III. One
reference is at page 370 which is that mentioned by you, though
I do not think the original Persian quite warrants the statement
that the imperialists drove Masum K. Faroukhudi over Kalyan-
pore to Mahamedabad. The other reference is not mentioned by
Blochmann, but is the more important of the two, for there Abul
Fazl refers to Saran and the Zemindar of Kalyanpore.! It occurs
at page 397, Vol. III, of the Bib. Ind. ed. of the Akbarnama, line
three from top. After mentioning the borders of Saran on the
preceding page (396) it says that a rebel named Nur Mahammed
tried to take refuge with “the Zemindar of Kalyanpore” and did
not succeed. This reference is in the 28th year of Akbar’s reign
corresponding to 1582 or 1583 and so you will see that your date
of 1600 for Raja Kalyan Mall is too late by about 20 years. The
Koda? or Konah mentioned in Jarrett II, 156, just before Kalyan-
pore is perhaps the Kuadi of your page 5. By the by, Masum K.
Faroukhudi was afterwards secretly murdered by Akbar’s orders.
7. Festivals, Customs and Folklore of Gilgit.—By Munsut
GuoLamM Manomap. Communicated by the Anthropological Secretary.

This paper will be published in the Memoirs.

i “T am indebted to the Asiatic Society’s resident Moulvi for the follow-
ing information from the Akbarnamah :—

“Noor Muhammad, the out-law. When Khani Azam Mirza Kook took
post and reached the boundaries of Jaunpore, he received information that.
that out-law (Noor Muhammad) came from Bengal by the way of Tirhoot and
made friendship with Khaja Abdul Gafoor Nagshbandi and disturbed the peace
of the country and began to ravage the district of Saran, having settled at a
distance of 24 miles from Tirhoot. Meanwhile the royal troops arrived at the
bank of the Ganges and attempted to construct a bridge over it. Under-
standing this the enemy tried to take shelter under the zamindar of Kalyan-
pur butin vain, He was arrested at Chelaran (Champaran).”’

2 There is no doubt that “ Kodah (Gawa?)” of Jarrett is Kuadi. Most
of the names of the Pergs. in Saran mentioned by Abul Fazl have been mis-
read by Jarrett. As for their correct reading cf. my nutes on the Verna-
cular dialects of Saran in the Journal, of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, Part I,
No, 3, of 1897, pp. 194-195.

G. N. Dorr,

37

ony

ens LON my

Aske 7)

JUN 11 1906

BOTAN]
GARDEN
MAY, 1905.

The Monthly General Meeting of the Society was held on
Wednesday, the 3rd May, 1905, at 9-15 p.m.

PanpiT Satis CHANDRA VipyaBHusaNa, M.A., in the chair.

The following members were present :—

Dr. N. Annandale, Rai Sarat Chandra Das, Bahadur, Mr. L.
L. Fermor, Mr. J. Macfarlane, Mr. F. C. Turner, Mr. EH. Vreden-
burg.

Visitor :—Mr. G. de P. Colter.

The minutes of the last Meeting were read and confirmed.
Thirty-six presentations were announced.

Babu Kashi Prasad Saha, Babu Hemendra Prasad Ghosha,
Dr. A. J. Ollenbach, Mr. H. G. Graves, Babu Dwarkanath Chakra -~
butti and Mr. T. W. Richardson were balloted for and elected Ordi-
nary Members of the Society.

Tt was announced that Mr. A. Tocher had expressed a wish
to withdraw from the Society.

The Chairman announced that Mr. H. H. Stapleton, Captain
L. Rogers, I.M.S., Mr. H. H. Mann, Mr, D. Hooper and Mr. J.
N. Das Gupta had been appointed to serve on the Library Com-
mittee during the present year.

The following papers were read :—

1. The Emperor Babar.—By H. Bevzrings, 1.C.8. (retired.)

2. Contributions to Oriental Herpetology III—Notes on the
Oriental Lizards in the Indian Museum, with a List of the Species
recorded from British India and Ceylon. Part 2.—By Newson
ANNANDALE, B.A., D.Sc.

3. Tibet, a dependency of Mongolia (1643-1716 A.D.)—By
Rar Sarat CHanpra Das, Banapur, C.1.H.

4, SarvasJNa-mitra—A Vantrika Buddhist author of Kasmira
in the 8th Century A.D.—By Panvit Satis CHANDRA VIDYABHUSANA,
M.A.

5. The Similarity of the Tibetan Alphabet to the Kashgar
Brahmi Alphabet.—By Rey. A. H. FRANCKE.

6. <A complete All-word Index to the Inscriptions of Asoka.—By
Ganca Mouan Laskar, M.A. Communicated by the Philological
Secretary.

The last two papers will be published in the Memoirs.

39

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1905. |

7. Materials for a Flora of the Malayan Peninsula, N o. 16.—By
Sie George Kine, K.C.1E., LL.D., F.R.S., late Superintendent
of the Royal Botanic Garden, Calcutta, and J. Sycus Gauss, C.LH.,
M.A., F.R.S., late of the Indian Forest Department.

(Abstract. )

The present contribution to these materials contains the ac-
count of the genus Psychotria required to conclude the joint-account
by the authors of the natural order Rubcacee, commenced in part
14 and continued in part 15 of this series. This account of Psy-
cholxia comprises descriptions of 26 completely represented and 3
imperfectly known species ; of these the following 11 species,—Psy-
chotria Kunstleri King & Gamble, P. Scortechiniz King & Gamble,
P. pilulifera King & Gamble, P. Ridleyi King & Gamble, P.
multicapitata King & Gamble, P. Birchiana King & Gamble,
P. fulvoidea King & Gamble, P. Curtisii King & Gamble, P.
Wrayi King & Gamble, P. inequalis King & Gamble, and P.
condensa King & Gamble, are new to science.

Tn addition, this fasciculus contains accounts, for which the
authors are jointly responsible, of the three following natural orders:
Campanulaceze, 4 genera and 6 species, two of the species—Pentaph-
ragma Scortechinit King & Gamble and P. Ridleyi King & Gamble,—
being new ; Vacciniacex, 3 genera and 12 species, 5 of the species—
Pentapteryguum Scortechinit King & Gamble, and Vaccinium Scorte-
chinti King & Gamble, V. glabrescens King & Gamble, V. visczfolowm
King & Gamble and V. Kunstlerc King & Gamble,—being new ;
and Hricacex, 5 genera and 17 species, 1 genus—Pernettyopsis King
& Gamble,—and 7 species—Diplycosia erythrina King & Gamble,
Rhododendron Wray King & Gamble, R. pauciflorum King &
Gamble, R. perakense King & Gamble and RB. dubium King &
Gamble, with Pernettyopsis malayana King & Gamble, and P.
subglabra King & Gamble—hbeing new to science.

Two orders; Valerianacewx, 1 genus and 1 species; also
Composite, 23 genera and 31 species, have been described by Sir
G. King: four others; Stylidex, 1 genusand1 species; Goodeno-
viex, 1 genus and 1 species ; Hpacridex, 1 genus and | species ; and
Plumbaginee, 2 genera and 2 species, have been described by
Mr. Gamble. These six orders contain no novelties. :

In addition to the foregoing, an account of the order Monotro-
pex, 1 genus and species, has been provided by Lieut.-Col.
D. Prain, Superintendent of the Royal Botanic Garden, Calcutta ;
while Mr. C. B. Clarke, F.R.S., formerly President of the Linnean
Society, has prepared an account of the natural order Gentianacex,
6 genera and 6 species, 1 genus—Microphium C. B. Clarke,—
and 3 species,—Microphiwm pubescens Clarke, Cancora pentanthera
Clarke, and Villarsia awrantiaca Ridley—being new to science.

This paper will be issued as an extra number of the Society’s

Journal, Vol. LX XIII, Part IT., 1904.
40

JUNE, 1905.

The Monthly General Meeting of the Society was held on
Wednesday, the 7th June, 1905, at 9-15 p.m.

The Rev. HE. Francotte, 8.J., in the chair.
The following members were present :—

Dr. N. Annandale, Babu Dwarkanath Chakravarti, Mr. L. L.
Fermor, Mr. D. Hooper, Dr. W. C. Hossack, Mr. J. Macfarlane,
Mr. H. H. Mann, Major D. C. Phillott, I.A., Mr. R. R. Simpson,
Mr. H. E. Stapleton, Pandit Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana, and
Mr. E. Vredenburg.

Visitors :—The Rev. L. Delaunoit, S.J., Mr. J. M. Maclaren
and Mr. E. Vieux.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed.
Twenty-five presentations were announced.

Pandit Nava Kanta Kavibhushan was ballotted for and elect-
ed an Ordinary Member of the Society.

Tt was announced that the Hon. Mr. Justice J. G. Woodroffe,
Mr. C. R. Marriott, and Captain Stuart Godfrey, I.A., had ex-
pressed a wish to withdraw from the Society.

The General Secretary reported the death of Mr. H. W. Peal,
an Ordinary Member of the Society.

The proposed revision in Rules 5 and 7 of the Society’s
Rules, of which intimation had already been given by circular
to all members, was brought up for final disposal. The votes
of the members were laid on the table and the Chairman requested

any Resident Members who had not expressed their opinion, to

take the present opportunity of filling in voting papers. ive such
papers were filled in, and with the 106 returned by members,
were scrutinized, the Chairman appointing Messrs. H. H.
tapleton and L. L. Fermor to be Serutineers, The Serutineers
oyeported as follows :—

—

For ae ay een LOA
Against 63 a ate 7

AL

JUN 11

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Benyal.

[ June, 1905.]

RULE 5
PRESENT ROLE. Proposed RULE.
Candidates for Ordinary Candidates for Ordinary
Membership shall be proposed Membership shall be proposed
Mode of Election by one, and Mode of Election by GINS and
of Ordinary seconded by of Ordinary seconded by

HIGH SERS another, Ordi-

nary Member. The name of the
candidate, his proposer and
seconder, shall be laid before a
Meeting of the Council, and
shall be read at the two Ordi-
nary General Meetings of the
Society which next succeed such
Meeting of the Council, and
during the interval shall be sus-
pended in the Society’s Meeting-
room. The candidate shall be
ballotted for at the second of
such Ordinary General Meet-
ings.

ens. another, Ordi-

nary Member. The name of
the candidate, his proposer and
seconder, shall be laid before a
Meeting of the Council, and if
approved, shall be recommended
for election by ballot at the
next Ordinary General Meeting
of the Society. The names of
candidates recommended by the
Council for election shall be
communicated to the Resident
Members of the Society, with
the usual notice of the General
Meeting, and in case any five
Ordinary Members consider it
desirable, they will be at liberty
to demand that the candidates’
certificates be suspended in the
Society's Meeting-room until
the next following General Meet-
ing, when the candidate shall be
ballotted for. Any such de-
mand for a postponement of
election made under this rule
must be made in writing, signed
by at least five Ordinary Mem-
bers, and presented at the Ordi-
nary General Meeting before the
proposed election takes place.

RULE 7.

PRESENT RULE.

Should there be no meeting
during the Recess months of
September

Council empow-

ered to elect and October,

Ordinary Mem- the Council
bers during the

Recess. shall be er-

powered to

elect candidates for ordinary

42

Proposed RULE.

Should there be no meeting
during the Recess months of
September

Coun Dom andl) a October.
Ordinary Mem- the Council
per the) shall) abe) ene

powered to
elect candidates for Ordinary

{June, 1905 |

Membership, who shall have
been duly proposed and second-
ed at the General Meeting of
the Society in August, or whose
names may be received as can-
didates during the Recess. Such
candidates shall be ballotted for
at the Meeting of the Council
next succeeding that at which
their names and those of their
proposers and seconders shall
have been laid before the Coun-
cil, and during the interval
between the two meetings these
names shall be suspended in the
_ Society’s Meeting-room, as pro-
vided in Rule 5; and it shall be
necessary for the due election of
such candidates that not less
than two-thirds of the Members
of Council present at the meet-
ing shall vote in their favour.
Such elections shall be reported
and confirmed at the first Gene-
ral Meeting of the Society after
the Recess.

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

Membership whose names may
be received as candidates during
the Recess. Such candidates
shall be ballotted for at the
Meeting of the Council next
succeeding that at which their
names and those of their pro-
posers and seconders shall have
been laid before the Council ;
and during the interval between
the two meetings these names
shall be suspended in the
Society’s Meeting-room. It shall
be necessary for the due elec-
tion of such candidates that
not less than two-thirds of the
Members of Council present at
the meeting shall vote in their
favour. Such elections shall be
reported and confirmed at the
first General Meetimg of the
Society after the Recess.

The following papers were read :—
1. An Analysis of the Lankavatara Sitra.—By Pror. Satis

CHANDRA VipYABHUSANA, M.A.

2. Note on a Rock Shrine in Lower Siam.—By N. ANNAN-

DALE, B.A., D.Sc.

The paper will be published in the Memoirs.

3. Religion and Customs of the Uraons or Oraons.—By Rey.
Farner Denon, 8.J. Communicated by Mr. H. A. Garr, I.C8.
The paper will be published in the Memoirs.

4, Tibet under her Last Kings (1434-1642 A.D.).— By RA Sarat

Cuanpra Das, Banapor, C.L.E.

5. Note on a Decomposition Product of a Peculiar Variety of
Bundelkhand Gneiss—By C. A, StBerrad, B.A., B.Sc., 1.C.S.

"poe teony Hien
rental:

at

raat

INDEX SLIP.

ZOOLOGY.

ANNANDALE, Netson.—Additions to the Collection of Oriental
Snakes in the Indian Museum. Part 2. Specimens from the
Andamans and Nicobars, Jour. and Proc. As. Soc. Bengal,
Vol. I, No. 7, 1905, pp. 173-176.

* Distira andamanica, sp. n. Annandale, N , pp. 174-175.

List of Snakes of the Andamansand Nicobars. Annandale,
N., pp. 175-176.

Simotes woodmasoni, Sclater, belongs to the genus Oligodon.
Annandale, N., p. 173

Tropidonotus nicobarensis, Sclater, note on the type specimen.
Annandale, N., p. 174,

Typhlops braminus ( Daud.) recorded from the Andamans.
Annandale, N., p. 173.

i sabnacek eae
Tere Dek ain

©

sy i
iy
yee
yay |

LIBRARY
NEW YORK
BOTANICAL

JULY, 1905. . GARDEN.

The Monthly General Meeting of the Society was held on
Wednesday, the 5th July, 1905, at 9-15 p.m.

His Honour Sir A. H. L. Fraser, M.A., LU.D., K.C.S.L,
President, in the Chair.

The following members were present :—

Dr. N. Annandale, Rai Sarat Chandra Das, Bahadur, C.1.E.,
Mr. lL. L. Fermor, Mr. D. Hooper, Mr K. N. Knox, Mr. J.
Macfarlane, Dr. M. M. Masoom, Major F. P. Maynard, I.M.S.,
The Hon. Mr. A. Pedler, Major D. C. Phillott, 1.A., Captain L.
Rogers, I.M.S., Mr. S. C. Sanial, Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad
Shastri, Mr. R. R. Simpson, Mr. G. H. Tipper, Pandit Satis Chandra
Vidyabhusana, Mr. H. Vredenburg, The Rev. A. W. Young.

Visitors :—Mr. Hallowes, Capt W. B. Rennie, I.A.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed.
Forty presentations were announced.

It was announced that Mr. L. Morshead had expressed a wish
to withdraw from the Society.

The General Secretary reported the death of Raja Jayakrishna
Das, Bahadur, an Ordinary Member, and Dr. W. T. Blanford,
F.R.S., an Honorary Member of the Society.

Read abstracts from programmes from the following Con-
gresses and Exhibition :—

1. From Congres International d’Hxpansion Hconomique

Mondiale, 1905.

An International Congress of World-wide Hconomic Hxpan-
sion (Congrés International d’Hxpansion Economique Mondiale) is
to be held under the auspices of the Government of Belgium at
Mons in September next (1) subscribe, (2) draw up a report, (3)
send a delegate. The organisers suggest that the Society would
be particularly interested in the section which relates to the follow-
ing question :—

Which are the best ways of booking observations in uncivilised
regions in order to obtain scientific notions on the native, social
life, and manners and customs, and raise them to a higher civiliza-
tion ?

2. From Congrés International pour l’étude de la radiologie
et de Vionisation, Liege, 1905.

An International Congress for the Study of Radiology and
Ionisation is to be held under the auspices of the Government of

AB

JUN 11 1906

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1905.]

Belgium at Liége in September next, in which the Society is
invited to participate.

“<5 3. From Indian Industrial and Agricultural Exhibition,
Benares, 1905.

A prospectus has been received of the Indian Industrial and
Agricultural Exhibition to be held at Benares in connection with
ane next Indian National Congress.

The President presented the Hlhott gold medals and Rs. 75 in
cash to each of the following gentlemen for their essays submitted
in competition for the Elliott Prize for Scientific Research during
1904 :—

1. Babu Sarasi Lal Sarkar—for his essay entitled ‘‘ On the
crystalline properties of a potassium copper ferro cyanide com-
pound,” Parts I & II.

2. Babu Surendra Nath Maitra—for his essay entitled “‘ On
the Experimental Determination of the Electro-chemical equi-
valent of nickel.” (With Diagrams.)

The President announced :—

1. That the Council had appointed Pandit Satis Chandra
Vidyabliisgana as a member of the Council.

2. That Dr. Annandale had been appointed to serve on the
Library Committee and Major D. C. Phillott, 1.A., had been re-
elected a member of the Philological Commitee during the year.

The General Secretary reported the presentation of nine gold
and three silver coins from the Bombay Branch of the Royal
Asiatic Society forwarded with their letter dated 15th June, 1905.

Mr. J. N. Das, proposed by Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad
Shastri, seconded by Pandit Yogesa Chandra Sastree ; Mr. Hdgar de
Montford Humphries, I.C.8., proposed by Mr. R. Burn, seconded
by Mr. J. Macfarlane ; Babu Amulyacharan Ghose Vidyabhushan,
proposed by Pandit Satis Chandra Vidyabhtsana, seconded by
Mr. J. Macfarlane; Mr. Hem Chandra Goswami, proposed by
Pandit Yogesa Chandra Sastree, seconded by Mr oh Macfarlane ;
Mr. J. A. Cunningham, B.A., proposed by Mr. F. Turner, seconded
by Mr. G. W. Kiichler ; Mr, Jain Vaidya, proposed by Pandit Satis
Chandra Vidyabhisana, seconded by Mr. J. Macfarlane; Pandit
Rajendra Nath Vidyabhusan, proposed by Mahamahopadhyaya
Haraprasad Shastri, seconded by Babu Muralidhar Banerjee ; Babu
Vanamali Chakravarti, proposed by Mahamahopadhyaya Hara-
prasad Shastri, seconded by Babu Muralidhar Banerjee; and
Pandit Pramatha Nath Tarkabhu shan, proposed by Babu Murali-
dhar Banerjee, seconded by Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad
Shastri, were ballotted for and elected Ordinary Members.

The Philological Secretary exhibited a Tibetan Scroll for-
warded by the Hon’ble Sir A. T. Arundel, and Pandit Satis
Chandra Vidyabhtsana read a note on it.

The note will be published in the Memoirs,

46

[ July, 1905.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

The following papers were read :—

1. The Catholic Mission in Nepal and the Nepalese Authoritres
(18th century) —By Fararr Fatrx. Communicated by the Philo-
logical Secretary.

The paper will not be published by the Society.

2. Four new Barnacles from the neighbourhood of Java, with
Records of Indian Pedunculate Forms.— By N. Annanvats, B.A.,
D.Sc., Deputy Superintendent, Indian Musewm.

The paper will be published in the Memoirs.

3. Additions to the collection of Oriental Snakes in the Indian
Museum, Part 1J.—Specimens from the Andamans and Nicobars.—By
N. Aynanpate, B.A., D.So., Deputy Superintendent, Indian Museum.

4. The Tibetan Version of the Pramanasamuccaya—the First
Indian work on Logic proper—brought from Tibet by the late Tibet
Mission.—By Saris Cuanpra VipyAsutsana, M.A.

The paper will be published in the Journal and Proceedings
for August, 1905.

5. Materials for a Flora of the Malayan Peninsula, No. 17.—By
Sir Georce Kine, K.C.LE., bL.D., F.RS., late Superintendent of the
Royal Botanic Garden, Calcutta, and J. S. Games, C.I.H., F.R.S.,
late of the Indian Forest Department.

(Abstract. )

This contribution commences with Natural Order Myrsineex
and is continued by Sapotacee, Hbenacese, Styracezee and Oleacee.
The draft of Hbenacexe was prepared by Sir George King, that of
the other Ordersby Mr. J. S. Gamble; but the new species are
given under their joint names.

In the Natural Order Myrsineze 7 genera are described with
80 species, of which the large genus Ardisia furnishes 47. The
new species are 36 in number, viz., Mesa impressinervis and pahangi-
ana ; Myrsine perakensisand Wrayi; Embelia Scortechinii, angulosa,
Riidleyi, and macrocarpa ; Labisia paucifolia and longistyla; Ardisva
chrysophyllifolia, solanoides, fulva, lankawiensis, labisicefolia,
montana, sinuata, platyclada, Kumnstlert, Scortechinii, oblongifolia,
tetrasepala, biflora, tahanica, Wrayi, minor, perakensis, Meziana,
Ridleyt, rosea, longipedunculata, Maingayt, theeefolia, and bambu-
setorum; and Antistrophe cuudata and Curtisti. A Tenasserim novelty
has also been described Hinbelia Gallatlyi. The working out of
the Malay plants of this difficult Order has been rendered easier
owing to the recent Monograph of the Order by Herr Carl Mez,
in Engler’s Pflanzenreich.

In the interesting and important Natural Order Sapotacee
there are 8 genera with 49 species, of which 25 are new, viz.,
Sidervoxrylon Derryanum; Isonandra perakensis and rufa; Payena
longepedicellata (Brace), Havilandi, sessilis, obtusifolia and selangor-
ica; Bassia aristulata, Kingiana (Brace), Kunstleri (Brace),
penicellata, Curtisit, lawrifolia, rupicola, perakensis, Braceana, longi-
styla, cuprea, penangiana, and erythrophylla; Palaquium Ridley,

AG

(July, 1905.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

microphyllum, Herveyi and stellatum. - An Andaman Islands species
has also been included, Mimusops andamanensis. Some of the
species, it will be noticed, bear the name given in the Calcutta
Herbarium by Mr. L. R. Brace, formerly Curator ; but he merely
gave names without descriptions.

In the almost equally important Natural Order Hbenacez
there are two genera with 42 species, of which 24 are new, viz.,
Maba Hierniana, venosa, olivacea, Clarkeana and perakensis ; Dios-
pyros Wrayt, sub-rhomboidea, dumosa, Scortechini, Styraciformis,
tristis, pauciflora, ellipsoidea, Wallichii, toposioides, brachiata,
Kunstleri, nutans, reflexa, penangiana, rufa, areolata, Curtis, and
glomerulata.

The Natural Order Styracex gives two genera and 28 species,
of which 25 belong to Symplocos. The new species are 8 in
number, viz., Symplocos fulvosa, pulverulenta. monticola, Ridleyi,
perakensis, Brandiana, penangiana, MScortechinii. As was the
case with Myrsinese, so im Styracee also, the work has been facili-
tated by the recently published Monograph by Herr Brand in
Engler’s Pflanzenreich.

in the Natural Order Oleaceex there are 5 genera with 22 species,
of which 9 are new. These are: Jasminum Wrayi, Curtisit,
longipetalum and Scortechinii; Osmantum Scortechinii ; Banocicrn
paludosa and caudata; and Olea platycarpa and ardisioides,

In this part, therefore, are described 5 Natural Orders with 24
genera and 221 species. The number of species new to science are
115, and two new species have been also described from regions
adjacent to that to which the work refers.

The paper will be published in full as an Extra Number
of the Journal and Proceedings.

48

JUN 111906

NEW YOR!

BOTANIC¢

AUGUST, 1905. GARDE!

The Monthly General Meeting of the Society was held on
Wednesday, the 2nd August, 1905, at 9-15 p.m.

The Rey, E. Francorrs, 8.J., in the chair,

The following members were present :—

Mr. J. Bathgate, Mr. L. L. Fermor, Babu Amulyacharan
Ghosh Vidyabhushan, Mr. H. G. Graves, Mr. T. H. Holland,
Mr, D. Hooper, Pandit Navakanta Kavibhushana, Mr. J. Macfar-
lane, Mr. H. H. Mann, Dr. M. M. Masoom, Major F, P. Maynard,
I.M.S., Mr. G. H. Pilgrim, Captain L. Rogers, I.M.S., Dr. E. D.
Ross, Pandit Yogesa Chandra Sastree, Mahamahopadhyaya Hara-
prasad Shastri, Mr. R. R. Simpson, Mr. H. H. Stapleton, Pandit
Pramatha Nath Tarkabhushan, Mr. G. H. Tipper, Pandit Vana-
mali Vedanta Tirtha, Pandit Jogendra Nath Vidyabhushan,
Pandit Rajendra Nath Vidyabhushan, Pandit Satis Chandra

Vidyabhushan, the Rev, A. W. Young.

Visitors :—Babu Sarat Kumar Das, Mr. W. R. LeQuesne.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed.
Fifty presentations were announced.

Tt was announced that Major EH. H. Brown, I.M.S., had ex
pressed a wish to withdraw from the Society.

The Chairman announced that Mr. H. EH. Stapleton had been
appointed to officiate as Anthropological Secretary of the Society
during the absence of Dr. N. Annandale.

The Chairman also annouuced that the following gentlemen
being largely in arrears of subscription had been declared de-
faulters and that their names would be posted up in accordance
with Rule 38.

Mr. R. G. Black.

Babu Ramani Mohan Mallick.

Babu Jaladhi Ch. Mukerjee.

With reference to the resolution of the Council regarding the
rejection of certain books from the Society’s library published in
the Society’s Proceedings for June, 1904, the Chairman announced
that the Council had resolved that the Library Committee should
settle the prices of books with authority to offer Government pub-
lications to Government.

The Chairman presented to Rai Sarat Chandra Dass, Bahadur,
C.1.E., a diploma from the Imperial Russian Archeological
Society electing him a Foreign Corresponding Member.

Sri Kripamaya Dev Anang Bhim Kesori Gajapati Maharaja,
proposed by Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Shastri, seconded by

49

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [ August, 1905.]

Mr. J. Macfarlane; Lieut.-Col. C. P. Lukis, M.B., F.R.C.S., I.M.S.
proposed by Captain L. Rogers, I.M.S., seconded by Captain
J. W. Megaw, I.M.S.; Captain D. McCay, M.B., I.M.S., proposed
by Captain L. Rogers, I.M.S., seconded by Captain J. W. Megaw,
IM S.;Lient. C. A. Gourlay, M.B., I-M.S., proposed by Captain
L. Rogers, I.M.S., seconded by Captain, J. W. Megaw, I.M.S.;
Captain J. J. Urwin, M.B., 1 M.S., proposed by Captain L. Rogers,
I.M.S., seconded by Captain J. W. Megaw, I.M.S.; Captain
W. W. Clemesha, M.B., I-M.S., proposed by Captain L. Rogers,
I.M.S., seconded by Captain J. W. Megaw, I.M.S. ; were ballotted
for and elected Ordinary Members.

Owing to non-receipt of the MS. of the paper entitled “The
Tibetan version of the Pramanasamuccaya,” by Prof. Satis
Chandra Vidyabhisana, read at the July General Meeting, the
paper is not published in the Journal and Proceedings for August
1905.

The following papers were read :—

1, <A Vibetan Chart containing the charm of Vajrabhairava.—
By Pror. Satis CuanpRa VipyaBHusHan, M.A.

The paper will be published in the Memoirs.

2. History of Nyayasastra from Japanese sowrces—By MAna-
MAHOPADHYAYA HARAPRASAD SHastri, M.A.

3. Notes concerning the people of Mungeli Tehsil, Bilaspore
District By Rey. HE. M. Gorpon. Communicated by the Anthro-
pological Secretary.

4, Amulets as Agents in the Prevention of Disease in Bengal.—
Communicated by Mr. A. N. Moserty, 1.C.8., Superintendent of
Ethnography, Bengal.

The paper will be published in the Memoirs.

5. A Short History of the house of Phagmodu, which ruled over
Tibet on the decline of Sakya for upwards of a century tll 1482,
A.D.—By Rat Sarat Cuanpra Das, Bananvoer, C.L.E.

6. Additions to the Collection of Oriental Snakes in the Indian
Museum. Part 3—By N. Annanpate, B.A., D.Sc.

The Kantabudiyas of Cuttack.—By Jamint Monan Das.
Communicated by the Anthropological Secretary.

8. The Age of Jimuta Vahana.—By Panpit PramatHa Natu
TARKABHUSHAN.

The paper will be published in the Bibliotheca Indica.

9. Sal-Ammoniac: a Study in Primitive Chemistry.—By H. H.
Stapieton, B.A., B.Sc. yah an

The paper will be published in the Memoirs. sigue

10. <Alchemical Equipment in the Eleventh Century, A.D.—
By H. HE. Srvapreton and R. F, Azo. 5

The paper will be published in the Memoirs.

11. Note on the Bhotias of Almora and British Garhwal.—
By g A. Suerrine, M.A., 1.C.S. Communicated by Mr. R. Bury,

The paper will be published in the Memoirs.

50

NOVEMBER, 1905.

The Monthly General Meeting of the Society was held on
Wednesday, the Ist November 1905, at 9-15 p.m.

The Hon. Mr. Justice AsurosH Muxwapapuyaya, M.A., D.L.,
F.R.S E., Vice-President, in the chair.

The following members were present :—

Dr. N Annandale, Mr. I. H. Burkill, Babu Manmohan
Chakravarti, Mr. B. L. Chaudhuri, Mr. L. L. Fermor, The Rev.
E. Francotte, S.J., Mr. H. G. Graves, Mr. D. Hooper, Mr. T. H. D.
La Touche, Mr. J. Macfarlane, Major D. C. Phillott, [.A., Mr.
G. EH. Pilgrim, Major L. Rogers, I.M.S., Mahamahapadhyaya
Haraprasad Shastri, Mr. R. R. Simpson, Pandit Pramatha Nath
Tarkabhushan, Pandit Vanamali Vedantatirtha, Pandit Rajendra
Nath Vidyabhisana Pandit Satis Chandra Vidyabhisana.

Visitor :—Mr. G. de P. Cotter,

The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed.

One hundred and sixty-eight presentations were announced.

The Chairman announced :—

1. That the Council had appointed Mr. H. H. Stapleton as a
member of the Council in the place of Mr. R. O. Lees, resigned.

2. That Dr. N. Annandale having returned to Calcutta had
taken over charge of the duties of Anthropological Secretary from
Mr. Stapleton.

3. That Mr. L. L. Fermor had been elected to serve on the
Library Committee during the year.

The Chairman also announced that in accordance with Rule 38
of the Society’s Rules, the names of Mr. R. G. Black, Babu
Ramani Mohan Mallick and Babu Jaladhi Chandra Mukerjee had
been posted up as defaulting members since the last Meeting
and were removed from the Members List.

The Chairman also announced the following resolution of the
Council regarding the submission of communications for publi-
cation in the Society’s “ Jowrnal and Proceedings” and “‘ Memoirs.”

“The attention of authors is drawn to Rule I of Regulations
regarding the submission of communications for publication. No
alteration or addition necessitating any considerable change of
type may be made in proofs, Should any such alteration or
addition be necessary, it must be added in a foot-note duly dated
and initialed.

Mr. L.. S. O'Malley, I.C.S., proposed by the Hon. Mr.
EK. A. Gait, seconded by Mr. J. Macfarlane; Mr. A. M. T.

¢sackson, I.C.S., proposed by the Hon. Mr. H. H. Risley, seconded
, Mr. J. Macfarlane; were ballotted for and elected Ordinary
Tembers.

5]

a
re
=—
—_
ABR

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [| November, 1905. |

Dr. N. Annandale exhibited living specimens of the “ Rains
Insect” (LTrombidium grandissimum).

The Anthropological Secretary exhibited weighing-beams of
the “bismer ” type from different parts of India.

The following papers were read :—
1. Vidyapat? Thakur.—By G. A. Grizrson, C.1.H., LCS.

2. Some remarks on the Geology of the Gangetic Plain.—By
E. Motony, I.C.S8.

3. The Nafdisu-l-Maasir.—By H. Beverives, 1.C.8. (retired).

4, Notes on the Species, Haternal Characters and Habits of the
Dugong.—By N. ANNANDALE, B.A., D.Sc.

5. Hedyotis sisaparensis, a hitherto undescribed Indian
species.— By Caprain A. T. Gace, I.M.S.

6. Result of the examination of the Nyaya Sutras of
Gautama.—By MAHAMAHOPADHYAYA HaraprAsaD SHAstri, M.A.

The paper will be published in the “ Journal and Proceedings,”
Vol. I, No. 10.

7. Materials for a Flora of the Malayan Peninsula. Mo. 18.—
By Str Georce Kine, K.C.i.E., LL.D., F.R.S., and J. S. Gamain,
Ksq., C.1.H., M.A., F.R.S.

(Abstract. )

Owing to an unforeseen cause of delay, it has been found
necessary to postpone the publication of the Natural Orders No 75
Apocynacee, No. 76 <Asclepiadacex and No. 77 Loganiacese for
a short while; consequently the present part, No. 18 of the
“Materials for a Flora of the Malayan Peninsula,” contains the
orders which succeed, viz., No. 79 Hydrophyllacew to No. 85
Lentibulariacese inclusive, together with No. 87 Bignoniacex and
88 Pedalinceew. No. 78 Gentienacexe has already appeared in part
17, and No. 86 Gesneracex will have to come later on with the
three orders above mentioned as having had to be postponed.

The whole of the work or six out of the nine orders now
presented : Convolvulacex, Solanacee, Scrophularinese, Orobanchacex,
Lentibulariaceez, and Pedalinese has been done by Lieutenant-
Colonel Prain, I.M.S8.; that on the Boraginee by Sir G. King; and
that on Hydrophyllacesee and Bignoniacex by Mr. Gamble.

The nine orders include 53 genera and 150 species; some of
the species are now described for the first time.

The paper will be published in full in an Extra No. of the
“ Journal and Proceedings” for 1905.

8. Some notes on dates of Subandhee and Dingnag.—By
MAHAMAHOPADHYAYA Haraprasap SHAstri, M.A.

The paper will be published in the “ Jowrnal and Proceedings,”
Vol. I, No. 10.

52

LIBRARY
NEW. Ok a?
BOTANICA!

DECEMBER 1905. GARDEN

The Monthly General Meeting of the Society was held on.
Wednesday, the 6th December 1905, at 9-15 p.m.

THe Hon’ste Mr. Justice AsurosH Muxuopapuayya, M,A.,
D.L., Vice-President, in the chair.
The following members were present :—

Dr. N. Annandale, Babu Muralidhar Banerjee, Major W. J.
Buchanan, I.M.S., Mr. I. H. Burkill, Babu Monmohan Chakra-
varti, Mr. B. L. Chaudhuri, Mr. W. K. Dods, Mr. L. L. Fermor,
Rey. E. Francotte, S.J., Mr. H. G. Graves, Mr. T. H. Holland,
Mr. D. Hooper, Rey. E. Lafont, S.J., Mr. W. A. Lee, Mr. J. Macfar-
lane, Mr. R. D. Mehta, Mr. J. R. Nicoll, Hon. Mr. Justice F. E.
Pargiter, Mr. G. Pilgrim, Hon. Mr. H. H. Risley, Major L. Rogers,
I.M.S., Dr. E. D. Ross, Mr. C. Saunders, Rai Ram Brahma
Sanyal Bahadur, Pandit Yogesa Chandra Sastree, Mahamaho-
padhyaya Haraprasad Shastri, Babu Chandra Narain Singh,
Mr. H. E. Stapleton, Pandit Vanamali Vedantatirtha, Babu
Amulya Charan Vidyabhushan, Rev. A. W. Young.

Visitors :—Mr. and Mrs. P. Buckland, Mr. J. C. Brown, M1.
J. M. Burjojee, Mr. Douglas H. Campbell, Babu Asutosh
Chatterjee, Captain Coldstream, R.E., Dr. J. N. Cook, Mr. and
Mrs. J. D. Guise, Mr. Holmes, Mrs. Kilburn, Colonel Macrae,
Captain and Mrs. Murray, Mr. O’Kinealy, Mr. H. Pedler,
Mr. W. H. Pickering, Mr. Pearre, Mr. J. Wilson, Mr. R. W.
Williamson, and others.

The minutes of the last meeting were read and confirmed.
Thirty-five presentations were announced.

The Chairman announced that Mr. I. H. Burkill had been
re-elected a member of the Library Committee during the year.

The General Secretary read the following resolutions of the
Sub-Committee appointed by Council to frame new rules for lend-
ing out manuscripts.

Loans to India.
Resolved :—

1. No manuscript shall be lent out to any member or non-
member without the recommendation of one of the Philological
Secretaries. j

The loan of a manuscript or manuscripts to non-members
must receive the sanction of Council in addition to the recom-

conendation of the Philological Secretary.
In the case of non-members a security may be demanded.
2. Asarule the number of manuscripts which a member is

Do

JUN 11190

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. | December,

entitled to borrow shall be limited to two, but this number may be
exceeded on the recommendation of the Philological Committee.

3. Every loan shall be reported to the Council.

4. All manuscripts lent must be returned at the end of three
months.

5. With regard to Editors each individual case will be
dealt with on its own merits.

The conditions under which each editor may borrow manu-
scripts will be forwarded with his letter of appointment.

Loans to Europe.

1. Loans cannot be made to private individuals but only to
Corporate Bodies.

2. Loans to Corporate Bodies in Kurope must receive the
sanction of the Council,

3. The loan is to be made in the first instance for six
months only, and renewals of loan for periods of three months
only.

v4, With each manuscript lent a form will be sent in
duplicate, and three forms of application for renewal: one form will
be retained by the borrower and the other duly signed by him
returned to the Society.

5. That the Corporate Body to whom the loan is made will
not be at liberty to allow the manuscript to leave their premises.

General Rules.

6. Certain manuscript of special importance or rarity shall
be placed by the Philological Secretaries in consultation on a
reserve list. These manuscripts will be marked in the Library
Catalogue with asterisks, and, as a general rule, shall not be lent
out of the Society’s rooms.

7. Itis, however, at the discretion of the Council, in very
special cases, to sanction the loan of such manuscript.

Form of Acknowledgment.

We have to acknowledge receipt Of........4-.-000NO.... coe see eee ees
in good order and condition, to be held in trust for the Asiatic
Society of Bengal and not to be removed from our premises.

We hereby undertake either to return the said manuscript by
the...............(the date being six months from the date of presum-
able arrival) or to make a formal application for renewal of the loan
by the............(five months from the time of presumable arrival),
and we further undertake toreturn the manuscriptin the same order
and condition securely packed by insured parcel post by the........s+e+.
if previous sanction to retain it for a further period has not been
received by the............00.

54

1905. } Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

Form of Application for Renewal.

We have acknowledged the receipt of........ Is noosua sbabos- on.
UlNE soo nsooans The manuscript has been used for......... . months.

The manuscript is wanted for a further period of three
months, and we shall be obliged by the Society’s sanction of this
renewal.

Mr. E. R. Watson, proposed by Mr. D. Hooper, seconded by
Dr. N. Annandale; Mohamed Hossain Khan Midhut, proposed by
Dr. E. D. Ross, seconded by Mr. J. Macfarlane; Mr. K. Marsden,
proposed by Dr. HE. D. Ross, seconded by Mr. J. Macfarlane ;
Mr. J. Wilson, proposed by Mr. T. H. Holland, seconded by
Dr. HE. D. Ross; were ballotted for and elected Ordinary Members.

Dr. N. Annandale gave an exhibition illustrating the use of
the blow-gun in Southern India and Malaya.

Mr. T. H. Holland gave a lecture on recent earthquakes in
India (lantern demonstration ).

The following papers were read :—

1. Harth Eating and the Harth-eating habit in India.— By
D. Hooper and H. H. Many.

This paper will be published in the Memoirs.
2. Formation of New Oastes.—By R. Bury, I.C.8.

3. Notes on the Fauna of a Desert Tract in Southern India,
T and II—By N. Annanvatn, D.Sc.

This paper will be published in the Memoirs,

4, Ascaris halicoris Bairp.—By Dr. v. Linstow. Com-
municated by N. ANNANDALE.

5. Animals in the Inscriptions of PiyadasiimBy MonMonHan
CHAKRAVARTI.

This paper will be published in the Memoirs.

Sst
~

7. che ei

Thi yee re

Journ: ano Proc: A.S. B. Vor: I, 1905. PLATE I

ae

|
| |
|
|

i
|
| i
| |
|

|
| ct
g
H a
} VJ
| =
es |
—
a)
| i}

+—
f{[—~t

GMX
|
A Chowdhary, d Py Rosie Doe Gerad nh — Photogravure, Su rvey of India, Offices, Calent fn May, 1905,

| PHYLLODACTYLUS BURMANIGUS. 2.PHYLLODACTYLUS SIAMENSIS.

Journ: ano Proc: A.S.B. Vor: |, 1905. PLATE I

5 Bias a 5)

a

=e ee ee eee 4 _

AC. Chowdhary, del Photograyure, Survey ofindia: Offices, Caleutta, May, 1906,

LHEMIDACTYLUS SUBTRIEDROIDES. 2. HEMIDACTYLUS TRIEDRUS. FROM ELLORE.
3. GONATODES ANDERSONIL 4, JAPALURA ANDERSONIANA,

‘GO6T ‘I “I1OA “@ “S "WY ‘OOug pue ‘NYNOP

WW ALW1d

JOURN. and Proc. A. S. B. Vol. 1, 1905. Plate IV.

Num. Supp. V.

var Ih ay, Re

a9) Be

ba hie

lh
5

elennet i)

JOURN. and Proc. A. S. B. Vol. 1, 1905. Plate V.

Num. Supp. V.

Plate VI.

JOURN. and Proc. A. S. B. Vol. |, 1905.

Journ. and Proc. A.S.B., Vol. 1, 1905, PLATE VII.

Nostril.

C=

ety,
a

ince
A

B
a

are Fa: a
iden aud

Journ. and Proc. A.S.B., Vol. I, 1905. PLATE VIII.

U
+

IP
l

Upper Lip (Upper Jaw Pad).
“ Tusk,
L.J. = Lower Jaw.

ll

Pas =
BAe eke

aed

BUGS Tt ay
jamie

a
ty

IX,

PLATE

Journ. and Proc. A.S.B., Vol. I, 1905.

E. = Eye,

N. = Nostril.

fe

Journal and Proc.A.S.B. Vol.1. 1905.

N
a
a

—

SAIDPUR
RAMPUR ;

TRACING FROM THE MAP OF THE GHAZ/PUR DISZ

CORRECTED UP T0 1882 SHOWING THE LIMITS fe

OF THE GANGES KHADIR

SCALE OF MILES

Furlengs ee4zo 1 2g 4 _s_E Miles.
w= SS

SONARI

PARMET
ADI

von RU

NagsAs __UTRULt

PlateX.

PIHUL

|

hr ce Het
Py Sips a

a Sy sae ;. ‘ uote - Fyne 2 ,
2 ¥ _
< : ~ é ;
aes . 3 : .
ra
F 5
; - p Z f s)
= «3 ; i
«
: i
,
; » e .
y .
, aye
teegry “ei 4 cs

ANATOMY OF ASCAF

Journ. & Proc. A.S,B.,Vol.1,1905.

v.liinstow del.

il

Plate XL.

8.C.Mondul Lith.

HALICORIS, Baird.

JOURNAL & PROCEEDINGS
ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

Vol. I, No. 1.

1908.

CALCUTTA :

PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS, AND PUBLISHED BY THE
ASIATIC SOCIETY, 57, PARK STREET.
1905.
Issued June 2ist, 1905,

List of Officers and Members of Council
: oF THE ,
ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL
For the year 1905.

President :
H.H. Sir A. H. L. Fraser, M.A:, LL.D., K.C.S.1.
| Vice-Presidents :

The Hon’ble Mr. Justice Asutosh Mukhopadhyaya, M.A., D.L.,
T. H. Holland, Esq., F.G.S., F.R.S.
C. W. McMinn, Esq., I.C.S., (retired).
' Secretary and Treasurer :
Honorary General Secretary: J. Macfarlane, Esq.
Treasurer: The Hon’ble Mr. Justice Asutosh Mukhopadhyaya,
M.A., D.L., F.R.S.E.

Additional Secretaries :
Philological Secretary: E. D. Ross, Esq., Ph.D.
Natural History Secretary: Captain L. Ropers, M.D., B.se.
ENGG
Antaropological Secretary: N. Annandale, Esq., B.A., D.Sc.
Joint Philological Secretary: Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad
Shastri, M.A.
Other Members of Council :
The Hon’ble Mr. Justice F. E. Pargiter, B.A., 1.C.S.
Kumar Ramessur Maliah.
I. H. Burkill, Esq., M.A.
H. E. Kempthorne, Esq.
W. K. Dods, Esq.
The Hon’ble Mr. A. Earle, 1.C.S.
Lieutenant-Colonel J. H. Tull Walsh, IMS.
R. O. Lees, Esq.
H. H. Hayden, Esgq,, B.A., EGS.
E. Thornton, Esq., F.R.1.B.A.

PiBRaryY.

The following new books have been added to the Library
from January to April 1905. The continuations of all the serials
and works in progress have been received.

Abdul Wali, Maula. Ethnographical Notes on the Muhamma-
dan Castes of Bengal. [ Bombay, 1904.| 8°.

Reprinted from the Journal of the Anthropological
Society of Bombay, vol. VII.

Presd. by the Author.

Abdur Rahman, H tg = [Almortaza or life of Hazrat

Ali, the fourth ‘Chalif, with a map of Arabia. In Urdu.]
[ Amritsar, OIL Se :

» dle Je! wy® [Arabi Bol Chal. Parts I—I]. A

Deatice on current Arabic dialect in Heypt and ore ia, In
Urdu.|] [ Amritsar, 1904.] 8°.

crelt . [As-Siddiq or the life of Abu Bakr,

the Just, 1st Chalif, with a map of ancient Arabia. In Urdu. ]
[Amritsar 1901.] 8°.

ge US, [Kitab un Nahv. A Treatise on Arabic
Syntax. In Urdu.|] [Amritsar, 1903.] 8.

SrAis, [Kitabus Sarf. A Treatise on Arabic
Etymology. In Urdu.] [Amritsar, 1904.] 8°.

—— asoll.s} oily Keli he. [Safarnamai Beladi Islamai. Part I.
In Urdu.] [Amritsar, 1905.] 8°.
Presd. by the Author.

Abul Fazl Allami, Shaikh. (r) ole copSt yf. [Persian Ms.
of Ain-i Akbari, vol. II.] 8°

Presd, by Syed Shamsul Huda.

Ameghino, Florentino. Paleontologia Argentina.
La Plata, 1904, 8”,

Presd. by the Universidad de la Plata.

Pt

Ananda Ranga Pillai. The Private Diary of Ananda Ranga
Pillai, Dubash to Joseph Francois Dupleix, Governor of
Pondicherry. A record of matters political, historical, social,
and personal, from 1736 to 1761. Translated from the
Tamil...and edited by Sir J. F. Price... Assisted by K. Ranga-
chari. vol. I, etc. Madras, 1904, etc., 8°.

Presd. by the Government of Madras

. Dupleix and Labourdonnais. Les Francais dans l’Inde.
... Extraits du journal d’Anandarangappoullé... —1736-1748.
—Traduits du tamoul.par J. Vinson. Paris, 1894, 8°.

Presd. by H.H. the Maharaja of Tippera.

Arasian Nicur’s Eyterrarnments. The Book of the Thousand
Nights and a Night. Translated from the Arabic by Captain
Sir R. F. Burton. Reprinted from the original edition and
edited by C. Smithers. Illustrated...by A. Letchford. vols. I.
and II. London, 1897. 8°.

Presd. by H.H. the Maharaja of Tuppera,

ARCHHOLOGICAL Survey or Inpra. Annual Report, 1902-03, ete.
Calcutta, 1904, etc. 4°.

Presd, by the Survey.

General Index to the Reports of the Archeological
Survey of India, Volumes I to XXIII. Published under the
superintendence of Major-General Sir A. Cunningham, by
Y. A. Smith. Witha glossary and general Table of Contents.
Calcutta, 1887. 8°.

Tue Art-JourNnAL. New Series, vol. VI. London, 1860. fol.
Presd, by H,H, the Maharaja of Toppera.,
ArHArvA VepA BuasyA, The Atharva Veda Bhasya. ...Trans-
lation and with the Commentary in Sanskrit and Hindi by
Giridhari Lala Shastri. Farrukhabad, | lise
Presd, by the Translator.

Avesta, Paunavs and Ancient .Persian studies, in honour of the
late Shams-ul-Ulama Dastur Peshotanji Behramji Sanjana.
First series, ete. Strassburg, 1904, ete, 8°.

Presd, by the Trustees of the Parsee Panchayet, Bombay.

PDa ee xPe
as 4 oa hes 0) GY

z
: ERS
+
¢ >
“5
‘
‘ = HOROSEI
zm .
oy, :
* :
- '
spe
‘

3

Bernier, Francois. Travels in the Mogul Empire, A.D. 1656-
1668...A revised and improved edition based upon Irving |
Brock’s translation by A. Constable. Westminster, 1891. 8°.

Presd. by H.H, the Maharaja of Tippera.

Bernoulli, J. J. Die erhaltenen Darstellungen Alexanders des
Grossen. Hin Nachtrag zur griechischen Ikonographie.
Miinchen, 1905. 8°.

Beylié, De. General. Le Palais d’Angkor Vat, ancienne
résidence des rois Khmers. Hanoz, 1903. 8°.

Bhatta, Braja Nath. Marichika. A gloss on Bramhasutra...
Edited by Ratna Gopal Bhatta. Fasc. I, ete.
Benares, 1905, etc. 8°.

Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series, No. 86.
Bhattamalla. Akhyatacandrika. ...Hdited by S. P. V. Ranga-
nathasvami Ayyavaralugaru. Benares, 1904. 8°.
Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series, No. 82.

Blagdon, Francis William. A Brief History of Ancient and
Modern India from the earliest period of antiquity to the
termination of the late Mahratta War. London, 1805. fol.

Presd. by H.H. the Maharaja of Tippera.

Bresiau.—Stadtbibliothek. Verzeichnis der arabischen, persis-
chen, turkischen und hebraischen Handschriften der Stadt-
bibliothek zu Breslau. Von C. Brockelmann.

Breslau, 1903. 8°.

British Musnum. The Coins of the Moghul Emperors of Hindu-
stan...By S. Lane-Poole. Edited by R. 8. Poole.
London, 1892. 8°.

Presd. by H.H. the Maharaja of Tippera.
Cacuart First and Second Reader. Shillong, 1904. 8°.
Presd. by the Govt. of Assam.

CAPE Town.—Gleological Commission. Index to the Annual
Reports...for the years 1896-1903, Compiled by E, H. L.

Schwarz. Cape Town, 1904, 8°.

Presd, by the Geological Commission, Cape Town,

A

Castex, R. Le Péril japonais en Indo-Chine. Réflexions pol-
tiques et militaires. Paris, [1904.] 8°.

Chantepie de la Saussaye, P. D. Manuel d'histoire des reli-
gions. Traduit del’ allemand, etc. Paris, 1904, 8°.

Conerts INTERNATIONAL DE Boranique ‘A Vienne 1905, Texte

. synoptique des documents destinés a servir de base aux
débats du Congrés International de Nomenclature Botanique
de Vienne 1905, presenté au nom de la commission interna-
tionale de nomenclature botanique par J. Briquet.

Berlin, 1905. 8°.
Presd. by the Congress.

Cordier, Henri. Histoire des relations de la Chine avec les
puissances occidentales, 1860-1902. 3 vols.
Paris, 1901-1902. 8°.

Coyajee, J.C. The Spirit of the Gathas. A lecture.
[ Bombay, 5) Les
The Gatha Society's Publications. No. 1.

Presd. by the Trustees of the Parsee Panchayet, Bombay.

Deussen, Paul. Hrinnerungen an Indien....Mit einer Karte,.
16 Abbildungen und einem Anhange.—“ On the Philosophy of
the Vedanta in its relations to occidental U Metaphysics.

Kiel, Leipzig, 1905. 8°.

Doumer, Paul. L’Indo-Chine frangaise—Souvenirs.
Paris, 1905. 4°.

D‘Oyly, Sir Charles. Views of Calcutta and its environs,
London, 1848. fol.

Presd. by H.H. the Maharaja of Tippera.

Drahyayana. The Srauta-Sttra of Drahyayana with the Com-
mentary of Dhanvyin. Edited by J. N. Reuter. Part I, etc.
London, 1904, ete. 4
Reprinted from the ‘ Acta Societatis Scientiarum Fennice.”’

Presd. by Messrs. Luzac & Co.

Duckworth, W. L. H. Morphology and Anthropology. A hand-
book for students. Cambridge, 1904, 8°.

Dupuy, J. Th. La Peste. Bitude crit tique des moyens prophylacti-
ques actuels, Paris, 1904, 8°,

es 2 Fs
Sergi

pee

SF
Fe
S

pes

5

Dutton, Clarence Edward. Earthquakes in the ight of the New
Seismology. London, 1904, 8°.

Encyctopapia Brirannica. Tenth edition...New volumes. (Maps
—Index.) ll vols. Hdinburgh, 1902-03. 4°.

Filchner, Wilhelm. Ein Ritt tiber den Pamir. Berlin, 1903. 8°.

Firdausi. Shah Nameh. Translated into Guzarati from
Firdousi from the commencement up to the reign of King
Minocheher, with an appendix containing an account of the
Kings according to the Avesta Pahlavi and other Persian books,
by Jivanji Jamshedji Modi. [Bombay], 1904. 8°.

*

Presd. by the Trustees of the Parsee Panchayet, Bombay.

Forrest, G. W. A History of the Indian Mutiny. Reviewed and
illustrated from original documents. 2 vols.
Edinburgh, London, 1904, 8°.

Foucher, A. L’Art gréco—bouddhique du Gandhara. Etude sur
les origines de l influence classique dans l'art bouddhique
de l’Inde et de ’Extréme-Orient. Vol. 1, efc.

Paris, 1905, etc. 8°.

Publications de ! cole Frangaise d@ Hatréme-Orient,

Etude sur Viconographie bouddhique de I’Inde d’apres
des textes inédits. Paris, 1905. 8°.

Presd, by the Author.

Gaillard, L. Nankin d’alorsetd’aujourd *hui. Apergu historique
et géographique. Chang-Hai, 1903. 8°.
Variétés Sinologiques, No. 28.

Nankin port ouvert. Chang Hai, 1901. 8°,
Variétés Sinologiques No. 18.

Galpin, Stanley Leman. Cortois and Vilain. A study of the
distinction made between them by the French and Provengal
poets of the 12th, 13th and 14th centuries. A thesis, ete.
New Haven, Conn. 1905. 8°. |

Presd, by the Yale University.

A GeneraL History of Quadrupeds...The fourth edition.
New-Castle-wpon-Tyne, 1800. 8°.

Presd. by H.H. the Maharaja of Vippera

6

s
GeroLocicaL Survey oF THe Dominion or Canapa. Map showing
mounted Police Stations in the North- West territories.

~ 1904. S-sh. fol.
Presd. by the Survey.

Gibbon, Edward. The History of the Decline and Fall of the
Roman Empire... Hdited...with introduction, notes, appendices,
and index, by J. B. Bury. 7 vols. London, 1900-1902. 8°.

Grinwedel, Albert. Buddhist Art in India. Translated...by A.

C. Gibson. Revised and Bs by J. Burgess.
London, 1901. 8°.

Presd. by H.H. the Maharaja of Tippera.

Heckel, Ernest. The Wonders of Life. A popular study of
Biological Philosophy. ‘Supplementary volume to ‘‘ The Rid-
dle of the Universe”... Translated by J. McCabe.

London, 1904, 8°.

Presd. by the Author.

Hamilton, Anthony. Memoirs of Count Grammont...Hdited,
with notes, by Sir Walter Scott. With portrait of the author
and...other etchings by L. Boisson after original designs by |
C. Delort. London, 1896. 8°.

Presd. by H.H. the Maharaja of Tuppera.
EY Lieut. A, The New Guide to Delhi, Allahabad, 1866. 8°,

avai Rev. Fr. J. G. Arabic-Hnglish Dictionary for the use of
students. Bey yrut, 1899. 8°.

Havell, H. B. -A Handbook to Agra and the Taj, Sikandra, Fateh-
pur-Sikri and the neighbourhood... With.,.illustrations, etc,
London, 1904, 8°.

Hazlitt, W. Carew. Faith and Folklore. A Dictionary of National
Belief, Superstitions and Popular Customs, past and current,
with their classical and foreign analogues, described and illus-
trated, etc. 2 vols. London, 1905, 8°.

Hedin, Sven. Scientific Results of a journey in Central Asia
1899-1902, Text, vol. 1, etc. Maps, vol. 1, etc.
Stockholm, | 1904, etc.| 4°.

eyes: meh

BS ihe tue

A > ‘ + . r
* +
. ; ie

h
(

Herzog, Maximilian and orners. I; Does Latent or Dormant
Plague exist where the disease is endemic. By M. Herzog
and C. B. Hare. II. Broncho-Pnuemonia of Cattle: Its asso-
ciation with B. Bovisepticus. By P. G. Woolley and W.
Sorrell, III. Report one Pinto—Pafio Blanco. By P. G.
Woolley. IV. Notes on Analysis of the water from the
Manila water-supply. By C. lL. Biss V. Frambesia: Its
occurrence in Natives of the Philippine Islands. By P. G.
Woolley. Manzla, 1904. 8°.

_ Presd. by the Bureau of Govt. Laboratories, Manila.

Hilal al-Sabi. The Historical Remains of Hilal al-Sabi. First
part of his Kitab al-wuzara.—Gotha Ms, 1756—and Fragment of
his History 389-393 A. H.—B. M. Ms., Add 19,360.—Edited
with notes and glossary by H. F. Amedroz. Leyden, 1904, 8°.

Hirsch J. Auctions-Catalog von griechischen und. rémischen
Mnnzen schonster Hrhaltung. No. XII. Munchen, 1904, 8°.

Presd. by the Publisher.

Hirth, F. China and the Roman Orient: researches into their
ancient and medieval relations as represented in old Chinese
~ records. Leztpsic, Munich, 1885. 8°.

Hochreutiner, B. P.G. Plante Bogorienses exsiccate, Nove vel
minus Cognite que in Horto Botanico coluntur.

[ Batavia, | 1904, 8°.

Presd. by the Botanic Institute of Buitenzorg.

Huisman, M. la Belgique commerciale sous l’empereur Charles

VI. La Compagnie d’Ostende. Etude historique de politi-
que commerciale et coloniale. Bruaelles, Paris, 1902. 8°.

Hunter, Sir Willham Wilson. A Brief History of the Indian
Peoples... Twenty-third edition, ete. Oxford, 1908. 8°. —

Ibu Thofail. Hayy Ben Yaqdhan. Roman philosophique d’Ibn
Thofail. Texte arabe publé d’aprés un nouveau manuscrit
avec les variantes des anciens textes et traduction francaise par

L. Gauthier. Alger, 1900, 8°.

Jack, R. Logan. The Back Blocks of China. A narrative of
experiences among the Chinese, Sifans, Lolos, Tibetanos

Shans and Kachins between Shanghai and the Irrawadi.
London, 1904, 8°.

Jackson, Si Charles. A Vindication of the Marquis of Dal-

housie’s Indian administration, London, 1865, 8°,

8

Jamasp. Pahlavi, Pazend and Persian Texts with Gujarati trans-
literation of the Pahlavi Jamaspi, English and Gujarati trans-
lations with notes of the Pahlavi Jamaspi, Gujarati translation
of the Persian Jamaspi and English translation of the Pazend
Jamaspi by Jivanji Jamshedji Modi. Bombay, 1903. 8°.

Presd. by the Trustees of the Parsee Panchayet, Bombay.

Janet, Cherles. Anatomie du gaster de la Myrmica Rubra,
Paris, 1902, 8°.

——. Essai sur la constitution morphologique de la téte
de Vinsecte. Paris, 1899. 8°. -

Etudes sur les fourmis, les euépes et les abeilles. Note
14. Rapports des animaux myrmécophiles avec les fourmis.
Limoges, 1897, 8°,

Observations sur les guépes. Paris, 1903. 8°.

Sur les rapports des Lépismides myrmeécophiles avec
les fourmis. Paris, 1896. 8°.
Extrait des Comptes rendus hebdomadaires des Séances
de l Académie de Sciences.

Presd. by the Author.

Jivanji Jamshedji Modi. The Ancient Iranians according to
Herodotus and Strabo. A comparison with the Avesta and
other Parsee books. Bombay, 1904, 8°.

Presd. by the Trustees of the Parsee Panchayet, Bombay.

Joret, Charles. Les Plantes dans l’antiquité et au Moyen 4ge.
Histoire, usages et symbolisme, etc. Paris, 1904. 8°.

Jump, Captain R. Views in Calcutta. London, 1837. 4°.
*. Presd. by H.H. the Maharaja of Tippera.
Kittel, Dr. F. A Grammar of the Kannada language in English

comprising the three dialects of the language—ancient,
medieval and modern, Mangalore, 1903. 8°.

Knighton, William. The Private Life of an Hastern King.
Compiled for a member of the household of his late Majesty,
Nussir-u-deen, King of Oude,... New edition, revised. :
London, 1856. 8°.

Presd. by H.H. the Maharaja of Tippera.

9

Kumait. Die Hasimijjat des Kumait. Herausgegeben, iibersetzt
und erlaiutert von J. Horovitz. Leiden, 1904. 8°

Lee-Warner, 8:7 William. The Life of the Marquis of Dalhousie. -
2 vols. London, 1904. 8°.

Lodge, Edmund. Portraits of Illustrious Personages of Great
Britain...with biographical and historical memoirs of their
lives and actions. Text, 4 vols. Plates, 1 vol.

London, 1823-25. 4°. & fol.

Presd. by H.H. the Maharaja of Tippera.

Loti, Pierre, pseud. [7.e. Julien Viaud]. Vers Ispahan. Cin-
-quiéme édition. Paris, 1904. - 8°.

Liubke, Dr. Wilhelm. Outlines of the History of Art..,Hdited,
minutely revised and largely rewritten by R. Sturgis. 2 vols.
London, 1904. 8°.

Ludwig, Ernest. The Visit of the Teshoo Lama to Peking. Ch‘ien
Liung’s Inscription. Translated by EH. Ludwig.
Peking, 1904. 8°.

Presd. by the Translator.

McCulloch, J. R. A Treatise on the principles and practical
influence of Taxation and the Funding system.
London, 1845. 8°.

Presd. by H.H. the Maharaja of Tippera.

Macgeorge, G. W. Ways and Works in India, being an account
of the public works in that country from the earliest times up
to the present day. Westminster, 1894. 8°.

McMinn, Charles W. Famine Truths,—Half Truths,—Untruths.
Calcutta, 1902, 8°.

Presd. by the Author.

Malleson, Colonel G. B. The Decisive Battles of India from 1746
to 1849 inclusive. With a portrait...a map, and.. .plans. Second
edition, with an additional chapter. London, 1885. 8°.

Presd. by H.H. the Maharaja of Tippera.

Manvsanuita on Institures or Manu. Commented and edited by
Pandit Gangadhur Kaviratna Kaviraj.
[Baharampur, 1883.] 8°.

2

10
Martin, Montgomery. The History, Antiquities, Topography, and
Statistics of Hastern India; comprising the districts of Behar,

Shahabad, Bhagulpoor, Goruckpoor, Dinajepoor, Purniya,
Rungpoor and Assam, efc., Vol. II. London, 1838. 8°.

Presd. by H.H. the Maharaja of Tippera.

Meerwaldt, J. H. MHandleiding tot de beoefening der Bataksche
Taal. Leiden, 1904. 8°.

Presd. by the Directeur de 1 Hnsergnement des cultes et de V
Industrie aux Indes néerlandaises.

Morgan, J. de. Fouilles 4 Dahchour en 1894-1895.
Vienne, 1903. fol.

Nilakantha Yamivara. The Advaita Parijatah...published by
R. Shankar Wariyer. Bombay, 1901. 8°.

sigunpgeecl, etc. [Sri Soubhagya Lahari, Sri
Visnunavaratnastutih, Advaitakata Aryasati and Sri Hari-
bhaktimaranda Stuti.| Benares, 1902. 8°.

Presd. by the Author.

O'Connor, V. C. Scott. The Silken Hast. A record of life and
travel in Burma....With...illustrations, etc. 2 vols.
London, 1904, 8°

Oldham, ©. F. The Sun and the Serpent. A contribution to the
history of Serpent-Worship. London, 1905. 8°.

Presd. by the Author.

Orloff, N. A. Die Hroberung der Mandschurei durch die Trans-
baikal- Kasaken im Jahre 1900....Deutsch von ee ete.
Strassburg, 1904. 8°.

Perrot, George and Chipiez, Charles. A History of Art in Ancient
Egypt. From the French...Ilustrated with...engravings..
and ...plates. Translated and edited by W. Armstrong. 2
vols. London, 1883. 8°.

A History of Art in Chaldeaand Assyria. From the
French... lustrated with...engravings...and...plates. Trans-
lated and edited by W. Armstrong. 2vols. London, 1884, 8°.

History of Artin Phoenicia and its dependencies. From
the French .., Illustrated with... engravings... and ... plates.
Translated and edited by W. Armstrong. 2 vols.

London, 1885. 8.

Presd. by HLH, the Maharaja of Tippera,

ole tare

vibes)
ak

11

Petrie, W. M. Flinders. Methods and Aims in Archeology...with
..-lllustrations. London, 1904. 8°.

Pfeffer, Dr. W. The Physiology of Plants. <A treatise upon the
Metabolism and sources of energy in Plants...second fully
revised edition, translated and edited by A. J. Ewart. With...
illustrations. 2 vols. Ozford, 1900. 8°.

Piassetsky, P. Russian Travellers in Mongolia and China...
Translated by J. Gordon-Cumming. 2 vols. London, 1884. 8°.

Piette, Edouard. Consequences des mouvements seismiques des
régions polaires. Angers, 1902. 8°.

Etudes d’Ethnographie préhistorique:—VI. Notions
complémentaires sur lAsylién. VII. Classification des

sediments formés dans les cavernes pendant l’ége du renne.
Paris, 1904. 8°.

Heztrait de “lV Anthropologie.”
. Gravure du Mas d’Azil et statuettes de Menton.
Paris, 1902. 8°.
Extrait des Bulletins et Memotres de la Société
@ Anthropologie de Paris, 1902.
Les Causes des grandes extensions glaciaires aux
temps pleistocénes. Paris, 1902. 8°,
Heatratt des Bulletins et Memotres de la Société
d Anthropologie Paris, 1902.
Notice sur M. Edouard Piette. Vannes, 1903. 8°,
Sur une gravure du mas-d’Azil. [Paris,] 1903. 8°,

Presd. by the Author,

Pit. Henige proeven met phosphorzuur-bemesting.
Batavia, 1905. 8°.
Presd. by the Botanic Institute, Buitenzorg.

Potice CoMMISSsION. Report of the Indian Police Commission
1902-03. With Resolution, Szmla, 1903. 4°.

Quiros, Pedro Fernandez de. The Voyages of Pedro Fernandez
de Quiros, 1595 to 1606. Translated and edited by Sir C.
Markbam. 2 vols. London, 1904. 8°.

Hakluyt Society's Publications, Second series, No, 14.

Presd. by the Government of India, Home Department.

12

Reinach, Solomon. La Collection Piette au musée de Saint-
Germain. Pars, 1902. 8°.
Extrait de la Revue Archéologique.

Presd. by the Author.

Ribbe, Carl. Zwei Jahre unter den Kannibalen der Salomo-
Inseln. Reiseerlebnisse und Schilderungen von Land und
Leuten. Dresden-Blasewitz, 1903. 8°.

Rickards, R. India; or Facts submitted to illustrate the charac-
ter and condition of the native inhabitants, with suggestions
for reforming the present system of Government. Vol. I,

Vol. II, Pts. 2-3. London, 1829. 8°.
Presd. by H.H. the Maharaja of Tippera.

Ritchie, Leitch. Wanderings by the Seine, from Rouen to the
Source... With...engravings from drawings by J. M. W. Turner.
London, 1835, 8°.

Sacco, Federico. I Molluschi dei terreni terziarii del Piemonte
e della Liguria,...Considerazioni generali. Indice generale

dell’opera. Torino, 1904, 4°.
Presd. by the Author.

Salt, Henry. Twenty-four views in St. Helena, the Cape, India,
Ceylon, The Red Sea, Abyssinia and Egypt. From drawings
by H. Salt. Text and plates. London, 1809, 1822. 4 & fol.

Presd. by H.H. the Maharaja of Tippera.

Sankarananda, Sri Brahmasutradipika...Hdited by Rama Sastri
Tailanga. Fasc. 1, etc. Benares, 1904, etc. 8°.

Benares Sanskrit Series, No. 91.

Schimper, Dr. A. F. W. Plant-Geography upon a Physiological
Basis...The authorised English translation by W. R. Fisher
... Revised and edited by P. Groom...and I. B. Balfour. With
...illustrations. Ozford, 1903. 8°.

Scott, Rev. J. KH. In Famine Land. Observations and experiences
in India during the Great Drought of 1899-1900.
New York, London, 1904, 8°.

Shakespeare, William. The Pictorial Hdition of the works of
Shakespeare. Edited by C. Knight. 8 vols. London,(_ ). 8°.

Presd. by H.H. the Maharaja of Tippera.

ORES ee

been es.
bP A SE IR Ne alg

~ ome
aggE |

13

Smith, Vincent A. The Early History of India from 600 B.C. to
the Muhammadan Conquest, including the invasion of Alex-
ander the Great. Oaford, 1904. 8°.

Sorensen, S. An Index to the names in the Mahabharata with
short explanations and a Concordance to the Bombay and,
Calcutta editions and P, C. Roy’s translation. Pt. I, ete.
London, 1904, etc. 4°,

Spillmann, Joseph. Durch Asien. Hin Buch mit vielen Bildern
fir die Jugend...Zweite, vermehrte Auflage. 2 vols.
Freiburg 7. B., 1896, 98. 4°.

Stein, M.A. Map showing portions of the territory of Khotan
and adjoining regions...1900-1901. ( ) [1904.] S-sh. fol.

Presd. by the Author.

Sand-Buried Ruins of Khotan. Personal narrative of a
journey of archeological and geographical exploration in
Chinese Turkestan. London, 1903. 8°.

StockHotm.—Académie Royal Swédoise des Sciences. Les Prix Nobe
en 1901. Stockholm, 1904. : 8°.

Presd. by the Academy.

Strong, Richard P. Protective inoculation against Asiatic Chol-
lera.—An experimental study. Mandla, 1904, 8°.
Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No. 16.

Some Questions relating to Virulence of Micro-organisms,
with particular reference to their immunizing powers.
Manila, 1904. 8°.
Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No. 21.

- Presd. by the Bureau of Govt. Laboratories, Manila.
Suswagira-Samerana, Hdited by Cecil Bendall. Louvain 1905. 8°.
Extrait du ‘ Muséon ‘ Nouvelle Série, IV-V.

Presd. by the Editor.
TANTRAKALPADRUMAH. @eq @evRa:| [Tantrakalpadrumah. Com-
piled by Nilakamala Vandyopadhyaya and revised by Pandit

Syama Charan Kaviratna. Parts 4, 6 and 7.
Calcutta, Benares, 1900, 1903, 1905, 8°.

Presd. by Babu Kalkrisna Banerjee.

Ey EEX)

Aes

aM
<

ee

Fs
ers
=e

é

RES

¢

a3

ie)

A

5

14,

Vambéry, Arminius. The Story of my Struggles. The Memoirs
of Arminius Vambéry. 2 vols. London, 1905, 8°.

Vansittart, Henry. A Narrative of the Transactions in Bengal,
from the year 1760 to the year 1764 during the Government
of Mr. H. Vansittart. Published by himself. 3 vols. .
London, 1766. 8°.

Presd. by H.H. the Maharaja of Tippera.

VENKATADHVARI, . Laksmisahasra...with the commentary called
Balabodhini by Srinivasa Pandit or Ravji Maharaja. Edited
...by Rama Sastri Tailanga. fasc. I. etc.

Benares, 1904, etc. 8°.
Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series, No. 84.

Vieux, E. F. The Manufacture of Pottery in India.
Bombay, 1905. 8°.
Reprinted from the ‘ Indian Textile Journal.”

Presd. by the Author.

Virarajendra Wadiar, Raja. [Rubbing of an Inscription re-
cording an Elephant hunt of Raja Virarajendra Wadiar, the
ruler of Coorg from 1780-1809. With a translation.] fol.

Presd. by the Govt. of India, Home Dept.

Voelcker, John Augustus. Report on the Improvement of Indian
Agriculture. London, [1895.] 8°.

Presd. by H.H. the Maharaja of Tippera.
Wetmore, Monroe Nichols, The Plan and scope of a Vergil
Lexicon, with specimen articles. A thesis, etc.
New Haven, Conn., 1904. 8°.
Presd. by the Yale University.
Wherry, Wm. B. Some Observations on the Biology of the
Cholera Spirillum. Manila, 1905. 8°.
Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No, 19.

Presd. by the Bureau of Govt. Laboratories, Manila.

Wigman, H. J. Rorako—Ormogarpum Glabrum T. et B. var.
Minahassana. Batavia, 1905. 8°.

Presd, by the Botanic Institute of Buitenzorg.

ent
tae

>
ii

, : a WI Od tO SioOd
J ‘ ° ONS See ea
ee Ne mh WOU se SH aie

* = BeBe Be ; en ia

ee Tot

- - © iia » 2 Te SP Oa eS eRe
. alin el eee ee 1 5
° ee Fe Ad Week Vanek
yews aS
t > o aey ooh oe
oe ey ee WAS ae te 4
3 + =
E c >
7 Sphsee
eee” bs
eee S 2 ca i
re = Vis Avra. 5 Ty a ;
bya gers phaate oe Ih n
y ple ee
: 1 ROEM
z 2A 3) bs
a
*)
x ae
% j

15

Williams, H.W. Select views in Greece with classical illustra-
tions. 2 vols. London, 1829. fol.

Wilson, Professor. Scotland Illustrated in a series of eighty views
from drawings by John C. Brown, William Brown, and other
Scottish artists, with letter-press descriptions and an essay on
the scenery of the Highlands. London, 1850. 8°.

Presd. by H.H. the Maharaja of Tippera.

Wollaston, Arthur N.~ A Complete English-Persian Dictionary,
etc. London, 1889. 4°.

Wistenfeld, Dr. Ferdinand. Vergleichungs-Tabellen der muham-
madanischen und christlichen Zeitrechnung nach dem ersten
Tage jedes muhammedanischen Monats berechnet und im
Auttrage und auf Kosten der Deutschen Morgenlandischen
Gesellschaft herausgegeben von Dr. F. Wistenfeld.

Leipzig, 1903. 4°.

Wycherley, William. The Dramatic Works of Wycherley, Con-
greve, Vanbrugh and Farquhar. With biographical and cri-
tical notices by L. Hunt. A new edition. London, 1855. 8°.

Presd. by H.H. the Maharaja of Tippera.

Rendavesta, The Pahlavi version of Yasna IX. Edited with
collation of MSS. A literal Translation into English,...notes
and an introduction by Manekji Bamanji Davar.

Leipzig, 1904. 8°.

Presd. by the Trustees of the Parsee Panchayet, Bombay.

Ne reas OSG

*
Heat

bee Sis

ce ane

3 a VS

se

ie ok a ey er tree
PEG F CECT ste) ae

cae

ADs eae

oS NO ee

_ PRINCIPAL PUBLICATIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

Asiatic Researches, Vols. I—XX and Index, 1788—1839.
Proceedings, 1865—1904, (now amalgamated with Journal).
Memoirs, Vol. 1, eéc., 1905, etc.

Journal, Vols. 1—73, 1832—1904.

Journal and Proceedings, [N. §.] Vol. 1, ete., 1905, ete.
Centenary Review, 1784—1883.

Bibliotheca Indica, 1848, ete.

A complete list of publications sold by the Society can be
tained by application to the Honorary Secretary, 57, Park Street,
alentta.

- 5 : =a
PRIVILEGES OF ORDINARY MEMBERS.

(a) To be present and vote at all General Meetings which
are held on the first Wednesday in each month, except
in September and October.

(6) To propose and second candidates for Ordinary Member-
ship.

(c) To introduce visitors at the Ordinary General Meetings
and to the grounds and public rooms of the Society
during the hours when they are open to members.

(d) To have personal access to the Library and other public
rooms of the Society, and to examine its collections.

(e) To take out books, plates and manuscripts from the
Library.

(f) To receive gratis, copies of the Jowrnal and Proceedings
and Memoirs of the Society.

(g) To fill any office in the Society on being duly elected
thereto. .

pa

MA.

gs

d Kataka ?).—By Ganca Moan LASKAR,

v

NTS.

January 1905 =

an

or

ge fi

a (

osa

din

K

ae

‘ PS

4 3

ae

sig we

os

re
pe
Q S
0 <
a

:

s

3

8

oe

rocee

JOURNAL & PROCEEDINGS
ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.
Vol. I, No. 2.

1908.

CALCUTTA :

PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS, AND PUBLISHED BY THE
ASIATIC SOCINTY, 57, PARK STREET.
1905.
Issued July 18th, 1905,
poesia a in he PR

List of Officers and Members of Council
OF THE :
ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL
For the year 1905.
a
President :
H.H. Sir A. H. L. Fraser, M.A., LL.D., K.C.S.1.
Vice-Presidents :
The Hon’ble Mr, Justice Asutosh Mukhopadhyaya, M.A., DL,
T. H. Holland, Esq., F.G.S., F.R.S.
C. W. McMinn, Esq., I.C.S., (vetired).
Secretary and Treasurer :
Honorary General Secretary: J. Macfarlane, Esq.
Treasurer: The Hon’ble Mr. Justice Asutosh Mukhopadhyaya,
Additional Secretaries :
Philological Secretary: EH. D.§Ross, Esq., Ph.D.
Natural History Secretary: Captain L. Rogers, M.D., B.Sc.,
Anthropological Secretary: N. Annandale, Hsq., B.A., D.Sc.
Joint Philological Secretary: Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad
Shastri, M.A.
: Other Members of Council :
The Hon’ble Mr. Justice F. H. Pargiter, B.A., I.C.S.
Kumar Ramessur Maliah.
I. H. Burkill, Esq., M.A.
H. EH. Kempthorne, Esq.
W. K. Dods, Esq.
The Hon’ble Mr. A. Earle, I:C.S. »
_Ineutenant-Colonel J. H. Tull Walsh, I.M.S.
R. O. Lees, Esq.
H. H. Hayden, Esq., B.A., F.G.S.
E. Thornton, Esq., F.R.1.B.A.
Pandit Satis Chandra Vidyabhisana, M.A.

LIST OF MEMBERS

OF, THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

pr THE 31ST PECEMBER, 1904,

LIST OF OFFICERS AND MEMBERS OF COUNCIL
OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL
FOR THE YEAR 1904.

President :
The Hon’ble Mr. Justice F. H. Pargiter, B.A., 1.C.S.

Vice-Presidents :

The Hon’ble Mr. Justice Asutosh Mukhopadhyaya,
M.A., D1, F.R.S.H.

Tieut.-Col. D. Prain, M.A., M.B., LL.D.

T. H. Holland, Hsq., F.G.S., F.R.S.

Secretary and Treasurer.

Honorary General Secretary : J. Macfarlane, Esq.
‘The Howble Mr. Justice Asutosh Mukhopadhyaya,
MA., DG.) RSH.

Additional Secretaries.

Philological Secretary : T. Bloch, Esq., Ph.D.

Natural History Secretary: Captain L. Rogers,
M.D., B.Sc., 1.M.S.

Anthropological Secretary : HE. D. Ross, Esq., Ph.D.

Joint Philological Secretary : Mahamahopadhyaya
Haraprasad Shastri, M.A.

Other Members of Council.

T. H. D. La Touche, Esq., B.A.

Kumar Ramessur Maliah.

Arnold Caddy, Esq., M.D., F.R.C.S.
_ I. H. Burkill, Esq., M.A.

H. E. Kempthorne, Esq.

C. Little, Hsq., M.A.°

W. K. Dods, Esq.

The Hon’ble Mr. A. Earle, I.C.8.

Lieut.-Col. J. H. Tull Walsh, I.M.S.

R. O. Lees, Esq.

LIST OF ORDINARY MEMBERS.

—

R.=Resident. N.R.=Non-Resident. A.=Absent. N.§.=Non-Subscribing.
L.M.=Life Member. F.M.= Foreign Member.

EEO

N.B.—Members who have changed their residence since the list was drawn
up are requested to give intimation of such a change to the Honorary General
Secretary, in order that the necessary alteration may be made in the subse-
quent edition. Errors or omissions in the following list should also be com-
municated to the Honorary General Secretary.

Members who are about to leave India and do not intend to return are
particularly requested to notify to the Honorary General Secretary whether
it is their desire to continue Members of the Society ; otherwise, in accord-
ance with Rule 40 of the rules, their names will be removed from the list at
the expiration of three years from the time of their leaving India.

Date of Election.

1903 Feb. 4.| R. | Abdul Alim. Calcutta.

1894 Sept. 27.) N.R.| Abdul Wali, Maulavie. Ranchi.

1895 May 1.| R. | Abdus Salam, Maulavie, m.a. Calcutta.

1903 April 1. | N.R.| Abul Aas, Maulavie Sayid, Rais and Zemindar.

Patna.

1901 Aug. 7.| A. | Adams, Margaret. Baptist Zenana Mission.

Hurope.

1904 Sept. 28.) N.R.| Ahmad Hasain Khan, Munshi. Jhelum.

1888 April4.| R. | Ahmud, Shams-ul-ulama Maulavie, Arabic

Professor, Presidency College. Calcutta.

1888 Feb. 1.}| R. | Alcock, Major Alfred William, M.B., LL.D., C.1.£.,
F.R.S. Calcutta.

1885 Mar. 4.|U.M.| Ali Bilgrami, Sayid, B.A., ARS.M., F.G.S. Hy-
derabad.

1899 Jan. 4.|N.R.| Ali Hussain Khan, Nawab. Bhopal.

1903 Oct. 28.| R. | Allan, Dr. A. S., uw.z. Calcutta.

1900 Aug. 1.) A. | Allen, C.G. H., 1.0.8. Hurope.

1874 June 3.| A. | Ameer Ali, M.A,, 0.1.8., Barrister-at-Law,

Europe.

1893 Aug. 31. A. | Anderson, Major A. R. S., B.A., M.B., M.S.
| Hurope.

1884 Sept. 3.) A. | Anderson, J. A. Durope. :

1904 Sept. a R. | Annandale, Nelson, B.A. Calcutta.

1904 Jan. 6.| R. | Ashton, R. P. Calcutta.

1904 July é ae R.| Aulad Hasan, Sayid. Dacca.

1870 Feb. 2. a mo. Powell, Baden Henry, M.A. 62.0.

Lurope.

1v

5D ate of Election. |

1901 Jan. 2).
1898 Nov. 2.

1891 Mar. 4.

1898 Aug. 3. |.

1891 April 1.

1900 Aug. 29.

1896 Mar. 4.
1869 Dec. 1.
1885 Nov. 4.
1377 Jan. 17.

1898 Mar. 2.
1902 May 7.

1894 Sept. 27.

1898 May 4.
1895 July 3.

1876 Nov. 15.

1900 April 4.
1898 Nov.
1859 Aug.

1897 Feb.
1893 Feb.
1885 Mar.

(1895 July 3.
1890 July 2.

pe ee Las

1897 June 2.
1895 Mar. 6

1880 Noy.
1895 April 3.

Go

1860 Mar. 7.

1900 Aug. 1

1901 Sept. 25.

_1887 May 4
1901 June 5.
1896 Jan. 8.
1900 May 2.
1904 Aug. 3.

1898 Sept. 30.
1896 Jan: 8,
1901 Jan. 2

N.R.
N.R. |

R.

.| Barker, R. A., M.D.

.| Barnes, Herbert Charles, 1.¢.s.

.| Beatson-Bell,

. Blanford, William Thomas,

.| Bonham- Gias Norman, 1.¢.s.

| Brown, Major E. Harold, u.d., 1.M.s.

. | Bural, Nobin Chand, Saleen:

_Badshah, K. J., B.A., 1.0.8. Hurope.
Bailey, The Revd. Thomas Grahame, M.A., B.D.,
Europe.

. Baillie, D. C., 1.0.8, Ghazdpur. }
.| Bain, Lieut.-Col. D. S. E., 1u.s. Mercara.
| Baker, Edward Charles Stuart. Dibrugarh.

Baker, The ‘Hon. Mr" Hh. IN cisaeqeeee.
| . Calcutta. pit uy
.| Banerji, Satish Chandra, m.a. Allahabad.

Europe.
Barman, Damudar Das. Calcutta.

. Barman, H.H. The Maharaja Radha Kishor

Dev. Tipperah.

Shillong.
| Bartlett, H. W. J. Calcutta.

Basu, Nagendra Natha. Calcutta.

| Bathgate, J. Calcutta.

Nicholas

Dodd, BAL. Ler

Hurope.

.| Beveridge, Henry, 1.0.8. (retired). Hurope.
.| Bingley, Major A. H., 1.4.

Simla,
Europe.
LL.D.,
F.R.S. Hurope.

Calcutta.

Black, Robert Greenhill.
A.B.S.M.,
| ¥.G.S., F.B.G.S8., F.Z.8.,
| Bloch, Theodor, PH.D.

. Bodding, The Revd. P.O. Rampore Haut.

Bolton, "The Hon. Mr. Charles bi C.8.1.,
1.¢.8. Hurope. b:
“Saran.
Bonnerjee, Womes Chunder, Barrister-at-Law,
|. Middle Temple. Europe.
Bose, Annada Prasad, M.a. Jalpacgurt.
| Bose, Jagadis Chandra, M.A., D.S¢.;
Bengal Education Service. Calcutta.
Bose, Pramatha Nath, B.sc., ¥.4.8. Calcutta.

C,1.E.,

., Bourdillon, The Hon. Sir James Austin, K.¢.1.5.,

C.8.1., 1.0.8. Mysore.

.| Brandis, Sir Dietrich, «.C.1.8., PH,D., F..S., F.R.S.

Hurope.

Calcutta.

Calcutta.
Calcutta.

Buchanan, Major W. J., 1.™. s.

Burkill, T, A atcas
Burn, ‘Richard, 1.c.s. Allahabad.
Butcher, Flora, u.p. Palwal.

| Bythell, Major, W. J., R.n. Calcutta.

Calcutta.

R. | Gable, Ernest. Calcutta.

R
ish

Caddy, Dr. Arnold. Calcutta.
; Campbell, Duncan. LHurope.

Date of Election,

1901 Mar. 6.
1895 July 3.

1890 June 4.

1901 June 5.
1904 July 6.
1902 Aug. 27.
1893 Sept. 28.

1902 April 2.

1880 Aug. 26.
1903 Aug. 26.

1898 June 1.
1876 Mar. 1.
1901 June 5.
1887 Aug. 25.

1895 July 3.

1873 Dec. 3.
1901 Aug. 28.
1903 Feb. 4.
1865 June 7.

1879 April 7.

1900 July 4.
1896 Mar. 4.

1904 July 6
1904 Sept.
1903 June 3
1895 Sept.

1902 Mar. 5.
1895 Dec.. 4.
1899 Aug. :

1900 May 2
1901 June 5
1902 Feb. 5.
1898 Jan. 6.
1902 July 2.
1886 June 2

1902 Jan. 8. |
1892 Sept. 22.)

N.R.

FM.

R.

FM.
FM.

R.
R.

.| Charles, A. P., 1.¢.s.

INGR:
.| Dames, Mansel Longworth, 1.¢.s.

.| Das, Govinda.
.| Das, Rai Bahadur Bhawan, M.A.

.| Das, Syam Sunder, B.A.

Campbell, W. H. M., 1.c.s. Naini Tal.
Carlyle, The Hon. Mr. Robert Warrand, ¢.1.£.,
1.0.8. Calcutta.
Chakravarti, Man Mohan, M.A., B.L.
Magistrate. Chinsurah.
Chapman, H. P., 1.c.s. Hwrope.
Agra.
Chaudhuri, A., Barrister-at-Law.
Chaudhuri, Banawari Lala, B.sc., Hdin.
cutta.
Chunder,
Calcutta.
Clerk, General Malcolm G. Hurope.
Copleston, The Right Revd. Dr. Reginald
Stephen, p.p. Lord Bishop of Calcutta.
Cordier, Dr. Palmyr. Hwrope.
Crawford, James, B.A., 1.0.8. Hurope.
Crawford, Major D. G., 1.m.s. Chinsurah.
Criper, William Risdon, F.¢.S., F.1.C., A.R.S.M.
Calcutta.
Cumming, John Ghest, 1.¢.s.

Deputy

Calcutta.
Cal-
Chunder,

Raj Attorney-at-Law.

Patna.

Hurope.
Benares.

Hoshiarpur.
Das, Raja Jay Krishna, Bahadur, ¢.s.1. Mora-
dabad.

.| Das, Ram Saran, m.A., Secy., Oudh Commer-

cial Bank, Limited. Fyzabad, Oudh.
Benares.
Das-Gupta, Jogendra Nath, B.A., Barrister-at-

Law Calcutta.

.| De, Brajendra Nath, m.A., 1.0.8. Malda.
DeCourcy, W. B. Cachar.
De, Hari Nath, 3.4. (Cantab). Dacca.

.| De, Kiran Chandra, B.4., 1.¢.8. Faridpur.

Deb, Raja Binoy Krishna, Bahadur. Calcutta.
Delmerick, Charles Swift. Bareilly.
Dey, Raj Kumar Satchidanand, Bahadur.

Deogarh, Sambalpur.
Dev, Raja Satindra, Rai Mahesaya. Bansberia.
Dey, Nundolal. Bankipore.
Dixon, F. P. 1.¢.8. Chittagong.
Dods, W. K. Calcutta.
Doxey, F. Calcutta.

Doyle, Patrick, ¢.H., F.R.A.S., F.R.S.E., F.G.S.
Calcutta.
Drummond, J. R., 1.0.8. Calcutta.

Drury, Major Francis James, M.B.,1.M.9. Cal-
cull. inne GRRE.) atl.

yi

Date Of Election. 3

1889 Jan. 2.|N.R.

1879 Feb. 5. | F.M.
1892 Jan. 6.|N.R.

1877 Aug. 30.) R.
1900 April 4.) A.

1900 July 4.| R.

1901 June 5. | N.R.

1903 Oct. 28.) R.

1903 May 6. | N.R.

1900 Mar. 7.

1900 Aug. 29.
1901 Mar. 6.
1904 Aug. 3.
1894 Dec. 5.
1898 Sept. 30

Hab pb

1902 April 2.
1903 Mar. 4.

1893 Jan. 11. |"
1899 Aug. 30.

ies es

1902 June 4. | N.R.
1889 Jan. 2.| R.
1902 Feb. 5.] R.
1889 Mar. 6.| R.
1869 Feb. 3.|N.R
1897 Dec. 6. ‘
1861 Feb. 5. | N.S.
1397 Joly (2 \\epAe
1876 Nov. 15.| A.
1900 Dee. 5. |L.M.
1901 April 3. | N.R.

1898 June 1. |N.R.

1898 April 6.| R.
1898 Jan. 5.
1901 Mar. 6.

1892 Jan, 6. |NB.

N.R.

| Guha, Abhaya Sankara.

.| Gurdon, Major P. R. T., La.
N.R.

Dudgeon, Gerald Cecil, Holta Tea. Co., Ld.
Palampur. :

Duthie, J. F., B.A., F.u.s. Europe.

Dutt, Gerindra Nath. Hutwa.

Dutt, Kedar Nath. Calcutta.

Dyson, Major Herbert Jekyl, F.R.¢.s., LMS.
Europe.

Earle, The Hon. Mr. A., 1.c.s. Caleutta.

Ede, Francis Joseph, ¢.E., A.M.I.C.E., F.G.S.
Silchar, Cachar.

Edelston, T. D. Calcutta.

Edwards, Walter Noel. Sootea, Assam.

Fanshawe, Sir Arthur Upton, ¢.8.1., K.C.L.E.,
1.0.8. Calcutta.

Fanshawe, The Hon. Mr. H. C., ¢.s.1., 1.¢.s,
Europe.

Fergusson, J.C. Hurope.

Fermor, l. Leigh. Calcutta.

Finn, Frank, B.a., F.z.8. Hurope.

Firminger, The Revd. Walter K., m.a. Cal-
- cutta.
Fuller, The Hon’ble Mr. J. B.,1.c.s. Shallong.

Gage, Captain Andrew Thomas, M.A., M.B., B.SC.,
F.L.S., 1.M.s. Sebpur.

Gait, Edward Albert, 1.c.s. Hurope.

Garth, Dr. H. C. Calcutta.

Ghaznayi, A. A. Mymensing.
Ghose, Jogendra Chandra, u.A., B.L. Calcutta.
Ghosh, Girish Chunder, Calcutta.

Ghosha, Bhupendra Sri, B.A., B.L. Calcutta.
Ghosha, Pratapa Chandra, B.A. Vindyachal.
Godfrey, Captain Stuart, 1.4. Hurope.

Godwin-Austen, Lieut.-Colonel H. H., rr.s., —
F.Z.8., F.R.G.8. Hwrope.

Grant, Captain J. W.,1.M.s. Hurope.

Grierson, George Abraham, PH.D., C.1.H., I.C.S.
Hurope.

Grieve, J. W. A. Kalimpong.

Goalpara.

Gupta, Bepin Behari. Cuttack.

Gupta, Krishna Govinda, 1.¢.s., Barrister-at-

Law. Calcutta. :

Gauhatz.

Habibur Rahman Khan, Maulavie. Bhikam- —

Spur. P :
Haig, Major Wolseley, ia. Berar.

* Vil

1904 Sept. 28.| R.

1899 April 5.
1884 Mar. 5.

1897 Feb. 3.

1904 June
1904 Dee.

1
7.
1892 Aug. 3.
5

1872 Dec.
1891 July

1898 Feb.
1884 Mar.
1901 Dec.
‘1873 Jan.
1890 Dec.

1866 Mar. 7.
1903 Sept. 23.

1904 Jan. 6.

1899 April 5.
1882 Mar. 1.
1867 Dec. 4.

1904 May 4.
1896 Aug. 27.
1896 July 1.

1891 Feb. 4.

1899 Aug. 30.
1902 Feb. 5.
1904 Jan. 6.
1902 Jan. 8. |,
1887 May 4. |
1889 Mar. 6.

1900 Sep. 19.

1902 July 2.
1889 Nov. 6.
1904 July 6.
1903 July 1.
1900 May. 2.
1902 Oct. 29.
1889 Feb. 6.

—_

.| Hewett, J. F., 1.0.8. (wetired).

.| Hooper, The Hon. Mr. John, B.A., 1.¢.s.

.| Houstoun, G. L., F.G.s.,
.| Hyde, The Revd. Henry Barry, m.a. Madras.

a leseniox. IXGreN oF 1C.S:

.| Kupper, Raja Lala Bunbehari.
.| Lal, Dr. Mannu.

.| Lal, Lala Shyam. Allahabad.
.| Lal, Panna, M.A., B.SC.

.| Leake, H. M.

Hallward, N. L. Calcutta.

Hare, Major EH. C., 1.u.s. Europe.

Hassan Ali Qadr, Sir Sayid, Nawab Bahadur,
K.C.LE. Murshedabad.

Hayden, H. H., B.a., B.E., F.G.S., Geological
Survey of India. Calcutta.

Huvrope.

Hill, E. G. Allahabad.

Hill, Samuel Charles, B.a., B.sc. Hwrope.

Hoernle, Augustus Frederick Rudolf, Pu.p.,
C.LE. Hurope.

Holland, Thomas Henry, A.R.C.S., F.G.S., F.R.S.,
Director, Geological Survey of India. Calcutta.

Hooper, David, ¥.c.s. Calcutta. [ bad.

Allaha-

Hossack, Dr. W. C. Calcutta.

Hurope.

.| Irvine, William, t.c.s. (vetired). Hurope.
.| Ito, Professor C. Bombay.
Jackson, V. H., m.a. Scbpur.
Kempthorne, H. HE. Calcutta.
Kennedy, Pringle, m.a. Mozufferpore.

King, Sir George, M.B., K.C.L.E., LL.D., F.L.S.,
F.R.S., M.S. (retired). Hurope.

Banda.

Konstam, Edwin Max. Hurope.

Kiichler, George William, m.a., Bengal Educa-
tion Service. Calcutta.

Burdwan.

Banda.

Damoh.

Lall, Parmeshwara. Hurope.

.| Lanman, Charles R. Hwurope.

La Touche, Thomas Henry Digges, B.a., Geolo-
gical Survey of India. Calcutta.

Law, The Hon. Sir Hdward F. G., k.c¢.M.G.,
C.8.1. Calcutta:

Saharanpur.

Lee, W. A., F.R.M.8.° Hurope.

Lees, R. O. Calcutta.

.| Lefroy, Harold Maxwell. Mozufferpur.
Leistikow, F. R. Hurope.
Lewes, A.H. Calcutta. | Lurope.

Little, Charles, u.a., Bengal Education Service

Date of Election,

1904 Oct. 31.
1902 July 2.
1869 July 7.

1870 April 7.

1896 Mar. 4.
1902 July 2.
1901 Aug. 7.

1893 Jan. 11.

1891 Feb. 4.

1902 April 2.
1893 Aug. 31.
1895 Aug. 29.

1898 Nov. 2.
1889 Jan. 2.
1901 June 5.
1893 Mar. 1.

1902 May. 7.
1903 Aug. 5.
1892 April 6.
1901 Aug. 28.
1899 Feb. 1.

1899 Mar. 1.
1895 July. 3.
1886 Mar. 3.

1900 Mar. 7.
1900 Jan. 19.
1884 Noy. 5.

1884 Sep. 3.
1904 April 6.
1898 April 6.
1874 May. 6.
1896 July. 1.

1897 Jan. 6.

1901 Aug. 28.

1897 Nov. 3.

1901 Aug. 7. |

1895 July 3.
1898 May 4.
1902 July 2.

.| Maclagan, H. D., M.a., 1.¢.8.

.| Maddox, Captain R. H., 1.m.s.
.| Mahatha, Purmeshwar Narain.

.| Marshall, J. H.

.| Maynard, Major F. P., 1.M.s.

| Molony, H., 1.¢.s.

Longe, Col. F. B., R.2.
Luke, James. Calcutta.

Calcutta.

.| Lyall, Sir Charles James, M.A., K.C,S.1., C.LE.,

LL.D., 1.0.8. (vetired). Hurope.

.| Lyman, B. Smith. Hurope.

MacBlaine, Frederick, 1.c.s. Nadia.

Macdonald, Dr. William Roy. LHurope.

Macfarlane, John, Librarian, Imperial Library.
Calcutta.

Calcutta.

Macpherson, Duncan James, M.A., C.LE., 1.C.8,

~ Bhaqulpur.

Ranchi.
Mozufferpore.

Mahmud Gilani, Shamas-ul-Ulama Shaikh.
Calcutta. —

Maitra, Akshaya Kumar, B.A., B.L.’ Rajshahe.

Maliah, Kumar Ramessur. Howrah.

Mann, H. H., B.sc. Calcutta.

Marriott, Charles Richardson, 1.¢.s.

Ur.

Bhaqul-—

Simla.
Masoom, Dr. Meerza Mohammad. Calcutta.
Darjeeling.

McLeod, Norman. Calcutta.
McMahon, Major A. H., OSI, CLE, LA.
Quetta.
.| McMinn, C. W., B.A., 1.¢.8. (vetired). Comuella.
.| Melitus, Paul Gregory, 0.1.8., 1.0.8. Gauhati.
.| Metha, Rustomjee Dhunjeebhoy, ¢.1.£. Cal-
cutta.
Meyer, William Stevenson, 1.¢.s. Calcutta.

Michie, Charles. Calcutta.

Middlemiss, C..8., B.A. Geological Survey of
India. Calcutta.

Miles, William Harry. Calcutta.

Miller, J. O., 1.c.s.° Calcutta. .

Milne, Captain C. J., rms. Purulia.

Minchin, F. J. V. Europe.

Misra, Rai Lakshmi Sanker, Bahadur.
Benares.

Misra, Tulsi Ram. Barezlly.

Mitra, Kumar Narendra Nath. Calcutta.
Mitra, The Hon’ble Mr. Justice Saroda Charan,
M.A., BL. Calcutta.
Ghazipur.
Monohan, Francis John, 1.¢.s.
Mookerjee, R. N. Calcutta.
Morshead, L. F., 1.¢.s. Hurope.

Shillong.

1x

Date of Hlection. == :

1894 June 6.

1904 Jan. 6.
1902 April 2.
1894 Aug. 30.
1900 May 2.
1899 Sept.29.
1886 May 5.

1892 Dec. 7.
1901 April 3.

1901 June 5.

1885 June 3.
1904 Dec. 7.

1901 Mar. 6.
1900 Dec. 5.
1889 Aug. 29.

1892 Oct. 27.

1885 Feb. 4.

1899 Jan. 7.
1900 Dee. _5.
1900 Aug. 29.
1880 Dec. 1.
1887 July 6.

1901 Jan. 2.
1880 Aug. “4.

1901 Aug.28.
1904 Aug. 3.
1880 Jan. 7.

1901 June 5.
1899 Aug. 2.

1902 Aug. 6.
1873 Aug. 6.
1888 June 6.
1881 Aug. 25.
1877 Aug. 1.

N.R.

ce 5 GRR PPRREE

R.| Panton, EH. B. H.,
.| Parasnis, D.B.

N.R.

.| Mullick, Ramani Mohan.

.| Nevill, H. R.,

.| Nimmo, John Duncan.

.| O'Connor, Captain, W. F., B.A.

Muhammad Shibli Nomani, Shams-ul-Ulama
Maulavie, Professor of Arabic in the Muham-
madan Oriental College. <Aligarh.

Mukerjee, Harendra Krishna, m.a. Calcutta.

Mukerjee, Jaladhi Chunder. Calcutta.

Mukerjee, Sib Narayan. Ulttarpara.

Mukerji, P. B., B.sc. Calcutta.

Mukharji, Jotindra Nath, B.a. Calcutta.

Mukhopadhyaya, The Hon’ble Mr. Justice Asu-

tosh, M.A., D.L., F.R.A.S., F.R.S.E. Calcutta.

Mukhopadhyaya, Panchanana. Calcutta.

Mullick, Pramatha Nath. Calcutta.

Meherpur.

.| Naemwoollah, Maulavie, Deputy Magistrate.

Bijnor.

Nathan, R., 1.c.s. Calcutta.
1.c.s. Naini Tal.
Nicoll, John. Calcutta.

Calcutta.
Norvill, Dr. Frederic H. Huwrope.
Nyayaratna, Mahamahopadhyaya
Chandra, ¢.1.n. Benares.

Mahesa

O’Brien, P; H.,/1.¢:s:

Hurope.

Gyantse.

| O’Dwyer, Michael Francis, B.a., 1.0.8. Hwrope.
Oldham, R. D., a.z.8.M., F.G.8.. Hurope.
Oung, Moung Hla. Calcutta.

Pande, Pandit Ramavatar, B.A., 1.6.8. Hardot.

.| Pandia, Pandit Mohanlall Vishnulall, r.r.s.,

Muttra.

ACIS:
Satara.
The Hon’ble Mr. Justice Frederick
1.¢c.8. Calcutta.

Calcutta.

Bogra.

Pargiter,
Eden, B.A.,
Parsons, W.

.| Peake, C. W., u.a., Bengal Education Service.

Jalpaiqure.

Peal; H. W., F.5.8. Calcutta.

Pedler, The Hon. Mr. Alexander, ¢.1.1.,
F.R.S., Director of Public Instruction, Bengal.
Calcutta.

.| Pennell, Aubray Percival, 8.a., Barrister-at-

Law. angoon.
Percival, Hugh Melvile, m.a., Bengal Kducation
Service. Calcutta.
Peters, Lieut.-Colonel C. T.,
Bombay.

M.B., IMLS,

Date of Election.

1889 Nov. 6.
1904 June 1.
1904 Mar. 4.
1889 Mar. 6.

1889 Mar. 6.

1880 April 7.
1895 Aug. 29.

1901 June 5.
1900 April 4.
1898 Aug. 3.
1904 Mar. 4.
1890 Mar. 59.

1887 May 4.
1884 Mar. 5.
1903 Mar. 4.
1900 April 4.

1900 Aug. 29.
1901 Dec. 4.
1889 June 5.
1903 July 1.

1896 Aug. 27.
1899 June 7.
1898 Mar. 2.

1897 Nov. 3.

1902 Feb. 5.
1900 Dec. 5.
1893 Jan. 11.
1902 Feb. 5.
1900 Dee. 5.
1901 Aug. 29.
1885 April 1.
1897 Dec. 1.
1904 Jan. 6.

1900 Mar. 7.
1885 Feb. 4.

1902 Dec. 3.

NR.

.| Prasad, Hanuman, Raes

.| Sen, Birendra Chandra, I.¢.s.

Phillott, Major D. C., 1.4. Nowshera.

Pilgrim, G. Elleock. Calcutta.

Pim, Arthur W., 1.¢.s. Jhansz.

Prain, Lieut.-Col. David, M.A.,M.B., LL.D., I.M.S.,
Superintendent, Royal Botanic Garden,
Hurope.

and Zemindar.

Chunar.

.| Rai, Bipina Chandra, B.t. Mymensingh.

Rai Chaudhery, Jatindra Nath, ma, B.L.
Barnagar.

Rai, Lala Lajpat. Lahore.

Raleigh, The Hon. Mr. T. Hurope.

Ram, Sita, M.A. Moradabad.

Rapson, H. J. Hurope.

Ray, Prafulla Chandra, p.sc., Bengal Hduca-
tion Service. Hurope.

Ray, Prasanna Kumar, p.sc. (Lond. and
Hdin.), Bengal Education Service. Dacca.
Risley, Herbert Hope, B.A., ©.1.H., 1.0.8.
Calcutta.

.| Rogers, Charles Gilbert, F..s., F.c.H., Indian

Forest Department. Port Blair.

Rogers, Captain Leonard, M.D., B.SC., M.R.C.P.,
F.R.C.S., M.S. Calcutta.

Rose, H. A., 1.c.8. Lahore.

Ross, E. Denison, PH.D. Calcutta.

Roy, Maharaja Girjanath. Dinagepur.

Roy, Maharaja Jagadindra Nath, Bahadur.
Calcutta.

Samman, Herbert Frederick, I.c.s. Jessore.
Sarkar, Chandra Kumar. Kowkanzk.

Sarkar, Jadu Nath. Bankipore.

Saunders, C. Calcutta.

Schulten, Dr. C. Calcutta.
Schwaiger, Imre George. Delhi. ;
Scindia, His Highness the Maharaja. Gwalior.
Sen, A. C., 1.¢.8. Bankura.

Dinajpur.

Sen, Upendranath. Calcutta.

Sen, Yadu Nath. Calcutta.

Seth, Mesrovb,J. Calcutta.

| Sharman, Pandit Gulab Shankar Dev, Ff.7.s.

Puchbadra.
Shastree, Pandit Yogesha Chandra. Calcutta.
Shastri, Mahamahopadhaya Haraprasad, M.A.
Calcutta.
Shastri, Harnarain. Delhi.

1902 Mar. 5.
1903 April 1.
1900 May 2.
1899 May 3.
1903 Aug. 26.
1904 April 6.
1904 June 1.

1893 Mar. 1.
1902 Sep. 24.
1895 Aug. 29.
1892-Mar. 2.
~ 1889 Aug. 29.
1892 Aug. 3.
1889 Nov.
1894 Feb.
1901 Aug.
1904 Mar.
.1894 July

1897 Jan.
1872 Aug.

CCR BE lr neh

1901 Dec. 4.

1904 Sept. 28.

1898 April 6.
1901 Mar. 6.

1891 Aug. 27.

1895 July 5.
1904 June 1.

- 1899 Aug. 30.
1900 Aug. 29.

1904 July 6.
1904 Jan. 6.

1868 June 3.

1898 April 6.
1904 July 6.

1893 Aug. 31.

1878 June 5.
1904 May 4.

Date Of Hlection.

.| Singh, H.H. The

—

.| Thanawala, Framjee Jamasjee.

Shastri, Rajendra Chandra, m.a. Calcutta.
Shaun, Montague Churchill. Europe.
Shrager, Adolphe. Calcutta.
Silberrad, Chas. A., L.c.s. Banda.
Simpson, J. Hope, i.c.s. Allahabad.
Simpson, Maurice George, M.1.H.u. Calcutta.
Simpson, Robert Rowell, B.sc.
Calcutta.
Singh, Maharaja Kumara Sirdar Bharat,
10.8. Ghazipur.
Singh, Kumar Birendra Chandra. Calcutta.
Singh, Lachmi Narayan, M.A., B.L. Calcutta.

.| Singh, The Hon. Raja Ooday Pratab. Binga.

Singh, H.H. The Maharaja Pr abhu Narain,
Bahadue Benares.

Singhy Eel elhe Eton: Maharaja Pratap
Narain. <Ajodhya, Oudh.

Hon. Maharaja Ramesh-
wara, Bahadur. Darbhanga.

Singh, H.H. Raja Vishwa Nath, Bahadur,
Chief of Chhatarpur.

Singha, Chandra Narayan.

Singha Kumar Kamlananda. Srinagar.

Sinha, Kunwar Kushal Pal, wm.a.
P.O., Agra District.

Sircar, Amrita Lal, F.c.s.

Skrefsrud, The
Rampore Haut.

Spooner, D. Brainerd. Hurope.

Stapleton, H.H. Calcutta.

Stark, Herbert A., B.A. Cuttack.

Calcutta.
Narkz

Calcutta.

Revd. Laurentius Olayi.

: Stebbing, E.P. Dehra Dun.
.| Stein, M

_A., PH.D. Peshawar.

Steinberg, Alfred Frederick, 1.c.s. Hurope.
Stephen, Hon’ble Mr. Justice, H.L. Calcutta.
Stephen, St. John, B.a., 1.8. Barrister-at-

Law. Calcutta.
Stephenson, Captain John, .m.s. Hwrope.
Streatfeild, C. A. C., 1.0.8. Naini Tal.
Stuart, Louis, 1.¢.8. Orad.

Tagore, The Hon. Maharaja Sir Jotendra
Mohun, Bahadur, k.c.s.1. Calcutta.

Tagore, Maharaja Prodyat Coomar. Calcutta.
.| Talbot, Walter Stanley, 10.8. Srinagar,
Kashmir. ;
.| Tate, G. P. Sedstan.

.| Temple, Colonel Sir Richard Carnac, Bart.,

O.LE., 1.4. Port Blair.

Bombay.

Date oigt Blection.

1875 June 2.|N.R.| Thibaut, Dr. G., Muir Central College.
Allahabad. ‘i
1898 Nov. 2.| R. | Thornton, Edward, F.n.1.8.4. Calcutta.
1847 June 2.|U.M.| Thuillier, Lieut.-Genl. Sir Henry Hdward
Landor, KT., 0.8.1., F.R.S., R.A. Huwrope.
1891 Aug. 27.| F.M TMnmastorn Bdgar oy; ope.
1904 June 1.| N.R.| Tipper, George Howlett, r.c.s. Calcutta.
1899 Mar. 1.| R. | Tocher, A. Calcutta. ‘
1861 June 5.| L.M. Tremlett, James Dyer, M.A., 1.0.8. (retired).
Hurope.
1893 May 3.) N.R. Vanja, Raja Ram Chandra. Mayurbhanga,
District Balasore.
1898 Feb. 2.| R. | Vasu, Amrita Lal. Calcutta.
1900 Aug. 29.| A. | Vaugham, Major J. C., 1.m.s.,° Hurope.
1890 Feb. 5.|N.R.| Venis, Arthur, m.a., Principal, Sanskrit
College. Benares. ;
1902 May 7.| R.| Vidyabhushan, Jogendra Nath Sen.
Calcutta.
1902 June 4.| R. | Vidyabhushan, Pandit Satis Chandra, M.A.
Calcutta.
1901 Mar. 6.|N.R.| Vogel, J. Ph., pu.p. Lahore.
1894 Sept. 27.) L.M.| Vost, Major William, 1.m.s. Muttra.
-1902 Oct. 29.) R. | Vredenburg, H. Calcutta.
1901 Aug. 7.| A. | Walker, Dr. T. L. Hurope.
1900 Jan. 19.| R. | Wallace, David Robb. Calcutta.
1901 June 5.| R. | Walsh, HE. H., 1.c.s. Calcutta.
1889 Nov. 6.| R. | Walsh, Lieut-Col. John Henry Tull, 1s.
Calcutta.
1900 April 4. |N.R. Walton, Captain Herbert James, M.8., F.R.C.8.,
I.M.8. Bombay.
1865 May 3.| A. | Waterhouse, Major-General James: Durope.
1874 July 1. | A. | Watt, Sir George, Kt., o.1.E. Hurope.
1902 April 2. | A. | Wheeler, H., 1.¢.s. Hurope.
1904 Mar. 4. | R. | Wood, William Henry Arden, M.A., #.C.8.
F.R.G.8S. Calcutta.
1900 Dec. 5.| A. | Woodman, H. C., 1.¢.8. Hwrope.
1894 Sept. 27.| R. | Woodroffe, The Hon Mr. Justice John
George, Barrister-at-Law. Calcutta.
1894 Aug. 30.)N.R.| Wright, Henry Nelson, B.A., 1.0.8. Allahabad.
1898 July 6.1 R. +} Wyness, James, ¢.n.

Calcutta.

xiii

SPECIAL HONORARY CENTENARY MEMBERS.

Date of Election.

1884 Jan. 15.
1884 Jan. 15.
1884 Jan, 15.
1884 Jan. 15.

Date of Election,

1848 Feb.

OS

1879 June 4.
1879 June. 4.
1879 June 4.
1881 Dec.. 7.
1883 Feb. 7.
1883 Feb. 7.
1894 Mar. 7.
1894 Mar. 7.
1895 June 5.
1895 June 5.
. 1895 June 5.
1896 Feb. 5.
1896 Feb. 5:
1896 Feb. 5.
1896 Feb. 5.
1899 Feb. 1.
1899 Dec. 6.
1899 Dec. 6.

Dr. Ernst Heckel, Professor in the University of
Jena.

Charles Meldrum, Esq., 0.M.G., M.A. LL.D., F.B.A.S.,
B.R.S. > Mauretius.

_ Professor A. H. Sayce, Professor of Comp. Philology.

Oxford.
Professor Emile Senart, Member of the Institute of
France. Paris.

HONORARY MEMBERS.

Sir Joseph Dalton Hooker, G.¢.8.1., 0.B., M.D., D.C.L.,

LL.D., F.L.S., F.G.8., F.B.G.8., F.R.S. Berkshire.
Dr.Albert Gtnther, M.a., M.D., PH.D., F.Z.9., E.R.S.
Surrey.
Dr. Jules Janssen. Paris.

Professor P. Regnaud. Lyons.

Lord Kelvin, 6.¢.V.0., D.G.L., LL.D., F.R.S.E., F.R.S.
gow.

William Thomas Blanford, “Hsq., LL.D., A.R.S.M., F.G.8.,
F.R.G.S., F.Z.8., F.R.S. London.

Alfred Russell Wallace, Hsq., LL.D., D.C.L., F.1.S.,
F.Z.S., F.R.8. Dorset.

Mahamahapadhyaya Chandra Kanta Tarkalankara.
Calcutta. :

Professor Theodor Noeldeke. Strassburg.

Lord Rayleigh, M.A., D.C.L., D.SC., LL.D., PH.D., F.R.A.S.,
F.R.S. Witham, Hssex.

Lt.-Genl. Sir Richard Strachey, R.5., G.¢.9.1., LL.D.,
F.R.G.S., F.G.S., F.L.8., F.B.S. London.

Charles H. Tawney, Hsq., m.A., ¢.1.. London.

Lord Lister, F.R.0.8., D.C.L., M.D., LL.D., D.8¢., F.R.S. .
London. :

Sir Michael Foster, «.¢.B., M.A.,
D.SC., F.L.S., F.R.S. Cambridge.

Professor I’. Kielhorn, PH.D., 0.1.u. Gottingen.

Professor Charles Rockwell Lanman. Massachusetts,
UiSeA:

Dr. Augustus Frederick Rudolf Hoernle, px.p., 0.1.0.
Oxford.

Professor Hdwin Ray Lankester, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S.
London.

Sir George King, X.C.1.2., M.B., LL.D, ¥.L.8., F.B.S,
London.

Glas-

MaDe Di Cannel LT Dy

Date of Election.

1899 Dec. 6.
1899 Dec.

1901 Mar.
1902 Nov.
1904 Mar.
1904 Mar.

DOPOD

1899 April 5.
1899 April 5.
1899 Nov. 1.
1902 June 4.

XIV

Professor Edward Burnett Tylor, D.¢.L., LL.D., F.R.S.
Oxford. :

Professor Edward Suess, p.H.D., For. Mem. Rs.
Vienna.

Professor J. W. Judd, ¢.B., LL.D., F.R.S. London.

Monsieur R. Zeiller. Parvs.

Professor Heinrich Kern. Lezden.

Professor Ramkrishna Gopal Bhandarkar, ¢,1.2.
Poona.

1904 Mar. 2. | Professor M. J. DeGoeje. Lezden.
1904 Mar. 2. | Professor Ignaz Goldziher, Budapest.
1904 Mar. 2. | Sir Charles Lyall, m.a., x.c.s.1. London.
1904 Mar. 2. | Sir William Ramsay, pPu.D., (Tiib.) uu. D., sc.p. (Dubl.)
: TGS, Woe
1904 July 2.| Dr. George Abraham Grierson, PH.D., C.1.E., I.C.8.
- London.
ASSOCIATE MEMBERS.
‘Date Gh Nlecuion. y | accs OSes ha Sao ee ee
1874 April 1. | The Revd. EH. Lafont, ¢.1.6., 8.5. Calcutta.
1875 Dec. 1.| The Revd. J. D. Bate, m.p.a.s. Kent.
1875 Dec. 1.| Maulavie Abdul Hai. Calcutta.
1882 June 7. | Herbert, Giles, Hsq. Hurope.
1884 Aug. 6.) F. Moore, Esq., F.u.§. Surrey.
1885 Dec. 2.| Dr. A. Fuhrer, Hurope.
1886 Dec. 1. | Rai Bahadur Sarat Chandra Das, ¢.1.5. Calcutta.
1892 April 6. | Pandit Satya Vrata Samasrami. Calcutta.
1892 Dec. 7.| Professor P. J. Brithl. Szbpur.

Rai Bahadur Ram Brahma Sanyal. Calcutta.
Pandit Visnu Prasad Raj Bhandari. Nepal.
The Revd. HE. Francotte, 8.3. Calcutta.

The Revd. A. H. Francke. Leh.

LIST OF MEMBERS WHO HAVE BEEN ABSENT FROM
INDIA THREE YEARS AND UPWARDS.*

* Rule 40.—After the lapse of three years from the date of a
member leaving India, if no intimation of his wishes shall in the
interval have been received by the Society, his name shall be re-
moved from the List of Members.

The following members will be removed from the next Mem-
ber List of the Society under the operation of the above Rule:—
Edwin Max Konstam, Esq.
Michael Francis O’Dwyer, Hsq., B.A., 1.¢.8.
Alfred Frederick Steinberg, Esq, 1.¢,8,

XV
LOSS OF MEMBERS DURING 1904.

By RETIREMENT.

T. W. Arnold, Esq.

The Hon. Dr. Gurudas Banerjee, D.L.

Sir John Eliot, F.r.s.

John Champion Faunthorpe, Esq., 1.¢.s.

EK. V. Gabriel, Esq., 1.¢.s.

A. Garrett, Hsq., 1.¢.8.

Babu Roormall Goenka.

The Hon. Mr. W. C. Macpherson, ¢.8.1., 1.8.C,

By Drats.

Ordinary Members.
Dr. U. C. Mukerjee.
A. T. Pringle, Esq.
Harjeebhoy Manickjee Rustomjee, Esq., ¢.1.E.
Dr. Mahendratal Sirear, M.D., ¢.1.E., D.L.
Dr. Charles Robert Wilson, M.A., D. LITT,

Honorary Member.
Dr. Otto von Bohitlingk.

Corresponding Member.
Dr. Emil Schlagintweit.

By REMOVAL.
; Under Rule 9.
P. B. Bramley, Esq.

Babu Gopal Chandra Chatterjee.
Mahammad Rafiq, Esq., Barrister-at-Law.

Under Rule 38.

Babu Manmatha Nath Chakravarti.
Captain W. A. Cuppage, I.A.

Rai Narsingh Chunder Dutt, Bahadur.
B. Suryanaran Rao, Hsq., B.A.

Babu Purnendu Narayan Singh.

Lala Shyam Sunder Srivastavya.

Under Rule 40,

Dr. Frank Gerard Clemow, m.p., Hdin.
Sir Alfred W. Croft, M.A., K.C.1.5.
Lieut. M. Ll. Ferrar, 1.a.

A. J, Grant, Hsq., 1.0.8.

Sean
ea ee

[APPENDIX.]

ABSTRACT STATEMENTS

OF

RECEIPTS AND DISBURSEMENTS

“

OF THE
JSIATIC POCIETY OF PENGAL

FOR

THE YEAR 1904,

P<, RV LLL.. -

STATEMENT
1904. Asiatic Society
=
Dr.
To HstTABLISHMENT.
Rs. As. P. Rs. As, P.
Salaries ace 3,460 7 11
Commission . 606 SO} aalieatel:
Pension 112 0 0
— 3,948 3 10
To CoNTINGENCIES.
Stationery 133 14 10
Taxes ae 884 4 O
Postage Ba 566 18 O
Freight ie Bs 128 15 3
Meeting go 105 2 6
Auditor’s fee cf 7 10030520
Insurance fee 312 8 O
Electric Punkhas and Lights ZS ae
Repairs AG 2,686 4 O
Petty repairs Be 28 15 3
Building . . 25 a “id 3)
Miscellaneous - bd, 459 4.9 | a ae
—-— 5,701 11 1
To’ LipRaARyY AND COLLECTIONS.
Books . 2,185 4 5
Binding 599 O O
Catalogue 81-1 -L
Cleaning, &c., of Pietares 1,306 0 0O-
Picture Frame (Freight and other charges) 566 4 9
Furniture 353 5 6
5,040 15 9
% To TEPC OOS area,
Journal, Part I oe. 4861 Se 38
Journal, Part II 1,381 2 0O
Journal, Part III "854 10 O
Proceedings 752 14 6
: — 4,425 8 9
To Printing charges of Circulars, Receipt-forms, &c. 200 2 0
» Personal Account (Writes-off and Miscellaneous) 644 0 O-
To HxTRAORDINARY HXPENDITURE.
Royal Society’s Scientific Catalogue 5,842 0 10
Balance 1,92,989 7 5
ToTaL Rs. 2,18,742 1 8

ost. 7:
of Bengal.

Cr.

Rs. As. P.
By Balance from last Report... abe 000
By CasH RECEIPTS.
Publications sold for cash Ba a 790 6 8
Interest on Investments ee 6,786 8 O
Rent of a Room on the Society’s s round floor 730 0 O
Allowance from Government of Bengal for
the Publication of Anthropological and
Cognate subjects .. éé 2,000 0 0
Allowance from Govt. ‘of Assam for Do. Do. 1,000 0 O
Grant from Government of India for repair-
ing the Society’s building .. 10,000 0 0
Miscellaneous 900 900 So 80 2 0
By HXTRAORDINARY RECEIPTS.
Se pecniptions to Royal Bele: Scientific
Catalogue 000
By PrrsonaL Account.
Admission fees nas Be 5a0 tee 1,088 0 O
Subscriptions bon oe .. 8,704 0 O
Sales on credit 400 500 a 348 8 O
Miscellaneous abc 8 Add 35 ll O
Torat Ks, ee

Asutoxu MUKHOPADHYAY,

Rs. As. P
1,81,826 9 6
21,3887 0 8
5,352 4 6
10,176 3 0
218,742 1 8

Honorary Treasurer,
Asiatic Society of Bengal.

xx

STATEMENT

1904. Oriental Publication Fund in Acct.
Dr.
To CasH HXPENDITURE.

Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P.
Printing charges... i POG lao
Kditing charges O00 a 508 4,971 5 O
Salaries S00 vss ier 1,412 10 2
Freight ‘lee 900 on 102 3 O
Contingencies noe 900 000 114 12 O
Stationery ac oo ser Sl 11 4
Postage ses tee co a OG
Commission on collections 000 n06 le @ &
Binding 000 900 000 2 6 O

SS SSS 17,904 10 5

To Personal Account (Writes-off and Miscellaneous)... 103 2 0

Balance : 5,097 1 3

Toran Rs. 23,104 138 8

STATEMENT

1904. Sanskrit Manuscript Fund in Acct.

Dr.
To CasuH EXPENDITURE.
Rs.
Salaries 200 wie ie 1,182
Travelling charges ... oe ue 786
Postage 00 400 p00 0
Stationery if ae pac 3
Purchase of Manuscripts ae bas 3,724
Binding 56 ais 000 1
Contingencies ae 600 ea 345
Balance
se Tora Rs.

COSDSDSORO

Rs, As. P.

6,043 2 3
3,578 O 5

9,621 2 8

Nom 2:
with the Asiatic Soctety of Bengal. 1904.

Cr.

Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P.

By Balance from last Report... on a 11,241 3-8
By Casu RECEIPTS.
Government Allowance b. ot 9,000 0 0
Publications sold for cash See wes 1,338 13 3
Advances recovered ne ue 88 14 3
_ 10,427 11 6
By PeRsonan ACCOUNT.
Sales on credit 2 we ee hon 1,485 14 6
Tora Rs, 906 23,104 13 8

AsutosH MUKHOPADHYAY,
Honorary Treasurer,
Asiatic Society of Bengal.

No. 38.
with the Asiatic Society of Bengal. 1904.

Cr.

Rs, As. P. Rs. As. P.
By Balance from last Report... 60 oc 6,387 14 8

By CasH RECEIPTS.

Government Allowance 200 ai 3,200 0 O
Publications sold for cash sea tea 1 4 0
‘3,201 4 0O
By Personan Account,
Sales on credit ee eh at, ‘lite 32 0 O
Torau Rs. as 9,621 2 8

AsvutosH MuKHOPADHYAY,
Honorary Treasurer,
Asiatic Society of Bengal.

STATEMENT
1904. Arabic and Persian MSS. Fund tn

Dr.

To CasH EXPENDITURE.

Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P,

Salaries ah coe ae 265 15 3
Contingencies SH ied er ole Ole)
Purchase of Manuscripts see 508 175 15 O
Postage es 000 ae 4 ll @
Travelling charges ... 090 ; 65 189 8 O ;
Se SSE 634 7 3
Balance eat at 6,365 8 9
Toran Rs. - .., 7,000 0 0
STATEMENT
1904. : Personal
Dr.

Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P,
To Balance from last Report... sme bah 7,794 5 2

To CAsH HXPENDITURE.

Advances for purchase of Sanskrit Mann- —

scripts, &e. 00 206 200 300 4,932 8 1
To Asiatic Society .. 505 .. 10,176 3 O 5
», Oriental] Publication Fund... va 1,435 14. 6
», Sanskrit Manuscript Fund ... Sa 32 0 0
———— 11,644 1°6—

Totat Rs, ase 24,3870 14 9

XXill
No. 4.

Acct. with the Asiatic Society of Bengal.
L9OL.

Cr.
By CasH Recrrers,
Rs. As. P
Government Allowance 000 7,000 0 O
Tora Rs, ite 7,000 0 O

AsutosH MUKHOPADHYAY,
Honorary Treasurer,

Asiatic Society of Bengal.

Account. — ; 1904.

Cr.

: Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P.
By Cash Receipts

50 a eer 18,660 11 11
,, Asiatic Society ... ood ues 644 0 0
,, Oriental Publication Fund ..., os 103 2 O
——— WAT 2.0)
: Due to the Due by the
By Balance. Society. Society.
Rs. | As.| P.] Rs. | As.| P.
Members ...|5,194 | 9] 9] 200 9] 5
Subscribers 745) W = Bp SA ws Besa lIN ioe
. Employés ... 20) 00) Of LOOsS 08) 0
Miscellaneous} 93/14] 6 SOL gt @
5,344].1] 3] 381| 0] 6
4,963 0 10
Tora Rs. a: 24,370 14 9

AsutosH MuKHOPADHYAY,
Honorary Treasurer,
Asiatic Society of Bengal,

XXIV

STATEMENT
1904. Invest-
Dire:
Value. Cost.
Rs. As. P. Rs.- As. P.
To Balance from last Report ... ... 1,88,300 O O 1,88,104 2 7
ei@ashee aes ie se 14,000 0 O 18,848 6 10

Toran Rs. .. 2,02,800 0 O 2,01,952 9 5

SS ——

PERMANENT. TEMPORARY.
Funnds. Total Cost.

Value. Cost. - Value. | Cost.

Rs. |AJP.| Rs. lade AIP.) Rs. afp Rs, |A.|P.

E Rs, 0
Asiatic Society ... | 1,48,600] 0} 0) 1,48,143| 6| 8| 48,300] 0} 0) 48,475 | 6! 6| 1,96,618|13] 2
Trust Fund a 1,400} 0] 0) 1,339) 6] 0}... 0/0 |e 0 0} 1,339) 6] 0
150,000 0/ 0} 1,49,482)12/ 8) 48,300] 0) 0) 48,476 6 6] 1,97,958| 3] 2

; STATEMENT
TIO Trust
Dr.

Rs. As. P. -
To Pension Sve Lee ao ape 28 0 0
Balance oa ae aoe Bias Til Ne

——_

Torat Rs. ae 1,483 11 10

XxXV

TNo: iG.
ment. 1904.
Cr.

Value. Cost.
Rs. As, P. Rs. As. P.
By Cash 4,000 0 O 3,994 6 3
., Balance 1,98,300 O O 1,97,958 3 2
3 Torat Rs. ... 2,02,800 0 O 2,01,952 9 5

————————

AsuTtosH MUKHOPADHYAY,
Hony. Treasurer,
Asiatic Society of Bengal.

Noz7.
Fund. 1904.
Cr.

Rs. As. P.

By Balance from. last. Report bf, a0 1,434 11 10
, Interest on Investment Sis aes 49 0 O
Toran Rs. nei Sieve 1,483 11 10

Asutosu MuKHOPADHYAY,
Hony. Treaswrer,
Asiatic Society of Bengal.

XX V1

STATEMENT
1904. | ~ Cash

Dr.

; Rs. As. P.
To Balance from last Report ... ane 4.991 15 ll
RECEIPTS.

Rs. As. P.
To Asiatic Society ... ae so OTD) HB
», Oriental Publication Fund ... . 10,427 11 6 S
», sanskrit Manuscript Fund ... ee 3, 201540
» Arabic and Persian Manuscript Fund ... 7,000 0 O
» Personal Account me . .. 18,660 1) 11
,, Investment 000 er x 3,994 6 3
», Trust Fund ae 49 0 0 70,072 6 10
Toran Rs... 75,064 6 9

| STATEMENT
1907 , Balance

Dr

Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P.
To Cash ... ae jae .. 6,514 9 8 :
3, Investments Be ac ... 1,97,958 3 2
» Personal Account - se .. 4,968 010 2,09,485 18 8
Total Rs. as a 2,09,485 138 8

We have examined the above Balance Sheet and the appended detailed
acco’nts with the books and vouchers presented to us, and certify that it is in
accordance therewith, correctly setting forth the position of the Society as at
the 8lst December, 1904.

- CancurTa, ~ MervuceEns, Kine AND SIMSON,
February 24th, 1905. Auditors.

XxXvVll
No, 8.
Account. 1904.

Cr.
EXPENDITURE.
Rs. As, P. Rs. As. P.
By Asiatic Society ... $00 .. 25,158 10 3
» Oriental Publication Fund ... - 17,904 10 5
» Sanscrit Manuscript Fund ... ms , 6,048 2 3
_,, Arabic and Persian Manuscript Fund ... 6384 7 3
» Personal Account mh .. 4,982 8 1
,, Investment ee Sea .. 138,848 6 10 :
,, Trust Fund 506 a ee is 28 0 0 68,549 13 1
Balance 306 Soh . 6,514 9 8
Tota Rs. ie Pr 75,064 6 °9
AsutosH MUKHOPADHYAY,
Hony. Treasurer,
Asiatic Society of Bengal.
Be: 9,
Sheet. I9OL.
lim
UT, ;
Rs. As. P. Rs. As. P.
By Asiatic Society ... Aon ... 1,92,989 7 5
,, Oriental Publication Fund ... “ 5,097 1 8
» Sanskrit Manuscript Fund .... “8 3,578 O 5
, Arabic and Persian Manuscript Fund ... 6,365 8 9
» Trust Fund a Ee 30 1,455 11 10 2,09,435 13. 8
Tota Rs. n0C 500 2,09,435 13 8

AsutosH MUKHOPADHYAY,
Hony. Treasurer,
Asiatic Society of Bengal.

y leo Ee . 4 ae
OEE ROGST viens! Rae
£5 BRAID oe
De Sate a
Th Garda
( AE PAROLE oo ae
F Alina bss arr
| i Siena | ieee \ :
nl uahhieal i Winssod, Sr sala Bi ks ae
i
*
*
aa he
: *
% el
1 pleeaticot armenia
1 OH eek Oe
"ah Ea ee Soe wetit

oe TY

tae aie %

> eens ates anu cs
mS Sanoe! ne aghiaey

PRINCIPAL PUBLICATIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

Asiatic Researches, Vols. I—XX and Index, 1788—1839.
Proceedings, 1865—1904, (now amalgamated with Journal).
Memoirs, Vol. 1, etc., 1905, ete.

Journal, Vols. 1—73, 1832—1904.

Journal and Proceedings, [N. §.] Vol. 1, etc., 1905, etc.
Centenary Review, 1784—1883.

Bibliotheca Indica, 1848, ete.

A complete list of publications sold by the Society can be

btained by application to the Honorary Secretary, 57, Park Street,
Jaleutta.

os
PRIVILEGES OF ORDINARY MEMBERS.

(a) To be present and vote at all General Meetings which
are held on the first Wednesday in each month, except
in September and October.

(6) To propose and second candidates for Ordinary Member-
ship.

(c) To introduce visitors at the Ordinary General Meetings
and to the grounds and public rooms of the Society
during the hours when they are open to members.

-(d) To have personal access to the Library and other public
rooms of the Society, and to examine its collections.

(e) To take out books, plates and manuscripts from the
Library.

(f) To receive gratis, copies of the Jowrnal and Proceedings
and Memoirs of the Society.

(g) To fill any office in the Society on being duly elected
thereto.

ae

we

NDALE _

WA

i] 4

URR,
y N.

u B
tcated b

ALCOL

By M
Commun

JOURNAL & PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.
Vol. I, No. 8.

1908.

Hie :

ov,

CALCUTTA :

PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS, AND PUBLISHED BY THE
ASIATIC SOCIETY, 57, PARK STRUET.
1905.
Issued August 12th, 1905.

be alacant MNS Jule Bree Ree Ph a aS Fat ra

List of Officers and Members of Council :
OF THE :
ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL
For the year 1905.

—SS—
President :
His Honour Sir A. H. L. Fraser, M.A., LU.D., K.C.S.1.

Vice-Presidents :

The Hon’ble Mr. Justice Asutosh Mukhopadhyaya, M. A, D Di,
FE.R.S.E.

T. H. Holland, Esq., PGS, F.R.S.

C. W. McMinn, Esq., I.C.S., (retired).

Secretary and Treasurer :\

Honorary General Secretary: J. Macfarlane, Esq.
Treasurer: The Hon’ble Mr. Justice Asutosh Mulhopadyayy
M.A., D.L., F.R.S.E.
Additional Secretaries :

Philological Secretary: EH. D. Ross, Esq., Ph.D.

Natural History Secretary: Captain L. Rogers; M.D., B. Se, 754

IMS.

Anthropological Secretary: N. Annandale, Esq., B.A., D. Saar cs |
Joint Philological Secretary : eee Horaprasad :

Shastri, M.A.
Other Members of Council :

The Hon’ble Mr. Justice F. E. Pargiter, B.A., 1.0.8.
Kumar Ramessur Maliah.

I. H. Burkill, Hisq., M.A.

H. EH. Kempthorne, Esq.

W. K. Dods, Esgq..

The Hon’ble Mr. A. Harle, I.C.S.

Lieutenant-Colonel J. H. Tull Walsh, I.M.S.

R. O. Lees, Esq.

H. H. Hayden, Hsq., B.A., F.G.S. ; ea
HE, Thornton, Esq., F.R.1.B.A. ce
Pandit Satis Chandra Vidyabhisana, M. AS :

sora Da eA oh aa he I oc A a a
Cea s revas ‘ A age te a 3 fe + :

{PRINCIPAL PUBLICATIONS OF THE SOCIETY.
a -

Asiatic Researches, Vols. I—XX and Index, 1788—1839.
Proceedings, 1865—1904, (nowfamalgamated with Journal).
Memoirs, Vol. 1, etc., 1905, etc.

Journal, Vols. 1—73, 1832—1904.

Journal and Proceedings, [N. §.] Vol. 1, etc., 1905, ete.

_ Centenary Review, 1784—1883..

Bibliotheca Indica, 1848, etc.

A complete list of publications sold by the Society can be
ined by application to the Honorary Secretary, 57, Park Street,
cutta.

iii ae
PRIVILEGES OF ORDINARY MEMBERS.

(a) To be present and vote at all General Meetings which
are held on the first Wednesday in each month, except
in September and. October.

(b) To propose and second candidates for Ordinary Member-
ship.

(c) To introduce visitors at the Ordinary General Meetings
and to the grounds and public rooms of the Society
during the hours when they are open to members.

(d) To have personal access to the Library and other public
rooms of the Society, and to examine its collections.

(ce) To take out books, plates and manuscripts from the
Library.

(f) To receive gratis, copies of the Jowrnal and Proceedings
and Memoirs of the Society.

(g) To fill any office in the Society on being duly elected
thereto.

a je on ag |
_Yoonss CHANDRA

The ee ap the Cal y
: oe = 2s Superintendent oy the I

Tine ae (Trombidiun grindissinsn) -
=&B oo) Br. C. e ree :

swithee

recorded ee
Navson ee B

van Wes ruine OG
Dishes Baia,

JOURNALII& PROCEEDINGS

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.
Vol. I, No. 4.

1908.

CALCUTTA :

PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS, AND PUBLISHED BY THE
ASIATIC socInTY,*57, PARK STREET.
1905.
Issued 30th August, 1905,

List of Officers and Members of Council
OF THE
ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL
For the year 1905.

SEE
President :
His Honour Sir A. H. L. Fraser, M.A., LU.D., K.C.S.1.

Vice- Presidents 3
The Hon’ble Mr. Justice Asutosh Mukhopadhyaya, M.A., D.L.,
- E.R.S.E.
T. H. Holland, Esq., F.G.S., F.R.S.
C. W. McMinn, Esgq., 1.C:8., (retired).

Secretary and Treasurer :

Honorary General Secretary: J . Macfarlane, Hsq.
Treasurer: The Hon’ble Mr. Justice Asutosh Mukhopadhyaya,
M.A., D.L., F.R.S.E.

Additional Secretaries :

Philological Secretary: H. D. Ross, Hsq., Ph.D.

Natural History Secretary: Captain L. Rogers, M.D, B.Se.,
IMS.

Anthropological Secretary: N. Annandale, Esq., B.A., D.Se.

Joint Philological Secretary : ies oe Haraprasad
Shastri, M.A.

Other Members of Council :

The Hon’ble Mr. Justice F. EH. Pargiter, B.A., 1.C.S.
Kumar Ramessur Mahah.
I. H. Burkill, Hsq., M.A.

H. HE. Kempthorne, Esq.

W. K. Dods, Esq.

The Hon’ble Mr. A. Earle, I. C. S.
Lieutenant-Colonel J. H. Tull Walsh, I.M.S.
R. O. Lees, Esq.

H. H. Hayden, Esq., B.A., F.G.S.

K. Thornton, Esq., F.R.I-B.A.

Pandit Satis Chandra Vidyabhisana, M.A.

IPRINCIPAL PUBLICATIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

Asiatic Researches, Vols. I—XX and Index, 1788—1839.
Proceedings,/18”°5—1904, (now amalgamated with Journal).
Memoirs, Vol. 1, etc., 1905, ete.

Journal, Vols. 1—73, 1832—1904.

Journal and Proceedings, [N. S.] Vol. 1, etv., 1905, etc.
Centenary Review, 1784—1883.

Bibliotheca Indica, 1848, ete.

A complete list of publications sold by the Society can be

obtained by application to the Honorary Secretary, 57, Park Street,
Calcntia.

PRIVILEGES OF ORDINARY MEMBERS.

(a) To be present and vote at all General Meetings which
are held on the first Wednesday in each month, except
in September and October. . 3

(b) To propose and second candidates for Ordinary Member-
ship. :

(c) To introduce visitors at the Ordinary General Meetings
and to the grounds and public rooms of the Society
during the hours when they are open to members.

(d) To have personal access to the Library and other public
rooms of the Society, and to examine its collections.

(e) To take out books, plates and manuscripts from the
Library.

(f) To receive gratis, copies of the Journal and Proceedings
and Memoirs of the Society.

(g) To fill any office in the Society on being duly elected
thereto.

CONTENTS.

—@—
So Page.
~ Prue for April, 1905 eae ine i. OD

Anuruddha Thera—a learned Pali author of Southern India in

_ the 12th Century A.D.—By Pror. Satis pen VipyA-
BHUSANA, M.A. ee cee 99

The Colouring Princi; le of the es uf Nace hes Arbor-tris-
tis—By ki. G. Hint, B.A. as 102

The Monasteries of Tibet. ea Ral Sibie CHANDRA oe Bawa-
pur, C.I.E. Se 106

Notes on an Indian Worm of the Genus Cheetogaster —By Nut-
son AnnanDaLe, B.A., D.Sc., Deputy pe e
the Indian Museum. (With one plate) fs 117

Numismatic Supplement V. (With two plates.) « Ll

~ JOURNAL & PROCEEDINGS —
ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.
; Vol. I, No. 8.

1905.

CALCUTTA :

PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS, AND PUBLISHED BY THE
ASIATIC SOCIETY, 57, PARK STREET,
1905.
Issued 11th September, 1905.

*
dae
ar
pie
x

List of Officers and Members of Council
OF THE
ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL
For the year 1905.|

President :
His Honour Sir A. H. L. Fraser, MAS Tbs DK; S.1.

Vice-Presidents :
The Hon'ble Mr. Justice Asutosh ee M.A., D. fie
F.R.S.E.
T. H. Holland, Esq., F.G.S., ERS.
C. W. McMinn, Esq., 1.C.S., (retired).

Secretary and Treasurer :

Honorary General Secretary: J. Macfarlane, Esq.
Treasurer: The Hon'ble Mr. Justice Asutosh Mulshopadhyayay
'M.A., D.L., F.R.S.E.

4
Additional Secretaries :

Philological Secretary: E. D. Ross, Hsq., Ph.D.
Natural History Secretary: Captain L. Rogers, M.D., B. Se, ar
LMS.

Anthropological Secretary: N. Annandale, Hsq., B.A., D. Se.

Joint Philological Secretary : Mahamahopadhyaya Toe
Shastri, M.A.

Other ae of Council :

The Hon’ble Mr. Justice F. EH. Pargiter, B.A., I.C.S.
Kumar Ramessur Maliah.

I. H. Burkill, Esq., M.A.

H. E. Kempthorne, Esq.

W. K. Dods, Esq.

The Hon’ble Mr. A. Earle, I.C.S.
Lieutenant-Colonel J. H.'Tull Walsh, I.M.S.
H. H. Hayden, Esq., B.A., F.G.S.

E. Thornton, Esq., F.R.1.B.A,

Pandit Satis Chandra Vidyabhigana, M. A.
H. E. Stapleton, Esq., B.A., B.Sc.

PieRary,

The following new books have been added to the Library
from May to June 1905.

Anavamadarsi Sayngharaya. Daivajiia Kamadhenu, a treatise
on Astrology... Edited by the Very Rey. C. A. Seelakkhandha...
and Seetarama Upadhyaya. Fase. I, etc. Benares, 1905, etc. 8°.

Benares Sanskrit Series, No. 97.

Angira anv otuars qatat vega) [A collection of twenty-

seven Smrtis of Angira...Edited by the Pandits of Ananda-
Srama.| [Poona, 1905.] 8.°

Arcuzonocy. Annual Report of the Director-General of Arch-
ology, 1903-04, Part I, ete. Calcutta, 1905, etc. fol.

Presd. by the Director-General of Archeology.

Balaji Sitaram Kothare. Hindu Holidays, as originally con-
tributed to “‘ The Times of India.” Bombay, 1904. 8°.

Benares.—Sanskrit College. List of Sanskrit, Jaina and Hindi
Manuscripts purchased by order of Government and deposit-
ed in the Sanskrit College, Benares, during 1902. Nos. 6 & 7.
Allahabad, 1904. 8°.

Presd. by the Govt. of the United Provinces-

Boagp or Examiners. Catalogue of books in European Lan-
guages in the Library of the Board of Examiners, late College
of Fort William. Prepared under the superintendence of
Lieut.-Col. Ranking. [With two indices.] 3 pts.

Calcutta, 1903. 4°.

—§ Catalogue of books in Oriental Languages in the Library
of the Board of Examiners, late College of Fort William.
Prepared under the superintendence of Lieut.-Col. Ranking.
[With two indices.] 3 pts. Calcutta, 1093. 4°.

Presd. by the Board of Hxaminers, Fort William.

Buenos Aires. Demografia. Afio1901, etc. La Plata, 1904, etc. 8°.

Presd. by the Direccion-General de Estadistica, Buenos Atres.

2

Cotton, Julian James. List of inscriptions on Tombs or Monu-
ments in Madras, possessing historical or archeological in-
terest. Madras, 1905. fol.

Indian Monumental Inscriptions, vol. 8.

Presd. by the Government of Madras.

Harty Dutch and English Voyages to Spitsbergen in the seven-
teenth century, including Hessell Gerritsz. ‘“ Histoire du
Pays nommé Spitsberghe,” 1613, translated into English
.. by B. H. Soulsby...and J. S. Van der Brugge. “ Journael of
Dagh Register” Amsterdam, 1634. Translated into English
...by J. A. J. de Villiers...Hdited with introductions and
notes by Sir W. Martin Conway. London, 1904. 8°.

Hakluyt Society’s Publications, 2nd Series, No. 11.
Presd. by the Govt. of India, Home Dept.

Fauna or British Inp1, including Ceylon and Burma...Butter-
flies, Vol. I. by Lieut.-Col. C. T. Bingham.
London, 1905. 8°.

Presd. by the Govt. of Bengat.

Haas, W. R. Tromp de. Uitkomsten van de aftappingsproeven.
met Hevea Brasiliensis in den Cultuurtuin te Tjikeumeuh
gedaan gedurende de jaren 1900, t/m, 1904, etc.

Batavia, 1905, etc. 8°.

Presd. by the Botanic Institute of Buitenzorg.

Haxuvyt Society. Prospectus and List of Members, 1904.
London, [1905.] 8°.

Presd. by the Govt. of India, Home Dept.

Herzog, Maximilian. The Plague: Bacteriology, Morbid Ana-
tomy, and Histopathology, including a consideration of in-
sects as plague carriers. Manila, 1904. 8°.

Bureau of Govt. Laboratories, Manila, No. 28.

Presd. by the Bureau.
Holdich, Colonel Sir Thomas Hungerford. India... With maps

and diagrams. London, 1904. 8°.
Part of “ The Regions of the World,” edited by H. J. Mackinder.

James, S. P. and Liston, W. Glen. A Monograph of the Anophe-
les Mosquitoes of India, Calcutta, 1904. 4°.

mo
TUT ST asy
nae fy 3

Ty ei
SEA BEL

3

Kalidasa. Kalidasa’s Abhijfianashakuntalam. Translated in Eng-
lish verse by Kalikes Bandyopadhyay. Calcutta, 1901. 8°.

Presd. by the Author.

Koehler, R. and Vaney, C. An Acceunt of the Deep-Sea Holo-
thurioidae collected by the Royal Indian Marine Survey
Ship Investigator. Calcutta, 1905. 4°.

Presd. by the Indian Museum.

Lrnevurstic Survey or Inp1a. Report on the Progress of the Lin-
guistic Survey of India, presented to the Fourteenth Inter-
national Congress of Orientalists. [By Dr. G. A. Grierson.]
[1905.] fol.

Presd. by the Author.

Manita.—Bureau of Forestry. Report of the Chief of the Bureau
of Forestry of the Philippine islands for the period from Sep-
tember 1, 1903 to August 31, 1904. Manila, 1905. 8°.

Presd. by the Chief of the Bureau of Forestry, Manila.

Mann, Harold H. Agriculture as a science. A lecture, ete.
[ Calcutta, 1905.] 8°.

Presd. by the Calcutta University Institute.

Maxwell-Lefroy, H. The Dusky Cotton Bug. The Red Cotton
Bug. The Cotton Leaf Hopper. The Success Knapsack
Sprayer. The Six-Spotted Lady Bird Beetle. A Simple
Spraying Apparatus. The Preservation of Seed from Insect
Attacks. Rosin Washes as Insecticides. Kerosene Emulsion.
Crude Oil Emulsion. Lead Arseniate.

[ Bombay, Pusa, 1904-05.] 8°.

Presd. by the Author.
Meldola, Raphael. The Chemical Synthesis of Vital Products

and the inter-relations between organic compounds.
London, 1904. 8°.

Merrill, Elmer D. A Review of the identifications of the species
described in Blanco’s Flora de Filipinas. Manila, 1905. 8°.
Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila No. 27.

Presd. by the Bureau,

Moore, F. Lepidoptera Indica. 5 vols. London, 1890-93. 4°.

Fe ee NN

Blac &
\ Re
hese
ie

Bed bat

1. ploy e.
oo

+

Nevill, H. R. District Gazetteers of the United Provinces of
Agra and Oudh, vol. xxxiv. Naini Tal, vol. xli. Hardoi,
vol. xlvui. Bara-Banki. Allahabad, 1904. 8°.

Presd. by the Government of India, Home Dept.

S’aunak. The Brhad-devata attributed toSaunaka. A summary
of the deities and myths of the Rig-veda. Critically edited
in the original Sanskrit with an intr roduction and seven appen-
dices and translated into English with critical and illustrative
notes by A. A. Macdonell. oy pts. Cambridge, Mass. 1904. 8°.

Harvard Oriental Series, vols. 5 § 6.

Presd. by the Harvard University.

Waddell, Liewt.-Col. L. Austine. Lhasa and its Mysteries. With
a record of the expedition of 1903-1904....With...illustra-
tions and maps. London, 1905. 8°.

Wehrli, Hans J. Beitrag zur Hthnologie der Chingpaw (Kachin)
von Ober-Burma. Lezden, 1904. 4°.

Internationales Archiv fiir Hihnographie Supplement zw Bd. D4 AB

Wherry, Wm. B. Glanders: Its diagnosis and prevention.
Together with a report on two cases of human glanders occur-
ring in Manila, and some notes on the Bacteriology and Poly-
morphism of Bacterium Mallei. Manila, 1904. 8°.

Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No. 24.

Presd. by the Bureau.

mite.

Ree Were ain
oe im FE

ip ce
Hu

PRINCIPAL PUBLICATIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

Asiatic Researches, Vols. I—XX and Index, 1788—1839.
Proceedings, 1865—1904, (now amalgamated with Journal).
Memoirs, Vol. 1, etc., 1905, etc.

Journal, Vols. 1—73, 1882—1904,

Journal and Proceedings, [ N. S.] Vol. 1, ete., 1905, etc.
Centenary Review, 1784—1883. |
Bibliotheca Indica, 1848, ete.

A complete list of publications sold by the Society can be
obtained by application to the Honorary Secretary, 57, Park Street,
alcutia.

PRIVILEGES OF ORDINARY MEMBERS.

(a) To be present and vote at all General Meetings which
are held on the first Wednesday in each month, except
in September and October. :

(6) To propose and second candidates for Ordinary Member-

ship.

(c) To introduce visitors at the Ordinary General Meetings ©

and to the grounds and public rooms of the Society
during the hours when they are open to members.

(d) To have personal access to the Library and other public
rooms of the Society, and to examine its collections.

(ce) To take out books, plates and manuscripts from the
Library.

(f{) To receive gratis, copies of the Jowrnal and Proceedings
and Memoirs of the Society.

(g) To fill any office in the Society on being duly elected
thereto.

CONTENTS.
— Pp

Proceedings for May, 1905 :
The Emperor Babar.—By H. ena LOS Gules

Contributions to Oriental Herpetology III—WNotes on the
Oriental Lizards in the Indian Museum, with a List of the
Species recorded from British India and Ceylon. Part 2.
—By Netson AnnanDAte, B.A., (Oxon.), D.Sc. (Kdin. )
Deputy Superintendent of the Indian Museum

139

Tibet, a dependency of Mongolia.—(1643-1716 A.D)—By ,

Rat Sarat CHanpra Das, Banapur, C.LH.

Sarvajna-mitra—a Tantrika Buddhist author of _ Kasmira

152

in the 8th Century A.D. meal Prof. Satis CHANDRA

Vipydsuusana, M.A.

156

JOURNAL & PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.
Vol. I, No. 6,

1905.

CALCUTTA:

PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS, AND PUBLISHED BY THE
ASIATIC SOCIETY, 57, PARK STREET.
1905.
Issued 4th October, 1905.

List of Officers and Members of Council ©
OF THE
ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL

For the year 1905.

———
President :
His Honour Sir A. H. L. Fraser, M.A., LL.D., K.C.S.1.

Vice-Presidents :
The Hon'ble Mr. Justice Asutosh Mukhopadhyaya, M.A., D.L.,
F.R.S.E.
T. H. Holland, Esq., F.G.S., F.R.S.
C. W. McMinn, Esq., 1.C.8., (vetired.)

Secretary and Treasurer :

Honorary General Secretary: J. Macfarlane, Esq.
Treasurer: The Hon'ble Mr. Justice Asutosh Mukhopadhyaya,
MAS Dis RRS:

Additional Secretaries :

Philological Secretary: HE. D. Ross, Esq., Ph.D.

Natural History Secretary: Captain L. Rogers, M.D., B.Sc.,
IMS.

Anthropological Secretary: N. Annandale, Esq., B.A., D.Se. %

Joint Philological Secretary: Mehsee eseye Haraprasad
Shastri, M.A.

Other Members of Council :

The Hon’ble Mr. Justice F. E. Pargiter, B.A., I.C.8.
Kumar Ramessur Maliah.

I. H. Burkill, Esq., M.A.

H. HE. Kempthorne, Esq. -

W. K. Dods, Esq.

The Hon’ble Mr. A. Earle, I.C.S.
Lieutenant-Colonel J. H. Tull Walsh, I.M.S.
H. H. Hayden, Esq., B.A., F.G-S.

E. Thornton, Esq., F.R.IB.A.

Pandit Satis Chandra Vidyabhisana, M.A.
4H. E. Stapleton, Hsq., B.A., B.Sc.

Lisrary.
The following new books have been added to the Library from
July to August, 1905.

Annandale, Nelson. On Abnormal Ranid Larvee from North-
Eastern India. London, 1905. 8°,
Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London, 1905, Vol. I.

Presd. by the Author.

Bose, Chuni Lal, Rai. Combustion...An address, etc.
Calcutta, 1905. Se

Presd. by the Oulcutta University Institute.

Cacuart Primary Arithmetic. (Paiseb banta sygang.) Part I,
etc. Shillong, 1905, etc. 8°.

Presd. by the Chief Commissioner of Assam.

Chapman, Sydney J. The Lancashire Cotton Industry. <A
study in economic development. Manchester, 1904. 8°.
Publications of the University of Manchester, Hconomic

Series, No. 1.
Presd, by the University.

Cotomso Musnum. Spolia Zeylanica. Vol. I, etc.
Colombo, 19038, etc. 8°.

Davenport, C. B. Statistical Methods with special reference to
Biological variation...Second, revised edition.

New York, 1904. 8°.

Dercle, ©. De la pratique de notre médecine chez les Arabes.
Vocabulaire arabe-francais d’expressions médicales, etc.
Alyer, 1904. 8°.

Bitel, Ernest J. Feng-Shui: or, the rudiments of Natural
Science in China. London, 1873. 8°.

Freer, Paul C. The preparation of Benzoyl-Acetyl Peroxide, and
its use aS an intestinal antiseptic in cholera and dysentery.
Manila, 1904. 8°.

Bureau of Government Laborutories, Manila, No, 2.

Presd. by the Bureau.

Haeckel, Ernst. Der Kamp um den Hntwickelungs-Gedanken.
Drei Vortrage.,..Mit..,.Tafeln, ete. Berlin, 1905. 8°.

Presd. by the Author.

»
Hahn, Rev. Ferd. Kurukh Folklore in the original. Collected
and transliterated by Revd. F. Hahn. Calcutta, 1905. 8°.

Presd. by the Government of Bengal.

Herzog, Maximilian, A Fatal infection by a hitherto undescrib-
ed chromogenic bacterium: Bacillus aureus foetidus.
Manila, 1904. 8°.

Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No. 13.

The Plague: Bacteriology, morbid anatomy, and histo-
pathology, etc. Manila, 1904. 8°.
Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No. 23.

Herzog, Maximilian, ann orners. I, Does Latent or dormant
plague exist where the disease is endemic. By M. Herzog and
C. B. Hare. II. Broncho-pneumonia of cattle: its associa-
tion with B. Bovisepticus. By P. G. Woolley and W. Sorrell.
IIJ. Report on Pinto-Pafio Blanco. By P. G. Woolley. IV.
Notes on analysis of the water from the Manila water supply.
By C. L. Bliss. V. Frambesia: its occurrence in natives of
the Philippine Islands. By P. G. Woolley. Manila, 1904. 8°.

Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No. 20.

Jobling, James W. anp orners. Texas fever in the Philippine
Islands and the Far East. By J. W. Jobling...and P. G.
Woolley...The Australian Tick—Boophilus australis Fuller—
in the Philippine Islands. By C. 8. Banks.

Manila, 1904. 8°.
Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No. 14.

Jobling, James W. Preliminary Report on the study of Rinder-

pest of cattle and carabaos in the Philippine Islands.
Manila, 1903. 8°.

Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No. 4.

Presd. by the Bureau.

Kalidasa. ‘Kalidasa. A complete collection of the various read-
ings of the Madras Manuscripts. By the Rev. T. Foulkes.
3 vols. Madras, 1904. 8°.

Presd. by the Government of Madras.

Kalisankara Siddhanta Vagisa. Krodapattrasangraha or criti-
cal notes on Anumanajagadisi, Pratyakshanumanagadadhari,
Pratyakshanumanamathuri, Vyutpathivada, Saktivada, Muk-

tivada, Sabdasaktiprakasika and Kusumanjali...Hdited by

Pundit Vindhyesvariprasad Dvivedin...and Nyayacharya

Vamacharana Bhattacharya. Fasc. I, etc. i

Benares, 1905, etc. 8°.

Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series, No, 90.

2
ey

9
3)

Kirkby, William. Practical Prescribing and Dispensing for
medical students. Manchester, 1904. 8°. . ee.
Publications of the University 07 Manchester, Medical Series,
No. 2.
Presd. by the University.

Landon, Perceval. Lhasa. An account of the country and
people of Central Tibet and of the progress of the Mission
sent there by the English Government in the year 1903-04,
efc. 2vols. London, 1905. 8°.

Little, A.G. Initia Operum Latinorum quae saeculis xiii, xiv,
xv, attribuuntur secundum ordinem alphabeti disposita,
Manchester, 1904. 8°,

Publications of the University of Manchester, Historical Series,
No. 2.
Presd. by the University.

Lorini, Eteocle. La Persia economica contemporanea e la sua
questione monetaria. toma, 1900. 8°. ;

McGregor, Richard C. I. Birds from the Islands of Romblon,
Sibuyan and Cresta De Gallo. II. Further Notes on birds
from Ticao, Cuyo, Culion, Calayan, Lubang and Luzon.
Manila, 1905. 8°.

Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No 25.

Presd. by the Bureau.
Mapras District Gazerreers. Madras, 1904, etc. 8°.

Presd. by the Government of India, Home Department.

Manita.—Bureau of Government Laboratories. I. Description of
new buildings. By P. C, Freer. II. A Catalogue of the
Library. By Mary Polk. Manila, 1905. 8°.

Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No. 22.

Report of the Superintendent of Government Laboratories
in the Philippine Islands for the year ended September Ist,
1903.

From Fourth Annual Report of the Philippine Commission.

Third |efe.| Annual Report of the Superintendent of the
Bureau of Government Laboratories for the period from Sep-
tember Ist, 1905, to August 31st, 1904 [ete.].

Manila, 1905, ete. 8°,
Presd by the Bureau.

4,

Merrill, Ulmer D. A Dictionary of the plant names of the
Philippine Islands. Manila, 1903. 8°.

Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No. 8.

A Review of the identifications of the species described
in Blanco’s Flora de Filipinas. Manila, 1905. 8°.
Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No. 27.

Musgrave, W. H. and Clegg, Moses T. Trypanosoma and
Trypanosomiasis, with special reference to Surra in the Philip-
pine Islands. Manila, 1903. 8°.

Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No. 5.

Pt. I. Amebas: their cultivation and etiologic signifi-
cance. By W. EH. Musgrave and M T. Clegg. Pt. II. Treat-
ment of intestinal Amebiasis—amebic dysentery—in the
tropics. By W. EH. Musgrave. Manila, 1904. 8°.

Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No, 18.

Presd. by the Bureau.

Nevill, H.R. Partabgarh. Allahabad, 1904. 8°.
District Gazetteers of the United Province ot Agra and Oudh,

Vol. XLVIT.

—— Rai Bareli. Allahabad, 1905, 8°.
District Gazetteers of the United Provinces of Agra and Oudh,
Vols. XX XIX.

Presd. by the Government of India, Home Department.

Neville, Ralph. Garden Cities. A Warburton Lecture, etc.
Manchester, 1904. 8°.
Manchester University Lectures, No. 1.

Presd, by the University.

Nityasvaripa Brahmacari. yua faftag: [Parapaksa giri-
bajrah by Nityasvartiipa Brahmacari. |
Brindavana, 1905. 8°.
Presd. by the Author.

Olufsen, O. Through the unknown Pamirs, The second Danish
Pamir Expedition 1898-90,... With maps and...illustrations.
London, 1904, 8°.

fy a mek Sa

aie = is de Ga 7 ES Rea
oth Alle racer Pe , : ize cece
:

5

Owen’s Cottman, Manchester. Historical Essays by Members of
the Owen's College, Manchester, published in commemoration
of its jubilee, 1851-1901. London, 1902. 8°.

Studies from the Biological Laboratories. (Studies in
Biology) etc. Vol. I, III, etc. Manchester, 1886, 1895, etc. 8°.

Studies from the Physical and Chemical Laboratories,
etc. Vol. I, etc. Manchester, 1893, 8°.

Studies from the Physiological Laboratory, etc. Vol. I, ete.
Manchester, 1891. 8°.

—Studies in Anatomy, etc. Vol. II, etc.
Manchester, 1900, etc. 8°.

Presd. by the Victoria University of Manchester.

Penny, fev. Frank. The Church in Madras, being the history
of the ecclesiastical and missionary action of the Hast India,
Company in the Presidency of Madras in the seventeenth and
eighteenth centuries... With illustrations. London, 1904. 8°.

Presd. by the Government of India, Home Depurtment.

Rajaram Ramkrishna Bhagawat. An Attempt to analyse the
Maha-Bharata—from the higher Brahminical standpoint.
Bombay, 1905. 8°.

Khordeh—Avesta searched. I. Mihr Yast—from the
Brahminical standpoint. Bombay, 1904. 8°.

Presd. by the Author.

Readymoney, Nasarvanji Jivanji. A University for Research-
Record and Instructions. Nature-History Museum and des-
eriptive defining Nature-History tables illustrated: or Nature-
History Research thinking tables and investigating or sorting
tables for separating different subjects. Bombay, 1905. 8°.

Presd. by the Author.

Rivenburg, ficv. S. W. Phrases in Enelish and Angami Naga.
Kohima, Assum, 1905. 8°.

Presd, by the Chief Commissioner of Assam.

Sherman, Penoyer L. The Gutta Percha and Rubber of the
Philippine Islands, Manila, 1903. 8°.
Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No. 7.
Presd. by the Bureau

eat
eal:
annals ate
gy ere SAIN

ries
oe

a

Ne

Th AT

Baltes

et

6

Smeeth, W. F. The Occurrence of Secondary Augite in the
Kolar Schists. Bangalore, 1905. 8°.
Mysore Geological Department, Bulletin, No. 8.

Presd. by the Mysore Geological Department.

Smith, W. Robertson. Lectures on the Religion of the Semites.

First Series. The fundamental institutions...New edition.
London, 1901. 8°.

Burnett Lectures, 1888-89.

Stebbing, E. P. A note upon the ‘‘ Bee-Hole” borer of teak in
Burma. Calcutta, 1905. 8°.

Presd. by the Author.

Strong, R. P. Preliminary Report of the appearance in the
Islands of a disease clinically resembling glanders.
Manila, 1904. 8°.
Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No 1.

Protective Inoculation against Asiatic Cholera—an experi-
mental study. Manila, 1904. 8°.
Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No 16.

—Some questions relating to virulence of micro-organisms,
with particular reference to their immunizing powers,
Manila, 1904. 8°.

Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No. 21.

Presd. by the Bureau.

Sydow, P. and H. Monographia Uredinearum seu specierum
omnium ad hune usque diem descriptio et adumbratio system-
atica. Vol. I, etc. Lvpsiae, 1904, etc. 8°.

Tait, James. Medieval Manchester and the beginning of Lanca-
shire. Manchester, 1904. 8°.
Publications of the University of Manchester, Historical Series,
No 1.

Presd. by the University.

Vallabhacharya, Sr7. Anu Bhashya, on Brahmasitra...With
a commentary called Bhashya Prakasa by Goswami Sri
Purushottamjee Maharaj. Edited by Ratna Gopal Bhatta.
Fasc. I, etc. Benures, 1905, etc. 8°.

DBenuares Sanskrit Series, No. 99.
Watson, C. C. Ajmer-Merwara. Text and Statistical tables.
Ajmer, 1904, 8°.
Rajputana District Gazetteers.

Presd. by the Government of India, Home Department.

7

Wegener, Dr. Georg. Tibet und die englische Hxpedition.., Mit
zwei Karten und acht Vollbildern. Halle a.S., 1904. 8°.

Weintz, H. J. Hossfeld’s Japanese Grammar comprising a
manual of the spoken language in the Roman character, etc.
London, 1904, 8°.

Weismann, August. The Evolution Theory...Translated by J. A.
Thomson...and M. R. Thomson. ILllustrated. 2 vols.
London, 1904. 8°.

Wherry, William B. Glanders: its diagnosis and prevention, etc.
Manila, 1904. 8°.
Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No. 24.

Some observations on the biology of the cholera spiril-
lum. Manila, 1904. 8°.
Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No. 19.

Woolley, Paul G. Report on Bacillus violaceous [sic] Manilae:
A pathogenic microdrganism. Manila, 1904, 8°.
Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No. 15.

Presd. by the Bureau.

Wright, G. A. and Preston, C. H. Handbook of Surgical
Anatomy...Second edition. Manchester, 1905. 8°.
Publications of the University of Manchester, Medical Series,
No. 3.
Presd. by the University.

Wylie, A. Notes on Chinese literature: with introductory re-
marks on the progressive :dvancement of the art ; and a list
of translations from the Chinese into various European lan-
ouages.,.New edition. Shunyjhai, 1901. 8°.

—eeeeoeEeeeEOeeeSeeeeeersn eee

1S
A

PRINCIPAL PUBLICATIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

Asiatic Researches, Vols. I—XX and Index, 1788—1839.

Proceedings, 1865—1904, (now amalgamated with Journal).

Memoirs, Vol. 1, etc., 1905, etc.

Journal, Vols. 1—73, 1832—1904.

Journal and Proceedings, [N. §.] Vol. 1, etc., 1905, etc.

Centenary Review, 1784—1883.

Bibliotheca Indica, 1848, ete.

A complete list of publications sold by the Society can be
obtained by application to the Honorary Secretary, 57, Park Street,
Calcnita.

PRIVILEGES OF ORDINARY MEMBERS.

(a) To be present and vote at all General Meetings which
are held on the first Wednesday in each month, except
in September and October.

(0) To propose and second candidates for Ordinary Member-

. ship. |
-(c) To introduce visitors at the Ordinary General Meetings
and to the grounds and public ‘rooms of the Society
during the hours when they are open to members.

(d) To have personal access to the Library and other public
rooms of the Society, and to examine its collections.

(e) To take out books, plates and manuscripts from the
Library.

(f) To receive gratis, copies of the Journal and Proceedings
and Memoirs of the Society. :

(g) To fill any office in the Society on being duly elected
thereto.

| Proceedings ee Tre, 1905 : :

An Analysis of the Lankavatara Sutra :
CHANDRA ‘VipvapHogaya, M.A. | aa

Tibet under her last Kings Qds1682 A AD. By Rat
CHANDRA Das, Banavur, C.1.E. . Pe ome

ceo

OM ote on a ‘decomposition Tre of a peculiar variety of
_ khand Ui ea A. Ue B. Be = Sc.,

JOURNAL & PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ASIAJIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.
MOL: lyon oe: #-

1905.

- CALCUTTA :

PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS, AND PUBLISHED BY THE
ASIATIC SOCIETY, 57, PARK STREET, —
1905.
Issued 4th October, 1905,

F.R.S.E.
T. H. Holland, Hsq., F.G. S, F, R. s.
C. W. es Hsq., I. C. ae stved)_ :

"Treasurer : The Homble Me. ad
Ae D.L., FRSE.

ee | Additional ose :
: A iitalegicat cone E. iby Ross, Esq., Ph, D.
Natural ey oy ee La. gers,
AntInopolgical cee N. Avot

‘The Hon’ble Mr. J Beece Fr E.

Kumar Ramessur Maliah.
I. H. Burkill, Esq, M.A. a
H. E. Kempthorne, ea
Wik: De Hoe i Boe

H. H. Hajden, ilsg], E BA F 8 :
E. Thornton, Esq., F.R. LB.A. a
Pandit Satis Chandra Vidyabbisana,
aE E. aurea, Hsq., B. mee B. Se.

PRINCIPAL PUBLICATIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

Asiatic Researches, Vols. I—XX and Index, 1788—1839.
Proceedings, 1865—1904, (now amalgamated with J ournal).
Memoirs, Vol. 1, etc., 1905, ete.

Journal, Vols. 173, 18382—1904.

Journal and Proceedings, [N. §.] Vol. 1, ete., 1905, etc.
Centenary Review, 1784—1883.

Bibliotheca Indica, 1848, etc.

A complete list of publications sold by the Society can be

dbtained by application to the Honorary Secretary, 57, Park Street,
Dalentta.

- PRIVILEGES OF ORDINARY MEMBERS.

(a) To be present and vote at all General Meetings which
are held on the first Wednesday in each month, except
in September and October.

(6) To propose and second candidates for Ordinary Member-
ship.

(c) To introduce visitors at. the Onder General Meetings
and to the grounds and public rooms of the Society
during the hours when they are open to members.

(d) To have personal access to the Library and other public
rooms of the Society, and to examine its collections.

(e) To take out books, plates and manuscripts from the
Library. ;

(f) To receive gratis, copies of the Journal and Proceedings
and Memoirs of the Society.

(g) To fill any office in the Society on being duly elected
thereto.

enemas 6 the = Oollethion y erae ‘Snakes “
at Museum.— Part II. Specimens from the. ons
and Nicobars—By Nuuson ANNANDALE, B.A.,
Deputy Stiperintendent ae the Indian Museum

JOURNAL & PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.
Vol. I, No. 8.

1905.

CALCUTTA :

PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS, AND PUBLISHED BY THE
ASIATIC SOCIETY, 57, PARK STREET.
1905.
Issued 27th October, 1905.

List of Officers and Members of Council
OF THE | -
ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL
For the year 1905.

—
President :
His Honour Sir A. H. L. Fraser, M.A., LL.D., K.C.S.1.

Vice-Presidents :

The Hon’ble Mr. Justice Asutosh Mukhopadhyaya, M.A., D.L.,
F.R.S.E,

T. H. Holland, Hsq., F.G.S., F.R.S.

C. W. McMinn, Esgq., 1.C.S., (vetired.)

Secretary and Treasurer :

Honorary General Secretary: J. Macfarlane, Esq;
Treasurer: The Hon’ble Mr. Justice Asutosh TT
M.A., D.L., F.R.S.E.

Additional Secretaries :

Philological Secretary : HK. D. Ross, Hsq., Ph.D.

Natural History Secretary: Captain L. Rogers, M.D., B.Sc.,
IMLS.

Anthropological Secretary: N. Annandale, Esq., B.A., D.Sc.

Joint Philological Secretary: Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad
Shastri, M.A.

Other Members of Council :

The Hon’ble Mr. Justice F. E. Pargiter, B.A., I.C.S.
Kumar Ramessur Maliah.

I. H. Burkill, Esq., M.A.
H. E. Kempthorne, Esq. .
~ W. K. Dods, Esq.

The Hon’ble Mr. A. Harle, I.C.S.
Lieutenant-Colonel J. H. Tull Walsh, I.M.S.

H. H. Hayden, Esq., B.A., F.G.S.

H. Thornton, Esq., F.R.1.B.A.

Pandit Satis Chandra Vidyabhisana, M.A,

H. E. Stapleton, Esq., B.A., B.Sc.

PIBRARY,

The following new books have been added to the Library
during September, 1905.

Amira, Karl V. Konrad von Maurer. Gedichtnisrede, etc.
Miinchen, 1903. 4°.

Presd. by the K. B. Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Miinchen.

Baron, Kr, and Wissendorff, H. Chansons nationales lalavien-
nes. vol. I, etc. Mitau, 1894, etc. 8°.

Presd. by the Académie Impériale des Sciences de St. Pétersbourg.

Béische, Wilhelm. Die Abstammung des Menschen. Zwanzigste
Auflage. Stutigart, [1904.| 8°.

Presd. by “ Kosmos, Gesellschaft der Naturfreunde,” Stuttgart.

Briggs, Ella Marion. The Life History of Case Bearers. —
Brooklyn, N.Y., 1905, ete. 8°.
Cold Spring Harbor Monographs. IV.
Presd. by the Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences.

Britisn Mussum,—Nuatural History. Guide to the Gallery of
Birds in the department of Zoology, etc. London, 1905. 4°.

Presd. by the Museum.
Brussevs.—Institut International de Bibliographie. Manuel du
Répertoire bibliographique universe}.
[Bruzelles,| 1905. 8°.
Presd. by the Institut.

CatrrorssrA AcApemy or Sciences, San Francisco. Constitution
and Bye-laws, etc. San Francisco, 1904, 8°.

Presd. by the Academy.

Sah eae
d= ben as

2
Canava.—Department of the Interior. Relief map of the Dominion
of Canada, 1904, S. sh. fol.
Presd. by the Department.

Carvalho, Cyro Augusto de. Collection Cyro Augusto de Car-
valho; monnaies et médailles portugaises. [Sale catalogue. |
Amsterdam, 1905. 8°.

Presd. by Herr J. Schulman.

Conard, Henry 8. The Waterlilies. A monograph of the genus
Nymphaea. [Baltimore,| 1905. 4°.

Presd. by the Carnegie Institution of Washington.

Cotton, Julian James. List of Inscriptions on tombs or monu-
ments in Madras, possessing historical or archeological
interest. Madras, 1905. 4°.

Indian Monumental Inscriptions, vol, III.

Presd. by the Govt. of Madras.

Curtiss, Samuel Ives. Primitive Semitic Religion to-day. A
record of researches, discoveries and studies in Syria, Palestine
and the Sinaitic Peninsula. Chicago, 1902. 8°.

Danzig.—Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Katalog der Bibliothek.
etc. Heft I, ete.
Danzig, 1904, etc. 8°.

Presd, by the Society.

Dimon, Abigail Camp. The Mud Snail: Nassa obsoleta.
Brooklyn, N.Y., 1905. 8°.
Cold Spring Harbor Monographs. V.

Presd. by the Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences.

Enatisu-Garo Dictionary by members of the Garo Mission of the
American Baptist Missionary Union, Tura, Assam. [By
M.C.Mason.| Shillong, 1905. 8°.

Presd. by the Chief Commissioner of Assam.

BS

KY ok yess

: noe aie: od see

ne doa

3
Folkmar, Daniel.

Album of Philippine Types...Christians and
Moros...Highty Plates, representing thirty-seven provinces
and Islands. Prepared and published under the auspices of

the Philippine Exposition Board by Daniel Folkmar.
Manila, 1904. Obl. fol.

Presd. by the Philippine Govt., Manila.

Foster, J. E. Churchwarden’s Accounts of St. Mary the Great,

Cambridge, from 1504 to 1635. Edited by J. H. Foster.
Cambridge, 1905. 8°.

Presd. by the Cambridge Antiquarian Society.

Frazer, J.G. Totemism. Hdinburgh, 1887. 8°.

Friedrich, Johann. Gedichtnisrede auf Karl Adolf von Cornelius,
Miinchen, 1904. 4°.

Heigel, K. Th. von. Zum Andenken an Karl von Zittel.
Miinchen, 1904. 4°.

Presd. by the K. B. Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Miinchen.

Htoon-Chan. The Arakanese Calendar with the corresponding
dates in Burmese and English, 1820-1918. Akyab, 1905. 4°.

Presd. by the Author.
Jyotis’chandra Bhattacherjee. -tataxta | [Lilavasana. ]
[ Calcutta, 1905.] 8°.

Presd. by the Author.
Kalecsinszky, Alexander v. Uber die Akkumulation der Son-

nenwdrme in verschiedenen Fliissigkeiten.
Leipzg, 1904, 8°.

Sonderabdruck aus dem Mathematischen und Naturwissenschaftlichen
Berichte aus Ungarn. XX1I,.

Presd. by the Author.

Krumbacher, K. Das Problem der neugriechischen Schrift-
sprache. Miimchen, 1903. 4°.

Presd. by the K. B, Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Mimchen.

cn,

e

th fe

Peta es

Mes

¥

+h

5. *
ai a7
a Neal ee * Sie
i =)! a ee era
org pint) eet
on a
an ne
Sa2 For ala
a et Nearness on
se Te md 7
+ ener ea
. *

Tm ts, ae
ss nee
ee
’ :

Ps P
rae E

4,

La Flotte, de. Hssais historiques sur |’Inde, précédés d’un
Journal de voyages et d’unedescription géographique de la
cdte de Coromandel. Paris, 1769. 12°

Meyer, M. Wilhelm. Weltschépfung. Wie die Welt entstanden
ist. Stuttgart, [1905?] 8°.

——Wiekann die Welt einmaluntergehen? Stuttgart, [1905 P] 8°.
Presd. by ‘‘ Kosmos, Gesellschaft der Naturfreunde,” Stuttgart.

Nydyasinpu. [Buddhist Text-book of Logic, composed by
Darmkirta with a commentary thereto.| Nyayabindu-tika,
[composed by Darmottar. Tibetan translation edited with
introduction by F. I. Sherbolski.] Fasc. I. ete.

St. Petersburg, 1904, etc. fol.

Presd. by the Académie Impériale des Sciences de St. Pétersbourg.

Pringsheim, Alfred. Ueber Wert und angeblichen Unwert der
Mathematik. Muinchen, 1904. 4°.

Presd. by the K. B. Akadémie der Wissenschaften zu
Miinchen.

Smallwood, Mabel E. The Salt-Marsh Amphipod: Orchestia
palustris. Brooklyn, N.Y., 1905. 8°.
Cold Spring Harbor Monographs. ILI.

Presd. by the Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences.

Wildeman, E. de. Mission Emile Laurent—1903-1904—.

Enumération des plantes récoltées par Emile Laurent avec la
collaboration de M. Marcel Laurent pendant sa derniére mis-
sion au Congo. Bruzelles, 1905. 4°.

Presd. by the Congo State.

Willcocks, Sir William. The Nile in 1904.
London, New York, Cairo, 1904. 8°.

Presd. by the Govt. of India, Home Dept.

Wollaston, Arthur N. A complete Hnglish-Persian Dictionary
compiled from original sources. London, 1904, 4°.

lauiiindio WF a:

ia NGA) seh ‘i, “%

ESOS 2 ae

a i WI

Crass BI NDF a
Aa. Gy

Gace hay tore ic

' if
= ree '
SVE Pepe ak |
ate Ay ) |

od it Boyes
ee EP GUY Berri mete nates Lar |

ott ot

nd

batt _olelig ey Bai
eee Ramat a,

5

Woolley, Paul G. and Jobbing J. W. A Report on Hemor-
rhagic Septicaemia in animals in the Philippine Islands.

Manila, 1904. 8°.
Bureau of Government Laboratories, Manila, No. 9.

Presd. by the Bureau.

Zartusht-i-Bahram ben Pajdt. Le Sivre de Zoroastre—
Zaratusht Nama—de Zartusht-i-Bahram Ben Pajdi,
publié et traduit par F. Rosenberg. St. Pétersbowrg, 1904. 8°.
Presd. by the Académie Impériale des Sciences, St. Pétersbourg.

Zell, Th. Ist das Tier unverniinftig? Neue Hinblicke in die
Tierseele. Stuttgart, [1903.] 8°.

Presd. by “‘ Kosmos, Gesellschaft der Naturfreunde,” Stuttgart.

SOLON LBB LLL LL OOOO

eR: SA 3 in
se ce Base ae
le Eis hae

oy

j k Da aie 1a 4 fe, Oe Dice nde
Meade cay é 1 Sibiee ERO " ite é
iia alin BY PN e as Sy
. aS ” vi
! i
j
5
H
if
IY Ble Pia sy Tre!
i
"
i, R
‘
i f f
=!
‘
+ . 1 cf
*
H i

PRINCIPAL PUBLICATIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

Asiatic Researches, Vols. I—XX and Index, 1788—1839.

Proceedings, 1865—1904, (now amalgamated with Journal).

Memoirs, Vol. 1, etc., 1905, ete.

Journal, Vols. 1—73, 1832—1904.

Journal and Proceedings, [N..§.] Vol. 1, ete., 1905, etc.

Centenary Review, 1784—1883.

Bibliotheca Indica, 1848, ete.

A complete list of publications sold by the Society can be
eGned by application to the Honorary Pa 57, Park Street,
Jaleutta.

PRIVILEGES OF ORDINARY MEMBERS.

(a) To be present and vote at all General Meetings which
are held on the first Wednesday in each month, Hee
in September and October.

(6) To propose and second candidates for Ordinary Member-
ship.

(c) To introduce visitors at the Ordinary General Meetings
and to the grounds and public rooms of the Society
during the hours when they are open to members.

(d) To have personal access to the Library and other public
rooms of the Society, and to examine its collections.

(e) To take out books, plates and manuscripts from the
Library.

(f) To receive gratis, copies of the Journal and Proceedings
and Memoirs of the Society.

(g) To fill any office in the Society on being duly elected
thereto.

CONTENTS.
—f—

Proceedings for August, 1905

History of Nydayasastra from Japanese Sources.—By Mana-
MAHOPADHYAYA HARAPRASAD SHASTRI :

Notes concerning the People of Mungeli Tahsil, Bilaspore Dis-
trict.— By Tur Rey. HK. M. Gorpon. Communicated by
the Anthropological Secretary (With 1 plate) x

A short history of the House of Phagdu, which ruled over Tibet
om the decline of Sakya till 1432 A.D. eal Ral ,SARAT
Cuanpra Das, Bawanor, C.L.E,

Additions to the Collection of Oriental Snakes in the Indian
Museum. Part 3 (With 3 figures).—By N. ANNANDALE,
B.A., D.Sc., Deputy Superintendent of the Indian Museum

Note on the Kantabudiyas of Cuttack— By Jamini Mouan Das.
“Communicated by the Anthropological Secretary

Page.
49

E27 |

- Patol

202

208

215

JOURNAL & ares

peatic SOCIETY. OF BENGAL.
Vol. 1,No. 9.
19058.
CALCUTTA :

PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS, AND PUBLISHED BY THE
ASIATIC SOCIETY, 57, PARK STREET. ie
1906.

‘Issued 10th January, 1906,

List of Officers and Members of Council —

OF THE — nee: Ae
ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL

For the year 1905. Ber

President :
His Honour Sir A. H. L. Fraser, M.A., LL.D., K. C. s. abe

Vice-Presidents :
The Hon’ble Mr. J ustice Asutosh Mathopadhyayea M. os A D. i.
F.R.S.H.
T. H. Holland, Esq., F.G.S., F.R.S.
C. W. McMinn, Esgq., I.C.S., (retired.)

Secretary and Treasurer :
Honorary General Secretary: J. Macfarlane, Esq.

Treasurer: The Hon'ble Mr. Justice Asutosh Makhopaalae ess
M.A., D.L., F.R.S.E.

Additional Secretaries :

Philological Secretary: H. D. Ross, Hsq., Ph.D.

Natural History Secretary: Captain L. Rogers, M.D., eT Se. os
IMS.

Anthropological Secretary: N. Avmaiiele Esq., B.A., D.Sc.

°

Joint Philological Secretary : Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad

Shastri, M.A.
Numismatic Secretary: H. N. Wright, Esq., 1.0.8.

Other Members of Council :

The Hon’ble Mr.- Justice F. HE. Pargiter, B.A., I.C.S._
Kumar Ramessur Maliah.

I. H. Burkill, Esq., M.A.

H. E. Kempthorne, Esq.

W. K. Dods, Esq. -

The Hon’ble Mr. A. Earle, I.C. Se on tar
Lieutenant-Colonel J. H. Tull Walsh, 1.M. Ss. me
H. H. Hayden, Esq., B.A., F.G.S.

E. Thornton, Esq., F.R.1.B.A. .

Pandit Satis Chandra Vidyabhisana, M.A.

H. E. Stapleton, Esq., B.A.,BSe. ae

PRINCIPAL PUBLICATIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

Asiatic Researches, Vols. I—XX and Index, 1788—1839.

Proceedings, 1865—1904, (now es aoe with Journal).

Memoirs, Vol. 1, etc., 1905, etc.

Journal, Vols. 1—73, 1832—1904.

Journal and Proceedings, [N. §.] Vol. 1, etc., 1905, etc.

Centenary Review, 1784—1883.

Bibliotheca Indica, 1848, ete.

A complete list of publications sold by the Society can be
obtained by application to the Honorary Secretary, 57, Park Street,
Calcutta.

PRIVILEGES OF ORDINARY MEMBERS.

(2) To be present and vote at all General Meetings which
are held on the first Wednesday in each month, except
in September and October. —

(b) To propose and second candidates for Ordinary Member-
ship.

(c) To introduce visitors at the Ordinary General Meetings
and to the grounds and public rooms of the Society
during the hours when they are open to members.

(d) To have personal access to the Library and other public
rooms of the Society, and to examine its collections.

(e) To take out books, plates and manuscripts from the
Library.

(f) To receive gratis, copies of the Journal and Proceedings
and Memoirs of the Society.

(g) To fill any office in the Society on being duly elected
thereto,

p CONTENTS.

-—- f— ‘

Page,

Proceedings for November, 1905... ees roy os
Dignaga and his Pramana-Samuccaya,—By Satis CHANDRA

VipyApuusaNa, M.A. Ls “ ners

Vidyapatt Thakur.—By G. A. Grizrson, C.I.H., Pu.D. » 228
Same remarks on the Geology of the Gangetic 1

H. Motony, 1.C.S. (With one plate.) a . 230

The Nafdisu-l-Maasir.— By H. Buveripes, 1.C.8. (retired) ... 236

Notes on the Species, External Characters and Habits of the
Dugong —By N. Annanpauz, D.Sc. (With three plates.) 238

Hedyotis sisaparensis, a hitherto undescribed Indian species.—
By Captain A..T. Gace, I.M.S8. Aah vas D4dy

JOURNAL & PROCEEDINGS
ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENCAL.
| Vol. G No 10. |

1905.

CALCUTTA : w
PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS, AND PUBLISHED BY THR
ASIATIC socinTy, 57, PARK STREET,
1906.
Issued 28th February, 1906.

List of Officers and Members of Council
OF THE
ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL

For the year 1905.

President :

His Honour Sir A. H. L. Fraser, M.A., LL.D., K.C.S.1.

Vice-Presidents :
The Hon’ble Mr. Justice Asutosh eee M.A., D.L.,
F.R.S.E.
T. H. Holland, Esq., F.G.8., F-R.S.
C. W. McMinn, Esq., I.C.8., (vetired.)

3

Secretary and Treasurer :

Honorary General Secretary: J. Macfarlane, Esq.
Treasurer: The Hon’ble Mr. Justice Asutosh .Mukhopadhyaya,
M.A., D.L., F.R.S.E.

Additional Secretaries :

Philological Secretary: EH. D. Ross, Esq., Ph.D. :

Natural History Secretary: Captain L. Rogers, M.D., B.Sc.,
IMS.

Anthropological Secretary: N. a ae Esq., B.A., D.Se.

Joint Philological Secretary : Pageevee oe Harageeal
Shastri, M.A.

Numismatic Secretary: H. N. Wright, Esq:, 1.C.S.

Other Members of Council :

The Hon'ble Mr. Justice F. H. Pargiter, B.A., L.C.S.

Kumar Ramessur Maliah.

I. H. Burkill, Esq., M.A.

H. E. Kempthorne, Esq.

W. K. Dods, Esq.

The Hon’ble Mr. A. Harle, I.C.S.

Lieutenant-Colonel J. H. Tull Walsh, I.M.S.

H. H. Hayden, Hsq., B.A., F.G.S.

E. Thornton, Esq., F.R.1.B.A.

Pandit Satis Chandra Vidyabhisana, M.A,

PiBRaRyY.

The following new books have been added to the Library
from October to December, 1905.

Annandale, Nelson, and Robinson, Herbert C. Fasciculi
Malayenses. Zoology. Part I., etc. Anthropology. Part I.,
ete. London, New York, Bombay, 1903, etc. 4°.

Presd, by Dr. N. Annandale,

Arnold, E. Vernon. Vedic Metre in its historical development.
Cambridge, 1905. 8°.

Batavia.— Department van Landboww. Het bestellen van Katoen-
zaden uit Amerika. Batavia, 1905. 8°.

Presd, oy the Botanic Institute of Buitenzorg.
Bell, C. A. Manual of Colloquial Tibetan. Calcutta, 1905. 8°.
Beneat Disrrict Gaznrrners, Calcutia, 1905, etc. 8°,
Presd. by the Government of Benyal.
Baracavapeira, Die Bhagavadgita aus dem Sanskrit iibersetzt
mit einer Hinleitung tiber ihre urspriingliche Gestalt, ihre
Lehren und ihr Alter von Richard Garbe.
Leipzig, 1905. 8°.
Blochet, E. Etudes de grammaire pehlvie. Paris, [1902.] 8°.
Bowrey, Thomas. A Geographical Account of Countries round

the Bay of Bengal, 1669 to 1679,...Edited by Lt.-Col, Sir
R. C. Temple. Cambridge, 1904, 8°.

Hakluyt Societys Publications, 2nd Series, No. XII.
Presd. by Government of India, Home Department.

Bradley-Birt, F. B. The Story of an Indian Upland,..With...
illustrations and a map, etc. London, 1905, 8°.

Butterworth, Alan, and Venugopaul Chetty, V. A Collection

of the Inscriptions on Copper-plates and Stones in the Nellore
District. 3 pts. Madras, 1905. 8°.

Presd. by the Govt, of Madras.

See

2

Caspari. A Grammar of the Arabic Language, translated from
the German...and edited...by W. Wright. Third edition,
revised by W. Robertson Smith and M. J. de Goeje. 2 vols.
Cambridge, 1898. 8°.

Canapa.—Dept of the Interior, Statistics of the Dominion of
Canada. [With resource map.| [ Ottawa, 1905.] 8°.

Presd. by Dept. of the Interior, Canada.

Collins, F. Howard. Author and Printer. A guide for authors,
editors, printers, correctors of the press, compositors, and
typists...Second impression. London, 1905. 8°.

Copeland, Edwin Bingham. I. The Polypodiacew of the Philip-
pine Islands. II. New species of Hdible Philippine Fungi.
Manila, 1905. 8°.

Bureau of Govt. Laboratories, Manila, No. 28.

Presd. by the Bureau.

Crawley, Ernest. The Mystic Rose. A study of primitive
marriage. London, 1902. 8.

Dingelstedt, Victor. Hast and West. [Hdinburgh, 1905.| 8°.
Reprinted from the Scottish Geoyraphical Magazine.

Presd. by the Author.

Doughty, Charles M. Travels in Arabia Deserta. 2 vols.
Cambridge, 1888. 8°.

Elphinstone, Mountstuart. The History of India. The Hindu
and Mahometan periods...With notes and additions by
E. B. Cowell...Ninth Edition. London, 1905. 8°.

Foucher, A. Etude sur V’iconographie bouddhique de l'Inde
d’aprés des textes inédits. Paris, 1905. 8°.

Bibliothéque de Ecole des Hautes études. Sciences Religieuses.
Vol. 13, pt. 2.

Giles, Herbert A. An Introduction to the history of Chinese
Pictorial Art... With illustrations, Shanghai, 1905. 8°.

Gibson, Margaret Dunlop. Catalogue of the Arabic MSS. in the
Convent of S. Catharine on Mount Sinai. London, 1894. 8°.

Studia Sinaitica, No, UT.

3
Glade, Alfredo F. Proyecto de una estacion de segunda clase.
La Plata, 1904. 8°.
Presd. by the Universidad de La Plata.

Glaser, Eduard. Suwa ‘und al—‘UzzA und die altjemenischen
Inschriften. Miinchen, 1905. 8°.

Presd. by the Author.

Gonzalez, Carlos. Proyecto de puente de mamposteria.
Ta Plata, 1904. 8°.

Presd. by the Universidad de La Plata.

Hertz, Gerald Berkeley. The Old Colonial System.
Manchester, 1905. 8°.

Publications of the University of Manchester Historical Series, No. 3.
Presd. by the University.

Hosten, H. Dolmens et Cromlechs dans les Palnis.
Bruzelles, 1905. 8°.

Hatrait des “ Missions Belyes de la Compagnie de Jésus.”
Presd. by the Author.

Jong, 8. W. K. de. Het Drogen van Cocabladeren.
Batavia, 1905. 8°.

Presd. by the Botanic Institute of Buitenzery.

Krause, Arthur. Die Pariavélker der Gegenwart. Inaugural—
Dissertation, etc. Levpzig, 1903. 8°.

Lawson, S87 Charles. Memories of Madras. London, 1905. 8°.

Lepesqueur, Parfait-Charles. La France et le Siam.
Paris, 1897. 8°.

Presd. by the Société Acadenrque Indo-Chinoise de France.

Le Strange, G. ‘The Lands of the Eastern caliphate, Mesopo-
tamia, Persia, and Central Asia from the Moslem Conquest to
the time of Timur. Cambridge, 1905. 8°.

Cambridge Geographical Series.

Lewis, Gilbert N. I. Autocatalytic decomposition of Silver
Oxide. If. Hydration in Solution. Manila, 1905, 8°.

Bureau of Govt. Laboratories, Manila, No, 30.

Presd. by the Bureau.

id
an
abe
i
rt

4

Lokacharya, Sri, and Varadaguru, S77, Tattvasekhara. By
Sri Lokacharya. Edited by K. K.V. S. A. Ramanuja Das
of Kanchi and Tattvatrayachulukasangraha by Kumara
Vedantacharya Sri Varadaguru, edited by Acharya Bhatta-
nathaswamy. Benares, 1905. 8°.

Benares Sanskrit Series, No. 106.

Lonnberg, Hinar. Peter Artedi. A bi-centenary memoir written —
on behalf of the Swedish Royal Academy of Science...
Translated by W. KE. Harlock. Upsala, Stockholm, 1905. 8°.

Presd. by the Academy.

Low, Lyman H. Collections Lyman H. Low, Jac N. van Gelder
et d’un amateur anglais. Monnaies et médailles de l’Améri-
que, de l’Asie, de l'Afrique et de l’Australie.
| Amsterdam, 1905.] 8°.

Presd. by Herr J. Schulman.

Malcolm, Napier. Five years in a Persian Town.
London, 1905. 8°.

Miguez, Adrian Pereyra. Proyecto de edificio para facultad de
ingenieria. La Plata, 1904. 8°.

Presd. by the Universidad de La Plata.

Mirza Huseyn, of Humudén. The Tarikh-i-Jadid or new History
of Mirza ‘Ali Muhammad the Bab...Translated from the
Persian...by Edward G. Browne. Cambridge, 1893. 8°.

Mitra, Sarat Chandra. A few Bihari folklore parallels. The
Singing games of Bihar. The Identity between a Panjabi
and a Bengali accumulation droll. Note on a new type of
Indian folktales, etc. Bombay, 1903. 8°.

From the Journal of the Anthropological Society of Bombay.

. An ancient Indian drama of the tenth century A.D.
[ Calcutta, 1903.] 8°.

———. Bihari life in Bihari nursery rhymes.
[ Calcutta, 1903.] 8°.
——_——. Bihari life in Bihari riddles. [Bombay, 1905.] 8°,
From the Journal of the Anthropological Society of Bombay.

— -——, Further notes on Rain-compelling and Rain-stopping
Charms. [Bombay, 1905.| 8°.

From the Journal of the Anthropological Society of Bombay,

hh ai

Mitra, Sarat Chandra. Note on Clay-eating as a racial charac-
teristic. [| Bombay, 1905.1 8°.

From the Journal of the Anthropological Soctety of Bombay.

—. Note on the Egyptian origin of an incident in Indian
folktales. [Bombay, 1905.] 8°.

From the Journal of the Anthropological Society of Bombay.

On the Bihari custom of placing expiations on the
crossways. [Calcutta 1905.] 8°.

Sun-worship in Bihar. [ Calcutta, 1904.] 8°.
Presd. by the Author.

Muhammad B. al-Hasan B. Isfandiyar. An abridged transla-
tion of the History of Tabaristan..;based on the India Office
MS. compared with two MSS. in the British Museum, by
Edward G. Browne. London, 1905. 8°.

EH. J. W. Gibb Memorial, Vol, I.
-Presd. by Mr. Bernard Quaritch.

Murray, John. A Handbook for Travellers in India, Burma and
Ceylon... Fifth edition. London, 1905, 8°.

Nevill, H. R. Sitapur. Allahabad, 1905. 8°.
District Gazetteers of the United Provinces of Agra and Oudh,
Vol. XL.
Presd. by the Government of India, Home Department.
Noset Founpation. Code of statutes. stockholm, 1901. 8°.

Presd. by Kungl. Vetenskaps- Akademie.

Rapson, E. J. Indian coins and seals. Pt. VI.
{ London, 1905.] 8°.

From the Journal of the Royal Asiutic Society, October 1905.

. On the alphabet of the Kharosthé documents.
Paris, 1905. 8°.
Lxtrait du tome Ides Actes du X1Ve Congrés International

des Orientalistes.
Presd by the Author.

Ramsay, W. Decomposition of water by radium.
Upsala, Stockholm. 1905, 8°.

Meddelanden friin K, Vetenskupsakademiens Nobelinstitut Band L.,
No, 1.
Presd. by the Academy.

4

Vedavyasa, aTEgaag [|The Vayupuranam....Edited by Pandits
of the Anandasrama Sabha.| Poona, 1905. 8°.
Anandasrama Sanskrit Series, No. 49.

Vinogradoff, P. The Growth of the Manor. London, 1905. 8°.

Warren, William F, Problems still unsolved in Indo-Aryan
Cosmology. [New Haven,| 1905. 8°.

From the Journal of the American Oriental Society, Vol. 26.
Presd. by the Author.

Wilken, Dr. G.. A. Ueber das Haaropfer und einige andere
Trauergebrauche bei den Volkern Indonesien’s, 2 Heft.
Amsterdam, 1886, 87. 8°.

Separatabdruck von der “ Revue Coloniale Internationale,”

Wilkinson, R. J. Malay-Hnglish Dictionary.
Singapore, 1901-03. 4°.

Withers, John William. Euclid’s parallel Postulate: its nature,
validity, and place in geometrical systems.
Chicago, 1905. 8°.

Presd. by the Yale Unversity.

EEE OS OeeetSOereeeeeeeeeeem

iene ee rok Ee tna hehe
| Nae be A Krichel

\
; 3
i ee = fp! 1
f tn wtp Sr ky
5 a
‘ * Me ‘
\
4 i
&
‘ Me
“ Ns : ,
Ag <
* hi
nas
‘ i ”
ou
s { ere

PRINCIPAL PUBLICATIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

Asiatic Researches, Vols. I—XX and Index, 1788—1839.
Proceedings, 1865—1904, (now amalgamated with Journal).
Memoirs, Vol. 1, ete., 1905, etc.

Journal, Vols. 1—73, 1832—1904."

Journal and Proceedings, [N. §.] Vol. 1, etc., 1905, ete.
Centenary Review, 1784—1883.

Bibliotheca Indica, 1848, ete.

A complete list of publications sold by the Society can be
btained by application to the Honorary Secretary, 57, Park Street,
alcutta.

PRIVILEGES OF ORDINARY MEMBERS.

(a) To be present and vote at all General Meetings which
are held on the first Wednesday in each month, except
in September and October.

(6) To propose and second candidates for Ordinary Member-

ship.

(¢) To introduce visitors at the Ordinary General Meetings _
and to the grounds and public rooms of the Society
during the hours when they are open to members.

(d) To have personal access to the Library and other public
rooms of the Society, and to examine its collections.

_(e) To take out books, plates and manuscripts from the
Library.

(f) To receive gratis, copies of the Jowrnal and Proceedings
and Memoirs of the Society.

(gy) To fill any office in the Society on being duly elected
thereto.

= Heanteenation a ihe Nynye Sires —By

Saster Bas os

Se note on the ee of ae and. ee
PRASAD Sasrer. aps a

Formation of - New Castes.—By R. Bury, AG: S.

Ascaris halicoris Barro. —By Dr. V. Lixsrow.
by N. Annanpate. (With one plate. )

Numismatic Supplement VI.

ANS
'

Tipe

iu mi